Add pregenerated documentation for as(1) and ld(1)

5 files changed, 20604 insertions, 0 deletions

diff --git a/contrib/binutils/bfd/doc/bfdver.texi b/contrib/binutils/bfd/doc/bfdver.texi
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..eaf58f4
--- /dev/null
+++ b/contrib/binutils/bfd/doc/bfdver.texi
@@ -0,0 +1 @@
+@set VERSION "2.17.50 [FreeBSD] 2007-07-03"
diff --git a/contrib/binutils/gas/doc/as.txt b/contrib/binutils/gas/doc/as.txt
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..91334b8
--- /dev/null
+++ b/contrib/binutils/gas/doc/as.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,13924 @@
+START-INFO-DIR-ENTRY
+* As: (as).                     The GNU assembler.
+* Gas: (as).                    The GNU assembler.
+END-INFO-DIR-ENTRY
+
+Using as
+1 Overview
+  1.1 Structure of this Manual
+  1.2 The GNU Assembler
+  1.3 Object File Formats
+  1.4 Command Line
+  1.5 Input Files
+  1.6 Output (Object) File
+  1.7 Error and Warning Messages
+2 Command-Line Options
+  2.1 Enable Listings: '-a[cdhlns]'
+  2.2 '--alternate'
+  2.3 '-D'
+  2.4 Work Faster: '-f'
+  2.5 '.include' Search Path: '-I' PATH
+  2.6 Difference Tables: '-K'
+  2.7 Include Local Symbols: '-L'
+  2.8 Configuring listing output: '--listing'
+  2.9 Assemble in MRI Compatibility Mode: '-M'
+  2.10 Dependency Tracking: '--MD'
+  2.11 Name the Object File: '-o'
+  2.12 Join Data and Text Sections: '-R'
+  2.13 Display Assembly Statistics: '--statistics'
+  2.14 Compatible Output: '--traditional-format'
+  2.15 Announce Version: '-v'
+  2.16 Control Warnings: '-W', '--warn', '--no-warn', '--fatal-warnings'
+  2.17 Generate Object File in Spite of Errors: '-Z'
+3 Syntax
+  3.1 Preprocessing
+  3.2 Whitespace
+  3.3 Comments
+  3.4 Symbols
+  3.5 Statements
+  3.6 Constants
+    3.6.1 Character Constants
+      3.6.1.1 Strings
+      3.6.1.2 Characters
+    3.6.2 Number Constants
+      3.6.2.1 Integers
+      3.6.2.2 Bignums
+      3.6.2.3 Flonums
+4 Sections and Relocation
+  4.1 Background
+  4.2 Linker Sections
+  4.3 Assembler Internal Sections
+  4.4 Sub-Sections
+  4.5 bss Section
+5 Symbols
+  5.1 Labels
+  5.2 Giving Symbols Other Values
+  5.3 Symbol Names
+  5.4 The Special Dot Symbol
+  5.5 Symbol Attributes
+    5.5.1 Value
+    5.5.2 Type
+6 Expressions
+  6.1 Empty Expressions
+  6.2 Integer Expressions
+    6.2.1 Arguments
+    6.2.2 Operators
+    6.2.3 Prefix Operator
+    6.2.4 Infix Operators
+7 Assembler Directives
+  7.1 '.abort'
+  7.2 '.align ABS-EXPR, ABS-EXPR, ABS-EXPR'
+  7.3 '.ascii "STRING"'...
+  7.4 '.asciz "STRING"'...
+  7.5 '.balign[wl] ABS-EXPR, ABS-EXPR, ABS-EXPR'
+  7.6 '.byte EXPRESSIONS'
+  7.7 '.comm SYMBOL , LENGTH '
+  7.8 '.cfi_startproc [simple]'
+  7.9 '.cfi_endproc'
+  7.10 '.cfi_personality ENCODING [, EXP]'
+  7.11 '.cfi_lsda ENCODING [, EXP]'
+  7.12 '.cfi_def_cfa REGISTER, OFFSET'
+  7.13 '.cfi_def_cfa_register REGISTER'
+  7.14 '.cfi_def_cfa_offset OFFSET'
+  7.15 '.cfi_adjust_cfa_offset OFFSET'
+  7.16 '.cfi_offset REGISTER, OFFSET'
+  7.17 '.cfi_rel_offset REGISTER, OFFSET'
+  7.18 '.cfi_register REGISTER1, REGISTER2'
+  7.19 '.cfi_restore REGISTER'
+  7.20 '.cfi_undefined REGISTER'
+  7.21 '.cfi_same_value REGISTER'
+  7.22 '.cfi_remember_state',
+  7.23 '.cfi_return_column REGISTER'
+  7.24 '.cfi_signal_frame'
+  7.25 '.cfi_window_save'
+  7.26 '.cfi_escape' EXPRESSION[, ...]
+  7.27 '.file FILENO FILENAME'
+  7.28 '.loc FILENO LINENO [COLUMN] [OPTIONS]'
+  7.29 '.loc_mark_blocks ENABLE'
+  7.30 '.data SUBSECTION'
+  7.31 '.double FLONUMS'
+  7.32 '.eject'
+  7.33 '.else'
+  7.34 '.elseif'
+  7.35 '.end'
+  7.36 '.endfunc'
+  7.37 '.endif'
+  7.38 '.equ SYMBOL, EXPRESSION'
+  7.39 '.equiv SYMBOL, EXPRESSION'
+  7.40 '.eqv SYMBOL, EXPRESSION'
+  7.41 '.err'
+  7.42 '.error "STRING"'
+  7.43 '.exitm'
+  7.44 '.extern'
+  7.45 '.fail EXPRESSION'
+  7.46 '.file STRING'
+  7.47 '.fill REPEAT , SIZE , VALUE'
+  7.48 '.float FLONUMS'
+  7.49 '.func NAME[,LABEL]'
+  7.50 '.global SYMBOL', '.globl SYMBOL'
+  7.51 '.hidden NAMES'
+  7.52 '.hword EXPRESSIONS'
+  7.53 '.ident'
+  7.54 '.if ABSOLUTE EXPRESSION'
+  7.55 '.incbin "FILE"[,SKIP[,COUNT]]'
+  7.56 '.include "FILE"'
+  7.57 '.int EXPRESSIONS'
+  7.58 '.internal NAMES'
+  7.59 '.irp SYMBOL,VALUES'...
+  7.60 '.irpc SYMBOL,VALUES'...
+  7.61 '.lcomm SYMBOL , LENGTH'
+  7.62 '.lflags'
+  7.63 '.line LINE-NUMBER'
+  7.64 '.linkonce [TYPE]'
+  7.65 '.ln LINE-NUMBER'
+  7.66 '.mri VAL'
+  7.67 '.list'
+  7.68 '.long EXPRESSIONS'
+  7.69 '.macro'
+  7.70 '.altmacro'
+  7.71 '.noaltmacro'
+  7.72 '.nolist'
+  7.73 '.octa BIGNUMS'
+  7.74 '.org NEW-LC , FILL'
+  7.75 '.p2align[wl] ABS-EXPR, ABS-EXPR, ABS-EXPR'
+  7.76 '.previous'
+  7.77 '.popsection'
+  7.78 '.print STRING'
+  7.79 '.protected NAMES'
+  7.80 '.psize LINES , COLUMNS'
+  7.81 '.purgem NAME'
+  7.82 '.pushsection NAME , SUBSECTION'
+  7.83 '.quad BIGNUMS'
+  7.84 '.reloc OFFSET, RELOC_NAME[, EXPRESSION]'
+  7.85 '.rept COUNT'
+  7.86 '.sbttl "SUBHEADING"'
+  7.87 '.section NAME'
+  7.88 '.set SYMBOL, EXPRESSION'
+  7.89 '.short EXPRESSIONS'
+  7.90 '.single FLONUMS'
+  7.91 '.size'
+  7.92 '.sleb128 EXPRESSIONS'
+  7.93 '.skip SIZE , FILL'
+  7.94 '.space SIZE , FILL'
+  7.95 '.stabd, .stabn, .stabs'
+  7.96 '.string' "STR"
+  7.97 '.struct EXPRESSION'
+  7.98 '.subsection NAME'
+  7.99 '.symver'
+  7.100 '.text SUBSECTION'
+  7.101 '.title "HEADING"'
+  7.102 '.type'
+  7.103 '.uleb128 EXPRESSIONS'
+  7.104 '.version "STRING"'
+  7.105 '.vtable_entry TABLE, OFFSET'
+  7.106 '.vtable_inherit CHILD, PARENT'
+  7.107 '.warning "STRING"'
+  7.108 '.weak NAMES'
+  7.109 '.weakref ALIAS, TARGET'
+  7.110 '.word EXPRESSIONS'
+  7.111 Deprecated Directives
+8 ARM Dependent Features
+  8.1 Options
+  8.2 Syntax
+    8.2.1 Special Characters
+    8.2.2 Register Names
+    8.2.3 ARM relocation generation
+  8.3 Floating Point
+  8.4 ARM Machine Directives
+  8.5 Opcodes
+  8.6 Mapping Symbols
+9 80386 Dependent Features
+  9.1 Options
+  9.2 AT&T Syntax versus Intel Syntax
+  9.3 Instruction Naming
+  9.4 Register Naming
+  9.5 Instruction Prefixes
+  9.6 Memory References
+  9.7 Handling of Jump Instructions
+  9.8 Floating Point
+  9.9 Intel's MMX and AMD's 3DNow! SIMD Operations
+  9.10 Writing 16-bit Code
+  9.11 AT&T Syntax bugs
+  9.12 Specifying CPU Architecture
+  9.13 Notes
+10 IA-64 Dependent Features
+  10.1 Options
+  10.2 Syntax
+    10.2.1 Special Characters
+    10.2.2 Register Names
+    10.2.3 IA-64 Processor-Status-Register (PSR) Bit Names
+  10.3 Opcodes
+11 MIPS Dependent Features
+  11.1 Assembler options
+  11.2 MIPS ECOFF object code
+  11.3 Directives for debugging information
+  11.4 Directives to override the size of symbols
+  11.5 Directives to override the ISA level
+  11.6 Directives for extending MIPS 16 bit instructions
+  11.7 Directive to mark data as an instruction
+  11.8 Directives to save and restore options
+  11.9 Directives to control generation of MIPS ASE instructions
+12 PowerPC Dependent Features
+  12.1 Options
+  12.2 PowerPC Assembler Directives
+13 SPARC Dependent Features
+  13.1 Options
+  13.2 Enforcing aligned data
+  13.3 Floating Point
+  13.4 Sparc Machine Directives
+14 Reporting Bugs
+  14.1 Have You Found a Bug?
+  14.2 How to Report Bugs
+15 Acknowledgements
+Appendix A GNU Free Documentation License
+  ADDENDUM: How to use this License for your documents
+AS Index
+Using as
+********
+
+This file is a user guide to the GNU assembler 'as' version "2.17.50
+[FreeBSD] 2007-07-03".  This version of the file describes 'as'
+configured to generate code for machine specific architectures.
+
+   This document is distributed under the terms of the GNU Free
+Documentation License.  A copy of the license is included in the section
+entitled "GNU Free Documentation License".
+
+1 Overview
+**********
+
+Here is a brief summary of how to invoke 'as'.  For details, see *note
+Command-Line Options: Invoking.
+
+     as [-a[cdhlns][=FILE]] [-alternate] [-D]
+      [-defsym SYM=VAL] [-f] [-g] [-gstabs]
+      [-gstabs+] [-gdwarf-2] [-help] [-I DIR] [-J]
+      [-K] [-L] [-listing-lhs-width=NUM]
+      [-listing-lhs-width2=NUM] [-listing-rhs-width=NUM]
+      [-listing-cont-lines=NUM] [-keep-locals] [-o
+      OBJFILE] [-R] [-reduce-memory-overheads] [-statistics]
+      [-v] [-version] [-version] [-W] [-warn]
+      [-fatal-warnings] [-w] [-x] [-Z] [@FILE]
+      [-target-help] [TARGET-OPTIONS]
+      [-|FILES ...]
+
+     _Target ARM options:_
+        [-mcpu=PROCESSOR[+EXTENSION...]]
+        [-march=ARCHITECTURE[+EXTENSION...]]
+        [-mfpu=FLOATING-POINT-FORMAT]
+        [-mfloat-abi=ABI]
+        [-meabi=VER]
+        [-mthumb]
+        [-EB|-EL]
+        [-mapcs-32|-mapcs-26|-mapcs-float|
+         -mapcs-reentrant]
+        [-mthumb-interwork] [-k]
+
+     _Target i386 options:_
+        [-32|-64] [-n]
+        [-march=CPU] [-mtune=CPU]
+
+     _Target IA-64 options:_
+        [-mconstant-gp|-mauto-pic]
+        [-milp32|-milp64|-mlp64|-mp64]
+        [-mle|mbe]
+        [-mtune=itanium1|-mtune=itanium2]
+        [-munwind-check=warning|-munwind-check=error]
+        [-mhint.b=ok|-mhint.b=warning|-mhint.b=error]
+        [-x|-xexplicit] [-xauto] [-xdebug]
+
+     _Target MIPS options:_
+        [-nocpp] [-EL] [-EB] [-O[OPTIMIZATION LEVEL]]
+        [-g[DEBUG LEVEL]] [-G NUM] [-KPIC] [-call_shared]
+        [-non_shared] [-xgot [-mvxworks-pic]
+        [-mabi=ABI] [-32] [-n32] [-64] [-mfp32] [-mgp32]
+        [-march=CPU] [-mtune=CPU] [-mips1] [-mips2]
+        [-mips3] [-mips4] [-mips5] [-mips32] [-mips32r2]
+        [-mips64] [-mips64r2]
+        [-construct-floats] [-no-construct-floats]
+        [-trap] [-no-break] [-break] [-no-trap]
+        [-mfix7000] [-mno-fix7000]
+        [-mips16] [-no-mips16]
+        [-msmartmips] [-mno-smartmips]
+        [-mips3d] [-no-mips3d]
+        [-mdmx] [-no-mdmx]
+        [-mdsp] [-mno-dsp]
+        [-mdspr2] [-mno-dspr2]
+        [-mmt] [-mno-mt]
+        [-mdebug] [-no-mdebug]
+        [-mpdr] [-mno-pdr]
+
+     _Target PowerPC options:_
+        [-mpwrx|-mpwr2|-mpwr|-m601|-mppc|-mppc32|-m603|-m604|
+         -m403|-m405|-mppc64|-m620|-mppc64bridge|-mbooke|
+         -mbooke32|-mbooke64]
+        [-mcom|-many|-maltivec] [-memb]
+        [-mregnames|-mno-regnames]
+        [-mrelocatable|-mrelocatable-lib]
+        [-mlittle|-mlittle-endian|-mbig|-mbig-endian]
+        [-msolaris|-mno-solaris]
+
+     _Target SPARC options:_
+        [-Av6|-Av7|-Av8|-Asparclet|-Asparclite
+         -Av8plus|-Av8plusa|-Av9|-Av9a]
+        [-xarch=v8plus|-xarch=v8plusa] [-bump]
+        [-32|-64]
+
+
+
+'@FILE'
+     Read command-line options from FILE.  The options read are inserted
+     in place of the original @FILE option.  If FILE does not exist, or
+     cannot be read, then the option will be treated literally, and not
+     removed.
+
+     Options in FILE are separated by whitespace.  A whitespace
+     character may be included in an option by surrounding the entire
+     option in either single or double quotes.  Any character (including
+     a backslash) may be included by prefixing the character to be
+     included with a backslash.  The FILE may itself contain additional
+     @FILE options; any such options will be processed recursively.
+
+'-a[cdhlmns]'
+     Turn on listings, in any of a variety of ways:
+
+     '-ac'
+          omit false conditionals
+
+     '-ad'
+          omit debugging directives
+
+     '-ah'
+          include high-level source
+
+     '-al'
+          include assembly
+
+     '-am'
+          include macro expansions
+
+     '-an'
+          omit forms processing
+
+     '-as'
+          include symbols
+
+     '=file'
+          set the name of the listing file
+
+     You may combine these options; for example, use '-aln' for assembly
+     listing without forms processing.  The '=file' option, if used,
+     must be the last one.  By itself, '-a' defaults to '-ahls'.
+
+'--alternate'
+     Begin in alternate macro mode.  *Note '.altmacro': Altmacro.
+
+'-D'
+     Ignored.  This option is accepted for script compatibility with
+     calls to other assemblers.
+
+'--defsym SYM=VALUE'
+     Define the symbol SYM to be VALUE before assembling the input file.
+     VALUE must be an integer constant.  As in C, a leading '0x'
+     indicates a hexadecimal value, and a leading '0' indicates an octal
+     value.  The value of the symbol can be overridden inside a source
+     file via the use of a '.set' pseudo-op.
+
+'-f'
+     "fast"--skip whitespace and comment preprocessing (assume source is
+     compiler output).
+
+'-g'
+'--gen-debug'
+     Generate debugging information for each assembler source line using
+     whichever debug format is preferred by the target.  This currently
+     means either STABS, ECOFF or DWARF2.
+
+'--gstabs'
+     Generate stabs debugging information for each assembler line.  This
+     may help debugging assembler code, if the debugger can handle it.
+
+'--gstabs+'
+     Generate stabs debugging information for each assembler line, with
+     GNU extensions that probably only gdb can handle, and that could
+     make other debuggers crash or refuse to read your program.  This
+     may help debugging assembler code.  Currently the only GNU
+     extension is the location of the current working directory at
+     assembling time.
+
+'--gdwarf-2'
+     Generate DWARF2 debugging information for each assembler line.
+     This may help debugging assembler code, if the debugger can handle
+     it.  Note--this option is only supported by some targets, not all
+     of them.
+
+'--help'
+     Print a summary of the command line options and exit.
+
+'--target-help'
+     Print a summary of all target specific options and exit.
+
+'-I DIR'
+     Add directory DIR to the search list for '.include' directives.
+
+'-J'
+     Don't warn about signed overflow.
+
+'-K'
+     This option is accepted but has no effect on the machine specific
+     family.
+
+'-L'
+'--keep-locals'
+     Keep (in the symbol table) local symbols.  These symbols start with
+     system-specific local label prefixes, typically '.L' for ELF
+     systems or 'L' for traditional a.out systems.  *Note Symbol
+     Names::.
+
+'--listing-lhs-width=NUMBER'
+     Set the maximum width, in words, of the output data column for an
+     assembler listing to NUMBER.
+
+'--listing-lhs-width2=NUMBER'
+     Set the maximum width, in words, of the output data column for
+     continuation lines in an assembler listing to NUMBER.
+
+'--listing-rhs-width=NUMBER'
+     Set the maximum width of an input source line, as displayed in a
+     listing, to NUMBER bytes.
+
+'--listing-cont-lines=NUMBER'
+     Set the maximum number of lines printed in a listing for a single
+     line of input to NUMBER + 1.
+
+'-o OBJFILE'
+     Name the object-file output from 'as' OBJFILE.
+
+'-R'
+     Fold the data section into the text section.
+
+     Set the default size of GAS's hash tables to a prime number close
+     to NUMBER.  Increasing this value can reduce the length of time it
+     takes the assembler to perform its tasks, at the expense of
+     increasing the assembler's memory requirements.  Similarly reducing
+     this value can reduce the memory requirements at the expense of
+     speed.
+
+'--reduce-memory-overheads'
+     This option reduces GAS's memory requirements, at the expense of
+     making the assembly processes slower.  Currently this switch is a
+     synonym for '--hash-size=4051', but in the future it may have other
+     effects as well.
+
+'--statistics'
+     Print the maximum space (in bytes) and total time (in seconds) used
+     by assembly.
+
+'--strip-local-absolute'
+     Remove local absolute symbols from the outgoing symbol table.
+
+'-v'
+'-version'
+     Print the 'as' version.
+
+'--version'
+     Print the 'as' version and exit.
+
+'-W'
+'--no-warn'
+     Suppress warning messages.
+
+'--fatal-warnings'
+     Treat warnings as errors.
+
+'--warn'
+     Don't suppress warning messages or treat them as errors.
+
+'-w'
+     Ignored.
+
+'-x'
+     Ignored.
+
+'-Z'
+     Generate an object file even after errors.
+
+'-- | FILES ...'
+     Standard input, or source files to assemble.
+
+   The following options are available when as is configured for the ARM
+processor family.
+
+'-mcpu=PROCESSOR[+EXTENSION...]'
+     Specify which ARM processor variant is the target.
+'-march=ARCHITECTURE[+EXTENSION...]'
+     Specify which ARM architecture variant is used by the target.
+'-mfpu=FLOATING-POINT-FORMAT'
+     Select which Floating Point architecture is the target.
+'-mfloat-abi=ABI'
+     Select which floating point ABI is in use.
+'-mthumb'
+     Enable Thumb only instruction decoding.
+'-mapcs-32 | -mapcs-26 | -mapcs-float | -mapcs-reentrant'
+     Select which procedure calling convention is in use.
+'-EB | -EL'
+     Select either big-endian (-EB) or little-endian (-EL) output.
+'-mthumb-interwork'
+     Specify that the code has been generated with interworking between
+     Thumb and ARM code in mind.
+'-k'
+     Specify that PIC code has been generated.
+
+   The following options are available when 'as' is configured for the
+SPARC architecture:
+
+'-Av6 | -Av7 | -Av8 | -Asparclet | -Asparclite'
+'-Av8plus | -Av8plusa | -Av9 | -Av9a'
+     Explicitly select a variant of the SPARC architecture.
+
+     '-Av8plus' and '-Av8plusa' select a 32 bit environment.  '-Av9' and
+     '-Av9a' select a 64 bit environment.
+
+     '-Av8plusa' and '-Av9a' enable the SPARC V9 instruction set with
+     UltraSPARC extensions.
+
+'-xarch=v8plus | -xarch=v8plusa'
+     For compatibility with the Solaris v9 assembler.  These options are
+     equivalent to -Av8plus and -Av8plusa, respectively.
+
+'-bump'
+     Warn when the assembler switches to another architecture.
+
+   The following options are available when as is configured for a MIPS
+processor.
+
+'-G NUM'
+     This option sets the largest size of an object that can be
+     referenced implicitly with the 'gp' register.  It is only accepted
+     for targets that use ECOFF format, such as a DECstation running
+     Ultrix.  The default value is 8.
+
+'-EB'
+     Generate "big endian" format output.
+
+'-EL'
+     Generate "little endian" format output.
+
+'-mips1'
+'-mips2'
+'-mips3'
+'-mips4'
+'-mips5'
+'-mips32'
+'-mips32r2'
+'-mips64'
+'-mips64r2'
+     Generate code for a particular MIPS Instruction Set Architecture
+     level.  '-mips1' is an alias for '-march=r3000', '-mips2' is an
+     alias for '-march=r6000', '-mips3' is an alias for '-march=r4000'
+     and '-mips4' is an alias for '-march=r8000'.  '-mips5', '-mips32',
+     '-mips32r2', '-mips64', and '-mips64r2' correspond to generic 'MIPS
+     V', 'MIPS32', 'MIPS32 Release 2', 'MIPS64', and 'MIPS64 Release 2'
+     ISA processors, respectively.
+
+'-march=CPU'
+     Generate code for a particular MIPS cpu.
+
+'-mtune=CPU'
+     Schedule and tune for a particular MIPS cpu.
+
+'-mfix7000'
+'-mno-fix7000'
+     Cause nops to be inserted if the read of the destination register
+     of an mfhi or mflo instruction occurs in the following two
+     instructions.
+
+'-mdebug'
+'-no-mdebug'
+     Cause stabs-style debugging output to go into an ECOFF-style
+     .mdebug section instead of the standard ELF .stabs sections.
+
+'-mpdr'
+'-mno-pdr'
+     Control generation of '.pdr' sections.
+
+'-mgp32'
+'-mfp32'
+     The register sizes are normally inferred from the ISA and ABI, but
+     these flags force a certain group of registers to be treated as 32
+     bits wide at all times.  '-mgp32' controls the size of
+     general-purpose registers and '-mfp32' controls the size of
+     floating-point registers.
+
+'-mips16'
+'-no-mips16'
+     Generate code for the MIPS 16 processor.  This is equivalent to
+     putting '.set mips16' at the start of the assembly file.
+     '-no-mips16' turns off this option.
+
+'-msmartmips'
+'-mno-smartmips'
+     Enables the SmartMIPS extension to the MIPS32 instruction set.
+     This is equivalent to putting '.set smartmips' at the start of the
+     assembly file.  '-mno-smartmips' turns off this option.
+
+'-mips3d'
+'-no-mips3d'
+     Generate code for the MIPS-3D Application Specific Extension.  This
+     tells the assembler to accept MIPS-3D instructions.  '-no-mips3d'
+     turns off this option.
+
+'-mdmx'
+'-no-mdmx'
+     Generate code for the MDMX Application Specific Extension.  This
+     tells the assembler to accept MDMX instructions.  '-no-mdmx' turns
+     off this option.
+
+'-mdsp'
+'-mno-dsp'
+     Generate code for the DSP Release 1 Application Specific Extension.
+     This tells the assembler to accept DSP Release 1 instructions.
+     '-mno-dsp' turns off this option.
+
+'-mdspr2'
+'-mno-dspr2'
+     Generate code for the DSP Release 2 Application Specific Extension.
+     This option implies -mdsp.  This tells the assembler to accept DSP
+     Release 2 instructions.  '-mno-dspr2' turns off this option.
+
+'-mmt'
+'-mno-mt'
+     Generate code for the MT Application Specific Extension.  This
+     tells the assembler to accept MT instructions.  '-mno-mt' turns off
+     this option.
+
+'--construct-floats'
+'--no-construct-floats'
+     The '--no-construct-floats' option disables the construction of
+     double width floating point constants by loading the two halves of
+     the value into the two single width floating point registers that
+     make up the double width register.  By default '--construct-floats'
+     is selected, allowing construction of these floating point
+     constants.
+
+'--emulation=NAME'
+     This option causes 'as' to emulate 'as' configured for some other
+     target, in all respects, including output format (choosing between
+     ELF and ECOFF only), handling of pseudo-opcodes which may generate
+     debugging information or store symbol table information, and
+     default endianness.  The available configuration names are:
+     'mipsecoff', 'mipself', 'mipslecoff', 'mipsbecoff', 'mipslelf',
+     'mipsbelf'.  The first two do not alter the default endianness from
+     that of the primary target for which the assembler was configured;
+     the others change the default to little- or big-endian as indicated
+     by the 'b' or 'l' in the name.  Using '-EB' or '-EL' will override
+     the endianness selection in any case.
+
+     This option is currently supported only when the primary target
+     'as' is configured for is a MIPS ELF or ECOFF target.  Furthermore,
+     the primary target or others specified with '--enable-targets=...'
+     at configuration time must include support for the other format, if
+     both are to be available.  For example, the Irix 5 configuration
+     includes support for both.
+
+     Eventually, this option will support more configurations, with more
+     fine-grained control over the assembler's behavior, and will be
+     supported for more processors.
+
+'-nocpp'
+     'as' ignores this option.  It is accepted for compatibility with
+     the native tools.
+
+'--trap'
+'--no-trap'
+'--break'
+'--no-break'
+     Control how to deal with multiplication overflow and division by
+     zero.  '--trap' or '--no-break' (which are synonyms) take a trap
+     exception (and only work for Instruction Set Architecture level 2
+     and higher); '--break' or '--no-trap' (also synonyms, and the
+     default) take a break exception.
+
+'-n'
+     When this option is used, 'as' will issue a warning every time it
+     generates a nop instruction from a macro.
+
+1.1 Structure of this Manual
+============================
+
+This manual is intended to describe what you need to know to use GNU
+'as'.  We cover the syntax expected in source files, including notation
+for symbols, constants, and expressions; the directives that 'as'
+understands; and of course how to invoke 'as'.
+
+   We also cover special features in the machine specific configuration
+of 'as', including assembler directives.
+
+   On the other hand, this manual is _not_ intended as an introduction
+to programming in assembly language--let alone programming in general!
+In a similar vein, we make no attempt to introduce the machine
+architecture; we do _not_ describe the instruction set, standard
+mnemonics, registers or addressing modes that are standard to a
+particular architecture.
+
+1.2 The GNU Assembler
+=====================
+
+GNU 'as' is really a family of assemblers.  This manual describes 'as',
+a member of that family which is configured for the machine specific
+architectures.  If you use (or have used) the GNU assembler on one
+architecture, you should find a fairly similar environment when you use
+it on another architecture.  Each version has much in common with the
+others, including object file formats, most assembler directives (often
+called "pseudo-ops") and assembler syntax.
+
+   'as' is primarily intended to assemble the output of the GNU C
+compiler 'gcc' for use by the linker 'ld'.  Nevertheless, we've tried to
+make 'as' assemble correctly everything that other assemblers for the
+same machine would assemble.
+
+   Unlike older assemblers, 'as' is designed to assemble a source
+program in one pass of the source file.  This has a subtle impact on the
+'.org' directive (*note '.org': Org.).
+
+1.3 Object File Formats
+=======================
+
+The GNU assembler can be configured to produce several alternative
+object file formats.  For the most part, this does not affect how you
+write assembly language programs; but directives for debugging symbols
+are typically different in different file formats.  *Note Symbol
+Attributes: Symbol Attributes.  For the machine specific target, 'as' is
+configured to produce ELF format object files.
+
+1.4 Command Line
+================
+
+After the program name 'as', the command line may contain options and
+file names.  Options may appear in any order, and may be before, after,
+or between file names.  The order of file names is significant.
+
+   '--' (two hyphens) by itself names the standard input file
+explicitly, as one of the files for 'as' to assemble.
+
+   Except for '--' any command line argument that begins with a hyphen
+('-') is an option.  Each option changes the behavior of 'as'.  No
+option changes the way another option works.  An option is a '-'
+followed by one or more letters; the case of the letter is important.
+All options are optional.
+
+   Some options expect exactly one file name to follow them.  The file
+name may either immediately follow the option's letter (compatible with
+older assemblers) or it may be the next command argument (GNU standard).
+These two command lines are equivalent:
+
+     as -o my-object-file.o mumble.s
+     as -omy-object-file.o mumble.s
+
+1.5 Input Files
+===============
+
+We use the phrase "source program", abbreviated "source", to describe
+the program input to one run of 'as'.  The program may be in one or more
+files; how the source is partitioned into files doesn't change the
+meaning of the source.
+
+   The source program is a concatenation of the text in all the files,
+in the order specified.
+
+   Each time you run 'as' it assembles exactly one source program.  The
+source program is made up of one or more files.  (The standard input is
+also a file.)
+
+   You give 'as' a command line that has zero or more input file names.
+The input files are read (from left file name to right).  A command line
+argument (in any position) that has no special meaning is taken to be an
+input file name.
+
+   If you give 'as' no file names it attempts to read one input file
+from the 'as' standard input, which is normally your terminal.  You may
+have to type <ctl-D> to tell 'as' there is no more program to assemble.
+
+   Use '--' if you need to explicitly name the standard input file in
+your command line.
+
+   If the source is empty, 'as' produces a small, empty object file.
+
+Filenames and Line-numbers
+--------------------------
+
+There are two ways of locating a line in the input file (or files) and
+either may be used in reporting error messages.  One way refers to a
+line number in a physical file; the other refers to a line number in a
+"logical" file.  *Note Error and Warning Messages: Errors.
+
+   "Physical files" are those files named in the command line given to
+'as'.
+
+   "Logical files" are simply names declared explicitly by assembler
+directives; they bear no relation to physical files.  Logical file names
+help error messages reflect the original source file, when 'as' source
+is itself synthesized from other files.  'as' understands the '#'
+directives emitted by the 'gcc' preprocessor.  See also *note '.file':
+File.
+
+1.6 Output (Object) File
+========================
+
+Every time you run 'as' it produces an output file, which is your
+assembly language program translated into numbers.  This file is the
+object file.  Its default name is 'a.out'.  You can give it another name
+by using the '-o' option.  Conventionally, object file names end with
+'.o'.  The default name is used for historical reasons: older assemblers
+were capable of assembling self-contained programs directly into a
+runnable program.  (For some formats, this isn't currently possible, but
+it can be done for the 'a.out' format.)
+
+   The object file is meant for input to the linker 'ld'.  It contains
+assembled program code, information to help 'ld' integrate the assembled
+program into a runnable file, and (optionally) symbolic information for
+the debugger.
+
+1.7 Error and Warning Messages
+==============================
+
+'as' may write warnings and error messages to the standard error file
+(usually your terminal).  This should not happen when a compiler runs
+'as' automatically.  Warnings report an assumption made so that 'as'
+could keep assembling a flawed program; errors report a grave problem
+that stops the assembly.
+
+   Warning messages have the format
+
+     file_name:NNN:Warning Message Text
+
+(where NNN is a line number).  If a logical file name has been given
+(*note '.file': File.) it is used for the filename, otherwise the name
+of the current input file is used.  If a logical line number was given
+then it is used to calculate the number printed, otherwise the actual
+line in the current source file is printed.  The message text is
+intended to be self explanatory (in the grand Unix tradition).
+
+   Error messages have the format
+     file_name:NNN:FATAL:Error Message Text
+   The file name and line number are derived as for warning messages.
+The actual message text may be rather less explanatory because many of
+them aren't supposed to happen.
+
+2 Command-Line Options
+**********************
+
+This chapter describes command-line options available in _all_ versions
+of the GNU assembler; see *note Machine Dependencies::, for options
+specific to the machine specific target.
+
+   If you are invoking 'as' via the GNU C compiler, you can use the
+'-Wa' option to pass arguments through to the assembler.  The assembler
+arguments must be separated from each other (and the '-Wa') by commas.
+For example:
+
+     gcc -c -g -O -Wa,-alh,-L file.c
+
+This passes two options to the assembler: '-alh' (emit a listing to
+standard output with high-level and assembly source) and '-L' (retain
+local symbols in the symbol table).
+
+   Usually you do not need to use this '-Wa' mechanism, since many
+compiler command-line options are automatically passed to the assembler
+by the compiler.  (You can call the GNU compiler driver with the '-v'
+option to see precisely what options it passes to each compilation pass,
+including the assembler.)
+
+2.1 Enable Listings: '-a[cdhlns]'
+=================================
+
+These options enable listing output from the assembler.  By itself, '-a'
+requests high-level, assembly, and symbols listing.  You can use other
+letters to select specific options for the list: '-ah' requests a
+high-level language listing, '-al' requests an output-program assembly
+listing, and '-as' requests a symbol table listing.  High-level listings
+require that a compiler debugging option like '-g' be used, and that
+assembly listings ('-al') be requested also.
+
+   Use the '-ac' option to omit false conditionals from a listing.  Any
+lines which are not assembled because of a false '.if' (or '.ifdef', or
+any other conditional), or a true '.if' followed by an '.else', will be
+omitted from the listing.
+
+   Use the '-ad' option to omit debugging directives from the listing.
+
+   Once you have specified one of these options, you can further control
+listing output and its appearance using the directives '.list',
+'.nolist', '.psize', '.eject', '.title', and '.sbttl'.  The '-an' option
+turns off all forms processing.  If you do not request listing output
+with one of the '-a' options, the listing-control directives have no
+effect.
+
+   The letters after '-a' may be combined into one option, _e.g._,
+'-aln'.
+
+   Note if the assembler source is coming from the standard input (e.g.,
+because it is being created by 'gcc' and the '-pipe' command line switch
+is being used) then the listing will not contain any comments or
+preprocessor directives.  This is because the listing code buffers input
+source lines from stdin only after they have been preprocessed by the
+assembler.  This reduces memory usage and makes the code more efficient.
+
+2.2 '--alternate'
+=================
+
+Begin in alternate macro mode, see *note '.altmacro': Altmacro.
+
+2.3 '-D'
+========
+
+This option has no effect whatsoever, but it is accepted to make it more
+likely that scripts written for other assemblers also work with 'as'.
+
+2.4 Work Faster: '-f'
+=====================
+
+'-f' should only be used when assembling programs written by a (trusted)
+compiler.  '-f' stops the assembler from doing whitespace and comment
+preprocessing on the input file(s) before assembling them.  *Note
+Preprocessing: Preprocessing.
+
+     _Warning:_ if you use '-f' when the files actually need to be
+     preprocessed (if they contain comments, for example), 'as' does not
+     work correctly.
+
+2.5 '.include' Search Path: '-I' PATH
+=====================================
+
+Use this option to add a PATH to the list of directories 'as' searches
+for files specified in '.include' directives (*note '.include':
+Include.).  You may use '-I' as many times as necessary to include a
+variety of paths.  The current working directory is always searched
+first; after that, 'as' searches any '-I' directories in the same order
+as they were specified (left to right) on the command line.
+
+2.6 Difference Tables: '-K'
+===========================
+
+On the machine specific family, this option is allowed, but has no
+effect.  It is permitted for compatibility with the GNU assembler on
+other platforms, where it can be used to warn when the assembler alters
+the machine code generated for '.word' directives in difference tables.
+The machine specific family does not have the addressing limitations
+that sometimes lead to this alteration on other platforms.
+
+2.7 Include Local Symbols: '-L'
+===============================
+
+Symbols beginning with system-specific local label prefixes, typically
+'.L' for ELF systems or 'L' for traditional a.out systems, are called
+"local symbols".  *Note Symbol Names::.  Normally you do not see such
+symbols when debugging, because they are intended for the use of
+programs (like compilers) that compose assembler programs, not for your
+notice.  Normally both 'as' and 'ld' discard such symbols, so you do not
+normally debug with them.
+
+   This option tells 'as' to retain those local symbols in the object
+file.  Usually if you do this you also tell the linker 'ld' to preserve
+those symbols.
+
+2.8 Configuring listing output: '--listing'
+===========================================
+
+The listing feature of the assembler can be enabled via the command line
+switch '-a' (*note a::).  This feature combines the input source file(s)
+with a hex dump of the corresponding locations in the output object
+file, and displays them as a listing file.  The format of this listing
+can be controlled by directives inside the assembler source (i.e.,
+'.list' (*note List::), '.title' (*note Title::), '.sbttl' (*note
+Sbttl::), '.psize' (*note Psize::), and '.eject' (*note Eject::) and
+also by the following switches:
+
+'--listing-lhs-width='number''
+     Sets the maximum width, in words, of the first line of the hex byte
+     dump.  This dump appears on the left hand side of the listing
+     output.
+
+'--listing-lhs-width2='number''
+     Sets the maximum width, in words, of any further lines of the hex
+     byte dump for a given input source line.  If this value is not
+     specified, it defaults to being the same as the value specified for
+     '--listing-lhs-width'.  If neither switch is used the default is to
+     one.
+
+'--listing-rhs-width='number''
+     Sets the maximum width, in characters, of the source line that is
+     displayed alongside the hex dump.  The default value for this
+     parameter is 100.  The source line is displayed on the right hand
+     side of the listing output.
+
+'--listing-cont-lines='number''
+     Sets the maximum number of continuation lines of hex dump that will
+     be displayed for a given single line of source input.  The default
+     value is 4.
+
+2.9 Assemble in MRI Compatibility Mode: '-M'
+============================================
+
+The '-M' or '--mri' option selects MRI compatibility mode.  This changes
+the syntax and pseudo-op handling of 'as' to make it compatible with the
+'ASM68K' or the 'ASM960' (depending upon the configured target)
+assembler from Microtec Research.  The exact nature of the MRI syntax
+will not be documented here; see the MRI manuals for more information.
+Note in particular that the handling of macros and macro arguments is
+somewhat different.  The purpose of this option is to permit assembling
+existing MRI assembler code using 'as'.
+
+   The MRI compatibility is not complete.  Certain operations of the MRI
+assembler depend upon its object file format, and can not be supported
+using other object file formats.  Supporting these would require
+enhancing each object file format individually.  These are:
+
+   * global symbols in common section
+
+     The m68k MRI assembler supports common sections which are merged by
+     the linker.  Other object file formats do not support this.  'as'
+     handles common sections by treating them as a single common symbol.
+     It permits local symbols to be defined within a common section, but
+     it can not support global symbols, since it has no way to describe
+     them.
+
+   * complex relocations
+
+     The MRI assemblers support relocations against a negated section
+     address, and relocations which combine the start addresses of two
+     or more sections.  These are not support by other object file
+     formats.
+
+   * 'END' pseudo-op specifying start address
+
+     The MRI 'END' pseudo-op permits the specification of a start
+     address.  This is not supported by other object file formats.  The
+     start address may instead be specified using the '-e' option to the
+     linker, or in a linker script.
+
+   * 'IDNT', '.ident' and 'NAME' pseudo-ops
+
+     The MRI 'IDNT', '.ident' and 'NAME' pseudo-ops assign a module name
+     to the output file.  This is not supported by other object file
+     formats.
+
+   * 'ORG' pseudo-op
+
+     The m68k MRI 'ORG' pseudo-op begins an absolute section at a given
+     address.  This differs from the usual 'as' '.org' pseudo-op, which
+     changes the location within the current section.  Absolute sections
+     are not supported by other object file formats.  The address of a
+     section may be assigned within a linker script.
+
+   There are some other features of the MRI assembler which are not
+supported by 'as', typically either because they are difficult or
+because they seem of little consequence.  Some of these may be supported
+in future releases.
+
+   * EBCDIC strings
+
+     EBCDIC strings are not supported.
+
+   * packed binary coded decimal
+
+     Packed binary coded decimal is not supported.  This means that the
+     'DC.P' and 'DCB.P' pseudo-ops are not supported.
+
+   * 'FEQU' pseudo-op
+
+     The m68k 'FEQU' pseudo-op is not supported.
+
+   * 'NOOBJ' pseudo-op
+
+     The m68k 'NOOBJ' pseudo-op is not supported.
+
+   * 'OPT' branch control options
+
+     The m68k 'OPT' branch control options--'B', 'BRS', 'BRB', 'BRL',
+     and 'BRW'--are ignored.  'as' automatically relaxes all branches,
+     whether forward or backward, to an appropriate size, so these
+     options serve no purpose.
+
+   * 'OPT' list control options
+
+     The following m68k 'OPT' list control options are ignored: 'C',
+     'CEX', 'CL', 'CRE', 'E', 'G', 'I', 'M', 'MEX', 'MC', 'MD', 'X'.
+
+   * other 'OPT' options
+
+     The following m68k 'OPT' options are ignored: 'NEST', 'O', 'OLD',
+     'OP', 'P', 'PCO', 'PCR', 'PCS', 'R'.
+
+   * 'OPT' 'D' option is default
+
+     The m68k 'OPT' 'D' option is the default, unlike the MRI assembler.
+     'OPT NOD' may be used to turn it off.
+
+   * 'XREF' pseudo-op.
+
+     The m68k 'XREF' pseudo-op is ignored.
+
+   * '.debug' pseudo-op
+
+     The i960 '.debug' pseudo-op is not supported.
+
+   * '.extended' pseudo-op
+
+     The i960 '.extended' pseudo-op is not supported.
+
+   * '.list' pseudo-op.
+
+     The various options of the i960 '.list' pseudo-op are not
+     supported.
+
+   * '.optimize' pseudo-op
+
+     The i960 '.optimize' pseudo-op is not supported.
+
+   * '.output' pseudo-op
+
+     The i960 '.output' pseudo-op is not supported.
+
+   * '.setreal' pseudo-op
+
+     The i960 '.setreal' pseudo-op is not supported.
+
+2.10 Dependency Tracking: '--MD'
+================================
+
+'as' can generate a dependency file for the file it creates.  This file
+consists of a single rule suitable for 'make' describing the
+dependencies of the main source file.
+
+   The rule is written to the file named in its argument.
+
+   This feature is used in the automatic updating of makefiles.
+
+2.11 Name the Object File: '-o'
+===============================
+
+There is always one object file output when you run 'as'.  By default it
+has the name 'a.out'.  You use this option (which takes exactly one
+filename) to give the object file a different name.
+
+   Whatever the object file is called, 'as' overwrites any existing file
+of the same name.
+
+2.12 Join Data and Text Sections: '-R'
+======================================
+
+'-R' tells 'as' to write the object file as if all data-section data
+lives in the text section.  This is only done at the very last moment:
+your binary data are the same, but data section parts are relocated
+differently.  The data section part of your object file is zero bytes
+long because all its bytes are appended to the text section.  (*Note
+Sections and Relocation: Sections.)
+
+   When you specify '-R' it would be possible to generate shorter
+address displacements (because we do not have to cross between text and
+data section).  We refrain from doing this simply for compatibility with
+older versions of 'as'.  In future, '-R' may work this way.
+
+   When 'as' is configured for COFF or ELF output, this option is only
+useful if you use sections named '.text' and '.data'.
+
+2.13 Display Assembly Statistics: '--statistics'
+================================================
+
+Use '--statistics' to display two statistics about the resources used by
+'as': the maximum amount of space allocated during the assembly (in
+bytes), and the total execution time taken for the assembly (in CPU
+seconds).
+
+2.14 Compatible Output: '--traditional-format'
+==============================================
+
+For some targets, the output of 'as' is different in some ways from the
+output of some existing assembler.  This switch requests 'as' to use the
+traditional format instead.
+
+   For example, it disables the exception frame optimizations which 'as'
+normally does by default on 'gcc' output.
+
+2.15 Announce Version: '-v'
+===========================
+
+You can find out what version of as is running by including the option
+'-v' (which you can also spell as '-version') on the command line.
+
+2.16 Control Warnings: '-W', '--warn', '--no-warn', '--fatal-warnings'
+======================================================================
+
+'as' should never give a warning or error message when assembling
+compiler output.  But programs written by people often cause 'as' to
+give a warning that a particular assumption was made.  All such warnings
+are directed to the standard error file.
+
+   If you use the '-W' and '--no-warn' options, no warnings are issued.
+This only affects the warning messages: it does not change any
+particular of how 'as' assembles your file.  Errors, which stop the
+assembly, are still reported.
+
+   If you use the '--fatal-warnings' option, 'as' considers files that
+generate warnings to be in error.
+
+   You can switch these options off again by specifying '--warn', which
+causes warnings to be output as usual.
+
+2.17 Generate Object File in Spite of Errors: '-Z'
+==================================================
+
+After an error message, 'as' normally produces no output.  If for some
+reason you are interested in object file output even after 'as' gives an
+error message on your program, use the '-Z' option.  If there are any
+errors, 'as' continues anyways, and writes an object file after a final
+warning message of the form 'N errors, M warnings, generating bad object
+file.'
+
+3 Syntax
+********
+
+This chapter describes the machine-independent syntax allowed in a
+source file.  'as' syntax is similar to what many other assemblers use;
+it is inspired by the BSD 4.2 assembler.
+
+3.1 Preprocessing
+=================
+
+The 'as' internal preprocessor:
+   * adjusts and removes extra whitespace.  It leaves one space or tab
+     before the keywords on a line, and turns any other whitespace on
+     the line into a single space.
+
+   * removes all comments, replacing them with a single space, or an
+     appropriate number of newlines.
+
+   * converts character constants into the appropriate numeric values.
+
+   It does not do macro processing, include file handling, or anything
+else you may get from your C compiler's preprocessor.  You can do
+include file processing with the '.include' directive (*note '.include':
+Include.).  You can use the GNU C compiler driver to get other "CPP"
+style preprocessing by giving the input file a '.S' suffix.  *Note
+Options Controlling the Kind of Output: (gcc.info)Overall Options.
+
+   Excess whitespace, comments, and character constants cannot be used
+in the portions of the input text that are not preprocessed.
+
+   If the first line of an input file is '#NO_APP' or if you use the
+'-f' option, whitespace and comments are not removed from the input
+file.  Within an input file, you can ask for whitespace and comment
+removal in specific portions of the by putting a line that says '#APP'
+before the text that may contain whitespace or comments, and putting a
+line that says '#NO_APP' after this text.  This feature is mainly intend
+to support 'asm' statements in compilers whose output is otherwise free
+of comments and whitespace.
+
+3.2 Whitespace
+==============
+
+"Whitespace" is one or more blanks or tabs, in any order.  Whitespace is
+used to separate symbols, and to make programs neater for people to
+read.  Unless within character constants (*note Character Constants:
+Characters.), any whitespace means the same as exactly one space.
+
+3.3 Comments
+============
+
+There are two ways of rendering comments to 'as'.  In both cases the
+comment is equivalent to one space.
+
+   Anything from '/*' through the next '*/' is a comment.  This means
+you may not nest these comments.
+
+     /*
+       The only way to include a newline ('\n') in a comment
+       is to use this sort of comment.
+     */
+
+     /* This sort of comment does not nest. */
+
+   Anything from the "line comment" character to the next newline is
+considered a comment and is ignored.  The line comment character is '@'
+on the ARM; '#' on the i386 and x86-64; '#' for Motorola PowerPC; '!' on
+the SPARC; see *note Machine Dependencies::.
+
+   To be compatible with past assemblers, lines that begin with '#' have
+a special interpretation.  Following the '#' should be an absolute
+expression (*note Expressions::): the logical line number of the _next_
+line.  Then a string (*note Strings: Strings.) is allowed: if present it
+is a new logical file name.  The rest of the line, if any, should be
+whitespace.
+
+   If the first non-whitespace characters on the line are not numeric,
+the line is ignored.  (Just like a comment.)
+
+                               # This is an ordinary comment.
+     # 42-6 "new_file_name"    # New logical file name
+                               # This is logical line # 36.
+   This feature is deprecated, and may disappear from future versions of
+'as'.
+
+3.4 Symbols
+===========
+
+A "symbol" is one or more characters chosen from the set of all letters
+(both upper and lower case), digits and the three characters '_.$'.  No
+symbol may begin with a digit.  Case is significant.  There is no length
+limit: all characters are significant.  Symbols are delimited by
+characters not in that set, or by the beginning of a file (since the
+source program must end with a newline, the end of a file is not a
+possible symbol delimiter).  *Note Symbols::.
+
+3.5 Statements
+==============
+
+A "statement" ends at a newline character ('\n') or at a semicolon
+(';').  The newline or semicolon is considered part of the preceding
+statement.  Newlines and semicolons within character constants are an
+exception: they do not end statements.
+
+   It is an error to end any statement with end-of-file: the last
+character of any input file should be a newline.
+
+   An empty statement is allowed, and may include whitespace.  It is
+ignored.
+
+   A statement begins with zero or more labels, optionally followed by a
+key symbol which determines what kind of statement it is.  The key
+symbol determines the syntax of the rest of the statement.  If the
+symbol begins with a dot '.' then the statement is an assembler
+directive: typically valid for any computer.  If the symbol begins with
+a letter the statement is an assembly language "instruction": it
+assembles into a machine language instruction.
+
+   A label is a symbol immediately followed by a colon (':').
+Whitespace before a label or after a colon is permitted, but you may not
+have whitespace between a label's symbol and its colon.  *Note Labels::.
+
+     label:     .directive    followed by something
+     another_label:           # This is an empty statement.
+                instruction   operand_1, operand_2, ...
+
+3.6 Constants
+=============
+
+A constant is a number, written so that its value is known by
+inspection, without knowing any context.  Like this:
+     .byte  74, 0112, 092, 0x4A, 0X4a, 'J, '\J # All the same value.
+     .ascii "Ring the bell\7"                  # A string constant.
+     .octa  0x123456789abcdef0123456789ABCDEF0 # A bignum.
+     .float 0f-314159265358979323846264338327\
+     95028841971.693993751E-40                 # - pi, a flonum.
+
+3.6.1 Character Constants
+-------------------------
+
+There are two kinds of character constants.  A "character" stands for
+one character in one byte and its value may be used in numeric
+expressions.  String constants (properly called string _literals_) are
+potentially many bytes and their values may not be used in arithmetic
+expressions.
+
+3.6.1.1 Strings
+...............
+
+A "string" is written between double-quotes.  It may contain
+double-quotes or null characters.  The way to get special characters
+into a string is to "escape" these characters: precede them with a
+backslash '\' character.  For example '\\' represents one backslash: the
+first '\' is an escape which tells 'as' to interpret the second
+character literally as a backslash (which prevents 'as' from recognizing
+the second '\' as an escape character).  The complete list of escapes
+follows.
+
+'\b'
+     Mnemonic for backspace; for ASCII this is octal code 010.
+
+'\f'
+     Mnemonic for FormFeed; for ASCII this is octal code 014.
+
+'\n'
+     Mnemonic for newline; for ASCII this is octal code 012.
+
+'\r'
+     Mnemonic for carriage-Return; for ASCII this is octal code 015.
+
+'\t'
+     Mnemonic for horizontal Tab; for ASCII this is octal code 011.
+
+'\ DIGIT DIGIT DIGIT'
+     An octal character code.  The numeric code is 3 octal digits.  For
+     compatibility with other Unix systems, 8 and 9 are accepted as
+     digits: for example, '\008' has the value 010, and '\009' the value
+     011.
+
+'\x HEX-DIGITS...'
+     A hex character code.  All trailing hex digits are combined.
+     Either upper or lower case 'x' works.
+
+'\\'
+     Represents one '\' character.
+
+'\"'
+     Represents one '"' character.  Needed in strings to represent this
+     character, because an unescaped '"' would end the string.
+
+'\ ANYTHING-ELSE'
+     Any other character when escaped by '\' gives a warning, but
+     assembles as if the '\' was not present.  The idea is that if you
+     used an escape sequence you clearly didn't want the literal
+     interpretation of the following character.  However 'as' has no
+     other interpretation, so 'as' knows it is giving you the wrong code
+     and warns you of the fact.
+
+   Which characters are escapable, and what those escapes represent,
+varies widely among assemblers.  The current set is what we think the
+BSD 4.2 assembler recognizes, and is a subset of what most C compilers
+recognize.  If you are in doubt, do not use an escape sequence.
+
+3.6.1.2 Characters
+..................
+
+A single character may be written as a single quote immediately followed
+by that character.  The same escapes apply to characters as to strings.
+So if you want to write the character backslash, you must write ''\\'
+where the first '\' escapes the second '\'.  As you can see, the quote
+is an acute accent, not a grave accent.  A newline (or semicolon ';')
+immediately following an acute accent is taken as a literal character
+and does not count as the end of a statement.  The value of a character
+constant in a numeric expression is the machine's byte-wide code for
+that character.  'as' assumes your character code is ASCII: ''A' means
+65, ''B' means 66, and so on.
+
+3.6.2 Number Constants
+----------------------
+
+'as' distinguishes three kinds of numbers according to how they are
+stored in the target machine.  _Integers_ are numbers that would fit
+into an 'int' in the C language.  _Bignums_ are integers, but they are
+stored in more than 32 bits.  _Flonums_ are floating point numbers,
+described below.
+
+3.6.2.1 Integers
+................
+
+A binary integer is '0b' or '0B' followed by zero or more of the binary
+digits '01'.
+
+   An octal integer is '0' followed by zero or more of the octal digits
+('01234567').
+
+   A decimal integer starts with a non-zero digit followed by zero or
+more digits ('0123456789').
+
+   A hexadecimal integer is '0x' or '0X' followed by one or more
+hexadecimal digits chosen from '0123456789abcdefABCDEF'.
+
+   Integers have the usual values.  To denote a negative integer, use
+the prefix operator '-' discussed under expressions (*note Prefix
+Operators: Prefix Ops.).
+
+3.6.2.2 Bignums
+...............
+
+A "bignum" has the same syntax and semantics as an integer except that
+the number (or its negative) takes more than 32 bits to represent in
+binary.  The distinction is made because in some places integers are
+permitted while bignums are not.
+
+3.6.2.3 Flonums
+...............
+
+A "flonum" represents a floating point number.  The translation is
+indirect: a decimal floating point number from the text is converted by
+'as' to a generic binary floating point number of more than sufficient
+precision.  This generic floating point number is converted to a
+particular computer's floating point format (or formats) by a portion of
+'as' specialized to that computer.
+
+   A flonum is written by writing (in order)
+   * The digit '0'.
+
+   * A letter, to tell 'as' the rest of the number is a flonum.
+
+   * An optional sign: either '+' or '-'.
+
+   * An optional "integer part": zero or more decimal digits.
+
+   * An optional "fractional part": '.' followed by zero or more decimal
+     digits.
+
+   * An optional exponent, consisting of:
+
+        * An 'E' or 'e'.
+        * Optional sign: either '+' or '-'.
+        * One or more decimal digits.
+
+   At least one of the integer part or the fractional part must be
+present.  The floating point number has the usual base-10 value.
+
+   'as' does all processing using integers.  Flonums are computed
+independently of any floating point hardware in the computer running
+'as'.
+
+4 Sections and Relocation
+*************************
+
+4.1 Background
+==============
+
+Roughly, a section is a range of addresses, with no gaps; all data "in"
+those addresses is treated the same for some particular purpose.  For
+example there may be a "read only" section.
+
+   The linker 'ld' reads many object files (partial programs) and
+combines their contents to form a runnable program.  When 'as' emits an
+object file, the partial program is assumed to start at address 0.  'ld'
+assigns the final addresses for the partial program, so that different
+partial programs do not overlap.  This is actually an
+oversimplification, but it suffices to explain how 'as' uses sections.
+
+   'ld' moves blocks of bytes of your program to their run-time
+addresses.  These blocks slide to their run-time addresses as rigid
+units; their length does not change and neither does the order of bytes
+within them.  Such a rigid unit is called a _section_.  Assigning
+run-time addresses to sections is called "relocation".  It includes the
+task of adjusting mentions of object-file addresses so they refer to the
+proper run-time addresses.
+
+   An object file written by 'as' has at least three sections, any of
+which may be empty.  These are named "text", "data" and "bss" sections.
+
+   'as' can also generate whatever other named sections you specify
+using the '.section' directive (*note '.section': Section.).  If you do
+not use any directives that place output in the '.text' or '.data'
+sections, these sections still exist, but are empty.
+
+   Within the object file, the text section starts at address '0', the
+data section follows, and the bss section follows the data section.
+
+   To let 'ld' know which data changes when the sections are relocated,
+and how to change that data, 'as' also writes to the object file details
+of the relocation needed.  To perform relocation 'ld' must know, each
+time an address in the object file is mentioned:
+   * Where in the object file is the beginning of this reference to an
+     address?
+   * How long (in bytes) is this reference?
+   * Which section does the address refer to?  What is the numeric value
+     of
+          (ADDRESS) - (START-ADDRESS OF SECTION)?
+   * Is the reference to an address "Program-Counter relative"?
+
+   In fact, every address 'as' ever uses is expressed as
+     (SECTION) + (OFFSET INTO SECTION)
+Further, most expressions 'as' computes have this section-relative
+nature.
+
+   In this manual we use the notation {SECNAME N} to mean "offset N into
+section SECNAME."
+
+   Apart from text, data and bss sections you need to know about the
+"absolute" section.  When 'ld' mixes partial programs, addresses in the
+absolute section remain unchanged.  For example, address '{absolute 0}'
+is "relocated" to run-time address 0 by 'ld'.  Although the linker never
+arranges two partial programs' data sections with overlapping addresses
+after linking, _by definition_ their absolute sections must overlap.
+Address '{absolute 239}' in one part of a program is always the same
+address when the program is running as address '{absolute 239}' in any
+other part of the program.
+
+   The idea of sections is extended to the "undefined" section.  Any
+address whose section is unknown at assembly time is by definition
+rendered {undefined U}--where U is filled in later.  Since numbers are
+always defined, the only way to generate an undefined address is to
+mention an undefined symbol.  A reference to a named common block would
+be such a symbol: its value is unknown at assembly time so it has
+section _undefined_.
+
+   By analogy the word _section_ is used to describe groups of sections
+in the linked program.  'ld' puts all partial programs' text sections in
+contiguous addresses in the linked program.  It is customary to refer to
+the _text section_ of a program, meaning all the addresses of all
+partial programs' text sections.  Likewise for data and bss sections.
+
+   Some sections are manipulated by 'ld'; others are invented for use of
+'as' and have no meaning except during assembly.
+
+4.2 Linker Sections
+===================
+
+'ld' deals with just four kinds of sections, summarized below.
+
+*named sections*
+     These sections hold your program.  'as' and 'ld' treat them as
+     separate but equal sections.  Anything you can say of one section
+     is true of another.  When the program is running, however, it is
+     customary for the text section to be unalterable.  The text section
+     is often shared among processes: it contains instructions,
+     constants and the like.  The data section of a running program is
+     usually alterable: for example, C variables would be stored in the
+     data section.
+
+*bss section*
+     This section contains zeroed bytes when your program begins
+     running.  It is used to hold uninitialized variables or common
+     storage.  The length of each partial program's bss section is
+     important, but because it starts out containing zeroed bytes there
+     is no need to store explicit zero bytes in the object file.  The
+     bss section was invented to eliminate those explicit zeros from
+     object files.
+
+*absolute section*
+     Address 0 of this section is always "relocated" to runtime address
+     0.  This is useful if you want to refer to an address that 'ld'
+     must not change when relocating.  In this sense we speak of
+     absolute addresses being "unrelocatable": they do not change during
+     relocation.
+
+*undefined section*
+     This "section" is a catch-all for address references to objects not
+     in the preceding sections.
+
+   An idealized example of three relocatable sections follows.  The
+example uses the traditional section names '.text' and '.data'.  Memory
+addresses are on the horizontal axis.
+
+                           +-----+----+--+
+     partial program # 1:  |ttttt|dddd|00|
+                           +-----+----+--+
+
+                           text   data bss
+                           seg.   seg. seg.
+
+                           +---+---+---+
+     partial program # 2:  |TTT|DDD|000|
+                           +---+---+---+
+
+                           +--+---+-----+--+----+---+-----+~~
+     linked program:       |  |TTT|ttttt|  |dddd|DDD|00000|
+                           +--+---+-----+--+----+---+-----+~~
+
+         addresses:        0 ...
+
+4.3 Assembler Internal Sections
+===============================
+
+These sections are meant only for the internal use of 'as'.  They have
+no meaning at run-time.  You do not really need to know about these
+sections for most purposes; but they can be mentioned in 'as' warning
+messages, so it might be helpful to have an idea of their meanings to
+'as'.  These sections are used to permit the value of every expression
+in your assembly language program to be a section-relative address.
+
+ASSEMBLER-INTERNAL-LOGIC-ERROR!
+     An internal assembler logic error has been found.  This means there
+     is a bug in the assembler.
+
+expr section
+     The assembler stores complex expression internally as combinations
+     of symbols.  When it needs to represent an expression as a symbol,
+     it puts it in the expr section.
+
+4.4 Sub-Sections
+================
+
+You may have separate groups of data in named sections that you want to
+end up near to each other in the object file, even though they are not
+contiguous in the assembler source.  'as' allows you to use
+"subsections" for this purpose.  Within each section, there can be
+numbered subsections with values from 0 to 8192.  Objects assembled into
+the same subsection go into the object file together with other objects
+in the same subsection.  For example, a compiler might want to store
+constants in the text section, but might not want to have them
+interspersed with the program being assembled.  In this case, the
+compiler could issue a '.text 0' before each section of code being
+output, and a '.text 1' before each group of constants being output.
+
+   Subsections are optional.  If you do not use subsections, everything
+goes in subsection number zero.
+
+   Subsections appear in your object file in numeric order, lowest
+numbered to highest.  (All this to be compatible with other people's
+assemblers.)  The object file contains no representation of subsections;
+'ld' and other programs that manipulate object files see no trace of
+them.  They just see all your text subsections as a text section, and
+all your data subsections as a data section.
+
+   To specify which subsection you want subsequent statements assembled
+into, use a numeric argument to specify it, in a '.text EXPRESSION' or a
+'.data EXPRESSION' statement.  You can also use the '.subsection'
+directive (*note SubSection::) to specify a subsection: '.subsection
+EXPRESSION'.  EXPRESSION should be an absolute expression (*note
+Expressions::).  If you just say '.text' then '.text 0' is assumed.
+Likewise '.data' means '.data 0'.  Assembly begins in 'text 0'.  For
+instance:
+     .text 0     # The default subsection is text 0 anyway.
+     .ascii "This lives in the first text subsection. *"
+     .text 1
+     .ascii "But this lives in the second text subsection."
+     .data 0
+     .ascii "This lives in the data section,"
+     .ascii "in the first data subsection."
+     .text 0
+     .ascii "This lives in the first text section,"
+     .ascii "immediately following the asterisk (*)."
+
+   Each section has a "location counter" incremented by one for every
+byte assembled into that section.  Because subsections are merely a
+convenience restricted to 'as' there is no concept of a subsection
+location counter.  There is no way to directly manipulate a location
+counter--but the '.align' directive changes it, and any label definition
+captures its current value.  The location counter of the section where
+statements are being assembled is said to be the "active" location
+counter.
+
+4.5 bss Section
+===============
+
+The bss section is used for local common variable storage.  You may
+allocate address space in the bss section, but you may not dictate data
+to load into it before your program executes.  When your program starts
+running, all the contents of the bss section are zeroed bytes.
+
+   The '.lcomm' pseudo-op defines a symbol in the bss section; see *note
+'.lcomm': Lcomm.
+
+   The '.comm' pseudo-op may be used to declare a common symbol, which
+is another form of uninitialized symbol; see *note '.comm': Comm.
+
+5 Symbols
+*********
+
+Symbols are a central concept: the programmer uses symbols to name
+things, the linker uses symbols to link, and the debugger uses symbols
+to debug.
+
+     _Warning:_ 'as' does not place symbols in the object file in the
+     same order they were declared.  This may break some debuggers.
+
+5.1 Labels
+==========
+
+A "label" is written as a symbol immediately followed by a colon ':'.
+The symbol then represents the current value of the active location
+counter, and is, for example, a suitable instruction operand.  You are
+warned if you use the same symbol to represent two different locations:
+the first definition overrides any other definitions.
+
+5.2 Giving Symbols Other Values
+===============================
+
+A symbol can be given an arbitrary value by writing a symbol, followed
+by an equals sign '=', followed by an expression (*note Expressions::).
+This is equivalent to using the '.set' directive.  *Note '.set': Set.
+In the same way, using a double equals sign '=''=' here represents an
+equivalent of the '.eqv' directive.  *Note '.eqv': Eqv.
+
+5.3 Symbol Names
+================
+
+Symbol names begin with a letter or with one of '._'.  On most machines,
+you can also use '$' in symbol names; exceptions are noted in *note
+Machine Dependencies::.  That character may be followed by any string of
+digits, letters, dollar signs (unless otherwise noted for a particular
+target machine), and underscores.
+
+   Case of letters is significant: 'foo' is a different symbol name than
+'Foo'.
+
+   Each symbol has exactly one name.  Each name in an assembly language
+program refers to exactly one symbol.  You may use that symbol name any
+number of times in a program.
+
+Local Symbol Names
+------------------
+
+A local symbol is any symbol beginning with certain local label
+prefixes.  By default, the local label prefix is '.L' for ELF systems or
+'L' for traditional a.out systems, but each target may have its own set
+of local label prefixes.
+
+   Local symbols are defined and used within the assembler, but they are
+normally not saved in object files.  Thus, they are not visible when
+debugging.  You may use the '-L' option (*note Include Local Symbols:
+'-L': L.) to retain the local symbols in the object files.
+
+Local Labels
+------------
+
+Local labels help compilers and programmers use names temporarily.  They
+create symbols which are guaranteed to be unique over the entire scope
+of the input source code and which can be referred to by a simple
+notation.  To define a local label, write a label of the form 'N:'
+(where N represents any positive integer).  To refer to the most recent
+previous definition of that label write 'Nb', using the same number as
+when you defined the label.  To refer to the next definition of a local
+label, write 'Nf'--the 'b' stands for "backwards" and the 'f' stands for
+"forwards".
+
+   There is no restriction on how you can use these labels, and you can
+reuse them too.  So that it is possible to repeatedly define the same
+local label (using the same number 'N'), although you can only refer to
+the most recently defined local label of that number (for a backwards
+reference) or the next definition of a specific local label for a
+forward reference.  It is also worth noting that the first 10 local
+labels ('0:'...'9:') are implemented in a slightly more efficient manner
+than the others.
+
+   Here is an example:
+
+     1:        branch 1f
+     2:        branch 1b
+     1:        branch 2f
+     2:        branch 1b
+
+   Which is the equivalent of:
+
+     label_1:  branch label_3
+     label_2:  branch label_1
+     label_3:  branch label_4
+     label_4:  branch label_3
+
+   Local label names are only a notational device.  They are immediately
+transformed into more conventional symbol names before the assembler
+uses them.  The symbol names are stored in the symbol table, appear in
+error messages, and are optionally emitted to the object file.  The
+names are constructed using these parts:
+
+'_local label prefix_'
+     All local symbols begin with the system-specific local label
+     prefix.  Normally both 'as' and 'ld' forget symbols that start with
+     the local label prefix.  These labels are used for symbols you are
+     never intended to see.  If you use the '-L' option then 'as'
+     retains these symbols in the object file.  If you also instruct
+     'ld' to retain these symbols, you may use them in debugging.
+
+'NUMBER'
+     This is the number that was used in the local label definition.  So
+     if the label is written '55:' then the number is '55'.
+
+'C-B'
+     This unusual character is included so you do not accidentally
+     invent a symbol of the same name.  The character has ASCII value of
+     '\002' (control-B).
+
+'_ordinal number_'
+     This is a serial number to keep the labels distinct.  The first
+     definition of '0:' gets the number '1'.  The 15th definition of
+     '0:' gets the number '15', and so on.  Likewise the first
+     definition of '1:' gets the number '1' and its 15th definition gets
+     '15' as well.
+
+   So for example, the first '1:' may be named '.L1C-B1', and the 44th
+'3:' may be named '.L3C-B44'.
+
+Dollar Local Labels
+-------------------
+
+'as' also supports an even more local form of local labels called dollar
+labels.  These labels go out of scope (i.e., they become undefined) as
+soon as a non-local label is defined.  Thus they remain valid for only a
+small region of the input source code.  Normal local labels, by
+contrast, remain in scope for the entire file, or until they are
+redefined by another occurrence of the same local label.
+
+   Dollar labels are defined in exactly the same way as ordinary local
+labels, except that instead of being terminated by a colon, they are
+terminated by a dollar sign, e.g., '55$'.
+
+   They can also be distinguished from ordinary local labels by their
+transformed names which use ASCII character '\001' (control-A) as the
+magic character to distinguish them from ordinary labels.  For example,
+the fifth definition of '6$' may be named '.L6'C-A'5'.
+
+5.4 The Special Dot Symbol
+==========================
+
+The special symbol '.' refers to the current address that 'as' is
+assembling into.  Thus, the expression 'melvin: .long .' defines
+'melvin' to contain its own address.  Assigning a value to '.' is
+treated the same as a '.org' directive.  Thus, the expression '.=.+4' is
+the same as saying '.space 4'.
+
+5.5 Symbol Attributes
+=====================
+
+Every symbol has, as well as its name, the attributes "Value" and
+"Type".  Depending on output format, symbols can also have auxiliary
+attributes.  The detailed definitions are in 'a.out.h'.
+
+   If you use a symbol without defining it, 'as' assumes zero for all
+these attributes, and probably won't warn you.  This makes the symbol an
+externally defined symbol, which is generally what you would want.
+
+5.5.1 Value
+-----------
+
+The value of a symbol is (usually) 32 bits.  For a symbol which labels a
+location in the text, data, bss or absolute sections the value is the
+number of addresses from the start of that section to the label.
+Naturally for text, data and bss sections the value of a symbol changes
+as 'ld' changes section base addresses during linking.  Absolute
+symbols' values do not change during linking: that is why they are
+called absolute.
+
+   The value of an undefined symbol is treated in a special way.  If it
+is 0 then the symbol is not defined in this assembler source file, and
+'ld' tries to determine its value from other files linked into the same
+program.  You make this kind of symbol simply by mentioning a symbol
+name without defining it.  A non-zero value represents a '.comm' common
+declaration.  The value is how much common storage to reserve, in bytes
+(addresses).  The symbol refers to the first address of the allocated
+storage.
+
+5.5.2 Type
+----------
+
+The type attribute of a symbol contains relocation (section)
+information, any flag settings indicating that a symbol is external, and
+(optionally), other information for linkers and debuggers.  The exact
+format depends on the object-code output format in use.
+
+6 Expressions
+*************
+
+An "expression" specifies an address or numeric value.  Whitespace may
+precede and/or follow an expression.
+
+   The result of an expression must be an absolute number, or else an
+offset into a particular section.  If an expression is not absolute, and
+there is not enough information when 'as' sees the expression to know
+its section, a second pass over the source program might be necessary to
+interpret the expression--but the second pass is currently not
+implemented.  'as' aborts with an error message in this situation.
+
+6.1 Empty Expressions
+=====================
+
+An empty expression has no value: it is just whitespace or null.
+Wherever an absolute expression is required, you may omit the
+expression, and 'as' assumes a value of (absolute) 0.  This is
+compatible with other assemblers.
+
+6.2 Integer Expressions
+=======================
+
+An "integer expression" is one or more _arguments_ delimited by
+_operators_.
+
+6.2.1 Arguments
+---------------
+
+"Arguments" are symbols, numbers or subexpressions.  In other contexts
+arguments are sometimes called "arithmetic operands".  In this manual,
+to avoid confusing them with the "instruction operands" of the machine
+language, we use the term "argument" to refer to parts of expressions
+only, reserving the word "operand" to refer only to machine instruction
+operands.
+
+   Symbols are evaluated to yield {SECTION NNN} where SECTION is one of
+text, data, bss, absolute, or undefined.  NNN is a signed, 2's
+complement 32 bit integer.
+
+   Numbers are usually integers.
+
+   A number can be a flonum or bignum.  In this case, you are warned
+that only the low order 32 bits are used, and 'as' pretends these 32
+bits are an integer.  You may write integer-manipulating instructions
+that act on exotic constants, compatible with other assemblers.
+
+   Subexpressions are a left parenthesis '(' followed by an integer
+expression, followed by a right parenthesis ')'; or a prefix operator
+followed by an argument.
+
+6.2.2 Operators
+---------------
+
+"Operators" are arithmetic functions, like '+' or '%'.  Prefix operators
+are followed by an argument.  Infix operators appear between their
+arguments.  Operators may be preceded and/or followed by whitespace.
+
+6.2.3 Prefix Operator
+---------------------
+
+'as' has the following "prefix operators".  They each take one argument,
+which must be absolute.
+
+'-'
+     "Negation".  Two's complement negation.
+'~'
+     "Complementation".  Bitwise not.
+
+6.2.4 Infix Operators
+---------------------
+
+"Infix operators" take two arguments, one on either side.  Operators
+have precedence, but operations with equal precedence are performed left
+to right.  Apart from '+' or '-', both arguments must be absolute, and
+the result is absolute.
+
+  1. Highest Precedence
+
+     '*'
+          "Multiplication".
+
+     '/'
+          "Division".  Truncation is the same as the C operator '/'
+
+     '%'
+          "Remainder".
+
+     '<<'
+          "Shift Left".  Same as the C operator '<<'.
+
+     '>>'
+          "Shift Right".  Same as the C operator '>>'.
+
+  2. Intermediate precedence
+
+     '|'
+
+          "Bitwise Inclusive Or".
+
+     '&'
+          "Bitwise And".
+
+     '^'
+          "Bitwise Exclusive Or".
+
+     '!'
+          "Bitwise Or Not".
+
+  3. Low Precedence
+
+     '+'
+          "Addition".  If either argument is absolute, the result has
+          the section of the other argument.  You may not add together
+          arguments from different sections.
+
+     '-'
+          "Subtraction".  If the right argument is absolute, the result
+          has the section of the left argument.  If both arguments are
+          in the same section, the result is absolute.  You may not
+          subtract arguments from different sections.
+
+     '=='
+          "Is Equal To"
+     '<>'
+     '!='
+          "Is Not Equal To"
+     '<'
+          "Is Less Than"
+     '>'
+          "Is Greater Than"
+     '>='
+          "Is Greater Than Or Equal To"
+     '<='
+          "Is Less Than Or Equal To"
+
+          The comparison operators can be used as infix operators.  A
+          true results has a value of -1 whereas a false result has a
+          value of 0.  Note, these operators perform signed comparisons.
+
+  4. Lowest Precedence
+
+     '&&'
+          "Logical And".
+
+     '||'
+          "Logical Or".
+
+          These two logical operations can be used to combine the
+          results of sub expressions.  Note, unlike the comparison
+          operators a true result returns a value of 1 but a false
+          results does still return 0.  Also note that the logical or
+          operator has a slightly lower precedence than logical and.
+
+   In short, it's only meaningful to add or subtract the _offsets_ in an
+address; you can only have a defined section in one of the two
+arguments.
+
+7 Assembler Directives
+**********************
+
+All assembler directives have names that begin with a period ('.').  The
+rest of the name is letters, usually in lower case.
+
+   This chapter discusses directives that are available regardless of
+the target machine configuration for the GNU assembler.
+
+7.1 '.abort'
+============
+
+This directive stops the assembly immediately.  It is for compatibility
+with other assemblers.  The original idea was that the assembly language
+source would be piped into the assembler.  If the sender of the source
+quit, it could use this directive tells 'as' to quit also.  One day
+'.abort' will not be supported.
+
+7.2 '.align ABS-EXPR, ABS-EXPR, ABS-EXPR'
+=========================================
+
+Pad the location counter (in the current subsection) to a particular
+storage boundary.  The first expression (which must be absolute) is the
+alignment required, as described below.
+
+   The second expression (also absolute) gives the fill value to be
+stored in the padding bytes.  It (and the comma) may be omitted.  If it
+is omitted, the padding bytes are normally zero.  However, on some
+systems, if the section is marked as containing code and the fill value
+is omitted, the space is filled with no-op instructions.
+
+   The third expression is also absolute, and is also optional.  If it
+is present, it is the maximum number of bytes that should be skipped by
+this alignment directive.  If doing the alignment would require skipping
+more bytes than the specified maximum, then the alignment is not done at
+all.  You can omit the fill value (the second argument) entirely by
+simply using two commas after the required alignment; this can be useful
+if you want the alignment to be filled with no-op instructions when
+appropriate.
+
+   The way the required alignment is specified varies from system to
+system.  For the arc, hppa, i386 using ELF, i860, iq2000, m68k, or32,
+s390, sparc, tic4x, tic80 and xtensa, the first expression is the
+alignment request in bytes.  For example '.align 8' advances the
+location counter until it is a multiple of 8.  If the location counter
+is already a multiple of 8, no change is needed.  For the tic54x, the
+first expression is the alignment request in words.
+
+   For other systems, including the i386 using a.out format, and the arm
+and strongarm, it is the number of low-order zero bits the location
+counter must have after advancement.  For example '.align 3' advances
+the location counter until it a multiple of 8.  If the location counter
+is already a multiple of 8, no change is needed.
+
+   This inconsistency is due to the different behaviors of the various
+native assemblers for these systems which GAS must emulate.  GAS also
+provides '.balign' and '.p2align' directives, described later, which
+have a consistent behavior across all architectures (but are specific to
+GAS).
+
+7.3 '.ascii "STRING"'...
+========================
+
+'.ascii' expects zero or more string literals (*note Strings::)
+separated by commas.  It assembles each string (with no automatic
+trailing zero byte) into consecutive addresses.
+
+7.4 '.asciz "STRING"'...
+========================
+
+'.asciz' is just like '.ascii', but each string is followed by a zero
+byte.  The "z" in '.asciz' stands for "zero".
+
+7.5 '.balign[wl] ABS-EXPR, ABS-EXPR, ABS-EXPR'
+==============================================
+
+Pad the location counter (in the current subsection) to a particular
+storage boundary.  The first expression (which must be absolute) is the
+alignment request in bytes.  For example '.balign 8' advances the
+location counter until it is a multiple of 8.  If the location counter
+is already a multiple of 8, no change is needed.
+
+   The second expression (also absolute) gives the fill value to be
+stored in the padding bytes.  It (and the comma) may be omitted.  If it
+is omitted, the padding bytes are normally zero.  However, on some
+systems, if the section is marked as containing code and the fill value
+is omitted, the space is filled with no-op instructions.
+
+   The third expression is also absolute, and is also optional.  If it
+is present, it is the maximum number of bytes that should be skipped by
+this alignment directive.  If doing the alignment would require skipping
+more bytes than the specified maximum, then the alignment is not done at
+all.  You can omit the fill value (the second argument) entirely by
+simply using two commas after the required alignment; this can be useful
+if you want the alignment to be filled with no-op instructions when
+appropriate.
+
+   The '.balignw' and '.balignl' directives are variants of the
+'.balign' directive.  The '.balignw' directive treats the fill pattern
+as a two byte word value.  The '.balignl' directives treats the fill
+pattern as a four byte longword value.  For example, '.balignw 4,0x368d'
+will align to a multiple of 4.  If it skips two bytes, they will be
+filled in with the value 0x368d (the exact placement of the bytes
+depends upon the endianness of the processor).  If it skips 1 or 3
+bytes, the fill value is undefined.
+
+7.6 '.byte EXPRESSIONS'
+=======================
+
+'.byte' expects zero or more expressions, separated by commas.  Each
+expression is assembled into the next byte.
+
+7.7 '.comm SYMBOL , LENGTH '
+============================
+
+'.comm' declares a common symbol named SYMBOL.  When linking, a common
+symbol in one object file may be merged with a defined or common symbol
+of the same name in another object file.  If 'ld' does not see a
+definition for the symbol-just one or more common symbols-then it will
+allocate LENGTH bytes of uninitialized memory.  LENGTH must be an
+absolute expression.  If 'ld' sees multiple common symbols with the same
+name, and they do not all have the same size, it will allocate space
+using the largest size.
+
+   When using ELF, the '.comm' directive takes an optional third
+argument.  This is the desired alignment of the symbol, specified as a
+byte boundary (for example, an alignment of 16 means that the least
+significant 4 bits of the address should be zero).  The alignment must
+be an absolute expression, and it must be a power of two.  If 'ld'
+allocates uninitialized memory for the common symbol, it will use the
+alignment when placing the symbol.  If no alignment is specified, 'as'
+will set the alignment to the largest power of two less than or equal to
+the size of the symbol, up to a maximum of 16.
+
+7.8 '.cfi_startproc [simple]'
+=============================
+
+'.cfi_startproc' is used at the beginning of each function that should
+have an entry in '.eh_frame'.  It initializes some internal data
+structures.  Don't forget to close the function by '.cfi_endproc'.
+
+   Unless '.cfi_startproc' is used along with parameter 'simple' it also
+emits some architecture dependent initial CFI instructions.
+
+7.9 '.cfi_endproc'
+==================
+
+'.cfi_endproc' is used at the end of a function where it closes its
+unwind entry previously opened by '.cfi_startproc', and emits it to
+'.eh_frame'.
+
+7.10 '.cfi_personality ENCODING [, EXP]'
+========================================
+
+'.cfi_personality' defines personality routine and its encoding.
+ENCODING must be a constant determining how the personality should be
+encoded.  If it is 255 ('DW_EH_PE_omit'), second argument is not
+present, otherwise second argument should be a constant or a symbol
+name.  When using indirect encodings, the symbol provided should be the
+location where personality can be loaded from, not the personality
+routine itself.  The default after '.cfi_startproc' is '.cfi_personality
+0xff', no personality routine.
+
+7.11 '.cfi_lsda ENCODING [, EXP]'
+=================================
+
+'.cfi_lsda' defines LSDA and its encoding.  ENCODING must be a constant
+determining how the LSDA should be encoded.  If it is 255
+('DW_EH_PE_omit'), second argument is not present, otherwise second
+argument should be a constant or a symbol name.  The default after
+'.cfi_startproc' is '.cfi_lsda 0xff', no LSDA.
+
+7.12 '.cfi_def_cfa REGISTER, OFFSET'
+====================================
+
+'.cfi_def_cfa' defines a rule for computing CFA as: take address from
+REGISTER and add OFFSET to it.
+
+7.13 '.cfi_def_cfa_register REGISTER'
+=====================================
+
+'.cfi_def_cfa_register' modifies a rule for computing CFA. From now on
+REGISTER will be used instead of the old one.  Offset remains the same.
+
+7.14 '.cfi_def_cfa_offset OFFSET'
+=================================
+
+'.cfi_def_cfa_offset' modifies a rule for computing CFA. Register
+remains the same, but OFFSET is new.  Note that it is the absolute
+offset that will be added to a defined register to compute CFA address.
+
+7.15 '.cfi_adjust_cfa_offset OFFSET'
+====================================
+
+Same as '.cfi_def_cfa_offset' but OFFSET is a relative value that is
+added/substracted from the previous offset.
+
+7.16 '.cfi_offset REGISTER, OFFSET'
+===================================
+
+Previous value of REGISTER is saved at offset OFFSET from CFA.
+
+7.17 '.cfi_rel_offset REGISTER, OFFSET'
+=======================================
+
+Previous value of REGISTER is saved at offset OFFSET from the current
+CFA register.  This is transformed to '.cfi_offset' using the known
+displacement of the CFA register from the CFA. This is often easier to
+use, because the number will match the code it's annotating.
+
+7.18 '.cfi_register REGISTER1, REGISTER2'
+=========================================
+
+Previous value of REGISTER1 is saved in register REGISTER2.
+
+7.19 '.cfi_restore REGISTER'
+============================
+
+'.cfi_restore' says that the rule for REGISTER is now the same as it was
+at the beginning of the function, after all initial instruction added by
+'.cfi_startproc' were executed.
+
+7.20 '.cfi_undefined REGISTER'
+==============================
+
+From now on the previous value of REGISTER can't be restored anymore.
+
+7.21 '.cfi_same_value REGISTER'
+===============================
+
+Current value of REGISTER is the same like in the previous frame, i.e.
+no restoration needed.
+
+7.22 '.cfi_remember_state',
+===========================
+
+First save all current rules for all registers by '.cfi_remember_state',
+then totally screw them up by subsequent '.cfi_*' directives and when
+everything is hopelessly bad, use '.cfi_restore_state' to restore the
+previous saved state.
+
+7.23 '.cfi_return_column REGISTER'
+==================================
+
+Change return column REGISTER, i.e.  the return address is either
+directly in REGISTER or can be accessed by rules for REGISTER.
+
+7.24 '.cfi_signal_frame'
+========================
+
+Mark current function as signal trampoline.
+
+7.25 '.cfi_window_save'
+=======================
+
+SPARC register window has been saved.
+
+7.26 '.cfi_escape' EXPRESSION[, ...]
+====================================
+
+Allows the user to add arbitrary bytes to the unwind info.  One might
+use this to add OS-specific CFI opcodes, or generic CFI opcodes that GAS
+does not yet support.
+
+7.27 '.file FILENO FILENAME'
+============================
+
+When emitting dwarf2 line number information '.file' assigns filenames
+to the '.debug_line' file name table.  The FILENO operand should be a
+unique positive integer to use as the index of the entry in the table.
+The FILENAME operand is a C string literal.
+
+   The detail of filename indices is exposed to the user because the
+filename table is shared with the '.debug_info' section of the dwarf2
+debugging information, and thus the user must know the exact indices
+that table entries will have.
+
+7.28 '.loc FILENO LINENO [COLUMN] [OPTIONS]'
+============================================
+
+The '.loc' directive will add row to the '.debug_line' line number
+matrix corresponding to the immediately following assembly instruction.
+The FILENO, LINENO, and optional COLUMN arguments will be applied to the
+'.debug_line' state machine before the row is added.
+
+   The OPTIONS are a sequence of the following tokens in any order:
+
+'basic_block'
+     This option will set the 'basic_block' register in the
+     '.debug_line' state machine to 'true'.
+
+'prologue_end'
+     This option will set the 'prologue_end' register in the
+     '.debug_line' state machine to 'true'.
+
+'epilogue_begin'
+     This option will set the 'epilogue_begin' register in the
+     '.debug_line' state machine to 'true'.
+
+'is_stmt VALUE'
+     This option will set the 'is_stmt' register in the '.debug_line'
+     state machine to 'value', which must be either 0 or 1.
+
+'isa VALUE'
+     This directive will set the 'isa' register in the '.debug_line'
+     state machine to VALUE, which must be an unsigned integer.
+
+7.29 '.loc_mark_blocks ENABLE'
+==============================
+
+The '.loc_mark_blocks' directive makes the assembler emit an entry to
+the '.debug_line' line number matrix with the 'basic_block' register in
+the state machine set whenever a code label is seen.  The ENABLE
+argument should be either 1 or 0, to enable or disable this function
+respectively.
+
+7.30 '.data SUBSECTION'
+=======================
+
+'.data' tells 'as' to assemble the following statements onto the end of
+the data subsection numbered SUBSECTION (which is an absolute
+expression).  If SUBSECTION is omitted, it defaults to zero.
+
+7.31 '.double FLONUMS'
+======================
+
+'.double' expects zero or more flonums, separated by commas.  It
+assembles floating point numbers.
+
+7.32 '.eject'
+=============
+
+Force a page break at this point, when generating assembly listings.
+
+7.33 '.else'
+============
+
+'.else' is part of the 'as' support for conditional assembly; see *note
+'.if': If.  It marks the beginning of a section of code to be assembled
+if the condition for the preceding '.if' was false.
+
+7.34 '.elseif'
+==============
+
+'.elseif' is part of the 'as' support for conditional assembly; see
+*note '.if': If.  It is shorthand for beginning a new '.if' block that
+would otherwise fill the entire '.else' section.
+
+7.35 '.end'
+===========
+
+'.end' marks the end of the assembly file.  'as' does not process
+anything in the file past the '.end' directive.
+
+7.36 '.endfunc'
+===============
+
+'.endfunc' marks the end of a function specified with '.func'.
+
+7.37 '.endif'
+=============
+
+'.endif' is part of the 'as' support for conditional assembly; it marks
+the end of a block of code that is only assembled conditionally.  *Note
+'.if': If.
+
+7.38 '.equ SYMBOL, EXPRESSION'
+==============================
+
+This directive sets the value of SYMBOL to EXPRESSION.  It is synonymous
+with '.set'; see *note '.set': Set.
+
+7.39 '.equiv SYMBOL, EXPRESSION'
+================================
+
+The '.equiv' directive is like '.equ' and '.set', except that the
+assembler will signal an error if SYMBOL is already defined.  Note a
+symbol which has been referenced but not actually defined is considered
+to be undefined.
+
+   Except for the contents of the error message, this is roughly
+equivalent to
+     .ifdef SYM
+     .err
+     .endif
+     .equ SYM,VAL
+   plus it protects the symbol from later redefinition.
+
+7.40 '.eqv SYMBOL, EXPRESSION'
+==============================
+
+The '.eqv' directive is like '.equiv', but no attempt is made to
+evaluate the expression or any part of it immediately.  Instead each
+time the resulting symbol is used in an expression, a snapshot of its
+current value is taken.
+
+7.41 '.err'
+===========
+
+If 'as' assembles a '.err' directive, it will print an error message
+and, unless the '-Z' option was used, it will not generate an object
+file.  This can be used to signal an error in conditionally compiled
+code.
+
+7.42 '.error "STRING"'
+======================
+
+Similarly to '.err', this directive emits an error, but you can specify
+a string that will be emitted as the error message.  If you don't
+specify the message, it defaults to '".error directive invoked in source
+file"'.  *Note Error and Warning Messages: Errors.
+
+      .error "This code has not been assembled and tested."
+
+7.43 '.exitm'
+=============
+
+Exit early from the current macro definition.  *Note Macro::.
+
+7.44 '.extern'
+==============
+
+'.extern' is accepted in the source program--for compatibility with
+other assemblers--but it is ignored.  'as' treats all undefined symbols
+as external.
+
+7.45 '.fail EXPRESSION'
+=======================
+
+Generates an error or a warning.  If the value of the EXPRESSION is 500
+or more, 'as' will print a warning message.  If the value is less than
+500, 'as' will print an error message.  The message will include the
+value of EXPRESSION.  This can occasionally be useful inside complex
+nested macros or conditional assembly.
+
+7.46 '.file STRING'
+===================
+
+'.file' tells 'as' that we are about to start a new logical file.
+STRING is the new file name.  In general, the filename is recognized
+whether or not it is surrounded by quotes '"'; but if you wish to
+specify an empty file name, you must give the quotes-'""'.  This
+statement may go away in future: it is only recognized to be compatible
+with old 'as' programs.
+
+7.47 '.fill REPEAT , SIZE , VALUE'
+==================================
+
+REPEAT, SIZE and VALUE are absolute expressions.  This emits REPEAT
+copies of SIZE bytes.  REPEAT may be zero or more.  SIZE may be zero or
+more, but if it is more than 8, then it is deemed to have the value 8,
+compatible with other people's assemblers.  The contents of each REPEAT
+bytes is taken from an 8-byte number.  The highest order 4 bytes are
+zero.  The lowest order 4 bytes are VALUE rendered in the byte-order of
+an integer on the computer 'as' is assembling for.  Each SIZE bytes in a
+repetition is taken from the lowest order SIZE bytes of this number.
+Again, this bizarre behavior is compatible with other people's
+assemblers.
+
+   SIZE and VALUE are optional.  If the second comma and VALUE are
+absent, VALUE is assumed zero.  If the first comma and following tokens
+are absent, SIZE is assumed to be 1.
+
+7.48 '.float FLONUMS'
+=====================
+
+This directive assembles zero or more flonums, separated by commas.  It
+has the same effect as '.single'.
+
+7.49 '.func NAME[,LABEL]'
+=========================
+
+'.func' emits debugging information to denote function NAME, and is
+ignored unless the file is assembled with debugging enabled.  Only
+'--gstabs[+]' is currently supported.  LABEL is the entry point of the
+function and if omitted NAME prepended with the 'leading char' is used.
+'leading char' is usually '_' or nothing, depending on the target.  All
+functions are currently defined to have 'void' return type.  The
+function must be terminated with '.endfunc'.
+
+7.50 '.global SYMBOL', '.globl SYMBOL'
+======================================
+
+'.global' makes the symbol visible to 'ld'.  If you define SYMBOL in
+your partial program, its value is made available to other partial
+programs that are linked with it.  Otherwise, SYMBOL takes its
+attributes from a symbol of the same name from another file linked into
+the same program.
+
+   Both spellings ('.globl' and '.global') are accepted, for
+compatibility with other assemblers.
+
+7.51 '.hidden NAMES'
+====================
+
+This is one of the ELF visibility directives.  The other two are
+'.internal' (*note '.internal': Internal.) and '.protected' (*note
+'.protected': Protected.).
+
+   This directive overrides the named symbols default visibility (which
+is set by their binding: local, global or weak).  The directive sets the
+visibility to 'hidden' which means that the symbols are not visible to
+other components.  Such symbols are always considered to be 'protected'
+as well.
+
+7.52 '.hword EXPRESSIONS'
+=========================
+
+This expects zero or more EXPRESSIONS, and emits a 16 bit number for
+each.
+
+   This directive is a synonym for '.short'.
+
+7.53 '.ident'
+=============
+
+This directive is used by some assemblers to place tags in object files.
+The behavior of this directive varies depending on the target.  When
+using the a.out object file format, 'as' simply accepts the directive
+for source-file compatibility with existing assemblers, but does not
+emit anything for it.  When using COFF, comments are emitted to the
+'.comment' or '.rdata' section, depending on the target.  When using
+ELF, comments are emitted to the '.comment' section.
+
+7.54 '.if ABSOLUTE EXPRESSION'
+==============================
+
+'.if' marks the beginning of a section of code which is only considered
+part of the source program being assembled if the argument (which must
+be an ABSOLUTE EXPRESSION) is non-zero.  The end of the conditional
+section of code must be marked by '.endif' (*note '.endif': Endif.);
+optionally, you may include code for the alternative condition, flagged
+by '.else' (*note '.else': Else.).  If you have several conditions to
+check, '.elseif' may be used to avoid nesting blocks if/else within each
+subsequent '.else' block.
+
+   The following variants of '.if' are also supported:
+'.ifdef SYMBOL'
+     Assembles the following section of code if the specified SYMBOL has
+     been defined.  Note a symbol which has been referenced but not yet
+     defined is considered to be undefined.
+
+'.ifb TEXT'
+     Assembles the following section of code if the operand is blank
+     (empty).
+
+'.ifc STRING1,STRING2'
+     Assembles the following section of code if the two strings are the
+     same.  The strings may be optionally quoted with single quotes.  If
+     they are not quoted, the first string stops at the first comma, and
+     the second string stops at the end of the line.  Strings which
+     contain whitespace should be quoted.  The string comparison is case
+     sensitive.
+
+'.ifeq ABSOLUTE EXPRESSION'
+     Assembles the following section of code if the argument is zero.
+
+'.ifeqs STRING1,STRING2'
+     Another form of '.ifc'.  The strings must be quoted using double
+     quotes.
+
+'.ifge ABSOLUTE EXPRESSION'
+     Assembles the following section of code if the argument is greater
+     than or equal to zero.
+
+'.ifgt ABSOLUTE EXPRESSION'
+     Assembles the following section of code if the argument is greater
+     than zero.
+
+'.ifle ABSOLUTE EXPRESSION'
+     Assembles the following section of code if the argument is less
+     than or equal to zero.
+
+'.iflt ABSOLUTE EXPRESSION'
+     Assembles the following section of code if the argument is less
+     than zero.
+
+'.ifnb TEXT'
+     Like '.ifb', but the sense of the test is reversed: this assembles
+     the following section of code if the operand is non-blank
+     (non-empty).
+
+'.ifnc STRING1,STRING2.'
+     Like '.ifc', but the sense of the test is reversed: this assembles
+     the following section of code if the two strings are not the same.
+
+'.ifndef SYMBOL'
+'.ifnotdef SYMBOL'
+     Assembles the following section of code if the specified SYMBOL has
+     not been defined.  Both spelling variants are equivalent.  Note a
+     symbol which has been referenced but not yet defined is considered
+     to be undefined.
+
+'.ifne ABSOLUTE EXPRESSION'
+     Assembles the following section of code if the argument is not
+     equal to zero (in other words, this is equivalent to '.if').
+
+'.ifnes STRING1,STRING2'
+     Like '.ifeqs', but the sense of the test is reversed: this
+     assembles the following section of code if the two strings are not
+     the same.
+
+7.55 '.incbin "FILE"[,SKIP[,COUNT]]'
+====================================
+
+The 'incbin' directive includes FILE verbatim at the current location.
+You can control the search paths used with the '-I' command-line option
+(*note Command-Line Options: Invoking.).  Quotation marks are required
+around FILE.
+
+   The SKIP argument skips a number of bytes from the start of the FILE.
+The COUNT argument indicates the maximum number of bytes to read.  Note
+that the data is not aligned in any way, so it is the user's
+responsibility to make sure that proper alignment is provided both
+before and after the 'incbin' directive.
+
+7.56 '.include "FILE"'
+======================
+
+This directive provides a way to include supporting files at specified
+points in your source program.  The code from FILE is assembled as if it
+followed the point of the '.include'; when the end of the included file
+is reached, assembly of the original file continues.  You can control
+the search paths used with the '-I' command-line option (*note
+Command-Line Options: Invoking.).  Quotation marks are required around
+FILE.
+
+7.57 '.int EXPRESSIONS'
+=======================
+
+Expect zero or more EXPRESSIONS, of any section, separated by commas.
+For each expression, emit a number that, at run time, is the value of
+that expression.  The byte order and bit size of the number depends on
+what kind of target the assembly is for.
+
+7.58 '.internal NAMES'
+======================
+
+This is one of the ELF visibility directives.  The other two are
+'.hidden' (*note '.hidden': Hidden.) and '.protected' (*note
+'.protected': Protected.).
+
+   This directive overrides the named symbols default visibility (which
+is set by their binding: local, global or weak).  The directive sets the
+visibility to 'internal' which means that the symbols are considered to
+be 'hidden' (i.e., not visible to other components), and that some
+extra, processor specific processing must also be performed upon the
+symbols as well.
+
+7.59 '.irp SYMBOL,VALUES'...
+============================
+
+Evaluate a sequence of statements assigning different values to SYMBOL.
+The sequence of statements starts at the '.irp' directive, and is
+terminated by an '.endr' directive.  For each VALUE, SYMBOL is set to
+VALUE, and the sequence of statements is assembled.  If no VALUE is
+listed, the sequence of statements is assembled once, with SYMBOL set to
+the null string.  To refer to SYMBOL within the sequence of statements,
+use \SYMBOL.
+
+   For example, assembling
+
+             .irp    param,1,2,3
+             move    d\param,sp@-
+             .endr
+
+   is equivalent to assembling
+
+             move    d1,sp@-
+             move    d2,sp@-
+             move    d3,sp@-
+
+   For some caveats with the spelling of SYMBOL, see also *note Macro::.
+
+7.60 '.irpc SYMBOL,VALUES'...
+=============================
+
+Evaluate a sequence of statements assigning different values to SYMBOL.
+The sequence of statements starts at the '.irpc' directive, and is
+terminated by an '.endr' directive.  For each character in VALUE, SYMBOL
+is set to the character, and the sequence of statements is assembled.
+If no VALUE is listed, the sequence of statements is assembled once,
+with SYMBOL set to the null string.  To refer to SYMBOL within the
+sequence of statements, use \SYMBOL.
+
+   For example, assembling
+
+             .irpc    param,123
+             move    d\param,sp@-
+             .endr
+
+   is equivalent to assembling
+
+             move    d1,sp@-
+             move    d2,sp@-
+             move    d3,sp@-
+
+   For some caveats with the spelling of SYMBOL, see also the discussion
+at *Note Macro::.
+
+7.61 '.lcomm SYMBOL , LENGTH'
+=============================
+
+Reserve LENGTH (an absolute expression) bytes for a local common denoted
+by SYMBOL.  The section and value of SYMBOL are those of the new local
+common.  The addresses are allocated in the bss section, so that at
+run-time the bytes start off zeroed.  SYMBOL is not declared global
+(*note '.global': Global.), so is normally not visible to 'ld'.
+
+7.62 '.lflags'
+==============
+
+'as' accepts this directive, for compatibility with other assemblers,
+but ignores it.
+
+7.63 '.line LINE-NUMBER'
+========================
+
+Even though this is a directive associated with the 'a.out' or 'b.out'
+object-code formats, 'as' still recognizes it when producing COFF
+output, and treats '.line' as though it were the COFF '.ln' _if_ it is
+found outside a '.def'/'.endef' pair.
+
+   Inside a '.def', '.line' is, instead, one of the directives used by
+compilers to generate auxiliary symbol information for debugging.
+
+7.64 '.linkonce [TYPE]'
+=======================
+
+Mark the current section so that the linker only includes a single copy
+of it.  This may be used to include the same section in several
+different object files, but ensure that the linker will only include it
+once in the final output file.  The '.linkonce' pseudo-op must be used
+for each instance of the section.  Duplicate sections are detected based
+on the section name, so it should be unique.
+
+   This directive is only supported by a few object file formats; as of
+this writing, the only object file format which supports it is the
+Portable Executable format used on Windows NT.
+
+   The TYPE argument is optional.  If specified, it must be one of the
+following strings.  For example:
+     .linkonce same_size
+   Not all types may be supported on all object file formats.
+
+'discard'
+     Silently discard duplicate sections.  This is the default.
+
+'one_only'
+     Warn if there are duplicate sections, but still keep only one copy.
+
+'same_size'
+     Warn if any of the duplicates have different sizes.
+
+'same_contents'
+     Warn if any of the duplicates do not have exactly the same
+     contents.
+
+7.65 '.ln LINE-NUMBER'
+======================
+
+'.ln' is a synonym for '.line'.
+
+7.66 '.mri VAL'
+===============
+
+If VAL is non-zero, this tells 'as' to enter MRI mode.  If VAL is zero,
+this tells 'as' to exit MRI mode.  This change affects code assembled
+until the next '.mri' directive, or until the end of the file.  *Note
+MRI mode: M.
+
+7.67 '.list'
+============
+
+Control (in conjunction with the '.nolist' directive) whether or not
+assembly listings are generated.  These two directives maintain an
+internal counter (which is zero initially).  '.list' increments the
+counter, and '.nolist' decrements it.  Assembly listings are generated
+whenever the counter is greater than zero.
+
+   By default, listings are disabled.  When you enable them (with the
+'-a' command line option; *note Command-Line Options: Invoking.), the
+initial value of the listing counter is one.
+
+7.68 '.long EXPRESSIONS'
+========================
+
+'.long' is the same as '.int'.  *Note '.int': Int.
+
+7.69 '.macro'
+=============
+
+The commands '.macro' and '.endm' allow you to define macros that
+generate assembly output.  For example, this definition specifies a
+macro 'sum' that puts a sequence of numbers into memory:
+
+             .macro  sum from=0, to=5
+             .long   \from
+             .if     \to-\from
+             sum     "(\from+1)",\to
+             .endif
+             .endm
+
+With that definition, 'SUM 0,5' is equivalent to this assembly input:
+
+             .long   0
+             .long   1
+             .long   2
+             .long   3
+             .long   4
+             .long   5
+
+'.macro MACNAME'
+'.macro MACNAME MACARGS ...'
+     Begin the definition of a macro called MACNAME.  If your macro
+     definition requires arguments, specify their names after the macro
+     name, separated by commas or spaces.  You can qualify the macro
+     argument to indicate whether all invocations must specify a
+     non-blank value (through ':'req''), or whether it takes all of the
+     remaining arguments (through ':'vararg'').  You can supply a
+     default value for any macro argument by following the name with
+     '=DEFLT'.  You cannot define two macros with the same MACNAME
+     unless it has been subject to the '.purgem' directive (*note
+     Purgem::) between the two definitions.  For example, these are all
+     valid '.macro' statements:
+
+     '.macro comm'
+          Begin the definition of a macro called 'comm', which takes no
+          arguments.
+
+     '.macro plus1 p, p1'
+     '.macro plus1 p p1'
+          Either statement begins the definition of a macro called
+          'plus1', which takes two arguments; within the macro
+          definition, write '\p' or '\p1' to evaluate the arguments.
+
+     '.macro reserve_str p1=0 p2'
+          Begin the definition of a macro called 'reserve_str', with two
+          arguments.  The first argument has a default value, but not
+          the second.  After the definition is complete, you can call
+          the macro either as 'reserve_str A,B' (with '\p1' evaluating
+          to A and '\p2' evaluating to B), or as 'reserve_str ,B' (with
+          '\p1' evaluating as the default, in this case '0', and '\p2'
+          evaluating to B).
+
+     '.macro m p1:req, p2=0, p3:vararg'
+          Begin the definition of a macro called 'm', with at least
+          three arguments.  The first argument must always have a value
+          specified, but not the second, which instead has a default
+          value.  The third formal will get assigned all remaining
+          arguments specified at invocation time.
+
+          When you call a macro, you can specify the argument values
+          either by position, or by keyword.  For example, 'sum 9,17' is
+          equivalent to 'sum to=17, from=9'.
+
+     Note that since each of the MACARGS can be an identifier exactly as
+     any other one permitted by the target architecture, there may be
+     occasional problems if the target hand-crafts special meanings to
+     certain characters when they occur in a special position.  For
+     example, if the colon (':') is generally permitted to be part of a
+     symbol name, but the architecture specific code special-cases it
+     when occurring as the final character of a symbol (to denote a
+     label), then the macro parameter replacement code will have no way
+     of knowing that and consider the whole construct (including the
+     colon) an identifier, and check only this identifier for being the
+     subject to parameter substitution.  So for example this macro
+     definition:
+
+          	.macro label l
+          \l:
+          	.endm
+
+     might not work as expected.  Invoking 'label foo' might not create
+     a label called 'foo' but instead just insert the text '\l:' into
+     the assembler source, probably generating an error about an
+     unrecognised identifier.
+
+     Similarly problems might occur with the period character ('.')
+     which is often allowed inside opcode names (and hence identifier
+     names).  So for example constructing a macro to build an opcode
+     from a base name and a length specifier like this:
+
+          	.macro opcode base length
+                  \base.\length
+          	.endm
+
+     and invoking it as 'opcode store l' will not create a 'store.l'
+     instruction but instead generate some kind of error as the
+     assembler tries to interpret the text '\base.\length'.
+
+     There are several possible ways around this problem:
+
+     'Insert white space'
+          If it is possible to use white space characters then this is
+          the simplest solution.  eg:
+
+               	.macro label l
+               \l :
+               	.endm
+
+     'Use '\()''
+          The string '\()' can be used to separate the end of a macro
+          argument from the following text.  eg:
+
+               	.macro opcode base length
+                       \base\().\length
+               	.endm
+
+     'Use the alternate macro syntax mode'
+          In the alternative macro syntax mode the ampersand character
+          ('&') can be used as a separator.  eg:
+
+               	.altmacro
+               	.macro label l
+               l&:
+               	.endm
+
+     Note: this problem of correctly identifying string parameters to
+     pseudo ops also applies to the identifiers used in '.irp' (*note
+     Irp::) and '.irpc' (*note Irpc::) as well.
+
+'.endm'
+     Mark the end of a macro definition.
+
+'.exitm'
+     Exit early from the current macro definition.
+
+'\@'
+     'as' maintains a counter of how many macros it has executed in this
+     pseudo-variable; you can copy that number to your output with '\@',
+     but _only within a macro definition_.
+
+'LOCAL NAME [ , ... ]'
+     _Warning: 'LOCAL' is only available if you select "alternate macro
+     syntax" with '--alternate' or '.altmacro'._  *Note '.altmacro':
+     Altmacro.
+
+7.70 '.altmacro'
+================
+
+Enable alternate macro mode, enabling:
+
+'LOCAL NAME [ , ... ]'
+     One additional directive, 'LOCAL', is available.  It is used to
+     generate a string replacement for each of the NAME arguments, and
+     replace any instances of NAME in each macro expansion.  The
+     replacement string is unique in the assembly, and different for
+     each separate macro expansion.  'LOCAL' allows you to write macros
+     that define symbols, without fear of conflict between separate
+     macro expansions.
+
+'String delimiters'
+     You can write strings delimited in these other ways besides
+     '"STRING"':
+
+     ''STRING''
+          You can delimit strings with single-quote characters.
+
+     '<STRING>'
+          You can delimit strings with matching angle brackets.
+
+'single-character string escape'
+     To include any single character literally in a string (even if the
+     character would otherwise have some special meaning), you can
+     prefix the character with '!' (an exclamation mark).  For example,
+     you can write '<4.3 !> 5.4!!>' to get the literal text '4.3 >
+     5.4!'.
+
+'Expression results as strings'
+     You can write '%EXPR' to evaluate the expression EXPR and use the
+     result as a string.
+
+7.71 '.noaltmacro'
+==================
+
+Disable alternate macro mode.  *Note Altmacro::.
+
+7.72 '.nolist'
+==============
+
+Control (in conjunction with the '.list' directive) whether or not
+assembly listings are generated.  These two directives maintain an
+internal counter (which is zero initially).  '.list' increments the
+counter, and '.nolist' decrements it.  Assembly listings are generated
+whenever the counter is greater than zero.
+
+7.73 '.octa BIGNUMS'
+====================
+
+This directive expects zero or more bignums, separated by commas.  For
+each bignum, it emits a 16-byte integer.
+
+   The term "octa" comes from contexts in which a "word" is two bytes;
+hence _octa_-word for 16 bytes.
+
+7.74 '.org NEW-LC , FILL'
+=========================
+
+Advance the location counter of the current section to NEW-LC.  NEW-LC
+is either an absolute expression or an expression with the same section
+as the current subsection.  That is, you can't use '.org' to cross
+sections: if NEW-LC has the wrong section, the '.org' directive is
+ignored.  To be compatible with former assemblers, if the section of
+NEW-LC is absolute, 'as' issues a warning, then pretends the section of
+NEW-LC is the same as the current subsection.
+
+   '.org' may only increase the location counter, or leave it unchanged;
+you cannot use '.org' to move the location counter backwards.
+
+   Because 'as' tries to assemble programs in one pass, NEW-LC may not
+be undefined.  If you really detest this restriction we eagerly await a
+chance to share your improved assembler.
+
+   Beware that the origin is relative to the start of the section, not
+to the start of the subsection.  This is compatible with other people's
+assemblers.
+
+   When the location counter (of the current subsection) is advanced,
+the intervening bytes are filled with FILL which should be an absolute
+expression.  If the comma and FILL are omitted, FILL defaults to zero.
+
+7.75 '.p2align[wl] ABS-EXPR, ABS-EXPR, ABS-EXPR'
+================================================
+
+Pad the location counter (in the current subsection) to a particular
+storage boundary.  The first expression (which must be absolute) is the
+number of low-order zero bits the location counter must have after
+advancement.  For example '.p2align 3' advances the location counter
+until it a multiple of 8.  If the location counter is already a multiple
+of 8, no change is needed.
+
+   The second expression (also absolute) gives the fill value to be
+stored in the padding bytes.  It (and the comma) may be omitted.  If it
+is omitted, the padding bytes are normally zero.  However, on some
+systems, if the section is marked as containing code and the fill value
+is omitted, the space is filled with no-op instructions.
+
+   The third expression is also absolute, and is also optional.  If it
+is present, it is the maximum number of bytes that should be skipped by
+this alignment directive.  If doing the alignment would require skipping
+more bytes than the specified maximum, then the alignment is not done at
+all.  You can omit the fill value (the second argument) entirely by
+simply using two commas after the required alignment; this can be useful
+if you want the alignment to be filled with no-op instructions when
+appropriate.
+
+   The '.p2alignw' and '.p2alignl' directives are variants of the
+'.p2align' directive.  The '.p2alignw' directive treats the fill pattern
+as a two byte word value.  The '.p2alignl' directives treats the fill
+pattern as a four byte longword value.  For example, '.p2alignw
+2,0x368d' will align to a multiple of 4.  If it skips two bytes, they
+will be filled in with the value 0x368d (the exact placement of the
+bytes depends upon the endianness of the processor).  If it skips 1 or 3
+bytes, the fill value is undefined.
+
+7.76 '.previous'
+================
+
+This is one of the ELF section stack manipulation directives.  The
+others are '.section' (*note Section::), '.subsection' (*note
+SubSection::), '.pushsection' (*note PushSection::), and '.popsection'
+(*note PopSection::).
+
+   This directive swaps the current section (and subsection) with most
+recently referenced section (and subsection) prior to this one.
+Multiple '.previous' directives in a row will flip between two sections
+(and their subsections).
+
+   In terms of the section stack, this directive swaps the current
+section with the top section on the section stack.
+
+7.77 '.popsection'
+==================
+
+This is one of the ELF section stack manipulation directives.  The
+others are '.section' (*note Section::), '.subsection' (*note
+SubSection::), '.pushsection' (*note PushSection::), and '.previous'
+(*note Previous::).
+
+   This directive replaces the current section (and subsection) with the
+top section (and subsection) on the section stack.  This section is
+popped off the stack.
+
+7.78 '.print STRING'
+====================
+
+'as' will print STRING on the standard output during assembly.  You must
+put STRING in double quotes.
+
+7.79 '.protected NAMES'
+=======================
+
+This is one of the ELF visibility directives.  The other two are
+'.hidden' (*note Hidden::) and '.internal' (*note Internal::).
+
+   This directive overrides the named symbols default visibility (which
+is set by their binding: local, global or weak).  The directive sets the
+visibility to 'protected' which means that any references to the symbols
+from within the components that defines them must be resolved to the
+definition in that component, even if a definition in another component
+would normally preempt this.
+
+7.80 '.psize LINES , COLUMNS'
+=============================
+
+Use this directive to declare the number of lines--and, optionally, the
+number of columns--to use for each page, when generating listings.
+
+   If you do not use '.psize', listings use a default line-count of 60.
+You may omit the comma and COLUMNS specification; the default width is
+200 columns.
+
+   'as' generates formfeeds whenever the specified number of lines is
+exceeded (or whenever you explicitly request one, using '.eject').
+
+   If you specify LINES as '0', no formfeeds are generated save those
+explicitly specified with '.eject'.
+
+7.81 '.purgem NAME'
+===================
+
+Undefine the macro NAME, so that later uses of the string will not be
+expanded.  *Note Macro::.
+
+7.82 '.pushsection NAME , SUBSECTION'
+=====================================
+
+This is one of the ELF section stack manipulation directives.  The
+others are '.section' (*note Section::), '.subsection' (*note
+SubSection::), '.popsection' (*note PopSection::), and '.previous'
+(*note Previous::).
+
+   This directive pushes the current section (and subsection) onto the
+top of the section stack, and then replaces the current section and
+subsection with 'name' and 'subsection'.
+
+7.83 '.quad BIGNUMS'
+====================
+
+'.quad' expects zero or more bignums, separated by commas.  For each
+bignum, it emits an 8-byte integer.  If the bignum won't fit in 8 bytes,
+it prints a warning message; and just takes the lowest order 8 bytes of
+the bignum.
+
+   The term "quad" comes from contexts in which a "word" is two bytes;
+hence _quad_-word for 8 bytes.
+
+7.84 '.reloc OFFSET, RELOC_NAME[, EXPRESSION]'
+==============================================
+
+Generate a relocation at OFFSET of type RELOC_NAME with value
+EXPRESSION.  If OFFSET is a number, the relocation is generated in the
+current section.  If OFFSET is an expression that resolves to a symbol
+plus offset, the relocation is generated in the given symbol's section.
+EXPRESSION, if present, must resolve to a symbol plus addend or to an
+absolute value, but note that not all targets support an addend.  e.g.
+ELF REL targets such as i386 store an addend in the section contents
+rather than in the relocation.  This low level interface does not
+support addends stored in the section.
+
+7.85 '.rept COUNT'
+==================
+
+Repeat the sequence of lines between the '.rept' directive and the next
+'.endr' directive COUNT times.
+
+   For example, assembling
+
+             .rept   3
+             .long   0
+             .endr
+
+   is equivalent to assembling
+
+             .long   0
+             .long   0
+             .long   0
+
+7.86 '.sbttl "SUBHEADING"'
+==========================
+
+Use SUBHEADING as the title (third line, immediately after the title
+line) when generating assembly listings.
+
+   This directive affects subsequent pages, as well as the current page
+if it appears within ten lines of the top of a page.
+
+7.87 '.section NAME'
+====================
+
+Use the '.section' directive to assemble the following code into a
+section named NAME.
+
+   This directive is only supported for targets that actually support
+arbitrarily named sections; on 'a.out' targets, for example, it is not
+accepted, even with a standard 'a.out' section name.
+
+   This is one of the ELF section stack manipulation directives.  The
+others are '.subsection' (*note SubSection::), '.pushsection' (*note
+PushSection::), '.popsection' (*note PopSection::), and '.previous'
+(*note Previous::).
+
+   For ELF targets, the '.section' directive is used like this:
+
+     .section NAME [, "FLAGS"[, @TYPE[,FLAG_SPECIFIC_ARGUMENTS]]]
+
+   The optional FLAGS argument is a quoted string which may contain any
+combination of the following characters:
+'a'
+     section is allocatable
+'w'
+     section is writable
+'x'
+     section is executable
+'M'
+     section is mergeable
+'S'
+     section contains zero terminated strings
+'G'
+     section is a member of a section group
+'T'
+     section is used for thread-local-storage
+
+   The optional TYPE argument may contain one of the following
+constants:
+'@progbits'
+     section contains data
+'@nobits'
+     section does not contain data (i.e., section only occupies space)
+'@note'
+     section contains data which is used by things other than the
+     program
+'@init_array'
+     section contains an array of pointers to init functions
+'@fini_array'
+     section contains an array of pointers to finish functions
+'@preinit_array'
+     section contains an array of pointers to pre-init functions
+
+   Many targets only support the first three section types.
+
+   Note on targets where the '@' character is the start of a comment (eg
+ARM) then another character is used instead.  For example the ARM port
+uses the '%' character.
+
+   If FLAGS contains the 'M' symbol then the TYPE argument must be
+specified as well as an extra argument--ENTSIZE--like this:
+
+     .section NAME , "FLAGS"M, @TYPE, ENTSIZE
+
+   Sections with the 'M' flag but not 'S' flag must contain fixed size
+constants, each ENTSIZE octets long.  Sections with both 'M' and 'S'
+must contain zero terminated strings where each character is ENTSIZE
+bytes long.  The linker may remove duplicates within sections with the
+same name, same entity size and same flags.  ENTSIZE must be an absolute
+expression.
+
+   If FLAGS contains the 'G' symbol then the TYPE argument must be
+present along with an additional field like this:
+
+     .section NAME , "FLAGS"G, @TYPE, GROUPNAME[, LINKAGE]
+
+   The GROUPNAME field specifies the name of the section group to which
+this particular section belongs.  The optional linkage field can
+contain:
+'comdat'
+     indicates that only one copy of this section should be retained
+'.gnu.linkonce'
+     an alias for comdat
+
+   Note: if both the M and G flags are present then the fields for the
+Merge flag should come first, like this:
+
+     .section NAME , "FLAGS"MG, @TYPE, ENTSIZE, GROUPNAME[, LINKAGE]
+
+   If no flags are specified, the default flags depend upon the section
+name.  If the section name is not recognized, the default will be for
+the section to have none of the above flags: it will not be allocated in
+memory, nor writable, nor executable.  The section will contain data.
+
+   For ELF targets, the assembler supports another type of '.section'
+directive for compatibility with the Solaris assembler:
+
+     .section "NAME"[, FLAGS...]
+
+   Note that the section name is quoted.  There may be a sequence of
+comma separated flags:
+'#alloc'
+     section is allocatable
+'#write'
+     section is writable
+'#execinstr'
+     section is executable
+'#tls'
+     section is used for thread local storage
+
+   This directive replaces the current section and subsection.  See the
+contents of the gas testsuite directory 'gas/testsuite/gas/elf' for some
+examples of how this directive and the other section stack directives
+work.
+
+7.88 '.set SYMBOL, EXPRESSION'
+==============================
+
+Set the value of SYMBOL to EXPRESSION.  This changes SYMBOL's value and
+type to conform to EXPRESSION.  If SYMBOL was flagged as external, it
+remains flagged (*note Symbol Attributes::).
+
+   You may '.set' a symbol many times in the same assembly.
+
+   If you '.set' a global symbol, the value stored in the object file is
+the last value stored into it.
+
+7.89 '.short EXPRESSIONS'
+=========================
+
+This expects zero or more EXPRESSIONS, and emits a 16 bit number for
+each.
+
+7.90 '.single FLONUMS'
+======================
+
+This directive assembles zero or more flonums, separated by commas.  It
+has the same effect as '.float'.
+
+7.91 '.size'
+============
+
+This directive is used to set the size associated with a symbol.
+
+   For ELF targets, the '.size' directive is used like this:
+
+     .size NAME , EXPRESSION
+
+   This directive sets the size associated with a symbol NAME.  The size
+in bytes is computed from EXPRESSION which can make use of label
+arithmetic.  This directive is typically used to set the size of
+function symbols.
+
+7.92 '.sleb128 EXPRESSIONS'
+===========================
+
+SLEB128 stands for "signed little endian base 128."  This is a compact,
+variable length representation of numbers used by the DWARF symbolic
+debugging format.  *Note '.uleb128': Uleb128.
+
+7.93 '.skip SIZE , FILL'
+========================
+
+This directive emits SIZE bytes, each of value FILL.  Both SIZE and FILL
+are absolute expressions.  If the comma and FILL are omitted, FILL is
+assumed to be zero.  This is the same as '.space'.
+
+7.94 '.space SIZE , FILL'
+=========================
+
+This directive emits SIZE bytes, each of value FILL.  Both SIZE and FILL
+are absolute expressions.  If the comma and FILL are omitted, FILL is
+assumed to be zero.  This is the same as '.skip'.
+
+7.95 '.stabd, .stabn, .stabs'
+=============================
+
+There are three directives that begin '.stab'.  All emit symbols (*note
+Symbols::), for use by symbolic debuggers.  The symbols are not entered
+in the 'as' hash table: they cannot be referenced elsewhere in the
+source file.  Up to five fields are required:
+
+STRING
+     This is the symbol's name.  It may contain any character except
+     '\000', so is more general than ordinary symbol names.  Some
+     debuggers used to code arbitrarily complex structures into symbol
+     names using this field.
+
+TYPE
+     An absolute expression.  The symbol's type is set to the low 8 bits
+     of this expression.  Any bit pattern is permitted, but 'ld' and
+     debuggers choke on silly bit patterns.
+
+OTHER
+     An absolute expression.  The symbol's "other" attribute is set to
+     the low 8 bits of this expression.
+
+DESC
+     An absolute expression.  The symbol's descriptor is set to the low
+     16 bits of this expression.
+
+VALUE
+     An absolute expression which becomes the symbol's value.
+
+   If a warning is detected while reading a '.stabd', '.stabn', or
+'.stabs' statement, the symbol has probably already been created; you
+get a half-formed symbol in your object file.  This is compatible with
+earlier assemblers!
+
+'.stabd TYPE , OTHER , DESC'
+
+     The "name" of the symbol generated is not even an empty string.  It
+     is a null pointer, for compatibility.  Older assemblers used a null
+     pointer so they didn't waste space in object files with empty
+     strings.
+
+     The symbol's value is set to the location counter, relocatably.
+     When your program is linked, the value of this symbol is the
+     address of the location counter when the '.stabd' was assembled.
+
+'.stabn TYPE , OTHER , DESC , VALUE'
+     The name of the symbol is set to the empty string '""'.
+
+'.stabs STRING , TYPE , OTHER , DESC , VALUE'
+     All five fields are specified.
+
+7.96 '.string' "STR"
+====================
+
+Copy the characters in STR to the object file.  You may specify more
+than one string to copy, separated by commas.  Unless otherwise
+specified for a particular machine, the assembler marks the end of each
+string with a 0 byte.  You can use any of the escape sequences described
+in *note Strings: Strings.
+
+7.97 '.struct EXPRESSION'
+=========================
+
+Switch to the absolute section, and set the section offset to
+EXPRESSION, which must be an absolute expression.  You might use this as
+follows:
+             .struct 0
+     field1:
+             .struct field1 + 4
+     field2:
+             .struct field2 + 4
+     field3:
+   This would define the symbol 'field1' to have the value 0, the symbol
+'field2' to have the value 4, and the symbol 'field3' to have the value
+8.  Assembly would be left in the absolute section, and you would need
+to use a '.section' directive of some sort to change to some other
+section before further assembly.
+
+7.98 '.subsection NAME'
+=======================
+
+This is one of the ELF section stack manipulation directives.  The
+others are '.section' (*note Section::), '.pushsection' (*note
+PushSection::), '.popsection' (*note PopSection::), and '.previous'
+(*note Previous::).
+
+   This directive replaces the current subsection with 'name'.  The
+current section is not changed.  The replaced subsection is put onto the
+section stack in place of the then current top of stack subsection.
+
+7.99 '.symver'
+==============
+
+Use the '.symver' directive to bind symbols to specific version nodes
+within a source file.  This is only supported on ELF platforms, and is
+typically used when assembling files to be linked into a shared library.
+There are cases where it may make sense to use this in objects to be
+bound into an application itself so as to override a versioned symbol
+from a shared library.
+
+   For ELF targets, the '.symver' directive can be used like this:
+     .symver NAME, NAME2@NODENAME
+   If the symbol NAME is defined within the file being assembled, the
+'.symver' directive effectively creates a symbol alias with the name
+NAME2@NODENAME, and in fact the main reason that we just don't try and
+create a regular alias is that the @ character isn't permitted in symbol
+names.  The NAME2 part of the name is the actual name of the symbol by
+which it will be externally referenced.  The name NAME itself is merely
+a name of convenience that is used so that it is possible to have
+definitions for multiple versions of a function within a single source
+file, and so that the compiler can unambiguously know which version of a
+function is being mentioned.  The NODENAME portion of the alias should
+be the name of a node specified in the version script supplied to the
+linker when building a shared library.  If you are attempting to
+override a versioned symbol from a shared library, then NODENAME should
+correspond to the nodename of the symbol you are trying to override.
+
+   If the symbol NAME is not defined within the file being assembled,
+all references to NAME will be changed to NAME2@NODENAME.  If no
+reference to NAME is made, NAME2@NODENAME will be removed from the
+symbol table.
+
+   Another usage of the '.symver' directive is:
+     .symver NAME, NAME2@@NODENAME
+   In this case, the symbol NAME must exist and be defined within the
+file being assembled.  It is similar to NAME2@NODENAME.  The difference
+is NAME2@@NODENAME will also be used to resolve references to NAME2 by
+the linker.
+
+   The third usage of the '.symver' directive is:
+     .symver NAME, NAME2@@@NODENAME
+   When NAME is not defined within the file being assembled, it is
+treated as NAME2@NODENAME.  When NAME is defined within the file being
+assembled, the symbol name, NAME, will be changed to NAME2@@NODENAME.
+
+7.100 '.text SUBSECTION'
+========================
+
+Tells 'as' to assemble the following statements onto the end of the text
+subsection numbered SUBSECTION, which is an absolute expression.  If
+SUBSECTION is omitted, subsection number zero is used.
+
+7.101 '.title "HEADING"'
+========================
+
+Use HEADING as the title (second line, immediately after the source file
+name and pagenumber) when generating assembly listings.
+
+   This directive affects subsequent pages, as well as the current page
+if it appears within ten lines of the top of a page.
+
+7.102 '.type'
+=============
+
+This directive is used to set the type of a symbol.
+
+   For ELF targets, the '.type' directive is used like this:
+
+     .type NAME , TYPE DESCRIPTION
+
+   This sets the type of symbol NAME to be either a function symbol or
+an object symbol.  There are five different syntaxes supported for the
+TYPE DESCRIPTION field, in order to provide compatibility with various
+other assemblers.
+
+   Because some of the characters used in these syntaxes (such as '@'
+and '#') are comment characters for some architectures, some of the
+syntaxes below do not work on all architectures.  The first variant will
+be accepted by the GNU assembler on all architectures so that variant
+should be used for maximum portability, if you do not need to assemble
+your code with other assemblers.
+
+   The syntaxes supported are:
+
+       .type <name> STT_FUNCTION
+       .type <name> STT_OBJECT
+
+       .type <name>,#function
+       .type <name>,#object
+
+       .type <name>,@function
+       .type <name>,@object
+
+       .type <name>,%function
+       .type <name>,%object
+
+       .type <name>,"function"
+       .type <name>,"object"
+
+7.103 '.uleb128 EXPRESSIONS'
+============================
+
+ULEB128 stands for "unsigned little endian base 128."  This is a
+compact, variable length representation of numbers used by the DWARF
+symbolic debugging format.  *Note '.sleb128': Sleb128.
+
+7.104 '.version "STRING"'
+=========================
+
+This directive creates a '.note' section and places into it an ELF
+formatted note of type NT_VERSION. The note's name is set to 'string'.
+
+7.105 '.vtable_entry TABLE, OFFSET'
+===================================
+
+This directive finds or creates a symbol 'table' and creates a
+'VTABLE_ENTRY' relocation for it with an addend of 'offset'.
+
+7.106 '.vtable_inherit CHILD, PARENT'
+=====================================
+
+This directive finds the symbol 'child' and finds or creates the symbol
+'parent' and then creates a 'VTABLE_INHERIT' relocation for the parent
+whose addend is the value of the child symbol.  As a special case the
+parent name of '0' is treated as referring to the '*ABS*' section.
+
+7.107 '.warning "STRING"'
+=========================
+
+Similar to the directive '.error' (*note '.error "STRING"': Error.), but
+just emits a warning.
+
+7.108 '.weak NAMES'
+===================
+
+This directive sets the weak attribute on the comma separated list of
+symbol 'names'.  If the symbols do not already exist, they will be
+created.
+
+   On COFF targets other than PE, weak symbols are a GNU extension.
+This directive sets the weak attribute on the comma separated list of
+symbol 'names'.  If the symbols do not already exist, they will be
+created.
+
+   On the PE target, weak symbols are supported natively as weak
+aliases.  When a weak symbol is created that is not an alias, GAS
+creates an alternate symbol to hold the default value.
+
+7.109 '.weakref ALIAS, TARGET'
+==============================
+
+This directive creates an alias to the target symbol that enables the
+symbol to be referenced with weak-symbol semantics, but without actually
+making it weak.  If direct references or definitions of the symbol are
+present, then the symbol will not be weak, but if all references to it
+are through weak references, the symbol will be marked as weak in the
+symbol table.
+
+   The effect is equivalent to moving all references to the alias to a
+separate assembly source file, renaming the alias to the symbol in it,
+declaring the symbol as weak there, and running a reloadable link to
+merge the object files resulting from the assembly of the new source
+file and the old source file that had the references to the alias
+removed.
+
+   The alias itself never makes to the symbol table, and is entirely
+handled within the assembler.
+
+7.110 '.word EXPRESSIONS'
+=========================
+
+This directive expects zero or more EXPRESSIONS, of any section,
+separated by commas.  For each expression, 'as' emits a 32-bit number.
+
+7.111 Deprecated Directives
+===========================
+
+One day these directives won't work.  They are included for
+compatibility with older assemblers.
+.abort
+.line
+
+8 ARM Dependent Features
+************************
+
+8.1 Options
+===========
+
+'-mcpu=PROCESSOR[+EXTENSION...]'
+     This option specifies the target processor.  The assembler will
+     issue an error message if an attempt is made to assemble an
+     instruction which will not execute on the target processor.  The
+     following processor names are recognized: 'arm1', 'arm2', 'arm250',
+     'arm3', 'arm6', 'arm60', 'arm600', 'arm610', 'arm620', 'arm7',
+     'arm7m', 'arm7d', 'arm7dm', 'arm7di', 'arm7dmi', 'arm70', 'arm700',
+     'arm700i', 'arm710', 'arm710t', 'arm720', 'arm720t', 'arm740t',
+     'arm710c', 'arm7100', 'arm7500', 'arm7500fe', 'arm7t', 'arm7tdmi',
+     'arm7tdmi-s', 'arm8', 'arm810', 'strongarm', 'strongarm1',
+     'strongarm110', 'strongarm1100', 'strongarm1110', 'arm9', 'arm920',
+     'arm920t', 'arm922t', 'arm940t', 'arm9tdmi', 'arm9e', 'arm926e',
+     'arm926ej-s', 'arm946e-r0', 'arm946e', 'arm946e-s', 'arm966e-r0',
+     'arm966e', 'arm966e-s', 'arm968e-s', 'arm10t', 'arm10tdmi',
+     'arm10e', 'arm1020', 'arm1020t', 'arm1020e', 'arm1022e',
+     'arm1026ej-s', 'arm1136j-s', 'arm1136jf-s', 'arm1156t2-s',
+     'arm1156t2f-s', 'arm1176jz-s', 'arm1176jzf-s', 'mpcore',
+     'mpcorenovfp', 'cortex-a8', 'cortex-r4', 'cortex-m3', 'ep9312'
+     (ARM920 with Cirrus Maverick coprocessor), 'i80200' (Intel XScale
+     processor) 'iwmmxt' (Intel(r) XScale processor with Wireless
+     MMX(tm) technology coprocessor) and 'xscale'.  The special name
+     'all' may be used to allow the assembler to accept instructions
+     valid for any ARM processor.
+
+     In addition to the basic instruction set, the assembler can be told
+     to accept various extension mnemonics that extend the processor
+     using the co-processor instruction space.  For example,
+     '-mcpu=arm920+maverick' is equivalent to specifying '-mcpu=ep9312'.
+     The following extensions are currently supported: '+maverick'
+     '+iwmmxt' and '+xscale'.
+
+'-march=ARCHITECTURE[+EXTENSION...]'
+     This option specifies the target architecture.  The assembler will
+     issue an error message if an attempt is made to assemble an
+     instruction which will not execute on the target architecture.  The
+     following architecture names are recognized: 'armv1', 'armv2',
+     'armv2a', 'armv2s', 'armv3', 'armv3m', 'armv4', 'armv4xm',
+     'armv4t', 'armv4txm', 'armv5', 'armv5t', 'armv5txm', 'armv5te',
+     'armv5texp', 'armv6', 'armv6j', 'armv6k', 'armv6z', 'armv6zk',
+     'armv7', 'armv7-a', 'armv7-r', 'armv7-m', 'iwmmxt' and 'xscale'.
+     If both '-mcpu' and '-march' are specified, the assembler will use
+     the setting for '-mcpu'.
+
+     The architecture option can be extended with the same instruction
+     set extension options as the '-mcpu' option.
+
+'-mfpu=FLOATING-POINT-FORMAT'
+
+     This option specifies the floating point format to assemble for.
+     The assembler will issue an error message if an attempt is made to
+     assemble an instruction which will not execute on the target
+     floating point unit.  The following format options are recognized:
+     'softfpa', 'fpe', 'fpe2', 'fpe3', 'fpa', 'fpa10', 'fpa11',
+     'arm7500fe', 'softvfp', 'softvfp+vfp', 'vfp', 'vfp10', 'vfp10-r0',
+     'vfp9', 'vfpxd', 'arm1020t', 'arm1020e', 'arm1136jf-s' and
+     'maverick'.
+
+     In addition to determining which instructions are assembled, this
+     option also affects the way in which the '.double' assembler
+     directive behaves when assembling little-endian code.
+
+     The default is dependent on the processor selected.  For
+     Architecture 5 or later, the default is to assembler for VFP
+     instructions; for earlier architectures the default is to assemble
+     for FPA instructions.
+
+'-mthumb'
+     This option specifies that the assembler should start assembling
+     Thumb instructions; that is, it should behave as though the file
+     starts with a '.code 16' directive.
+
+'-mthumb-interwork'
+     This option specifies that the output generated by the assembler
+     should be marked as supporting interworking.
+
+'-mapcs [26|32]'
+     This option specifies that the output generated by the assembler
+     should be marked as supporting the indicated version of the Arm
+     Procedure.  Calling Standard.
+
+'-matpcs'
+     This option specifies that the output generated by the assembler
+     should be marked as supporting the Arm/Thumb Procedure Calling
+     Standard.  If enabled this option will cause the assembler to
+     create an empty debugging section in the object file called
+     .arm.atpcs.  Debuggers can use this to determine the ABI being used
+     by.
+
+'-mapcs-float'
+     This indicates the floating point variant of the APCS should be
+     used.  In this variant floating point arguments are passed in FP
+     registers rather than integer registers.
+
+'-mapcs-reentrant'
+     This indicates that the reentrant variant of the APCS should be
+     used.  This variant supports position independent code.
+
+'-mfloat-abi=ABI'
+     This option specifies that the output generated by the assembler
+     should be marked as using specified floating point ABI. The
+     following values are recognized: 'soft', 'softfp' and 'hard'.
+
+'-meabi=VER'
+     This option specifies which EABI version the produced object files
+     should conform to.  The following values are recognized: 'gnu', '4'
+     and '5'.
+
+'-EB'
+     This option specifies that the output generated by the assembler
+     should be marked as being encoded for a big-endian processor.
+
+'-EL'
+     This option specifies that the output generated by the assembler
+     should be marked as being encoded for a little-endian processor.
+
+'-k'
+     This option specifies that the output of the assembler should be
+     marked as position-independent code (PIC).
+
+8.2 Syntax
+==========
+
+8.2.1 Special Characters
+------------------------
+
+The presence of a '@' on a line indicates the start of a comment that
+extends to the end of the current line.  If a '#' appears as the first
+character of a line, the whole line is treated as a comment.
+
+   The ';' character can be used instead of a newline to separate
+statements.
+
+   Either '#' or '$' can be used to indicate immediate operands.
+
+   *TODO* Explain about /data modifier on symbols.
+
+8.2.2 Register Names
+--------------------
+
+*TODO* Explain about ARM register naming, and the predefined names.
+
+8.2.3 ARM relocation generation
+-------------------------------
+
+Specific data relocations can be generated by putting the relocation
+name in parentheses after the symbol name.  For example:
+
+             .word foo(TARGET1)
+
+   This will generate an 'R_ARM_TARGET1' relocation against the symbol
+FOO.  The following relocations are supported: 'GOT', 'GOTOFF',
+'TARGET1', 'TARGET2', 'SBREL', 'TLSGD', 'TLSLDM', 'TLSLDO', 'GOTTPOFF'
+and 'TPOFF'.
+
+   For compatibility with older toolchains the assembler also accepts
+'(PLT)' after branch targets.  This will generate the deprecated
+'R_ARM_PLT32' relocation.
+
+   Relocations for 'MOVW' and 'MOVT' instructions can be generated by
+prefixing the value with '#:lower16:' and '#:upper16' respectively.  For
+example to load the 32-bit address of foo into r0:
+
+             MOVW r0, #:lower16:foo
+             MOVT r0, #:upper16:foo
+
+8.3 Floating Point
+==================
+
+The ARM family uses IEEE floating-point numbers.
+
+8.4 ARM Machine Directives
+==========================
+
+'.align EXPRESSION [, EXPRESSION]'
+     This is the generic .ALIGN directive.  For the ARM however if the
+     first argument is zero (ie no alignment is needed) the assembler
+     will behave as if the argument had been 2 (ie pad to the next four
+     byte boundary).  This is for compatibility with ARM's own
+     assembler.
+
+'NAME .req REGISTER NAME'
+     This creates an alias for REGISTER NAME called NAME.  For example:
+
+                  foo .req r0
+
+'.unreq ALIAS-NAME'
+     This undefines a register alias which was previously defined using
+     the 'req', 'dn' or 'qn' directives.  For example:
+
+                  foo .req r0
+                  .unreq foo
+
+     An error occurs if the name is undefined.  Note - this pseudo op
+     can be used to delete builtin in register name aliases (eg 'r0').
+     This should only be done if it is really necessary.
+
+'NAME .dn REGISTER NAME [.TYPE] [[INDEX]]'
+'NAME .qn REGISTER NAME [.TYPE] [[INDEX]]'
+
+     The 'dn' and 'qn' directives are used to create typed and/or
+     indexed register aliases for use in Advanced SIMD Extension (Neon)
+     instructions.  The former should be used to create aliases of
+     double-precision registers, and the latter to create aliases of
+     quad-precision registers.
+
+     If these directives are used to create typed aliases, those aliases
+     can be used in Neon instructions instead of writing types after the
+     mnemonic or after each operand.  For example:
+
+                  x .dn d2.f32
+                  y .dn d3.f32
+                  z .dn d4.f32[1]
+                  vmul x,y,z
+
+     This is equivalent to writing the following:
+
+                  vmul.f32 d2,d3,d4[1]
+
+     Aliases created using 'dn' or 'qn' can be destroyed using 'unreq'.
+
+'.code [16|32]'
+     This directive selects the instruction set being generated.  The
+     value 16 selects Thumb, with the value 32 selecting ARM.
+
+'.thumb'
+     This performs the same action as .CODE 16.
+
+'.arm'
+     This performs the same action as .CODE 32.
+
+'.force_thumb'
+     This directive forces the selection of Thumb instructions, even if
+     the target processor does not support those instructions
+
+'.thumb_func'
+     This directive specifies that the following symbol is the name of a
+     Thumb encoded function.  This information is necessary in order to
+     allow the assembler and linker to generate correct code for
+     interworking between Arm and Thumb instructions and should be used
+     even if interworking is not going to be performed.  The presence of
+     this directive also implies '.thumb'
+
+     This directive is not neccessary when generating EABI objects.  On
+     these targets the encoding is implicit when generating Thumb code.
+
+'.thumb_set'
+     This performs the equivalent of a '.set' directive in that it
+     creates a symbol which is an alias for another symbol (possibly not
+     yet defined).  This directive also has the added property in that
+     it marks the aliased symbol as being a thumb function entry point,
+     in the same way that the '.thumb_func' directive does.
+
+'.ltorg'
+     This directive causes the current contents of the literal pool to
+     be dumped into the current section (which is assumed to be the
+     .text section) at the current location (aligned to a word
+     boundary).  'GAS' maintains a separate literal pool for each
+     section and each sub-section.  The '.ltorg' directive will only
+     affect the literal pool of the current section and sub-section.  At
+     the end of assembly all remaining, un-empty literal pools will
+     automatically be dumped.
+
+     Note - older versions of 'GAS' would dump the current literal pool
+     any time a section change occurred.  This is no longer done, since
+     it prevents accurate control of the placement of literal pools.
+
+'.pool'
+     This is a synonym for .ltorg.
+
+'.unwind_fnstart'
+     Marks the start of a function with an unwind table entry.
+
+'.unwind_fnend'
+     Marks the end of a function with an unwind table entry.  The unwind
+     index table entry is created when this directive is processed.
+
+     If no personality routine has been specified then standard
+     personality routine 0 or 1 will be used, depending on the number of
+     unwind opcodes required.
+
+'.cantunwind'
+     Prevents unwinding through the current function.  No personality
+     routine or exception table data is required or permitted.
+
+'.personality NAME'
+     Sets the personality routine for the current function to NAME.
+
+'.personalityindex INDEX'
+     Sets the personality routine for the current function to the EABI
+     standard routine number INDEX
+
+'.handlerdata'
+     Marks the end of the current function, and the start of the
+     exception table entry for that function.  Anything between this
+     directive and the '.fnend' directive will be added to the exception
+     table entry.
+
+     Must be preceded by a '.personality' or '.personalityindex'
+     directive.
+
+'.save REGLIST'
+     Generate unwinder annotations to restore the registers in REGLIST.
+     The format of REGLIST is the same as the corresponding
+     store-multiple instruction.
+
+     _core registers_
+            .save {r4, r5, r6, lr}
+            stmfd sp!, {r4, r5, r6, lr}
+     _FPA registers_
+            .save f4, 2
+            sfmfd f4, 2, [sp]!
+     _VFP registers_
+            .save {d8, d9, d10}
+            fstmdx sp!, {d8, d9, d10}
+     _iWMMXt registers_
+            .save {wr10, wr11}
+            wstrd wr11, [sp, #-8]!
+            wstrd wr10, [sp, #-8]!
+          or
+            .save wr11
+            wstrd wr11, [sp, #-8]!
+            .save wr10
+            wstrd wr10, [sp, #-8]!
+
+'.vsave VFP-REGLIST'
+     Generate unwinder annotations to restore the VFP registers in
+     VFP-REGLIST using FLDMD. Also works for VFPv3 registers that are to
+     be restored using VLDM. The format of VFP-REGLIST is the same as
+     the corresponding store-multiple instruction.
+
+     _VFP registers_
+            .vsave {d8, d9, d10}
+            fstmdd sp!, {d8, d9, d10}
+     _VFPv3 registers_
+            .vsave {d15, d16, d17}
+            vstm sp!, {d15, d16, d17}
+
+     Since FLDMX and FSTMX are now deprecated, this directive should be
+     used in favour of '.save' for saving VFP registers for ARMv6 and
+     above.
+
+'.pad #COUNT'
+     Generate unwinder annotations for a stack adjustment of COUNT
+     bytes.  A positive value indicates the function prologue allocated
+     stack space by decrementing the stack pointer.
+
+'.movsp REG [, #OFFSET]'
+     Tell the unwinder that REG contains an offset from the current
+     stack pointer.  If OFFSET is not specified then it is assumed to be
+     zero.
+
+'.setfp FPREG, SPREG [, #OFFSET]'
+     Make all unwinder annotations relaive to a frame pointer.  Without
+     this the unwinder will use offsets from the stack pointer.
+
+     The syntax of this directive is the same as the 'sub' or 'mov'
+     instruction used to set the frame pointer.  SPREG must be either
+     'sp' or mentioned in a previous '.movsp' directive.
+
+          .movsp ip
+          mov ip, sp
+          ...
+          .setfp fp, ip, #4
+          sub fp, ip, #4
+
+'.raw OFFSET, BYTE1, ...'
+     Insert one of more arbitary unwind opcode bytes, which are known to
+     adjust the stack pointer by OFFSET bytes.
+
+     For example '.unwind_raw 4, 0xb1, 0x01' is equivalent to '.save
+     {r0}'
+
+'.cpu NAME'
+     Select the target processor.  Valid values for NAME are the same as
+     for the '-mcpu' commandline option.
+
+'.arch NAME'
+     Select the target architecture.  Valid values for NAME are the same
+     as for the '-march' commandline option.
+
+'.object_arch NAME'
+     Override the architecture recorded in the EABI object attribute
+     section.  Valid values for NAME are the same as for the '.arch'
+     directive.  Typically this is useful when code uses runtime
+     detection of CPU features.
+
+'.fpu NAME'
+     Select the floating point unit to assemble for.  Valid values for
+     NAME are the same as for the '-mfpu' commandline option.
+
+'.eabi_attribute TAG, VALUE'
+     Set the EABI object attribute number TAG to VALUE.  The value is
+     either a 'number', '"string"', or 'number, "string"' depending on
+     the tag.
+
+8.5 Opcodes
+===========
+
+'as' implements all the standard ARM opcodes.  It also implements
+several pseudo opcodes, including several synthetic load instructions.
+
+'NOP'
+            nop
+
+     This pseudo op will always evaluate to a legal ARM instruction that
+     does nothing.  Currently it will evaluate to MOV r0, r0.
+
+'LDR'
+            ldr <register> , = <expression>
+
+     If expression evaluates to a numeric constant then a MOV or MVN
+     instruction will be used in place of the LDR instruction, if the
+     constant can be generated by either of these instructions.
+     Otherwise the constant will be placed into the nearest literal pool
+     (if it not already there) and a PC relative LDR instruction will be
+     generated.
+
+'ADR'
+            adr <register> <label>
+
+     This instruction will load the address of LABEL into the indicated
+     register.  The instruction will evaluate to a PC relative ADD or
+     SUB instruction depending upon where the label is located.  If the
+     label is out of range, or if it is not defined in the same file
+     (and section) as the ADR instruction, then an error will be
+     generated.  This instruction will not make use of the literal pool.
+
+'ADRL'
+            adrl <register> <label>
+
+     This instruction will load the address of LABEL into the indicated
+     register.  The instruction will evaluate to one or two PC relative
+     ADD or SUB instructions depending upon where the label is located.
+     If a second instruction is not needed a NOP instruction will be
+     generated in its place, so that this instruction is always 8 bytes
+     long.
+
+     If the label is out of range, or if it is not defined in the same
+     file (and section) as the ADRL instruction, then an error will be
+     generated.  This instruction will not make use of the literal pool.
+
+   For information on the ARM or Thumb instruction sets, see 'ARM
+Software Development Toolkit Reference Manual', Advanced RISC Machines
+Ltd.
+
+8.6 Mapping Symbols
+===================
+
+The ARM ELF specification requires that special symbols be inserted into
+object files to mark certain features:
+
+'$a'
+     At the start of a region of code containing ARM instructions.
+
+'$t'
+     At the start of a region of code containing THUMB instructions.
+
+'$d'
+     At the start of a region of data.
+
+   The assembler will automatically insert these symbols for you - there
+is no need to code them yourself.  Support for tagging symbols ($b, $f,
+$p and $m) which is also mentioned in the current ARM ELF specification
+is not implemented.  This is because they have been dropped from the new
+EABI and so tools cannot rely upon their presence.
+
+9 80386 Dependent Features
+**************************
+
+The i386 version 'as' supports both the original Intel 386 architecture
+in both 16 and 32-bit mode as well as AMD x86-64 architecture extending
+the Intel architecture to 64-bits.
+
+9.1 Options
+===========
+
+The i386 version of 'as' has a few machine dependent options:
+
+'--32 | --64'
+     Select the word size, either 32 bits or 64 bits.  Selecting 32-bit
+     implies Intel i386 architecture, while 64-bit implies AMD x86-64
+     architecture.
+
+     These options are only available with the ELF object file format,
+     and require that the necessary BFD support has been included (on a
+     32-bit platform you have to add -enable-64-bit-bfd to configure
+     enable 64-bit usage and use x86-64 as target platform).
+
+'-n'
+     By default, x86 GAS replaces multiple nop instructions used for
+     alignment within code sections with multi-byte nop instructions
+     such as leal 0(%esi,1),%esi.  This switch disables the
+     optimization.
+
+'--divide'
+     On SVR4-derived platforms, the character '/' is treated as a
+     comment character, which means that it cannot be used in
+     expressions.  The '--divide' option turns '/' into a normal
+     character.  This does not disable '/' at the beginning of a line
+     starting a comment, or affect using '#' for starting a comment.
+
+'-march=CPU'
+     This option specifies an instruction set architecture for
+     generating instructions.  The following architectures are
+     recognized: 'i8086', 'i186', 'i286', 'i386', 'i486', 'i586',
+     'i686', 'pentium', 'pentiumpro', 'pentiumii', 'pentiumiii',
+     'pentium4', 'prescott', 'nocona', 'core', 'core2', 'k6', 'k6_2',
+     'athlon', 'sledgehammer', 'opteron', 'k8', 'generic32' and
+     'generic64'.
+
+     This option only affects instructions generated by the assembler.
+     The '.arch' directive will take precedent.
+
+'-mtune=CPU'
+     This option specifies a processor to optimize for.  When used in
+     conjunction with the '-march' option, only instructions of the
+     processor specified by the '-march' option will be generated.
+
+     Valid CPU values are identical to '-march=CPU'.
+
+9.2 AT&T Syntax versus Intel Syntax
+===================================
+
+'as' now supports assembly using Intel assembler syntax.
+'.intel_syntax' selects Intel mode, and '.att_syntax' switches back to
+the usual AT&T mode for compatibility with the output of 'gcc'.  Either
+of these directives may have an optional argument, 'prefix', or
+'noprefix' specifying whether registers require a '%' prefix.  AT&T
+System V/386 assembler syntax is quite different from Intel syntax.  We
+mention these differences because almost all 80386 documents use Intel
+syntax.  Notable differences between the two syntaxes are:
+
+   * AT&T immediate operands are preceded by '$'; Intel immediate
+     operands are undelimited (Intel 'push 4' is AT&T 'pushl $4').  AT&T
+     register operands are preceded by '%'; Intel register operands are
+     undelimited.  AT&T absolute (as opposed to PC relative) jump/call
+     operands are prefixed by '*'; they are undelimited in Intel syntax.
+
+   * AT&T and Intel syntax use the opposite order for source and
+     destination operands.  Intel 'add eax, 4' is 'addl $4, %eax'.  The
+     'source, dest' convention is maintained for compatibility with
+     previous Unix assemblers.  Note that instructions with more than
+     one source operand, such as the 'enter' instruction, do _not_ have
+     reversed order.  *note i386-Bugs::.
+
+   * In AT&T syntax the size of memory operands is determined from the
+     last character of the instruction mnemonic.  Mnemonic suffixes of
+     'b', 'w', 'l' and 'q' specify byte (8-bit), word (16-bit), long
+     (32-bit) and quadruple word (64-bit) memory references.  Intel
+     syntax accomplishes this by prefixing memory operands (_not_ the
+     instruction mnemonics) with 'byte ptr', 'word ptr', 'dword ptr' and
+     'qword ptr'.  Thus, Intel 'mov al, byte ptr FOO' is 'movb FOO, %al'
+     in AT&T syntax.
+
+   * Immediate form long jumps and calls are 'lcall/ljmp $SECTION,
+     $OFFSET' in AT&T syntax; the Intel syntax is 'call/jmp far
+     SECTION:OFFSET'.  Also, the far return instruction is 'lret
+     $STACK-ADJUST' in AT&T syntax; Intel syntax is 'ret far
+     STACK-ADJUST'.
+
+   * The AT&T assembler does not provide support for multiple section
+     programs.  Unix style systems expect all programs to be single
+     sections.
+
+9.3 Instruction Naming
+======================
+
+Instruction mnemonics are suffixed with one character modifiers which
+specify the size of operands.  The letters 'b', 'w', 'l' and 'q' specify
+byte, word, long and quadruple word operands.  If no suffix is specified
+by an instruction then 'as' tries to fill in the missing suffix based on
+the destination register operand (the last one by convention).  Thus,
+'mov %ax, %bx' is equivalent to 'movw %ax, %bx'; also, 'mov $1, %bx' is
+equivalent to 'movw $1, bx'.  Note that this is incompatible with the
+AT&T Unix assembler which assumes that a missing mnemonic suffix implies
+long operand size.  (This incompatibility does not affect compiler
+output since compilers always explicitly specify the mnemonic suffix.)
+
+   Almost all instructions have the same names in AT&T and Intel format.
+There are a few exceptions.  The sign extend and zero extend
+instructions need two sizes to specify them.  They need a size to
+sign/zero extend _from_ and a size to zero extend _to_.  This is
+accomplished by using two instruction mnemonic suffixes in AT&T syntax.
+Base names for sign extend and zero extend are 'movs...' and 'movz...'
+in AT&T syntax ('movsx' and 'movzx' in Intel syntax).  The instruction
+mnemonic suffixes are tacked on to this base name, the _from_ suffix
+before the _to_ suffix.  Thus, 'movsbl %al, %edx' is AT&T syntax for
+"move sign extend _from_ %al _to_ %edx."  Possible suffixes, thus, are
+'bl' (from byte to long), 'bw' (from byte to word), 'wl' (from word to
+long), 'bq' (from byte to quadruple word), 'wq' (from word to quadruple
+word), and 'lq' (from long to quadruple word).
+
+   The Intel-syntax conversion instructions
+
+   * 'cbw' -- sign-extend byte in '%al' to word in '%ax',
+
+   * 'cwde' -- sign-extend word in '%ax' to long in '%eax',
+
+   * 'cwd' -- sign-extend word in '%ax' to long in '%dx:%ax',
+
+   * 'cdq' -- sign-extend dword in '%eax' to quad in '%edx:%eax',
+
+   * 'cdqe' -- sign-extend dword in '%eax' to quad in '%rax' (x86-64
+     only),
+
+   * 'cqo' -- sign-extend quad in '%rax' to octuple in '%rdx:%rax'
+     (x86-64 only),
+
+are called 'cbtw', 'cwtl', 'cwtd', 'cltd', 'cltq', and 'cqto' in AT&T
+naming.  'as' accepts either naming for these instructions.
+
+   Far call/jump instructions are 'lcall' and 'ljmp' in AT&T syntax, but
+are 'call far' and 'jump far' in Intel convention.
+
+9.4 Register Naming
+===================
+
+Register operands are always prefixed with '%'.  The 80386 registers
+consist of
+
+   * the 8 32-bit registers '%eax' (the accumulator), '%ebx', '%ecx',
+     '%edx', '%edi', '%esi', '%ebp' (the frame pointer), and '%esp' (the
+     stack pointer).
+
+   * the 8 16-bit low-ends of these: '%ax', '%bx', '%cx', '%dx', '%di',
+     '%si', '%bp', and '%sp'.
+
+   * the 8 8-bit registers: '%ah', '%al', '%bh', '%bl', '%ch', '%cl',
+     '%dh', and '%dl' (These are the high-bytes and low-bytes of '%ax',
+     '%bx', '%cx', and '%dx')
+
+   * the 6 section registers '%cs' (code section), '%ds' (data section),
+     '%ss' (stack section), '%es', '%fs', and '%gs'.
+
+   * the 3 processor control registers '%cr0', '%cr2', and '%cr3'.
+
+   * the 6 debug registers '%db0', '%db1', '%db2', '%db3', '%db6', and
+     '%db7'.
+
+   * the 2 test registers '%tr6' and '%tr7'.
+
+   * the 8 floating point register stack '%st' or equivalently '%st(0)',
+     '%st(1)', '%st(2)', '%st(3)', '%st(4)', '%st(5)', '%st(6)', and
+     '%st(7)'.  These registers are overloaded by 8 MMX registers
+     '%mm0', '%mm1', '%mm2', '%mm3', '%mm4', '%mm5', '%mm6' and '%mm7'.
+
+   * the 8 SSE registers registers '%xmm0', '%xmm1', '%xmm2', '%xmm3',
+     '%xmm4', '%xmm5', '%xmm6' and '%xmm7'.
+
+   The AMD x86-64 architecture extends the register set by:
+
+   * enhancing the 8 32-bit registers to 64-bit: '%rax' (the
+     accumulator), '%rbx', '%rcx', '%rdx', '%rdi', '%rsi', '%rbp' (the
+     frame pointer), '%rsp' (the stack pointer)
+
+   * the 8 extended registers '%r8'-'%r15'.
+
+   * the 8 32-bit low ends of the extended registers: '%r8d'-'%r15d'
+
+   * the 8 16-bit low ends of the extended registers: '%r8w'-'%r15w'
+
+   * the 8 8-bit low ends of the extended registers: '%r8b'-'%r15b'
+
+   * the 4 8-bit registers: '%sil', '%dil', '%bpl', '%spl'.
+
+   * the 8 debug registers: '%db8'-'%db15'.
+
+   * the 8 SSE registers: '%xmm8'-'%xmm15'.
+
+9.5 Instruction Prefixes
+========================
+
+Instruction prefixes are used to modify the following instruction.  They
+are used to repeat string instructions, to provide section overrides, to
+perform bus lock operations, and to change operand and address sizes.
+(Most instructions that normally operate on 32-bit operands will use
+16-bit operands if the instruction has an "operand size" prefix.)
+Instruction prefixes are best written on the same line as the
+instruction they act upon.  For example, the 'scas' (scan string)
+instruction is repeated with:
+
+             repne scas %es:(%edi),%al
+
+   You may also place prefixes on the lines immediately preceding the
+instruction, but this circumvents checks that 'as' does with prefixes,
+and will not work with all prefixes.
+
+   Here is a list of instruction prefixes:
+
+   * Section override prefixes 'cs', 'ds', 'ss', 'es', 'fs', 'gs'.
+     These are automatically added by specifying using the
+     SECTION:MEMORY-OPERAND form for memory references.
+
+   * Operand/Address size prefixes 'data16' and 'addr16' change 32-bit
+     operands/addresses into 16-bit operands/addresses, while 'data32'
+     and 'addr32' change 16-bit ones (in a '.code16' section) into
+     32-bit operands/addresses.  These prefixes _must_ appear on the
+     same line of code as the instruction they modify.  For example, in
+     a 16-bit '.code16' section, you might write:
+
+                  addr32 jmpl *(%ebx)
+
+   * The bus lock prefix 'lock' inhibits interrupts during execution of
+     the instruction it precedes.  (This is only valid with certain
+     instructions; see a 80386 manual for details).
+
+   * The wait for coprocessor prefix 'wait' waits for the coprocessor to
+     complete the current instruction.  This should never be needed for
+     the 80386/80387 combination.
+
+   * The 'rep', 'repe', and 'repne' prefixes are added to string
+     instructions to make them repeat '%ecx' times ('%cx' times if the
+     current address size is 16-bits).
+   * The 'rex' family of prefixes is used by x86-64 to encode extensions
+     to i386 instruction set.  The 'rex' prefix has four bits -- an
+     operand size overwrite ('64') used to change operand size from
+     32-bit to 64-bit and X, Y and Z extensions bits used to extend the
+     register set.
+
+     You may write the 'rex' prefixes directly.  The 'rex64xyz'
+     instruction emits 'rex' prefix with all the bits set.  By omitting
+     the '64', 'x', 'y' or 'z' you may write other prefixes as well.
+     Normally, there is no need to write the prefixes explicitly, since
+     gas will automatically generate them based on the instruction
+     operands.
+
+9.6 Memory References
+=====================
+
+An Intel syntax indirect memory reference of the form
+
+     SECTION:[BASE + INDEX*SCALE + DISP]
+
+is translated into the AT&T syntax
+
+     SECTION:DISP(BASE, INDEX, SCALE)
+
+where BASE and INDEX are the optional 32-bit base and index registers,
+DISP is the optional displacement, and SCALE, taking the values 1, 2, 4,
+and 8, multiplies INDEX to calculate the address of the operand.  If no
+SCALE is specified, SCALE is taken to be 1.  SECTION specifies the
+optional section register for the memory operand, and may override the
+default section register (see a 80386 manual for section register
+defaults).  Note that section overrides in AT&T syntax _must_ be
+preceded by a '%'.  If you specify a section override which coincides
+with the default section register, 'as' does _not_ output any section
+register override prefixes to assemble the given instruction.  Thus,
+section overrides can be specified to emphasize which section register
+is used for a given memory operand.
+
+   Here are some examples of Intel and AT&T style memory references:
+
+AT&T: '-4(%ebp)', Intel: '[ebp - 4]'
+     BASE is '%ebp'; DISP is '-4'.  SECTION is missing, and the default
+     section is used ('%ss' for addressing with '%ebp' as the base
+     register).  INDEX, SCALE are both missing.
+
+AT&T: 'foo(,%eax,4)', Intel: '[foo + eax*4]'
+     INDEX is '%eax' (scaled by a SCALE 4); DISP is 'foo'.  All other
+     fields are missing.  The section register here defaults to '%ds'.
+
+AT&T: 'foo(,1)'; Intel '[foo]'
+     This uses the value pointed to by 'foo' as a memory operand.  Note
+     that BASE and INDEX are both missing, but there is only _one_ ','.
+     This is a syntactic exception.
+
+AT&T: '%gs:foo'; Intel 'gs:foo'
+     This selects the contents of the variable 'foo' with section
+     register SECTION being '%gs'.
+
+   Absolute (as opposed to PC relative) call and jump operands must be
+prefixed with '*'.  If no '*' is specified, 'as' always chooses PC
+relative addressing for jump/call labels.
+
+   Any instruction that has a memory operand, but no register operand,
+_must_ specify its size (byte, word, long, or quadruple) with an
+instruction mnemonic suffix ('b', 'w', 'l' or 'q', respectively).
+
+   The x86-64 architecture adds an RIP (instruction pointer relative)
+addressing.  This addressing mode is specified by using 'rip' as a base
+register.  Only constant offsets are valid.  For example:
+
+AT&T: '1234(%rip)', Intel: '[rip + 1234]'
+     Points to the address 1234 bytes past the end of the current
+     instruction.
+
+AT&T: 'symbol(%rip)', Intel: '[rip + symbol]'
+     Points to the 'symbol' in RIP relative way, this is shorter than
+     the default absolute addressing.
+
+   Other addressing modes remain unchanged in x86-64 architecture,
+except registers used are 64-bit instead of 32-bit.
+
+9.7 Handling of Jump Instructions
+=================================
+
+Jump instructions are always optimized to use the smallest possible
+displacements.  This is accomplished by using byte (8-bit) displacement
+jumps whenever the target is sufficiently close.  If a byte displacement
+is insufficient a long displacement is used.  We do not support word
+(16-bit) displacement jumps in 32-bit mode (i.e.  prefixing the jump
+instruction with the 'data16' instruction prefix), since the 80386
+insists upon masking '%eip' to 16 bits after the word displacement is
+added.  (See also *note i386-Arch::)
+
+   Note that the 'jcxz', 'jecxz', 'loop', 'loopz', 'loope', 'loopnz' and
+'loopne' instructions only come in byte displacements, so that if you
+use these instructions ('gcc' does not use them) you may get an error
+message (and incorrect code).  The AT&T 80386 assembler tries to get
+around this problem by expanding 'jcxz foo' to
+
+              jcxz cx_zero
+              jmp cx_nonzero
+     cx_zero: jmp foo
+     cx_nonzero:
+
+9.8 Floating Point
+==================
+
+All 80387 floating point types except packed BCD are supported.  (BCD
+support may be added without much difficulty).  These data types are
+16-, 32-, and 64- bit integers, and single (32-bit), double (64-bit),
+and extended (80-bit) precision floating point.  Each supported type has
+an instruction mnemonic suffix and a constructor associated with it.
+Instruction mnemonic suffixes specify the operand's data type.
+Constructors build these data types into memory.
+
+   * Floating point constructors are '.float' or '.single', '.double',
+     and '.tfloat' for 32-, 64-, and 80-bit formats.  These correspond
+     to instruction mnemonic suffixes 's', 'l', and 't'.  't' stands for
+     80-bit (ten byte) real.  The 80387 only supports this format via
+     the 'fldt' (load 80-bit real to stack top) and 'fstpt' (store
+     80-bit real and pop stack) instructions.
+
+   * Integer constructors are '.word', '.long' or '.int', and '.quad'
+     for the 16-, 32-, and 64-bit integer formats.  The corresponding
+     instruction mnemonic suffixes are 's' (single), 'l' (long), and 'q'
+     (quad).  As with the 80-bit real format, the 64-bit 'q' format is
+     only present in the 'fildq' (load quad integer to stack top) and
+     'fistpq' (store quad integer and pop stack) instructions.
+
+   Register to register operations should not use instruction mnemonic
+suffixes.  'fstl %st, %st(1)' will give a warning, and be assembled as
+if you wrote 'fst %st, %st(1)', since all register to register
+operations use 80-bit floating point operands.  (Contrast this with
+'fstl %st, mem', which converts '%st' from 80-bit to 64-bit floating
+point format, then stores the result in the 4 byte location 'mem')
+
+9.9 Intel's MMX and AMD's 3DNow! SIMD Operations
+================================================
+
+'as' supports Intel's MMX instruction set (SIMD instructions for integer
+data), available on Intel's Pentium MMX processors and Pentium II
+processors, AMD's K6 and K6-2 processors, Cyrix' M2 processor, and
+probably others.  It also supports AMD's 3DNow! instruction set (SIMD
+instructions for 32-bit floating point data) available on AMD's K6-2
+processor and possibly others in the future.
+
+   Currently, 'as' does not support Intel's floating point SIMD, Katmai
+(KNI).
+
+   The eight 64-bit MMX operands, also used by 3DNow!, are called
+'%mm0', '%mm1', ...  '%mm7'.  They contain eight 8-bit integers, four
+16-bit integers, two 32-bit integers, one 64-bit integer, or two 32-bit
+floating point values.  The MMX registers cannot be used at the same
+time as the floating point stack.
+
+   See Intel and AMD documentation, keeping in mind that the operand
+order in instructions is reversed from the Intel syntax.
+
+9.10 Writing 16-bit Code
+========================
+
+While 'as' normally writes only "pure" 32-bit i386 code or 64-bit x86-64
+code depending on the default configuration, it also supports writing
+code to run in real mode or in 16-bit protected mode code segments.  To
+do this, put a '.code16' or '.code16gcc' directive before the assembly
+language instructions to be run in 16-bit mode.  You can switch 'as'
+back to writing normal 32-bit code with the '.code32' directive.
+
+   '.code16gcc' provides experimental support for generating 16-bit code
+from gcc, and differs from '.code16' in that 'call', 'ret', 'enter',
+'leave', 'push', 'pop', 'pusha', 'popa', 'pushf', and 'popf'
+instructions default to 32-bit size.  This is so that the stack pointer
+is manipulated in the same way over function calls, allowing access to
+function parameters at the same stack offsets as in 32-bit mode.
+'.code16gcc' also automatically adds address size prefixes where
+necessary to use the 32-bit addressing modes that gcc generates.
+
+   The code which 'as' generates in 16-bit mode will not necessarily run
+on a 16-bit pre-80386 processor.  To write code that runs on such a
+processor, you must refrain from using _any_ 32-bit constructs which
+require 'as' to output address or operand size prefixes.
+
+   Note that writing 16-bit code instructions by explicitly specifying a
+prefix or an instruction mnemonic suffix within a 32-bit code section
+generates different machine instructions than those generated for a
+16-bit code segment.  In a 32-bit code section, the following code
+generates the machine opcode bytes '66 6a 04', which pushes the value
+'4' onto the stack, decrementing '%esp' by 2.
+
+             pushw $4
+
+   The same code in a 16-bit code section would generate the machine
+opcode bytes '6a 04' (i.e., without the operand size prefix), which is
+correct since the processor default operand size is assumed to be 16
+bits in a 16-bit code section.
+
+9.11 AT&T Syntax bugs
+=====================
+
+The UnixWare assembler, and probably other AT&T derived ix86 Unix
+assemblers, generate floating point instructions with reversed source
+and destination registers in certain cases.  Unfortunately, gcc and
+possibly many other programs use this reversed syntax, so we're stuck
+with it.
+
+   For example
+
+             fsub %st,%st(3)
+results in '%st(3)' being updated to '%st - %st(3)' rather than the
+expected '%st(3) - %st'.  This happens with all the non-commutative
+arithmetic floating point operations with two register operands where
+the source register is '%st' and the destination register is '%st(i)'.
+
+9.12 Specifying CPU Architecture
+================================
+
+'as' may be told to assemble for a particular CPU (sub-)architecture
+with the '.arch CPU_TYPE' directive.  This directive enables a warning
+when gas detects an instruction that is not supported on the CPU
+specified.  The choices for CPU_TYPE are:
+
+'i8086'        'i186'         'i286'         'i386'
+'i486'         'i586'         'i686'         'pentium'
+'pentiumpro'   'pentiumii'    'pentiumiii'   'pentium4'
+'prescott'     'nocona'       'core'         'core2'
+'amdfam10'
+'k6'           'athlon'       'sledgehammer' 'k8'
+'.mmx'         '.sse'         '.sse2'        '.sse3'
+'.ssse3'       '.sse4.1'      '.sse4.2'      '.sse4'
+'.sse4a'       '.3dnow'       '.3dnowa'      '.padlock'
+'.pacifica'    '.svme'        '.abm'
+
+   Apart from the warning, there are only two other effects on 'as'
+operation; Firstly, if you specify a CPU other than 'i486', then shift
+by one instructions such as 'sarl $1, %eax' will automatically use a two
+byte opcode sequence.  The larger three byte opcode sequence is used on
+the 486 (and when no architecture is specified) because it executes
+faster on the 486.  Note that you can explicitly request the two byte
+opcode by writing 'sarl %eax'.  Secondly, if you specify 'i8086',
+'i186', or 'i286', _and_ '.code16' or '.code16gcc' then byte offset
+conditional jumps will be promoted when necessary to a two instruction
+sequence consisting of a conditional jump of the opposite sense around
+an unconditional jump to the target.
+
+   Following the CPU architecture (but not a sub-architecture, which are
+those starting with a dot), you may specify 'jumps' or 'nojumps' to
+control automatic promotion of conditional jumps.  'jumps' is the
+default, and enables jump promotion; All external jumps will be of the
+long variety, and file-local jumps will be promoted as necessary.
+(*note i386-Jumps::) 'nojumps' leaves external conditional jumps as byte
+offset jumps, and warns about file-local conditional jumps that 'as'
+promotes.  Unconditional jumps are treated as for 'jumps'.
+
+   For example
+
+      .arch i8086,nojumps
+
+9.13 Notes
+==========
+
+There is some trickery concerning the 'mul' and 'imul' instructions that
+deserves mention.  The 16-, 32-, 64- and 128-bit expanding multiplies
+(base opcode '0xf6'; extension 4 for 'mul' and 5 for 'imul') can be
+output only in the one operand form.  Thus, 'imul %ebx, %eax' does _not_
+select the expanding multiply; the expanding multiply would clobber the
+'%edx' register, and this would confuse 'gcc' output.  Use 'imul %ebx'
+to get the 64-bit product in '%edx:%eax'.
+
+   We have added a two operand form of 'imul' when the first operand is
+an immediate mode expression and the second operand is a register.  This
+is just a shorthand, so that, multiplying '%eax' by 69, for example, can
+be done with 'imul $69, %eax' rather than 'imul $69, %eax, %eax'.
+
+10 IA-64 Dependent Features
+***************************
+
+10.1 Options
+============
+
+'-mconstant-gp'
+     This option instructs the assembler to mark the resulting object
+     file as using the "constant GP" model.  With this model, it is
+     assumed that the entire program uses a single global pointer (GP)
+     value.  Note that this option does not in any fashion affect the
+     machine code emitted by the assembler.  All it does is turn on the
+     EF_IA_64_CONS_GP flag in the ELF file header.
+
+'-mauto-pic'
+     This option instructs the assembler to mark the resulting object
+     file as using the "constant GP without function descriptor" data
+     model.  This model is like the "constant GP" model, except that it
+     additionally does away with function descriptors.  What this means
+     is that the address of a function refers directly to the function's
+     code entry-point.  Normally, such an address would refer to a
+     function descriptor, which contains both the code entry-point and
+     the GP-value needed by the function.  Note that this option does
+     not in any fashion affect the machine code emitted by the
+     assembler.  All it does is turn on the EF_IA_64_NOFUNCDESC_CONS_GP
+     flag in the ELF file header.
+
+'-milp32'
+'-milp64'
+'-mlp64'
+'-mp64'
+     These options select the data model.  The assembler defaults to
+     '-mlp64' (LP64 data model).
+
+'-mle'
+'-mbe'
+     These options select the byte order.  The '-mle' option selects
+     little-endian byte order (default) and '-mbe' selects big-endian
+     byte order.  Note that IA-64 machine code always uses little-endian
+     byte order.
+
+'-mtune=itanium1'
+'-mtune=itanium2'
+     Tune for a particular IA-64 CPU, ITANIUM1 or ITANIUM2.  The default
+     is ITANIUM2.
+
+'-munwind-check=warning'
+'-munwind-check=error'
+     These options control what the assembler will do when performing
+     consistency checks on unwind directives.  '-munwind-check=warning'
+     will make the assembler issue a warning when an unwind directive
+     check fails.  This is the default.  '-munwind-check=error' will
+     make the assembler issue an error when an unwind directive check
+     fails.
+
+'-mhint.b=ok'
+'-mhint.b=warning'
+'-mhint.b=error'
+     These options control what the assembler will do when the 'hint.b'
+     instruction is used.  '-mhint.b=ok' will make the assembler accept
+     'hint.b'.  '-mint.b=warning' will make the assembler issue a
+     warning when 'hint.b' is used.  '-mhint.b=error' will make the
+     assembler treat 'hint.b' as an error, which is the default.
+
+'-x'
+'-xexplicit'
+     These options turn on dependency violation checking.
+
+'-xauto'
+     This option instructs the assembler to automatically insert stop
+     bits where necessary to remove dependency violations.  This is the
+     default mode.
+
+'-xnone'
+     This option turns off dependency violation checking.
+
+'-xdebug'
+     This turns on debug output intended to help tracking down bugs in
+     the dependency violation checker.
+
+'-xdebugn'
+     This is a shortcut for -xnone -xdebug.
+
+'-xdebugx'
+     This is a shortcut for -xexplicit -xdebug.
+
+10.2 Syntax
+===========
+
+The assembler syntax closely follows the IA-64 Assembly Language
+Reference Guide.
+
+10.2.1 Special Characters
+-------------------------
+
+'//' is the line comment token.
+
+   ';' can be used instead of a newline to separate statements.
+
+10.2.2 Register Names
+---------------------
+
+The 128 integer registers are referred to as 'rN'.  The 128
+floating-point registers are referred to as 'fN'.  The 128 application
+registers are referred to as 'arN'.  The 128 control registers are
+referred to as 'crN'.  The 64 one-bit predicate registers are referred
+to as 'pN'.  The 8 branch registers are referred to as 'bN'.  In
+addition, the assembler defines a number of aliases: 'gp' ('r1'), 'sp'
+('r12'), 'rp' ('b0'), 'ret0' ('r8'), 'ret1' ('r9'), 'ret2' ('r10'),
+'ret3' ('r9'), 'fargN' ('f8+N'), and 'fretN' ('f8+N').
+
+   For convenience, the assembler also defines aliases for all named
+application and control registers.  For example, 'ar.bsp' refers to the
+register backing store pointer ('ar17').  Similarly, 'cr.eoi' refers to
+the end-of-interrupt register ('cr67').
+
+10.2.3 IA-64 Processor-Status-Register (PSR) Bit Names
+------------------------------------------------------
+
+The assembler defines bit masks for each of the bits in the IA-64
+processor status register.  For example, 'psr.ic' corresponds to a value
+of 0x2000.  These masks are primarily intended for use with the
+'ssm'/'sum' and 'rsm'/'rum' instructions, but they can be used anywhere
+else where an integer constant is expected.
+
+10.3 Opcodes
+============
+
+For detailed information on the IA-64 machine instruction set, see the
+IA-64 Architecture Handbook
+(http://developer.intel.com/design/itanium/arch_spec.htm).
+
+11 MIPS Dependent Features
+**************************
+
+GNU 'as' for MIPS architectures supports several different MIPS
+processors, and MIPS ISA levels I through V, MIPS32, and MIPS64.  For
+information about the MIPS instruction set, see 'MIPS RISC
+Architecture', by Kane and Heindrich (Prentice-Hall).  For an overview
+of MIPS assembly conventions, see "Appendix D: Assembly Language
+Programming" in the same work.
+
+11.1 Assembler options
+======================
+
+The MIPS configurations of GNU 'as' support these special options:
+
+'-G NUM'
+     This option sets the largest size of an object that can be
+     referenced implicitly with the 'gp' register.  It is only accepted
+     for targets that use ECOFF format.  The default value is 8.
+
+'-EB'
+'-EL'
+     Any MIPS configuration of 'as' can select big-endian or
+     little-endian output at run time (unlike the other GNU development
+     tools, which must be configured for one or the other).  Use '-EB'
+     to select big-endian output, and '-EL' for little-endian.
+
+'-KPIC'
+     Generate SVR4-style PIC. This option tells the assembler to
+     generate SVR4-style position-independent macro expansions.  It also
+     tells the assembler to mark the output file as PIC.
+
+'-mvxworks-pic'
+     Generate VxWorks PIC. This option tells the assembler to generate
+     VxWorks-style position-independent macro expansions.
+
+'-mips1'
+'-mips2'
+'-mips3'
+'-mips4'
+'-mips5'
+'-mips32'
+'-mips32r2'
+'-mips64'
+'-mips64r2'
+     Generate code for a particular MIPS Instruction Set Architecture
+     level.  '-mips1' corresponds to the R2000 and R3000 processors,
+     '-mips2' to the R6000 processor, '-mips3' to the R4000 processor,
+     and '-mips4' to the R8000 and R10000 processors.  '-mips5',
+     '-mips32', '-mips32r2', '-mips64', and '-mips64r2' correspond to
+     generic MIPS V, MIPS32, MIPS32 RELEASE 2, MIPS64, and MIPS64
+     RELEASE 2 ISA processors, respectively.  You can also switch
+     instruction sets during the assembly; see *note Directives to
+     override the ISA level: MIPS ISA.
+
+'-mgp32'
+'-mfp32'
+     Some macros have different expansions for 32-bit and 64-bit
+     registers.  The register sizes are normally inferred from the ISA
+     and ABI, but these flags force a certain group of registers to be
+     treated as 32 bits wide at all times.  '-mgp32' controls the size
+     of general-purpose registers and '-mfp32' controls the size of
+     floating-point registers.
+
+     The '.set gp=32' and '.set fp=32' directives allow the size of
+     registers to be changed for parts of an object.  The default value
+     is restored by '.set gp=default' and '.set fp=default'.
+
+     On some MIPS variants there is a 32-bit mode flag; when this flag
+     is set, 64-bit instructions generate a trap.  Also, some 32-bit
+     OSes only save the 32-bit registers on a context switch, so it is
+     essential never to use the 64-bit registers.
+
+'-mgp64'
+'-mfp64'
+     Assume that 64-bit registers are available.  This is provided in
+     the interests of symmetry with '-mgp32' and '-mfp32'.
+
+     The '.set gp=64' and '.set fp=64' directives allow the size of
+     registers to be changed for parts of an object.  The default value
+     is restored by '.set gp=default' and '.set fp=default'.
+
+'-mips16'
+'-no-mips16'
+     Generate code for the MIPS 16 processor.  This is equivalent to
+     putting '.set mips16' at the start of the assembly file.
+     '-no-mips16' turns off this option.
+
+'-msmartmips'
+'-mno-smartmips'
+     Enables the SmartMIPS extensions to the MIPS32 instruction set,
+     which provides a number of new instructions which target smartcard
+     and cryptographic applications.  This is equivalent to putting
+     '.set smartmips' at the start of the assembly file.
+     '-mno-smartmips' turns off this option.
+
+'-mips3d'
+'-no-mips3d'
+     Generate code for the MIPS-3D Application Specific Extension.  This
+     tells the assembler to accept MIPS-3D instructions.  '-no-mips3d'
+     turns off this option.
+
+'-mdmx'
+'-no-mdmx'
+     Generate code for the MDMX Application Specific Extension.  This
+     tells the assembler to accept MDMX instructions.  '-no-mdmx' turns
+     off this option.
+
+'-mdsp'
+'-mno-dsp'
+     Generate code for the DSP Release 1 Application Specific Extension.
+     This tells the assembler to accept DSP Release 1 instructions.
+     '-mno-dsp' turns off this option.
+
+'-mdspr2'
+'-mno-dspr2'
+     Generate code for the DSP Release 2 Application Specific Extension.
+     This option implies -mdsp.  This tells the assembler to accept DSP
+     Release 2 instructions.  '-mno-dspr2' turns off this option.
+
+'-mmt'
+'-mno-mt'
+     Generate code for the MT Application Specific Extension.  This
+     tells the assembler to accept MT instructions.  '-mno-mt' turns off
+     this option.
+
+'-mfix7000'
+'-mno-fix7000'
+     Cause nops to be inserted if the read of the destination register
+     of an mfhi or mflo instruction occurs in the following two
+     instructions.
+
+'-mfix-vr4120'
+'-no-mfix-vr4120'
+     Insert nops to work around certain VR4120 errata.  This option is
+     intended to be used on GCC-generated code: it is not designed to
+     catch all problems in hand-written assembler code.
+
+'-mfix-vr4130'
+'-no-mfix-vr4130'
+     Insert nops to work around the VR4130 'mflo'/'mfhi' errata.
+
+'-m4010'
+'-no-m4010'
+     Generate code for the LSI R4010 chip.  This tells the assembler to
+     accept the R4010 specific instructions ('addciu', 'ffc', etc.), and
+     to not schedule 'nop' instructions around accesses to the 'HI' and
+     'LO' registers.  '-no-m4010' turns off this option.
+
+'-m4650'
+'-no-m4650'
+     Generate code for the MIPS R4650 chip.  This tells the assembler to
+     accept the 'mad' and 'madu' instruction, and to not schedule 'nop'
+     instructions around accesses to the 'HI' and 'LO' registers.
+     '-no-m4650' turns off this option.
+
+'-m3900'
+'-no-m3900'
+'-m4100'
+'-no-m4100'
+     For each option '-mNNNN', generate code for the MIPS RNNNN chip.
+     This tells the assembler to accept instructions specific to that
+     chip, and to schedule for that chip's hazards.
+
+'-march=CPU'
+     Generate code for a particular MIPS cpu.  It is exactly equivalent
+     to '-mCPU', except that there are more value of CPU understood.
+     Valid CPU value are:
+
+          2000, 3000, 3900, 4000, 4010, 4100, 4111, vr4120, vr4130,
+          vr4181, 4300, 4400, 4600, 4650, 5000, rm5200, rm5230, rm5231,
+          rm5261, rm5721, vr5400, vr5500, 6000, rm7000, 8000, rm9000,
+          10000, 12000, 4kc, 4km, 4kp, 4ksc, 4kec, 4kem, 4kep, 4ksd,
+          m4k, m4kp, 24kc, 24kf, 24kx, 24kec, 24kef, 24kex, 34kc, 34kf,
+          34kx, 74kc, 74kf, 74kx, 5kc, 5kf, 20kc, 25kf, sb1, sb1a
+
+'-mtune=CPU'
+     Schedule and tune for a particular MIPS cpu.  Valid CPU values are
+     identical to '-march=CPU'.
+
+'-mabi=ABI'
+     Record which ABI the source code uses.  The recognized arguments
+     are: '32', 'n32', 'o64', '64' and 'eabi'.
+
+'-msym32'
+'-mno-sym32'
+     Equivalent to adding '.set sym32' or '.set nosym32' to the
+     beginning of the assembler input.  *Note MIPS symbol sizes::.
+
+'-nocpp'
+     This option is ignored.  It is accepted for command-line
+     compatibility with other assemblers, which use it to turn off C
+     style preprocessing.  With GNU 'as', there is no need for '-nocpp',
+     because the GNU assembler itself never runs the C preprocessor.
+
+'--construct-floats'
+'--no-construct-floats'
+     The '--no-construct-floats' option disables the construction of
+     double width floating point constants by loading the two halves of
+     the value into the two single width floating point registers that
+     make up the double width register.  This feature is useful if the
+     processor support the FR bit in its status register, and this bit
+     is known (by the programmer) to be set.  This bit prevents the
+     aliasing of the double width register by the single width
+     registers.
+
+     By default '--construct-floats' is selected, allowing construction
+     of these floating point constants.
+
+'--trap'
+'--no-break'
+     'as' automatically macro expands certain division and
+     multiplication instructions to check for overflow and division by
+     zero.  This option causes 'as' to generate code to take a trap
+     exception rather than a break exception when an error is detected.
+     The trap instructions are only supported at Instruction Set
+     Architecture level 2 and higher.
+
+'--break'
+'--no-trap'
+     Generate code to take a break exception rather than a trap
+     exception when an error is detected.  This is the default.
+
+'-mpdr'
+'-mno-pdr'
+     Control generation of '.pdr' sections.  Off by default on IRIX, on
+     elsewhere.
+
+'-mshared'
+'-mno-shared'
+     When generating code using the Unix calling conventions (selected
+     by '-KPIC' or '-mcall_shared'), gas will normally generate code
+     which can go into a shared library.  The '-mno-shared' option tells
+     gas to generate code which uses the calling convention, but can not
+     go into a shared library.  The resulting code is slightly more
+     efficient.  This option only affects the handling of the '.cpload'
+     and '.cpsetup' pseudo-ops.
+
+11.2 MIPS ECOFF object code
+===========================
+
+Assembling for a MIPS ECOFF target supports some additional sections
+besides the usual '.text', '.data' and '.bss'.  The additional sections
+are '.rdata', used for read-only data, '.sdata', used for small data,
+and '.sbss', used for small common objects.
+
+   When assembling for ECOFF, the assembler uses the '$gp' ('$28')
+register to form the address of a "small object".  Any object in the
+'.sdata' or '.sbss' sections is considered "small" in this sense.  For
+external objects, or for objects in the '.bss' section, you can use the
+'gcc' '-G' option to control the size of objects addressed via '$gp';
+the default value is 8, meaning that a reference to any object eight
+bytes or smaller uses '$gp'.  Passing '-G 0' to 'as' prevents it from
+using the '$gp' register on the basis of object size (but the assembler
+uses '$gp' for objects in '.sdata' or 'sbss' in any case).  The size of
+an object in the '.bss' section is set by the '.comm' or '.lcomm'
+directive that defines it.  The size of an external object may be set
+with the '.extern' directive.  For example, '.extern sym,4' declares
+that the object at 'sym' is 4 bytes in length, whie leaving 'sym'
+otherwise undefined.
+
+   Using small ECOFF objects requires linker support, and assumes that
+the '$gp' register is correctly initialized (normally done automatically
+by the startup code).  MIPS ECOFF assembly code must not modify the
+'$gp' register.
+
+11.3 Directives for debugging information
+=========================================
+
+MIPS ECOFF 'as' supports several directives used for generating
+debugging information which are not support by traditional MIPS
+assemblers.  These are '.def', '.endef', '.dim', '.file', '.scl',
+'.size', '.tag', '.type', '.val', '.stabd', '.stabn', and '.stabs'.  The
+debugging information generated by the three '.stab' directives can only
+be read by GDB, not by traditional MIPS debuggers (this enhancement is
+required to fully support C++ debugging).  These directives are
+primarily used by compilers, not assembly language programmers!
+
+11.4 Directives to override the size of symbols
+===============================================
+
+The n64 ABI allows symbols to have any 64-bit value.  Although this
+provides a great deal of flexibility, it means that some macros have
+much longer expansions than their 32-bit counterparts.  For example, the
+non-PIC expansion of 'dla $4,sym' is usually:
+
+     lui     $4,%highest(sym)
+     lui     $1,%hi(sym)
+     daddiu  $4,$4,%higher(sym)
+     daddiu  $1,$1,%lo(sym)
+     dsll32  $4,$4,0
+     daddu   $4,$4,$1
+
+   whereas the 32-bit expansion is simply:
+
+     lui     $4,%hi(sym)
+     daddiu  $4,$4,%lo(sym)
+
+   n64 code is sometimes constructed in such a way that all symbolic
+constants are known to have 32-bit values, and in such cases, it's
+preferable to use the 32-bit expansion instead of the 64-bit expansion.
+
+   You can use the '.set sym32' directive to tell the assembler that,
+from this point on, all expressions of the form 'SYMBOL' or 'SYMBOL +
+OFFSET' have 32-bit values.  For example:
+
+     .set sym32
+     dla     $4,sym
+     lw      $4,sym+16
+     sw      $4,sym+0x8000($4)
+
+   will cause the assembler to treat 'sym', 'sym+16' and 'sym+0x8000' as
+32-bit values.  The handling of non-symbolic addresses is not affected.
+
+   The directive '.set nosym32' ends a '.set sym32' block and reverts to
+the normal behavior.  It is also possible to change the symbol size
+using the command-line options '-msym32' and '-mno-sym32'.
+
+   These options and directives are always accepted, but at present,
+they have no effect for anything other than n64.
+
+11.5 Directives to override the ISA level
+=========================================
+
+GNU 'as' supports an additional directive to change the MIPS Instruction
+Set Architecture level on the fly: '.set mipsN'.  N should be a number
+from 0 to 5, or 32, 32r2, 64 or 64r2.  The values other than 0 make the
+assembler accept instructions for the corresponding ISA level, from that
+point on in the assembly.  '.set mipsN' affects not only which
+instructions are permitted, but also how certain macros are expanded.
+'.set mips0' restores the ISA level to its original level: either the
+level you selected with command line options, or the default for your
+configuration.  You can use this feature to permit specific MIPS3
+instructions while assembling in 32 bit mode.  Use this directive with
+care!
+
+   The '.set arch=CPU' directive provides even finer control.  It
+changes the effective CPU target and allows the assembler to use
+instructions specific to a particular CPU. All CPUs supported by the
+'-march' command line option are also selectable by this directive.  The
+original value is restored by '.set arch=default'.
+
+   The directive '.set mips16' puts the assembler into MIPS 16 mode, in
+which it will assemble instructions for the MIPS 16 processor.  Use
+'.set nomips16' to return to normal 32 bit mode.
+
+   Traditional MIPS assemblers do not support this directive.
+
+11.6 Directives for extending MIPS 16 bit instructions
+======================================================
+
+By default, MIPS 16 instructions are automatically extended to 32 bits
+when necessary.  The directive '.set noautoextend' will turn this off.
+When '.set noautoextend' is in effect, any 32 bit instruction must be
+explicitly extended with the '.e' modifier (e.g., 'li.e $4,1000').  The
+directive '.set autoextend' may be used to once again automatically
+extend instructions when necessary.
+
+   This directive is only meaningful when in MIPS 16 mode.  Traditional
+MIPS assemblers do not support this directive.
+
+11.7 Directive to mark data as an instruction
+=============================================
+
+The '.insn' directive tells 'as' that the following data is actually
+instructions.  This makes a difference in MIPS 16 mode: when loading the
+address of a label which precedes instructions, 'as' automatically adds
+1 to the value, so that jumping to the loaded address will do the right
+thing.
+
+11.8 Directives to save and restore options
+===========================================
+
+The directives '.set push' and '.set pop' may be used to save and
+restore the current settings for all the options which are controlled by
+'.set'.  The '.set push' directive saves the current settings on a
+stack.  The '.set pop' directive pops the stack and restores the
+settings.
+
+   These directives can be useful inside an macro which must change an
+option such as the ISA level or instruction reordering but does not want
+to change the state of the code which invoked the macro.
+
+   Traditional MIPS assemblers do not support these directives.
+
+11.9 Directives to control generation of MIPS ASE instructions
+==============================================================
+
+The directive '.set mips3d' makes the assembler accept instructions from
+the MIPS-3D Application Specific Extension from that point on in the
+assembly.  The '.set nomips3d' directive prevents MIPS-3D instructions
+from being accepted.
+
+   The directive '.set smartmips' makes the assembler accept
+instructions from the SmartMIPS Application Specific Extension to the
+MIPS32 ISA from that point on in the assembly.  The '.set nosmartmips'
+directive prevents SmartMIPS instructions from being accepted.
+
+   The directive '.set mdmx' makes the assembler accept instructions
+from the MDMX Application Specific Extension from that point on in the
+assembly.  The '.set nomdmx' directive prevents MDMX instructions from
+being accepted.
+
+   The directive '.set dsp' makes the assembler accept instructions from
+the DSP Release 1 Application Specific Extension from that point on in
+the assembly.  The '.set nodsp' directive prevents DSP Release 1
+instructions from being accepted.
+
+   The directive '.set dspr2' makes the assembler accept instructions
+from the DSP Release 2 Application Specific Extension from that point on
+in the assembly.  This dirctive implies '.set dsp'.  The '.set nodspr2'
+directive prevents DSP Release 2 instructions from being accepted.
+
+   The directive '.set mt' makes the assembler accept instructions from
+the MT Application Specific Extension from that point on in the
+assembly.  The '.set nomt' directive prevents MT instructions from being
+accepted.
+
+   Traditional MIPS assemblers do not support these directives.
+
+12 PowerPC Dependent Features
+*****************************
+
+12.1 Options
+============
+
+The PowerPC chip family includes several successive levels, using the
+same core instruction set, but including a few additional instructions
+at each level.  There are exceptions to this however.  For details on
+what instructions each variant supports, please see the chip's
+architecture reference manual.
+
+   The following table lists all available PowerPC options.
+
+'-mpwrx | -mpwr2'
+     Generate code for POWER/2 (RIOS2).
+
+'-mpwr'
+     Generate code for POWER (RIOS1)
+
+'-m601'
+     Generate code for PowerPC 601.
+
+'-mppc, -mppc32, -m603, -m604'
+     Generate code for PowerPC 603/604.
+
+'-m403, -m405'
+     Generate code for PowerPC 403/405.
+
+'-m440'
+     Generate code for PowerPC 440.  BookE and some 405 instructions.
+
+'-m7400, -m7410, -m7450, -m7455'
+     Generate code for PowerPC 7400/7410/7450/7455.
+
+'-mppc64, -m620'
+     Generate code for PowerPC 620/625/630.
+
+'-me500, -me500x2'
+     Generate code for Motorola e500 core complex.
+
+'-mspe'
+     Generate code for Motorola SPE instructions.
+
+'-mppc64bridge'
+     Generate code for PowerPC 64, including bridge insns.
+
+'-mbooke64'
+     Generate code for 64-bit BookE.
+
+'-mbooke, mbooke32'
+     Generate code for 32-bit BookE.
+
+'-me300'
+     Generate code for PowerPC e300 family.
+
+'-maltivec'
+     Generate code for processors with AltiVec instructions.
+
+'-mpower4'
+     Generate code for Power4 architecture.
+
+'-mpower5'
+     Generate code for Power5 architecture.
+
+'-mpower6'
+     Generate code for Power6 architecture.
+
+'-mcell'
+     Generate code for Cell Broadband Engine architecture.
+
+'-mcom'
+     Generate code Power/PowerPC common instructions.
+
+'-many'
+     Generate code for any architecture (PWR/PWRX/PPC).
+
+'-mregnames'
+     Allow symbolic names for registers.
+
+'-mno-regnames'
+     Do not allow symbolic names for registers.
+
+'-mrelocatable'
+     Support for GCC's -mrelocatable option.
+
+'-mrelocatable-lib'
+     Support for GCC's -mrelocatable-lib option.
+
+'-memb'
+     Set PPC_EMB bit in ELF flags.
+
+'-mlittle, -mlittle-endian'
+     Generate code for a little endian machine.
+
+'-mbig, -mbig-endian'
+     Generate code for a big endian machine.
+
+'-msolaris'
+     Generate code for Solaris.
+
+'-mno-solaris'
+     Do not generate code for Solaris.
+
+12.2 PowerPC Assembler Directives
+=================================
+
+A number of assembler directives are available for PowerPC. The
+following table is far from complete.
+
+'.machine "string"'
+     This directive allows you to change the machine for which code is
+     generated.  '"string"' may be any of the -m cpu selection options
+     (without the -m) enclosed in double quotes, '"push"', or '"pop"'.
+     '.machine "push"' saves the currently selected cpu, which may be
+     restored with '.machine "pop"'.
+
+13 SPARC Dependent Features
+***************************
+
+13.1 Options
+============
+
+The SPARC chip family includes several successive levels, using the same
+core instruction set, but including a few additional instructions at
+each level.  There are exceptions to this however.  For details on what
+instructions each variant supports, please see the chip's architecture
+reference manual.
+
+   By default, 'as' assumes the core instruction set (SPARC v6), but
+"bumps" the architecture level as needed: it switches to successively
+higher architectures as it encounters instructions that only exist in
+the higher levels.
+
+   If not configured for SPARC v9 ('sparc64-*-*') GAS will not bump
+passed sparclite by default, an option must be passed to enable the v9
+instructions.
+
+   GAS treats sparclite as being compatible with v8, unless an
+architecture is explicitly requested.  SPARC v9 is always incompatible
+with sparclite.
+
+'-Av6 | -Av7 | -Av8 | -Asparclet | -Asparclite'
+'-Av8plus | -Av8plusa | -Av9 | -Av9a'
+     Use one of the '-A' options to select one of the SPARC
+     architectures explicitly.  If you select an architecture
+     explicitly, 'as' reports a fatal error if it encounters an
+     instruction or feature requiring an incompatible or higher level.
+
+     '-Av8plus' and '-Av8plusa' select a 32 bit environment.
+
+     '-Av9' and '-Av9a' select a 64 bit environment and are not
+     available unless GAS is explicitly configured with 64 bit
+     environment support.
+
+     '-Av8plusa' and '-Av9a' enable the SPARC V9 instruction set with
+     UltraSPARC extensions.
+
+'-xarch=v8plus | -xarch=v8plusa'
+     For compatibility with the Solaris v9 assembler.  These options are
+     equivalent to -Av8plus and -Av8plusa, respectively.
+
+'-bump'
+     Warn whenever it is necessary to switch to another level.  If an
+     architecture level is explicitly requested, GAS will not issue
+     warnings until that level is reached, and will then bump the level
+     as required (except between incompatible levels).
+
+'-32 | -64'
+     Select the word size, either 32 bits or 64 bits.  These options are
+     only available with the ELF object file format, and require that
+     the necessary BFD support has been included.
+
+13.2 Enforcing aligned data
+===========================
+
+SPARC GAS normally permits data to be misaligned.  For example, it
+permits the '.long' pseudo-op to be used on a byte boundary.  However,
+the native SunOS and Solaris assemblers issue an error when they see
+misaligned data.
+
+   You can use the '--enforce-aligned-data' option to make SPARC GAS
+also issue an error about misaligned data, just as the SunOS and Solaris
+assemblers do.
+
+   The '--enforce-aligned-data' option is not the default because gcc
+issues misaligned data pseudo-ops when it initializes certain packed
+data structures (structures defined using the 'packed' attribute).  You
+may have to assemble with GAS in order to initialize packed data
+structures in your own code.
+
+13.3 Floating Point
+===================
+
+The Sparc uses IEEE floating-point numbers.
+
+13.4 Sparc Machine Directives
+=============================
+
+The Sparc version of 'as' supports the following additional machine
+directives:
+
+'.align'
+     This must be followed by the desired alignment in bytes.
+
+'.common'
+     This must be followed by a symbol name, a positive number, and
+     '"bss"'.  This behaves somewhat like '.comm', but the syntax is
+     different.
+
+'.half'
+     This is functionally identical to '.short'.
+
+'.nword'
+     On the Sparc, the '.nword' directive produces native word sized
+     value, ie.  if assembling with -32 it is equivalent to '.word', if
+     assembling with -64 it is equivalent to '.xword'.
+
+'.proc'
+     This directive is ignored.  Any text following it on the same line
+     is also ignored.
+
+'.register'
+     This directive declares use of a global application or system
+     register.  It must be followed by a register name %g2, %g3, %g6 or
+     %g7, comma and the symbol name for that register.  If symbol name
+     is '#scratch', it is a scratch register, if it is '#ignore', it
+     just suppresses any errors about using undeclared global register,
+     but does not emit any information about it into the object file.
+     This can be useful e.g.  if you save the register before use and
+     restore it after.
+
+'.reserve'
+     This must be followed by a symbol name, a positive number, and
+     '"bss"'.  This behaves somewhat like '.lcomm', but the syntax is
+     different.
+
+'.seg'
+     This must be followed by '"text"', '"data"', or '"data1"'.  It
+     behaves like '.text', '.data', or '.data 1'.
+
+'.skip'
+     This is functionally identical to the '.space' directive.
+
+'.word'
+     On the Sparc, the '.word' directive produces 32 bit values, instead
+     of the 16 bit values it produces on many other machines.
+
+'.xword'
+     On the Sparc V9 processor, the '.xword' directive produces 64 bit
+     values.
+
+14 Reporting Bugs
+*****************
+
+Your bug reports play an essential role in making 'as' reliable.
+
+   Reporting a bug may help you by bringing a solution to your problem,
+or it may not.  But in any case the principal function of a bug report
+is to help the entire community by making the next version of 'as' work
+better.  Bug reports are your contribution to the maintenance of 'as'.
+
+   In order for a bug report to serve its purpose, you must include the
+information that enables us to fix the bug.
+
+14.1 Have You Found a Bug?
+==========================
+
+If you are not sure whether you have found a bug, here are some
+guidelines:
+
+   * If the assembler gets a fatal signal, for any input whatever, that
+     is a 'as' bug.  Reliable assemblers never crash.
+
+   * If 'as' produces an error message for valid input, that is a bug.
+
+   * If 'as' does not produce an error message for invalid input, that
+     is a bug.  However, you should note that your idea of "invalid
+     input" might be our idea of "an extension" or "support for
+     traditional practice".
+
+   * If you are an experienced user of assemblers, your suggestions for
+     improvement of 'as' are welcome in any case.
+
+14.2 How to Report Bugs
+=======================
+
+A number of companies and individuals offer support for GNU products.
+If you obtained 'as' from a support organization, we recommend you
+contact that organization first.
+
+   You can find contact information for many support companies and
+individuals in the file 'etc/SERVICE' in the GNU Emacs distribution.
+
+   The fundamental principle of reporting bugs usefully is this: *report
+all the facts*.  If you are not sure whether to state a fact or leave it
+out, state it!
+
+   Often people omit facts because they think they know what causes the
+problem and assume that some details do not matter.  Thus, you might
+assume that the name of a symbol you use in an example does not matter.
+Well, probably it does not, but one cannot be sure.  Perhaps the bug is
+a stray memory reference which happens to fetch from the location where
+that name is stored in memory; perhaps, if the name were different, the
+contents of that location would fool the assembler into doing the right
+thing despite the bug.  Play it safe and give a specific, complete
+example.  That is the easiest thing for you to do, and the most helpful.
+
+   Keep in mind that the purpose of a bug report is to enable us to fix
+the bug if it is new to us.  Therefore, always write your bug reports on
+the assumption that the bug has not been reported previously.
+
+   Sometimes people give a few sketchy facts and ask, "Does this ring a
+bell?"  This cannot help us fix a bug, so it is basically useless.  We
+respond by asking for enough details to enable us to investigate.  You
+might as well expedite matters by sending them to begin with.
+
+   To enable us to fix the bug, you should include all these things:
+
+   * The version of 'as'.  'as' announces it if you start it with the
+     '--version' argument.
+
+     Without this, we will not know whether there is any point in
+     looking for the bug in the current version of 'as'.
+
+   * Any patches you may have applied to the 'as' source.
+
+   * The type of machine you are using, and the operating system name
+     and version number.
+
+   * What compiler (and its version) was used to compile 'as'--e.g.
+     "'gcc-2.7'".
+
+   * The command arguments you gave the assembler to assemble your
+     example and observe the bug.  To guarantee you will not omit
+     something important, list them all.  A copy of the Makefile (or the
+     output from make) is sufficient.
+
+     If we were to try to guess the arguments, we would probably guess
+     wrong and then we might not encounter the bug.
+
+   * A complete input file that will reproduce the bug.  If the bug is
+     observed when the assembler is invoked via a compiler, send the
+     assembler source, not the high level language source.  Most
+     compilers will produce the assembler source when run with the '-S'
+     option.  If you are using 'gcc', use the options '-v --save-temps';
+     this will save the assembler source in a file with an extension of
+     '.s', and also show you exactly how 'as' is being run.
+
+   * A description of what behavior you observe that you believe is
+     incorrect.  For example, "It gets a fatal signal."
+
+     Of course, if the bug is that 'as' gets a fatal signal, then we
+     will certainly notice it.  But if the bug is incorrect output, we
+     might not notice unless it is glaringly wrong.  You might as well
+     not give us a chance to make a mistake.
+
+     Even if the problem you experience is a fatal signal, you should
+     still say so explicitly.  Suppose something strange is going on,
+     such as, your copy of 'as' is out of sync, or you have encountered
+     a bug in the C library on your system.  (This has happened!)  Your
+     copy might crash and ours would not.  If you told us to expect a
+     crash, then when ours fails to crash, we would know that the bug
+     was not happening for us.  If you had not told us to expect a
+     crash, then we would not be able to draw any conclusion from our
+     observations.
+
+   * If you wish to suggest changes to the 'as' source, send us context
+     diffs, as generated by 'diff' with the '-u', '-c', or '-p' option.
+     Always send diffs from the old file to the new file.  If you even
+     discuss something in the 'as' source, refer to it by context, not
+     by line number.
+
+     The line numbers in our development sources will not match those in
+     your sources.  Your line numbers would convey no useful information
+     to us.
+
+   Here are some things that are not necessary:
+
+   * A description of the envelope of the bug.
+
+     Often people who encounter a bug spend a lot of time investigating
+     which changes to the input file will make the bug go away and which
+     changes will not affect it.
+
+     This is often time consuming and not very useful, because the way
+     we will find the bug is by running a single example under the
+     debugger with breakpoints, not by pure deduction from a series of
+     examples.  We recommend that you save your time for something else.
+
+     Of course, if you can find a simpler example to report _instead_ of
+     the original one, that is a convenience for us.  Errors in the
+     output will be easier to spot, running under the debugger will take
+     less time, and so on.
+
+     However, simplification is not vital; if you do not want to do
+     this, report the bug anyway and send us the entire test case you
+     used.
+
+   * A patch for the bug.
+
+     A patch for the bug does help us if it is a good one.  But do not
+     omit the necessary information, such as the test case, on the
+     assumption that a patch is all we need.  We might see problems with
+     your patch and decide to fix the problem another way, or we might
+     not understand it at all.
+
+     Sometimes with a program as complicated as 'as' it is very hard to
+     construct an example that will make the program follow a certain
+     path through the code.  If you do not send us the example, we will
+     not be able to construct one, so we will not be able to verify that
+     the bug is fixed.
+
+     And if we cannot understand what bug you are trying to fix, or why
+     your patch should be an improvement, we will not install it.  A
+     test case will help us to understand.
+
+   * A guess about what the bug is or what it depends on.
+
+     Such guesses are usually wrong.  Even we cannot guess right about
+     such things without first using the debugger to find the facts.
+
+15 Acknowledgements
+*******************
+
+If you have contributed to GAS and your name isn't listed here, it is
+not meant as a slight.  We just don't know about it.  Send mail to the
+maintainer, and we'll correct the situation.  Currently the maintainer
+is Ken Raeburn (email address 'raeburn@cygnus.com').
+
+   Dean Elsner wrote the original GNU assembler for the VAX.(1)
+
+   Jay Fenlason maintained GAS for a while, adding support for
+GDB-specific debug information and the 68k series machines, most of the
+preprocessing pass, and extensive changes in 'messages.c',
+'input-file.c', 'write.c'.
+
+   K. Richard Pixley maintained GAS for a while, adding various
+enhancements and many bug fixes, including merging support for several
+processors, breaking GAS up to handle multiple object file format back
+ends (including heavy rewrite, testing, an integration of the coff and
+b.out back ends), adding configuration including heavy testing and
+verification of cross assemblers and file splits and renaming, converted
+GAS to strictly ANSI C including full prototypes, added support for
+m680[34]0 and cpu32, did considerable work on i960 including a COFF port
+(including considerable amounts of reverse engineering), a SPARC opcode
+file rewrite, DECstation, rs6000, and hp300hpux host ports, updated
+"know" assertions and made them work, much other reorganization,
+cleanup, and lint.
+
+   Ken Raeburn wrote the high-level BFD interface code to replace most
+of the code in format-specific I/O modules.
+
+   The original VMS support was contributed by David L. Kashtan.  Eric
+Youngdale has done much work with it since.
+
+   The Intel 80386 machine description was written by Eliot Dresselhaus.
+
+   Minh Tran-Le at IntelliCorp contributed some AIX 386 support.
+
+   The Motorola 88k machine description was contributed by Devon Bowen
+of Buffalo University and Torbjorn Granlund of the Swedish Institute of
+Computer Science.
+
+   Keith Knowles at the Open Software Foundation wrote the original MIPS
+back end ('tc-mips.c', 'tc-mips.h'), and contributed Rose format support
+(which hasn't been merged in yet).  Ralph Campbell worked with the MIPS
+code to support a.out format.
+
+   Support for the Zilog Z8k and Renesas H8/300 processors (tc-z8k,
+tc-h8300), and IEEE 695 object file format (obj-ieee), was written by
+Steve Chamberlain of Cygnus Support.  Steve also modified the COFF back
+end to use BFD for some low-level operations, for use with the H8/300
+and AMD 29k targets.
+
+   John Gilmore built the AMD 29000 support, added '.include' support,
+and simplified the configuration of which versions accept which
+directives.  He updated the 68k machine description so that Motorola's
+opcodes always produced fixed-size instructions (e.g., 'jsr'), while
+synthetic instructions remained shrinkable ('jbsr').  John fixed many
+bugs, including true tested cross-compilation support, and one bug in
+relaxation that took a week and required the proverbial one-bit fix.
+
+   Ian Lance Taylor of Cygnus Support merged the Motorola and MIT syntax
+for the 68k, completed support for some COFF targets (68k, i386 SVR3,
+and SCO Unix), added support for MIPS ECOFF and ELF targets, wrote the
+initial RS/6000 and PowerPC assembler, and made a few other minor
+patches.
+
+   Steve Chamberlain made GAS able to generate listings.
+
+   Hewlett-Packard contributed support for the HP9000/300.
+
+   Jeff Law wrote GAS and BFD support for the native HPPA object format
+(SOM) along with a fairly extensive HPPA testsuite (for both SOM and ELF
+object formats).  This work was supported by both the Center for
+Software Science at the University of Utah and Cygnus Support.
+
+   Support for ELF format files has been worked on by Mark Eichin of
+Cygnus Support (original, incomplete implementation for SPARC), Pete
+Hoogenboom and Jeff Law at the University of Utah (HPPA mainly), Michael
+Meissner of the Open Software Foundation (i386 mainly), and Ken Raeburn
+of Cygnus Support (sparc, and some initial 64-bit support).
+
+   Linas Vepstas added GAS support for the ESA/390 "IBM 370"
+architecture.
+
+   Richard Henderson rewrote the Alpha assembler.  Klaus Kaempf wrote
+GAS and BFD support for openVMS/Alpha.
+
+   Timothy Wall, Michael Hayes, and Greg Smart contributed to the
+various tic* flavors.
+
+   David Heine, Sterling Augustine, Bob Wilson and John Ruttenberg from
+Tensilica, Inc. added support for Xtensa processors.
+
+   Several engineers at Cygnus Support have also provided many small bug
+fixes and configuration enhancements.
+
+   Many others have contributed large or small bugfixes and
+enhancements.  If you have contributed significant work and are not
+mentioned on this list, and want to be, let us know.  Some of the
+history has been lost; we are not intentionally leaving anyone out.
+
+Appendix A GNU Free Documentation License
+*****************************************
+
+                        Version 1.1, March 2000
+
+     Copyright (C) 2000, 2003 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
+     51 Franklin Street, Fifth Floor, Boston, MA  02110-1301  USA
+
+     Everyone is permitted to copy and distribute verbatim copies
+     of this license document, but changing it is not allowed.
+
+  0. PREAMBLE
+
+     The purpose of this License is to make a manual, textbook, or other
+     written document "free" in the sense of freedom: to assure everyone
+     the effective freedom to copy and redistribute it, with or without
+     modifying it, either commercially or noncommercially.  Secondarily,
+     this License preserves for the author and publisher a way to get
+     credit for their work, while not being considered responsible for
+     modifications made by others.
+
+     This License is a kind of "copyleft", which means that derivative
+     works of the document must themselves be free in the same sense.
+     It complements the GNU General Public License, which is a copyleft
+     license designed for free software.
+
+     We have designed this License in order to use it for manuals for
+     free software, because free software needs free documentation: a
+     free program should come with manuals providing the same freedoms
+     that the software does.  But this License is not limited to
+     software manuals; it can be used for any textual work, regardless
+     of subject matter or whether it is published as a printed book.  We
+     recommend this License principally for works whose purpose is
+     instruction or reference.
+
+
+  1. APPLICABILITY AND DEFINITIONS
+
+     This License applies to any manual or other work that contains a
+     notice placed by the copyright holder saying it can be distributed
+     under the terms of this License.  The "Document", below, refers to
+     any such manual or work.  Any member of the public is a licensee,
+     and is addressed as "you."
+
+     A "Modified Version" of the Document means any work containing the
+     Document or a portion of it, either copied verbatim, or with
+     modifications and/or translated into another language.
+
+     A "Secondary Section" is a named appendix or a front-matter section
+     of the Document that deals exclusively with the relationship of the
+     publishers or authors of the Document to the Document's overall
+     subject (or to related matters) and contains nothing that could
+     fall directly within that overall subject.  (For example, if the
+     Document is in part a textbook of mathematics, a Secondary Section
+     may not explain any mathematics.)  The relationship could be a
+     matter of historical connection with the subject or with related
+     matters, or of legal, commercial, philosophical, ethical or
+     political position regarding them.
+
+     The "Invariant Sections" are certain Secondary Sections whose
+     titles are designated, as being those of Invariant Sections, in the
+     notice that says that the Document is released under this License.
+
+     The "Cover Texts" are certain short passages of text that are
+     listed, as Front-Cover Texts or Back-Cover Texts, in the notice
+     that says that the Document is released under this License.
+
+     A "Transparent" copy of the Document means a machine-readable copy,
+     represented in a format whose specification is available to the
+     general public, whose contents can be viewed and edited directly
+     and straightforwardly with generic text editors or (for images
+     composed of pixels) generic paint programs or (for drawings) some
+     widely available drawing editor, and that is suitable for input to
+     text formatters or for automatic translation to a variety of
+     formats suitable for input to text formatters.  A copy made in an
+     otherwise Transparent file format whose markup has been designed to
+     thwart or discourage subsequent modification by readers is not
+     Transparent.  A copy that is not "Transparent" is called "Opaque."
+
+     Examples of suitable formats for Transparent copies include plain
+     ASCII without markup, Texinfo input format, LaTeX input format,
+     SGML or XML using a publicly available DTD, and standard-conforming
+     simple HTML designed for human modification.  Opaque formats
+     include PostScript, PDF, proprietary formats that can be read and
+     edited only by proprietary word processors, SGML or XML for which
+     the DTD and/or processing tools are not generally available, and
+     the machine-generated HTML produced by some word processors for
+     output purposes only.
+
+     The "Title Page" means, for a printed book, the title page itself,
+     plus such following pages as are needed to hold, legibly, the
+     material this License requires to appear in the title page.  For
+     works in formats which do not have any title page as such, "Title
+     Page" means the text near the most prominent appearance of the
+     work's title, preceding the beginning of the body of the text.
+
+  2. VERBATIM COPYING
+
+     You may copy and distribute the Document in any medium, either
+     commercially or noncommercially, provided that this License, the
+     copyright notices, and the license notice saying this License
+     applies to the Document are reproduced in all copies, and that you
+     add no other conditions whatsoever to those of this License.  You
+     may not use technical measures to obstruct or control the reading
+     or further copying of the copies you make or distribute.  However,
+     you may accept compensation in exchange for copies.  If you
+     distribute a large enough number of copies you must also follow the
+     conditions in section 3.
+
+     You may also lend copies, under the same conditions stated above,
+     and you may publicly display copies.
+
+  3. COPYING IN QUANTITY
+
+     If you publish printed copies of the Document numbering more than
+     100, and the Document's license notice requires Cover Texts, you
+     must enclose the copies in covers that carry, clearly and legibly,
+     all these Cover Texts: Front-Cover Texts on the front cover, and
+     Back-Cover Texts on the back cover.  Both covers must also clearly
+     and legibly identify you as the publisher of these copies.  The
+     front cover must present the full title with all words of the title
+     equally prominent and visible.  You may add other material on the
+     covers in addition.  Copying with changes limited to the covers, as
+     long as they preserve the title of the Document and satisfy these
+     conditions, can be treated as verbatim copying in other respects.
+
+     If the required texts for either cover are too voluminous to fit
+     legibly, you should put the first ones listed (as many as fit
+     reasonably) on the actual cover, and continue the rest onto
+     adjacent pages.
+
+     If you publish or distribute Opaque copies of the Document
+     numbering more than 100, you must either include a machine-readable
+     Transparent copy along with each Opaque copy, or state in or with
+     each Opaque copy a publicly-accessible computer-network location
+     containing a complete Transparent copy of the Document, free of
+     added material, which the general network-using public has access
+     to download anonymously at no charge using public-standard network
+     protocols.  If you use the latter option, you must take reasonably
+     prudent steps, when you begin distribution of Opaque copies in
+     quantity, to ensure that this Transparent copy will remain thus
+     accessible at the stated location until at least one year after the
+     last time you distribute an Opaque copy (directly or through your
+     agents or retailers) of that edition to the public.
+
+     It is requested, but not required, that you contact the authors of
+     the Document well before redistributing any large number of copies,
+     to give them a chance to provide you with an updated version of the
+     Document.
+
+  4. MODIFICATIONS
+
+     You may copy and distribute a Modified Version of the Document
+     under the conditions of sections 2 and 3 above, provided that you
+     release the Modified Version under precisely this License, with the
+     Modified Version filling the role of the Document, thus licensing
+     distribution and modification of the Modified Version to whoever
+     possesses a copy of it.  In addition, you must do these things in
+     the Modified Version:
+
+     A. Use in the Title Page (and on the covers, if any) a title
+     distinct from that of the Document, and from those of previous
+     versions (which should, if there were any, be listed in the History
+     section of the Document).  You may use the same title as a previous
+     version if the original publisher of that version gives permission.
+     B. List on the Title Page, as authors, one or more persons or
+     entities responsible for authorship of the modifications in the
+     Modified Version, together with at least five of the principal
+     authors of the Document (all of its principal authors, if it has
+     less than five).
+     C. State on the Title page the name of the publisher of the
+     Modified Version, as the publisher.
+     D. Preserve all the copyright notices of the Document.
+     E. Add an appropriate copyright notice for your modifications
+     adjacent to the other copyright notices.
+     F. Include, immediately after the copyright notices, a license
+     notice giving the public permission to use the Modified Version
+     under the terms of this License, in the form shown in the Addendum
+     below.
+     G. Preserve in that license notice the full lists of Invariant
+     Sections and required Cover Texts given in the Document's license
+     notice.
+     H. Include an unaltered copy of this License.
+     I. Preserve the section entitled "History", and its title, and add
+     to it an item stating at least the title, year, new authors, and
+     publisher of the Modified Version as given on the Title Page.  If
+     there is no section entitled "History" in the Document, create one
+     stating the title, year, authors, and publisher of the Document as
+     given on its Title Page, then add an item describing the Modified
+     Version as stated in the previous sentence.
+     J. Preserve the network location, if any, given in the Document for
+     public access to a Transparent copy of the Document, and likewise
+     the network locations given in the Document for previous versions
+     it was based on.  These may be placed in the "History" section.
+     You may omit a network location for a work that was published at
+     least four years before the Document itself, or if the original
+     publisher of the version it refers to gives permission.
+     K. In any section entitled "Acknowledgements" or "Dedications",
+     preserve the section's title, and preserve in the section all the
+     substance and tone of each of the contributor acknowledgements
+     and/or dedications given therein.
+     L. Preserve all the Invariant Sections of the Document, unaltered
+     in their text and in their titles.  Section numbers or the
+     equivalent are not considered part of the section titles.
+     M. Delete any section entitled "Endorsements."  Such a section may
+     not be included in the Modified Version.
+     N. Do not retitle any existing section as "Endorsements" or to
+     conflict in title with any Invariant Section.
+
+     If the Modified Version includes new front-matter sections or
+     appendices that qualify as Secondary Sections and contain no
+     material copied from the Document, you may at your option designate
+     some or all of these sections as invariant.  To do this, add their
+     titles to the list of Invariant Sections in the Modified Version's
+     license notice.  These titles must be distinct from any other
+     section titles.
+
+     You may add a section entitled "Endorsements", provided it contains
+     nothing but endorsements of your Modified Version by various
+     parties-for example, statements of peer review or that the text has
+     been approved by an organization as the authoritative definition of
+     a standard.
+
+     You may add a passage of up to five words as a Front-Cover Text,
+     and a passage of up to 25 words as a Back-Cover Text, to the end of
+     the list of Cover Texts in the Modified Version.  Only one passage
+     of Front-Cover Text and one of Back-Cover Text may be added by (or
+     through arrangements made by) any one entity.  If the Document
+     already includes a cover text for the same cover, previously added
+     by you or by arrangement made by the same entity you are acting on
+     behalf of, you may not add another; but you may replace the old
+     one, on explicit permission from the previous publisher that added
+     the old one.
+
+     The author(s) and publisher(s) of the Document do not by this
+     License give permission to use their names for publicity for or to
+     assert or imply endorsement of any Modified Version.
+
+  5. COMBINING DOCUMENTS
+
+     You may combine the Document with other documents released under
+     this License, under the terms defined in section 4 above for
+     modified versions, provided that you include in the combination all
+     of the Invariant Sections of all of the original documents,
+     unmodified, and list them all as Invariant Sections of your
+     combined work in its license notice.
+
+     The combined work need only contain one copy of this License, and
+     multiple identical Invariant Sections may be replaced with a single
+     copy.  If there are multiple Invariant Sections with the same name
+     but different contents, make the title of each such section unique
+     by adding at the end of it, in parentheses, the name of the
+     original author or publisher of that section if known, or else a
+     unique number.  Make the same adjustment to the section titles in
+     the list of Invariant Sections in the license notice of the
+     combined work.
+
+     In the combination, you must combine any sections entitled
+     "History" in the various original documents, forming one section
+     entitled "History"; likewise combine any sections entitled
+     "Acknowledgements", and any sections entitled "Dedications."  You
+     must delete all sections entitled "Endorsements."
+
+  6. COLLECTIONS OF DOCUMENTS
+
+     You may make a collection consisting of the Document and other
+     documents released under this License, and replace the individual
+     copies of this License in the various documents with a single copy
+     that is included in the collection, provided that you follow the
+     rules of this License for verbatim copying of each of the documents
+     in all other respects.
+
+     You may extract a single document from such a collection, and
+     distribute it individually under this License, provided you insert
+     a copy of this License into the extracted document, and follow this
+     License in all other respects regarding verbatim copying of that
+     document.
+
+  7. AGGREGATION WITH INDEPENDENT WORKS
+
+     A compilation of the Document or its derivatives with other
+     separate and independent documents or works, in or on a volume of a
+     storage or distribution medium, does not as a whole count as a
+     Modified Version of the Document, provided no compilation copyright
+     is claimed for the compilation.  Such a compilation is called an
+     "aggregate", and this License does not apply to the other
+     self-contained works thus compiled with the Document, on account of
+     their being thus compiled, if they are not themselves derivative
+     works of the Document.
+
+     If the Cover Text requirement of section 3 is applicable to these
+     copies of the Document, then if the Document is less than one
+     quarter of the entire aggregate, the Document's Cover Texts may be
+     placed on covers that surround only the Document within the
+     aggregate.  Otherwise they must appear on covers around the whole
+     aggregate.
+
+  8. TRANSLATION
+
+     Translation is considered a kind of modification, so you may
+     distribute translations of the Document under the terms of section
+     4.  Replacing Invariant Sections with translations requires special
+     permission from their copyright holders, but you may include
+     translations of some or all Invariant Sections in addition to the
+     original versions of these Invariant Sections.  You may include a
+     translation of this License provided that you also include the
+     original English version of this License.  In case of a
+     disagreement between the translation and the original English
+     version of this License, the original English version will prevail.
+
+  9. TERMINATION
+
+     You may not copy, modify, sublicense, or distribute the Document
+     except as expressly provided for under this License.  Any other
+     attempt to copy, modify, sublicense or distribute the Document is
+     void, and will automatically terminate your rights under this
+     License.  However, parties who have received copies, or rights,
+     from you under this License will not have their licenses terminated
+     so long as such parties remain in full compliance.
+
+  10. FUTURE REVISIONS OF THIS LICENSE
+
+     The Free Software Foundation may publish new, revised versions of
+     the GNU Free Documentation License from time to time.  Such new
+     versions will be similar in spirit to the present version, but may
+     differ in detail to address new problems or concerns.  See
+     http://www.gnu.org/copyleft/.
+
+     Each version of the License is given a distinguishing version
+     number.  If the Document specifies that a particular numbered
+     version of this License "or any later version" applies to it, you
+     have the option of following the terms and conditions either of
+     that specified version or of any later version that has been
+     published (not as a draft) by the Free Software Foundation.  If the
+     Document does not specify a version number of this License, you may
+     choose any version ever published (not as a draft) by the Free
+     Software Foundation.
+
+ADDENDUM: How to use this License for your documents
+====================================================
+
+To use this License in a document you have written, include a copy of
+the License in the document and put the following copyright and license
+notices just after the title page:
+
+     Copyright (C)  YEAR  YOUR NAME.
+     Permission is granted to copy, distribute and/or modify this document
+     under the terms of the GNU Free Documentation License, Version 1.1
+     or any later version published by the Free Software Foundation;
+     with the Invariant Sections being LIST THEIR TITLES, with the
+     Front-Cover Texts being LIST, and with the Back-Cover Texts being LIST.
+     A copy of the license is included in the section entitled "GNU
+     Free Documentation License."
+
+   If you have no Invariant Sections, write "with no Invariant Sections"
+instead of saying which ones are invariant.  If you have no Front-Cover
+Texts, write "no Front-Cover Texts" instead of "Front-Cover Texts being
+LIST"; likewise for Back-Cover Texts.
+
+   If your document contains nontrivial examples of program code, we
+recommend releasing these examples in parallel under your choice of free
+software license, such as the GNU General Public License, to permit
+their use in free software.
+
+   ---------- Footnotes ----------
+
+   (1) Any more details?
+
+AS Index
+********
+
+* Menu:
+
+* #:                                     Comments.           (line 1306)
+* #APP:                                  Preprocessing.      (line 1268)
+* #NO_APP:                               Preprocessing.      (line 1268)
+* '$a':                                  ARM Mapping Symbols.
+                                                             (line 4193)
+* '$d':                                  ARM Mapping Symbols.
+                                                             (line 4199)
+* '$t':                                  ARM Mapping Symbols.
+                                                             (line 4196)
+* --:                                    Command Line.       (line  760)
+* '--32' option, i386:                   i386-Options.       (line 4220)
+* '--32' option, x86-64:                 i386-Options.       (line 4220)
+* '--64' option, i386:                   i386-Options.       (line 4220)
+* '--64' option, x86-64:                 i386-Options.       (line 4220)
+* --alternate:                           alternate.          (line  929)
+* '--divide' option, i386:               i386-Options.       (line 4236)
+* --enforce-aligned-data:                Sparc-Aligned-Data. (line 5460)
+* --fatal-warnings:                      W.                  (line 1222)
+* --hash-size=NUMBER:                    Overview.           (line  459)
+* --listing-cont-lines:                  listing.            (line 1015)
+* --listing-lhs-width:                   listing.            (line  997)
+* --listing-lhs-width2:                  listing.            (line 1002)
+* --listing-rhs-width:                   listing.            (line 1009)
+* --MD:                                  MD.                 (line 1149)
+* --no-warn:                             W.                  (line 1217)
+* --statistics:                          statistics.         (line 1188)
+* --traditional-format:                  traditional-format. (line 1196)
+* --warn:                                W.                  (line 1225)
+* -a:                                    a.                  (line  894)
+* -ac:                                   a.                  (line  894)
+* -ad:                                   a.                  (line  894)
+* -ah:                                   a.                  (line  894)
+* -al:                                   a.                  (line  894)
+* -an:                                   a.                  (line  894)
+* -as:                                   a.                  (line  894)
+* -Asparclet:                            Sparc-Opts.         (line 5421)
+* -Asparclite:                           Sparc-Opts.         (line 5421)
+* -Av6:                                  Sparc-Opts.         (line 5421)
+* -Av8:                                  Sparc-Opts.         (line 5421)
+* -Av9:                                  Sparc-Opts.         (line 5421)
+* -Av9a:                                 Sparc-Opts.         (line 5421)
+* -construct-floats:                     MIPS Opts.          (line 5056)
+* -D:                                    D.                  (line  934)
+* '-eabi=' command line option, ARM:     ARM Options.        (line 3844)
+* '-EB' command line option, ARM:        ARM Options.        (line 3849)
+* '-EB' option (MIPS):                   MIPS Opts.          (line 4879)
+* '-EL' command line option, ARM:        ARM Options.        (line 3853)
+* '-EL' option (MIPS):                   MIPS Opts.          (line 4879)
+* -f:                                    f.                  (line  940)
+* '-G' option (MIPS):                    MIPS Opts.          (line 4874)
+* -I PATH:                               I.                  (line  952)
+* -K:                                    K.                  (line  962)
+* '-k' command line option, ARM:         ARM Options.        (line 3857)
+* '-KPIC' option, MIPS:                  MIPS Opts.          (line 4887)
+* -L:                                    L.                  (line  972)
+* -M:                                    M.                  (line 1022)
+* '-mapcs' command line option, ARM:     ARM Options.        (line 3817)
+* '-mapcs-float' command line option, ARM: ARM Options.      (line 3830)
+* '-mapcs-reentrant' command line option, ARM: ARM Options.  (line 3835)
+* '-march=' command line option, ARM:    ARM Options.        (line 3773)
+* '-march=' option, i386:                i386-Options.       (line 4243)
+* '-march=' option, x86-64:              i386-Options.       (line 4243)
+* '-matpcs' command line option, ARM:    ARM Options.        (line 3822)
+* '-mconstant-gp' command line option, IA-64: IA-64 Options. (line 4733)
+* '-mcpu=' command line option, ARM:     ARM Options.        (line 3742)
+* '-mfloat-abi=' command line option, ARM: ARM Options.      (line 3839)
+* '-mfpu=' command line option, ARM:     ARM Options.        (line 3788)
+* -mno-sym32:                            MIPS Opts.          (line 5045)
+* -msym32:                               MIPS Opts.          (line 5045)
+* '-mthumb' command line option, ARM:    ARM Options.        (line 3808)
+* '-mthumb-interwork' command line option, ARM: ARM Options. (line 3813)
+* '-mtune=' option, i386:                i386-Options.       (line 4255)
+* '-mtune=' option, x86-64:              i386-Options.       (line 4255)
+* '-mvxworks-pic' option, MIPS:          MIPS Opts.          (line 4892)
+* -no-construct-floats:                  MIPS Opts.          (line 5056)
+* '-nocpp' ignored (MIPS):               MIPS Opts.          (line 5048)
+* -o:                                    o.                  (line 1160)
+* -R:                                    R.                  (line 1170)
+* -v:                                    v.                  (line 1206)
+* -version:                              v.                  (line 1206)
+* -W:                                    W.                  (line 1217)
+* '.' (symbol):                          Dot.                (line 1898)
+* '.arch' directive, ARM:                ARM Directives.     (line 4118)
+* '.cantunwind' directive, ARM:          ARM Directives.     (line 4022)
+* '.cpu' directive, ARM:                 ARM Directives.     (line 4114)
+* '.eabi_attribute' directive, ARM:      ARM Directives.     (line 4132)
+* '.fnend' directive, ARM:               ARM Directives.     (line 4014)
+* '.fnstart' directive, ARM:             ARM Directives.     (line 4011)
+* '.fpu' directive, ARM:                 ARM Directives.     (line 4128)
+* '.handlerdata' directive, ARM:         ARM Directives.     (line 4033)
+* '.insn':                               MIPS insn.          (line 5223)
+* '.ltorg' directive, ARM:               ARM Directives.     (line 3994)
+* '.movsp' directive, ARM:               ARM Directives.     (line 4088)
+* .o:                                    Object.             (line  827)
+* '.object_arch' directive, ARM:         ARM Directives.     (line 4122)
+* '.pad' directive, ARM:                 ARM Directives.     (line 4083)
+* '.personality' directive, ARM:         ARM Directives.     (line 4026)
+* '.personalityindex' directive, ARM:    ARM Directives.     (line 4029)
+* '.pool' directive, ARM:                ARM Directives.     (line 4008)
+* '.save' directive, ARM:                ARM Directives.     (line 4042)
+* '.set arch=CPU':                       MIPS ISA.           (line 5195)
+* '.set autoextend':                     MIPS autoextend.    (line 5210)
+* '.set dsp':                            MIPS ASE instruction generation overrides.
+                                                             (line 5262)
+* '.set dspr2':                          MIPS ASE instruction generation overrides.
+                                                             (line 5267)
+* '.set mdmx':                           MIPS ASE instruction generation overrides.
+                                                             (line 5257)
+* '.set mips3d':                         MIPS ASE instruction generation overrides.
+                                                             (line 5247)
+* '.set mipsN':                          MIPS ISA.           (line 5183)
+* '.set mt':                             MIPS ASE instruction generation overrides.
+                                                             (line 5272)
+* '.set noautoextend':                   MIPS autoextend.    (line 5210)
+* '.set nodsp':                          MIPS ASE instruction generation overrides.
+                                                             (line 5262)
+* '.set nodspr2':                        MIPS ASE instruction generation overrides.
+                                                             (line 5267)
+* '.set nomdmx':                         MIPS ASE instruction generation overrides.
+                                                             (line 5257)
+* '.set nomips3d':                       MIPS ASE instruction generation overrides.
+                                                             (line 5247)
+* '.set nomt':                           MIPS ASE instruction generation overrides.
+                                                             (line 5272)
+* '.set nosmartmips':                    MIPS ASE instruction generation overrides.
+                                                             (line 5252)
+* '.set nosym32':                        MIPS symbol sizes.  (line 5140)
+* '.set pop':                            MIPS option stack.  (line 5232)
+* '.set push':                           MIPS option stack.  (line 5232)
+* '.set smartmips':                      MIPS ASE instruction generation overrides.
+                                                             (line 5252)
+* '.set sym32':                          MIPS symbol sizes.  (line 5140)
+* '.setfp' directive, ARM:               ARM Directives.     (line 4093)
+* '.unwind_raw' directive, ARM:          ARM Directives.     (line 4107)
+* '.vsave' directive, ARM:               ARM Directives.     (line 4066)
+* 16-bit code, i386:                     i386-16bit.         (line 4615)
+* 3DNow!, i386:                          i386-SIMD.          (line 4593)
+* 3DNow!, x86-64:                        i386-SIMD.          (line 4593)
+* ':' (label):                           Statements.         (line 1355)
+* '\"' (doublequote character):          Strings.            (line 1423)
+* '\b' (backspace character):            Strings.            (line 1395)
+* '\DDD' (octal character code):         Strings.            (line 1410)
+* '\f' (formfeed character):             Strings.            (line 1398)
+* '\n' (newline character):              Strings.            (line 1401)
+* '\r' (carriage return character):      Strings.            (line 1404)
+* '\t' (tab):                            Strings.            (line 1407)
+* '\XD...' (hex character code):         Strings.            (line 1416)
+* '\\' ('\' character):                  Strings.            (line 1420)
+* a.out:                                 Object.             (line  827)
+* 'abort' directive:                     Abort.              (line 2114)
+* absolute section:                      Ld Sections.        (line 1632)
+* addition, permitted arguments:         Infix Ops.          (line 2055)
+* addresses:                             Expressions.        (line 1946)
+* addresses, format of:                  Secs Background.    (line 1573)
+* 'ADR reg,<label>' pseudo op, ARM:      ARM Opcodes.        (line 4159)
+* 'ADRL reg,<label>' pseudo op, ARM:     ARM Opcodes.        (line 4169)
+* advancing location counter:            Org.                (line 3101)
+* 'align' directive:                     Align.              (line 2123)
+* 'align' directive, ARM:                ARM Directives.     (line 3915)
+* 'align' directive, SPARC:              Sparc-Directives.   (line 5481)
+* arch directive, i386:                  i386-Arch.          (line 4670)
+* arch directive, x86-64:                i386-Arch.          (line 4670)
+* architectures, PowerPC:                PowerPC-Opts.       (line 5285)
+* architectures, SPARC:                  Sparc-Opts.         (line 5402)
+* arguments for addition:                Infix Ops.          (line 2055)
+* arguments for subtraction:             Infix Ops.          (line 2060)
+* arguments in expressions:              Arguments.          (line 1973)
+* arithmetic functions:                  Operators.          (line 1998)
+* arithmetic operands:                   Arguments.          (line 1973)
+* ARM data relocations:                  ARM-Relocations.    (line 3886)
+* 'arm' directive, ARM:                  ARM Directives.     (line 3969)
+* ARM floating point (IEEE):             ARM Floating Point. (line 3910)
+* ARM identifiers:                       ARM-Chars.          (line 3876)
+* ARM immediate character:               ARM-Chars.          (line 3874)
+* ARM line comment character:            ARM-Chars.          (line 3867)
+* ARM line separator:                    ARM-Chars.          (line 3871)
+* ARM machine directives:                ARM Directives.     (line 3915)
+* ARM opcodes:                           ARM Opcodes.        (line 4140)
+* ARM options (none):                    ARM Options.        (line 3742)
+* ARM register names:                    ARM-Regs.           (line 3881)
+* ARM support:                           Machine Dependencies.
+                                                             (line 3739)
+* 'ascii' directive:                     Ascii.              (line 2165)
+* 'asciz' directive:                     Asciz.              (line 2172)
+* assembler bugs, reporting:             Bug Reporting.      (line 5566)
+* assembler crash:                       Bug Criteria.       (line 5550)
+* assembler internal logic error:        As Sections.        (line 1674)
+* assembler version:                     v.                  (line 1206)
+* assembler, and linker:                 Secs Background.    (line 1535)
+* assembly listings, enabling:           a.                  (line  894)
+* assigning values to symbols:           Setting Symbols.    (line 1772)
+* assigning values to symbols <1>:       Equ.                (line 2471)
+* attributes, symbol:                    Symbol Attributes.  (line 1907)
+* att_syntax pseudo op, i386:            i386-Syntax.        (line 4265)
+* att_syntax pseudo op, x86-64:          i386-Syntax.        (line 4265)
+* Av7:                                   Sparc-Opts.         (line 5421)
+* backslash ('\\'):                      Strings.            (line 1420)
+* backspace ('\b'):                      Strings.            (line 1395)
+* 'balign' directive:                    Balign.             (line 2178)
+* 'balignl' directive:                   Balign.             (line 2199)
+* 'balignw' directive:                   Balign.             (line 2199)
+* big endian output, MIPS:               Overview.           (line  560)
+* big-endian output, MIPS:               MIPS Opts.          (line 4879)
+* bignums:                               Bignums.            (line 1485)
+* binary files, including:               Incbin.             (line 2707)
+* binary integers:                       Integers.           (line 1466)
+* bit names, IA-64:                      IA-64-Bits.         (line 4846)
+* bss section:                           Ld Sections.        (line 1623)
+* bss section <1>:                       bss.                (line 1739)
+* bug criteria:                          Bug Criteria.       (line 5547)
+* bug reports:                           Bug Reporting.      (line 5566)
+* bugs in assembler:                     Reporting Bugs.     (line 5534)
+* bus lock prefixes, i386:               i386-Prefixes.      (line 4444)
+* 'byte' directive:                      Byte.               (line 2211)
+* call instructions, i386:               i386-Mnemonics.     (line 4353)
+* call instructions, x86-64:             i386-Mnemonics.     (line 4353)
+* carriage return ('\r'):                Strings.            (line 1404)
+* 'cfi_endproc' directive:               CFI directives.     (line 2249)
+* 'cfi_startproc' directive:             CFI directives.     (line 2239)
+* character constants:                   Characters.         (line 1377)
+* character escape codes:                Strings.            (line 1395)
+* character, single:                     Chars.              (line 1443)
+* characters used in symbols:            Symbol Intro.       (line 1325)
+* 'code' directive, ARM:                 ARM Directives.     (line 3962)
+* 'code16' directive, i386:              i386-16bit.         (line 4615)
+* 'code16gcc' directive, i386:           i386-16bit.         (line 4615)
+* 'code32' directive, i386:              i386-16bit.         (line 4615)
+* 'code64' directive, i386:              i386-16bit.         (line 4615)
+* 'code64' directive, x86-64:            i386-16bit.         (line 4615)
+* COMDAT:                                Linkonce.           (line 2831)
+* 'comm' directive:                      Comm.               (line 2217)
+* command line conventions:              Command Line.       (line  756)
+* comments:                              Comments.           (line 1288)
+* comments, removed by preprocessor:     Preprocessing.      (line 1253)
+* 'common' directive, SPARC:             Sparc-Directives.   (line 5484)
+* common sections:                       Linkonce.           (line 2831)
+* common variable storage:               bss.                (line 1739)
+* comparison expressions:                Infix Ops.          (line 2066)
+* conditional assembly:                  If.                 (line 2629)
+* constant, single character:            Chars.              (line 1443)
+* constants:                             Constants.          (line 1366)
+* constants, bignum:                     Bignums.            (line 1485)
+* constants, character:                  Characters.         (line 1377)
+* constants, converted by preprocessor:  Preprocessing.      (line 1256)
+* constants, floating point:             Flonums.            (line 1493)
+* constants, integer:                    Integers.           (line 1466)
+* constants, number:                     Numbers.            (line 1457)
+* constants, string:                     Strings.            (line 1386)
+* conversion instructions, i386:         i386-Mnemonics.     (line 4334)
+* conversion instructions, x86-64:       i386-Mnemonics.     (line 4334)
+* coprocessor wait, i386:                i386-Prefixes.      (line 4448)
+* crash of assembler:                    Bug Criteria.       (line 5550)
+* current address:                       Dot.                (line 1898)
+* current address, advancing:            Org.                (line 3101)
+* data alignment on SPARC:               Sparc-Aligned-Data. (line 5455)
+* data and text sections, joining:       R.                  (line 1170)
+* 'data' directive:                      Data.               (line 2421)
+* data relocations, ARM:                 ARM-Relocations.    (line 3886)
+* debuggers, and symbol order:           Symbols.            (line 1757)
+* decimal integers:                      Integers.           (line 1472)
+* dependency tracking:                   MD.                 (line 1149)
+* deprecated directives:                 Deprecated.         (line 3731)
+* directives and instructions:           Statements.         (line 1347)
+* directives for PowerPC:                PowerPC-Pseudo.     (line 5386)
+* directives, machine independent:       Pseudo Ops.         (line 2105)
+* 'dn' and 'qn' directives, ARM:         ARM Directives.     (line 3938)
+* dollar local symbols:                  Symbol Names.       (line 1879)
+* dot (symbol):                          Dot.                (line 1898)
+* 'double' directive:                    Double.             (line 2428)
+* 'double' directive, i386:              i386-Float.         (line 4569)
+* 'double' directive, x86-64:            i386-Float.         (line 4569)
+* doublequote ('\"'):                    Strings.            (line 1423)
+* ECOFF sections:                        MIPS Object.        (line 5100)
+* eight-byte integer:                    Quad.               (line 3245)
+* 'eject' directive:                     Eject.              (line 2434)
+* ELF symbol type:                       Type.               (line 3620)
+* 'else' directive:                      Else.               (line 2439)
+* 'elseif' directive:                    Elseif.             (line 2446)
+* empty expressions:                     Empty Exprs.        (line 1959)
+* emulation:                             Overview.           (line  663)
+* 'end' directive:                       End.                (line 2453)
+* 'endfunc' directive:                   Endfunc.            (line 2459)
+* endianness, MIPS:                      Overview.           (line  560)
+* 'endif' directive:                     Endif.              (line 2464)
+* 'endm' directive:                      Macro.              (line 3025)
+* EOF, newline must precede:             Statements.         (line 1341)
+* 'equ' directive:                       Equ.                (line 2471)
+* 'equiv' directive:                     Equiv.              (line 2477)
+* 'eqv' directive:                       Eqv.                (line 2493)
+* 'err' directive:                       Err.                (line 2501)
+* error directive:                       Error.              (line 2509)
+* error messages:                        Errors.             (line  844)
+* error on valid input:                  Bug Criteria.       (line 5553)
+* errors, caused by warnings:            W.                  (line 1222)
+* errors, continuing after:              Z.                  (line 1231)
+* escape codes, character:               Strings.            (line 1395)
+* 'exitm' directive:                     Macro.              (line 3028)
+* expr (internal section):               As Sections.        (line 1678)
+* expression arguments:                  Arguments.          (line 1973)
+* expressions:                           Expressions.        (line 1946)
+* expressions, comparison:               Infix Ops.          (line 2066)
+* expressions, empty:                    Empty Exprs.        (line 1959)
+* expressions, integer:                  Integer Exprs.      (line 1967)
+* 'extern' directive:                    Extern.             (line 2524)
+* 'fail' directive:                      Fail.               (line 2531)
+* faster processing ('-f'):              f.                  (line  940)
+* fatal signal:                          Bug Criteria.       (line 5550)
+* 'file' directive:                      LNS directives.     (line 2369)
+* 'file' directive <1>:                  File.               (line 2540)
+* file name, logical:                    File.               (line 2540)
+* files, including:                      Include.            (line 2721)
+* files, input:                          Input Files.        (line  780)
+* 'fill' directive:                      Fill.               (line 2550)
+* filling memory:                        Skip.               (line 3452)
+* filling memory <1>:                    Space.              (line 3459)
+* 'float' directive:                     Float.              (line 2568)
+* 'float' directive, i386:               i386-Float.         (line 4569)
+* 'float' directive, x86-64:             i386-Float.         (line 4569)
+* floating point numbers:                Flonums.            (line 1493)
+* floating point numbers (double):       Double.             (line 2428)
+* floating point numbers (single):       Float.              (line 2568)
+* floating point numbers (single) <1>:   Single.             (line 3425)
+* floating point, ARM (IEEE):            ARM Floating Point. (line 3910)
+* floating point, i386:                  i386-Float.         (line 4561)
+* floating point, SPARC (IEEE):          Sparc-Float.        (line 5473)
+* floating point, x86-64:                i386-Float.         (line 4561)
+* flonums:                               Flonums.            (line 1493)
+* 'force_thumb' directive, ARM:          ARM Directives.     (line 3972)
+* format of error messages:              Errors.             (line  861)
+* format of warning messages:            Errors.             (line  850)
+* formfeed ('\f'):                       Strings.            (line 1398)
+* 'func' directive:                      Func.               (line 2574)
+* functions, in expressions:             Operators.          (line 1998)
+* 'global' directive:                    Global.             (line 2585)
+* 'gp' register, MIPS:                   MIPS Object.        (line 5105)
+* grouping data:                         Sub-Sections.       (line 1686)
+* 'half' directive, SPARC:               Sparc-Directives.   (line 5489)
+* hex character code ('\XD...'):         Strings.            (line 1416)
+* hexadecimal integers:                  Integers.           (line 1475)
+* 'hidden' directive:                    Hidden.             (line 2597)
+* 'hword' directive:                     hword.              (line 2610)
+* i386 16-bit code:                      i386-16bit.         (line 4615)
+* i386 arch directive:                   i386-Arch.          (line 4670)
+* i386 att_syntax pseudo op:             i386-Syntax.        (line 4265)
+* i386 conversion instructions:          i386-Mnemonics.     (line 4334)
+* i386 floating point:                   i386-Float.         (line 4561)
+* i386 immediate operands:               i386-Syntax.        (line 4274)
+* i386 instruction naming:               i386-Mnemonics.     (line 4309)
+* i386 instruction prefixes:             i386-Prefixes.      (line 4414)
+* i386 intel_syntax pseudo op:           i386-Syntax.        (line 4265)
+* i386 jump optimization:                i386-Jumps.         (line 4538)
+* i386 jump, call, return:               i386-Syntax.        (line 4296)
+* i386 jump/call operands:               i386-Syntax.        (line 4274)
+* i386 memory references:                i386-Memory.        (line 4471)
+* i386 'mul', 'imul' instructions:       i386-Notes.         (line 4714)
+* i386 options:                          i386-Options.       (line 4218)
+* i386 register operands:                i386-Syntax.        (line 4274)
+* i386 registers:                        i386-Regs.          (line 4359)
+* i386 sections:                         i386-Syntax.        (line 4302)
+* i386 size suffixes:                    i386-Syntax.        (line 4287)
+* i386 source, destination operands:     i386-Syntax.        (line 4280)
+* i386 support:                          .                   (line 4211)
+* i386 syntax compatibility:             i386-Syntax.        (line 4265)
+* i80306 support:                        .                   (line 4211)
+* IA-64 line comment character:          IA-64-Chars.        (line 4822)
+* IA-64 line separator:                  IA-64-Chars.        (line 4824)
+* IA-64 options:                         IA-64 Options.      (line 4733)
+* IA-64 Processor-status-Register bit names: IA-64-Bits.     (line 4846)
+* IA-64 registers:                       IA-64-Regs.         (line 4829)
+* IA-64 support:                         .                   (line 4730)
+* IA-64 Syntax:                          IA-64 Options.      (line 4812)
+* 'ident' directive:                     Ident.              (line 2618)
+* identifiers, ARM:                      ARM-Chars.          (line 3876)
+* 'if' directive:                        If.                 (line 2629)
+* 'ifb' directive:                       If.                 (line 2644)
+* 'ifc' directive:                       If.                 (line 2648)
+* 'ifdef' directive:                     If.                 (line 2639)
+* 'ifeq' directive:                      If.                 (line 2656)
+* 'ifeqs' directive:                     If.                 (line 2659)
+* 'ifge' directive:                      If.                 (line 2663)
+* 'ifgt' directive:                      If.                 (line 2667)
+* 'ifle' directive:                      If.                 (line 2671)
+* 'iflt' directive:                      If.                 (line 2675)
+* 'ifnb' directive:                      If.                 (line 2679)
+* 'ifnc' directive:                      If.                 (line 2684)
+* 'ifndef' directive:                    If.                 (line 2688)
+* 'ifne' directive:                      If.                 (line 2695)
+* 'ifnes' directive:                     If.                 (line 2699)
+* 'ifnotdef' directive:                  If.                 (line 2688)
+* immediate character, ARM:              ARM-Chars.          (line 3874)
+* immediate operands, i386:              i386-Syntax.        (line 4274)
+* immediate operands, x86-64:            i386-Syntax.        (line 4274)
+* 'imul' instruction, i386:              i386-Notes.         (line 4714)
+* 'imul' instruction, x86-64:            i386-Notes.         (line 4714)
+* 'incbin' directive:                    Incbin.             (line 2707)
+* 'include' directive:                   Include.            (line 2721)
+* 'include' directive search path:       I.                  (line  952)
+* infix operators:                       Infix Ops.          (line 2016)
+* inhibiting interrupts, i386:           i386-Prefixes.      (line 4444)
+* input:                                 Input Files.        (line  780)
+* input file linenumbers:                Input Files.        (line  809)
+* instruction naming, i386:              i386-Mnemonics.     (line 4309)
+* instruction naming, x86-64:            i386-Mnemonics.     (line 4309)
+* instruction prefixes, i386:            i386-Prefixes.      (line 4414)
+* instructions and directives:           Statements.         (line 1347)
+* 'int' directive:                       Int.                (line 2732)
+* 'int' directive, i386:                 i386-Float.         (line 4576)
+* 'int' directive, x86-64:               i386-Float.         (line 4576)
+* integer expressions:                   Integer Exprs.      (line 1967)
+* integer, 16-byte:                      Octa.               (line 3092)
+* integer, 8-byte:                       Quad.               (line 3245)
+* integers:                              Integers.           (line 1466)
+* integers, 16-bit:                      hword.              (line 2610)
+* integers, 32-bit:                      Int.                (line 2732)
+* integers, binary:                      Integers.           (line 1466)
+* integers, decimal:                     Integers.           (line 1472)
+* integers, hexadecimal:                 Integers.           (line 1475)
+* integers, octal:                       Integers.           (line 1469)
+* integers, one byte:                    Byte.               (line 2211)
+* intel_syntax pseudo op, i386:          i386-Syntax.        (line 4265)
+* intel_syntax pseudo op, x86-64:        i386-Syntax.        (line 4265)
+* internal assembler sections:           As Sections.        (line 1667)
+* 'internal' directive:                  Internal.           (line 2740)
+* invalid input:                         Bug Criteria.       (line 5555)
+* invocation summary:                    Overview.           (line  249)
+* 'irp' directive:                       Irp.                (line 2754)
+* 'irpc' directive:                      Irpc.               (line 2779)
+* joining text and data sections:        R.                  (line 1170)
+* jump instructions, i386:               i386-Mnemonics.     (line 4353)
+* jump instructions, x86-64:             i386-Mnemonics.     (line 4353)
+* jump optimization, i386:               i386-Jumps.         (line 4538)
+* jump optimization, x86-64:             i386-Jumps.         (line 4538)
+* jump/call operands, i386:              i386-Syntax.        (line 4274)
+* jump/call operands, x86-64:            i386-Syntax.        (line 4274)
+* label (':'):                           Statements.         (line 1355)
+* labels:                                Labels.             (line 1763)
+* 'lcomm' directive:                     Lcomm.              (line 2805)
+* ld:                                    Object.             (line  836)
+* 'LDR reg,=<label>' pseudo op, ARM:     ARM Opcodes.        (line 4149)
+* length of symbols:                     Symbol Intro.       (line 1331)
+* 'lflags' directive (ignored):          Lflags.             (line 2814)
+* line comment character:                Comments.           (line 1301)
+* line comment character, ARM:           ARM-Chars.          (line 3867)
+* line comment character, IA-64:         IA-64-Chars.        (line 4822)
+* 'line' directive:                      Line.               (line 2820)
+* line numbers, in input files:          Input Files.        (line  809)
+* line numbers, in warnings/errors:      Errors.             (line  854)
+* line separator character:              Statements.         (line 1336)
+* line separator, ARM:                   ARM-Chars.          (line 3871)
+* line separator, IA-64:                 IA-64-Chars.        (line 4824)
+* lines starting with '#':               Comments.           (line 1306)
+* linker:                                Object.             (line  836)
+* linker, and assembler:                 Secs Background.    (line 1535)
+* 'linkonce' directive:                  Linkonce.           (line 2831)
+* 'list' directive:                      List.               (line 2876)
+* listing control, turning off:          Nolist.             (line 3083)
+* listing control, turning on:           List.               (line 2876)
+* listing control: new page:             Eject.              (line 2434)
+* listing control: paper size:           Psize.              (line 3208)
+* listing control: subtitle:             Sbttl.              (line 3284)
+* listing control: title line:           Title.              (line 3609)
+* listings, enabling:                    a.                  (line  894)
+* little endian output, MIPS:            Overview.           (line  563)
+* little-endian output, MIPS:            MIPS Opts.          (line 4879)
+* 'ln' directive:                        Ln.                 (line 2863)
+* 'loc' directive:                       LNS directives.     (line 2382)
+* local common symbols:                  Lcomm.              (line 2805)
+* local labels:                          Symbol Names.       (line 1810)
+* local symbol names:                    Symbol Names.       (line 1797)
+* local symbols, retaining in output:    L.                  (line  972)
+* location counter:                      Dot.                (line 1898)
+* location counter, advancing:           Org.                (line 3101)
+* 'loc_mark_blocks' directive:           LNS directives.     (line 2412)
+* logical file name:                     File.               (line 2540)
+* logical line number:                   Line.               (line 2820)
+* logical line numbers:                  Comments.           (line 1306)
+* 'long' directive:                      Long.               (line 2889)
+* 'long' directive, i386:                i386-Float.         (line 4576)
+* 'long' directive, x86-64:              i386-Float.         (line 4576)
+* machine directives, ARM:               ARM Directives.     (line 3915)
+* machine directives, SPARC:             Sparc-Directives.   (line 5478)
+* machine independent directives:        Pseudo Ops.         (line 2105)
+* machine instructions (not covered):    Manual.             (line  716)
+* machine-independent syntax:            Syntax.             (line 1241)
+* 'macro' directive:                     Macro.              (line 2916)
+* macros:                                Macro.              (line 2894)
+* macros, count executed:                Macro.              (line 3030)
+* make rules:                            MD.                 (line 1149)
+* manual, structure and purpose:         Manual.             (line  708)
+* Maximum number of continuation lines:  listing.            (line 1015)
+* memory references, i386:               i386-Memory.        (line 4471)
+* memory references, x86-64:             i386-Memory.        (line 4471)
+* merging text and data sections:        R.                  (line 1170)
+* messages from assembler:               Errors.             (line  844)
+* minus, permitted arguments:            Infix Ops.          (line 2060)
+* MIPS architecture options:             MIPS Opts.          (line 4895)
+* MIPS big-endian output:                MIPS Opts.          (line 4879)
+* MIPS CPU override:                     MIPS ISA.           (line 5195)
+* MIPS debugging directives:             MIPS Stabs.         (line 5128)
+* MIPS DSP Release 1 instruction generation override: MIPS ASE instruction generation overrides.
+                                                             (line 5262)
+* MIPS DSP Release 2 instruction generation override: MIPS ASE instruction generation overrides.
+                                                             (line 5267)
+* MIPS ECOFF sections:                   MIPS Object.        (line 5100)
+* MIPS endianness:                       Overview.           (line  560)
+* MIPS ISA:                              Overview.           (line  566)
+* MIPS ISA override:                     MIPS ISA.           (line 5183)
+* MIPS little-endian output:             MIPS Opts.          (line 4879)
+* MIPS MDMX instruction generation override: MIPS ASE instruction generation overrides.
+                                                             (line 5257)
+* MIPS MIPS-3D instruction generation override: MIPS ASE instruction generation overrides.
+                                                             (line 5247)
+* MIPS MT instruction generation override: MIPS ASE instruction generation overrides.
+                                                             (line 5272)
+* MIPS option stack:                     MIPS option stack.  (line 5232)
+* MIPS processor:                        .                   (line 4862)
+* MMX, i386:                             i386-SIMD.          (line 4593)
+* MMX, x86-64:                           i386-SIMD.          (line 4593)
+* mnemonic suffixes, i386:               i386-Syntax.        (line 4287)
+* mnemonic suffixes, x86-64:             i386-Syntax.        (line 4287)
+* MOVW and MOVT relocations, ARM:        ARM-Relocations.    (line 3900)
+* MRI compatibility mode:                M.                  (line 1022)
+* 'mri' directive:                       MRI.                (line 2868)
+* MRI mode, temporarily:                 MRI.                (line 2868)
+* 'mul' instruction, i386:               i386-Notes.         (line 4714)
+* 'mul' instruction, x86-64:             i386-Notes.         (line 4714)
+* named section:                         Section.            (line 3293)
+* named sections:                        Ld Sections.        (line 1613)
+* names, symbol:                         Symbol Names.       (line 1781)
+* naming object file:                    o.                  (line 1160)
+* new page, in listings:                 Eject.              (line 2434)
+* newline ('\n'):                        Strings.            (line 1401)
+* newline, required at file end:         Statements.         (line 1341)
+* 'nolist' directive:                    Nolist.             (line 3083)
+* 'NOP' pseudo op, ARM:                  ARM Opcodes.        (line 4143)
+* null-terminated strings:               Asciz.              (line 2172)
+* number constants:                      Numbers.            (line 1457)
+* number of macros executed:             Macro.              (line 3030)
+* numbered subsections:                  Sub-Sections.       (line 1686)
+* numbers, 16-bit:                       hword.              (line 2610)
+* numeric values:                        Expressions.        (line 1946)
+* 'nword' directive, SPARC:              Sparc-Directives.   (line 5492)
+* object file:                           Object.             (line  827)
+* object file format:                    Object Formats.     (line  746)
+* object file name:                      o.                  (line 1160)
+* object file, after errors:             Z.                  (line 1231)
+* obsolescent directives:                Deprecated.         (line 3731)
+* 'octa' directive:                      Octa.               (line 3092)
+* octal character code ('\DDD'):         Strings.            (line 1410)
+* octal integers:                        Integers.           (line 1469)
+* opcodes for ARM:                       ARM Opcodes.        (line 4140)
+* operand delimiters, i386:              i386-Syntax.        (line 4274)
+* operand delimiters, x86-64:            i386-Syntax.        (line 4274)
+* operands in expressions:               Arguments.          (line 1973)
+* operator precedence:                   Infix Ops.          (line 2021)
+* operators, in expressions:             Operators.          (line 1998)
+* operators, permitted arguments:        Infix Ops.          (line 2016)
+* option summary:                        Overview.           (line  249)
+* options for ARM (none):                ARM Options.        (line 3742)
+* options for i386:                      i386-Options.       (line 4218)
+* options for IA-64:                     IA-64 Options.      (line 4733)
+* options for PowerPC:                   PowerPC-Opts.       (line 5285)
+* options for SPARC:                     Sparc-Opts.         (line 5402)
+* options for x86-64:                    i386-Options.       (line 4218)
+* options, all versions of assembler:    Invoking.           (line  870)
+* options, command line:                 Command Line.       (line  763)
+* 'org' directive:                       Org.                (line 3101)
+* output file:                           Object.             (line  827)
+* 'p2align' directive:                   P2align.            (line 3127)
+* 'p2alignl' directive:                  P2align.            (line 3149)
+* 'p2alignw' directive:                  P2align.            (line 3149)
+* padding the location counter:          Align.              (line 2123)
+* padding the location counter given a power of two: P2align.
+                                                             (line 3127)
+* padding the location counter given number of bytes: Balign.
+                                                             (line 2178)
+* page, in listings:                     Eject.              (line 2434)
+* paper size, for listings:              Psize.              (line 3208)
+* paths for '.include':                  I.                  (line  952)
+* patterns, writing in memory:           Fill.               (line 2550)
+* PIC code generation for ARM:           ARM Options.        (line 3857)
+* PIC selection, MIPS:                   MIPS Opts.          (line 4887)
+* plus, permitted arguments:             Infix Ops.          (line 2055)
+* 'popsection' directive:                PopSection.         (line 3177)
+* PowerPC architectures:                 PowerPC-Opts.       (line 5285)
+* PowerPC directives:                    PowerPC-Pseudo.     (line 5386)
+* PowerPC options:                       PowerPC-Opts.       (line 5285)
+* PowerPC support:                       .                   (line 5282)
+* precedence of operators:               Infix Ops.          (line 2021)
+* precision, floating point:             Flonums.            (line 1493)
+* prefix operators:                      Prefix Ops.         (line 2005)
+* prefixes, i386:                        i386-Prefixes.      (line 4414)
+* preprocessing:                         Preprocessing.      (line 1248)
+* preprocessing, turning on and off:     Preprocessing.      (line 1268)
+* 'previous' directive:                  Previous.           (line 3161)
+* 'print' directive:                     Print.              (line 3189)
+* 'proc' directive, SPARC:               Sparc-Directives.   (line 5497)
+* 'protected' directive:                 Protected.          (line 3195)
+* pseudo-ops, machine independent:       Pseudo Ops.         (line 2105)
+* 'psize' directive:                     Psize.              (line 3208)
+* PSR bits:                              IA-64-Bits.         (line 4846)
+* 'purgem' directive:                    Purgem.             (line 3224)
+* purpose of GNU assembler:              GNU Assembler.      (line  734)
+* 'pushsection' directive:               PushSection.        (line 3230)
+* 'quad' directive:                      Quad.               (line 3242)
+* 'quad' directive, i386:                i386-Float.         (line 4576)
+* 'quad' directive, x86-64:              i386-Float.         (line 4576)
+* real-mode code, i386:                  i386-16bit.         (line 4615)
+* 'register' directive, SPARC:           Sparc-Directives.   (line 5501)
+* register names, ARM:                   ARM-Regs.           (line 3881)
+* register names, IA-64:                 IA-64-Regs.         (line 4829)
+* register operands, i386:               i386-Syntax.        (line 4274)
+* register operands, x86-64:             i386-Syntax.        (line 4274)
+* registers, i386:                       i386-Regs.          (line 4359)
+* registers, x86-64:                     i386-Regs.          (line 4359)
+* 'reloc' directive:                     Reloc.              (line 3253)
+* relocation:                            Sections.           (line 1528)
+* relocation example:                    Ld Sections.        (line 1643)
+* repeat prefixes, i386:                 i386-Prefixes.      (line 4452)
+* reporting bugs in assembler:           Reporting Bugs.     (line 5534)
+* 'rept' directive:                      Rept.               (line 3266)
+* 'req' directive, ARM:                  ARM Directives.     (line 3922)
+* 'reserve' directive, SPARC:            Sparc-Directives.   (line 5511)
+* return instructions, i386:             i386-Syntax.        (line 4296)
+* return instructions, x86-64:           i386-Syntax.        (line 4296)
+* REX prefixes, i386:                    i386-Prefixes.      (line 4454)
+* 'sbttl' directive:                     Sbttl.              (line 3284)
+* search path for '.include':            I.                  (line  952)
+* 'section' directive (ELF version):     Section.            (line 3305)
+* section override prefixes, i386:       i386-Prefixes.      (line 4431)
+* Section Stack:                         Previous.           (line 3161)
+* Section Stack <1>:                     PopSection.         (line 3177)
+* Section Stack <2>:                     PushSection.        (line 3230)
+* Section Stack <3>:                     Section.            (line 3300)
+* Section Stack <4>:                     SubSection.         (line 3545)
+* section-relative addressing:           Secs Background.    (line 1573)
+* sections:                              Sections.           (line 1528)
+* sections in messages, internal:        As Sections.        (line 1667)
+* sections, i386:                        i386-Syntax.        (line 4302)
+* sections, named:                       Ld Sections.        (line 1613)
+* sections, x86-64:                      i386-Syntax.        (line 4302)
+* 'seg' directive, SPARC:                Sparc-Directives.   (line 5516)
+* 'set' directive:                       Set.                (line 3407)
+* 'short' directive:                     Short.              (line 3419)
+* SIMD, i386:                            i386-SIMD.          (line 4593)
+* SIMD, x86-64:                          i386-SIMD.          (line 4593)
+* single character constant:             Chars.              (line 1443)
+* 'single' directive:                    Single.             (line 3425)
+* 'single' directive, i386:              i386-Float.         (line 4569)
+* 'single' directive, x86-64:            i386-Float.         (line 4569)
+* sixteen bit integers:                  hword.              (line 2610)
+* sixteen byte integer:                  Octa.               (line 3092)
+* 'size' directive (ELF version):        Size.               (line 3433)
+* size prefixes, i386:                   i386-Prefixes.      (line 4435)
+* sizes operands, i386:                  i386-Syntax.        (line 4287)
+* sizes operands, x86-64:                i386-Syntax.        (line 4287)
+* 'skip' directive:                      Skip.               (line 3452)
+* 'skip' directive, SPARC:               Sparc-Directives.   (line 5520)
+* 'sleb128' directive:                   Sleb128.            (line 3445)
+* small objects, MIPS ECOFF:             MIPS Object.        (line 5105)
+* SmartMIPS instruction generation override: MIPS ASE instruction generation overrides.
+                                                             (line 5252)
+* source program:                        Input Files.        (line  780)
+* source, destination operands; i386:    i386-Syntax.        (line 4280)
+* source, destination operands; x86-64:  i386-Syntax.        (line 4280)
+* 'space' directive:                     Space.              (line 3459)
+* space used, maximum for assembly:      statistics.         (line 1188)
+* SPARC architectures:                   Sparc-Opts.         (line 5402)
+* SPARC data alignment:                  Sparc-Aligned-Data. (line 5455)
+* SPARC floating point (IEEE):           Sparc-Float.        (line 5473)
+* SPARC machine directives:              Sparc-Directives.   (line 5478)
+* SPARC options:                         Sparc-Opts.         (line 5402)
+* SPARC support:                         .                   (line 5399)
+* 'stabd' directive:                     Stab.               (line 3498)
+* 'stabn' directive:                     Stab.               (line 3509)
+* 'stabs' directive:                     Stab.               (line 3512)
+* 'stabX' directives:                    Stab.               (line 3466)
+* standard assembler sections:           Secs Background.    (line 1550)
+* standard input, as input file:         Command Line.       (line  760)
+* statement separator character:         Statements.         (line 1336)
+* statement separator, ARM:              ARM-Chars.          (line 3871)
+* statement separator, IA-64:            IA-64-Chars.        (line 4824)
+* statements, structure of:              Statements.         (line 1336)
+* statistics, about assembly:            statistics.         (line 1188)
+* stopping the assembly:                 Abort.              (line 2114)
+* string constants:                      Strings.            (line 1386)
+* 'string' directive:                    String.             (line 3518)
+* string literals:                       Ascii.              (line 2165)
+* string, copying to object file:        String.             (line 3518)
+* 'struct' directive:                    Struct.             (line 3527)
+* subexpressions:                        Arguments.          (line 1991)
+* 'subsection' directive:                SubSection.         (line 3545)
+* subtitles for listings:                Sbttl.              (line 3284)
+* subtraction, permitted arguments:      Infix Ops.          (line 2060)
+* summary of options:                    Overview.           (line  249)
+* supporting files, including:           Include.            (line 2721)
+* suppressing warnings:                  W.                  (line 1217)
+* symbol attributes:                     Symbol Attributes.  (line 1907)
+* symbol names:                          Symbol Names.       (line 1781)
+* symbol names, local:                   Symbol Names.       (line 1797)
+* symbol names, temporary:               Symbol Names.       (line 1810)
+* symbol type:                           Symbol Type.        (line 1938)
+* symbol type, ELF:                      Type.               (line 3620)
+* symbol value:                          Symbol Value.       (line 1918)
+* symbol value, setting:                 Set.                (line 3407)
+* symbol values, assigning:              Setting Symbols.    (line 1772)
+* symbol versioning:                     Symver.             (line 3557)
+* symbol, common:                        Comm.               (line 2217)
+* symbol, making visible to linker:      Global.             (line 2585)
+* symbolic debuggers, information for:   Stab.               (line 3466)
+* symbols:                               Symbols.            (line 1753)
+* symbols, assigning values to:          Equ.                (line 2471)
+* symbols, local common:                 Lcomm.              (line 2805)
+* 'symver' directive:                    Symver.             (line 3557)
+* syntax compatibility, i386:            i386-Syntax.        (line 4265)
+* syntax compatibility, x86-64:          i386-Syntax.        (line 4265)
+* syntax, machine-independent:           Syntax.             (line 1241)
+* tab ('\t'):                            Strings.            (line 1407)
+* temporary symbol names:                Symbol Names.       (line 1810)
+* text and data sections, joining:       R.                  (line 1170)
+* 'text' directive:                      Text.               (line 3602)
+* 'tfloat' directive, i386:              i386-Float.         (line 4569)
+* 'tfloat' directive, x86-64:            i386-Float.         (line 4569)
+* 'thumb' directive, ARM:                ARM Directives.     (line 3966)
+* Thumb support:                         Machine Dependencies.
+                                                             (line 3739)
+* 'thumb_func' directive, ARM:           ARM Directives.     (line 3976)
+* 'thumb_set' directive, ARM:            ARM Directives.     (line 3987)
+* time, total for assembly:              statistics.         (line 1188)
+* 'title' directive:                     Title.              (line 3609)
+* trusted compiler:                      f.                  (line  940)
+* turning preprocessing on and off:      Preprocessing.      (line 1268)
+* 'type' directive (ELF version):        Type.               (line 3620)
+* type of a symbol:                      Symbol Type.        (line 1938)
+* 'uleb128' directive:                   Uleb128.            (line 3656)
+* undefined section:                     Ld Sections.        (line 1639)
+* 'unreq' directive, ARM:                ARM Directives.     (line 3927)
+* value of a symbol:                     Symbol Value.       (line 1918)
+* 'version' directive:                   Version.            (line 3663)
+* version of assembler:                  v.                  (line 1206)
+* versions of symbols:                   Symver.             (line 3557)
+* visibility:                            Hidden.             (line 2597)
+* visibility <1>:                        Internal.           (line 2740)
+* visibility <2>:                        Protected.          (line 3195)
+* 'vtable_entry' directive:              VTableEntry.        (line 3669)
+* 'vtable_inherit' directive:            VTableInherit.      (line 3675)
+* warning directive:                     Warning.            (line 3683)
+* warning messages:                      Errors.             (line  844)
+* warnings, causing error:               W.                  (line 1222)
+* warnings, suppressing:                 W.                  (line 1217)
+* warnings, switching on:                W.                  (line 1225)
+* 'weak' directive:                      Weak.               (line 3689)
+* 'weakref' directive:                   Weakref.            (line 3705)
+* whitespace:                            Whitespace.         (line 1280)
+* whitespace, removed by preprocessor:   Preprocessing.      (line 1249)
+* Width of continuation lines of disassembly output: listing.
+                                                             (line 1002)
+* Width of first line disassembly output: listing.           (line  997)
+* Width of source line output:           listing.            (line 1009)
+* 'word' directive:                      Word.               (line 3725)
+* 'word' directive, i386:                i386-Float.         (line 4576)
+* 'word' directive, SPARC:               Sparc-Directives.   (line 5523)
+* 'word' directive, x86-64:              i386-Float.         (line 4576)
+* writing patterns in memory:            Fill.               (line 2550)
+* x86-64 arch directive:                 i386-Arch.          (line 4670)
+* x86-64 att_syntax pseudo op:           i386-Syntax.        (line 4265)
+* x86-64 conversion instructions:        i386-Mnemonics.     (line 4334)
+* x86-64 floating point:                 i386-Float.         (line 4561)
+* x86-64 immediate operands:             i386-Syntax.        (line 4274)
+* x86-64 instruction naming:             i386-Mnemonics.     (line 4309)
+* x86-64 intel_syntax pseudo op:         i386-Syntax.        (line 4265)
+* x86-64 jump optimization:              i386-Jumps.         (line 4538)
+* x86-64 jump, call, return:             i386-Syntax.        (line 4296)
+* x86-64 jump/call operands:             i386-Syntax.        (line 4274)
+* x86-64 memory references:              i386-Memory.        (line 4471)
+* x86-64 options:                        i386-Options.       (line 4218)
+* x86-64 register operands:              i386-Syntax.        (line 4274)
+* x86-64 registers:                      i386-Regs.          (line 4359)
+* x86-64 sections:                       i386-Syntax.        (line 4302)
+* x86-64 size suffixes:                  i386-Syntax.        (line 4287)
+* x86-64 source, destination operands:   i386-Syntax.        (line 4280)
+* x86-64 support:                        .                   (line 4211)
+* x86-64 syntax compatibility:           i386-Syntax.        (line 4265)
+* 'xword' directive, SPARC:              Sparc-Directives.   (line 5527)
+* zero-terminated strings:               Asciz.              (line 2172)
+
+START-INFO-DIR-ENTRY
+* As: (as).                     The GNU assembler.
+* Gas: (as).                    The GNU assembler.
+END-INFO-DIR-ENTRY
+
+Using as
+1 Overview
+  1.1 Structure of this Manual
+  1.2 The GNU Assembler
+  1.3 Object File Formats
+  1.4 Command Line
+  1.5 Input Files
+  1.6 Output (Object) File
+  1.7 Error and Warning Messages
+2 Command-Line Options
+  2.1 Enable Listings: '-a[cdhlns]'
+  2.2 '--alternate'
+  2.3 '-D'
+  2.4 Work Faster: '-f'
+  2.5 '.include' Search Path: '-I' PATH
+  2.6 Difference Tables: '-K'
+  2.7 Include Local Symbols: '-L'
+  2.8 Configuring listing output: '--listing'
+  2.9 Assemble in MRI Compatibility Mode: '-M'
+  2.10 Dependency Tracking: '--MD'
+  2.11 Name the Object File: '-o'
+  2.12 Join Data and Text Sections: '-R'
+  2.13 Display Assembly Statistics: '--statistics'
+  2.14 Compatible Output: '--traditional-format'
+  2.15 Announce Version: '-v'
+  2.16 Control Warnings: '-W', '--warn', '--no-warn', '--fatal-warnings'
+  2.17 Generate Object File in Spite of Errors: '-Z'
+3 Syntax
+  3.1 Preprocessing
+  3.2 Whitespace
+  3.3 Comments
+  3.4 Symbols
+  3.5 Statements
+  3.6 Constants
+    3.6.1 Character Constants
+      3.6.1.1 Strings
+      3.6.1.2 Characters
+    3.6.2 Number Constants
+      3.6.2.1 Integers
+      3.6.2.2 Bignums
+      3.6.2.3 Flonums
+4 Sections and Relocation
+  4.1 Background
+  4.2 Linker Sections
+  4.3 Assembler Internal Sections
+  4.4 Sub-Sections
+  4.5 bss Section
+5 Symbols
+  5.1 Labels
+  5.2 Giving Symbols Other Values
+  5.3 Symbol Names
+  5.4 The Special Dot Symbol
+  5.5 Symbol Attributes
+    5.5.1 Value
+    5.5.2 Type
+6 Expressions
+  6.1 Empty Expressions
+  6.2 Integer Expressions
+    6.2.1 Arguments
+    6.2.2 Operators
+    6.2.3 Prefix Operator
+    6.2.4 Infix Operators
+7 Assembler Directives
+  7.1 '.abort'
+  7.2 '.align ABS-EXPR, ABS-EXPR, ABS-EXPR'
+  7.3 '.ascii "STRING"'...
+  7.4 '.asciz "STRING"'...
+  7.5 '.balign[wl] ABS-EXPR, ABS-EXPR, ABS-EXPR'
+  7.6 '.byte EXPRESSIONS'
+  7.7 '.comm SYMBOL , LENGTH '
+  7.8 '.cfi_startproc [simple]'
+  7.9 '.cfi_endproc'
+  7.10 '.cfi_personality ENCODING [, EXP]'
+  7.11 '.cfi_lsda ENCODING [, EXP]'
+  7.12 '.cfi_def_cfa REGISTER, OFFSET'
+  7.13 '.cfi_def_cfa_register REGISTER'
+  7.14 '.cfi_def_cfa_offset OFFSET'
+  7.15 '.cfi_adjust_cfa_offset OFFSET'
+  7.16 '.cfi_offset REGISTER, OFFSET'
+  7.17 '.cfi_rel_offset REGISTER, OFFSET'
+  7.18 '.cfi_register REGISTER1, REGISTER2'
+  7.19 '.cfi_restore REGISTER'
+  7.20 '.cfi_undefined REGISTER'
+  7.21 '.cfi_same_value REGISTER'
+  7.22 '.cfi_remember_state',
+  7.23 '.cfi_return_column REGISTER'
+  7.24 '.cfi_signal_frame'
+  7.25 '.cfi_window_save'
+  7.26 '.cfi_escape' EXPRESSION[, ...]
+  7.27 '.file FILENO FILENAME'
+  7.28 '.loc FILENO LINENO [COLUMN] [OPTIONS]'
+  7.29 '.loc_mark_blocks ENABLE'
+  7.30 '.data SUBSECTION'
+  7.31 '.double FLONUMS'
+  7.32 '.eject'
+  7.33 '.else'
+  7.34 '.elseif'
+  7.35 '.end'
+  7.36 '.endfunc'
+  7.37 '.endif'
+  7.38 '.equ SYMBOL, EXPRESSION'
+  7.39 '.equiv SYMBOL, EXPRESSION'
+  7.40 '.eqv SYMBOL, EXPRESSION'
+  7.41 '.err'
+  7.42 '.error "STRING"'
+  7.43 '.exitm'
+  7.44 '.extern'
+  7.45 '.fail EXPRESSION'
+  7.46 '.file STRING'
+  7.47 '.fill REPEAT , SIZE , VALUE'
+  7.48 '.float FLONUMS'
+  7.49 '.func NAME[,LABEL]'
+  7.50 '.global SYMBOL', '.globl SYMBOL'
+  7.51 '.hidden NAMES'
+  7.52 '.hword EXPRESSIONS'
+  7.53 '.ident'
+  7.54 '.if ABSOLUTE EXPRESSION'
+  7.55 '.incbin "FILE"[,SKIP[,COUNT]]'
+  7.56 '.include "FILE"'
+  7.57 '.int EXPRESSIONS'
+  7.58 '.internal NAMES'
+  7.59 '.irp SYMBOL,VALUES'...
+  7.60 '.irpc SYMBOL,VALUES'...
+  7.61 '.lcomm SYMBOL , LENGTH'
+  7.62 '.lflags'
+  7.63 '.line LINE-NUMBER'
+  7.64 '.linkonce [TYPE]'
+  7.65 '.ln LINE-NUMBER'
+  7.66 '.mri VAL'
+  7.67 '.list'
+  7.68 '.long EXPRESSIONS'
+  7.69 '.macro'
+  7.70 '.altmacro'
+  7.71 '.noaltmacro'
+  7.72 '.nolist'
+  7.73 '.octa BIGNUMS'
+  7.74 '.org NEW-LC , FILL'
+  7.75 '.p2align[wl] ABS-EXPR, ABS-EXPR, ABS-EXPR'
+  7.76 '.previous'
+  7.77 '.popsection'
+  7.78 '.print STRING'
+  7.79 '.protected NAMES'
+  7.80 '.psize LINES , COLUMNS'
+  7.81 '.purgem NAME'
+  7.82 '.pushsection NAME , SUBSECTION'
+  7.83 '.quad BIGNUMS'
+  7.84 '.reloc OFFSET, RELOC_NAME[, EXPRESSION]'
+  7.85 '.rept COUNT'
+  7.86 '.sbttl "SUBHEADING"'
+  7.87 '.section NAME'
+  7.88 '.set SYMBOL, EXPRESSION'
+  7.89 '.short EXPRESSIONS'
+  7.90 '.single FLONUMS'
+  7.91 '.size'
+  7.92 '.sleb128 EXPRESSIONS'
+  7.93 '.skip SIZE , FILL'
+  7.94 '.space SIZE , FILL'
+  7.95 '.stabd, .stabn, .stabs'
+  7.96 '.string' "STR"
+  7.97 '.struct EXPRESSION'
+  7.98 '.subsection NAME'
+  7.99 '.symver'
+  7.100 '.text SUBSECTION'
+  7.101 '.title "HEADING"'
+  7.102 '.type'
+  7.103 '.uleb128 EXPRESSIONS'
+  7.104 '.version "STRING"'
+  7.105 '.vtable_entry TABLE, OFFSET'
+  7.106 '.vtable_inherit CHILD, PARENT'
+  7.107 '.warning "STRING"'
+  7.108 '.weak NAMES'
+  7.109 '.weakref ALIAS, TARGET'
+  7.110 '.word EXPRESSIONS'
+  7.111 Deprecated Directives
+8 ARM Dependent Features
+  8.1 Options
+  8.2 Syntax
+    8.2.1 Special Characters
+    8.2.2 Register Names
+    8.2.3 ARM relocation generation
+  8.3 Floating Point
+  8.4 ARM Machine Directives
+  8.5 Opcodes
+  8.6 Mapping Symbols
+9 80386 Dependent Features
+  9.1 Options
+  9.2 AT&T Syntax versus Intel Syntax
+  9.3 Instruction Naming
+  9.4 Register Naming
+  9.5 Instruction Prefixes
+  9.6 Memory References
+  9.7 Handling of Jump Instructions
+  9.8 Floating Point
+  9.9 Intel's MMX and AMD's 3DNow! SIMD Operations
+  9.10 Writing 16-bit Code
+  9.11 AT&T Syntax bugs
+  9.12 Specifying CPU Architecture
+  9.13 Notes
+10 IA-64 Dependent Features
+  10.1 Options
+  10.2 Syntax
+    10.2.1 Special Characters
+    10.2.2 Register Names
+    10.2.3 IA-64 Processor-Status-Register (PSR) Bit Names
+  10.3 Opcodes
+11 MIPS Dependent Features
+  11.1 Assembler options
+  11.2 MIPS ECOFF object code
+  11.3 Directives for debugging information
+  11.4 Directives to override the size of symbols
+  11.5 Directives to override the ISA level
+  11.6 Directives for extending MIPS 16 bit instructions
+  11.7 Directive to mark data as an instruction
+  11.8 Directives to save and restore options
+  11.9 Directives to control generation of MIPS ASE instructions
+12 PowerPC Dependent Features
+  12.1 Options
+  12.2 PowerPC Assembler Directives
+13 SPARC Dependent Features
+  13.1 Options
+  13.2 Enforcing aligned data
+  13.3 Floating Point
+  13.4 Sparc Machine Directives
+14 Reporting Bugs
+  14.1 Have You Found a Bug?
+  14.2 How to Report Bugs
+15 Acknowledgements
+Appendix A GNU Free Documentation License
+  ADDENDUM: How to use this License for your documents
+AS Index
+Using as
+********
+
+This file is a user guide to the GNU assembler 'as' version "2.17.50
+[FreeBSD] 2007-07-03".  This version of the file describes 'as'
+configured to generate code for machine specific architectures.
+
+   This document is distributed under the terms of the GNU Free
+Documentation License.  A copy of the license is included in the section
+entitled "GNU Free Documentation License".
+
+1 Overview
+**********
+
+Here is a brief summary of how to invoke 'as'.  For details, see *note
+Command-Line Options: Invoking.
+
+     as [-a[cdhlns][=FILE]] [-alternate] [-D]
+      [-defsym SYM=VAL] [-f] [-g] [-gstabs]
+      [-gstabs+] [-gdwarf-2] [-help] [-I DIR] [-J]
+      [-K] [-L] [-listing-lhs-width=NUM]
+      [-listing-lhs-width2=NUM] [-listing-rhs-width=NUM]
+      [-listing-cont-lines=NUM] [-keep-locals] [-o
+      OBJFILE] [-R] [-reduce-memory-overheads] [-statistics]
+      [-v] [-version] [-version] [-W] [-warn]
+      [-fatal-warnings] [-w] [-x] [-Z] [@FILE]
+      [-target-help] [TARGET-OPTIONS]
+      [-|FILES ...]
+
+     _Target ARM options:_
+        [-mcpu=PROCESSOR[+EXTENSION...]]
+        [-march=ARCHITECTURE[+EXTENSION...]]
+        [-mfpu=FLOATING-POINT-FORMAT]
+        [-mfloat-abi=ABI]
+        [-meabi=VER]
+        [-mthumb]
+        [-EB|-EL]
+        [-mapcs-32|-mapcs-26|-mapcs-float|
+         -mapcs-reentrant]
+        [-mthumb-interwork] [-k]
+
+     _Target i386 options:_
+        [-32|-64] [-n]
+        [-march=CPU] [-mtune=CPU]
+
+     _Target IA-64 options:_
+        [-mconstant-gp|-mauto-pic]
+        [-milp32|-milp64|-mlp64|-mp64]
+        [-mle|mbe]
+        [-mtune=itanium1|-mtune=itanium2]
+        [-munwind-check=warning|-munwind-check=error]
+        [-mhint.b=ok|-mhint.b=warning|-mhint.b=error]
+        [-x|-xexplicit] [-xauto] [-xdebug]
+
+     _Target MIPS options:_
+        [-nocpp] [-EL] [-EB] [-O[OPTIMIZATION LEVEL]]
+        [-g[DEBUG LEVEL]] [-G NUM] [-KPIC] [-call_shared]
+        [-non_shared] [-xgot [-mvxworks-pic]
+        [-mabi=ABI] [-32] [-n32] [-64] [-mfp32] [-mgp32]
+        [-march=CPU] [-mtune=CPU] [-mips1] [-mips2]
+        [-mips3] [-mips4] [-mips5] [-mips32] [-mips32r2]
+        [-mips64] [-mips64r2]
+        [-construct-floats] [-no-construct-floats]
+        [-trap] [-no-break] [-break] [-no-trap]
+        [-mfix7000] [-mno-fix7000]
+        [-mips16] [-no-mips16]
+        [-msmartmips] [-mno-smartmips]
+        [-mips3d] [-no-mips3d]
+        [-mdmx] [-no-mdmx]
+        [-mdsp] [-mno-dsp]
+        [-mdspr2] [-mno-dspr2]
+        [-mmt] [-mno-mt]
+        [-mdebug] [-no-mdebug]
+        [-mpdr] [-mno-pdr]
+
+     _Target PowerPC options:_
+        [-mpwrx|-mpwr2|-mpwr|-m601|-mppc|-mppc32|-m603|-m604|
+         -m403|-m405|-mppc64|-m620|-mppc64bridge|-mbooke|
+         -mbooke32|-mbooke64]
+        [-mcom|-many|-maltivec] [-memb]
+        [-mregnames|-mno-regnames]
+        [-mrelocatable|-mrelocatable-lib]
+        [-mlittle|-mlittle-endian|-mbig|-mbig-endian]
+        [-msolaris|-mno-solaris]
+
+     _Target SPARC options:_
+        [-Av6|-Av7|-Av8|-Asparclet|-Asparclite
+         -Av8plus|-Av8plusa|-Av9|-Av9a]
+        [-xarch=v8plus|-xarch=v8plusa] [-bump]
+        [-32|-64]
+
+
+
+'@FILE'
+     Read command-line options from FILE.  The options read are inserted
+     in place of the original @FILE option.  If FILE does not exist, or
+     cannot be read, then the option will be treated literally, and not
+     removed.
+
+     Options in FILE are separated by whitespace.  A whitespace
+     character may be included in an option by surrounding the entire
+     option in either single or double quotes.  Any character (including
+     a backslash) may be included by prefixing the character to be
+     included with a backslash.  The FILE may itself contain additional
+     @FILE options; any such options will be processed recursively.
+
+'-a[cdhlmns]'
+     Turn on listings, in any of a variety of ways:
+
+     '-ac'
+          omit false conditionals
+
+     '-ad'
+          omit debugging directives
+
+     '-ah'
+          include high-level source
+
+     '-al'
+          include assembly
+
+     '-am'
+          include macro expansions
+
+     '-an'
+          omit forms processing
+
+     '-as'
+          include symbols
+
+     '=file'
+          set the name of the listing file
+
+     You may combine these options; for example, use '-aln' for assembly
+     listing without forms processing.  The '=file' option, if used,
+     must be the last one.  By itself, '-a' defaults to '-ahls'.
+
+'--alternate'
+     Begin in alternate macro mode.  *Note '.altmacro': Altmacro.
+
+'-D'
+     Ignored.  This option is accepted for script compatibility with
+     calls to other assemblers.
+
+'--defsym SYM=VALUE'
+     Define the symbol SYM to be VALUE before assembling the input file.
+     VALUE must be an integer constant.  As in C, a leading '0x'
+     indicates a hexadecimal value, and a leading '0' indicates an octal
+     value.  The value of the symbol can be overridden inside a source
+     file via the use of a '.set' pseudo-op.
+
+'-f'
+     "fast"--skip whitespace and comment preprocessing (assume source is
+     compiler output).
+
+'-g'
+'--gen-debug'
+     Generate debugging information for each assembler source line using
+     whichever debug format is preferred by the target.  This currently
+     means either STABS, ECOFF or DWARF2.
+
+'--gstabs'
+     Generate stabs debugging information for each assembler line.  This
+     may help debugging assembler code, if the debugger can handle it.
+
+'--gstabs+'
+     Generate stabs debugging information for each assembler line, with
+     GNU extensions that probably only gdb can handle, and that could
+     make other debuggers crash or refuse to read your program.  This
+     may help debugging assembler code.  Currently the only GNU
+     extension is the location of the current working directory at
+     assembling time.
+
+'--gdwarf-2'
+     Generate DWARF2 debugging information for each assembler line.
+     This may help debugging assembler code, if the debugger can handle
+     it.  Note--this option is only supported by some targets, not all
+     of them.
+
+'--help'
+     Print a summary of the command line options and exit.
+
+'--target-help'
+     Print a summary of all target specific options and exit.
+
+'-I DIR'
+     Add directory DIR to the search list for '.include' directives.
+
+'-J'
+     Don't warn about signed overflow.
+
+'-K'
+     This option is accepted but has no effect on the machine specific
+     family.
+
+'-L'
+'--keep-locals'
+     Keep (in the symbol table) local symbols.  These symbols start with
+     system-specific local label prefixes, typically '.L' for ELF
+     systems or 'L' for traditional a.out systems.  *Note Symbol
+     Names::.
+
+'--listing-lhs-width=NUMBER'
+     Set the maximum width, in words, of the output data column for an
+     assembler listing to NUMBER.
+
+'--listing-lhs-width2=NUMBER'
+     Set the maximum width, in words, of the output data column for
+     continuation lines in an assembler listing to NUMBER.
+
+'--listing-rhs-width=NUMBER'
+     Set the maximum width of an input source line, as displayed in a
+     listing, to NUMBER bytes.
+
+'--listing-cont-lines=NUMBER'
+     Set the maximum number of lines printed in a listing for a single
+     line of input to NUMBER + 1.
+
+'-o OBJFILE'
+     Name the object-file output from 'as' OBJFILE.
+
+'-R'
+     Fold the data section into the text section.
+
+     Set the default size of GAS's hash tables to a prime number close
+     to NUMBER.  Increasing this value can reduce the length of time it
+     takes the assembler to perform its tasks, at the expense of
+     increasing the assembler's memory requirements.  Similarly reducing
+     this value can reduce the memory requirements at the expense of
+     speed.
+
+'--reduce-memory-overheads'
+     This option reduces GAS's memory requirements, at the expense of
+     making the assembly processes slower.  Currently this switch is a
+     synonym for '--hash-size=4051', but in the future it may have other
+     effects as well.
+
+'--statistics'
+     Print the maximum space (in bytes) and total time (in seconds) used
+     by assembly.
+
+'--strip-local-absolute'
+     Remove local absolute symbols from the outgoing symbol table.
+
+'-v'
+'-version'
+     Print the 'as' version.
+
+'--version'
+     Print the 'as' version and exit.
+
+'-W'
+'--no-warn'
+     Suppress warning messages.
+
+'--fatal-warnings'
+     Treat warnings as errors.
+
+'--warn'
+     Don't suppress warning messages or treat them as errors.
+
+'-w'
+     Ignored.
+
+'-x'
+     Ignored.
+
+'-Z'
+     Generate an object file even after errors.
+
+'-- | FILES ...'
+     Standard input, or source files to assemble.
+
+   The following options are available when as is configured for the ARM
+processor family.
+
+'-mcpu=PROCESSOR[+EXTENSION...]'
+     Specify which ARM processor variant is the target.
+'-march=ARCHITECTURE[+EXTENSION...]'
+     Specify which ARM architecture variant is used by the target.
+'-mfpu=FLOATING-POINT-FORMAT'
+     Select which Floating Point architecture is the target.
+'-mfloat-abi=ABI'
+     Select which floating point ABI is in use.
+'-mthumb'
+     Enable Thumb only instruction decoding.
+'-mapcs-32 | -mapcs-26 | -mapcs-float | -mapcs-reentrant'
+     Select which procedure calling convention is in use.
+'-EB | -EL'
+     Select either big-endian (-EB) or little-endian (-EL) output.
+'-mthumb-interwork'
+     Specify that the code has been generated with interworking between
+     Thumb and ARM code in mind.
+'-k'
+     Specify that PIC code has been generated.
+
+   The following options are available when 'as' is configured for the
+SPARC architecture:
+
+'-Av6 | -Av7 | -Av8 | -Asparclet | -Asparclite'
+'-Av8plus | -Av8plusa | -Av9 | -Av9a'
+     Explicitly select a variant of the SPARC architecture.
+
+     '-Av8plus' and '-Av8plusa' select a 32 bit environment.  '-Av9' and
+     '-Av9a' select a 64 bit environment.
+
+     '-Av8plusa' and '-Av9a' enable the SPARC V9 instruction set with
+     UltraSPARC extensions.
+
+'-xarch=v8plus | -xarch=v8plusa'
+     For compatibility with the Solaris v9 assembler.  These options are
+     equivalent to -Av8plus and -Av8plusa, respectively.
+
+'-bump'
+     Warn when the assembler switches to another architecture.
+
+   The following options are available when as is configured for a MIPS
+processor.
+
+'-G NUM'
+     This option sets the largest size of an object that can be
+     referenced implicitly with the 'gp' register.  It is only accepted
+     for targets that use ECOFF format, such as a DECstation running
+     Ultrix.  The default value is 8.
+
+'-EB'
+     Generate "big endian" format output.
+
+'-EL'
+     Generate "little endian" format output.
+
+'-mips1'
+'-mips2'
+'-mips3'
+'-mips4'
+'-mips5'
+'-mips32'
+'-mips32r2'
+'-mips64'
+'-mips64r2'
+     Generate code for a particular MIPS Instruction Set Architecture
+     level.  '-mips1' is an alias for '-march=r3000', '-mips2' is an
+     alias for '-march=r6000', '-mips3' is an alias for '-march=r4000'
+     and '-mips4' is an alias for '-march=r8000'.  '-mips5', '-mips32',
+     '-mips32r2', '-mips64', and '-mips64r2' correspond to generic 'MIPS
+     V', 'MIPS32', 'MIPS32 Release 2', 'MIPS64', and 'MIPS64 Release 2'
+     ISA processors, respectively.
+
+'-march=CPU'
+     Generate code for a particular MIPS cpu.
+
+'-mtune=CPU'
+     Schedule and tune for a particular MIPS cpu.
+
+'-mfix7000'
+'-mno-fix7000'
+     Cause nops to be inserted if the read of the destination register
+     of an mfhi or mflo instruction occurs in the following two
+     instructions.
+
+'-mdebug'
+'-no-mdebug'
+     Cause stabs-style debugging output to go into an ECOFF-style
+     .mdebug section instead of the standard ELF .stabs sections.
+
+'-mpdr'
+'-mno-pdr'
+     Control generation of '.pdr' sections.
+
+'-mgp32'
+'-mfp32'
+     The register sizes are normally inferred from the ISA and ABI, but
+     these flags force a certain group of registers to be treated as 32
+     bits wide at all times.  '-mgp32' controls the size of
+     general-purpose registers and '-mfp32' controls the size of
+     floating-point registers.
+
+'-mips16'
+'-no-mips16'
+     Generate code for the MIPS 16 processor.  This is equivalent to
+     putting '.set mips16' at the start of the assembly file.
+     '-no-mips16' turns off this option.
+
+'-msmartmips'
+'-mno-smartmips'
+     Enables the SmartMIPS extension to the MIPS32 instruction set.
+     This is equivalent to putting '.set smartmips' at the start of the
+     assembly file.  '-mno-smartmips' turns off this option.
+
+'-mips3d'
+'-no-mips3d'
+     Generate code for the MIPS-3D Application Specific Extension.  This
+     tells the assembler to accept MIPS-3D instructions.  '-no-mips3d'
+     turns off this option.
+
+'-mdmx'
+'-no-mdmx'
+     Generate code for the MDMX Application Specific Extension.  This
+     tells the assembler to accept MDMX instructions.  '-no-mdmx' turns
+     off this option.
+
+'-mdsp'
+'-mno-dsp'
+     Generate code for the DSP Release 1 Application Specific Extension.
+     This tells the assembler to accept DSP Release 1 instructions.
+     '-mno-dsp' turns off this option.
+
+'-mdspr2'
+'-mno-dspr2'
+     Generate code for the DSP Release 2 Application Specific Extension.
+     This option implies -mdsp.  This tells the assembler to accept DSP
+     Release 2 instructions.  '-mno-dspr2' turns off this option.
+
+'-mmt'
+'-mno-mt'
+     Generate code for the MT Application Specific Extension.  This
+     tells the assembler to accept MT instructions.  '-mno-mt' turns off
+     this option.
+
+'--construct-floats'
+'--no-construct-floats'
+     The '--no-construct-floats' option disables the construction of
+     double width floating point constants by loading the two halves of
+     the value into the two single width floating point registers that
+     make up the double width register.  By default '--construct-floats'
+     is selected, allowing construction of these floating point
+     constants.
+
+'--emulation=NAME'
+     This option causes 'as' to emulate 'as' configured for some other
+     target, in all respects, including output format (choosing between
+     ELF and ECOFF only), handling of pseudo-opcodes which may generate
+     debugging information or store symbol table information, and
+     default endianness.  The available configuration names are:
+     'mipsecoff', 'mipself', 'mipslecoff', 'mipsbecoff', 'mipslelf',
+     'mipsbelf'.  The first two do not alter the default endianness from
+     that of the primary target for which the assembler was configured;
+     the others change the default to little- or big-endian as indicated
+     by the 'b' or 'l' in the name.  Using '-EB' or '-EL' will override
+     the endianness selection in any case.
+
+     This option is currently supported only when the primary target
+     'as' is configured for is a MIPS ELF or ECOFF target.  Furthermore,
+     the primary target or others specified with '--enable-targets=...'
+     at configuration time must include support for the other format, if
+     both are to be available.  For example, the Irix 5 configuration
+     includes support for both.
+
+     Eventually, this option will support more configurations, with more
+     fine-grained control over the assembler's behavior, and will be
+     supported for more processors.
+
+'-nocpp'
+     'as' ignores this option.  It is accepted for compatibility with
+     the native tools.
+
+'--trap'
+'--no-trap'
+'--break'
+'--no-break'
+     Control how to deal with multiplication overflow and division by
+     zero.  '--trap' or '--no-break' (which are synonyms) take a trap
+     exception (and only work for Instruction Set Architecture level 2
+     and higher); '--break' or '--no-trap' (also synonyms, and the
+     default) take a break exception.
+
+'-n'
+     When this option is used, 'as' will issue a warning every time it
+     generates a nop instruction from a macro.
+
+1.1 Structure of this Manual
+============================
+
+This manual is intended to describe what you need to know to use GNU
+'as'.  We cover the syntax expected in source files, including notation
+for symbols, constants, and expressions; the directives that 'as'
+understands; and of course how to invoke 'as'.
+
+   We also cover special features in the machine specific configuration
+of 'as', including assembler directives.
+
+   On the other hand, this manual is _not_ intended as an introduction
+to programming in assembly language--let alone programming in general!
+In a similar vein, we make no attempt to introduce the machine
+architecture; we do _not_ describe the instruction set, standard
+mnemonics, registers or addressing modes that are standard to a
+particular architecture.
+
+1.2 The GNU Assembler
+=====================
+
+GNU 'as' is really a family of assemblers.  This manual describes 'as',
+a member of that family which is configured for the machine specific
+architectures.  If you use (or have used) the GNU assembler on one
+architecture, you should find a fairly similar environment when you use
+it on another architecture.  Each version has much in common with the
+others, including object file formats, most assembler directives (often
+called "pseudo-ops") and assembler syntax.
+
+   'as' is primarily intended to assemble the output of the GNU C
+compiler 'gcc' for use by the linker 'ld'.  Nevertheless, we've tried to
+make 'as' assemble correctly everything that other assemblers for the
+same machine would assemble.
+
+   Unlike older assemblers, 'as' is designed to assemble a source
+program in one pass of the source file.  This has a subtle impact on the
+'.org' directive (*note '.org': Org.).
+
+1.3 Object File Formats
+=======================
+
+The GNU assembler can be configured to produce several alternative
+object file formats.  For the most part, this does not affect how you
+write assembly language programs; but directives for debugging symbols
+are typically different in different file formats.  *Note Symbol
+Attributes: Symbol Attributes.  For the machine specific target, 'as' is
+configured to produce ELF format object files.
+
+1.4 Command Line
+================
+
+After the program name 'as', the command line may contain options and
+file names.  Options may appear in any order, and may be before, after,
+or between file names.  The order of file names is significant.
+
+   '--' (two hyphens) by itself names the standard input file
+explicitly, as one of the files for 'as' to assemble.
+
+   Except for '--' any command line argument that begins with a hyphen
+('-') is an option.  Each option changes the behavior of 'as'.  No
+option changes the way another option works.  An option is a '-'
+followed by one or more letters; the case of the letter is important.
+All options are optional.
+
+   Some options expect exactly one file name to follow them.  The file
+name may either immediately follow the option's letter (compatible with
+older assemblers) or it may be the next command argument (GNU standard).
+These two command lines are equivalent:
+
+     as -o my-object-file.o mumble.s
+     as -omy-object-file.o mumble.s
+
+1.5 Input Files
+===============
+
+We use the phrase "source program", abbreviated "source", to describe
+the program input to one run of 'as'.  The program may be in one or more
+files; how the source is partitioned into files doesn't change the
+meaning of the source.
+
+   The source program is a concatenation of the text in all the files,
+in the order specified.
+
+   Each time you run 'as' it assembles exactly one source program.  The
+source program is made up of one or more files.  (The standard input is
+also a file.)
+
+   You give 'as' a command line that has zero or more input file names.
+The input files are read (from left file name to right).  A command line
+argument (in any position) that has no special meaning is taken to be an
+input file name.
+
+   If you give 'as' no file names it attempts to read one input file
+from the 'as' standard input, which is normally your terminal.  You may
+have to type <ctl-D> to tell 'as' there is no more program to assemble.
+
+   Use '--' if you need to explicitly name the standard input file in
+your command line.
+
+   If the source is empty, 'as' produces a small, empty object file.
+
+Filenames and Line-numbers
+--------------------------
+
+There are two ways of locating a line in the input file (or files) and
+either may be used in reporting error messages.  One way refers to a
+line number in a physical file; the other refers to a line number in a
+"logical" file.  *Note Error and Warning Messages: Errors.
+
+   "Physical files" are those files named in the command line given to
+'as'.
+
+   "Logical files" are simply names declared explicitly by assembler
+directives; they bear no relation to physical files.  Logical file names
+help error messages reflect the original source file, when 'as' source
+is itself synthesized from other files.  'as' understands the '#'
+directives emitted by the 'gcc' preprocessor.  See also *note '.file':
+File.
+
+1.6 Output (Object) File
+========================
+
+Every time you run 'as' it produces an output file, which is your
+assembly language program translated into numbers.  This file is the
+object file.  Its default name is 'a.out'.  You can give it another name
+by using the '-o' option.  Conventionally, object file names end with
+'.o'.  The default name is used for historical reasons: older assemblers
+were capable of assembling self-contained programs directly into a
+runnable program.  (For some formats, this isn't currently possible, but
+it can be done for the 'a.out' format.)
+
+   The object file is meant for input to the linker 'ld'.  It contains
+assembled program code, information to help 'ld' integrate the assembled
+program into a runnable file, and (optionally) symbolic information for
+the debugger.
+
+1.7 Error and Warning Messages
+==============================
+
+'as' may write warnings and error messages to the standard error file
+(usually your terminal).  This should not happen when a compiler runs
+'as' automatically.  Warnings report an assumption made so that 'as'
+could keep assembling a flawed program; errors report a grave problem
+that stops the assembly.
+
+   Warning messages have the format
+
+     file_name:NNN:Warning Message Text
+
+(where NNN is a line number).  If a logical file name has been given
+(*note '.file': File.) it is used for the filename, otherwise the name
+of the current input file is used.  If a logical line number was given
+then it is used to calculate the number printed, otherwise the actual
+line in the current source file is printed.  The message text is
+intended to be self explanatory (in the grand Unix tradition).
+
+   Error messages have the format
+     file_name:NNN:FATAL:Error Message Text
+   The file name and line number are derived as for warning messages.
+The actual message text may be rather less explanatory because many of
+them aren't supposed to happen.
+
+2 Command-Line Options
+**********************
+
+This chapter describes command-line options available in _all_ versions
+of the GNU assembler; see *note Machine Dependencies::, for options
+specific to the machine specific target.
+
+   If you are invoking 'as' via the GNU C compiler, you can use the
+'-Wa' option to pass arguments through to the assembler.  The assembler
+arguments must be separated from each other (and the '-Wa') by commas.
+For example:
+
+     gcc -c -g -O -Wa,-alh,-L file.c
+
+This passes two options to the assembler: '-alh' (emit a listing to
+standard output with high-level and assembly source) and '-L' (retain
+local symbols in the symbol table).
+
+   Usually you do not need to use this '-Wa' mechanism, since many
+compiler command-line options are automatically passed to the assembler
+by the compiler.  (You can call the GNU compiler driver with the '-v'
+option to see precisely what options it passes to each compilation pass,
+including the assembler.)
+
+2.1 Enable Listings: '-a[cdhlns]'
+=================================
+
+These options enable listing output from the assembler.  By itself, '-a'
+requests high-level, assembly, and symbols listing.  You can use other
+letters to select specific options for the list: '-ah' requests a
+high-level language listing, '-al' requests an output-program assembly
+listing, and '-as' requests a symbol table listing.  High-level listings
+require that a compiler debugging option like '-g' be used, and that
+assembly listings ('-al') be requested also.
+
+   Use the '-ac' option to omit false conditionals from a listing.  Any
+lines which are not assembled because of a false '.if' (or '.ifdef', or
+any other conditional), or a true '.if' followed by an '.else', will be
+omitted from the listing.
+
+   Use the '-ad' option to omit debugging directives from the listing.
+
+   Once you have specified one of these options, you can further control
+listing output and its appearance using the directives '.list',
+'.nolist', '.psize', '.eject', '.title', and '.sbttl'.  The '-an' option
+turns off all forms processing.  If you do not request listing output
+with one of the '-a' options, the listing-control directives have no
+effect.
+
+   The letters after '-a' may be combined into one option, _e.g._,
+'-aln'.
+
+   Note if the assembler source is coming from the standard input (e.g.,
+because it is being created by 'gcc' and the '-pipe' command line switch
+is being used) then the listing will not contain any comments or
+preprocessor directives.  This is because the listing code buffers input
+source lines from stdin only after they have been preprocessed by the
+assembler.  This reduces memory usage and makes the code more efficient.
+
+2.2 '--alternate'
+=================
+
+Begin in alternate macro mode, see *note '.altmacro': Altmacro.
+
+2.3 '-D'
+========
+
+This option has no effect whatsoever, but it is accepted to make it more
+likely that scripts written for other assemblers also work with 'as'.
+
+2.4 Work Faster: '-f'
+=====================
+
+'-f' should only be used when assembling programs written by a (trusted)
+compiler.  '-f' stops the assembler from doing whitespace and comment
+preprocessing on the input file(s) before assembling them.  *Note
+Preprocessing: Preprocessing.
+
+     _Warning:_ if you use '-f' when the files actually need to be
+     preprocessed (if they contain comments, for example), 'as' does not
+     work correctly.
+
+2.5 '.include' Search Path: '-I' PATH
+=====================================
+
+Use this option to add a PATH to the list of directories 'as' searches
+for files specified in '.include' directives (*note '.include':
+Include.).  You may use '-I' as many times as necessary to include a
+variety of paths.  The current working directory is always searched
+first; after that, 'as' searches any '-I' directories in the same order
+as they were specified (left to right) on the command line.
+
+2.6 Difference Tables: '-K'
+===========================
+
+On the machine specific family, this option is allowed, but has no
+effect.  It is permitted for compatibility with the GNU assembler on
+other platforms, where it can be used to warn when the assembler alters
+the machine code generated for '.word' directives in difference tables.
+The machine specific family does not have the addressing limitations
+that sometimes lead to this alteration on other platforms.
+
+2.7 Include Local Symbols: '-L'
+===============================
+
+Symbols beginning with system-specific local label prefixes, typically
+'.L' for ELF systems or 'L' for traditional a.out systems, are called
+"local symbols".  *Note Symbol Names::.  Normally you do not see such
+symbols when debugging, because they are intended for the use of
+programs (like compilers) that compose assembler programs, not for your
+notice.  Normally both 'as' and 'ld' discard such symbols, so you do not
+normally debug with them.
+
+   This option tells 'as' to retain those local symbols in the object
+file.  Usually if you do this you also tell the linker 'ld' to preserve
+those symbols.
+
+2.8 Configuring listing output: '--listing'
+===========================================
+
+The listing feature of the assembler can be enabled via the command line
+switch '-a' (*note a::).  This feature combines the input source file(s)
+with a hex dump of the corresponding locations in the output object
+file, and displays them as a listing file.  The format of this listing
+can be controlled by directives inside the assembler source (i.e.,
+'.list' (*note List::), '.title' (*note Title::), '.sbttl' (*note
+Sbttl::), '.psize' (*note Psize::), and '.eject' (*note Eject::) and
+also by the following switches:
+
+'--listing-lhs-width='number''
+     Sets the maximum width, in words, of the first line of the hex byte
+     dump.  This dump appears on the left hand side of the listing
+     output.
+
+'--listing-lhs-width2='number''
+     Sets the maximum width, in words, of any further lines of the hex
+     byte dump for a given input source line.  If this value is not
+     specified, it defaults to being the same as the value specified for
+     '--listing-lhs-width'.  If neither switch is used the default is to
+     one.
+
+'--listing-rhs-width='number''
+     Sets the maximum width, in characters, of the source line that is
+     displayed alongside the hex dump.  The default value for this
+     parameter is 100.  The source line is displayed on the right hand
+     side of the listing output.
+
+'--listing-cont-lines='number''
+     Sets the maximum number of continuation lines of hex dump that will
+     be displayed for a given single line of source input.  The default
+     value is 4.
+
+2.9 Assemble in MRI Compatibility Mode: '-M'
+============================================
+
+The '-M' or '--mri' option selects MRI compatibility mode.  This changes
+the syntax and pseudo-op handling of 'as' to make it compatible with the
+'ASM68K' or the 'ASM960' (depending upon the configured target)
+assembler from Microtec Research.  The exact nature of the MRI syntax
+will not be documented here; see the MRI manuals for more information.
+Note in particular that the handling of macros and macro arguments is
+somewhat different.  The purpose of this option is to permit assembling
+existing MRI assembler code using 'as'.
+
+   The MRI compatibility is not complete.  Certain operations of the MRI
+assembler depend upon its object file format, and can not be supported
+using other object file formats.  Supporting these would require
+enhancing each object file format individually.  These are:
+
+   * global symbols in common section
+
+     The m68k MRI assembler supports common sections which are merged by
+     the linker.  Other object file formats do not support this.  'as'
+     handles common sections by treating them as a single common symbol.
+     It permits local symbols to be defined within a common section, but
+     it can not support global symbols, since it has no way to describe
+     them.
+
+   * complex relocations
+
+     The MRI assemblers support relocations against a negated section
+     address, and relocations which combine the start addresses of two
+     or more sections.  These are not support by other object file
+     formats.
+
+   * 'END' pseudo-op specifying start address
+
+     The MRI 'END' pseudo-op permits the specification of a start
+     address.  This is not supported by other object file formats.  The
+     start address may instead be specified using the '-e' option to the
+     linker, or in a linker script.
+
+   * 'IDNT', '.ident' and 'NAME' pseudo-ops
+
+     The MRI 'IDNT', '.ident' and 'NAME' pseudo-ops assign a module name
+     to the output file.  This is not supported by other object file
+     formats.
+
+   * 'ORG' pseudo-op
+
+     The m68k MRI 'ORG' pseudo-op begins an absolute section at a given
+     address.  This differs from the usual 'as' '.org' pseudo-op, which
+     changes the location within the current section.  Absolute sections
+     are not supported by other object file formats.  The address of a
+     section may be assigned within a linker script.
+
+   There are some other features of the MRI assembler which are not
+supported by 'as', typically either because they are difficult or
+because they seem of little consequence.  Some of these may be supported
+in future releases.
+
+   * EBCDIC strings
+
+     EBCDIC strings are not supported.
+
+   * packed binary coded decimal
+
+     Packed binary coded decimal is not supported.  This means that the
+     'DC.P' and 'DCB.P' pseudo-ops are not supported.
+
+   * 'FEQU' pseudo-op
+
+     The m68k 'FEQU' pseudo-op is not supported.
+
+   * 'NOOBJ' pseudo-op
+
+     The m68k 'NOOBJ' pseudo-op is not supported.
+
+   * 'OPT' branch control options
+
+     The m68k 'OPT' branch control options--'B', 'BRS', 'BRB', 'BRL',
+     and 'BRW'--are ignored.  'as' automatically relaxes all branches,
+     whether forward or backward, to an appropriate size, so these
+     options serve no purpose.
+
+   * 'OPT' list control options
+
+     The following m68k 'OPT' list control options are ignored: 'C',
+     'CEX', 'CL', 'CRE', 'E', 'G', 'I', 'M', 'MEX', 'MC', 'MD', 'X'.
+
+   * other 'OPT' options
+
+     The following m68k 'OPT' options are ignored: 'NEST', 'O', 'OLD',
+     'OP', 'P', 'PCO', 'PCR', 'PCS', 'R'.
+
+   * 'OPT' 'D' option is default
+
+     The m68k 'OPT' 'D' option is the default, unlike the MRI assembler.
+     'OPT NOD' may be used to turn it off.
+
+   * 'XREF' pseudo-op.
+
+     The m68k 'XREF' pseudo-op is ignored.
+
+   * '.debug' pseudo-op
+
+     The i960 '.debug' pseudo-op is not supported.
+
+   * '.extended' pseudo-op
+
+     The i960 '.extended' pseudo-op is not supported.
+
+   * '.list' pseudo-op.
+
+     The various options of the i960 '.list' pseudo-op are not
+     supported.
+
+   * '.optimize' pseudo-op
+
+     The i960 '.optimize' pseudo-op is not supported.
+
+   * '.output' pseudo-op
+
+     The i960 '.output' pseudo-op is not supported.
+
+   * '.setreal' pseudo-op
+
+     The i960 '.setreal' pseudo-op is not supported.
+
+2.10 Dependency Tracking: '--MD'
+================================
+
+'as' can generate a dependency file for the file it creates.  This file
+consists of a single rule suitable for 'make' describing the
+dependencies of the main source file.
+
+   The rule is written to the file named in its argument.
+
+   This feature is used in the automatic updating of makefiles.
+
+2.11 Name the Object File: '-o'
+===============================
+
+There is always one object file output when you run 'as'.  By default it
+has the name 'a.out'.  You use this option (which takes exactly one
+filename) to give the object file a different name.
+
+   Whatever the object file is called, 'as' overwrites any existing file
+of the same name.
+
+2.12 Join Data and Text Sections: '-R'
+======================================
+
+'-R' tells 'as' to write the object file as if all data-section data
+lives in the text section.  This is only done at the very last moment:
+your binary data are the same, but data section parts are relocated
+differently.  The data section part of your object file is zero bytes
+long because all its bytes are appended to the text section.  (*Note
+Sections and Relocation: Sections.)
+
+   When you specify '-R' it would be possible to generate shorter
+address displacements (because we do not have to cross between text and
+data section).  We refrain from doing this simply for compatibility with
+older versions of 'as'.  In future, '-R' may work this way.
+
+   When 'as' is configured for COFF or ELF output, this option is only
+useful if you use sections named '.text' and '.data'.
+
+2.13 Display Assembly Statistics: '--statistics'
+================================================
+
+Use '--statistics' to display two statistics about the resources used by
+'as': the maximum amount of space allocated during the assembly (in
+bytes), and the total execution time taken for the assembly (in CPU
+seconds).
+
+2.14 Compatible Output: '--traditional-format'
+==============================================
+
+For some targets, the output of 'as' is different in some ways from the
+output of some existing assembler.  This switch requests 'as' to use the
+traditional format instead.
+
+   For example, it disables the exception frame optimizations which 'as'
+normally does by default on 'gcc' output.
+
+2.15 Announce Version: '-v'
+===========================
+
+You can find out what version of as is running by including the option
+'-v' (which you can also spell as '-version') on the command line.
+
+2.16 Control Warnings: '-W', '--warn', '--no-warn', '--fatal-warnings'
+======================================================================
+
+'as' should never give a warning or error message when assembling
+compiler output.  But programs written by people often cause 'as' to
+give a warning that a particular assumption was made.  All such warnings
+are directed to the standard error file.
+
+   If you use the '-W' and '--no-warn' options, no warnings are issued.
+This only affects the warning messages: it does not change any
+particular of how 'as' assembles your file.  Errors, which stop the
+assembly, are still reported.
+
+   If you use the '--fatal-warnings' option, 'as' considers files that
+generate warnings to be in error.
+
+   You can switch these options off again by specifying '--warn', which
+causes warnings to be output as usual.
+
+2.17 Generate Object File in Spite of Errors: '-Z'
+==================================================
+
+After an error message, 'as' normally produces no output.  If for some
+reason you are interested in object file output even after 'as' gives an
+error message on your program, use the '-Z' option.  If there are any
+errors, 'as' continues anyways, and writes an object file after a final
+warning message of the form 'N errors, M warnings, generating bad object
+file.'
+
+3 Syntax
+********
+
+This chapter describes the machine-independent syntax allowed in a
+source file.  'as' syntax is similar to what many other assemblers use;
+it is inspired by the BSD 4.2 assembler.
+
+3.1 Preprocessing
+=================
+
+The 'as' internal preprocessor:
+   * adjusts and removes extra whitespace.  It leaves one space or tab
+     before the keywords on a line, and turns any other whitespace on
+     the line into a single space.
+
+   * removes all comments, replacing them with a single space, or an
+     appropriate number of newlines.
+
+   * converts character constants into the appropriate numeric values.
+
+   It does not do macro processing, include file handling, or anything
+else you may get from your C compiler's preprocessor.  You can do
+include file processing with the '.include' directive (*note '.include':
+Include.).  You can use the GNU C compiler driver to get other "CPP"
+style preprocessing by giving the input file a '.S' suffix.  *Note
+Options Controlling the Kind of Output: (gcc.info)Overall Options.
+
+   Excess whitespace, comments, and character constants cannot be used
+in the portions of the input text that are not preprocessed.
+
+   If the first line of an input file is '#NO_APP' or if you use the
+'-f' option, whitespace and comments are not removed from the input
+file.  Within an input file, you can ask for whitespace and comment
+removal in specific portions of the by putting a line that says '#APP'
+before the text that may contain whitespace or comments, and putting a
+line that says '#NO_APP' after this text.  This feature is mainly intend
+to support 'asm' statements in compilers whose output is otherwise free
+of comments and whitespace.
+
+3.2 Whitespace
+==============
+
+"Whitespace" is one or more blanks or tabs, in any order.  Whitespace is
+used to separate symbols, and to make programs neater for people to
+read.  Unless within character constants (*note Character Constants:
+Characters.), any whitespace means the same as exactly one space.
+
+3.3 Comments
+============
+
+There are two ways of rendering comments to 'as'.  In both cases the
+comment is equivalent to one space.
+
+   Anything from '/*' through the next '*/' is a comment.  This means
+you may not nest these comments.
+
+     /*
+       The only way to include a newline ('\n') in a comment
+       is to use this sort of comment.
+     */
+
+     /* This sort of comment does not nest. */
+
+   Anything from the "line comment" character to the next newline is
+considered a comment and is ignored.  The line comment character is '@'
+on the ARM; '#' on the i386 and x86-64; '#' for Motorola PowerPC; '!' on
+the SPARC; see *note Machine Dependencies::.
+
+   To be compatible with past assemblers, lines that begin with '#' have
+a special interpretation.  Following the '#' should be an absolute
+expression (*note Expressions::): the logical line number of the _next_
+line.  Then a string (*note Strings: Strings.) is allowed: if present it
+is a new logical file name.  The rest of the line, if any, should be
+whitespace.
+
+   If the first non-whitespace characters on the line are not numeric,
+the line is ignored.  (Just like a comment.)
+
+                               # This is an ordinary comment.
+     # 42-6 "new_file_name"    # New logical file name
+                               # This is logical line # 36.
+   This feature is deprecated, and may disappear from future versions of
+'as'.
+
+3.4 Symbols
+===========
+
+A "symbol" is one or more characters chosen from the set of all letters
+(both upper and lower case), digits and the three characters '_.$'.  No
+symbol may begin with a digit.  Case is significant.  There is no length
+limit: all characters are significant.  Symbols are delimited by
+characters not in that set, or by the beginning of a file (since the
+source program must end with a newline, the end of a file is not a
+possible symbol delimiter).  *Note Symbols::.
+
+3.5 Statements
+==============
+
+A "statement" ends at a newline character ('\n') or at a semicolon
+(';').  The newline or semicolon is considered part of the preceding
+statement.  Newlines and semicolons within character constants are an
+exception: they do not end statements.
+
+   It is an error to end any statement with end-of-file: the last
+character of any input file should be a newline.
+
+   An empty statement is allowed, and may include whitespace.  It is
+ignored.
+
+   A statement begins with zero or more labels, optionally followed by a
+key symbol which determines what kind of statement it is.  The key
+symbol determines the syntax of the rest of the statement.  If the
+symbol begins with a dot '.' then the statement is an assembler
+directive: typically valid for any computer.  If the symbol begins with
+a letter the statement is an assembly language "instruction": it
+assembles into a machine language instruction.
+
+   A label is a symbol immediately followed by a colon (':').
+Whitespace before a label or after a colon is permitted, but you may not
+have whitespace between a label's symbol and its colon.  *Note Labels::.
+
+     label:     .directive    followed by something
+     another_label:           # This is an empty statement.
+                instruction   operand_1, operand_2, ...
+
+3.6 Constants
+=============
+
+A constant is a number, written so that its value is known by
+inspection, without knowing any context.  Like this:
+     .byte  74, 0112, 092, 0x4A, 0X4a, 'J, '\J # All the same value.
+     .ascii "Ring the bell\7"                  # A string constant.
+     .octa  0x123456789abcdef0123456789ABCDEF0 # A bignum.
+     .float 0f-314159265358979323846264338327\
+     95028841971.693993751E-40                 # - pi, a flonum.
+
+3.6.1 Character Constants
+-------------------------
+
+There are two kinds of character constants.  A "character" stands for
+one character in one byte and its value may be used in numeric
+expressions.  String constants (properly called string _literals_) are
+potentially many bytes and their values may not be used in arithmetic
+expressions.
+
+3.6.1.1 Strings
+...............
+
+A "string" is written between double-quotes.  It may contain
+double-quotes or null characters.  The way to get special characters
+into a string is to "escape" these characters: precede them with a
+backslash '\' character.  For example '\\' represents one backslash: the
+first '\' is an escape which tells 'as' to interpret the second
+character literally as a backslash (which prevents 'as' from recognizing
+the second '\' as an escape character).  The complete list of escapes
+follows.
+
+'\b'
+     Mnemonic for backspace; for ASCII this is octal code 010.
+
+'\f'
+     Mnemonic for FormFeed; for ASCII this is octal code 014.
+
+'\n'
+     Mnemonic for newline; for ASCII this is octal code 012.
+
+'\r'
+     Mnemonic for carriage-Return; for ASCII this is octal code 015.
+
+'\t'
+     Mnemonic for horizontal Tab; for ASCII this is octal code 011.
+
+'\ DIGIT DIGIT DIGIT'
+     An octal character code.  The numeric code is 3 octal digits.  For
+     compatibility with other Unix systems, 8 and 9 are accepted as
+     digits: for example, '\008' has the value 010, and '\009' the value
+     011.
+
+'\x HEX-DIGITS...'
+     A hex character code.  All trailing hex digits are combined.
+     Either upper or lower case 'x' works.
+
+'\\'
+     Represents one '\' character.
+
+'\"'
+     Represents one '"' character.  Needed in strings to represent this
+     character, because an unescaped '"' would end the string.
+
+'\ ANYTHING-ELSE'
+     Any other character when escaped by '\' gives a warning, but
+     assembles as if the '\' was not present.  The idea is that if you
+     used an escape sequence you clearly didn't want the literal
+     interpretation of the following character.  However 'as' has no
+     other interpretation, so 'as' knows it is giving you the wrong code
+     and warns you of the fact.
+
+   Which characters are escapable, and what those escapes represent,
+varies widely among assemblers.  The current set is what we think the
+BSD 4.2 assembler recognizes, and is a subset of what most C compilers
+recognize.  If you are in doubt, do not use an escape sequence.
+
+3.6.1.2 Characters
+..................
+
+A single character may be written as a single quote immediately followed
+by that character.  The same escapes apply to characters as to strings.
+So if you want to write the character backslash, you must write ''\\'
+where the first '\' escapes the second '\'.  As you can see, the quote
+is an acute accent, not a grave accent.  A newline (or semicolon ';')
+immediately following an acute accent is taken as a literal character
+and does not count as the end of a statement.  The value of a character
+constant in a numeric expression is the machine's byte-wide code for
+that character.  'as' assumes your character code is ASCII: ''A' means
+65, ''B' means 66, and so on.
+
+3.6.2 Number Constants
+----------------------
+
+'as' distinguishes three kinds of numbers according to how they are
+stored in the target machine.  _Integers_ are numbers that would fit
+into an 'int' in the C language.  _Bignums_ are integers, but they are
+stored in more than 32 bits.  _Flonums_ are floating point numbers,
+described below.
+
+3.6.2.1 Integers
+................
+
+A binary integer is '0b' or '0B' followed by zero or more of the binary
+digits '01'.
+
+   An octal integer is '0' followed by zero or more of the octal digits
+('01234567').
+
+   A decimal integer starts with a non-zero digit followed by zero or
+more digits ('0123456789').
+
+   A hexadecimal integer is '0x' or '0X' followed by one or more
+hexadecimal digits chosen from '0123456789abcdefABCDEF'.
+
+   Integers have the usual values.  To denote a negative integer, use
+the prefix operator '-' discussed under expressions (*note Prefix
+Operators: Prefix Ops.).
+
+3.6.2.2 Bignums
+...............
+
+A "bignum" has the same syntax and semantics as an integer except that
+the number (or its negative) takes more than 32 bits to represent in
+binary.  The distinction is made because in some places integers are
+permitted while bignums are not.
+
+3.6.2.3 Flonums
+...............
+
+A "flonum" represents a floating point number.  The translation is
+indirect: a decimal floating point number from the text is converted by
+'as' to a generic binary floating point number of more than sufficient
+precision.  This generic floating point number is converted to a
+particular computer's floating point format (or formats) by a portion of
+'as' specialized to that computer.
+
+   A flonum is written by writing (in order)
+   * The digit '0'.
+
+   * A letter, to tell 'as' the rest of the number is a flonum.
+
+   * An optional sign: either '+' or '-'.
+
+   * An optional "integer part": zero or more decimal digits.
+
+   * An optional "fractional part": '.' followed by zero or more decimal
+     digits.
+
+   * An optional exponent, consisting of:
+
+        * An 'E' or 'e'.
+        * Optional sign: either '+' or '-'.
+        * One or more decimal digits.
+
+   At least one of the integer part or the fractional part must be
+present.  The floating point number has the usual base-10 value.
+
+   'as' does all processing using integers.  Flonums are computed
+independently of any floating point hardware in the computer running
+'as'.
+
+4 Sections and Relocation
+*************************
+
+4.1 Background
+==============
+
+Roughly, a section is a range of addresses, with no gaps; all data "in"
+those addresses is treated the same for some particular purpose.  For
+example there may be a "read only" section.
+
+   The linker 'ld' reads many object files (partial programs) and
+combines their contents to form a runnable program.  When 'as' emits an
+object file, the partial program is assumed to start at address 0.  'ld'
+assigns the final addresses for the partial program, so that different
+partial programs do not overlap.  This is actually an
+oversimplification, but it suffices to explain how 'as' uses sections.
+
+   'ld' moves blocks of bytes of your program to their run-time
+addresses.  These blocks slide to their run-time addresses as rigid
+units; their length does not change and neither does the order of bytes
+within them.  Such a rigid unit is called a _section_.  Assigning
+run-time addresses to sections is called "relocation".  It includes the
+task of adjusting mentions of object-file addresses so they refer to the
+proper run-time addresses.
+
+   An object file written by 'as' has at least three sections, any of
+which may be empty.  These are named "text", "data" and "bss" sections.
+
+   'as' can also generate whatever other named sections you specify
+using the '.section' directive (*note '.section': Section.).  If you do
+not use any directives that place output in the '.text' or '.data'
+sections, these sections still exist, but are empty.
+
+   Within the object file, the text section starts at address '0', the
+data section follows, and the bss section follows the data section.
+
+   To let 'ld' know which data changes when the sections are relocated,
+and how to change that data, 'as' also writes to the object file details
+of the relocation needed.  To perform relocation 'ld' must know, each
+time an address in the object file is mentioned:
+   * Where in the object file is the beginning of this reference to an
+     address?
+   * How long (in bytes) is this reference?
+   * Which section does the address refer to?  What is the numeric value
+     of
+          (ADDRESS) - (START-ADDRESS OF SECTION)?
+   * Is the reference to an address "Program-Counter relative"?
+
+   In fact, every address 'as' ever uses is expressed as
+     (SECTION) + (OFFSET INTO SECTION)
+Further, most expressions 'as' computes have this section-relative
+nature.
+
+   In this manual we use the notation {SECNAME N} to mean "offset N into
+section SECNAME."
+
+   Apart from text, data and bss sections you need to know about the
+"absolute" section.  When 'ld' mixes partial programs, addresses in the
+absolute section remain unchanged.  For example, address '{absolute 0}'
+is "relocated" to run-time address 0 by 'ld'.  Although the linker never
+arranges two partial programs' data sections with overlapping addresses
+after linking, _by definition_ their absolute sections must overlap.
+Address '{absolute 239}' in one part of a program is always the same
+address when the program is running as address '{absolute 239}' in any
+other part of the program.
+
+   The idea of sections is extended to the "undefined" section.  Any
+address whose section is unknown at assembly time is by definition
+rendered {undefined U}--where U is filled in later.  Since numbers are
+always defined, the only way to generate an undefined address is to
+mention an undefined symbol.  A reference to a named common block would
+be such a symbol: its value is unknown at assembly time so it has
+section _undefined_.
+
+   By analogy the word _section_ is used to describe groups of sections
+in the linked program.  'ld' puts all partial programs' text sections in
+contiguous addresses in the linked program.  It is customary to refer to
+the _text section_ of a program, meaning all the addresses of all
+partial programs' text sections.  Likewise for data and bss sections.
+
+   Some sections are manipulated by 'ld'; others are invented for use of
+'as' and have no meaning except during assembly.
+
+4.2 Linker Sections
+===================
+
+'ld' deals with just four kinds of sections, summarized below.
+
+*named sections*
+     These sections hold your program.  'as' and 'ld' treat them as
+     separate but equal sections.  Anything you can say of one section
+     is true of another.  When the program is running, however, it is
+     customary for the text section to be unalterable.  The text section
+     is often shared among processes: it contains instructions,
+     constants and the like.  The data section of a running program is
+     usually alterable: for example, C variables would be stored in the
+     data section.
+
+*bss section*
+     This section contains zeroed bytes when your program begins
+     running.  It is used to hold uninitialized variables or common
+     storage.  The length of each partial program's bss section is
+     important, but because it starts out containing zeroed bytes there
+     is no need to store explicit zero bytes in the object file.  The
+     bss section was invented to eliminate those explicit zeros from
+     object files.
+
+*absolute section*
+     Address 0 of this section is always "relocated" to runtime address
+     0.  This is useful if you want to refer to an address that 'ld'
+     must not change when relocating.  In this sense we speak of
+     absolute addresses being "unrelocatable": they do not change during
+     relocation.
+
+*undefined section*
+     This "section" is a catch-all for address references to objects not
+     in the preceding sections.
+
+   An idealized example of three relocatable sections follows.  The
+example uses the traditional section names '.text' and '.data'.  Memory
+addresses are on the horizontal axis.
+
+                           +-----+----+--+
+     partial program # 1:  |ttttt|dddd|00|
+                           +-----+----+--+
+
+                           text   data bss
+                           seg.   seg. seg.
+
+                           +---+---+---+
+     partial program # 2:  |TTT|DDD|000|
+                           +---+---+---+
+
+                           +--+---+-----+--+----+---+-----+~~
+     linked program:       |  |TTT|ttttt|  |dddd|DDD|00000|
+                           +--+---+-----+--+----+---+-----+~~
+
+         addresses:        0 ...
+
+4.3 Assembler Internal Sections
+===============================
+
+These sections are meant only for the internal use of 'as'.  They have
+no meaning at run-time.  You do not really need to know about these
+sections for most purposes; but they can be mentioned in 'as' warning
+messages, so it might be helpful to have an idea of their meanings to
+'as'.  These sections are used to permit the value of every expression
+in your assembly language program to be a section-relative address.
+
+ASSEMBLER-INTERNAL-LOGIC-ERROR!
+     An internal assembler logic error has been found.  This means there
+     is a bug in the assembler.
+
+expr section
+     The assembler stores complex expression internally as combinations
+     of symbols.  When it needs to represent an expression as a symbol,
+     it puts it in the expr section.
+
+4.4 Sub-Sections
+================
+
+You may have separate groups of data in named sections that you want to
+end up near to each other in the object file, even though they are not
+contiguous in the assembler source.  'as' allows you to use
+"subsections" for this purpose.  Within each section, there can be
+numbered subsections with values from 0 to 8192.  Objects assembled into
+the same subsection go into the object file together with other objects
+in the same subsection.  For example, a compiler might want to store
+constants in the text section, but might not want to have them
+interspersed with the program being assembled.  In this case, the
+compiler could issue a '.text 0' before each section of code being
+output, and a '.text 1' before each group of constants being output.
+
+   Subsections are optional.  If you do not use subsections, everything
+goes in subsection number zero.
+
+   Subsections appear in your object file in numeric order, lowest
+numbered to highest.  (All this to be compatible with other people's
+assemblers.)  The object file contains no representation of subsections;
+'ld' and other programs that manipulate object files see no trace of
+them.  They just see all your text subsections as a text section, and
+all your data subsections as a data section.
+
+   To specify which subsection you want subsequent statements assembled
+into, use a numeric argument to specify it, in a '.text EXPRESSION' or a
+'.data EXPRESSION' statement.  You can also use the '.subsection'
+directive (*note SubSection::) to specify a subsection: '.subsection
+EXPRESSION'.  EXPRESSION should be an absolute expression (*note
+Expressions::).  If you just say '.text' then '.text 0' is assumed.
+Likewise '.data' means '.data 0'.  Assembly begins in 'text 0'.  For
+instance:
+     .text 0     # The default subsection is text 0 anyway.
+     .ascii "This lives in the first text subsection. *"
+     .text 1
+     .ascii "But this lives in the second text subsection."
+     .data 0
+     .ascii "This lives in the data section,"
+     .ascii "in the first data subsection."
+     .text 0
+     .ascii "This lives in the first text section,"
+     .ascii "immediately following the asterisk (*)."
+
+   Each section has a "location counter" incremented by one for every
+byte assembled into that section.  Because subsections are merely a
+convenience restricted to 'as' there is no concept of a subsection
+location counter.  There is no way to directly manipulate a location
+counter--but the '.align' directive changes it, and any label definition
+captures its current value.  The location counter of the section where
+statements are being assembled is said to be the "active" location
+counter.
+
+4.5 bss Section
+===============
+
+The bss section is used for local common variable storage.  You may
+allocate address space in the bss section, but you may not dictate data
+to load into it before your program executes.  When your program starts
+running, all the contents of the bss section are zeroed bytes.
+
+   The '.lcomm' pseudo-op defines a symbol in the bss section; see *note
+'.lcomm': Lcomm.
+
+   The '.comm' pseudo-op may be used to declare a common symbol, which
+is another form of uninitialized symbol; see *note '.comm': Comm.
+
+5 Symbols
+*********
+
+Symbols are a central concept: the programmer uses symbols to name
+things, the linker uses symbols to link, and the debugger uses symbols
+to debug.
+
+     _Warning:_ 'as' does not place symbols in the object file in the
+     same order they were declared.  This may break some debuggers.
+
+5.1 Labels
+==========
+
+A "label" is written as a symbol immediately followed by a colon ':'.
+The symbol then represents the current value of the active location
+counter, and is, for example, a suitable instruction operand.  You are
+warned if you use the same symbol to represent two different locations:
+the first definition overrides any other definitions.
+
+5.2 Giving Symbols Other Values
+===============================
+
+A symbol can be given an arbitrary value by writing a symbol, followed
+by an equals sign '=', followed by an expression (*note Expressions::).
+This is equivalent to using the '.set' directive.  *Note '.set': Set.
+In the same way, using a double equals sign '=''=' here represents an
+equivalent of the '.eqv' directive.  *Note '.eqv': Eqv.
+
+5.3 Symbol Names
+================
+
+Symbol names begin with a letter or with one of '._'.  On most machines,
+you can also use '$' in symbol names; exceptions are noted in *note
+Machine Dependencies::.  That character may be followed by any string of
+digits, letters, dollar signs (unless otherwise noted for a particular
+target machine), and underscores.
+
+   Case of letters is significant: 'foo' is a different symbol name than
+'Foo'.
+
+   Each symbol has exactly one name.  Each name in an assembly language
+program refers to exactly one symbol.  You may use that symbol name any
+number of times in a program.
+
+Local Symbol Names
+------------------
+
+A local symbol is any symbol beginning with certain local label
+prefixes.  By default, the local label prefix is '.L' for ELF systems or
+'L' for traditional a.out systems, but each target may have its own set
+of local label prefixes.
+
+   Local symbols are defined and used within the assembler, but they are
+normally not saved in object files.  Thus, they are not visible when
+debugging.  You may use the '-L' option (*note Include Local Symbols:
+'-L': L.) to retain the local symbols in the object files.
+
+Local Labels
+------------
+
+Local labels help compilers and programmers use names temporarily.  They
+create symbols which are guaranteed to be unique over the entire scope
+of the input source code and which can be referred to by a simple
+notation.  To define a local label, write a label of the form 'N:'
+(where N represents any positive integer).  To refer to the most recent
+previous definition of that label write 'Nb', using the same number as
+when you defined the label.  To refer to the next definition of a local
+label, write 'Nf'--the 'b' stands for "backwards" and the 'f' stands for
+"forwards".
+
+   There is no restriction on how you can use these labels, and you can
+reuse them too.  So that it is possible to repeatedly define the same
+local label (using the same number 'N'), although you can only refer to
+the most recently defined local label of that number (for a backwards
+reference) or the next definition of a specific local label for a
+forward reference.  It is also worth noting that the first 10 local
+labels ('0:'...'9:') are implemented in a slightly more efficient manner
+than the others.
+
+   Here is an example:
+
+     1:        branch 1f
+     2:        branch 1b
+     1:        branch 2f
+     2:        branch 1b
+
+   Which is the equivalent of:
+
+     label_1:  branch label_3
+     label_2:  branch label_1
+     label_3:  branch label_4
+     label_4:  branch label_3
+
+   Local label names are only a notational device.  They are immediately
+transformed into more conventional symbol names before the assembler
+uses them.  The symbol names are stored in the symbol table, appear in
+error messages, and are optionally emitted to the object file.  The
+names are constructed using these parts:
+
+'_local label prefix_'
+     All local symbols begin with the system-specific local label
+     prefix.  Normally both 'as' and 'ld' forget symbols that start with
+     the local label prefix.  These labels are used for symbols you are
+     never intended to see.  If you use the '-L' option then 'as'
+     retains these symbols in the object file.  If you also instruct
+     'ld' to retain these symbols, you may use them in debugging.
+
+'NUMBER'
+     This is the number that was used in the local label definition.  So
+     if the label is written '55:' then the number is '55'.
+
+'C-B'
+     This unusual character is included so you do not accidentally
+     invent a symbol of the same name.  The character has ASCII value of
+     '\002' (control-B).
+
+'_ordinal number_'
+     This is a serial number to keep the labels distinct.  The first
+     definition of '0:' gets the number '1'.  The 15th definition of
+     '0:' gets the number '15', and so on.  Likewise the first
+     definition of '1:' gets the number '1' and its 15th definition gets
+     '15' as well.
+
+   So for example, the first '1:' may be named '.L1C-B1', and the 44th
+'3:' may be named '.L3C-B44'.
+
+Dollar Local Labels
+-------------------
+
+'as' also supports an even more local form of local labels called dollar
+labels.  These labels go out of scope (i.e., they become undefined) as
+soon as a non-local label is defined.  Thus they remain valid for only a
+small region of the input source code.  Normal local labels, by
+contrast, remain in scope for the entire file, or until they are
+redefined by another occurrence of the same local label.
+
+   Dollar labels are defined in exactly the same way as ordinary local
+labels, except that instead of being terminated by a colon, they are
+terminated by a dollar sign, e.g., '55$'.
+
+   They can also be distinguished from ordinary local labels by their
+transformed names which use ASCII character '\001' (control-A) as the
+magic character to distinguish them from ordinary labels.  For example,
+the fifth definition of '6$' may be named '.L6'C-A'5'.
+
+5.4 The Special Dot Symbol
+==========================
+
+The special symbol '.' refers to the current address that 'as' is
+assembling into.  Thus, the expression 'melvin: .long .' defines
+'melvin' to contain its own address.  Assigning a value to '.' is
+treated the same as a '.org' directive.  Thus, the expression '.=.+4' is
+the same as saying '.space 4'.
+
+5.5 Symbol Attributes
+=====================
+
+Every symbol has, as well as its name, the attributes "Value" and
+"Type".  Depending on output format, symbols can also have auxiliary
+attributes.  The detailed definitions are in 'a.out.h'.
+
+   If you use a symbol without defining it, 'as' assumes zero for all
+these attributes, and probably won't warn you.  This makes the symbol an
+externally defined symbol, which is generally what you would want.
+
+5.5.1 Value
+-----------
+
+The value of a symbol is (usually) 32 bits.  For a symbol which labels a
+location in the text, data, bss or absolute sections the value is the
+number of addresses from the start of that section to the label.
+Naturally for text, data and bss sections the value of a symbol changes
+as 'ld' changes section base addresses during linking.  Absolute
+symbols' values do not change during linking: that is why they are
+called absolute.
+
+   The value of an undefined symbol is treated in a special way.  If it
+is 0 then the symbol is not defined in this assembler source file, and
+'ld' tries to determine its value from other files linked into the same
+program.  You make this kind of symbol simply by mentioning a symbol
+name without defining it.  A non-zero value represents a '.comm' common
+declaration.  The value is how much common storage to reserve, in bytes
+(addresses).  The symbol refers to the first address of the allocated
+storage.
+
+5.5.2 Type
+----------
+
+The type attribute of a symbol contains relocation (section)
+information, any flag settings indicating that a symbol is external, and
+(optionally), other information for linkers and debuggers.  The exact
+format depends on the object-code output format in use.
+
+6 Expressions
+*************
+
+An "expression" specifies an address or numeric value.  Whitespace may
+precede and/or follow an expression.
+
+   The result of an expression must be an absolute number, or else an
+offset into a particular section.  If an expression is not absolute, and
+there is not enough information when 'as' sees the expression to know
+its section, a second pass over the source program might be necessary to
+interpret the expression--but the second pass is currently not
+implemented.  'as' aborts with an error message in this situation.
+
+6.1 Empty Expressions
+=====================
+
+An empty expression has no value: it is just whitespace or null.
+Wherever an absolute expression is required, you may omit the
+expression, and 'as' assumes a value of (absolute) 0.  This is
+compatible with other assemblers.
+
+6.2 Integer Expressions
+=======================
+
+An "integer expression" is one or more _arguments_ delimited by
+_operators_.
+
+6.2.1 Arguments
+---------------
+
+"Arguments" are symbols, numbers or subexpressions.  In other contexts
+arguments are sometimes called "arithmetic operands".  In this manual,
+to avoid confusing them with the "instruction operands" of the machine
+language, we use the term "argument" to refer to parts of expressions
+only, reserving the word "operand" to refer only to machine instruction
+operands.
+
+   Symbols are evaluated to yield {SECTION NNN} where SECTION is one of
+text, data, bss, absolute, or undefined.  NNN is a signed, 2's
+complement 32 bit integer.
+
+   Numbers are usually integers.
+
+   A number can be a flonum or bignum.  In this case, you are warned
+that only the low order 32 bits are used, and 'as' pretends these 32
+bits are an integer.  You may write integer-manipulating instructions
+that act on exotic constants, compatible with other assemblers.
+
+   Subexpressions are a left parenthesis '(' followed by an integer
+expression, followed by a right parenthesis ')'; or a prefix operator
+followed by an argument.
+
+6.2.2 Operators
+---------------
+
+"Operators" are arithmetic functions, like '+' or '%'.  Prefix operators
+are followed by an argument.  Infix operators appear between their
+arguments.  Operators may be preceded and/or followed by whitespace.
+
+6.2.3 Prefix Operator
+---------------------
+
+'as' has the following "prefix operators".  They each take one argument,
+which must be absolute.
+
+'-'
+     "Negation".  Two's complement negation.
+'~'
+     "Complementation".  Bitwise not.
+
+6.2.4 Infix Operators
+---------------------
+
+"Infix operators" take two arguments, one on either side.  Operators
+have precedence, but operations with equal precedence are performed left
+to right.  Apart from '+' or '-', both arguments must be absolute, and
+the result is absolute.
+
+  1. Highest Precedence
+
+     '*'
+          "Multiplication".
+
+     '/'
+          "Division".  Truncation is the same as the C operator '/'
+
+     '%'
+          "Remainder".
+
+     '<<'
+          "Shift Left".  Same as the C operator '<<'.
+
+     '>>'
+          "Shift Right".  Same as the C operator '>>'.
+
+  2. Intermediate precedence
+
+     '|'
+
+          "Bitwise Inclusive Or".
+
+     '&'
+          "Bitwise And".
+
+     '^'
+          "Bitwise Exclusive Or".
+
+     '!'
+          "Bitwise Or Not".
+
+  3. Low Precedence
+
+     '+'
+          "Addition".  If either argument is absolute, the result has
+          the section of the other argument.  You may not add together
+          arguments from different sections.
+
+     '-'
+          "Subtraction".  If the right argument is absolute, the result
+          has the section of the left argument.  If both arguments are
+          in the same section, the result is absolute.  You may not
+          subtract arguments from different sections.
+
+     '=='
+          "Is Equal To"
+     '<>'
+     '!='
+          "Is Not Equal To"
+     '<'
+          "Is Less Than"
+     '>'
+          "Is Greater Than"
+     '>='
+          "Is Greater Than Or Equal To"
+     '<='
+          "Is Less Than Or Equal To"
+
+          The comparison operators can be used as infix operators.  A
+          true results has a value of -1 whereas a false result has a
+          value of 0.  Note, these operators perform signed comparisons.
+
+  4. Lowest Precedence
+
+     '&&'
+          "Logical And".
+
+     '||'
+          "Logical Or".
+
+          These two logical operations can be used to combine the
+          results of sub expressions.  Note, unlike the comparison
+          operators a true result returns a value of 1 but a false
+          results does still return 0.  Also note that the logical or
+          operator has a slightly lower precedence than logical and.
+
+   In short, it's only meaningful to add or subtract the _offsets_ in an
+address; you can only have a defined section in one of the two
+arguments.
+
+7 Assembler Directives
+**********************
+
+All assembler directives have names that begin with a period ('.').  The
+rest of the name is letters, usually in lower case.
+
+   This chapter discusses directives that are available regardless of
+the target machine configuration for the GNU assembler.
+
+7.1 '.abort'
+============
+
+This directive stops the assembly immediately.  It is for compatibility
+with other assemblers.  The original idea was that the assembly language
+source would be piped into the assembler.  If the sender of the source
+quit, it could use this directive tells 'as' to quit also.  One day
+'.abort' will not be supported.
+
+7.2 '.align ABS-EXPR, ABS-EXPR, ABS-EXPR'
+=========================================
+
+Pad the location counter (in the current subsection) to a particular
+storage boundary.  The first expression (which must be absolute) is the
+alignment required, as described below.
+
+   The second expression (also absolute) gives the fill value to be
+stored in the padding bytes.  It (and the comma) may be omitted.  If it
+is omitted, the padding bytes are normally zero.  However, on some
+systems, if the section is marked as containing code and the fill value
+is omitted, the space is filled with no-op instructions.
+
+   The third expression is also absolute, and is also optional.  If it
+is present, it is the maximum number of bytes that should be skipped by
+this alignment directive.  If doing the alignment would require skipping
+more bytes than the specified maximum, then the alignment is not done at
+all.  You can omit the fill value (the second argument) entirely by
+simply using two commas after the required alignment; this can be useful
+if you want the alignment to be filled with no-op instructions when
+appropriate.
+
+   The way the required alignment is specified varies from system to
+system.  For the arc, hppa, i386 using ELF, i860, iq2000, m68k, or32,
+s390, sparc, tic4x, tic80 and xtensa, the first expression is the
+alignment request in bytes.  For example '.align 8' advances the
+location counter until it is a multiple of 8.  If the location counter
+is already a multiple of 8, no change is needed.  For the tic54x, the
+first expression is the alignment request in words.
+
+   For other systems, including the i386 using a.out format, and the arm
+and strongarm, it is the number of low-order zero bits the location
+counter must have after advancement.  For example '.align 3' advances
+the location counter until it a multiple of 8.  If the location counter
+is already a multiple of 8, no change is needed.
+
+   This inconsistency is due to the different behaviors of the various
+native assemblers for these systems which GAS must emulate.  GAS also
+provides '.balign' and '.p2align' directives, described later, which
+have a consistent behavior across all architectures (but are specific to
+GAS).
+
+7.3 '.ascii "STRING"'...
+========================
+
+'.ascii' expects zero or more string literals (*note Strings::)
+separated by commas.  It assembles each string (with no automatic
+trailing zero byte) into consecutive addresses.
+
+7.4 '.asciz "STRING"'...
+========================
+
+'.asciz' is just like '.ascii', but each string is followed by a zero
+byte.  The "z" in '.asciz' stands for "zero".
+
+7.5 '.balign[wl] ABS-EXPR, ABS-EXPR, ABS-EXPR'
+==============================================
+
+Pad the location counter (in the current subsection) to a particular
+storage boundary.  The first expression (which must be absolute) is the
+alignment request in bytes.  For example '.balign 8' advances the
+location counter until it is a multiple of 8.  If the location counter
+is already a multiple of 8, no change is needed.
+
+   The second expression (also absolute) gives the fill value to be
+stored in the padding bytes.  It (and the comma) may be omitted.  If it
+is omitted, the padding bytes are normally zero.  However, on some
+systems, if the section is marked as containing code and the fill value
+is omitted, the space is filled with no-op instructions.
+
+   The third expression is also absolute, and is also optional.  If it
+is present, it is the maximum number of bytes that should be skipped by
+this alignment directive.  If doing the alignment would require skipping
+more bytes than the specified maximum, then the alignment is not done at
+all.  You can omit the fill value (the second argument) entirely by
+simply using two commas after the required alignment; this can be useful
+if you want the alignment to be filled with no-op instructions when
+appropriate.
+
+   The '.balignw' and '.balignl' directives are variants of the
+'.balign' directive.  The '.balignw' directive treats the fill pattern
+as a two byte word value.  The '.balignl' directives treats the fill
+pattern as a four byte longword value.  For example, '.balignw 4,0x368d'
+will align to a multiple of 4.  If it skips two bytes, they will be
+filled in with the value 0x368d (the exact placement of the bytes
+depends upon the endianness of the processor).  If it skips 1 or 3
+bytes, the fill value is undefined.
+
+7.6 '.byte EXPRESSIONS'
+=======================
+
+'.byte' expects zero or more expressions, separated by commas.  Each
+expression is assembled into the next byte.
+
+7.7 '.comm SYMBOL , LENGTH '
+============================
+
+'.comm' declares a common symbol named SYMBOL.  When linking, a common
+symbol in one object file may be merged with a defined or common symbol
+of the same name in another object file.  If 'ld' does not see a
+definition for the symbol-just one or more common symbols-then it will
+allocate LENGTH bytes of uninitialized memory.  LENGTH must be an
+absolute expression.  If 'ld' sees multiple common symbols with the same
+name, and they do not all have the same size, it will allocate space
+using the largest size.
+
+   When using ELF, the '.comm' directive takes an optional third
+argument.  This is the desired alignment of the symbol, specified as a
+byte boundary (for example, an alignment of 16 means that the least
+significant 4 bits of the address should be zero).  The alignment must
+be an absolute expression, and it must be a power of two.  If 'ld'
+allocates uninitialized memory for the common symbol, it will use the
+alignment when placing the symbol.  If no alignment is specified, 'as'
+will set the alignment to the largest power of two less than or equal to
+the size of the symbol, up to a maximum of 16.
+
+7.8 '.cfi_startproc [simple]'
+=============================
+
+'.cfi_startproc' is used at the beginning of each function that should
+have an entry in '.eh_frame'.  It initializes some internal data
+structures.  Don't forget to close the function by '.cfi_endproc'.
+
+   Unless '.cfi_startproc' is used along with parameter 'simple' it also
+emits some architecture dependent initial CFI instructions.
+
+7.9 '.cfi_endproc'
+==================
+
+'.cfi_endproc' is used at the end of a function where it closes its
+unwind entry previously opened by '.cfi_startproc', and emits it to
+'.eh_frame'.
+
+7.10 '.cfi_personality ENCODING [, EXP]'
+========================================
+
+'.cfi_personality' defines personality routine and its encoding.
+ENCODING must be a constant determining how the personality should be
+encoded.  If it is 255 ('DW_EH_PE_omit'), second argument is not
+present, otherwise second argument should be a constant or a symbol
+name.  When using indirect encodings, the symbol provided should be the
+location where personality can be loaded from, not the personality
+routine itself.  The default after '.cfi_startproc' is '.cfi_personality
+0xff', no personality routine.
+
+7.11 '.cfi_lsda ENCODING [, EXP]'
+=================================
+
+'.cfi_lsda' defines LSDA and its encoding.  ENCODING must be a constant
+determining how the LSDA should be encoded.  If it is 255
+('DW_EH_PE_omit'), second argument is not present, otherwise second
+argument should be a constant or a symbol name.  The default after
+'.cfi_startproc' is '.cfi_lsda 0xff', no LSDA.
+
+7.12 '.cfi_def_cfa REGISTER, OFFSET'
+====================================
+
+'.cfi_def_cfa' defines a rule for computing CFA as: take address from
+REGISTER and add OFFSET to it.
+
+7.13 '.cfi_def_cfa_register REGISTER'
+=====================================
+
+'.cfi_def_cfa_register' modifies a rule for computing CFA. From now on
+REGISTER will be used instead of the old one.  Offset remains the same.
+
+7.14 '.cfi_def_cfa_offset OFFSET'
+=================================
+
+'.cfi_def_cfa_offset' modifies a rule for computing CFA. Register
+remains the same, but OFFSET is new.  Note that it is the absolute
+offset that will be added to a defined register to compute CFA address.
+
+7.15 '.cfi_adjust_cfa_offset OFFSET'
+====================================
+
+Same as '.cfi_def_cfa_offset' but OFFSET is a relative value that is
+added/substracted from the previous offset.
+
+7.16 '.cfi_offset REGISTER, OFFSET'
+===================================
+
+Previous value of REGISTER is saved at offset OFFSET from CFA.
+
+7.17 '.cfi_rel_offset REGISTER, OFFSET'
+=======================================
+
+Previous value of REGISTER is saved at offset OFFSET from the current
+CFA register.  This is transformed to '.cfi_offset' using the known
+displacement of the CFA register from the CFA. This is often easier to
+use, because the number will match the code it's annotating.
+
+7.18 '.cfi_register REGISTER1, REGISTER2'
+=========================================
+
+Previous value of REGISTER1 is saved in register REGISTER2.
+
+7.19 '.cfi_restore REGISTER'
+============================
+
+'.cfi_restore' says that the rule for REGISTER is now the same as it was
+at the beginning of the function, after all initial instruction added by
+'.cfi_startproc' were executed.
+
+7.20 '.cfi_undefined REGISTER'
+==============================
+
+From now on the previous value of REGISTER can't be restored anymore.
+
+7.21 '.cfi_same_value REGISTER'
+===============================
+
+Current value of REGISTER is the same like in the previous frame, i.e.
+no restoration needed.
+
+7.22 '.cfi_remember_state',
+===========================
+
+First save all current rules for all registers by '.cfi_remember_state',
+then totally screw them up by subsequent '.cfi_*' directives and when
+everything is hopelessly bad, use '.cfi_restore_state' to restore the
+previous saved state.
+
+7.23 '.cfi_return_column REGISTER'
+==================================
+
+Change return column REGISTER, i.e.  the return address is either
+directly in REGISTER or can be accessed by rules for REGISTER.
+
+7.24 '.cfi_signal_frame'
+========================
+
+Mark current function as signal trampoline.
+
+7.25 '.cfi_window_save'
+=======================
+
+SPARC register window has been saved.
+
+7.26 '.cfi_escape' EXPRESSION[, ...]
+====================================
+
+Allows the user to add arbitrary bytes to the unwind info.  One might
+use this to add OS-specific CFI opcodes, or generic CFI opcodes that GAS
+does not yet support.
+
+7.27 '.file FILENO FILENAME'
+============================
+
+When emitting dwarf2 line number information '.file' assigns filenames
+to the '.debug_line' file name table.  The FILENO operand should be a
+unique positive integer to use as the index of the entry in the table.
+The FILENAME operand is a C string literal.
+
+   The detail of filename indices is exposed to the user because the
+filename table is shared with the '.debug_info' section of the dwarf2
+debugging information, and thus the user must know the exact indices
+that table entries will have.
+
+7.28 '.loc FILENO LINENO [COLUMN] [OPTIONS]'
+============================================
+
+The '.loc' directive will add row to the '.debug_line' line number
+matrix corresponding to the immediately following assembly instruction.
+The FILENO, LINENO, and optional COLUMN arguments will be applied to the
+'.debug_line' state machine before the row is added.
+
+   The OPTIONS are a sequence of the following tokens in any order:
+
+'basic_block'
+     This option will set the 'basic_block' register in the
+     '.debug_line' state machine to 'true'.
+
+'prologue_end'
+     This option will set the 'prologue_end' register in the
+     '.debug_line' state machine to 'true'.
+
+'epilogue_begin'
+     This option will set the 'epilogue_begin' register in the
+     '.debug_line' state machine to 'true'.
+
+'is_stmt VALUE'
+     This option will set the 'is_stmt' register in the '.debug_line'
+     state machine to 'value', which must be either 0 or 1.
+
+'isa VALUE'
+     This directive will set the 'isa' register in the '.debug_line'
+     state machine to VALUE, which must be an unsigned integer.
+
+7.29 '.loc_mark_blocks ENABLE'
+==============================
+
+The '.loc_mark_blocks' directive makes the assembler emit an entry to
+the '.debug_line' line number matrix with the 'basic_block' register in
+the state machine set whenever a code label is seen.  The ENABLE
+argument should be either 1 or 0, to enable or disable this function
+respectively.
+
+7.30 '.data SUBSECTION'
+=======================
+
+'.data' tells 'as' to assemble the following statements onto the end of
+the data subsection numbered SUBSECTION (which is an absolute
+expression).  If SUBSECTION is omitted, it defaults to zero.
+
+7.31 '.double FLONUMS'
+======================
+
+'.double' expects zero or more flonums, separated by commas.  It
+assembles floating point numbers.
+
+7.32 '.eject'
+=============
+
+Force a page break at this point, when generating assembly listings.
+
+7.33 '.else'
+============
+
+'.else' is part of the 'as' support for conditional assembly; see *note
+'.if': If.  It marks the beginning of a section of code to be assembled
+if the condition for the preceding '.if' was false.
+
+7.34 '.elseif'
+==============
+
+'.elseif' is part of the 'as' support for conditional assembly; see
+*note '.if': If.  It is shorthand for beginning a new '.if' block that
+would otherwise fill the entire '.else' section.
+
+7.35 '.end'
+===========
+
+'.end' marks the end of the assembly file.  'as' does not process
+anything in the file past the '.end' directive.
+
+7.36 '.endfunc'
+===============
+
+'.endfunc' marks the end of a function specified with '.func'.
+
+7.37 '.endif'
+=============
+
+'.endif' is part of the 'as' support for conditional assembly; it marks
+the end of a block of code that is only assembled conditionally.  *Note
+'.if': If.
+
+7.38 '.equ SYMBOL, EXPRESSION'
+==============================
+
+This directive sets the value of SYMBOL to EXPRESSION.  It is synonymous
+with '.set'; see *note '.set': Set.
+
+7.39 '.equiv SYMBOL, EXPRESSION'
+================================
+
+The '.equiv' directive is like '.equ' and '.set', except that the
+assembler will signal an error if SYMBOL is already defined.  Note a
+symbol which has been referenced but not actually defined is considered
+to be undefined.
+
+   Except for the contents of the error message, this is roughly
+equivalent to
+     .ifdef SYM
+     .err
+     .endif
+     .equ SYM,VAL
+   plus it protects the symbol from later redefinition.
+
+7.40 '.eqv SYMBOL, EXPRESSION'
+==============================
+
+The '.eqv' directive is like '.equiv', but no attempt is made to
+evaluate the expression or any part of it immediately.  Instead each
+time the resulting symbol is used in an expression, a snapshot of its
+current value is taken.
+
+7.41 '.err'
+===========
+
+If 'as' assembles a '.err' directive, it will print an error message
+and, unless the '-Z' option was used, it will not generate an object
+file.  This can be used to signal an error in conditionally compiled
+code.
+
+7.42 '.error "STRING"'
+======================
+
+Similarly to '.err', this directive emits an error, but you can specify
+a string that will be emitted as the error message.  If you don't
+specify the message, it defaults to '".error directive invoked in source
+file"'.  *Note Error and Warning Messages: Errors.
+
+      .error "This code has not been assembled and tested."
+
+7.43 '.exitm'
+=============
+
+Exit early from the current macro definition.  *Note Macro::.
+
+7.44 '.extern'
+==============
+
+'.extern' is accepted in the source program--for compatibility with
+other assemblers--but it is ignored.  'as' treats all undefined symbols
+as external.
+
+7.45 '.fail EXPRESSION'
+=======================
+
+Generates an error or a warning.  If the value of the EXPRESSION is 500
+or more, 'as' will print a warning message.  If the value is less than
+500, 'as' will print an error message.  The message will include the
+value of EXPRESSION.  This can occasionally be useful inside complex
+nested macros or conditional assembly.
+
+7.46 '.file STRING'
+===================
+
+'.file' tells 'as' that we are about to start a new logical file.
+STRING is the new file name.  In general, the filename is recognized
+whether or not it is surrounded by quotes '"'; but if you wish to
+specify an empty file name, you must give the quotes-'""'.  This
+statement may go away in future: it is only recognized to be compatible
+with old 'as' programs.
+
+7.47 '.fill REPEAT , SIZE , VALUE'
+==================================
+
+REPEAT, SIZE and VALUE are absolute expressions.  This emits REPEAT
+copies of SIZE bytes.  REPEAT may be zero or more.  SIZE may be zero or
+more, but if it is more than 8, then it is deemed to have the value 8,
+compatible with other people's assemblers.  The contents of each REPEAT
+bytes is taken from an 8-byte number.  The highest order 4 bytes are
+zero.  The lowest order 4 bytes are VALUE rendered in the byte-order of
+an integer on the computer 'as' is assembling for.  Each SIZE bytes in a
+repetition is taken from the lowest order SIZE bytes of this number.
+Again, this bizarre behavior is compatible with other people's
+assemblers.
+
+   SIZE and VALUE are optional.  If the second comma and VALUE are
+absent, VALUE is assumed zero.  If the first comma and following tokens
+are absent, SIZE is assumed to be 1.
+
+7.48 '.float FLONUMS'
+=====================
+
+This directive assembles zero or more flonums, separated by commas.  It
+has the same effect as '.single'.
+
+7.49 '.func NAME[,LABEL]'
+=========================
+
+'.func' emits debugging information to denote function NAME, and is
+ignored unless the file is assembled with debugging enabled.  Only
+'--gstabs[+]' is currently supported.  LABEL is the entry point of the
+function and if omitted NAME prepended with the 'leading char' is used.
+'leading char' is usually '_' or nothing, depending on the target.  All
+functions are currently defined to have 'void' return type.  The
+function must be terminated with '.endfunc'.
+
+7.50 '.global SYMBOL', '.globl SYMBOL'
+======================================
+
+'.global' makes the symbol visible to 'ld'.  If you define SYMBOL in
+your partial program, its value is made available to other partial
+programs that are linked with it.  Otherwise, SYMBOL takes its
+attributes from a symbol of the same name from another file linked into
+the same program.
+
+   Both spellings ('.globl' and '.global') are accepted, for
+compatibility with other assemblers.
+
+7.51 '.hidden NAMES'
+====================
+
+This is one of the ELF visibility directives.  The other two are
+'.internal' (*note '.internal': Internal.) and '.protected' (*note
+'.protected': Protected.).
+
+   This directive overrides the named symbols default visibility (which
+is set by their binding: local, global or weak).  The directive sets the
+visibility to 'hidden' which means that the symbols are not visible to
+other components.  Such symbols are always considered to be 'protected'
+as well.
+
+7.52 '.hword EXPRESSIONS'
+=========================
+
+This expects zero or more EXPRESSIONS, and emits a 16 bit number for
+each.
+
+   This directive is a synonym for '.short'.
+
+7.53 '.ident'
+=============
+
+This directive is used by some assemblers to place tags in object files.
+The behavior of this directive varies depending on the target.  When
+using the a.out object file format, 'as' simply accepts the directive
+for source-file compatibility with existing assemblers, but does not
+emit anything for it.  When using COFF, comments are emitted to the
+'.comment' or '.rdata' section, depending on the target.  When using
+ELF, comments are emitted to the '.comment' section.
+
+7.54 '.if ABSOLUTE EXPRESSION'
+==============================
+
+'.if' marks the beginning of a section of code which is only considered
+part of the source program being assembled if the argument (which must
+be an ABSOLUTE EXPRESSION) is non-zero.  The end of the conditional
+section of code must be marked by '.endif' (*note '.endif': Endif.);
+optionally, you may include code for the alternative condition, flagged
+by '.else' (*note '.else': Else.).  If you have several conditions to
+check, '.elseif' may be used to avoid nesting blocks if/else within each
+subsequent '.else' block.
+
+   The following variants of '.if' are also supported:
+'.ifdef SYMBOL'
+     Assembles the following section of code if the specified SYMBOL has
+     been defined.  Note a symbol which has been referenced but not yet
+     defined is considered to be undefined.
+
+'.ifb TEXT'
+     Assembles the following section of code if the operand is blank
+     (empty).
+
+'.ifc STRING1,STRING2'
+     Assembles the following section of code if the two strings are the
+     same.  The strings may be optionally quoted with single quotes.  If
+     they are not quoted, the first string stops at the first comma, and
+     the second string stops at the end of the line.  Strings which
+     contain whitespace should be quoted.  The string comparison is case
+     sensitive.
+
+'.ifeq ABSOLUTE EXPRESSION'
+     Assembles the following section of code if the argument is zero.
+
+'.ifeqs STRING1,STRING2'
+     Another form of '.ifc'.  The strings must be quoted using double
+     quotes.
+
+'.ifge ABSOLUTE EXPRESSION'
+     Assembles the following section of code if the argument is greater
+     than or equal to zero.
+
+'.ifgt ABSOLUTE EXPRESSION'
+     Assembles the following section of code if the argument is greater
+     than zero.
+
+'.ifle ABSOLUTE EXPRESSION'
+     Assembles the following section of code if the argument is less
+     than or equal to zero.
+
+'.iflt ABSOLUTE EXPRESSION'
+     Assembles the following section of code if the argument is less
+     than zero.
+
+'.ifnb TEXT'
+     Like '.ifb', but the sense of the test is reversed: this assembles
+     the following section of code if the operand is non-blank
+     (non-empty).
+
+'.ifnc STRING1,STRING2.'
+     Like '.ifc', but the sense of the test is reversed: this assembles
+     the following section of code if the two strings are not the same.
+
+'.ifndef SYMBOL'
+'.ifnotdef SYMBOL'
+     Assembles the following section of code if the specified SYMBOL has
+     not been defined.  Both spelling variants are equivalent.  Note a
+     symbol which has been referenced but not yet defined is considered
+     to be undefined.
+
+'.ifne ABSOLUTE EXPRESSION'
+     Assembles the following section of code if the argument is not
+     equal to zero (in other words, this is equivalent to '.if').
+
+'.ifnes STRING1,STRING2'
+     Like '.ifeqs', but the sense of the test is reversed: this
+     assembles the following section of code if the two strings are not
+     the same.
+
+7.55 '.incbin "FILE"[,SKIP[,COUNT]]'
+====================================
+
+The 'incbin' directive includes FILE verbatim at the current location.
+You can control the search paths used with the '-I' command-line option
+(*note Command-Line Options: Invoking.).  Quotation marks are required
+around FILE.
+
+   The SKIP argument skips a number of bytes from the start of the FILE.
+The COUNT argument indicates the maximum number of bytes to read.  Note
+that the data is not aligned in any way, so it is the user's
+responsibility to make sure that proper alignment is provided both
+before and after the 'incbin' directive.
+
+7.56 '.include "FILE"'
+======================
+
+This directive provides a way to include supporting files at specified
+points in your source program.  The code from FILE is assembled as if it
+followed the point of the '.include'; when the end of the included file
+is reached, assembly of the original file continues.  You can control
+the search paths used with the '-I' command-line option (*note
+Command-Line Options: Invoking.).  Quotation marks are required around
+FILE.
+
+7.57 '.int EXPRESSIONS'
+=======================
+
+Expect zero or more EXPRESSIONS, of any section, separated by commas.
+For each expression, emit a number that, at run time, is the value of
+that expression.  The byte order and bit size of the number depends on
+what kind of target the assembly is for.
+
+7.58 '.internal NAMES'
+======================
+
+This is one of the ELF visibility directives.  The other two are
+'.hidden' (*note '.hidden': Hidden.) and '.protected' (*note
+'.protected': Protected.).
+
+   This directive overrides the named symbols default visibility (which
+is set by their binding: local, global or weak).  The directive sets the
+visibility to 'internal' which means that the symbols are considered to
+be 'hidden' (i.e., not visible to other components), and that some
+extra, processor specific processing must also be performed upon the
+symbols as well.
+
+7.59 '.irp SYMBOL,VALUES'...
+============================
+
+Evaluate a sequence of statements assigning different values to SYMBOL.
+The sequence of statements starts at the '.irp' directive, and is
+terminated by an '.endr' directive.  For each VALUE, SYMBOL is set to
+VALUE, and the sequence of statements is assembled.  If no VALUE is
+listed, the sequence of statements is assembled once, with SYMBOL set to
+the null string.  To refer to SYMBOL within the sequence of statements,
+use \SYMBOL.
+
+   For example, assembling
+
+             .irp    param,1,2,3
+             move    d\param,sp@-
+             .endr
+
+   is equivalent to assembling
+
+             move    d1,sp@-
+             move    d2,sp@-
+             move    d3,sp@-
+
+   For some caveats with the spelling of SYMBOL, see also *note Macro::.
+
+7.60 '.irpc SYMBOL,VALUES'...
+=============================
+
+Evaluate a sequence of statements assigning different values to SYMBOL.
+The sequence of statements starts at the '.irpc' directive, and is
+terminated by an '.endr' directive.  For each character in VALUE, SYMBOL
+is set to the character, and the sequence of statements is assembled.
+If no VALUE is listed, the sequence of statements is assembled once,
+with SYMBOL set to the null string.  To refer to SYMBOL within the
+sequence of statements, use \SYMBOL.
+
+   For example, assembling
+
+             .irpc    param,123
+             move    d\param,sp@-
+             .endr
+
+   is equivalent to assembling
+
+             move    d1,sp@-
+             move    d2,sp@-
+             move    d3,sp@-
+
+   For some caveats with the spelling of SYMBOL, see also the discussion
+at *Note Macro::.
+
+7.61 '.lcomm SYMBOL , LENGTH'
+=============================
+
+Reserve LENGTH (an absolute expression) bytes for a local common denoted
+by SYMBOL.  The section and value of SYMBOL are those of the new local
+common.  The addresses are allocated in the bss section, so that at
+run-time the bytes start off zeroed.  SYMBOL is not declared global
+(*note '.global': Global.), so is normally not visible to 'ld'.
+
+7.62 '.lflags'
+==============
+
+'as' accepts this directive, for compatibility with other assemblers,
+but ignores it.
+
+7.63 '.line LINE-NUMBER'
+========================
+
+Even though this is a directive associated with the 'a.out' or 'b.out'
+object-code formats, 'as' still recognizes it when producing COFF
+output, and treats '.line' as though it were the COFF '.ln' _if_ it is
+found outside a '.def'/'.endef' pair.
+
+   Inside a '.def', '.line' is, instead, one of the directives used by
+compilers to generate auxiliary symbol information for debugging.
+
+7.64 '.linkonce [TYPE]'
+=======================
+
+Mark the current section so that the linker only includes a single copy
+of it.  This may be used to include the same section in several
+different object files, but ensure that the linker will only include it
+once in the final output file.  The '.linkonce' pseudo-op must be used
+for each instance of the section.  Duplicate sections are detected based
+on the section name, so it should be unique.
+
+   This directive is only supported by a few object file formats; as of
+this writing, the only object file format which supports it is the
+Portable Executable format used on Windows NT.
+
+   The TYPE argument is optional.  If specified, it must be one of the
+following strings.  For example:
+     .linkonce same_size
+   Not all types may be supported on all object file formats.
+
+'discard'
+     Silently discard duplicate sections.  This is the default.
+
+'one_only'
+     Warn if there are duplicate sections, but still keep only one copy.
+
+'same_size'
+     Warn if any of the duplicates have different sizes.
+
+'same_contents'
+     Warn if any of the duplicates do not have exactly the same
+     contents.
+
+7.65 '.ln LINE-NUMBER'
+======================
+
+'.ln' is a synonym for '.line'.
+
+7.66 '.mri VAL'
+===============
+
+If VAL is non-zero, this tells 'as' to enter MRI mode.  If VAL is zero,
+this tells 'as' to exit MRI mode.  This change affects code assembled
+until the next '.mri' directive, or until the end of the file.  *Note
+MRI mode: M.
+
+7.67 '.list'
+============
+
+Control (in conjunction with the '.nolist' directive) whether or not
+assembly listings are generated.  These two directives maintain an
+internal counter (which is zero initially).  '.list' increments the
+counter, and '.nolist' decrements it.  Assembly listings are generated
+whenever the counter is greater than zero.
+
+   By default, listings are disabled.  When you enable them (with the
+'-a' command line option; *note Command-Line Options: Invoking.), the
+initial value of the listing counter is one.
+
+7.68 '.long EXPRESSIONS'
+========================
+
+'.long' is the same as '.int'.  *Note '.int': Int.
+
+7.69 '.macro'
+=============
+
+The commands '.macro' and '.endm' allow you to define macros that
+generate assembly output.  For example, this definition specifies a
+macro 'sum' that puts a sequence of numbers into memory:
+
+             .macro  sum from=0, to=5
+             .long   \from
+             .if     \to-\from
+             sum     "(\from+1)",\to
+             .endif
+             .endm
+
+With that definition, 'SUM 0,5' is equivalent to this assembly input:
+
+             .long   0
+             .long   1
+             .long   2
+             .long   3
+             .long   4
+             .long   5
+
+'.macro MACNAME'
+'.macro MACNAME MACARGS ...'
+     Begin the definition of a macro called MACNAME.  If your macro
+     definition requires arguments, specify their names after the macro
+     name, separated by commas or spaces.  You can qualify the macro
+     argument to indicate whether all invocations must specify a
+     non-blank value (through ':'req''), or whether it takes all of the
+     remaining arguments (through ':'vararg'').  You can supply a
+     default value for any macro argument by following the name with
+     '=DEFLT'.  You cannot define two macros with the same MACNAME
+     unless it has been subject to the '.purgem' directive (*note
+     Purgem::) between the two definitions.  For example, these are all
+     valid '.macro' statements:
+
+     '.macro comm'
+          Begin the definition of a macro called 'comm', which takes no
+          arguments.
+
+     '.macro plus1 p, p1'
+     '.macro plus1 p p1'
+          Either statement begins the definition of a macro called
+          'plus1', which takes two arguments; within the macro
+          definition, write '\p' or '\p1' to evaluate the arguments.
+
+     '.macro reserve_str p1=0 p2'
+          Begin the definition of a macro called 'reserve_str', with two
+          arguments.  The first argument has a default value, but not
+          the second.  After the definition is complete, you can call
+          the macro either as 'reserve_str A,B' (with '\p1' evaluating
+          to A and '\p2' evaluating to B), or as 'reserve_str ,B' (with
+          '\p1' evaluating as the default, in this case '0', and '\p2'
+          evaluating to B).
+
+     '.macro m p1:req, p2=0, p3:vararg'
+          Begin the definition of a macro called 'm', with at least
+          three arguments.  The first argument must always have a value
+          specified, but not the second, which instead has a default
+          value.  The third formal will get assigned all remaining
+          arguments specified at invocation time.
+
+          When you call a macro, you can specify the argument values
+          either by position, or by keyword.  For example, 'sum 9,17' is
+          equivalent to 'sum to=17, from=9'.
+
+     Note that since each of the MACARGS can be an identifier exactly as
+     any other one permitted by the target architecture, there may be
+     occasional problems if the target hand-crafts special meanings to
+     certain characters when they occur in a special position.  For
+     example, if the colon (':') is generally permitted to be part of a
+     symbol name, but the architecture specific code special-cases it
+     when occurring as the final character of a symbol (to denote a
+     label), then the macro parameter replacement code will have no way
+     of knowing that and consider the whole construct (including the
+     colon) an identifier, and check only this identifier for being the
+     subject to parameter substitution.  So for example this macro
+     definition:
+
+          	.macro label l
+          \l:
+          	.endm
+
+     might not work as expected.  Invoking 'label foo' might not create
+     a label called 'foo' but instead just insert the text '\l:' into
+     the assembler source, probably generating an error about an
+     unrecognised identifier.
+
+     Similarly problems might occur with the period character ('.')
+     which is often allowed inside opcode names (and hence identifier
+     names).  So for example constructing a macro to build an opcode
+     from a base name and a length specifier like this:
+
+          	.macro opcode base length
+                  \base.\length
+          	.endm
+
+     and invoking it as 'opcode store l' will not create a 'store.l'
+     instruction but instead generate some kind of error as the
+     assembler tries to interpret the text '\base.\length'.
+
+     There are several possible ways around this problem:
+
+     'Insert white space'
+          If it is possible to use white space characters then this is
+          the simplest solution.  eg:
+
+               	.macro label l
+               \l :
+               	.endm
+
+     'Use '\()''
+          The string '\()' can be used to separate the end of a macro
+          argument from the following text.  eg:
+
+               	.macro opcode base length
+                       \base\().\length
+               	.endm
+
+     'Use the alternate macro syntax mode'
+          In the alternative macro syntax mode the ampersand character
+          ('&') can be used as a separator.  eg:
+
+               	.altmacro
+               	.macro label l
+               l&:
+               	.endm
+
+     Note: this problem of correctly identifying string parameters to
+     pseudo ops also applies to the identifiers used in '.irp' (*note
+     Irp::) and '.irpc' (*note Irpc::) as well.
+
+'.endm'
+     Mark the end of a macro definition.
+
+'.exitm'
+     Exit early from the current macro definition.
+
+'\@'
+     'as' maintains a counter of how many macros it has executed in this
+     pseudo-variable; you can copy that number to your output with '\@',
+     but _only within a macro definition_.
+
+'LOCAL NAME [ , ... ]'
+     _Warning: 'LOCAL' is only available if you select "alternate macro
+     syntax" with '--alternate' or '.altmacro'._  *Note '.altmacro':
+     Altmacro.
+
+7.70 '.altmacro'
+================
+
+Enable alternate macro mode, enabling:
+
+'LOCAL NAME [ , ... ]'
+     One additional directive, 'LOCAL', is available.  It is used to
+     generate a string replacement for each of the NAME arguments, and
+     replace any instances of NAME in each macro expansion.  The
+     replacement string is unique in the assembly, and different for
+     each separate macro expansion.  'LOCAL' allows you to write macros
+     that define symbols, without fear of conflict between separate
+     macro expansions.
+
+'String delimiters'
+     You can write strings delimited in these other ways besides
+     '"STRING"':
+
+     ''STRING''
+          You can delimit strings with single-quote characters.
+
+     '<STRING>'
+          You can delimit strings with matching angle brackets.
+
+'single-character string escape'
+     To include any single character literally in a string (even if the
+     character would otherwise have some special meaning), you can
+     prefix the character with '!' (an exclamation mark).  For example,
+     you can write '<4.3 !> 5.4!!>' to get the literal text '4.3 >
+     5.4!'.
+
+'Expression results as strings'
+     You can write '%EXPR' to evaluate the expression EXPR and use the
+     result as a string.
+
+7.71 '.noaltmacro'
+==================
+
+Disable alternate macro mode.  *Note Altmacro::.
+
+7.72 '.nolist'
+==============
+
+Control (in conjunction with the '.list' directive) whether or not
+assembly listings are generated.  These two directives maintain an
+internal counter (which is zero initially).  '.list' increments the
+counter, and '.nolist' decrements it.  Assembly listings are generated
+whenever the counter is greater than zero.
+
+7.73 '.octa BIGNUMS'
+====================
+
+This directive expects zero or more bignums, separated by commas.  For
+each bignum, it emits a 16-byte integer.
+
+   The term "octa" comes from contexts in which a "word" is two bytes;
+hence _octa_-word for 16 bytes.
+
+7.74 '.org NEW-LC , FILL'
+=========================
+
+Advance the location counter of the current section to NEW-LC.  NEW-LC
+is either an absolute expression or an expression with the same section
+as the current subsection.  That is, you can't use '.org' to cross
+sections: if NEW-LC has the wrong section, the '.org' directive is
+ignored.  To be compatible with former assemblers, if the section of
+NEW-LC is absolute, 'as' issues a warning, then pretends the section of
+NEW-LC is the same as the current subsection.
+
+   '.org' may only increase the location counter, or leave it unchanged;
+you cannot use '.org' to move the location counter backwards.
+
+   Because 'as' tries to assemble programs in one pass, NEW-LC may not
+be undefined.  If you really detest this restriction we eagerly await a
+chance to share your improved assembler.
+
+   Beware that the origin is relative to the start of the section, not
+to the start of the subsection.  This is compatible with other people's
+assemblers.
+
+   When the location counter (of the current subsection) is advanced,
+the intervening bytes are filled with FILL which should be an absolute
+expression.  If the comma and FILL are omitted, FILL defaults to zero.
+
+7.75 '.p2align[wl] ABS-EXPR, ABS-EXPR, ABS-EXPR'
+================================================
+
+Pad the location counter (in the current subsection) to a particular
+storage boundary.  The first expression (which must be absolute) is the
+number of low-order zero bits the location counter must have after
+advancement.  For example '.p2align 3' advances the location counter
+until it a multiple of 8.  If the location counter is already a multiple
+of 8, no change is needed.
+
+   The second expression (also absolute) gives the fill value to be
+stored in the padding bytes.  It (and the comma) may be omitted.  If it
+is omitted, the padding bytes are normally zero.  However, on some
+systems, if the section is marked as containing code and the fill value
+is omitted, the space is filled with no-op instructions.
+
+   The third expression is also absolute, and is also optional.  If it
+is present, it is the maximum number of bytes that should be skipped by
+this alignment directive.  If doing the alignment would require skipping
+more bytes than the specified maximum, then the alignment is not done at
+all.  You can omit the fill value (the second argument) entirely by
+simply using two commas after the required alignment; this can be useful
+if you want the alignment to be filled with no-op instructions when
+appropriate.
+
+   The '.p2alignw' and '.p2alignl' directives are variants of the
+'.p2align' directive.  The '.p2alignw' directive treats the fill pattern
+as a two byte word value.  The '.p2alignl' directives treats the fill
+pattern as a four byte longword value.  For example, '.p2alignw
+2,0x368d' will align to a multiple of 4.  If it skips two bytes, they
+will be filled in with the value 0x368d (the exact placement of the
+bytes depends upon the endianness of the processor).  If it skips 1 or 3
+bytes, the fill value is undefined.
+
+7.76 '.previous'
+================
+
+This is one of the ELF section stack manipulation directives.  The
+others are '.section' (*note Section::), '.subsection' (*note
+SubSection::), '.pushsection' (*note PushSection::), and '.popsection'
+(*note PopSection::).
+
+   This directive swaps the current section (and subsection) with most
+recently referenced section (and subsection) prior to this one.
+Multiple '.previous' directives in a row will flip between two sections
+(and their subsections).
+
+   In terms of the section stack, this directive swaps the current
+section with the top section on the section stack.
+
+7.77 '.popsection'
+==================
+
+This is one of the ELF section stack manipulation directives.  The
+others are '.section' (*note Section::), '.subsection' (*note
+SubSection::), '.pushsection' (*note PushSection::), and '.previous'
+(*note Previous::).
+
+   This directive replaces the current section (and subsection) with the
+top section (and subsection) on the section stack.  This section is
+popped off the stack.
+
+7.78 '.print STRING'
+====================
+
+'as' will print STRING on the standard output during assembly.  You must
+put STRING in double quotes.
+
+7.79 '.protected NAMES'
+=======================
+
+This is one of the ELF visibility directives.  The other two are
+'.hidden' (*note Hidden::) and '.internal' (*note Internal::).
+
+   This directive overrides the named symbols default visibility (which
+is set by their binding: local, global or weak).  The directive sets the
+visibility to 'protected' which means that any references to the symbols
+from within the components that defines them must be resolved to the
+definition in that component, even if a definition in another component
+would normally preempt this.
+
+7.80 '.psize LINES , COLUMNS'
+=============================
+
+Use this directive to declare the number of lines--and, optionally, the
+number of columns--to use for each page, when generating listings.
+
+   If you do not use '.psize', listings use a default line-count of 60.
+You may omit the comma and COLUMNS specification; the default width is
+200 columns.
+
+   'as' generates formfeeds whenever the specified number of lines is
+exceeded (or whenever you explicitly request one, using '.eject').
+
+   If you specify LINES as '0', no formfeeds are generated save those
+explicitly specified with '.eject'.
+
+7.81 '.purgem NAME'
+===================
+
+Undefine the macro NAME, so that later uses of the string will not be
+expanded.  *Note Macro::.
+
+7.82 '.pushsection NAME , SUBSECTION'
+=====================================
+
+This is one of the ELF section stack manipulation directives.  The
+others are '.section' (*note Section::), '.subsection' (*note
+SubSection::), '.popsection' (*note PopSection::), and '.previous'
+(*note Previous::).
+
+   This directive pushes the current section (and subsection) onto the
+top of the section stack, and then replaces the current section and
+subsection with 'name' and 'subsection'.
+
+7.83 '.quad BIGNUMS'
+====================
+
+'.quad' expects zero or more bignums, separated by commas.  For each
+bignum, it emits an 8-byte integer.  If the bignum won't fit in 8 bytes,
+it prints a warning message; and just takes the lowest order 8 bytes of
+the bignum.
+
+   The term "quad" comes from contexts in which a "word" is two bytes;
+hence _quad_-word for 8 bytes.
+
+7.84 '.reloc OFFSET, RELOC_NAME[, EXPRESSION]'
+==============================================
+
+Generate a relocation at OFFSET of type RELOC_NAME with value
+EXPRESSION.  If OFFSET is a number, the relocation is generated in the
+current section.  If OFFSET is an expression that resolves to a symbol
+plus offset, the relocation is generated in the given symbol's section.
+EXPRESSION, if present, must resolve to a symbol plus addend or to an
+absolute value, but note that not all targets support an addend.  e.g.
+ELF REL targets such as i386 store an addend in the section contents
+rather than in the relocation.  This low level interface does not
+support addends stored in the section.
+
+7.85 '.rept COUNT'
+==================
+
+Repeat the sequence of lines between the '.rept' directive and the next
+'.endr' directive COUNT times.
+
+   For example, assembling
+
+             .rept   3
+             .long   0
+             .endr
+
+   is equivalent to assembling
+
+             .long   0
+             .long   0
+             .long   0
+
+7.86 '.sbttl "SUBHEADING"'
+==========================
+
+Use SUBHEADING as the title (third line, immediately after the title
+line) when generating assembly listings.
+
+   This directive affects subsequent pages, as well as the current page
+if it appears within ten lines of the top of a page.
+
+7.87 '.section NAME'
+====================
+
+Use the '.section' directive to assemble the following code into a
+section named NAME.
+
+   This directive is only supported for targets that actually support
+arbitrarily named sections; on 'a.out' targets, for example, it is not
+accepted, even with a standard 'a.out' section name.
+
+   This is one of the ELF section stack manipulation directives.  The
+others are '.subsection' (*note SubSection::), '.pushsection' (*note
+PushSection::), '.popsection' (*note PopSection::), and '.previous'
+(*note Previous::).
+
+   For ELF targets, the '.section' directive is used like this:
+
+     .section NAME [, "FLAGS"[, @TYPE[,FLAG_SPECIFIC_ARGUMENTS]]]
+
+   The optional FLAGS argument is a quoted string which may contain any
+combination of the following characters:
+'a'
+     section is allocatable
+'w'
+     section is writable
+'x'
+     section is executable
+'M'
+     section is mergeable
+'S'
+     section contains zero terminated strings
+'G'
+     section is a member of a section group
+'T'
+     section is used for thread-local-storage
+
+   The optional TYPE argument may contain one of the following
+constants:
+'@progbits'
+     section contains data
+'@nobits'
+     section does not contain data (i.e., section only occupies space)
+'@note'
+     section contains data which is used by things other than the
+     program
+'@init_array'
+     section contains an array of pointers to init functions
+'@fini_array'
+     section contains an array of pointers to finish functions
+'@preinit_array'
+     section contains an array of pointers to pre-init functions
+
+   Many targets only support the first three section types.
+
+   Note on targets where the '@' character is the start of a comment (eg
+ARM) then another character is used instead.  For example the ARM port
+uses the '%' character.
+
+   If FLAGS contains the 'M' symbol then the TYPE argument must be
+specified as well as an extra argument--ENTSIZE--like this:
+
+     .section NAME , "FLAGS"M, @TYPE, ENTSIZE
+
+   Sections with the 'M' flag but not 'S' flag must contain fixed size
+constants, each ENTSIZE octets long.  Sections with both 'M' and 'S'
+must contain zero terminated strings where each character is ENTSIZE
+bytes long.  The linker may remove duplicates within sections with the
+same name, same entity size and same flags.  ENTSIZE must be an absolute
+expression.
+
+   If FLAGS contains the 'G' symbol then the TYPE argument must be
+present along with an additional field like this:
+
+     .section NAME , "FLAGS"G, @TYPE, GROUPNAME[, LINKAGE]
+
+   The GROUPNAME field specifies the name of the section group to which
+this particular section belongs.  The optional linkage field can
+contain:
+'comdat'
+     indicates that only one copy of this section should be retained
+'.gnu.linkonce'
+     an alias for comdat
+
+   Note: if both the M and G flags are present then the fields for the
+Merge flag should come first, like this:
+
+     .section NAME , "FLAGS"MG, @TYPE, ENTSIZE, GROUPNAME[, LINKAGE]
+
+   If no flags are specified, the default flags depend upon the section
+name.  If the section name is not recognized, the default will be for
+the section to have none of the above flags: it will not be allocated in
+memory, nor writable, nor executable.  The section will contain data.
+
+   For ELF targets, the assembler supports another type of '.section'
+directive for compatibility with the Solaris assembler:
+
+     .section "NAME"[, FLAGS...]
+
+   Note that the section name is quoted.  There may be a sequence of
+comma separated flags:
+'#alloc'
+     section is allocatable
+'#write'
+     section is writable
+'#execinstr'
+     section is executable
+'#tls'
+     section is used for thread local storage
+
+   This directive replaces the current section and subsection.  See the
+contents of the gas testsuite directory 'gas/testsuite/gas/elf' for some
+examples of how this directive and the other section stack directives
+work.
+
+7.88 '.set SYMBOL, EXPRESSION'
+==============================
+
+Set the value of SYMBOL to EXPRESSION.  This changes SYMBOL's value and
+type to conform to EXPRESSION.  If SYMBOL was flagged as external, it
+remains flagged (*note Symbol Attributes::).
+
+   You may '.set' a symbol many times in the same assembly.
+
+   If you '.set' a global symbol, the value stored in the object file is
+the last value stored into it.
+
+7.89 '.short EXPRESSIONS'
+=========================
+
+This expects zero or more EXPRESSIONS, and emits a 16 bit number for
+each.
+
+7.90 '.single FLONUMS'
+======================
+
+This directive assembles zero or more flonums, separated by commas.  It
+has the same effect as '.float'.
+
+7.91 '.size'
+============
+
+This directive is used to set the size associated with a symbol.
+
+   For ELF targets, the '.size' directive is used like this:
+
+     .size NAME , EXPRESSION
+
+   This directive sets the size associated with a symbol NAME.  The size
+in bytes is computed from EXPRESSION which can make use of label
+arithmetic.  This directive is typically used to set the size of
+function symbols.
+
+7.92 '.sleb128 EXPRESSIONS'
+===========================
+
+SLEB128 stands for "signed little endian base 128."  This is a compact,
+variable length representation of numbers used by the DWARF symbolic
+debugging format.  *Note '.uleb128': Uleb128.
+
+7.93 '.skip SIZE , FILL'
+========================
+
+This directive emits SIZE bytes, each of value FILL.  Both SIZE and FILL
+are absolute expressions.  If the comma and FILL are omitted, FILL is
+assumed to be zero.  This is the same as '.space'.
+
+7.94 '.space SIZE , FILL'
+=========================
+
+This directive emits SIZE bytes, each of value FILL.  Both SIZE and FILL
+are absolute expressions.  If the comma and FILL are omitted, FILL is
+assumed to be zero.  This is the same as '.skip'.
+
+7.95 '.stabd, .stabn, .stabs'
+=============================
+
+There are three directives that begin '.stab'.  All emit symbols (*note
+Symbols::), for use by symbolic debuggers.  The symbols are not entered
+in the 'as' hash table: they cannot be referenced elsewhere in the
+source file.  Up to five fields are required:
+
+STRING
+     This is the symbol's name.  It may contain any character except
+     '\000', so is more general than ordinary symbol names.  Some
+     debuggers used to code arbitrarily complex structures into symbol
+     names using this field.
+
+TYPE
+     An absolute expression.  The symbol's type is set to the low 8 bits
+     of this expression.  Any bit pattern is permitted, but 'ld' and
+     debuggers choke on silly bit patterns.
+
+OTHER
+     An absolute expression.  The symbol's "other" attribute is set to
+     the low 8 bits of this expression.
+
+DESC
+     An absolute expression.  The symbol's descriptor is set to the low
+     16 bits of this expression.
+
+VALUE
+     An absolute expression which becomes the symbol's value.
+
+   If a warning is detected while reading a '.stabd', '.stabn', or
+'.stabs' statement, the symbol has probably already been created; you
+get a half-formed symbol in your object file.  This is compatible with
+earlier assemblers!
+
+'.stabd TYPE , OTHER , DESC'
+
+     The "name" of the symbol generated is not even an empty string.  It
+     is a null pointer, for compatibility.  Older assemblers used a null
+     pointer so they didn't waste space in object files with empty
+     strings.
+
+     The symbol's value is set to the location counter, relocatably.
+     When your program is linked, the value of this symbol is the
+     address of the location counter when the '.stabd' was assembled.
+
+'.stabn TYPE , OTHER , DESC , VALUE'
+     The name of the symbol is set to the empty string '""'.
+
+'.stabs STRING , TYPE , OTHER , DESC , VALUE'
+     All five fields are specified.
+
+7.96 '.string' "STR"
+====================
+
+Copy the characters in STR to the object file.  You may specify more
+than one string to copy, separated by commas.  Unless otherwise
+specified for a particular machine, the assembler marks the end of each
+string with a 0 byte.  You can use any of the escape sequences described
+in *note Strings: Strings.
+
+7.97 '.struct EXPRESSION'
+=========================
+
+Switch to the absolute section, and set the section offset to
+EXPRESSION, which must be an absolute expression.  You might use this as
+follows:
+             .struct 0
+     field1:
+             .struct field1 + 4
+     field2:
+             .struct field2 + 4
+     field3:
+   This would define the symbol 'field1' to have the value 0, the symbol
+'field2' to have the value 4, and the symbol 'field3' to have the value
+8.  Assembly would be left in the absolute section, and you would need
+to use a '.section' directive of some sort to change to some other
+section before further assembly.
+
+7.98 '.subsection NAME'
+=======================
+
+This is one of the ELF section stack manipulation directives.  The
+others are '.section' (*note Section::), '.pushsection' (*note
+PushSection::), '.popsection' (*note PopSection::), and '.previous'
+(*note Previous::).
+
+   This directive replaces the current subsection with 'name'.  The
+current section is not changed.  The replaced subsection is put onto the
+section stack in place of the then current top of stack subsection.
+
+7.99 '.symver'
+==============
+
+Use the '.symver' directive to bind symbols to specific version nodes
+within a source file.  This is only supported on ELF platforms, and is
+typically used when assembling files to be linked into a shared library.
+There are cases where it may make sense to use this in objects to be
+bound into an application itself so as to override a versioned symbol
+from a shared library.
+
+   For ELF targets, the '.symver' directive can be used like this:
+     .symver NAME, NAME2@NODENAME
+   If the symbol NAME is defined within the file being assembled, the
+'.symver' directive effectively creates a symbol alias with the name
+NAME2@NODENAME, and in fact the main reason that we just don't try and
+create a regular alias is that the @ character isn't permitted in symbol
+names.  The NAME2 part of the name is the actual name of the symbol by
+which it will be externally referenced.  The name NAME itself is merely
+a name of convenience that is used so that it is possible to have
+definitions for multiple versions of a function within a single source
+file, and so that the compiler can unambiguously know which version of a
+function is being mentioned.  The NODENAME portion of the alias should
+be the name of a node specified in the version script supplied to the
+linker when building a shared library.  If you are attempting to
+override a versioned symbol from a shared library, then NODENAME should
+correspond to the nodename of the symbol you are trying to override.
+
+   If the symbol NAME is not defined within the file being assembled,
+all references to NAME will be changed to NAME2@NODENAME.  If no
+reference to NAME is made, NAME2@NODENAME will be removed from the
+symbol table.
+
+   Another usage of the '.symver' directive is:
+     .symver NAME, NAME2@@NODENAME
+   In this case, the symbol NAME must exist and be defined within the
+file being assembled.  It is similar to NAME2@NODENAME.  The difference
+is NAME2@@NODENAME will also be used to resolve references to NAME2 by
+the linker.
+
+   The third usage of the '.symver' directive is:
+     .symver NAME, NAME2@@@NODENAME
+   When NAME is not defined within the file being assembled, it is
+treated as NAME2@NODENAME.  When NAME is defined within the file being
+assembled, the symbol name, NAME, will be changed to NAME2@@NODENAME.
+
+7.100 '.text SUBSECTION'
+========================
+
+Tells 'as' to assemble the following statements onto the end of the text
+subsection numbered SUBSECTION, which is an absolute expression.  If
+SUBSECTION is omitted, subsection number zero is used.
+
+7.101 '.title "HEADING"'
+========================
+
+Use HEADING as the title (second line, immediately after the source file
+name and pagenumber) when generating assembly listings.
+
+   This directive affects subsequent pages, as well as the current page
+if it appears within ten lines of the top of a page.
+
+7.102 '.type'
+=============
+
+This directive is used to set the type of a symbol.
+
+   For ELF targets, the '.type' directive is used like this:
+
+     .type NAME , TYPE DESCRIPTION
+
+   This sets the type of symbol NAME to be either a function symbol or
+an object symbol.  There are five different syntaxes supported for the
+TYPE DESCRIPTION field, in order to provide compatibility with various
+other assemblers.
+
+   Because some of the characters used in these syntaxes (such as '@'
+and '#') are comment characters for some architectures, some of the
+syntaxes below do not work on all architectures.  The first variant will
+be accepted by the GNU assembler on all architectures so that variant
+should be used for maximum portability, if you do not need to assemble
+your code with other assemblers.
+
+   The syntaxes supported are:
+
+       .type <name> STT_FUNCTION
+       .type <name> STT_OBJECT
+
+       .type <name>,#function
+       .type <name>,#object
+
+       .type <name>,@function
+       .type <name>,@object
+
+       .type <name>,%function
+       .type <name>,%object
+
+       .type <name>,"function"
+       .type <name>,"object"
+
+7.103 '.uleb128 EXPRESSIONS'
+============================
+
+ULEB128 stands for "unsigned little endian base 128."  This is a
+compact, variable length representation of numbers used by the DWARF
+symbolic debugging format.  *Note '.sleb128': Sleb128.
+
+7.104 '.version "STRING"'
+=========================
+
+This directive creates a '.note' section and places into it an ELF
+formatted note of type NT_VERSION. The note's name is set to 'string'.
+
+7.105 '.vtable_entry TABLE, OFFSET'
+===================================
+
+This directive finds or creates a symbol 'table' and creates a
+'VTABLE_ENTRY' relocation for it with an addend of 'offset'.
+
+7.106 '.vtable_inherit CHILD, PARENT'
+=====================================
+
+This directive finds the symbol 'child' and finds or creates the symbol
+'parent' and then creates a 'VTABLE_INHERIT' relocation for the parent
+whose addend is the value of the child symbol.  As a special case the
+parent name of '0' is treated as referring to the '*ABS*' section.
+
+7.107 '.warning "STRING"'
+=========================
+
+Similar to the directive '.error' (*note '.error "STRING"': Error.), but
+just emits a warning.
+
+7.108 '.weak NAMES'
+===================
+
+This directive sets the weak attribute on the comma separated list of
+symbol 'names'.  If the symbols do not already exist, they will be
+created.
+
+   On COFF targets other than PE, weak symbols are a GNU extension.
+This directive sets the weak attribute on the comma separated list of
+symbol 'names'.  If the symbols do not already exist, they will be
+created.
+
+   On the PE target, weak symbols are supported natively as weak
+aliases.  When a weak symbol is created that is not an alias, GAS
+creates an alternate symbol to hold the default value.
+
+7.109 '.weakref ALIAS, TARGET'
+==============================
+
+This directive creates an alias to the target symbol that enables the
+symbol to be referenced with weak-symbol semantics, but without actually
+making it weak.  If direct references or definitions of the symbol are
+present, then the symbol will not be weak, but if all references to it
+are through weak references, the symbol will be marked as weak in the
+symbol table.
+
+   The effect is equivalent to moving all references to the alias to a
+separate assembly source file, renaming the alias to the symbol in it,
+declaring the symbol as weak there, and running a reloadable link to
+merge the object files resulting from the assembly of the new source
+file and the old source file that had the references to the alias
+removed.
+
+   The alias itself never makes to the symbol table, and is entirely
+handled within the assembler.
+
+7.110 '.word EXPRESSIONS'
+=========================
+
+This directive expects zero or more EXPRESSIONS, of any section,
+separated by commas.  For each expression, 'as' emits a 32-bit number.
+
+7.111 Deprecated Directives
+===========================
+
+One day these directives won't work.  They are included for
+compatibility with older assemblers.
+.abort
+.line
+
+8 ARM Dependent Features
+************************
+
+8.1 Options
+===========
+
+'-mcpu=PROCESSOR[+EXTENSION...]'
+     This option specifies the target processor.  The assembler will
+     issue an error message if an attempt is made to assemble an
+     instruction which will not execute on the target processor.  The
+     following processor names are recognized: 'arm1', 'arm2', 'arm250',
+     'arm3', 'arm6', 'arm60', 'arm600', 'arm610', 'arm620', 'arm7',
+     'arm7m', 'arm7d', 'arm7dm', 'arm7di', 'arm7dmi', 'arm70', 'arm700',
+     'arm700i', 'arm710', 'arm710t', 'arm720', 'arm720t', 'arm740t',
+     'arm710c', 'arm7100', 'arm7500', 'arm7500fe', 'arm7t', 'arm7tdmi',
+     'arm7tdmi-s', 'arm8', 'arm810', 'strongarm', 'strongarm1',
+     'strongarm110', 'strongarm1100', 'strongarm1110', 'arm9', 'arm920',
+     'arm920t', 'arm922t', 'arm940t', 'arm9tdmi', 'arm9e', 'arm926e',
+     'arm926ej-s', 'arm946e-r0', 'arm946e', 'arm946e-s', 'arm966e-r0',
+     'arm966e', 'arm966e-s', 'arm968e-s', 'arm10t', 'arm10tdmi',
+     'arm10e', 'arm1020', 'arm1020t', 'arm1020e', 'arm1022e',
+     'arm1026ej-s', 'arm1136j-s', 'arm1136jf-s', 'arm1156t2-s',
+     'arm1156t2f-s', 'arm1176jz-s', 'arm1176jzf-s', 'mpcore',
+     'mpcorenovfp', 'cortex-a8', 'cortex-r4', 'cortex-m3', 'ep9312'
+     (ARM920 with Cirrus Maverick coprocessor), 'i80200' (Intel XScale
+     processor) 'iwmmxt' (Intel(r) XScale processor with Wireless
+     MMX(tm) technology coprocessor) and 'xscale'.  The special name
+     'all' may be used to allow the assembler to accept instructions
+     valid for any ARM processor.
+
+     In addition to the basic instruction set, the assembler can be told
+     to accept various extension mnemonics that extend the processor
+     using the co-processor instruction space.  For example,
+     '-mcpu=arm920+maverick' is equivalent to specifying '-mcpu=ep9312'.
+     The following extensions are currently supported: '+maverick'
+     '+iwmmxt' and '+xscale'.
+
+'-march=ARCHITECTURE[+EXTENSION...]'
+     This option specifies the target architecture.  The assembler will
+     issue an error message if an attempt is made to assemble an
+     instruction which will not execute on the target architecture.  The
+     following architecture names are recognized: 'armv1', 'armv2',
+     'armv2a', 'armv2s', 'armv3', 'armv3m', 'armv4', 'armv4xm',
+     'armv4t', 'armv4txm', 'armv5', 'armv5t', 'armv5txm', 'armv5te',
+     'armv5texp', 'armv6', 'armv6j', 'armv6k', 'armv6z', 'armv6zk',
+     'armv7', 'armv7-a', 'armv7-r', 'armv7-m', 'iwmmxt' and 'xscale'.
+     If both '-mcpu' and '-march' are specified, the assembler will use
+     the setting for '-mcpu'.
+
+     The architecture option can be extended with the same instruction
+     set extension options as the '-mcpu' option.
+
+'-mfpu=FLOATING-POINT-FORMAT'
+
+     This option specifies the floating point format to assemble for.
+     The assembler will issue an error message if an attempt is made to
+     assemble an instruction which will not execute on the target
+     floating point unit.  The following format options are recognized:
+     'softfpa', 'fpe', 'fpe2', 'fpe3', 'fpa', 'fpa10', 'fpa11',
+     'arm7500fe', 'softvfp', 'softvfp+vfp', 'vfp', 'vfp10', 'vfp10-r0',
+     'vfp9', 'vfpxd', 'arm1020t', 'arm1020e', 'arm1136jf-s' and
+     'maverick'.
+
+     In addition to determining which instructions are assembled, this
+     option also affects the way in which the '.double' assembler
+     directive behaves when assembling little-endian code.
+
+     The default is dependent on the processor selected.  For
+     Architecture 5 or later, the default is to assembler for VFP
+     instructions; for earlier architectures the default is to assemble
+     for FPA instructions.
+
+'-mthumb'
+     This option specifies that the assembler should start assembling
+     Thumb instructions; that is, it should behave as though the file
+     starts with a '.code 16' directive.
+
+'-mthumb-interwork'
+     This option specifies that the output generated by the assembler
+     should be marked as supporting interworking.
+
+'-mapcs [26|32]'
+     This option specifies that the output generated by the assembler
+     should be marked as supporting the indicated version of the Arm
+     Procedure.  Calling Standard.
+
+'-matpcs'
+     This option specifies that the output generated by the assembler
+     should be marked as supporting the Arm/Thumb Procedure Calling
+     Standard.  If enabled this option will cause the assembler to
+     create an empty debugging section in the object file called
+     .arm.atpcs.  Debuggers can use this to determine the ABI being used
+     by.
+
+'-mapcs-float'
+     This indicates the floating point variant of the APCS should be
+     used.  In this variant floating point arguments are passed in FP
+     registers rather than integer registers.
+
+'-mapcs-reentrant'
+     This indicates that the reentrant variant of the APCS should be
+     used.  This variant supports position independent code.
+
+'-mfloat-abi=ABI'
+     This option specifies that the output generated by the assembler
+     should be marked as using specified floating point ABI. The
+     following values are recognized: 'soft', 'softfp' and 'hard'.
+
+'-meabi=VER'
+     This option specifies which EABI version the produced object files
+     should conform to.  The following values are recognized: 'gnu', '4'
+     and '5'.
+
+'-EB'
+     This option specifies that the output generated by the assembler
+     should be marked as being encoded for a big-endian processor.
+
+'-EL'
+     This option specifies that the output generated by the assembler
+     should be marked as being encoded for a little-endian processor.
+
+'-k'
+     This option specifies that the output of the assembler should be
+     marked as position-independent code (PIC).
+
+8.2 Syntax
+==========
+
+8.2.1 Special Characters
+------------------------
+
+The presence of a '@' on a line indicates the start of a comment that
+extends to the end of the current line.  If a '#' appears as the first
+character of a line, the whole line is treated as a comment.
+
+   The ';' character can be used instead of a newline to separate
+statements.
+
+   Either '#' or '$' can be used to indicate immediate operands.
+
+   *TODO* Explain about /data modifier on symbols.
+
+8.2.2 Register Names
+--------------------
+
+*TODO* Explain about ARM register naming, and the predefined names.
+
+8.2.3 ARM relocation generation
+-------------------------------
+
+Specific data relocations can be generated by putting the relocation
+name in parentheses after the symbol name.  For example:
+
+             .word foo(TARGET1)
+
+   This will generate an 'R_ARM_TARGET1' relocation against the symbol
+FOO.  The following relocations are supported: 'GOT', 'GOTOFF',
+'TARGET1', 'TARGET2', 'SBREL', 'TLSGD', 'TLSLDM', 'TLSLDO', 'GOTTPOFF'
+and 'TPOFF'.
+
+   For compatibility with older toolchains the assembler also accepts
+'(PLT)' after branch targets.  This will generate the deprecated
+'R_ARM_PLT32' relocation.
+
+   Relocations for 'MOVW' and 'MOVT' instructions can be generated by
+prefixing the value with '#:lower16:' and '#:upper16' respectively.  For
+example to load the 32-bit address of foo into r0:
+
+             MOVW r0, #:lower16:foo
+             MOVT r0, #:upper16:foo
+
+8.3 Floating Point
+==================
+
+The ARM family uses IEEE floating-point numbers.
+
+8.4 ARM Machine Directives
+==========================
+
+'.align EXPRESSION [, EXPRESSION]'
+     This is the generic .ALIGN directive.  For the ARM however if the
+     first argument is zero (ie no alignment is needed) the assembler
+     will behave as if the argument had been 2 (ie pad to the next four
+     byte boundary).  This is for compatibility with ARM's own
+     assembler.
+
+'NAME .req REGISTER NAME'
+     This creates an alias for REGISTER NAME called NAME.  For example:
+
+                  foo .req r0
+
+'.unreq ALIAS-NAME'
+     This undefines a register alias which was previously defined using
+     the 'req', 'dn' or 'qn' directives.  For example:
+
+                  foo .req r0
+                  .unreq foo
+
+     An error occurs if the name is undefined.  Note - this pseudo op
+     can be used to delete builtin in register name aliases (eg 'r0').
+     This should only be done if it is really necessary.
+
+'NAME .dn REGISTER NAME [.TYPE] [[INDEX]]'
+'NAME .qn REGISTER NAME [.TYPE] [[INDEX]]'
+
+     The 'dn' and 'qn' directives are used to create typed and/or
+     indexed register aliases for use in Advanced SIMD Extension (Neon)
+     instructions.  The former should be used to create aliases of
+     double-precision registers, and the latter to create aliases of
+     quad-precision registers.
+
+     If these directives are used to create typed aliases, those aliases
+     can be used in Neon instructions instead of writing types after the
+     mnemonic or after each operand.  For example:
+
+                  x .dn d2.f32
+                  y .dn d3.f32
+                  z .dn d4.f32[1]
+                  vmul x,y,z
+
+     This is equivalent to writing the following:
+
+                  vmul.f32 d2,d3,d4[1]
+
+     Aliases created using 'dn' or 'qn' can be destroyed using 'unreq'.
+
+'.code [16|32]'
+     This directive selects the instruction set being generated.  The
+     value 16 selects Thumb, with the value 32 selecting ARM.
+
+'.thumb'
+     This performs the same action as .CODE 16.
+
+'.arm'
+     This performs the same action as .CODE 32.
+
+'.force_thumb'
+     This directive forces the selection of Thumb instructions, even if
+     the target processor does not support those instructions
+
+'.thumb_func'
+     This directive specifies that the following symbol is the name of a
+     Thumb encoded function.  This information is necessary in order to
+     allow the assembler and linker to generate correct code for
+     interworking between Arm and Thumb instructions and should be used
+     even if interworking is not going to be performed.  The presence of
+     this directive also implies '.thumb'
+
+     This directive is not neccessary when generating EABI objects.  On
+     these targets the encoding is implicit when generating Thumb code.
+
+'.thumb_set'
+     This performs the equivalent of a '.set' directive in that it
+     creates a symbol which is an alias for another symbol (possibly not
+     yet defined).  This directive also has the added property in that
+     it marks the aliased symbol as being a thumb function entry point,
+     in the same way that the '.thumb_func' directive does.
+
+'.ltorg'
+     This directive causes the current contents of the literal pool to
+     be dumped into the current section (which is assumed to be the
+     .text section) at the current location (aligned to a word
+     boundary).  'GAS' maintains a separate literal pool for each
+     section and each sub-section.  The '.ltorg' directive will only
+     affect the literal pool of the current section and sub-section.  At
+     the end of assembly all remaining, un-empty literal pools will
+     automatically be dumped.
+
+     Note - older versions of 'GAS' would dump the current literal pool
+     any time a section change occurred.  This is no longer done, since
+     it prevents accurate control of the placement of literal pools.
+
+'.pool'
+     This is a synonym for .ltorg.
+
+'.unwind_fnstart'
+     Marks the start of a function with an unwind table entry.
+
+'.unwind_fnend'
+     Marks the end of a function with an unwind table entry.  The unwind
+     index table entry is created when this directive is processed.
+
+     If no personality routine has been specified then standard
+     personality routine 0 or 1 will be used, depending on the number of
+     unwind opcodes required.
+
+'.cantunwind'
+     Prevents unwinding through the current function.  No personality
+     routine or exception table data is required or permitted.
+
+'.personality NAME'
+     Sets the personality routine for the current function to NAME.
+
+'.personalityindex INDEX'
+     Sets the personality routine for the current function to the EABI
+     standard routine number INDEX
+
+'.handlerdata'
+     Marks the end of the current function, and the start of the
+     exception table entry for that function.  Anything between this
+     directive and the '.fnend' directive will be added to the exception
+     table entry.
+
+     Must be preceded by a '.personality' or '.personalityindex'
+     directive.
+
+'.save REGLIST'
+     Generate unwinder annotations to restore the registers in REGLIST.
+     The format of REGLIST is the same as the corresponding
+     store-multiple instruction.
+
+     _core registers_
+            .save {r4, r5, r6, lr}
+            stmfd sp!, {r4, r5, r6, lr}
+     _FPA registers_
+            .save f4, 2
+            sfmfd f4, 2, [sp]!
+     _VFP registers_
+            .save {d8, d9, d10}
+            fstmdx sp!, {d8, d9, d10}
+     _iWMMXt registers_
+            .save {wr10, wr11}
+            wstrd wr11, [sp, #-8]!
+            wstrd wr10, [sp, #-8]!
+          or
+            .save wr11
+            wstrd wr11, [sp, #-8]!
+            .save wr10
+            wstrd wr10, [sp, #-8]!
+
+'.vsave VFP-REGLIST'
+     Generate unwinder annotations to restore the VFP registers in
+     VFP-REGLIST using FLDMD. Also works for VFPv3 registers that are to
+     be restored using VLDM. The format of VFP-REGLIST is the same as
+     the corresponding store-multiple instruction.
+
+     _VFP registers_
+            .vsave {d8, d9, d10}
+            fstmdd sp!, {d8, d9, d10}
+     _VFPv3 registers_
+            .vsave {d15, d16, d17}
+            vstm sp!, {d15, d16, d17}
+
+     Since FLDMX and FSTMX are now deprecated, this directive should be
+     used in favour of '.save' for saving VFP registers for ARMv6 and
+     above.
+
+'.pad #COUNT'
+     Generate unwinder annotations for a stack adjustment of COUNT
+     bytes.  A positive value indicates the function prologue allocated
+     stack space by decrementing the stack pointer.
+
+'.movsp REG [, #OFFSET]'
+     Tell the unwinder that REG contains an offset from the current
+     stack pointer.  If OFFSET is not specified then it is assumed to be
+     zero.
+
+'.setfp FPREG, SPREG [, #OFFSET]'
+     Make all unwinder annotations relaive to a frame pointer.  Without
+     this the unwinder will use offsets from the stack pointer.
+
+     The syntax of this directive is the same as the 'sub' or 'mov'
+     instruction used to set the frame pointer.  SPREG must be either
+     'sp' or mentioned in a previous '.movsp' directive.
+
+          .movsp ip
+          mov ip, sp
+          ...
+          .setfp fp, ip, #4
+          sub fp, ip, #4
+
+'.raw OFFSET, BYTE1, ...'
+     Insert one of more arbitary unwind opcode bytes, which are known to
+     adjust the stack pointer by OFFSET bytes.
+
+     For example '.unwind_raw 4, 0xb1, 0x01' is equivalent to '.save
+     {r0}'
+
+'.cpu NAME'
+     Select the target processor.  Valid values for NAME are the same as
+     for the '-mcpu' commandline option.
+
+'.arch NAME'
+     Select the target architecture.  Valid values for NAME are the same
+     as for the '-march' commandline option.
+
+'.object_arch NAME'
+     Override the architecture recorded in the EABI object attribute
+     section.  Valid values for NAME are the same as for the '.arch'
+     directive.  Typically this is useful when code uses runtime
+     detection of CPU features.
+
+'.fpu NAME'
+     Select the floating point unit to assemble for.  Valid values for
+     NAME are the same as for the '-mfpu' commandline option.
+
+'.eabi_attribute TAG, VALUE'
+     Set the EABI object attribute number TAG to VALUE.  The value is
+     either a 'number', '"string"', or 'number, "string"' depending on
+     the tag.
+
+8.5 Opcodes
+===========
+
+'as' implements all the standard ARM opcodes.  It also implements
+several pseudo opcodes, including several synthetic load instructions.
+
+'NOP'
+            nop
+
+     This pseudo op will always evaluate to a legal ARM instruction that
+     does nothing.  Currently it will evaluate to MOV r0, r0.
+
+'LDR'
+            ldr <register> , = <expression>
+
+     If expression evaluates to a numeric constant then a MOV or MVN
+     instruction will be used in place of the LDR instruction, if the
+     constant can be generated by either of these instructions.
+     Otherwise the constant will be placed into the nearest literal pool
+     (if it not already there) and a PC relative LDR instruction will be
+     generated.
+
+'ADR'
+            adr <register> <label>
+
+     This instruction will load the address of LABEL into the indicated
+     register.  The instruction will evaluate to a PC relative ADD or
+     SUB instruction depending upon where the label is located.  If the
+     label is out of range, or if it is not defined in the same file
+     (and section) as the ADR instruction, then an error will be
+     generated.  This instruction will not make use of the literal pool.
+
+'ADRL'
+            adrl <register> <label>
+
+     This instruction will load the address of LABEL into the indicated
+     register.  The instruction will evaluate to one or two PC relative
+     ADD or SUB instructions depending upon where the label is located.
+     If a second instruction is not needed a NOP instruction will be
+     generated in its place, so that this instruction is always 8 bytes
+     long.
+
+     If the label is out of range, or if it is not defined in the same
+     file (and section) as the ADRL instruction, then an error will be
+     generated.  This instruction will not make use of the literal pool.
+
+   For information on the ARM or Thumb instruction sets, see 'ARM
+Software Development Toolkit Reference Manual', Advanced RISC Machines
+Ltd.
+
+8.6 Mapping Symbols
+===================
+
+The ARM ELF specification requires that special symbols be inserted into
+object files to mark certain features:
+
+'$a'
+     At the start of a region of code containing ARM instructions.
+
+'$t'
+     At the start of a region of code containing THUMB instructions.
+
+'$d'
+     At the start of a region of data.
+
+   The assembler will automatically insert these symbols for you - there
+is no need to code them yourself.  Support for tagging symbols ($b, $f,
+$p and $m) which is also mentioned in the current ARM ELF specification
+is not implemented.  This is because they have been dropped from the new
+EABI and so tools cannot rely upon their presence.
+
+9 80386 Dependent Features
+**************************
+
+The i386 version 'as' supports both the original Intel 386 architecture
+in both 16 and 32-bit mode as well as AMD x86-64 architecture extending
+the Intel architecture to 64-bits.
+
+9.1 Options
+===========
+
+The i386 version of 'as' has a few machine dependent options:
+
+'--32 | --64'
+     Select the word size, either 32 bits or 64 bits.  Selecting 32-bit
+     implies Intel i386 architecture, while 64-bit implies AMD x86-64
+     architecture.
+
+     These options are only available with the ELF object file format,
+     and require that the necessary BFD support has been included (on a
+     32-bit platform you have to add -enable-64-bit-bfd to configure
+     enable 64-bit usage and use x86-64 as target platform).
+
+'-n'
+     By default, x86 GAS replaces multiple nop instructions used for
+     alignment within code sections with multi-byte nop instructions
+     such as leal 0(%esi,1),%esi.  This switch disables the
+     optimization.
+
+'--divide'
+     On SVR4-derived platforms, the character '/' is treated as a
+     comment character, which means that it cannot be used in
+     expressions.  The '--divide' option turns '/' into a normal
+     character.  This does not disable '/' at the beginning of a line
+     starting a comment, or affect using '#' for starting a comment.
+
+'-march=CPU'
+     This option specifies an instruction set architecture for
+     generating instructions.  The following architectures are
+     recognized: 'i8086', 'i186', 'i286', 'i386', 'i486', 'i586',
+     'i686', 'pentium', 'pentiumpro', 'pentiumii', 'pentiumiii',
+     'pentium4', 'prescott', 'nocona', 'core', 'core2', 'k6', 'k6_2',
+     'athlon', 'sledgehammer', 'opteron', 'k8', 'generic32' and
+     'generic64'.
+
+     This option only affects instructions generated by the assembler.
+     The '.arch' directive will take precedent.
+
+'-mtune=CPU'
+     This option specifies a processor to optimize for.  When used in
+     conjunction with the '-march' option, only instructions of the
+     processor specified by the '-march' option will be generated.
+
+     Valid CPU values are identical to '-march=CPU'.
+
+9.2 AT&T Syntax versus Intel Syntax
+===================================
+
+'as' now supports assembly using Intel assembler syntax.
+'.intel_syntax' selects Intel mode, and '.att_syntax' switches back to
+the usual AT&T mode for compatibility with the output of 'gcc'.  Either
+of these directives may have an optional argument, 'prefix', or
+'noprefix' specifying whether registers require a '%' prefix.  AT&T
+System V/386 assembler syntax is quite different from Intel syntax.  We
+mention these differences because almost all 80386 documents use Intel
+syntax.  Notable differences between the two syntaxes are:
+
+   * AT&T immediate operands are preceded by '$'; Intel immediate
+     operands are undelimited (Intel 'push 4' is AT&T 'pushl $4').  AT&T
+     register operands are preceded by '%'; Intel register operands are
+     undelimited.  AT&T absolute (as opposed to PC relative) jump/call
+     operands are prefixed by '*'; they are undelimited in Intel syntax.
+
+   * AT&T and Intel syntax use the opposite order for source and
+     destination operands.  Intel 'add eax, 4' is 'addl $4, %eax'.  The
+     'source, dest' convention is maintained for compatibility with
+     previous Unix assemblers.  Note that instructions with more than
+     one source operand, such as the 'enter' instruction, do _not_ have
+     reversed order.  *note i386-Bugs::.
+
+   * In AT&T syntax the size of memory operands is determined from the
+     last character of the instruction mnemonic.  Mnemonic suffixes of
+     'b', 'w', 'l' and 'q' specify byte (8-bit), word (16-bit), long
+     (32-bit) and quadruple word (64-bit) memory references.  Intel
+     syntax accomplishes this by prefixing memory operands (_not_ the
+     instruction mnemonics) with 'byte ptr', 'word ptr', 'dword ptr' and
+     'qword ptr'.  Thus, Intel 'mov al, byte ptr FOO' is 'movb FOO, %al'
+     in AT&T syntax.
+
+   * Immediate form long jumps and calls are 'lcall/ljmp $SECTION,
+     $OFFSET' in AT&T syntax; the Intel syntax is 'call/jmp far
+     SECTION:OFFSET'.  Also, the far return instruction is 'lret
+     $STACK-ADJUST' in AT&T syntax; Intel syntax is 'ret far
+     STACK-ADJUST'.
+
+   * The AT&T assembler does not provide support for multiple section
+     programs.  Unix style systems expect all programs to be single
+     sections.
+
+9.3 Instruction Naming
+======================
+
+Instruction mnemonics are suffixed with one character modifiers which
+specify the size of operands.  The letters 'b', 'w', 'l' and 'q' specify
+byte, word, long and quadruple word operands.  If no suffix is specified
+by an instruction then 'as' tries to fill in the missing suffix based on
+the destination register operand (the last one by convention).  Thus,
+'mov %ax, %bx' is equivalent to 'movw %ax, %bx'; also, 'mov $1, %bx' is
+equivalent to 'movw $1, bx'.  Note that this is incompatible with the
+AT&T Unix assembler which assumes that a missing mnemonic suffix implies
+long operand size.  (This incompatibility does not affect compiler
+output since compilers always explicitly specify the mnemonic suffix.)
+
+   Almost all instructions have the same names in AT&T and Intel format.
+There are a few exceptions.  The sign extend and zero extend
+instructions need two sizes to specify them.  They need a size to
+sign/zero extend _from_ and a size to zero extend _to_.  This is
+accomplished by using two instruction mnemonic suffixes in AT&T syntax.
+Base names for sign extend and zero extend are 'movs...' and 'movz...'
+in AT&T syntax ('movsx' and 'movzx' in Intel syntax).  The instruction
+mnemonic suffixes are tacked on to this base name, the _from_ suffix
+before the _to_ suffix.  Thus, 'movsbl %al, %edx' is AT&T syntax for
+"move sign extend _from_ %al _to_ %edx."  Possible suffixes, thus, are
+'bl' (from byte to long), 'bw' (from byte to word), 'wl' (from word to
+long), 'bq' (from byte to quadruple word), 'wq' (from word to quadruple
+word), and 'lq' (from long to quadruple word).
+
+   The Intel-syntax conversion instructions
+
+   * 'cbw' -- sign-extend byte in '%al' to word in '%ax',
+
+   * 'cwde' -- sign-extend word in '%ax' to long in '%eax',
+
+   * 'cwd' -- sign-extend word in '%ax' to long in '%dx:%ax',
+
+   * 'cdq' -- sign-extend dword in '%eax' to quad in '%edx:%eax',
+
+   * 'cdqe' -- sign-extend dword in '%eax' to quad in '%rax' (x86-64
+     only),
+
+   * 'cqo' -- sign-extend quad in '%rax' to octuple in '%rdx:%rax'
+     (x86-64 only),
+
+are called 'cbtw', 'cwtl', 'cwtd', 'cltd', 'cltq', and 'cqto' in AT&T
+naming.  'as' accepts either naming for these instructions.
+
+   Far call/jump instructions are 'lcall' and 'ljmp' in AT&T syntax, but
+are 'call far' and 'jump far' in Intel convention.
+
+9.4 Register Naming
+===================
+
+Register operands are always prefixed with '%'.  The 80386 registers
+consist of
+
+   * the 8 32-bit registers '%eax' (the accumulator), '%ebx', '%ecx',
+     '%edx', '%edi', '%esi', '%ebp' (the frame pointer), and '%esp' (the
+     stack pointer).
+
+   * the 8 16-bit low-ends of these: '%ax', '%bx', '%cx', '%dx', '%di',
+     '%si', '%bp', and '%sp'.
+
+   * the 8 8-bit registers: '%ah', '%al', '%bh', '%bl', '%ch', '%cl',
+     '%dh', and '%dl' (These are the high-bytes and low-bytes of '%ax',
+     '%bx', '%cx', and '%dx')
+
+   * the 6 section registers '%cs' (code section), '%ds' (data section),
+     '%ss' (stack section), '%es', '%fs', and '%gs'.
+
+   * the 3 processor control registers '%cr0', '%cr2', and '%cr3'.
+
+   * the 6 debug registers '%db0', '%db1', '%db2', '%db3', '%db6', and
+     '%db7'.
+
+   * the 2 test registers '%tr6' and '%tr7'.
+
+   * the 8 floating point register stack '%st' or equivalently '%st(0)',
+     '%st(1)', '%st(2)', '%st(3)', '%st(4)', '%st(5)', '%st(6)', and
+     '%st(7)'.  These registers are overloaded by 8 MMX registers
+     '%mm0', '%mm1', '%mm2', '%mm3', '%mm4', '%mm5', '%mm6' and '%mm7'.
+
+   * the 8 SSE registers registers '%xmm0', '%xmm1', '%xmm2', '%xmm3',
+     '%xmm4', '%xmm5', '%xmm6' and '%xmm7'.
+
+   The AMD x86-64 architecture extends the register set by:
+
+   * enhancing the 8 32-bit registers to 64-bit: '%rax' (the
+     accumulator), '%rbx', '%rcx', '%rdx', '%rdi', '%rsi', '%rbp' (the
+     frame pointer), '%rsp' (the stack pointer)
+
+   * the 8 extended registers '%r8'-'%r15'.
+
+   * the 8 32-bit low ends of the extended registers: '%r8d'-'%r15d'
+
+   * the 8 16-bit low ends of the extended registers: '%r8w'-'%r15w'
+
+   * the 8 8-bit low ends of the extended registers: '%r8b'-'%r15b'
+
+   * the 4 8-bit registers: '%sil', '%dil', '%bpl', '%spl'.
+
+   * the 8 debug registers: '%db8'-'%db15'.
+
+   * the 8 SSE registers: '%xmm8'-'%xmm15'.
+
+9.5 Instruction Prefixes
+========================
+
+Instruction prefixes are used to modify the following instruction.  They
+are used to repeat string instructions, to provide section overrides, to
+perform bus lock operations, and to change operand and address sizes.
+(Most instructions that normally operate on 32-bit operands will use
+16-bit operands if the instruction has an "operand size" prefix.)
+Instruction prefixes are best written on the same line as the
+instruction they act upon.  For example, the 'scas' (scan string)
+instruction is repeated with:
+
+             repne scas %es:(%edi),%al
+
+   You may also place prefixes on the lines immediately preceding the
+instruction, but this circumvents checks that 'as' does with prefixes,
+and will not work with all prefixes.
+
+   Here is a list of instruction prefixes:
+
+   * Section override prefixes 'cs', 'ds', 'ss', 'es', 'fs', 'gs'.
+     These are automatically added by specifying using the
+     SECTION:MEMORY-OPERAND form for memory references.
+
+   * Operand/Address size prefixes 'data16' and 'addr16' change 32-bit
+     operands/addresses into 16-bit operands/addresses, while 'data32'
+     and 'addr32' change 16-bit ones (in a '.code16' section) into
+     32-bit operands/addresses.  These prefixes _must_ appear on the
+     same line of code as the instruction they modify.  For example, in
+     a 16-bit '.code16' section, you might write:
+
+                  addr32 jmpl *(%ebx)
+
+   * The bus lock prefix 'lock' inhibits interrupts during execution of
+     the instruction it precedes.  (This is only valid with certain
+     instructions; see a 80386 manual for details).
+
+   * The wait for coprocessor prefix 'wait' waits for the coprocessor to
+     complete the current instruction.  This should never be needed for
+     the 80386/80387 combination.
+
+   * The 'rep', 'repe', and 'repne' prefixes are added to string
+     instructions to make them repeat '%ecx' times ('%cx' times if the
+     current address size is 16-bits).
+   * The 'rex' family of prefixes is used by x86-64 to encode extensions
+     to i386 instruction set.  The 'rex' prefix has four bits -- an
+     operand size overwrite ('64') used to change operand size from
+     32-bit to 64-bit and X, Y and Z extensions bits used to extend the
+     register set.
+
+     You may write the 'rex' prefixes directly.  The 'rex64xyz'
+     instruction emits 'rex' prefix with all the bits set.  By omitting
+     the '64', 'x', 'y' or 'z' you may write other prefixes as well.
+     Normally, there is no need to write the prefixes explicitly, since
+     gas will automatically generate them based on the instruction
+     operands.
+
+9.6 Memory References
+=====================
+
+An Intel syntax indirect memory reference of the form
+
+     SECTION:[BASE + INDEX*SCALE + DISP]
+
+is translated into the AT&T syntax
+
+     SECTION:DISP(BASE, INDEX, SCALE)
+
+where BASE and INDEX are the optional 32-bit base and index registers,
+DISP is the optional displacement, and SCALE, taking the values 1, 2, 4,
+and 8, multiplies INDEX to calculate the address of the operand.  If no
+SCALE is specified, SCALE is taken to be 1.  SECTION specifies the
+optional section register for the memory operand, and may override the
+default section register (see a 80386 manual for section register
+defaults).  Note that section overrides in AT&T syntax _must_ be
+preceded by a '%'.  If you specify a section override which coincides
+with the default section register, 'as' does _not_ output any section
+register override prefixes to assemble the given instruction.  Thus,
+section overrides can be specified to emphasize which section register
+is used for a given memory operand.
+
+   Here are some examples of Intel and AT&T style memory references:
+
+AT&T: '-4(%ebp)', Intel: '[ebp - 4]'
+     BASE is '%ebp'; DISP is '-4'.  SECTION is missing, and the default
+     section is used ('%ss' for addressing with '%ebp' as the base
+     register).  INDEX, SCALE are both missing.
+
+AT&T: 'foo(,%eax,4)', Intel: '[foo + eax*4]'
+     INDEX is '%eax' (scaled by a SCALE 4); DISP is 'foo'.  All other
+     fields are missing.  The section register here defaults to '%ds'.
+
+AT&T: 'foo(,1)'; Intel '[foo]'
+     This uses the value pointed to by 'foo' as a memory operand.  Note
+     that BASE and INDEX are both missing, but there is only _one_ ','.
+     This is a syntactic exception.
+
+AT&T: '%gs:foo'; Intel 'gs:foo'
+     This selects the contents of the variable 'foo' with section
+     register SECTION being '%gs'.
+
+   Absolute (as opposed to PC relative) call and jump operands must be
+prefixed with '*'.  If no '*' is specified, 'as' always chooses PC
+relative addressing for jump/call labels.
+
+   Any instruction that has a memory operand, but no register operand,
+_must_ specify its size (byte, word, long, or quadruple) with an
+instruction mnemonic suffix ('b', 'w', 'l' or 'q', respectively).
+
+   The x86-64 architecture adds an RIP (instruction pointer relative)
+addressing.  This addressing mode is specified by using 'rip' as a base
+register.  Only constant offsets are valid.  For example:
+
+AT&T: '1234(%rip)', Intel: '[rip + 1234]'
+     Points to the address 1234 bytes past the end of the current
+     instruction.
+
+AT&T: 'symbol(%rip)', Intel: '[rip + symbol]'
+     Points to the 'symbol' in RIP relative way, this is shorter than
+     the default absolute addressing.
+
+   Other addressing modes remain unchanged in x86-64 architecture,
+except registers used are 64-bit instead of 32-bit.
+
+9.7 Handling of Jump Instructions
+=================================
+
+Jump instructions are always optimized to use the smallest possible
+displacements.  This is accomplished by using byte (8-bit) displacement
+jumps whenever the target is sufficiently close.  If a byte displacement
+is insufficient a long displacement is used.  We do not support word
+(16-bit) displacement jumps in 32-bit mode (i.e.  prefixing the jump
+instruction with the 'data16' instruction prefix), since the 80386
+insists upon masking '%eip' to 16 bits after the word displacement is
+added.  (See also *note i386-Arch::)
+
+   Note that the 'jcxz', 'jecxz', 'loop', 'loopz', 'loope', 'loopnz' and
+'loopne' instructions only come in byte displacements, so that if you
+use these instructions ('gcc' does not use them) you may get an error
+message (and incorrect code).  The AT&T 80386 assembler tries to get
+around this problem by expanding 'jcxz foo' to
+
+              jcxz cx_zero
+              jmp cx_nonzero
+     cx_zero: jmp foo
+     cx_nonzero:
+
+9.8 Floating Point
+==================
+
+All 80387 floating point types except packed BCD are supported.  (BCD
+support may be added without much difficulty).  These data types are
+16-, 32-, and 64- bit integers, and single (32-bit), double (64-bit),
+and extended (80-bit) precision floating point.  Each supported type has
+an instruction mnemonic suffix and a constructor associated with it.
+Instruction mnemonic suffixes specify the operand's data type.
+Constructors build these data types into memory.
+
+   * Floating point constructors are '.float' or '.single', '.double',
+     and '.tfloat' for 32-, 64-, and 80-bit formats.  These correspond
+     to instruction mnemonic suffixes 's', 'l', and 't'.  't' stands for
+     80-bit (ten byte) real.  The 80387 only supports this format via
+     the 'fldt' (load 80-bit real to stack top) and 'fstpt' (store
+     80-bit real and pop stack) instructions.
+
+   * Integer constructors are '.word', '.long' or '.int', and '.quad'
+     for the 16-, 32-, and 64-bit integer formats.  The corresponding
+     instruction mnemonic suffixes are 's' (single), 'l' (long), and 'q'
+     (quad).  As with the 80-bit real format, the 64-bit 'q' format is
+     only present in the 'fildq' (load quad integer to stack top) and
+     'fistpq' (store quad integer and pop stack) instructions.
+
+   Register to register operations should not use instruction mnemonic
+suffixes.  'fstl %st, %st(1)' will give a warning, and be assembled as
+if you wrote 'fst %st, %st(1)', since all register to register
+operations use 80-bit floating point operands.  (Contrast this with
+'fstl %st, mem', which converts '%st' from 80-bit to 64-bit floating
+point format, then stores the result in the 4 byte location 'mem')
+
+9.9 Intel's MMX and AMD's 3DNow! SIMD Operations
+================================================
+
+'as' supports Intel's MMX instruction set (SIMD instructions for integer
+data), available on Intel's Pentium MMX processors and Pentium II
+processors, AMD's K6 and K6-2 processors, Cyrix' M2 processor, and
+probably others.  It also supports AMD's 3DNow! instruction set (SIMD
+instructions for 32-bit floating point data) available on AMD's K6-2
+processor and possibly others in the future.
+
+   Currently, 'as' does not support Intel's floating point SIMD, Katmai
+(KNI).
+
+   The eight 64-bit MMX operands, also used by 3DNow!, are called
+'%mm0', '%mm1', ...  '%mm7'.  They contain eight 8-bit integers, four
+16-bit integers, two 32-bit integers, one 64-bit integer, or two 32-bit
+floating point values.  The MMX registers cannot be used at the same
+time as the floating point stack.
+
+   See Intel and AMD documentation, keeping in mind that the operand
+order in instructions is reversed from the Intel syntax.
+
+9.10 Writing 16-bit Code
+========================
+
+While 'as' normally writes only "pure" 32-bit i386 code or 64-bit x86-64
+code depending on the default configuration, it also supports writing
+code to run in real mode or in 16-bit protected mode code segments.  To
+do this, put a '.code16' or '.code16gcc' directive before the assembly
+language instructions to be run in 16-bit mode.  You can switch 'as'
+back to writing normal 32-bit code with the '.code32' directive.
+
+   '.code16gcc' provides experimental support for generating 16-bit code
+from gcc, and differs from '.code16' in that 'call', 'ret', 'enter',
+'leave', 'push', 'pop', 'pusha', 'popa', 'pushf', and 'popf'
+instructions default to 32-bit size.  This is so that the stack pointer
+is manipulated in the same way over function calls, allowing access to
+function parameters at the same stack offsets as in 32-bit mode.
+'.code16gcc' also automatically adds address size prefixes where
+necessary to use the 32-bit addressing modes that gcc generates.
+
+   The code which 'as' generates in 16-bit mode will not necessarily run
+on a 16-bit pre-80386 processor.  To write code that runs on such a
+processor, you must refrain from using _any_ 32-bit constructs which
+require 'as' to output address or operand size prefixes.
+
+   Note that writing 16-bit code instructions by explicitly specifying a
+prefix or an instruction mnemonic suffix within a 32-bit code section
+generates different machine instructions than those generated for a
+16-bit code segment.  In a 32-bit code section, the following code
+generates the machine opcode bytes '66 6a 04', which pushes the value
+'4' onto the stack, decrementing '%esp' by 2.
+
+             pushw $4
+
+   The same code in a 16-bit code section would generate the machine
+opcode bytes '6a 04' (i.e., without the operand size prefix), which is
+correct since the processor default operand size is assumed to be 16
+bits in a 16-bit code section.
+
+9.11 AT&T Syntax bugs
+=====================
+
+The UnixWare assembler, and probably other AT&T derived ix86 Unix
+assemblers, generate floating point instructions with reversed source
+and destination registers in certain cases.  Unfortunately, gcc and
+possibly many other programs use this reversed syntax, so we're stuck
+with it.
+
+   For example
+
+             fsub %st,%st(3)
+results in '%st(3)' being updated to '%st - %st(3)' rather than the
+expected '%st(3) - %st'.  This happens with all the non-commutative
+arithmetic floating point operations with two register operands where
+the source register is '%st' and the destination register is '%st(i)'.
+
+9.12 Specifying CPU Architecture
+================================
+
+'as' may be told to assemble for a particular CPU (sub-)architecture
+with the '.arch CPU_TYPE' directive.  This directive enables a warning
+when gas detects an instruction that is not supported on the CPU
+specified.  The choices for CPU_TYPE are:
+
+'i8086'        'i186'         'i286'         'i386'
+'i486'         'i586'         'i686'         'pentium'
+'pentiumpro'   'pentiumii'    'pentiumiii'   'pentium4'
+'prescott'     'nocona'       'core'         'core2'
+'amdfam10'
+'k6'           'athlon'       'sledgehammer' 'k8'
+'.mmx'         '.sse'         '.sse2'        '.sse3'
+'.ssse3'       '.sse4.1'      '.sse4.2'      '.sse4'
+'.sse4a'       '.3dnow'       '.3dnowa'      '.padlock'
+'.pacifica'    '.svme'        '.abm'
+
+   Apart from the warning, there are only two other effects on 'as'
+operation; Firstly, if you specify a CPU other than 'i486', then shift
+by one instructions such as 'sarl $1, %eax' will automatically use a two
+byte opcode sequence.  The larger three byte opcode sequence is used on
+the 486 (and when no architecture is specified) because it executes
+faster on the 486.  Note that you can explicitly request the two byte
+opcode by writing 'sarl %eax'.  Secondly, if you specify 'i8086',
+'i186', or 'i286', _and_ '.code16' or '.code16gcc' then byte offset
+conditional jumps will be promoted when necessary to a two instruction
+sequence consisting of a conditional jump of the opposite sense around
+an unconditional jump to the target.
+
+   Following the CPU architecture (but not a sub-architecture, which are
+those starting with a dot), you may specify 'jumps' or 'nojumps' to
+control automatic promotion of conditional jumps.  'jumps' is the
+default, and enables jump promotion; All external jumps will be of the
+long variety, and file-local jumps will be promoted as necessary.
+(*note i386-Jumps::) 'nojumps' leaves external conditional jumps as byte
+offset jumps, and warns about file-local conditional jumps that 'as'
+promotes.  Unconditional jumps are treated as for 'jumps'.
+
+   For example
+
+      .arch i8086,nojumps
+
+9.13 Notes
+==========
+
+There is some trickery concerning the 'mul' and 'imul' instructions that
+deserves mention.  The 16-, 32-, 64- and 128-bit expanding multiplies
+(base opcode '0xf6'; extension 4 for 'mul' and 5 for 'imul') can be
+output only in the one operand form.  Thus, 'imul %ebx, %eax' does _not_
+select the expanding multiply; the expanding multiply would clobber the
+'%edx' register, and this would confuse 'gcc' output.  Use 'imul %ebx'
+to get the 64-bit product in '%edx:%eax'.
+
+   We have added a two operand form of 'imul' when the first operand is
+an immediate mode expression and the second operand is a register.  This
+is just a shorthand, so that, multiplying '%eax' by 69, for example, can
+be done with 'imul $69, %eax' rather than 'imul $69, %eax, %eax'.
+
+10 IA-64 Dependent Features
+***************************
+
+10.1 Options
+============
+
+'-mconstant-gp'
+     This option instructs the assembler to mark the resulting object
+     file as using the "constant GP" model.  With this model, it is
+     assumed that the entire program uses a single global pointer (GP)
+     value.  Note that this option does not in any fashion affect the
+     machine code emitted by the assembler.  All it does is turn on the
+     EF_IA_64_CONS_GP flag in the ELF file header.
+
+'-mauto-pic'
+     This option instructs the assembler to mark the resulting object
+     file as using the "constant GP without function descriptor" data
+     model.  This model is like the "constant GP" model, except that it
+     additionally does away with function descriptors.  What this means
+     is that the address of a function refers directly to the function's
+     code entry-point.  Normally, such an address would refer to a
+     function descriptor, which contains both the code entry-point and
+     the GP-value needed by the function.  Note that this option does
+     not in any fashion affect the machine code emitted by the
+     assembler.  All it does is turn on the EF_IA_64_NOFUNCDESC_CONS_GP
+     flag in the ELF file header.
+
+'-milp32'
+'-milp64'
+'-mlp64'
+'-mp64'
+     These options select the data model.  The assembler defaults to
+     '-mlp64' (LP64 data model).
+
+'-mle'
+'-mbe'
+     These options select the byte order.  The '-mle' option selects
+     little-endian byte order (default) and '-mbe' selects big-endian
+     byte order.  Note that IA-64 machine code always uses little-endian
+     byte order.
+
+'-mtune=itanium1'
+'-mtune=itanium2'
+     Tune for a particular IA-64 CPU, ITANIUM1 or ITANIUM2.  The default
+     is ITANIUM2.
+
+'-munwind-check=warning'
+'-munwind-check=error'
+     These options control what the assembler will do when performing
+     consistency checks on unwind directives.  '-munwind-check=warning'
+     will make the assembler issue a warning when an unwind directive
+     check fails.  This is the default.  '-munwind-check=error' will
+     make the assembler issue an error when an unwind directive check
+     fails.
+
+'-mhint.b=ok'
+'-mhint.b=warning'
+'-mhint.b=error'
+     These options control what the assembler will do when the 'hint.b'
+     instruction is used.  '-mhint.b=ok' will make the assembler accept
+     'hint.b'.  '-mint.b=warning' will make the assembler issue a
+     warning when 'hint.b' is used.  '-mhint.b=error' will make the
+     assembler treat 'hint.b' as an error, which is the default.
+
+'-x'
+'-xexplicit'
+     These options turn on dependency violation checking.
+
+'-xauto'
+     This option instructs the assembler to automatically insert stop
+     bits where necessary to remove dependency violations.  This is the
+     default mode.
+
+'-xnone'
+     This option turns off dependency violation checking.
+
+'-xdebug'
+     This turns on debug output intended to help tracking down bugs in
+     the dependency violation checker.
+
+'-xdebugn'
+     This is a shortcut for -xnone -xdebug.
+
+'-xdebugx'
+     This is a shortcut for -xexplicit -xdebug.
+
+10.2 Syntax
+===========
+
+The assembler syntax closely follows the IA-64 Assembly Language
+Reference Guide.
+
+10.2.1 Special Characters
+-------------------------
+
+'//' is the line comment token.
+
+   ';' can be used instead of a newline to separate statements.
+
+10.2.2 Register Names
+---------------------
+
+The 128 integer registers are referred to as 'rN'.  The 128
+floating-point registers are referred to as 'fN'.  The 128 application
+registers are referred to as 'arN'.  The 128 control registers are
+referred to as 'crN'.  The 64 one-bit predicate registers are referred
+to as 'pN'.  The 8 branch registers are referred to as 'bN'.  In
+addition, the assembler defines a number of aliases: 'gp' ('r1'), 'sp'
+('r12'), 'rp' ('b0'), 'ret0' ('r8'), 'ret1' ('r9'), 'ret2' ('r10'),
+'ret3' ('r9'), 'fargN' ('f8+N'), and 'fretN' ('f8+N').
+
+   For convenience, the assembler also defines aliases for all named
+application and control registers.  For example, 'ar.bsp' refers to the
+register backing store pointer ('ar17').  Similarly, 'cr.eoi' refers to
+the end-of-interrupt register ('cr67').
+
+10.2.3 IA-64 Processor-Status-Register (PSR) Bit Names
+------------------------------------------------------
+
+The assembler defines bit masks for each of the bits in the IA-64
+processor status register.  For example, 'psr.ic' corresponds to a value
+of 0x2000.  These masks are primarily intended for use with the
+'ssm'/'sum' and 'rsm'/'rum' instructions, but they can be used anywhere
+else where an integer constant is expected.
+
+10.3 Opcodes
+============
+
+For detailed information on the IA-64 machine instruction set, see the
+IA-64 Architecture Handbook
+(http://developer.intel.com/design/itanium/arch_spec.htm).
+
+11 MIPS Dependent Features
+**************************
+
+GNU 'as' for MIPS architectures supports several different MIPS
+processors, and MIPS ISA levels I through V, MIPS32, and MIPS64.  For
+information about the MIPS instruction set, see 'MIPS RISC
+Architecture', by Kane and Heindrich (Prentice-Hall).  For an overview
+of MIPS assembly conventions, see "Appendix D: Assembly Language
+Programming" in the same work.
+
+11.1 Assembler options
+======================
+
+The MIPS configurations of GNU 'as' support these special options:
+
+'-G NUM'
+     This option sets the largest size of an object that can be
+     referenced implicitly with the 'gp' register.  It is only accepted
+     for targets that use ECOFF format.  The default value is 8.
+
+'-EB'
+'-EL'
+     Any MIPS configuration of 'as' can select big-endian or
+     little-endian output at run time (unlike the other GNU development
+     tools, which must be configured for one or the other).  Use '-EB'
+     to select big-endian output, and '-EL' for little-endian.
+
+'-KPIC'
+     Generate SVR4-style PIC. This option tells the assembler to
+     generate SVR4-style position-independent macro expansions.  It also
+     tells the assembler to mark the output file as PIC.
+
+'-mvxworks-pic'
+     Generate VxWorks PIC. This option tells the assembler to generate
+     VxWorks-style position-independent macro expansions.
+
+'-mips1'
+'-mips2'
+'-mips3'
+'-mips4'
+'-mips5'
+'-mips32'
+'-mips32r2'
+'-mips64'
+'-mips64r2'
+     Generate code for a particular MIPS Instruction Set Architecture
+     level.  '-mips1' corresponds to the R2000 and R3000 processors,
+     '-mips2' to the R6000 processor, '-mips3' to the R4000 processor,
+     and '-mips4' to the R8000 and R10000 processors.  '-mips5',
+     '-mips32', '-mips32r2', '-mips64', and '-mips64r2' correspond to
+     generic MIPS V, MIPS32, MIPS32 RELEASE 2, MIPS64, and MIPS64
+     RELEASE 2 ISA processors, respectively.  You can also switch
+     instruction sets during the assembly; see *note Directives to
+     override the ISA level: MIPS ISA.
+
+'-mgp32'
+'-mfp32'
+     Some macros have different expansions for 32-bit and 64-bit
+     registers.  The register sizes are normally inferred from the ISA
+     and ABI, but these flags force a certain group of registers to be
+     treated as 32 bits wide at all times.  '-mgp32' controls the size
+     of general-purpose registers and '-mfp32' controls the size of
+     floating-point registers.
+
+     The '.set gp=32' and '.set fp=32' directives allow the size of
+     registers to be changed for parts of an object.  The default value
+     is restored by '.set gp=default' and '.set fp=default'.
+
+     On some MIPS variants there is a 32-bit mode flag; when this flag
+     is set, 64-bit instructions generate a trap.  Also, some 32-bit
+     OSes only save the 32-bit registers on a context switch, so it is
+     essential never to use the 64-bit registers.
+
+'-mgp64'
+'-mfp64'
+     Assume that 64-bit registers are available.  This is provided in
+     the interests of symmetry with '-mgp32' and '-mfp32'.
+
+     The '.set gp=64' and '.set fp=64' directives allow the size of
+     registers to be changed for parts of an object.  The default value
+     is restored by '.set gp=default' and '.set fp=default'.
+
+'-mips16'
+'-no-mips16'
+     Generate code for the MIPS 16 processor.  This is equivalent to
+     putting '.set mips16' at the start of the assembly file.
+     '-no-mips16' turns off this option.
+
+'-msmartmips'
+'-mno-smartmips'
+     Enables the SmartMIPS extensions to the MIPS32 instruction set,
+     which provides a number of new instructions which target smartcard
+     and cryptographic applications.  This is equivalent to putting
+     '.set smartmips' at the start of the assembly file.
+     '-mno-smartmips' turns off this option.
+
+'-mips3d'
+'-no-mips3d'
+     Generate code for the MIPS-3D Application Specific Extension.  This
+     tells the assembler to accept MIPS-3D instructions.  '-no-mips3d'
+     turns off this option.
+
+'-mdmx'
+'-no-mdmx'
+     Generate code for the MDMX Application Specific Extension.  This
+     tells the assembler to accept MDMX instructions.  '-no-mdmx' turns
+     off this option.
+
+'-mdsp'
+'-mno-dsp'
+     Generate code for the DSP Release 1 Application Specific Extension.
+     This tells the assembler to accept DSP Release 1 instructions.
+     '-mno-dsp' turns off this option.
+
+'-mdspr2'
+'-mno-dspr2'
+     Generate code for the DSP Release 2 Application Specific Extension.
+     This option implies -mdsp.  This tells the assembler to accept DSP
+     Release 2 instructions.  '-mno-dspr2' turns off this option.
+
+'-mmt'
+'-mno-mt'
+     Generate code for the MT Application Specific Extension.  This
+     tells the assembler to accept MT instructions.  '-mno-mt' turns off
+     this option.
+
+'-mfix7000'
+'-mno-fix7000'
+     Cause nops to be inserted if the read of the destination register
+     of an mfhi or mflo instruction occurs in the following two
+     instructions.
+
+'-mfix-vr4120'
+'-no-mfix-vr4120'
+     Insert nops to work around certain VR4120 errata.  This option is
+     intended to be used on GCC-generated code: it is not designed to
+     catch all problems in hand-written assembler code.
+
+'-mfix-vr4130'
+'-no-mfix-vr4130'
+     Insert nops to work around the VR4130 'mflo'/'mfhi' errata.
+
+'-m4010'
+'-no-m4010'
+     Generate code for the LSI R4010 chip.  This tells the assembler to
+     accept the R4010 specific instructions ('addciu', 'ffc', etc.), and
+     to not schedule 'nop' instructions around accesses to the 'HI' and
+     'LO' registers.  '-no-m4010' turns off this option.
+
+'-m4650'
+'-no-m4650'
+     Generate code for the MIPS R4650 chip.  This tells the assembler to
+     accept the 'mad' and 'madu' instruction, and to not schedule 'nop'
+     instructions around accesses to the 'HI' and 'LO' registers.
+     '-no-m4650' turns off this option.
+
+'-m3900'
+'-no-m3900'
+'-m4100'
+'-no-m4100'
+     For each option '-mNNNN', generate code for the MIPS RNNNN chip.
+     This tells the assembler to accept instructions specific to that
+     chip, and to schedule for that chip's hazards.
+
+'-march=CPU'
+     Generate code for a particular MIPS cpu.  It is exactly equivalent
+     to '-mCPU', except that there are more value of CPU understood.
+     Valid CPU value are:
+
+          2000, 3000, 3900, 4000, 4010, 4100, 4111, vr4120, vr4130,
+          vr4181, 4300, 4400, 4600, 4650, 5000, rm5200, rm5230, rm5231,
+          rm5261, rm5721, vr5400, vr5500, 6000, rm7000, 8000, rm9000,
+          10000, 12000, 4kc, 4km, 4kp, 4ksc, 4kec, 4kem, 4kep, 4ksd,
+          m4k, m4kp, 24kc, 24kf, 24kx, 24kec, 24kef, 24kex, 34kc, 34kf,
+          34kx, 74kc, 74kf, 74kx, 5kc, 5kf, 20kc, 25kf, sb1, sb1a
+
+'-mtune=CPU'
+     Schedule and tune for a particular MIPS cpu.  Valid CPU values are
+     identical to '-march=CPU'.
+
+'-mabi=ABI'
+     Record which ABI the source code uses.  The recognized arguments
+     are: '32', 'n32', 'o64', '64' and 'eabi'.
+
+'-msym32'
+'-mno-sym32'
+     Equivalent to adding '.set sym32' or '.set nosym32' to the
+     beginning of the assembler input.  *Note MIPS symbol sizes::.
+
+'-nocpp'
+     This option is ignored.  It is accepted for command-line
+     compatibility with other assemblers, which use it to turn off C
+     style preprocessing.  With GNU 'as', there is no need for '-nocpp',
+     because the GNU assembler itself never runs the C preprocessor.
+
+'--construct-floats'
+'--no-construct-floats'
+     The '--no-construct-floats' option disables the construction of
+     double width floating point constants by loading the two halves of
+     the value into the two single width floating point registers that
+     make up the double width register.  This feature is useful if the
+     processor support the FR bit in its status register, and this bit
+     is known (by the programmer) to be set.  This bit prevents the
+     aliasing of the double width register by the single width
+     registers.
+
+     By default '--construct-floats' is selected, allowing construction
+     of these floating point constants.
+
+'--trap'
+'--no-break'
+     'as' automatically macro expands certain division and
+     multiplication instructions to check for overflow and division by
+     zero.  This option causes 'as' to generate code to take a trap
+     exception rather than a break exception when an error is detected.
+     The trap instructions are only supported at Instruction Set
+     Architecture level 2 and higher.
+
+'--break'
+'--no-trap'
+     Generate code to take a break exception rather than a trap
+     exception when an error is detected.  This is the default.
+
+'-mpdr'
+'-mno-pdr'
+     Control generation of '.pdr' sections.  Off by default on IRIX, on
+     elsewhere.
+
+'-mshared'
+'-mno-shared'
+     When generating code using the Unix calling conventions (selected
+     by '-KPIC' or '-mcall_shared'), gas will normally generate code
+     which can go into a shared library.  The '-mno-shared' option tells
+     gas to generate code which uses the calling convention, but can not
+     go into a shared library.  The resulting code is slightly more
+     efficient.  This option only affects the handling of the '.cpload'
+     and '.cpsetup' pseudo-ops.
+
+11.2 MIPS ECOFF object code
+===========================
+
+Assembling for a MIPS ECOFF target supports some additional sections
+besides the usual '.text', '.data' and '.bss'.  The additional sections
+are '.rdata', used for read-only data, '.sdata', used for small data,
+and '.sbss', used for small common objects.
+
+   When assembling for ECOFF, the assembler uses the '$gp' ('$28')
+register to form the address of a "small object".  Any object in the
+'.sdata' or '.sbss' sections is considered "small" in this sense.  For
+external objects, or for objects in the '.bss' section, you can use the
+'gcc' '-G' option to control the size of objects addressed via '$gp';
+the default value is 8, meaning that a reference to any object eight
+bytes or smaller uses '$gp'.  Passing '-G 0' to 'as' prevents it from
+using the '$gp' register on the basis of object size (but the assembler
+uses '$gp' for objects in '.sdata' or 'sbss' in any case).  The size of
+an object in the '.bss' section is set by the '.comm' or '.lcomm'
+directive that defines it.  The size of an external object may be set
+with the '.extern' directive.  For example, '.extern sym,4' declares
+that the object at 'sym' is 4 bytes in length, whie leaving 'sym'
+otherwise undefined.
+
+   Using small ECOFF objects requires linker support, and assumes that
+the '$gp' register is correctly initialized (normally done automatically
+by the startup code).  MIPS ECOFF assembly code must not modify the
+'$gp' register.
+
+11.3 Directives for debugging information
+=========================================
+
+MIPS ECOFF 'as' supports several directives used for generating
+debugging information which are not support by traditional MIPS
+assemblers.  These are '.def', '.endef', '.dim', '.file', '.scl',
+'.size', '.tag', '.type', '.val', '.stabd', '.stabn', and '.stabs'.  The
+debugging information generated by the three '.stab' directives can only
+be read by GDB, not by traditional MIPS debuggers (this enhancement is
+required to fully support C++ debugging).  These directives are
+primarily used by compilers, not assembly language programmers!
+
+11.4 Directives to override the size of symbols
+===============================================
+
+The n64 ABI allows symbols to have any 64-bit value.  Although this
+provides a great deal of flexibility, it means that some macros have
+much longer expansions than their 32-bit counterparts.  For example, the
+non-PIC expansion of 'dla $4,sym' is usually:
+
+     lui     $4,%highest(sym)
+     lui     $1,%hi(sym)
+     daddiu  $4,$4,%higher(sym)
+     daddiu  $1,$1,%lo(sym)
+     dsll32  $4,$4,0
+     daddu   $4,$4,$1
+
+   whereas the 32-bit expansion is simply:
+
+     lui     $4,%hi(sym)
+     daddiu  $4,$4,%lo(sym)
+
+   n64 code is sometimes constructed in such a way that all symbolic
+constants are known to have 32-bit values, and in such cases, it's
+preferable to use the 32-bit expansion instead of the 64-bit expansion.
+
+   You can use the '.set sym32' directive to tell the assembler that,
+from this point on, all expressions of the form 'SYMBOL' or 'SYMBOL +
+OFFSET' have 32-bit values.  For example:
+
+     .set sym32
+     dla     $4,sym
+     lw      $4,sym+16
+     sw      $4,sym+0x8000($4)
+
+   will cause the assembler to treat 'sym', 'sym+16' and 'sym+0x8000' as
+32-bit values.  The handling of non-symbolic addresses is not affected.
+
+   The directive '.set nosym32' ends a '.set sym32' block and reverts to
+the normal behavior.  It is also possible to change the symbol size
+using the command-line options '-msym32' and '-mno-sym32'.
+
+   These options and directives are always accepted, but at present,
+they have no effect for anything other than n64.
+
+11.5 Directives to override the ISA level
+=========================================
+
+GNU 'as' supports an additional directive to change the MIPS Instruction
+Set Architecture level on the fly: '.set mipsN'.  N should be a number
+from 0 to 5, or 32, 32r2, 64 or 64r2.  The values other than 0 make the
+assembler accept instructions for the corresponding ISA level, from that
+point on in the assembly.  '.set mipsN' affects not only which
+instructions are permitted, but also how certain macros are expanded.
+'.set mips0' restores the ISA level to its original level: either the
+level you selected with command line options, or the default for your
+configuration.  You can use this feature to permit specific MIPS3
+instructions while assembling in 32 bit mode.  Use this directive with
+care!
+
+   The '.set arch=CPU' directive provides even finer control.  It
+changes the effective CPU target and allows the assembler to use
+instructions specific to a particular CPU. All CPUs supported by the
+'-march' command line option are also selectable by this directive.  The
+original value is restored by '.set arch=default'.
+
+   The directive '.set mips16' puts the assembler into MIPS 16 mode, in
+which it will assemble instructions for the MIPS 16 processor.  Use
+'.set nomips16' to return to normal 32 bit mode.
+
+   Traditional MIPS assemblers do not support this directive.
+
+11.6 Directives for extending MIPS 16 bit instructions
+======================================================
+
+By default, MIPS 16 instructions are automatically extended to 32 bits
+when necessary.  The directive '.set noautoextend' will turn this off.
+When '.set noautoextend' is in effect, any 32 bit instruction must be
+explicitly extended with the '.e' modifier (e.g., 'li.e $4,1000').  The
+directive '.set autoextend' may be used to once again automatically
+extend instructions when necessary.
+
+   This directive is only meaningful when in MIPS 16 mode.  Traditional
+MIPS assemblers do not support this directive.
+
+11.7 Directive to mark data as an instruction
+=============================================
+
+The '.insn' directive tells 'as' that the following data is actually
+instructions.  This makes a difference in MIPS 16 mode: when loading the
+address of a label which precedes instructions, 'as' automatically adds
+1 to the value, so that jumping to the loaded address will do the right
+thing.
+
+11.8 Directives to save and restore options
+===========================================
+
+The directives '.set push' and '.set pop' may be used to save and
+restore the current settings for all the options which are controlled by
+'.set'.  The '.set push' directive saves the current settings on a
+stack.  The '.set pop' directive pops the stack and restores the
+settings.
+
+   These directives can be useful inside an macro which must change an
+option such as the ISA level or instruction reordering but does not want
+to change the state of the code which invoked the macro.
+
+   Traditional MIPS assemblers do not support these directives.
+
+11.9 Directives to control generation of MIPS ASE instructions
+==============================================================
+
+The directive '.set mips3d' makes the assembler accept instructions from
+the MIPS-3D Application Specific Extension from that point on in the
+assembly.  The '.set nomips3d' directive prevents MIPS-3D instructions
+from being accepted.
+
+   The directive '.set smartmips' makes the assembler accept
+instructions from the SmartMIPS Application Specific Extension to the
+MIPS32 ISA from that point on in the assembly.  The '.set nosmartmips'
+directive prevents SmartMIPS instructions from being accepted.
+
+   The directive '.set mdmx' makes the assembler accept instructions
+from the MDMX Application Specific Extension from that point on in the
+assembly.  The '.set nomdmx' directive prevents MDMX instructions from
+being accepted.
+
+   The directive '.set dsp' makes the assembler accept instructions from
+the DSP Release 1 Application Specific Extension from that point on in
+the assembly.  The '.set nodsp' directive prevents DSP Release 1
+instructions from being accepted.
+
+   The directive '.set dspr2' makes the assembler accept instructions
+from the DSP Release 2 Application Specific Extension from that point on
+in the assembly.  This dirctive implies '.set dsp'.  The '.set nodspr2'
+directive prevents DSP Release 2 instructions from being accepted.
+
+   The directive '.set mt' makes the assembler accept instructions from
+the MT Application Specific Extension from that point on in the
+assembly.  The '.set nomt' directive prevents MT instructions from being
+accepted.
+
+   Traditional MIPS assemblers do not support these directives.
+
+12 PowerPC Dependent Features
+*****************************
+
+12.1 Options
+============
+
+The PowerPC chip family includes several successive levels, using the
+same core instruction set, but including a few additional instructions
+at each level.  There are exceptions to this however.  For details on
+what instructions each variant supports, please see the chip's
+architecture reference manual.
+
+   The following table lists all available PowerPC options.
+
+'-mpwrx | -mpwr2'
+     Generate code for POWER/2 (RIOS2).
+
+'-mpwr'
+     Generate code for POWER (RIOS1)
+
+'-m601'
+     Generate code for PowerPC 601.
+
+'-mppc, -mppc32, -m603, -m604'
+     Generate code for PowerPC 603/604.
+
+'-m403, -m405'
+     Generate code for PowerPC 403/405.
+
+'-m440'
+     Generate code for PowerPC 440.  BookE and some 405 instructions.
+
+'-m7400, -m7410, -m7450, -m7455'
+     Generate code for PowerPC 7400/7410/7450/7455.
+
+'-mppc64, -m620'
+     Generate code for PowerPC 620/625/630.
+
+'-me500, -me500x2'
+     Generate code for Motorola e500 core complex.
+
+'-mspe'
+     Generate code for Motorola SPE instructions.
+
+'-mppc64bridge'
+     Generate code for PowerPC 64, including bridge insns.
+
+'-mbooke64'
+     Generate code for 64-bit BookE.
+
+'-mbooke, mbooke32'
+     Generate code for 32-bit BookE.
+
+'-me300'
+     Generate code for PowerPC e300 family.
+
+'-maltivec'
+     Generate code for processors with AltiVec instructions.
+
+'-mpower4'
+     Generate code for Power4 architecture.
+
+'-mpower5'
+     Generate code for Power5 architecture.
+
+'-mpower6'
+     Generate code for Power6 architecture.
+
+'-mcell'
+     Generate code for Cell Broadband Engine architecture.
+
+'-mcom'
+     Generate code Power/PowerPC common instructions.
+
+'-many'
+     Generate code for any architecture (PWR/PWRX/PPC).
+
+'-mregnames'
+     Allow symbolic names for registers.
+
+'-mno-regnames'
+     Do not allow symbolic names for registers.
+
+'-mrelocatable'
+     Support for GCC's -mrelocatable option.
+
+'-mrelocatable-lib'
+     Support for GCC's -mrelocatable-lib option.
+
+'-memb'
+     Set PPC_EMB bit in ELF flags.
+
+'-mlittle, -mlittle-endian'
+     Generate code for a little endian machine.
+
+'-mbig, -mbig-endian'
+     Generate code for a big endian machine.
+
+'-msolaris'
+     Generate code for Solaris.
+
+'-mno-solaris'
+     Do not generate code for Solaris.
+
+12.2 PowerPC Assembler Directives
+=================================
+
+A number of assembler directives are available for PowerPC. The
+following table is far from complete.
+
+'.machine "string"'
+     This directive allows you to change the machine for which code is
+     generated.  '"string"' may be any of the -m cpu selection options
+     (without the -m) enclosed in double quotes, '"push"', or '"pop"'.
+     '.machine "push"' saves the currently selected cpu, which may be
+     restored with '.machine "pop"'.
+
+13 SPARC Dependent Features
+***************************
+
+13.1 Options
+============
+
+The SPARC chip family includes several successive levels, using the same
+core instruction set, but including a few additional instructions at
+each level.  There are exceptions to this however.  For details on what
+instructions each variant supports, please see the chip's architecture
+reference manual.
+
+   By default, 'as' assumes the core instruction set (SPARC v6), but
+"bumps" the architecture level as needed: it switches to successively
+higher architectures as it encounters instructions that only exist in
+the higher levels.
+
+   If not configured for SPARC v9 ('sparc64-*-*') GAS will not bump
+passed sparclite by default, an option must be passed to enable the v9
+instructions.
+
+   GAS treats sparclite as being compatible with v8, unless an
+architecture is explicitly requested.  SPARC v9 is always incompatible
+with sparclite.
+
+'-Av6 | -Av7 | -Av8 | -Asparclet | -Asparclite'
+'-Av8plus | -Av8plusa | -Av9 | -Av9a'
+     Use one of the '-A' options to select one of the SPARC
+     architectures explicitly.  If you select an architecture
+     explicitly, 'as' reports a fatal error if it encounters an
+     instruction or feature requiring an incompatible or higher level.
+
+     '-Av8plus' and '-Av8plusa' select a 32 bit environment.
+
+     '-Av9' and '-Av9a' select a 64 bit environment and are not
+     available unless GAS is explicitly configured with 64 bit
+     environment support.
+
+     '-Av8plusa' and '-Av9a' enable the SPARC V9 instruction set with
+     UltraSPARC extensions.
+
+'-xarch=v8plus | -xarch=v8plusa'
+     For compatibility with the Solaris v9 assembler.  These options are
+     equivalent to -Av8plus and -Av8plusa, respectively.
+
+'-bump'
+     Warn whenever it is necessary to switch to another level.  If an
+     architecture level is explicitly requested, GAS will not issue
+     warnings until that level is reached, and will then bump the level
+     as required (except between incompatible levels).
+
+'-32 | -64'
+     Select the word size, either 32 bits or 64 bits.  These options are
+     only available with the ELF object file format, and require that
+     the necessary BFD support has been included.
+
+13.2 Enforcing aligned data
+===========================
+
+SPARC GAS normally permits data to be misaligned.  For example, it
+permits the '.long' pseudo-op to be used on a byte boundary.  However,
+the native SunOS and Solaris assemblers issue an error when they see
+misaligned data.
+
+   You can use the '--enforce-aligned-data' option to make SPARC GAS
+also issue an error about misaligned data, just as the SunOS and Solaris
+assemblers do.
+
+   The '--enforce-aligned-data' option is not the default because gcc
+issues misaligned data pseudo-ops when it initializes certain packed
+data structures (structures defined using the 'packed' attribute).  You
+may have to assemble with GAS in order to initialize packed data
+structures in your own code.
+
+13.3 Floating Point
+===================
+
+The Sparc uses IEEE floating-point numbers.
+
+13.4 Sparc Machine Directives
+=============================
+
+The Sparc version of 'as' supports the following additional machine
+directives:
+
+'.align'
+     This must be followed by the desired alignment in bytes.
+
+'.common'
+     This must be followed by a symbol name, a positive number, and
+     '"bss"'.  This behaves somewhat like '.comm', but the syntax is
+     different.
+
+'.half'
+     This is functionally identical to '.short'.
+
+'.nword'
+     On the Sparc, the '.nword' directive produces native word sized
+     value, ie.  if assembling with -32 it is equivalent to '.word', if
+     assembling with -64 it is equivalent to '.xword'.
+
+'.proc'
+     This directive is ignored.  Any text following it on the same line
+     is also ignored.
+
+'.register'
+     This directive declares use of a global application or system
+     register.  It must be followed by a register name %g2, %g3, %g6 or
+     %g7, comma and the symbol name for that register.  If symbol name
+     is '#scratch', it is a scratch register, if it is '#ignore', it
+     just suppresses any errors about using undeclared global register,
+     but does not emit any information about it into the object file.
+     This can be useful e.g.  if you save the register before use and
+     restore it after.
+
+'.reserve'
+     This must be followed by a symbol name, a positive number, and
+     '"bss"'.  This behaves somewhat like '.lcomm', but the syntax is
+     different.
+
+'.seg'
+     This must be followed by '"text"', '"data"', or '"data1"'.  It
+     behaves like '.text', '.data', or '.data 1'.
+
+'.skip'
+     This is functionally identical to the '.space' directive.
+
+'.word'
+     On the Sparc, the '.word' directive produces 32 bit values, instead
+     of the 16 bit values it produces on many other machines.
+
+'.xword'
+     On the Sparc V9 processor, the '.xword' directive produces 64 bit
+     values.
+
+14 Reporting Bugs
+*****************
+
+Your bug reports play an essential role in making 'as' reliable.
+
+   Reporting a bug may help you by bringing a solution to your problem,
+or it may not.  But in any case the principal function of a bug report
+is to help the entire community by making the next version of 'as' work
+better.  Bug reports are your contribution to the maintenance of 'as'.
+
+   In order for a bug report to serve its purpose, you must include the
+information that enables us to fix the bug.
+
+14.1 Have You Found a Bug?
+==========================
+
+If you are not sure whether you have found a bug, here are some
+guidelines:
+
+   * If the assembler gets a fatal signal, for any input whatever, that
+     is a 'as' bug.  Reliable assemblers never crash.
+
+   * If 'as' produces an error message for valid input, that is a bug.
+
+   * If 'as' does not produce an error message for invalid input, that
+     is a bug.  However, you should note that your idea of "invalid
+     input" might be our idea of "an extension" or "support for
+     traditional practice".
+
+   * If you are an experienced user of assemblers, your suggestions for
+     improvement of 'as' are welcome in any case.
+
+14.2 How to Report Bugs
+=======================
+
+A number of companies and individuals offer support for GNU products.
+If you obtained 'as' from a support organization, we recommend you
+contact that organization first.
+
+   You can find contact information for many support companies and
+individuals in the file 'etc/SERVICE' in the GNU Emacs distribution.
+
+   The fundamental principle of reporting bugs usefully is this: *report
+all the facts*.  If you are not sure whether to state a fact or leave it
+out, state it!
+
+   Often people omit facts because they think they know what causes the
+problem and assume that some details do not matter.  Thus, you might
+assume that the name of a symbol you use in an example does not matter.
+Well, probably it does not, but one cannot be sure.  Perhaps the bug is
+a stray memory reference which happens to fetch from the location where
+that name is stored in memory; perhaps, if the name were different, the
+contents of that location would fool the assembler into doing the right
+thing despite the bug.  Play it safe and give a specific, complete
+example.  That is the easiest thing for you to do, and the most helpful.
+
+   Keep in mind that the purpose of a bug report is to enable us to fix
+the bug if it is new to us.  Therefore, always write your bug reports on
+the assumption that the bug has not been reported previously.
+
+   Sometimes people give a few sketchy facts and ask, "Does this ring a
+bell?"  This cannot help us fix a bug, so it is basically useless.  We
+respond by asking for enough details to enable us to investigate.  You
+might as well expedite matters by sending them to begin with.
+
+   To enable us to fix the bug, you should include all these things:
+
+   * The version of 'as'.  'as' announces it if you start it with the
+     '--version' argument.
+
+     Without this, we will not know whether there is any point in
+     looking for the bug in the current version of 'as'.
+
+   * Any patches you may have applied to the 'as' source.
+
+   * The type of machine you are using, and the operating system name
+     and version number.
+
+   * What compiler (and its version) was used to compile 'as'--e.g.
+     "'gcc-2.7'".
+
+   * The command arguments you gave the assembler to assemble your
+     example and observe the bug.  To guarantee you will not omit
+     something important, list them all.  A copy of the Makefile (or the
+     output from make) is sufficient.
+
+     If we were to try to guess the arguments, we would probably guess
+     wrong and then we might not encounter the bug.
+
+   * A complete input file that will reproduce the bug.  If the bug is
+     observed when the assembler is invoked via a compiler, send the
+     assembler source, not the high level language source.  Most
+     compilers will produce the assembler source when run with the '-S'
+     option.  If you are using 'gcc', use the options '-v --save-temps';
+     this will save the assembler source in a file with an extension of
+     '.s', and also show you exactly how 'as' is being run.
+
+   * A description of what behavior you observe that you believe is
+     incorrect.  For example, "It gets a fatal signal."
+
+     Of course, if the bug is that 'as' gets a fatal signal, then we
+     will certainly notice it.  But if the bug is incorrect output, we
+     might not notice unless it is glaringly wrong.  You might as well
+     not give us a chance to make a mistake.
+
+     Even if the problem you experience is a fatal signal, you should
+     still say so explicitly.  Suppose something strange is going on,
+     such as, your copy of 'as' is out of sync, or you have encountered
+     a bug in the C library on your system.  (This has happened!)  Your
+     copy might crash and ours would not.  If you told us to expect a
+     crash, then when ours fails to crash, we would know that the bug
+     was not happening for us.  If you had not told us to expect a
+     crash, then we would not be able to draw any conclusion from our
+     observations.
+
+   * If you wish to suggest changes to the 'as' source, send us context
+     diffs, as generated by 'diff' with the '-u', '-c', or '-p' option.
+     Always send diffs from the old file to the new file.  If you even
+     discuss something in the 'as' source, refer to it by context, not
+     by line number.
+
+     The line numbers in our development sources will not match those in
+     your sources.  Your line numbers would convey no useful information
+     to us.
+
+   Here are some things that are not necessary:
+
+   * A description of the envelope of the bug.
+
+     Often people who encounter a bug spend a lot of time investigating
+     which changes to the input file will make the bug go away and which
+     changes will not affect it.
+
+     This is often time consuming and not very useful, because the way
+     we will find the bug is by running a single example under the
+     debugger with breakpoints, not by pure deduction from a series of
+     examples.  We recommend that you save your time for something else.
+
+     Of course, if you can find a simpler example to report _instead_ of
+     the original one, that is a convenience for us.  Errors in the
+     output will be easier to spot, running under the debugger will take
+     less time, and so on.
+
+     However, simplification is not vital; if you do not want to do
+     this, report the bug anyway and send us the entire test case you
+     used.
+
+   * A patch for the bug.
+
+     A patch for the bug does help us if it is a good one.  But do not
+     omit the necessary information, such as the test case, on the
+     assumption that a patch is all we need.  We might see problems with
+     your patch and decide to fix the problem another way, or we might
+     not understand it at all.
+
+     Sometimes with a program as complicated as 'as' it is very hard to
+     construct an example that will make the program follow a certain
+     path through the code.  If you do not send us the example, we will
+     not be able to construct one, so we will not be able to verify that
+     the bug is fixed.
+
+     And if we cannot understand what bug you are trying to fix, or why
+     your patch should be an improvement, we will not install it.  A
+     test case will help us to understand.
+
+   * A guess about what the bug is or what it depends on.
+
+     Such guesses are usually wrong.  Even we cannot guess right about
+     such things without first using the debugger to find the facts.
+
+15 Acknowledgements
+*******************
+
+If you have contributed to GAS and your name isn't listed here, it is
+not meant as a slight.  We just don't know about it.  Send mail to the
+maintainer, and we'll correct the situation.  Currently the maintainer
+is Ken Raeburn (email address 'raeburn@cygnus.com').
+
+   Dean Elsner wrote the original GNU assembler for the VAX.(1)
+
+   Jay Fenlason maintained GAS for a while, adding support for
+GDB-specific debug information and the 68k series machines, most of the
+preprocessing pass, and extensive changes in 'messages.c',
+'input-file.c', 'write.c'.
+
+   K. Richard Pixley maintained GAS for a while, adding various
+enhancements and many bug fixes, including merging support for several
+processors, breaking GAS up to handle multiple object file format back
+ends (including heavy rewrite, testing, an integration of the coff and
+b.out back ends), adding configuration including heavy testing and
+verification of cross assemblers and file splits and renaming, converted
+GAS to strictly ANSI C including full prototypes, added support for
+m680[34]0 and cpu32, did considerable work on i960 including a COFF port
+(including considerable amounts of reverse engineering), a SPARC opcode
+file rewrite, DECstation, rs6000, and hp300hpux host ports, updated
+"know" assertions and made them work, much other reorganization,
+cleanup, and lint.
+
+   Ken Raeburn wrote the high-level BFD interface code to replace most
+of the code in format-specific I/O modules.
+
+   The original VMS support was contributed by David L. Kashtan.  Eric
+Youngdale has done much work with it since.
+
+   The Intel 80386 machine description was written by Eliot Dresselhaus.
+
+   Minh Tran-Le at IntelliCorp contributed some AIX 386 support.
+
+   The Motorola 88k machine description was contributed by Devon Bowen
+of Buffalo University and Torbjorn Granlund of the Swedish Institute of
+Computer Science.
+
+   Keith Knowles at the Open Software Foundation wrote the original MIPS
+back end ('tc-mips.c', 'tc-mips.h'), and contributed Rose format support
+(which hasn't been merged in yet).  Ralph Campbell worked with the MIPS
+code to support a.out format.
+
+   Support for the Zilog Z8k and Renesas H8/300 processors (tc-z8k,
+tc-h8300), and IEEE 695 object file format (obj-ieee), was written by
+Steve Chamberlain of Cygnus Support.  Steve also modified the COFF back
+end to use BFD for some low-level operations, for use with the H8/300
+and AMD 29k targets.
+
+   John Gilmore built the AMD 29000 support, added '.include' support,
+and simplified the configuration of which versions accept which
+directives.  He updated the 68k machine description so that Motorola's
+opcodes always produced fixed-size instructions (e.g., 'jsr'), while
+synthetic instructions remained shrinkable ('jbsr').  John fixed many
+bugs, including true tested cross-compilation support, and one bug in
+relaxation that took a week and required the proverbial one-bit fix.
+
+   Ian Lance Taylor of Cygnus Support merged the Motorola and MIT syntax
+for the 68k, completed support for some COFF targets (68k, i386 SVR3,
+and SCO Unix), added support for MIPS ECOFF and ELF targets, wrote the
+initial RS/6000 and PowerPC assembler, and made a few other minor
+patches.
+
+   Steve Chamberlain made GAS able to generate listings.
+
+   Hewlett-Packard contributed support for the HP9000/300.
+
+   Jeff Law wrote GAS and BFD support for the native HPPA object format
+(SOM) along with a fairly extensive HPPA testsuite (for both SOM and ELF
+object formats).  This work was supported by both the Center for
+Software Science at the University of Utah and Cygnus Support.
+
+   Support for ELF format files has been worked on by Mark Eichin of
+Cygnus Support (original, incomplete implementation for SPARC), Pete
+Hoogenboom and Jeff Law at the University of Utah (HPPA mainly), Michael
+Meissner of the Open Software Foundation (i386 mainly), and Ken Raeburn
+of Cygnus Support (sparc, and some initial 64-bit support).
+
+   Linas Vepstas added GAS support for the ESA/390 "IBM 370"
+architecture.
+
+   Richard Henderson rewrote the Alpha assembler.  Klaus Kaempf wrote
+GAS and BFD support for openVMS/Alpha.
+
+   Timothy Wall, Michael Hayes, and Greg Smart contributed to the
+various tic* flavors.
+
+   David Heine, Sterling Augustine, Bob Wilson and John Ruttenberg from
+Tensilica, Inc. added support for Xtensa processors.
+
+   Several engineers at Cygnus Support have also provided many small bug
+fixes and configuration enhancements.
+
+   Many others have contributed large or small bugfixes and
+enhancements.  If you have contributed significant work and are not
+mentioned on this list, and want to be, let us know.  Some of the
+history has been lost; we are not intentionally leaving anyone out.
+
+Appendix A GNU Free Documentation License
+*****************************************
+
+                        Version 1.1, March 2000
+
+     Copyright (C) 2000, 2003 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
+     51 Franklin Street, Fifth Floor, Boston, MA  02110-1301  USA
+
+     Everyone is permitted to copy and distribute verbatim copies
+     of this license document, but changing it is not allowed.
+
+  0. PREAMBLE
+
+     The purpose of this License is to make a manual, textbook, or other
+     written document "free" in the sense of freedom: to assure everyone
+     the effective freedom to copy and redistribute it, with or without
+     modifying it, either commercially or noncommercially.  Secondarily,
+     this License preserves for the author and publisher a way to get
+     credit for their work, while not being considered responsible for
+     modifications made by others.
+
+     This License is a kind of "copyleft", which means that derivative
+     works of the document must themselves be free in the same sense.
+     It complements the GNU General Public License, which is a copyleft
+     license designed for free software.
+
+     We have designed this License in order to use it for manuals for
+     free software, because free software needs free documentation: a
+     free program should come with manuals providing the same freedoms
+     that the software does.  But this License is not limited to
+     software manuals; it can be used for any textual work, regardless
+     of subject matter or whether it is published as a printed book.  We
+     recommend this License principally for works whose purpose is
+     instruction or reference.
+
+
+  1. APPLICABILITY AND DEFINITIONS
+
+     This License applies to any manual or other work that contains a
+     notice placed by the copyright holder saying it can be distributed
+     under the terms of this License.  The "Document", below, refers to
+     any such manual or work.  Any member of the public is a licensee,
+     and is addressed as "you."
+
+     A "Modified Version" of the Document means any work containing the
+     Document or a portion of it, either copied verbatim, or with
+     modifications and/or translated into another language.
+
+     A "Secondary Section" is a named appendix or a front-matter section
+     of the Document that deals exclusively with the relationship of the
+     publishers or authors of the Document to the Document's overall
+     subject (or to related matters) and contains nothing that could
+     fall directly within that overall subject.  (For example, if the
+     Document is in part a textbook of mathematics, a Secondary Section
+     may not explain any mathematics.)  The relationship could be a
+     matter of historical connection with the subject or with related
+     matters, or of legal, commercial, philosophical, ethical or
+     political position regarding them.
+
+     The "Invariant Sections" are certain Secondary Sections whose
+     titles are designated, as being those of Invariant Sections, in the
+     notice that says that the Document is released under this License.
+
+     The "Cover Texts" are certain short passages of text that are
+     listed, as Front-Cover Texts or Back-Cover Texts, in the notice
+     that says that the Document is released under this License.
+
+     A "Transparent" copy of the Document means a machine-readable copy,
+     represented in a format whose specification is available to the
+     general public, whose contents can be viewed and edited directly
+     and straightforwardly with generic text editors or (for images
+     composed of pixels) generic paint programs or (for drawings) some
+     widely available drawing editor, and that is suitable for input to
+     text formatters or for automatic translation to a variety of
+     formats suitable for input to text formatters.  A copy made in an
+     otherwise Transparent file format whose markup has been designed to
+     thwart or discourage subsequent modification by readers is not
+     Transparent.  A copy that is not "Transparent" is called "Opaque."
+
+     Examples of suitable formats for Transparent copies include plain
+     ASCII without markup, Texinfo input format, LaTeX input format,
+     SGML or XML using a publicly available DTD, and standard-conforming
+     simple HTML designed for human modification.  Opaque formats
+     include PostScript, PDF, proprietary formats that can be read and
+     edited only by proprietary word processors, SGML or XML for which
+     the DTD and/or processing tools are not generally available, and
+     the machine-generated HTML produced by some word processors for
+     output purposes only.
+
+     The "Title Page" means, for a printed book, the title page itself,
+     plus such following pages as are needed to hold, legibly, the
+     material this License requires to appear in the title page.  For
+     works in formats which do not have any title page as such, "Title
+     Page" means the text near the most prominent appearance of the
+     work's title, preceding the beginning of the body of the text.
+
+  2. VERBATIM COPYING
+
+     You may copy and distribute the Document in any medium, either
+     commercially or noncommercially, provided that this License, the
+     copyright notices, and the license notice saying this License
+     applies to the Document are reproduced in all copies, and that you
+     add no other conditions whatsoever to those of this License.  You
+     may not use technical measures to obstruct or control the reading
+     or further copying of the copies you make or distribute.  However,
+     you may accept compensation in exchange for copies.  If you
+     distribute a large enough number of copies you must also follow the
+     conditions in section 3.
+
+     You may also lend copies, under the same conditions stated above,
+     and you may publicly display copies.
+
+  3. COPYING IN QUANTITY
+
+     If you publish printed copies of the Document numbering more than
+     100, and the Document's license notice requires Cover Texts, you
+     must enclose the copies in covers that carry, clearly and legibly,
+     all these Cover Texts: Front-Cover Texts on the front cover, and
+     Back-Cover Texts on the back cover.  Both covers must also clearly
+     and legibly identify you as the publisher of these copies.  The
+     front cover must present the full title with all words of the title
+     equally prominent and visible.  You may add other material on the
+     covers in addition.  Copying with changes limited to the covers, as
+     long as they preserve the title of the Document and satisfy these
+     conditions, can be treated as verbatim copying in other respects.
+
+     If the required texts for either cover are too voluminous to fit
+     legibly, you should put the first ones listed (as many as fit
+     reasonably) on the actual cover, and continue the rest onto
+     adjacent pages.
+
+     If you publish or distribute Opaque copies of the Document
+     numbering more than 100, you must either include a machine-readable
+     Transparent copy along with each Opaque copy, or state in or with
+     each Opaque copy a publicly-accessible computer-network location
+     containing a complete Transparent copy of the Document, free of
+     added material, which the general network-using public has access
+     to download anonymously at no charge using public-standard network
+     protocols.  If you use the latter option, you must take reasonably
+     prudent steps, when you begin distribution of Opaque copies in
+     quantity, to ensure that this Transparent copy will remain thus
+     accessible at the stated location until at least one year after the
+     last time you distribute an Opaque copy (directly or through your
+     agents or retailers) of that edition to the public.
+
+     It is requested, but not required, that you contact the authors of
+     the Document well before redistributing any large number of copies,
+     to give them a chance to provide you with an updated version of the
+     Document.
+
+  4. MODIFICATIONS
+
+     You may copy and distribute a Modified Version of the Document
+     under the conditions of sections 2 and 3 above, provided that you
+     release the Modified Version under precisely this License, with the
+     Modified Version filling the role of the Document, thus licensing
+     distribution and modification of the Modified Version to whoever
+     possesses a copy of it.  In addition, you must do these things in
+     the Modified Version:
+
+     A. Use in the Title Page (and on the covers, if any) a title
+     distinct from that of the Document, and from those of previous
+     versions (which should, if there were any, be listed in the History
+     section of the Document).  You may use the same title as a previous
+     version if the original publisher of that version gives permission.
+     B. List on the Title Page, as authors, one or more persons or
+     entities responsible for authorship of the modifications in the
+     Modified Version, together with at least five of the principal
+     authors of the Document (all of its principal authors, if it has
+     less than five).
+     C. State on the Title page the name of the publisher of the
+     Modified Version, as the publisher.
+     D. Preserve all the copyright notices of the Document.
+     E. Add an appropriate copyright notice for your modifications
+     adjacent to the other copyright notices.
+     F. Include, immediately after the copyright notices, a license
+     notice giving the public permission to use the Modified Version
+     under the terms of this License, in the form shown in the Addendum
+     below.
+     G. Preserve in that license notice the full lists of Invariant
+     Sections and required Cover Texts given in the Document's license
+     notice.
+     H. Include an unaltered copy of this License.
+     I. Preserve the section entitled "History", and its title, and add
+     to it an item stating at least the title, year, new authors, and
+     publisher of the Modified Version as given on the Title Page.  If
+     there is no section entitled "History" in the Document, create one
+     stating the title, year, authors, and publisher of the Document as
+     given on its Title Page, then add an item describing the Modified
+     Version as stated in the previous sentence.
+     J. Preserve the network location, if any, given in the Document for
+     public access to a Transparent copy of the Document, and likewise
+     the network locations given in the Document for previous versions
+     it was based on.  These may be placed in the "History" section.
+     You may omit a network location for a work that was published at
+     least four years before the Document itself, or if the original
+     publisher of the version it refers to gives permission.
+     K. In any section entitled "Acknowledgements" or "Dedications",
+     preserve the section's title, and preserve in the section all the
+     substance and tone of each of the contributor acknowledgements
+     and/or dedications given therein.
+     L. Preserve all the Invariant Sections of the Document, unaltered
+     in their text and in their titles.  Section numbers or the
+     equivalent are not considered part of the section titles.
+     M. Delete any section entitled "Endorsements."  Such a section may
+     not be included in the Modified Version.
+     N. Do not retitle any existing section as "Endorsements" or to
+     conflict in title with any Invariant Section.
+
+     If the Modified Version includes new front-matter sections or
+     appendices that qualify as Secondary Sections and contain no
+     material copied from the Document, you may at your option designate
+     some or all of these sections as invariant.  To do this, add their
+     titles to the list of Invariant Sections in the Modified Version's
+     license notice.  These titles must be distinct from any other
+     section titles.
+
+     You may add a section entitled "Endorsements", provided it contains
+     nothing but endorsements of your Modified Version by various
+     parties-for example, statements of peer review or that the text has
+     been approved by an organization as the authoritative definition of
+     a standard.
+
+     You may add a passage of up to five words as a Front-Cover Text,
+     and a passage of up to 25 words as a Back-Cover Text, to the end of
+     the list of Cover Texts in the Modified Version.  Only one passage
+     of Front-Cover Text and one of Back-Cover Text may be added by (or
+     through arrangements made by) any one entity.  If the Document
+     already includes a cover text for the same cover, previously added
+     by you or by arrangement made by the same entity you are acting on
+     behalf of, you may not add another; but you may replace the old
+     one, on explicit permission from the previous publisher that added
+     the old one.
+
+     The author(s) and publisher(s) of the Document do not by this
+     License give permission to use their names for publicity for or to
+     assert or imply endorsement of any Modified Version.
+
+  5. COMBINING DOCUMENTS
+
+     You may combine the Document with other documents released under
+     this License, under the terms defined in section 4 above for
+     modified versions, provided that you include in the combination all
+     of the Invariant Sections of all of the original documents,
+     unmodified, and list them all as Invariant Sections of your
+     combined work in its license notice.
+
+     The combined work need only contain one copy of this License, and
+     multiple identical Invariant Sections may be replaced with a single
+     copy.  If there are multiple Invariant Sections with the same name
+     but different contents, make the title of each such section unique
+     by adding at the end of it, in parentheses, the name of the
+     original author or publisher of that section if known, or else a
+     unique number.  Make the same adjustment to the section titles in
+     the list of Invariant Sections in the license notice of the
+     combined work.
+
+     In the combination, you must combine any sections entitled
+     "History" in the various original documents, forming one section
+     entitled "History"; likewise combine any sections entitled
+     "Acknowledgements", and any sections entitled "Dedications."  You
+     must delete all sections entitled "Endorsements."
+
+  6. COLLECTIONS OF DOCUMENTS
+
+     You may make a collection consisting of the Document and other
+     documents released under this License, and replace the individual
+     copies of this License in the various documents with a single copy
+     that is included in the collection, provided that you follow the
+     rules of this License for verbatim copying of each of the documents
+     in all other respects.
+
+     You may extract a single document from such a collection, and
+     distribute it individually under this License, provided you insert
+     a copy of this License into the extracted document, and follow this
+     License in all other respects regarding verbatim copying of that
+     document.
+
+  7. AGGREGATION WITH INDEPENDENT WORKS
+
+     A compilation of the Document or its derivatives with other
+     separate and independent documents or works, in or on a volume of a
+     storage or distribution medium, does not as a whole count as a
+     Modified Version of the Document, provided no compilation copyright
+     is claimed for the compilation.  Such a compilation is called an
+     "aggregate", and this License does not apply to the other
+     self-contained works thus compiled with the Document, on account of
+     their being thus compiled, if they are not themselves derivative
+     works of the Document.
+
+     If the Cover Text requirement of section 3 is applicable to these
+     copies of the Document, then if the Document is less than one
+     quarter of the entire aggregate, the Document's Cover Texts may be
+     placed on covers that surround only the Document within the
+     aggregate.  Otherwise they must appear on covers around the whole
+     aggregate.
+
+  8. TRANSLATION
+
+     Translation is considered a kind of modification, so you may
+     distribute translations of the Document under the terms of section
+     4.  Replacing Invariant Sections with translations requires special
+     permission from their copyright holders, but you may include
+     translations of some or all Invariant Sections in addition to the
+     original versions of these Invariant Sections.  You may include a
+     translation of this License provided that you also include the
+     original English version of this License.  In case of a
+     disagreement between the translation and the original English
+     version of this License, the original English version will prevail.
+
+  9. TERMINATION
+
+     You may not copy, modify, sublicense, or distribute the Document
+     except as expressly provided for under this License.  Any other
+     attempt to copy, modify, sublicense or distribute the Document is
+     void, and will automatically terminate your rights under this
+     License.  However, parties who have received copies, or rights,
+     from you under this License will not have their licenses terminated
+     so long as such parties remain in full compliance.
+
+  10. FUTURE REVISIONS OF THIS LICENSE
+
+     The Free Software Foundation may publish new, revised versions of
+     the GNU Free Documentation License from time to time.  Such new
+     versions will be similar in spirit to the present version, but may
+     differ in detail to address new problems or concerns.  See
+     http://www.gnu.org/copyleft/.
+
+     Each version of the License is given a distinguishing version
+     number.  If the Document specifies that a particular numbered
+     version of this License "or any later version" applies to it, you
+     have the option of following the terms and conditions either of
+     that specified version or of any later version that has been
+     published (not as a draft) by the Free Software Foundation.  If the
+     Document does not specify a version number of this License, you may
+     choose any version ever published (not as a draft) by the Free
+     Software Foundation.
+
+ADDENDUM: How to use this License for your documents
+====================================================
+
+To use this License in a document you have written, include a copy of
+the License in the document and put the following copyright and license
+notices just after the title page:
+
+     Copyright (C)  YEAR  YOUR NAME.
+     Permission is granted to copy, distribute and/or modify this document
+     under the terms of the GNU Free Documentation License, Version 1.1
+     or any later version published by the Free Software Foundation;
+     with the Invariant Sections being LIST THEIR TITLES, with the
+     Front-Cover Texts being LIST, and with the Back-Cover Texts being LIST.
+     A copy of the license is included in the section entitled "GNU
+     Free Documentation License."
+
+   If you have no Invariant Sections, write "with no Invariant Sections"
+instead of saying which ones are invariant.  If you have no Front-Cover
+Texts, write "no Front-Cover Texts" instead of "Front-Cover Texts being
+LIST"; likewise for Back-Cover Texts.
+
+   If your document contains nontrivial examples of program code, we
+recommend releasing these examples in parallel under your choice of free
+software license, such as the GNU General Public License, to permit
+their use in free software.
+
+   ---------- Footnotes ----------
+
+   (1) Any more details?
+
+AS Index
+********
+
+* Menu:
+
+* #:                                     Comments.           (line 1306)
+* #APP:                                  Preprocessing.      (line 1268)
+* #NO_APP:                               Preprocessing.      (line 1268)
+* '$a':                                  ARM Mapping Symbols.
+                                                             (line 4193)
+* '$d':                                  ARM Mapping Symbols.
+                                                             (line 4199)
+* '$t':                                  ARM Mapping Symbols.
+                                                             (line 4196)
+* --:                                    Command Line.       (line  760)
+* '--32' option, i386:                   i386-Options.       (line 4220)
+* '--32' option, x86-64:                 i386-Options.       (line 4220)
+* '--64' option, i386:                   i386-Options.       (line 4220)
+* '--64' option, x86-64:                 i386-Options.       (line 4220)
+* --alternate:                           alternate.          (line  929)
+* '--divide' option, i386:               i386-Options.       (line 4236)
+* --enforce-aligned-data:                Sparc-Aligned-Data. (line 5460)
+* --fatal-warnings:                      W.                  (line 1222)
+* --hash-size=NUMBER:                    Overview.           (line  459)
+* --listing-cont-lines:                  listing.            (line 1015)
+* --listing-lhs-width:                   listing.            (line  997)
+* --listing-lhs-width2:                  listing.            (line 1002)
+* --listing-rhs-width:                   listing.            (line 1009)
+* --MD:                                  MD.                 (line 1149)
+* --no-warn:                             W.                  (line 1217)
+* --statistics:                          statistics.         (line 1188)
+* --traditional-format:                  traditional-format. (line 1196)
+* --warn:                                W.                  (line 1225)
+* -a:                                    a.                  (line  894)
+* -ac:                                   a.                  (line  894)
+* -ad:                                   a.                  (line  894)
+* -ah:                                   a.                  (line  894)
+* -al:                                   a.                  (line  894)
+* -an:                                   a.                  (line  894)
+* -as:                                   a.                  (line  894)
+* -Asparclet:                            Sparc-Opts.         (line 5421)
+* -Asparclite:                           Sparc-Opts.         (line 5421)
+* -Av6:                                  Sparc-Opts.         (line 5421)
+* -Av8:                                  Sparc-Opts.         (line 5421)
+* -Av9:                                  Sparc-Opts.         (line 5421)
+* -Av9a:                                 Sparc-Opts.         (line 5421)
+* -construct-floats:                     MIPS Opts.          (line 5056)
+* -D:                                    D.                  (line  934)
+* '-eabi=' command line option, ARM:     ARM Options.        (line 3844)
+* '-EB' command line option, ARM:        ARM Options.        (line 3849)
+* '-EB' option (MIPS):                   MIPS Opts.          (line 4879)
+* '-EL' command line option, ARM:        ARM Options.        (line 3853)
+* '-EL' option (MIPS):                   MIPS Opts.          (line 4879)
+* -f:                                    f.                  (line  940)
+* '-G' option (MIPS):                    MIPS Opts.          (line 4874)
+* -I PATH:                               I.                  (line  952)
+* -K:                                    K.                  (line  962)
+* '-k' command line option, ARM:         ARM Options.        (line 3857)
+* '-KPIC' option, MIPS:                  MIPS Opts.          (line 4887)
+* -L:                                    L.                  (line  972)
+* -M:                                    M.                  (line 1022)
+* '-mapcs' command line option, ARM:     ARM Options.        (line 3817)
+* '-mapcs-float' command line option, ARM: ARM Options.      (line 3830)
+* '-mapcs-reentrant' command line option, ARM: ARM Options.  (line 3835)
+* '-march=' command line option, ARM:    ARM Options.        (line 3773)
+* '-march=' option, i386:                i386-Options.       (line 4243)
+* '-march=' option, x86-64:              i386-Options.       (line 4243)
+* '-matpcs' command line option, ARM:    ARM Options.        (line 3822)
+* '-mconstant-gp' command line option, IA-64: IA-64 Options. (line 4733)
+* '-mcpu=' command line option, ARM:     ARM Options.        (line 3742)
+* '-mfloat-abi=' command line option, ARM: ARM Options.      (line 3839)
+* '-mfpu=' command line option, ARM:     ARM Options.        (line 3788)
+* -mno-sym32:                            MIPS Opts.          (line 5045)
+* -msym32:                               MIPS Opts.          (line 5045)
+* '-mthumb' command line option, ARM:    ARM Options.        (line 3808)
+* '-mthumb-interwork' command line option, ARM: ARM Options. (line 3813)
+* '-mtune=' option, i386:                i386-Options.       (line 4255)
+* '-mtune=' option, x86-64:              i386-Options.       (line 4255)
+* '-mvxworks-pic' option, MIPS:          MIPS Opts.          (line 4892)
+* -no-construct-floats:                  MIPS Opts.          (line 5056)
+* '-nocpp' ignored (MIPS):               MIPS Opts.          (line 5048)
+* -o:                                    o.                  (line 1160)
+* -R:                                    R.                  (line 1170)
+* -v:                                    v.                  (line 1206)
+* -version:                              v.                  (line 1206)
+* -W:                                    W.                  (line 1217)
+* '.' (symbol):                          Dot.                (line 1898)
+* '.arch' directive, ARM:                ARM Directives.     (line 4118)
+* '.cantunwind' directive, ARM:          ARM Directives.     (line 4022)
+* '.cpu' directive, ARM:                 ARM Directives.     (line 4114)
+* '.eabi_attribute' directive, ARM:      ARM Directives.     (line 4132)
+* '.fnend' directive, ARM:               ARM Directives.     (line 4014)
+* '.fnstart' directive, ARM:             ARM Directives.     (line 4011)
+* '.fpu' directive, ARM:                 ARM Directives.     (line 4128)
+* '.handlerdata' directive, ARM:         ARM Directives.     (line 4033)
+* '.insn':                               MIPS insn.          (line 5223)
+* '.ltorg' directive, ARM:               ARM Directives.     (line 3994)
+* '.movsp' directive, ARM:               ARM Directives.     (line 4088)
+* .o:                                    Object.             (line  827)
+* '.object_arch' directive, ARM:         ARM Directives.     (line 4122)
+* '.pad' directive, ARM:                 ARM Directives.     (line 4083)
+* '.personality' directive, ARM:         ARM Directives.     (line 4026)
+* '.personalityindex' directive, ARM:    ARM Directives.     (line 4029)
+* '.pool' directive, ARM:                ARM Directives.     (line 4008)
+* '.save' directive, ARM:                ARM Directives.     (line 4042)
+* '.set arch=CPU':                       MIPS ISA.           (line 5195)
+* '.set autoextend':                     MIPS autoextend.    (line 5210)
+* '.set dsp':                            MIPS ASE instruction generation overrides.
+                                                             (line 5262)
+* '.set dspr2':                          MIPS ASE instruction generation overrides.
+                                                             (line 5267)
+* '.set mdmx':                           MIPS ASE instruction generation overrides.
+                                                             (line 5257)
+* '.set mips3d':                         MIPS ASE instruction generation overrides.
+                                                             (line 5247)
+* '.set mipsN':                          MIPS ISA.           (line 5183)
+* '.set mt':                             MIPS ASE instruction generation overrides.
+                                                             (line 5272)
+* '.set noautoextend':                   MIPS autoextend.    (line 5210)
+* '.set nodsp':                          MIPS ASE instruction generation overrides.
+                                                             (line 5262)
+* '.set nodspr2':                        MIPS ASE instruction generation overrides.
+                                                             (line 5267)
+* '.set nomdmx':                         MIPS ASE instruction generation overrides.
+                                                             (line 5257)
+* '.set nomips3d':                       MIPS ASE instruction generation overrides.
+                                                             (line 5247)
+* '.set nomt':                           MIPS ASE instruction generation overrides.
+                                                             (line 5272)
+* '.set nosmartmips':                    MIPS ASE instruction generation overrides.
+                                                             (line 5252)
+* '.set nosym32':                        MIPS symbol sizes.  (line 5140)
+* '.set pop':                            MIPS option stack.  (line 5232)
+* '.set push':                           MIPS option stack.  (line 5232)
+* '.set smartmips':                      MIPS ASE instruction generation overrides.
+                                                             (line 5252)
+* '.set sym32':                          MIPS symbol sizes.  (line 5140)
+* '.setfp' directive, ARM:               ARM Directives.     (line 4093)
+* '.unwind_raw' directive, ARM:          ARM Directives.     (line 4107)
+* '.vsave' directive, ARM:               ARM Directives.     (line 4066)
+* 16-bit code, i386:                     i386-16bit.         (line 4615)
+* 3DNow!, i386:                          i386-SIMD.          (line 4593)
+* 3DNow!, x86-64:                        i386-SIMD.          (line 4593)
+* ':' (label):                           Statements.         (line 1355)
+* '\"' (doublequote character):          Strings.            (line 1423)
+* '\b' (backspace character):            Strings.            (line 1395)
+* '\DDD' (octal character code):         Strings.            (line 1410)
+* '\f' (formfeed character):             Strings.            (line 1398)
+* '\n' (newline character):              Strings.            (line 1401)
+* '\r' (carriage return character):      Strings.            (line 1404)
+* '\t' (tab):                            Strings.            (line 1407)
+* '\XD...' (hex character code):         Strings.            (line 1416)
+* '\\' ('\' character):                  Strings.            (line 1420)
+* a.out:                                 Object.             (line  827)
+* 'abort' directive:                     Abort.              (line 2114)
+* absolute section:                      Ld Sections.        (line 1632)
+* addition, permitted arguments:         Infix Ops.          (line 2055)
+* addresses:                             Expressions.        (line 1946)
+* addresses, format of:                  Secs Background.    (line 1573)
+* 'ADR reg,<label>' pseudo op, ARM:      ARM Opcodes.        (line 4159)
+* 'ADRL reg,<label>' pseudo op, ARM:     ARM Opcodes.        (line 4169)
+* advancing location counter:            Org.                (line 3101)
+* 'align' directive:                     Align.              (line 2123)
+* 'align' directive, ARM:                ARM Directives.     (line 3915)
+* 'align' directive, SPARC:              Sparc-Directives.   (line 5481)
+* arch directive, i386:                  i386-Arch.          (line 4670)
+* arch directive, x86-64:                i386-Arch.          (line 4670)
+* architectures, PowerPC:                PowerPC-Opts.       (line 5285)
+* architectures, SPARC:                  Sparc-Opts.         (line 5402)
+* arguments for addition:                Infix Ops.          (line 2055)
+* arguments for subtraction:             Infix Ops.          (line 2060)
+* arguments in expressions:              Arguments.          (line 1973)
+* arithmetic functions:                  Operators.          (line 1998)
+* arithmetic operands:                   Arguments.          (line 1973)
+* ARM data relocations:                  ARM-Relocations.    (line 3886)
+* 'arm' directive, ARM:                  ARM Directives.     (line 3969)
+* ARM floating point (IEEE):             ARM Floating Point. (line 3910)
+* ARM identifiers:                       ARM-Chars.          (line 3876)
+* ARM immediate character:               ARM-Chars.          (line 3874)
+* ARM line comment character:            ARM-Chars.          (line 3867)
+* ARM line separator:                    ARM-Chars.          (line 3871)
+* ARM machine directives:                ARM Directives.     (line 3915)
+* ARM opcodes:                           ARM Opcodes.        (line 4140)
+* ARM options (none):                    ARM Options.        (line 3742)
+* ARM register names:                    ARM-Regs.           (line 3881)
+* ARM support:                           Machine Dependencies.
+                                                             (line 3739)
+* 'ascii' directive:                     Ascii.              (line 2165)
+* 'asciz' directive:                     Asciz.              (line 2172)
+* assembler bugs, reporting:             Bug Reporting.      (line 5566)
+* assembler crash:                       Bug Criteria.       (line 5550)
+* assembler internal logic error:        As Sections.        (line 1674)
+* assembler version:                     v.                  (line 1206)
+* assembler, and linker:                 Secs Background.    (line 1535)
+* assembly listings, enabling:           a.                  (line  894)
+* assigning values to symbols:           Setting Symbols.    (line 1772)
+* assigning values to symbols <1>:       Equ.                (line 2471)
+* attributes, symbol:                    Symbol Attributes.  (line 1907)
+* att_syntax pseudo op, i386:            i386-Syntax.        (line 4265)
+* att_syntax pseudo op, x86-64:          i386-Syntax.        (line 4265)
+* Av7:                                   Sparc-Opts.         (line 5421)
+* backslash ('\\'):                      Strings.            (line 1420)
+* backspace ('\b'):                      Strings.            (line 1395)
+* 'balign' directive:                    Balign.             (line 2178)
+* 'balignl' directive:                   Balign.             (line 2199)
+* 'balignw' directive:                   Balign.             (line 2199)
+* big endian output, MIPS:               Overview.           (line  560)
+* big-endian output, MIPS:               MIPS Opts.          (line 4879)
+* bignums:                               Bignums.            (line 1485)
+* binary files, including:               Incbin.             (line 2707)
+* binary integers:                       Integers.           (line 1466)
+* bit names, IA-64:                      IA-64-Bits.         (line 4846)
+* bss section:                           Ld Sections.        (line 1623)
+* bss section <1>:                       bss.                (line 1739)
+* bug criteria:                          Bug Criteria.       (line 5547)
+* bug reports:                           Bug Reporting.      (line 5566)
+* bugs in assembler:                     Reporting Bugs.     (line 5534)
+* bus lock prefixes, i386:               i386-Prefixes.      (line 4444)
+* 'byte' directive:                      Byte.               (line 2211)
+* call instructions, i386:               i386-Mnemonics.     (line 4353)
+* call instructions, x86-64:             i386-Mnemonics.     (line 4353)
+* carriage return ('\r'):                Strings.            (line 1404)
+* 'cfi_endproc' directive:               CFI directives.     (line 2249)
+* 'cfi_startproc' directive:             CFI directives.     (line 2239)
+* character constants:                   Characters.         (line 1377)
+* character escape codes:                Strings.            (line 1395)
+* character, single:                     Chars.              (line 1443)
+* characters used in symbols:            Symbol Intro.       (line 1325)
+* 'code' directive, ARM:                 ARM Directives.     (line 3962)
+* 'code16' directive, i386:              i386-16bit.         (line 4615)
+* 'code16gcc' directive, i386:           i386-16bit.         (line 4615)
+* 'code32' directive, i386:              i386-16bit.         (line 4615)
+* 'code64' directive, i386:              i386-16bit.         (line 4615)
+* 'code64' directive, x86-64:            i386-16bit.         (line 4615)
+* COMDAT:                                Linkonce.           (line 2831)
+* 'comm' directive:                      Comm.               (line 2217)
+* command line conventions:              Command Line.       (line  756)
+* comments:                              Comments.           (line 1288)
+* comments, removed by preprocessor:     Preprocessing.      (line 1253)
+* 'common' directive, SPARC:             Sparc-Directives.   (line 5484)
+* common sections:                       Linkonce.           (line 2831)
+* common variable storage:               bss.                (line 1739)
+* comparison expressions:                Infix Ops.          (line 2066)
+* conditional assembly:                  If.                 (line 2629)
+* constant, single character:            Chars.              (line 1443)
+* constants:                             Constants.          (line 1366)
+* constants, bignum:                     Bignums.            (line 1485)
+* constants, character:                  Characters.         (line 1377)
+* constants, converted by preprocessor:  Preprocessing.      (line 1256)
+* constants, floating point:             Flonums.            (line 1493)
+* constants, integer:                    Integers.           (line 1466)
+* constants, number:                     Numbers.            (line 1457)
+* constants, string:                     Strings.            (line 1386)
+* conversion instructions, i386:         i386-Mnemonics.     (line 4334)
+* conversion instructions, x86-64:       i386-Mnemonics.     (line 4334)
+* coprocessor wait, i386:                i386-Prefixes.      (line 4448)
+* crash of assembler:                    Bug Criteria.       (line 5550)
+* current address:                       Dot.                (line 1898)
+* current address, advancing:            Org.                (line 3101)
+* data alignment on SPARC:               Sparc-Aligned-Data. (line 5455)
+* data and text sections, joining:       R.                  (line 1170)
+* 'data' directive:                      Data.               (line 2421)
+* data relocations, ARM:                 ARM-Relocations.    (line 3886)
+* debuggers, and symbol order:           Symbols.            (line 1757)
+* decimal integers:                      Integers.           (line 1472)
+* dependency tracking:                   MD.                 (line 1149)
+* deprecated directives:                 Deprecated.         (line 3731)
+* directives and instructions:           Statements.         (line 1347)
+* directives for PowerPC:                PowerPC-Pseudo.     (line 5386)
+* directives, machine independent:       Pseudo Ops.         (line 2105)
+* 'dn' and 'qn' directives, ARM:         ARM Directives.     (line 3938)
+* dollar local symbols:                  Symbol Names.       (line 1879)
+* dot (symbol):                          Dot.                (line 1898)
+* 'double' directive:                    Double.             (line 2428)
+* 'double' directive, i386:              i386-Float.         (line 4569)
+* 'double' directive, x86-64:            i386-Float.         (line 4569)
+* doublequote ('\"'):                    Strings.            (line 1423)
+* ECOFF sections:                        MIPS Object.        (line 5100)
+* eight-byte integer:                    Quad.               (line 3245)
+* 'eject' directive:                     Eject.              (line 2434)
+* ELF symbol type:                       Type.               (line 3620)
+* 'else' directive:                      Else.               (line 2439)
+* 'elseif' directive:                    Elseif.             (line 2446)
+* empty expressions:                     Empty Exprs.        (line 1959)
+* emulation:                             Overview.           (line  663)
+* 'end' directive:                       End.                (line 2453)
+* 'endfunc' directive:                   Endfunc.            (line 2459)
+* endianness, MIPS:                      Overview.           (line  560)
+* 'endif' directive:                     Endif.              (line 2464)
+* 'endm' directive:                      Macro.              (line 3025)
+* EOF, newline must precede:             Statements.         (line 1341)
+* 'equ' directive:                       Equ.                (line 2471)
+* 'equiv' directive:                     Equiv.              (line 2477)
+* 'eqv' directive:                       Eqv.                (line 2493)
+* 'err' directive:                       Err.                (line 2501)
+* error directive:                       Error.              (line 2509)
+* error messages:                        Errors.             (line  844)
+* error on valid input:                  Bug Criteria.       (line 5553)
+* errors, caused by warnings:            W.                  (line 1222)
+* errors, continuing after:              Z.                  (line 1231)
+* escape codes, character:               Strings.            (line 1395)
+* 'exitm' directive:                     Macro.              (line 3028)
+* expr (internal section):               As Sections.        (line 1678)
+* expression arguments:                  Arguments.          (line 1973)
+* expressions:                           Expressions.        (line 1946)
+* expressions, comparison:               Infix Ops.          (line 2066)
+* expressions, empty:                    Empty Exprs.        (line 1959)
+* expressions, integer:                  Integer Exprs.      (line 1967)
+* 'extern' directive:                    Extern.             (line 2524)
+* 'fail' directive:                      Fail.               (line 2531)
+* faster processing ('-f'):              f.                  (line  940)
+* fatal signal:                          Bug Criteria.       (line 5550)
+* 'file' directive:                      LNS directives.     (line 2369)
+* 'file' directive <1>:                  File.               (line 2540)
+* file name, logical:                    File.               (line 2540)
+* files, including:                      Include.            (line 2721)
+* files, input:                          Input Files.        (line  780)
+* 'fill' directive:                      Fill.               (line 2550)
+* filling memory:                        Skip.               (line 3452)
+* filling memory <1>:                    Space.              (line 3459)
+* 'float' directive:                     Float.              (line 2568)
+* 'float' directive, i386:               i386-Float.         (line 4569)
+* 'float' directive, x86-64:             i386-Float.         (line 4569)
+* floating point numbers:                Flonums.            (line 1493)
+* floating point numbers (double):       Double.             (line 2428)
+* floating point numbers (single):       Float.              (line 2568)
+* floating point numbers (single) <1>:   Single.             (line 3425)
+* floating point, ARM (IEEE):            ARM Floating Point. (line 3910)
+* floating point, i386:                  i386-Float.         (line 4561)
+* floating point, SPARC (IEEE):          Sparc-Float.        (line 5473)
+* floating point, x86-64:                i386-Float.         (line 4561)
+* flonums:                               Flonums.            (line 1493)
+* 'force_thumb' directive, ARM:          ARM Directives.     (line 3972)
+* format of error messages:              Errors.             (line  861)
+* format of warning messages:            Errors.             (line  850)
+* formfeed ('\f'):                       Strings.            (line 1398)
+* 'func' directive:                      Func.               (line 2574)
+* functions, in expressions:             Operators.          (line 1998)
+* 'global' directive:                    Global.             (line 2585)
+* 'gp' register, MIPS:                   MIPS Object.        (line 5105)
+* grouping data:                         Sub-Sections.       (line 1686)
+* 'half' directive, SPARC:               Sparc-Directives.   (line 5489)
+* hex character code ('\XD...'):         Strings.            (line 1416)
+* hexadecimal integers:                  Integers.           (line 1475)
+* 'hidden' directive:                    Hidden.             (line 2597)
+* 'hword' directive:                     hword.              (line 2610)
+* i386 16-bit code:                      i386-16bit.         (line 4615)
+* i386 arch directive:                   i386-Arch.          (line 4670)
+* i386 att_syntax pseudo op:             i386-Syntax.        (line 4265)
+* i386 conversion instructions:          i386-Mnemonics.     (line 4334)
+* i386 floating point:                   i386-Float.         (line 4561)
+* i386 immediate operands:               i386-Syntax.        (line 4274)
+* i386 instruction naming:               i386-Mnemonics.     (line 4309)
+* i386 instruction prefixes:             i386-Prefixes.      (line 4414)
+* i386 intel_syntax pseudo op:           i386-Syntax.        (line 4265)
+* i386 jump optimization:                i386-Jumps.         (line 4538)
+* i386 jump, call, return:               i386-Syntax.        (line 4296)
+* i386 jump/call operands:               i386-Syntax.        (line 4274)
+* i386 memory references:                i386-Memory.        (line 4471)
+* i386 'mul', 'imul' instructions:       i386-Notes.         (line 4714)
+* i386 options:                          i386-Options.       (line 4218)
+* i386 register operands:                i386-Syntax.        (line 4274)
+* i386 registers:                        i386-Regs.          (line 4359)
+* i386 sections:                         i386-Syntax.        (line 4302)
+* i386 size suffixes:                    i386-Syntax.        (line 4287)
+* i386 source, destination operands:     i386-Syntax.        (line 4280)
+* i386 support:                          .                   (line 4211)
+* i386 syntax compatibility:             i386-Syntax.        (line 4265)
+* i80306 support:                        .                   (line 4211)
+* IA-64 line comment character:          IA-64-Chars.        (line 4822)
+* IA-64 line separator:                  IA-64-Chars.        (line 4824)
+* IA-64 options:                         IA-64 Options.      (line 4733)
+* IA-64 Processor-status-Register bit names: IA-64-Bits.     (line 4846)
+* IA-64 registers:                       IA-64-Regs.         (line 4829)
+* IA-64 support:                         .                   (line 4730)
+* IA-64 Syntax:                          IA-64 Options.      (line 4812)
+* 'ident' directive:                     Ident.              (line 2618)
+* identifiers, ARM:                      ARM-Chars.          (line 3876)
+* 'if' directive:                        If.                 (line 2629)
+* 'ifb' directive:                       If.                 (line 2644)
+* 'ifc' directive:                       If.                 (line 2648)
+* 'ifdef' directive:                     If.                 (line 2639)
+* 'ifeq' directive:                      If.                 (line 2656)
+* 'ifeqs' directive:                     If.                 (line 2659)
+* 'ifge' directive:                      If.                 (line 2663)
+* 'ifgt' directive:                      If.                 (line 2667)
+* 'ifle' directive:                      If.                 (line 2671)
+* 'iflt' directive:                      If.                 (line 2675)
+* 'ifnb' directive:                      If.                 (line 2679)
+* 'ifnc' directive:                      If.                 (line 2684)
+* 'ifndef' directive:                    If.                 (line 2688)
+* 'ifne' directive:                      If.                 (line 2695)
+* 'ifnes' directive:                     If.                 (line 2699)
+* 'ifnotdef' directive:                  If.                 (line 2688)
+* immediate character, ARM:              ARM-Chars.          (line 3874)
+* immediate operands, i386:              i386-Syntax.        (line 4274)
+* immediate operands, x86-64:            i386-Syntax.        (line 4274)
+* 'imul' instruction, i386:              i386-Notes.         (line 4714)
+* 'imul' instruction, x86-64:            i386-Notes.         (line 4714)
+* 'incbin' directive:                    Incbin.             (line 2707)
+* 'include' directive:                   Include.            (line 2721)
+* 'include' directive search path:       I.                  (line  952)
+* infix operators:                       Infix Ops.          (line 2016)
+* inhibiting interrupts, i386:           i386-Prefixes.      (line 4444)
+* input:                                 Input Files.        (line  780)
+* input file linenumbers:                Input Files.        (line  809)
+* instruction naming, i386:              i386-Mnemonics.     (line 4309)
+* instruction naming, x86-64:            i386-Mnemonics.     (line 4309)
+* instruction prefixes, i386:            i386-Prefixes.      (line 4414)
+* instructions and directives:           Statements.         (line 1347)
+* 'int' directive:                       Int.                (line 2732)
+* 'int' directive, i386:                 i386-Float.         (line 4576)
+* 'int' directive, x86-64:               i386-Float.         (line 4576)
+* integer expressions:                   Integer Exprs.      (line 1967)
+* integer, 16-byte:                      Octa.               (line 3092)
+* integer, 8-byte:                       Quad.               (line 3245)
+* integers:                              Integers.           (line 1466)
+* integers, 16-bit:                      hword.              (line 2610)
+* integers, 32-bit:                      Int.                (line 2732)
+* integers, binary:                      Integers.           (line 1466)
+* integers, decimal:                     Integers.           (line 1472)
+* integers, hexadecimal:                 Integers.           (line 1475)
+* integers, octal:                       Integers.           (line 1469)
+* integers, one byte:                    Byte.               (line 2211)
+* intel_syntax pseudo op, i386:          i386-Syntax.        (line 4265)
+* intel_syntax pseudo op, x86-64:        i386-Syntax.        (line 4265)
+* internal assembler sections:           As Sections.        (line 1667)
+* 'internal' directive:                  Internal.           (line 2740)
+* invalid input:                         Bug Criteria.       (line 5555)
+* invocation summary:                    Overview.           (line  249)
+* 'irp' directive:                       Irp.                (line 2754)
+* 'irpc' directive:                      Irpc.               (line 2779)
+* joining text and data sections:        R.                  (line 1170)
+* jump instructions, i386:               i386-Mnemonics.     (line 4353)
+* jump instructions, x86-64:             i386-Mnemonics.     (line 4353)
+* jump optimization, i386:               i386-Jumps.         (line 4538)
+* jump optimization, x86-64:             i386-Jumps.         (line 4538)
+* jump/call operands, i386:              i386-Syntax.        (line 4274)
+* jump/call operands, x86-64:            i386-Syntax.        (line 4274)
+* label (':'):                           Statements.         (line 1355)
+* labels:                                Labels.             (line 1763)
+* 'lcomm' directive:                     Lcomm.              (line 2805)
+* ld:                                    Object.             (line  836)
+* 'LDR reg,=<label>' pseudo op, ARM:     ARM Opcodes.        (line 4149)
+* length of symbols:                     Symbol Intro.       (line 1331)
+* 'lflags' directive (ignored):          Lflags.             (line 2814)
+* line comment character:                Comments.           (line 1301)
+* line comment character, ARM:           ARM-Chars.          (line 3867)
+* line comment character, IA-64:         IA-64-Chars.        (line 4822)
+* 'line' directive:                      Line.               (line 2820)
+* line numbers, in input files:          Input Files.        (line  809)
+* line numbers, in warnings/errors:      Errors.             (line  854)
+* line separator character:              Statements.         (line 1336)
+* line separator, ARM:                   ARM-Chars.          (line 3871)
+* line separator, IA-64:                 IA-64-Chars.        (line 4824)
+* lines starting with '#':               Comments.           (line 1306)
+* linker:                                Object.             (line  836)
+* linker, and assembler:                 Secs Background.    (line 1535)
+* 'linkonce' directive:                  Linkonce.           (line 2831)
+* 'list' directive:                      List.               (line 2876)
+* listing control, turning off:          Nolist.             (line 3083)
+* listing control, turning on:           List.               (line 2876)
+* listing control: new page:             Eject.              (line 2434)
+* listing control: paper size:           Psize.              (line 3208)
+* listing control: subtitle:             Sbttl.              (line 3284)
+* listing control: title line:           Title.              (line 3609)
+* listings, enabling:                    a.                  (line  894)
+* little endian output, MIPS:            Overview.           (line  563)
+* little-endian output, MIPS:            MIPS Opts.          (line 4879)
+* 'ln' directive:                        Ln.                 (line 2863)
+* 'loc' directive:                       LNS directives.     (line 2382)
+* local common symbols:                  Lcomm.              (line 2805)
+* local labels:                          Symbol Names.       (line 1810)
+* local symbol names:                    Symbol Names.       (line 1797)
+* local symbols, retaining in output:    L.                  (line  972)
+* location counter:                      Dot.                (line 1898)
+* location counter, advancing:           Org.                (line 3101)
+* 'loc_mark_blocks' directive:           LNS directives.     (line 2412)
+* logical file name:                     File.               (line 2540)
+* logical line number:                   Line.               (line 2820)
+* logical line numbers:                  Comments.           (line 1306)
+* 'long' directive:                      Long.               (line 2889)
+* 'long' directive, i386:                i386-Float.         (line 4576)
+* 'long' directive, x86-64:              i386-Float.         (line 4576)
+* machine directives, ARM:               ARM Directives.     (line 3915)
+* machine directives, SPARC:             Sparc-Directives.   (line 5478)
+* machine independent directives:        Pseudo Ops.         (line 2105)
+* machine instructions (not covered):    Manual.             (line  716)
+* machine-independent syntax:            Syntax.             (line 1241)
+* 'macro' directive:                     Macro.              (line 2916)
+* macros:                                Macro.              (line 2894)
+* macros, count executed:                Macro.              (line 3030)
+* make rules:                            MD.                 (line 1149)
+* manual, structure and purpose:         Manual.             (line  708)
+* Maximum number of continuation lines:  listing.            (line 1015)
+* memory references, i386:               i386-Memory.        (line 4471)
+* memory references, x86-64:             i386-Memory.        (line 4471)
+* merging text and data sections:        R.                  (line 1170)
+* messages from assembler:               Errors.             (line  844)
+* minus, permitted arguments:            Infix Ops.          (line 2060)
+* MIPS architecture options:             MIPS Opts.          (line 4895)
+* MIPS big-endian output:                MIPS Opts.          (line 4879)
+* MIPS CPU override:                     MIPS ISA.           (line 5195)
+* MIPS debugging directives:             MIPS Stabs.         (line 5128)
+* MIPS DSP Release 1 instruction generation override: MIPS ASE instruction generation overrides.
+                                                             (line 5262)
+* MIPS DSP Release 2 instruction generation override: MIPS ASE instruction generation overrides.
+                                                             (line 5267)
+* MIPS ECOFF sections:                   MIPS Object.        (line 5100)
+* MIPS endianness:                       Overview.           (line  560)
+* MIPS ISA:                              Overview.           (line  566)
+* MIPS ISA override:                     MIPS ISA.           (line 5183)
+* MIPS little-endian output:             MIPS Opts.          (line 4879)
+* MIPS MDMX instruction generation override: MIPS ASE instruction generation overrides.
+                                                             (line 5257)
+* MIPS MIPS-3D instruction generation override: MIPS ASE instruction generation overrides.
+                                                             (line 5247)
+* MIPS MT instruction generation override: MIPS ASE instruction generation overrides.
+                                                             (line 5272)
+* MIPS option stack:                     MIPS option stack.  (line 5232)
+* MIPS processor:                        .                   (line 4862)
+* MMX, i386:                             i386-SIMD.          (line 4593)
+* MMX, x86-64:                           i386-SIMD.          (line 4593)
+* mnemonic suffixes, i386:               i386-Syntax.        (line 4287)
+* mnemonic suffixes, x86-64:             i386-Syntax.        (line 4287)
+* MOVW and MOVT relocations, ARM:        ARM-Relocations.    (line 3900)
+* MRI compatibility mode:                M.                  (line 1022)
+* 'mri' directive:                       MRI.                (line 2868)
+* MRI mode, temporarily:                 MRI.                (line 2868)
+* 'mul' instruction, i386:               i386-Notes.         (line 4714)
+* 'mul' instruction, x86-64:             i386-Notes.         (line 4714)
+* named section:                         Section.            (line 3293)
+* named sections:                        Ld Sections.        (line 1613)
+* names, symbol:                         Symbol Names.       (line 1781)
+* naming object file:                    o.                  (line 1160)
+* new page, in listings:                 Eject.              (line 2434)
+* newline ('\n'):                        Strings.            (line 1401)
+* newline, required at file end:         Statements.         (line 1341)
+* 'nolist' directive:                    Nolist.             (line 3083)
+* 'NOP' pseudo op, ARM:                  ARM Opcodes.        (line 4143)
+* null-terminated strings:               Asciz.              (line 2172)
+* number constants:                      Numbers.            (line 1457)
+* number of macros executed:             Macro.              (line 3030)
+* numbered subsections:                  Sub-Sections.       (line 1686)
+* numbers, 16-bit:                       hword.              (line 2610)
+* numeric values:                        Expressions.        (line 1946)
+* 'nword' directive, SPARC:              Sparc-Directives.   (line 5492)
+* object file:                           Object.             (line  827)
+* object file format:                    Object Formats.     (line  746)
+* object file name:                      o.                  (line 1160)
+* object file, after errors:             Z.                  (line 1231)
+* obsolescent directives:                Deprecated.         (line 3731)
+* 'octa' directive:                      Octa.               (line 3092)
+* octal character code ('\DDD'):         Strings.            (line 1410)
+* octal integers:                        Integers.           (line 1469)
+* opcodes for ARM:                       ARM Opcodes.        (line 4140)
+* operand delimiters, i386:              i386-Syntax.        (line 4274)
+* operand delimiters, x86-64:            i386-Syntax.        (line 4274)
+* operands in expressions:               Arguments.          (line 1973)
+* operator precedence:                   Infix Ops.          (line 2021)
+* operators, in expressions:             Operators.          (line 1998)
+* operators, permitted arguments:        Infix Ops.          (line 2016)
+* option summary:                        Overview.           (line  249)
+* options for ARM (none):                ARM Options.        (line 3742)
+* options for i386:                      i386-Options.       (line 4218)
+* options for IA-64:                     IA-64 Options.      (line 4733)
+* options for PowerPC:                   PowerPC-Opts.       (line 5285)
+* options for SPARC:                     Sparc-Opts.         (line 5402)
+* options for x86-64:                    i386-Options.       (line 4218)
+* options, all versions of assembler:    Invoking.           (line  870)
+* options, command line:                 Command Line.       (line  763)
+* 'org' directive:                       Org.                (line 3101)
+* output file:                           Object.             (line  827)
+* 'p2align' directive:                   P2align.            (line 3127)
+* 'p2alignl' directive:                  P2align.            (line 3149)
+* 'p2alignw' directive:                  P2align.            (line 3149)
+* padding the location counter:          Align.              (line 2123)
+* padding the location counter given a power of two: P2align.
+                                                             (line 3127)
+* padding the location counter given number of bytes: Balign.
+                                                             (line 2178)
+* page, in listings:                     Eject.              (line 2434)
+* paper size, for listings:              Psize.              (line 3208)
+* paths for '.include':                  I.                  (line  952)
+* patterns, writing in memory:           Fill.               (line 2550)
+* PIC code generation for ARM:           ARM Options.        (line 3857)
+* PIC selection, MIPS:                   MIPS Opts.          (line 4887)
+* plus, permitted arguments:             Infix Ops.          (line 2055)
+* 'popsection' directive:                PopSection.         (line 3177)
+* PowerPC architectures:                 PowerPC-Opts.       (line 5285)
+* PowerPC directives:                    PowerPC-Pseudo.     (line 5386)
+* PowerPC options:                       PowerPC-Opts.       (line 5285)
+* PowerPC support:                       .                   (line 5282)
+* precedence of operators:               Infix Ops.          (line 2021)
+* precision, floating point:             Flonums.            (line 1493)
+* prefix operators:                      Prefix Ops.         (line 2005)
+* prefixes, i386:                        i386-Prefixes.      (line 4414)
+* preprocessing:                         Preprocessing.      (line 1248)
+* preprocessing, turning on and off:     Preprocessing.      (line 1268)
+* 'previous' directive:                  Previous.           (line 3161)
+* 'print' directive:                     Print.              (line 3189)
+* 'proc' directive, SPARC:               Sparc-Directives.   (line 5497)
+* 'protected' directive:                 Protected.          (line 3195)
+* pseudo-ops, machine independent:       Pseudo Ops.         (line 2105)
+* 'psize' directive:                     Psize.              (line 3208)
+* PSR bits:                              IA-64-Bits.         (line 4846)
+* 'purgem' directive:                    Purgem.             (line 3224)
+* purpose of GNU assembler:              GNU Assembler.      (line  734)
+* 'pushsection' directive:               PushSection.        (line 3230)
+* 'quad' directive:                      Quad.               (line 3242)
+* 'quad' directive, i386:                i386-Float.         (line 4576)
+* 'quad' directive, x86-64:              i386-Float.         (line 4576)
+* real-mode code, i386:                  i386-16bit.         (line 4615)
+* 'register' directive, SPARC:           Sparc-Directives.   (line 5501)
+* register names, ARM:                   ARM-Regs.           (line 3881)
+* register names, IA-64:                 IA-64-Regs.         (line 4829)
+* register operands, i386:               i386-Syntax.        (line 4274)
+* register operands, x86-64:             i386-Syntax.        (line 4274)
+* registers, i386:                       i386-Regs.          (line 4359)
+* registers, x86-64:                     i386-Regs.          (line 4359)
+* 'reloc' directive:                     Reloc.              (line 3253)
+* relocation:                            Sections.           (line 1528)
+* relocation example:                    Ld Sections.        (line 1643)
+* repeat prefixes, i386:                 i386-Prefixes.      (line 4452)
+* reporting bugs in assembler:           Reporting Bugs.     (line 5534)
+* 'rept' directive:                      Rept.               (line 3266)
+* 'req' directive, ARM:                  ARM Directives.     (line 3922)
+* 'reserve' directive, SPARC:            Sparc-Directives.   (line 5511)
+* return instructions, i386:             i386-Syntax.        (line 4296)
+* return instructions, x86-64:           i386-Syntax.        (line 4296)
+* REX prefixes, i386:                    i386-Prefixes.      (line 4454)
+* 'sbttl' directive:                     Sbttl.              (line 3284)
+* search path for '.include':            I.                  (line  952)
+* 'section' directive (ELF version):     Section.            (line 3305)
+* section override prefixes, i386:       i386-Prefixes.      (line 4431)
+* Section Stack:                         Previous.           (line 3161)
+* Section Stack <1>:                     PopSection.         (line 3177)
+* Section Stack <2>:                     PushSection.        (line 3230)
+* Section Stack <3>:                     Section.            (line 3300)
+* Section Stack <4>:                     SubSection.         (line 3545)
+* section-relative addressing:           Secs Background.    (line 1573)
+* sections:                              Sections.           (line 1528)
+* sections in messages, internal:        As Sections.        (line 1667)
+* sections, i386:                        i386-Syntax.        (line 4302)
+* sections, named:                       Ld Sections.        (line 1613)
+* sections, x86-64:                      i386-Syntax.        (line 4302)
+* 'seg' directive, SPARC:                Sparc-Directives.   (line 5516)
+* 'set' directive:                       Set.                (line 3407)
+* 'short' directive:                     Short.              (line 3419)
+* SIMD, i386:                            i386-SIMD.          (line 4593)
+* SIMD, x86-64:                          i386-SIMD.          (line 4593)
+* single character constant:             Chars.              (line 1443)
+* 'single' directive:                    Single.             (line 3425)
+* 'single' directive, i386:              i386-Float.         (line 4569)
+* 'single' directive, x86-64:            i386-Float.         (line 4569)
+* sixteen bit integers:                  hword.              (line 2610)
+* sixteen byte integer:                  Octa.               (line 3092)
+* 'size' directive (ELF version):        Size.               (line 3433)
+* size prefixes, i386:                   i386-Prefixes.      (line 4435)
+* sizes operands, i386:                  i386-Syntax.        (line 4287)
+* sizes operands, x86-64:                i386-Syntax.        (line 4287)
+* 'skip' directive:                      Skip.               (line 3452)
+* 'skip' directive, SPARC:               Sparc-Directives.   (line 5520)
+* 'sleb128' directive:                   Sleb128.            (line 3445)
+* small objects, MIPS ECOFF:             MIPS Object.        (line 5105)
+* SmartMIPS instruction generation override: MIPS ASE instruction generation overrides.
+                                                             (line 5252)
+* source program:                        Input Files.        (line  780)
+* source, destination operands; i386:    i386-Syntax.        (line 4280)
+* source, destination operands; x86-64:  i386-Syntax.        (line 4280)
+* 'space' directive:                     Space.              (line 3459)
+* space used, maximum for assembly:      statistics.         (line 1188)
+* SPARC architectures:                   Sparc-Opts.         (line 5402)
+* SPARC data alignment:                  Sparc-Aligned-Data. (line 5455)
+* SPARC floating point (IEEE):           Sparc-Float.        (line 5473)
+* SPARC machine directives:              Sparc-Directives.   (line 5478)
+* SPARC options:                         Sparc-Opts.         (line 5402)
+* SPARC support:                         .                   (line 5399)
+* 'stabd' directive:                     Stab.               (line 3498)
+* 'stabn' directive:                     Stab.               (line 3509)
+* 'stabs' directive:                     Stab.               (line 3512)
+* 'stabX' directives:                    Stab.               (line 3466)
+* standard assembler sections:           Secs Background.    (line 1550)
+* standard input, as input file:         Command Line.       (line  760)
+* statement separator character:         Statements.         (line 1336)
+* statement separator, ARM:              ARM-Chars.          (line 3871)
+* statement separator, IA-64:            IA-64-Chars.        (line 4824)
+* statements, structure of:              Statements.         (line 1336)
+* statistics, about assembly:            statistics.         (line 1188)
+* stopping the assembly:                 Abort.              (line 2114)
+* string constants:                      Strings.            (line 1386)
+* 'string' directive:                    String.             (line 3518)
+* string literals:                       Ascii.              (line 2165)
+* string, copying to object file:        String.             (line 3518)
+* 'struct' directive:                    Struct.             (line 3527)
+* subexpressions:                        Arguments.          (line 1991)
+* 'subsection' directive:                SubSection.         (line 3545)
+* subtitles for listings:                Sbttl.              (line 3284)
+* subtraction, permitted arguments:      Infix Ops.          (line 2060)
+* summary of options:                    Overview.           (line  249)
+* supporting files, including:           Include.            (line 2721)
+* suppressing warnings:                  W.                  (line 1217)
+* symbol attributes:                     Symbol Attributes.  (line 1907)
+* symbol names:                          Symbol Names.       (line 1781)
+* symbol names, local:                   Symbol Names.       (line 1797)
+* symbol names, temporary:               Symbol Names.       (line 1810)
+* symbol type:                           Symbol Type.        (line 1938)
+* symbol type, ELF:                      Type.               (line 3620)
+* symbol value:                          Symbol Value.       (line 1918)
+* symbol value, setting:                 Set.                (line 3407)
+* symbol values, assigning:              Setting Symbols.    (line 1772)
+* symbol versioning:                     Symver.             (line 3557)
+* symbol, common:                        Comm.               (line 2217)
+* symbol, making visible to linker:      Global.             (line 2585)
+* symbolic debuggers, information for:   Stab.               (line 3466)
+* symbols:                               Symbols.            (line 1753)
+* symbols, assigning values to:          Equ.                (line 2471)
+* symbols, local common:                 Lcomm.              (line 2805)
+* 'symver' directive:                    Symver.             (line 3557)
+* syntax compatibility, i386:            i386-Syntax.        (line 4265)
+* syntax compatibility, x86-64:          i386-Syntax.        (line 4265)
+* syntax, machine-independent:           Syntax.             (line 1241)
+* tab ('\t'):                            Strings.            (line 1407)
+* temporary symbol names:                Symbol Names.       (line 1810)
+* text and data sections, joining:       R.                  (line 1170)
+* 'text' directive:                      Text.               (line 3602)
+* 'tfloat' directive, i386:              i386-Float.         (line 4569)
+* 'tfloat' directive, x86-64:            i386-Float.         (line 4569)
+* 'thumb' directive, ARM:                ARM Directives.     (line 3966)
+* Thumb support:                         Machine Dependencies.
+                                                             (line 3739)
+* 'thumb_func' directive, ARM:           ARM Directives.     (line 3976)
+* 'thumb_set' directive, ARM:            ARM Directives.     (line 3987)
+* time, total for assembly:              statistics.         (line 1188)
+* 'title' directive:                     Title.              (line 3609)
+* trusted compiler:                      f.                  (line  940)
+* turning preprocessing on and off:      Preprocessing.      (line 1268)
+* 'type' directive (ELF version):        Type.               (line 3620)
+* type of a symbol:                      Symbol Type.        (line 1938)
+* 'uleb128' directive:                   Uleb128.            (line 3656)
+* undefined section:                     Ld Sections.        (line 1639)
+* 'unreq' directive, ARM:                ARM Directives.     (line 3927)
+* value of a symbol:                     Symbol Value.       (line 1918)
+* 'version' directive:                   Version.            (line 3663)
+* version of assembler:                  v.                  (line 1206)
+* versions of symbols:                   Symver.             (line 3557)
+* visibility:                            Hidden.             (line 2597)
+* visibility <1>:                        Internal.           (line 2740)
+* visibility <2>:                        Protected.          (line 3195)
+* 'vtable_entry' directive:              VTableEntry.        (line 3669)
+* 'vtable_inherit' directive:            VTableInherit.      (line 3675)
+* warning directive:                     Warning.            (line 3683)
+* warning messages:                      Errors.             (line  844)
+* warnings, causing error:               W.                  (line 1222)
+* warnings, suppressing:                 W.                  (line 1217)
+* warnings, switching on:                W.                  (line 1225)
+* 'weak' directive:                      Weak.               (line 3689)
+* 'weakref' directive:                   Weakref.            (line 3705)
+* whitespace:                            Whitespace.         (line 1280)
+* whitespace, removed by preprocessor:   Preprocessing.      (line 1249)
+* Width of continuation lines of disassembly output: listing.
+                                                             (line 1002)
+* Width of first line disassembly output: listing.           (line  997)
+* Width of source line output:           listing.            (line 1009)
+* 'word' directive:                      Word.               (line 3725)
+* 'word' directive, i386:                i386-Float.         (line 4576)
+* 'word' directive, SPARC:               Sparc-Directives.   (line 5523)
+* 'word' directive, x86-64:              i386-Float.         (line 4576)
+* writing patterns in memory:            Fill.               (line 2550)
+* x86-64 arch directive:                 i386-Arch.          (line 4670)
+* x86-64 att_syntax pseudo op:           i386-Syntax.        (line 4265)
+* x86-64 conversion instructions:        i386-Mnemonics.     (line 4334)
+* x86-64 floating point:                 i386-Float.         (line 4561)
+* x86-64 immediate operands:             i386-Syntax.        (line 4274)
+* x86-64 instruction naming:             i386-Mnemonics.     (line 4309)
+* x86-64 intel_syntax pseudo op:         i386-Syntax.        (line 4265)
+* x86-64 jump optimization:              i386-Jumps.         (line 4538)
+* x86-64 jump, call, return:             i386-Syntax.        (line 4296)
+* x86-64 jump/call operands:             i386-Syntax.        (line 4274)
+* x86-64 memory references:              i386-Memory.        (line 4471)
+* x86-64 options:                        i386-Options.       (line 4218)
+* x86-64 register operands:              i386-Syntax.        (line 4274)
+* x86-64 registers:                      i386-Regs.          (line 4359)
+* x86-64 sections:                       i386-Syntax.        (line 4302)
+* x86-64 size suffixes:                  i386-Syntax.        (line 4287)
+* x86-64 source, destination operands:   i386-Syntax.        (line 4280)
+* x86-64 support:                        .                   (line 4211)
+* x86-64 syntax compatibility:           i386-Syntax.        (line 4265)
+* 'xword' directive, SPARC:              Sparc-Directives.   (line 5527)
+* zero-terminated strings:               Asciz.              (line 2172)
+
diff --git a/contrib/binutils/gas/doc/asconfig.texi b/contrib/binutils/gas/doc/asconfig.texi
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..95f4a5b
--- /dev/null
+++ b/contrib/binutils/gas/doc/asconfig.texi
@@ -0,0 +1,90 @@
+@c $FreeBSD: stable/10/gnu/usr.bin/binutils/doc/asconfig.texi 218822 2011-02-18 20:54:12Z dim $
+@c Copyright 1992, 1993, 1994, 1996, 1997, 1999, 2000, 2001, 2002,
+@c 2003, 2005
+@c Free Software Foundation, Inc.
+@c This file is part of the documentation for the GAS manual
+
+@c Configuration settings for all-inclusive version of manual
+
+@c switches:------------------------------------------------------------
+@c Properties of the manual
+@c ========================
+@c Discuss all architectures?
+@clear ALL-ARCH
+@c A generic form of manual (not tailored to specific target)?
+@clear GENERIC
+@c Include text on assembler internals?
+@set INTERNALS
+@c Many object formats supported in this config?
+@clear MULTI-OBJ
+
+@c Object formats of interest
+@c ==========================
+@clear AOUT
+@clear COFF
+@set ELF
+@clear SOM
+
+@c CPUs of interest
+@c ================
+@clear ALPHA
+@clear ARC
+@set ARM
+@clear BFIN
+@clear CRIS
+@clear D10V
+@clear D30V
+@clear H8/300
+@clear HPPA
+@clear I370
+@set I80386
+@clear I860
+@clear I960
+@set IA64
+@clear IP2K
+@clear M32C
+@clear M32R
+@clear xc16x
+@clear M68HC11
+@clear M680X0
+@clear MCORE
+@set MIPS
+@clear MMIX
+@clear MS1
+@clear MSP430
+@clear PDP11
+@clear PJ
+@set PPC
+@clear SH
+@set SPARC
+@clear TIC54X
+@clear V850
+@clear VAX
+@clear XTENSA
+@clear Z80
+@clear Z8000
+
+@c Does this version of the assembler use the difference-table kludge?
+@clear DIFF-TBL-KLUGE
+
+@c Do all machines described use IEEE floating point?
+@clear IEEEFLOAT
+
+@c Is a word 32 bits, or 16?
+@set W32
+@clear W16
+
+@c Do symbols have different characters than usual?
+@clear SPECIAL-SYMS
+
+@c strings:------------------------------------------------------------
+@c Name of the assembler:
+@set AS as
+@c Name of C compiler:
+@set GCC gcc
+@c Name of linker:
+@set LD ld
+@c Text for target machine (best not used in generic case; but just in case...)
+@set TARGET machine specific
+@c Name of object format NOT SET in generic version
+@set OBJ-NAME ELF
diff --git a/contrib/binutils/ld/configdoc.texi b/contrib/binutils/ld/configdoc.texi
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..03ab558
--- /dev/null
+++ b/contrib/binutils/ld/configdoc.texi
@@ -0,0 +1,25 @@
+@c ------------------------------ CONFIGURATION VARS:
+@c 1. Inclusiveness of this manual
+@set GENERIC
+
+@c 2. Specific target machines
+@set ARM
+@set H8300
+@set HPPA
+@set I960
+@set M68HC11
+@set MMIX
+@set MSP430
+@set POWERPC
+@set POWERPC64
+@set Renesas
+@set SPU
+@set TICOFF
+@set WIN32
+@set XTENSA
+
+@c 3. Properties of this configuration
+@clear SingleFormat
+@set UsesEnvVars
+@c ------------------------------ end CONFIGURATION VARS
+
diff --git a/contrib/binutils/ld/ld.txt b/contrib/binutils/ld/ld.txt
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..e4aa1f1
--- /dev/null
+++ b/contrib/binutils/ld/ld.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,6564 @@
+START-INFO-DIR-ENTRY
+* Ld: (ld).                       The GNU linker.
+END-INFO-DIR-ENTRY
+
+LD
+1 Overview
+2 Invocation
+  2.1 Command Line Options
+    2.1.1 Options Specific to i386 PE Targets
+    2.1.2 Options specific to Motorola 68HC11 and 68HC12 targets
+  2.2 Environment Variables
+3 Linker Scripts
+  3.1 Basic Linker Script Concepts
+  3.2 Linker Script Format
+  3.3 Simple Linker Script Example
+  3.4 Simple Linker Script Commands
+    3.4.1 Setting the Entry Point
+    3.4.2 Commands Dealing with Files
+    3.4.3 Commands Dealing with Object File Formats
+    3.4.4 Other Linker Script Commands
+  3.5 Assigning Values to Symbols
+    3.5.1 Simple Assignments
+    3.5.2 PROVIDE
+    3.5.3 PROVIDE_HIDDEN
+    3.5.4 Source Code Reference
+  3.6 SECTIONS Command
+    3.6.1 Output Section Description
+    3.6.2 Output Section Name
+    3.6.3 Output Section Address
+    3.6.4 Input Section Description
+      3.6.4.1 Input Section Basics
+      3.6.4.2 Input Section Wildcard Patterns
+      3.6.4.3 Input Section for Common Symbols
+      3.6.4.4 Input Section and Garbage Collection
+      3.6.4.5 Input Section Example
+    3.6.5 Output Section Data
+    3.6.6 Output Section Keywords
+    3.6.7 Output Section Discarding
+    3.6.8 Output Section Attributes
+      3.6.8.1 Output Section Type
+      3.6.8.2 Output Section LMA
+      3.6.8.3 Forced Output Alignment
+      3.6.8.4 Forced Input Alignment
+      3.6.8.5 Output Section Region
+      3.6.8.6 Output Section Phdr
+      3.6.8.7 Output Section Fill
+    3.6.9 Overlay Description
+  3.7 MEMORY Command
+  3.8 PHDRS Command
+  3.9 VERSION Command
+  3.10 Expressions in Linker Scripts
+    3.10.1 Constants
+    3.10.2 Symbol Names
+    3.10.3 Orphan Sections
+    3.10.4 The Location Counter
+    3.10.5 Operators
+    3.10.6 Evaluation
+    3.10.7 The Section of an Expression
+    3.10.8 Builtin Functions
+  3.11 Implicit Linker Scripts
+4 Machine Dependent Features
+  4.1 'ld' and the H8/300
+  4.2 'ld' and the Intel 960 Family
+  4.3 'ld' and the Motorola 68HC11 and 68HC12 families
+    4.3.1 Linker Relaxation
+    4.3.2 Trampoline Generation
+  4.4 'ld' and the ARM family
+  4.5 'ld' and HPPA 32-bit ELF Support
+  4.6 'ld' and MMIX
+  4.7 'ld' and MSP430
+  4.8 'ld' and PowerPC 32-bit ELF Support
+  4.9 'ld' and PowerPC64 64-bit ELF Support
+  4.10 'ld' and SPU ELF Support
+  4.11 'ld''s Support for Various TI COFF Versions
+  4.12 'ld' and WIN32 (cygwin/mingw)
+  4.13 'ld' and Xtensa Processors
+5 BFD
+  5.1 How It Works: An Outline of BFD
+    5.1.1 Information Loss
+    5.1.2 The BFD canonical object-file format
+6 Reporting Bugs
+  6.1 Have You Found a Bug?
+  6.2 How to Report Bugs
+Appendix A MRI Compatible Script Files
+Appendix B GNU Free Documentation License
+  ADDENDUM: How to use this License for your documents
+LD Index
+LD
+**
+
+This file documents the GNU linker ld version "2.17.50 [FreeBSD]
+2007-07-03".
+
+   This document is distributed under the terms of the GNU Free
+Documentation License.  A copy of the license is included in the section
+entitled "GNU Free Documentation License".
+
+1 Overview
+**********
+
+'ld' combines a number of object and archive files, relocates their data
+and ties up symbol references.  Usually the last step in compiling a
+program is to run 'ld'.
+
+   'ld' accepts Linker Command Language files written in a superset of
+AT&T's Link Editor Command Language syntax, to provide explicit and
+total control over the linking process.
+
+   This version of 'ld' uses the general purpose BFD libraries to
+operate on object files.  This allows 'ld' to read, combine, and write
+object files in many different formats--for example, COFF or 'a.out'.
+Different formats may be linked together to produce any available kind
+of object file.  *Note BFD::, for more information.
+
+   Aside from its flexibility, the GNU linker is more helpful than other
+linkers in providing diagnostic information.  Many linkers abandon
+execution immediately upon encountering an error; whenever possible,
+'ld' continues executing, allowing you to identify other errors (or, in
+some cases, to get an output file in spite of the error).
+
+2 Invocation
+************
+
+The GNU linker 'ld' is meant to cover a broad range of situations, and
+to be as compatible as possible with other linkers.  As a result, you
+have many choices to control its behavior.
+
+2.1 Command Line Options
+========================
+
+The linker supports a plethora of command-line options, but in actual
+practice few of them are used in any particular context.  For instance,
+a frequent use of 'ld' is to link standard Unix object files on a
+standard, supported Unix system.  On such a system, to link a file
+'hello.o':
+
+     ld -o OUTPUT /lib/crt0.o hello.o -lc
+
+   This tells 'ld' to produce a file called OUTPUT as the result of
+linking the file '/lib/crt0.o' with 'hello.o' and the library 'libc.a',
+which will come from the standard search directories.  (See the
+discussion of the '-l' option below.)
+
+   Some of the command-line options to 'ld' may be specified at any
+point in the command line.  However, options which refer to files, such
+as '-l' or '-T', cause the file to be read at the point at which the
+option appears in the command line, relative to the object files and
+other file options.  Repeating non-file options with a different
+argument will either have no further effect, or override prior
+occurrences (those further to the left on the command line) of that
+option.  Options which may be meaningfully specified more than once are
+noted in the descriptions below.
+
+   Non-option arguments are object files or archives which are to be
+linked together.  They may follow, precede, or be mixed in with
+command-line options, except that an object file argument may not be
+placed between an option and its argument.
+
+   Usually the linker is invoked with at least one object file, but you
+can specify other forms of binary input files using '-l', '-R', and the
+script command language.  If _no_ binary input files at all are
+specified, the linker does not produce any output, and issues the
+message 'No input files'.
+
+   If the linker cannot recognize the format of an object file, it will
+assume that it is a linker script.  A script specified in this way
+augments the main linker script used for the link (either the default
+linker script or the one specified by using '-T').  This feature permits
+the linker to link against a file which appears to be an object or an
+archive, but actually merely defines some symbol values, or uses 'INPUT'
+or 'GROUP' to load other objects.  Note that specifying a script in this
+way merely augments the main linker script; use the '-T' option to
+replace the default linker script entirely.  *Note Scripts::.
+
+   For options whose names are a single letter, option arguments must
+either follow the option letter without intervening whitespace, or be
+given as separate arguments immediately following the option that
+requires them.
+
+   For options whose names are multiple letters, either one dash or two
+can precede the option name; for example, '-trace-symbol' and
+'--trace-symbol' are equivalent.  Note--there is one exception to this
+rule.  Multiple letter options that start with a lower case 'o' can only
+be preceded by two dashes.  This is to reduce confusion with the '-o'
+option.  So for example '-omagic' sets the output file name to 'magic'
+whereas '--omagic' sets the NMAGIC flag on the output.
+
+   Arguments to multiple-letter options must either be separated from
+the option name by an equals sign, or be given as separate arguments
+immediately following the option that requires them.  For example,
+'--trace-symbol foo' and '--trace-symbol=foo' are equivalent.  Unique
+abbreviations of the names of multiple-letter options are accepted.
+
+   Note--if the linker is being invoked indirectly, via a compiler
+driver (e.g.  'gcc') then all the linker command line options should be
+prefixed by '-Wl,' (or whatever is appropriate for the particular
+compiler driver) like this:
+
+       gcc -Wl,--startgroup foo.o bar.o -Wl,--endgroup
+
+   This is important, because otherwise the compiler driver program may
+silently drop the linker options, resulting in a bad link.
+
+   Here is a table of the generic command line switches accepted by the
+GNU linker:
+
+'@FILE'
+     Read command-line options from FILE.  The options read are inserted
+     in place of the original @FILE option.  If FILE does not exist, or
+     cannot be read, then the option will be treated literally, and not
+     removed.
+
+     Options in FILE are separated by whitespace.  A whitespace
+     character may be included in an option by surrounding the entire
+     option in either single or double quotes.  Any character (including
+     a backslash) may be included by prefixing the character to be
+     included with a backslash.  The FILE may itself contain additional
+     @FILE options; any such options will be processed recursively.
+
+'-aKEYWORD'
+     This option is supported for HP/UX compatibility.  The KEYWORD
+     argument must be one of the strings 'archive', 'shared', or
+     'default'.  '-aarchive' is functionally equivalent to '-Bstatic',
+     and the other two keywords are functionally equivalent to
+     '-Bdynamic'.  This option may be used any number of times.
+
+'-AARCHITECTURE'
+'--architecture=ARCHITECTURE'
+     In the current release of 'ld', this option is useful only for the
+     Intel 960 family of architectures.  In that 'ld' configuration, the
+     ARCHITECTURE argument identifies the particular architecture in the
+     960 family, enabling some safeguards and modifying the
+     archive-library search path.  *Note 'ld' and the Intel 960 family:
+     i960, for details.
+
+     Future releases of 'ld' may support similar functionality for other
+     architecture families.
+
+'-b INPUT-FORMAT'
+'--format=INPUT-FORMAT'
+     'ld' may be configured to support more than one kind of object
+     file.  If your 'ld' is configured this way, you can use the '-b'
+     option to specify the binary format for input object files that
+     follow this option on the command line.  Even when 'ld' is
+     configured to support alternative object formats, you don't usually
+     need to specify this, as 'ld' should be configured to expect as a
+     default input format the most usual format on each machine.
+     INPUT-FORMAT is a text string, the name of a particular format
+     supported by the BFD libraries.  (You can list the available binary
+     formats with 'objdump -i'.)  *Note BFD::.
+
+     You may want to use this option if you are linking files with an
+     unusual binary format.  You can also use '-b' to switch formats
+     explicitly (when linking object files of different formats), by
+     including '-b INPUT-FORMAT' before each group of object files in a
+     particular format.
+
+     The default format is taken from the environment variable
+     'GNUTARGET'.  *Note Environment::.  You can also define the input
+     format from a script, using the command 'TARGET'; see *note Format
+     Commands::.
+
+'-c MRI-COMMANDFILE'
+'--mri-script=MRI-COMMANDFILE'
+     For compatibility with linkers produced by MRI, 'ld' accepts script
+     files written in an alternate, restricted command language,
+     described in *note MRI Compatible Script Files: MRI.  Introduce MRI
+     script files with the option '-c'; use the '-T' option to run
+     linker scripts written in the general-purpose 'ld' scripting
+     language.  If MRI-CMDFILE does not exist, 'ld' looks for it in the
+     directories specified by any '-L' options.
+
+'-d'
+'-dc'
+'-dp'
+     These three options are equivalent; multiple forms are supported
+     for compatibility with other linkers.  They assign space to common
+     symbols even if a relocatable output file is specified (with '-r').
+     The script command 'FORCE_COMMON_ALLOCATION' has the same effect.
+     *Note Miscellaneous Commands::.
+
+'-e ENTRY'
+'--entry=ENTRY'
+     Use ENTRY as the explicit symbol for beginning execution of your
+     program, rather than the default entry point.  If there is no
+     symbol named ENTRY, the linker will try to parse ENTRY as a number,
+     and use that as the entry address (the number will be interpreted
+     in base 10; you may use a leading '0x' for base 16, or a leading
+     '0' for base 8).  *Note Entry Point::, for a discussion of defaults
+     and other ways of specifying the entry point.
+
+'--exclude-libs LIB,LIB,...'
+     Specifies a list of archive libraries from which symbols should not
+     be automatically exported.  The library names may be delimited by
+     commas or colons.  Specifying '--exclude-libs ALL' excludes symbols
+     in all archive libraries from automatic export.  This option is
+     available only for the i386 PE targeted port of the linker and for
+     ELF targeted ports.  For i386 PE, symbols explicitly listed in a
+     .def file are still exported, regardless of this option.  For ELF
+     targeted ports, symbols affected by this option will be treated as
+     hidden.
+
+'-E'
+'--export-dynamic'
+     When creating a dynamically linked executable, add all symbols to
+     the dynamic symbol table.  The dynamic symbol table is the set of
+     symbols which are visible from dynamic objects at run time.
+
+     If you do not use this option, the dynamic symbol table will
+     normally contain only those symbols which are referenced by some
+     dynamic object mentioned in the link.
+
+     If you use 'dlopen' to load a dynamic object which needs to refer
+     back to the symbols defined by the program, rather than some other
+     dynamic object, then you will probably need to use this option when
+     linking the program itself.
+
+     You can also use the dynamic list to control what symbols should be
+     added to the dynamic symbol table if the output format supports it.
+     See the description of '--dynamic-list'.
+
+'-EB'
+     Link big-endian objects.  This affects the default output format.
+
+'-EL'
+     Link little-endian objects.  This affects the default output
+     format.
+
+'-f'
+'--auxiliary NAME'
+     When creating an ELF shared object, set the internal DT_AUXILIARY
+     field to the specified name.  This tells the dynamic linker that
+     the symbol table of the shared object should be used as an
+     auxiliary filter on the symbol table of the shared object NAME.
+
+     If you later link a program against this filter object, then, when
+     you run the program, the dynamic linker will see the DT_AUXILIARY
+     field.  If the dynamic linker resolves any symbols from the filter
+     object, it will first check whether there is a definition in the
+     shared object NAME.  If there is one, it will be used instead of
+     the definition in the filter object.  The shared object NAME need
+     not exist.  Thus the shared object NAME may be used to provide an
+     alternative implementation of certain functions, perhaps for
+     debugging or for machine specific performance.
+
+     This option may be specified more than once.  The DT_AUXILIARY
+     entries will be created in the order in which they appear on the
+     command line.
+
+'-F NAME'
+'--filter NAME'
+     When creating an ELF shared object, set the internal DT_FILTER
+     field to the specified name.  This tells the dynamic linker that
+     the symbol table of the shared object which is being created should
+     be used as a filter on the symbol table of the shared object NAME.
+
+     If you later link a program against this filter object, then, when
+     you run the program, the dynamic linker will see the DT_FILTER
+     field.  The dynamic linker will resolve symbols according to the
+     symbol table of the filter object as usual, but it will actually
+     link to the definitions found in the shared object NAME.  Thus the
+     filter object can be used to select a subset of the symbols
+     provided by the object NAME.
+
+     Some older linkers used the '-F' option throughout a compilation
+     toolchain for specifying object-file format for both input and
+     output object files.  The GNU linker uses other mechanisms for this
+     purpose: the '-b', '--format', '--oformat' options, the 'TARGET'
+     command in linker scripts, and the 'GNUTARGET' environment
+     variable.  The GNU linker will ignore the '-F' option when not
+     creating an ELF shared object.
+
+'-fini NAME'
+     When creating an ELF executable or shared object, call NAME when
+     the executable or shared object is unloaded, by setting DT_FINI to
+     the address of the function.  By default, the linker uses '_fini'
+     as the function to call.
+
+'-g'
+     Ignored.  Provided for compatibility with other tools.
+
+'-GVALUE'
+'--gpsize=VALUE'
+     Set the maximum size of objects to be optimized using the GP
+     register to SIZE.  This is only meaningful for object file formats
+     such as MIPS ECOFF which supports putting large and small objects
+     into different sections.  This is ignored for other object file
+     formats.
+
+'-hNAME'
+'-soname=NAME'
+     When creating an ELF shared object, set the internal DT_SONAME
+     field to the specified name.  When an executable is linked with a
+     shared object which has a DT_SONAME field, then when the executable
+     is run the dynamic linker will attempt to load the shared object
+     specified by the DT_SONAME field rather than the using the file
+     name given to the linker.
+
+'-i'
+     Perform an incremental link (same as option '-r').
+
+'-init NAME'
+     When creating an ELF executable or shared object, call NAME when
+     the executable or shared object is loaded, by setting DT_INIT to
+     the address of the function.  By default, the linker uses '_init'
+     as the function to call.
+
+'-lNAMESPEC'
+'--library=NAMESPEC'
+     Add the archive or object file specified by NAMESPEC to the list of
+     files to link.  This option may be used any number of times.  If
+     NAMESPEC is of the form ':FILENAME', 'ld' will search the library
+     path for a file called FILENAME, otherise it will search the
+     library path for a file called 'libNAMESPEC.a'.
+
+     On systems which support shared libraries, 'ld' may also search for
+     files other than 'libNAMESPEC.a'.  Specifically, on ELF and SunOS
+     systems, 'ld' will search a directory for a library called
+     'libNAMESPEC.so' before searching for one called 'libNAMESPEC.a'.
+     (By convention, a '.so' extension indicates a shared library.)
+     Note that this behavior does not apply to ':FILENAME', which always
+     specifies a file called FILENAME.
+
+     The linker will search an archive only once, at the location where
+     it is specified on the command line.  If the archive defines a
+     symbol which was undefined in some object which appeared before the
+     archive on the command line, the linker will include the
+     appropriate file(s) from the archive.  However, an undefined symbol
+     in an object appearing later on the command line will not cause the
+     linker to search the archive again.
+
+     See the '-(' option for a way to force the linker to search
+     archives multiple times.
+
+     You may list the same archive multiple times on the command line.
+
+     This type of archive searching is standard for Unix linkers.
+     However, if you are using 'ld' on AIX, note that it is different
+     from the behaviour of the AIX linker.
+
+'-LSEARCHDIR'
+'--library-path=SEARCHDIR'
+     Add path SEARCHDIR to the list of paths that 'ld' will search for
+     archive libraries and 'ld' control scripts.  You may use this
+     option any number of times.  The directories are searched in the
+     order in which they are specified on the command line.  Directories
+     specified on the command line are searched before the default
+     directories.  All '-L' options apply to all '-l' options,
+     regardless of the order in which the options appear.
+
+     If SEARCHDIR begins with '=', then the '=' will be replaced by the
+     "sysroot prefix", a path specified when the linker is configured.
+
+     The default set of paths searched (without being specified with
+     '-L') depends on which emulation mode 'ld' is using, and in some
+     cases also on how it was configured.  *Note Environment::.
+
+     The paths can also be specified in a link script with the
+     'SEARCH_DIR' command.  Directories specified this way are searched
+     at the point in which the linker script appears in the command
+     line.
+
+'-mEMULATION'
+     Emulate the EMULATION linker.  You can list the available
+     emulations with the '--verbose' or '-V' options.
+
+     If the '-m' option is not used, the emulation is taken from the
+     'LDEMULATION' environment variable, if that is defined.
+
+     Otherwise, the default emulation depends upon how the linker was
+     configured.
+
+'-M'
+'--print-map'
+     Print a link map to the standard output.  A link map provides
+     information about the link, including the following:
+
+        * Where object files are mapped into memory.
+        * How common symbols are allocated.
+        * All archive members included in the link, with a mention of
+          the symbol which caused the archive member to be brought in.
+        * The values assigned to symbols.
+
+          Note - symbols whose values are computed by an expression
+          which involves a reference to a previous value of the same
+          symbol may not have correct result displayed in the link map.
+          This is because the linker discards intermediate results and
+          only retains the final value of an expression.  Under such
+          circumstances the linker will display the final value enclosed
+          by square brackets.  Thus for example a linker script
+          containing:
+
+                  foo = 1
+                  foo = foo * 4
+                  foo = foo + 8
+
+          will produce the following output in the link map if the '-M'
+          option is used:
+
+                  0x00000001                foo = 0x1
+                  [0x0000000c]                foo = (foo * 0x4)
+                  [0x0000000c]                foo = (foo + 0x8)
+
+          See *note Expressions:: for more information about expressions
+          in linker scripts.
+
+'-n'
+'--nmagic'
+     Turn off page alignment of sections, and mark the output as
+     'NMAGIC' if possible.
+
+'-N'
+'--omagic'
+     Set the text and data sections to be readable and writable.  Also,
+     do not page-align the data segment, and disable linking against
+     shared libraries.  If the output format supports Unix style magic
+     numbers, mark the output as 'OMAGIC'.  Note: Although a writable
+     text section is allowed for PE-COFF targets, it does not conform to
+     the format specification published by Microsoft.
+
+'--no-omagic'
+     This option negates most of the effects of the '-N' option.  It
+     sets the text section to be read-only, and forces the data segment
+     to be page-aligned.  Note - this option does not enable linking
+     against shared libraries.  Use '-Bdynamic' for this.
+
+'-o OUTPUT'
+'--output=OUTPUT'
+     Use OUTPUT as the name for the program produced by 'ld'; if this
+     option is not specified, the name 'a.out' is used by default.  The
+     script command 'OUTPUT' can also specify the output file name.
+
+'-O LEVEL'
+     If LEVEL is a numeric values greater than zero 'ld' optimizes the
+     output.  This might take significantly longer and therefore
+     probably should only be enabled for the final binary.
+
+'-q'
+'--emit-relocs'
+     Leave relocation sections and contents in fully linked executables.
+     Post link analysis and optimization tools may need this information
+     in order to perform correct modifications of executables.  This
+     results in larger executables.
+
+     This option is currently only supported on ELF platforms.
+
+'--force-dynamic'
+     Force the output file to have dynamic sections.  This option is
+     specific to VxWorks targets.
+
+'-r'
+'--relocatable'
+     Generate relocatable output--i.e., generate an output file that can
+     in turn serve as input to 'ld'.  This is often called "partial
+     linking".  As a side effect, in environments that support standard
+     Unix magic numbers, this option also sets the output file's magic
+     number to 'OMAGIC'.  If this option is not specified, an absolute
+     file is produced.  When linking C++ programs, this option _will
+     not_ resolve references to constructors; to do that, use '-Ur'.
+
+     When an input file does not have the same format as the output
+     file, partial linking is only supported if that input file does not
+     contain any relocations.  Different output formats can have further
+     restrictions; for example some 'a.out'-based formats do not support
+     partial linking with input files in other formats at all.
+
+     This option does the same thing as '-i'.
+
+'-R FILENAME'
+'--just-symbols=FILENAME'
+     Read symbol names and their addresses from FILENAME, but do not
+     relocate it or include it in the output.  This allows your output
+     file to refer symbolically to absolute locations of memory defined
+     in other programs.  You may use this option more than once.
+
+     For compatibility with other ELF linkers, if the '-R' option is
+     followed by a directory name, rather than a file name, it is
+     treated as the '-rpath' option.
+
+'-s'
+'--strip-all'
+     Omit all symbol information from the output file.
+
+'-S'
+'--strip-debug'
+     Omit debugger symbol information (but not all symbols) from the
+     output file.
+
+'-t'
+'--trace'
+     Print the names of the input files as 'ld' processes them.
+
+'-T SCRIPTFILE'
+'--script=SCRIPTFILE'
+     Use SCRIPTFILE as the linker script.  This script replaces 'ld''s
+     default linker script (rather than adding to it), so COMMANDFILE
+     must specify everything necessary to describe the output file.
+     *Note Scripts::.  If SCRIPTFILE does not exist in the current
+     directory, 'ld' looks for it in the directories specified by any
+     preceding '-L' options.  Multiple '-T' options accumulate.
+
+'-dT SCRIPTFILE'
+'--default-script=SCRIPTFILE'
+     Use SCRIPTFILE as the default linker script.  *Note Scripts::.
+
+     This option is similar to the '--script' option except that
+     processing of the script is delayed until after the rest of the
+     command line has been processed.  This allows options placed after
+     the '--default-script' option on the command line to affect the
+     behaviour of the linker script, which can be important when the
+     linker command line cannot be directly controlled by the user.  (eg
+     because the command line is being constructed by another tool, such
+     as 'gcc').
+
+'-u SYMBOL'
+'--undefined=SYMBOL'
+     Force SYMBOL to be entered in the output file as an undefined
+     symbol.  Doing this may, for example, trigger linking of additional
+     modules from standard libraries.  '-u' may be repeated with
+     different option arguments to enter additional undefined symbols.
+     This option is equivalent to the 'EXTERN' linker script command.
+
+'-Ur'
+     For anything other than C++ programs, this option is equivalent to
+     '-r': it generates relocatable output--i.e., an output file that
+     can in turn serve as input to 'ld'.  When linking C++ programs,
+     '-Ur' _does_ resolve references to constructors, unlike '-r'.  It
+     does not work to use '-Ur' on files that were themselves linked
+     with '-Ur'; once the constructor table has been built, it cannot be
+     added to.  Use '-Ur' only for the last partial link, and '-r' for
+     the others.
+
+'--unique[=SECTION]'
+     Creates a separate output section for every input section matching
+     SECTION, or if the optional wildcard SECTION argument is missing,
+     for every orphan input section.  An orphan section is one not
+     specifically mentioned in a linker script.  You may use this option
+     multiple times on the command line; It prevents the normal merging
+     of input sections with the same name, overriding output section
+     assignments in a linker script.
+
+'-v'
+'--version'
+'-V'
+     Display the version number for 'ld'.  The '-V' option also lists
+     the supported emulations.
+
+'-x'
+'--discard-all'
+     Delete all local symbols.
+
+'-X'
+'--discard-locals'
+     Delete all temporary local symbols.  (These symbols start with
+     system-specific local label prefixes, typically '.L' for ELF
+     systems or 'L' for traditional a.out systems.)
+
+'-y SYMBOL'
+'--trace-symbol=SYMBOL'
+     Print the name of each linked file in which SYMBOL appears.  This
+     option may be given any number of times.  On many systems it is
+     necessary to prepend an underscore.
+
+     This option is useful when you have an undefined symbol in your
+     link but don't know where the reference is coming from.
+
+'-Y PATH'
+     Add PATH to the default library search path.  This option exists
+     for Solaris compatibility.
+
+'-z KEYWORD'
+     The recognized keywords are:
+
+     'combreloc'
+          Combines multiple reloc sections and sorts them to make
+          dynamic symbol lookup caching possible.
+
+     'defs'
+          Disallows undefined symbols in object files.  Undefined
+          symbols in shared libraries are still allowed.
+
+     'execstack'
+          Marks the object as requiring executable stack.
+
+     'initfirst'
+          This option is only meaningful when building a shared object.
+          It marks the object so that its runtime initialization will
+          occur before the runtime initialization of any other objects
+          brought into the process at the same time.  Similarly the
+          runtime finalization of the object will occur after the
+          runtime finalization of any other objects.
+
+     'interpose'
+          Marks the object that its symbol table interposes before all
+          symbols but the primary executable.
+
+     'lazy'
+          When generating an executable or shared library, mark it to
+          tell the dynamic linker to defer function call resolution to
+          the point when the function is called (lazy binding), rather
+          than at load time.  Lazy binding is the default.
+
+     'loadfltr'
+          Marks the object that its filters be processed immediately at
+          runtime.
+
+     'muldefs'
+          Allows multiple definitions.
+
+     'nocombreloc'
+          Disables multiple reloc sections combining.
+
+     'nocopyreloc'
+          Disables production of copy relocs.
+
+     'nodefaultlib'
+          Marks the object that the search for dependencies of this
+          object will ignore any default library search paths.
+
+     'nodelete'
+          Marks the object shouldn't be unloaded at runtime.
+
+     'nodlopen'
+          Marks the object not available to 'dlopen'.
+
+     'nodump'
+          Marks the object can not be dumped by 'dldump'.
+
+     'noexecstack'
+          Marks the object as not requiring executable stack.
+
+     'norelro'
+          Don't create an ELF 'PT_GNU_RELRO' segment header in the
+          object.
+
+     'now'
+          When generating an executable or shared library, mark it to
+          tell the dynamic linker to resolve all symbols when the
+          program is started, or when the shared library is linked to
+          using dlopen, instead of deferring function call resolution to
+          the point when the function is first called.
+
+     'origin'
+          Marks the object may contain $ORIGIN.
+
+     'relro'
+          Create an ELF 'PT_GNU_RELRO' segment header in the object.
+
+     'max-page-size=VALUE'
+          Set the emulation maximum page size to VALUE.
+
+     'common-page-size=VALUE'
+          Set the emulation common page size to VALUE.
+
+     Other keywords are ignored for Solaris compatibility.
+
+'-( ARCHIVES -)'
+'--start-group ARCHIVES --end-group'
+     The ARCHIVES should be a list of archive files.  They may be either
+     explicit file names, or '-l' options.
+
+     The specified archives are searched repeatedly until no new
+     undefined references are created.  Normally, an archive is searched
+     only once in the order that it is specified on the command line.
+     If a symbol in that archive is needed to resolve an undefined
+     symbol referred to by an object in an archive that appears later on
+     the command line, the linker would not be able to resolve that
+     reference.  By grouping the archives, they all be searched
+     repeatedly until all possible references are resolved.
+
+     Using this option has a significant performance cost.  It is best
+     to use it only when there are unavoidable circular references
+     between two or more archives.
+
+'--accept-unknown-input-arch'
+'--no-accept-unknown-input-arch'
+     Tells the linker to accept input files whose architecture cannot be
+     recognised.  The assumption is that the user knows what they are
+     doing and deliberately wants to link in these unknown input files.
+     This was the default behaviour of the linker, before release 2.14.
+     The default behaviour from release 2.14 onwards is to reject such
+     input files, and so the '--accept-unknown-input-arch' option has
+     been added to restore the old behaviour.
+
+'--as-needed'
+'--no-as-needed'
+     This option affects ELF DT_NEEDED tags for dynamic libraries
+     mentioned on the command line after the '--as-needed' option.
+     Normally, the linker will add a DT_NEEDED tag for each dynamic
+     library mentioned on the command line, regardless of whether the
+     library is actually needed.  '--as-needed' causes DT_NEEDED tags to
+     only be emitted for libraries that satisfy some symbol reference
+     from regular objects which is undefined at the point that the
+     library was linked.  '--no-as-needed' restores the default
+     behaviour.
+
+'--add-needed'
+'--no-add-needed'
+     This option affects the treatment of dynamic libraries from ELF
+     DT_NEEDED tags in dynamic libraries mentioned on the command line
+     after the '--no-add-needed' option.  Normally, the linker will add
+     a DT_NEEDED tag for each dynamic library from DT_NEEDED tags.
+     '--no-add-needed' causes DT_NEEDED tags will never be emitted for
+     those libraries from DT_NEEDED tags.  '--add-needed' restores the
+     default behaviour.
+
+'-assert KEYWORD'
+     This option is ignored for SunOS compatibility.
+
+'-Bdynamic'
+'-dy'
+'-call_shared'
+     Link against dynamic libraries.  This is only meaningful on
+     platforms for which shared libraries are supported.  This option is
+     normally the default on such platforms.  The different variants of
+     this option are for compatibility with various systems.  You may
+     use this option multiple times on the command line: it affects
+     library searching for '-l' options which follow it.
+
+'-Bgroup'
+     Set the 'DF_1_GROUP' flag in the 'DT_FLAGS_1' entry in the dynamic
+     section.  This causes the runtime linker to handle lookups in this
+     object and its dependencies to be performed only inside the group.
+     '--unresolved-symbols=report-all' is implied.  This option is only
+     meaningful on ELF platforms which support shared libraries.
+
+'-Bstatic'
+'-dn'
+'-non_shared'
+'-static'
+     Do not link against shared libraries.  This is only meaningful on
+     platforms for which shared libraries are supported.  The different
+     variants of this option are for compatibility with various systems.
+     You may use this option multiple times on the command line: it
+     affects library searching for '-l' options which follow it.  This
+     option also implies '--unresolved-symbols=report-all'.  This option
+     can be used with '-shared'.  Doing so means that a shared library
+     is being created but that all of the library's external references
+     must be resolved by pulling in entries from static libraries.
+
+'-Bsymbolic'
+     When creating a shared library, bind references to global symbols
+     to the definition within the shared library, if any.  Normally, it
+     is possible for a program linked against a shared library to
+     override the definition within the shared library.  This option is
+     only meaningful on ELF platforms which support shared libraries.
+
+'-Bsymbolic-functions'
+     When creating a shared library, bind references to global function
+     symbols to the definition within the shared library, if any.  This
+     option is only meaningful on ELF platforms which support shared
+     libraries.
+
+'--dynamic-list=DYNAMIC-LIST-FILE'
+     Specify the name of a dynamic list file to the linker.  This is
+     typically used when creating shared libraries to specify a list of
+     global symbols whose references shouldn't be bound to the
+     definition within the shared library, or creating dynamically
+     linked executables to specify a list of symbols which should be
+     added to the symbol table in the executable.  This option is only
+     meaningful on ELF platforms which support shared libraries.
+
+     The format of the dynamic list is the same as the version node
+     without scope and node name.  See *note VERSION:: for more
+     information.
+
+'--dynamic-list-data'
+     Include all global data symbols to the dynamic list.
+
+'--dynamic-list-cpp-new'
+     Provide the builtin dynamic list for C++ operator new and delete.
+     It is mainly useful for building shared libstdc++.
+
+'--dynamic-list-cpp-typeinfo'
+     Provide the builtin dynamic list for C++ runtime type
+     identification.
+
+'--check-sections'
+'--no-check-sections'
+     Asks the linker _not_ to check section addresses after they have
+     been assigned to see if there are any overlaps.  Normally the
+     linker will perform this check, and if it finds any overlaps it
+     will produce suitable error messages.  The linker does know about,
+     and does make allowances for sections in overlays.  The default
+     behaviour can be restored by using the command line switch
+     '--check-sections'.
+
+'--cref'
+     Output a cross reference table.  If a linker map file is being
+     generated, the cross reference table is printed to the map file.
+     Otherwise, it is printed on the standard output.
+
+     The format of the table is intentionally simple, so that it may be
+     easily processed by a script if necessary.  The symbols are printed
+     out, sorted by name.  For each symbol, a list of file names is
+     given.  If the symbol is defined, the first file listed is the
+     location of the definition.  The remaining files contain references
+     to the symbol.
+
+'--no-define-common'
+     This option inhibits the assignment of addresses to common symbols.
+     The script command 'INHIBIT_COMMON_ALLOCATION' has the same effect.
+     *Note Miscellaneous Commands::.
+
+     The '--no-define-common' option allows decoupling the decision to
+     assign addresses to Common symbols from the choice of the output
+     file type; otherwise a non-Relocatable output type forces assigning
+     addresses to Common symbols.  Using '--no-define-common' allows
+     Common symbols that are referenced from a shared library to be
+     assigned addresses only in the main program.  This eliminates the
+     unused duplicate space in the shared library, and also prevents any
+     possible confusion over resolving to the wrong duplicate when there
+     are many dynamic modules with specialized search paths for runtime
+     symbol resolution.
+
+'--defsym SYMBOL=EXPRESSION'
+     Create a global symbol in the output file, containing the absolute
+     address given by EXPRESSION.  You may use this option as many times
+     as necessary to define multiple symbols in the command line.  A
+     limited form of arithmetic is supported for the EXPRESSION in this
+     context: you may give a hexadecimal constant or the name of an
+     existing symbol, or use '+' and '-' to add or subtract hexadecimal
+     constants or symbols.  If you need more elaborate expressions,
+     consider using the linker command language from a script (*note
+     Assignment: Symbol Definitions: Assignments.).  _Note:_ there
+     should be no white space between SYMBOL, the equals sign ("<=>"),
+     and EXPRESSION.
+
+'--demangle[=STYLE]'
+'--no-demangle'
+     These options control whether to demangle symbol names in error
+     messages and other output.  When the linker is told to demangle, it
+     tries to present symbol names in a readable fashion: it strips
+     leading underscores if they are used by the object file format, and
+     converts C++ mangled symbol names into user readable names.
+     Different compilers have different mangling styles.  The optional
+     demangling style argument can be used to choose an appropriate
+     demangling style for your compiler.  The linker will demangle by
+     default unless the environment variable 'COLLECT_NO_DEMANGLE' is
+     set.  These options may be used to override the default.
+
+'--dynamic-linker FILE'
+     Set the name of the dynamic linker.  This is only meaningful when
+     generating dynamically linked ELF executables.  The default dynamic
+     linker is normally correct; don't use this unless you know what you
+     are doing.
+
+'--fatal-warnings'
+     Treat all warnings as errors.
+
+'--force-exe-suffix'
+     Make sure that an output file has a .exe suffix.
+
+     If a successfully built fully linked output file does not have a
+     '.exe' or '.dll' suffix, this option forces the linker to copy the
+     output file to one of the same name with a '.exe' suffix.  This
+     option is useful when using unmodified Unix makefiles on a
+     Microsoft Windows host, since some versions of Windows won't run an
+     image unless it ends in a '.exe' suffix.
+
+'--gc-sections'
+'--no-gc-sections'
+     Enable garbage collection of unused input sections.  It is ignored
+     on targets that do not support this option.  This option is not
+     compatible with '-r' or '--emit-relocs'.  The default behaviour (of
+     not performing this garbage collection) can be restored by
+     specifying '--no-gc-sections' on the command line.
+
+'--print-gc-sections'
+'--no-print-gc-sections'
+     List all sections removed by garbage collection.  The listing is
+     printed on stderr.  This option is only effective if garbage
+     collection has been enabled via the '--gc-sections') option.  The
+     default behaviour (of not listing the sections that are removed)
+     can be restored by specifying '--no-print-gc-sections' on the
+     command line.
+
+'--help'
+     Print a summary of the command-line options on the standard output
+     and exit.
+
+'--target-help'
+     Print a summary of all target specific options on the standard
+     output and exit.
+
+'-Map MAPFILE'
+     Print a link map to the file MAPFILE.  See the description of the
+     '-M' option, above.
+
+'--no-keep-memory'
+     'ld' normally optimizes for speed over memory usage by caching the
+     symbol tables of input files in memory.  This option tells 'ld' to
+     instead optimize for memory usage, by rereading the symbol tables
+     as necessary.  This may be required if 'ld' runs out of memory
+     space while linking a large executable.
+
+'--no-undefined'
+'-z defs'
+     Report unresolved symbol references from regular object files.
+     This is done even if the linker is creating a non-symbolic shared
+     library.  The switch '--[no-]allow-shlib-undefined' controls the
+     behaviour for reporting unresolved references found in shared
+     libraries being linked in.
+
+'--allow-multiple-definition'
+'-z muldefs'
+     Normally when a symbol is defined multiple times, the linker will
+     report a fatal error.  These options allow multiple definitions and
+     the first definition will be used.
+
+'--allow-shlib-undefined'
+'--no-allow-shlib-undefined'
+     Allows (the default) or disallows undefined symbols in shared
+     libraries.  This switch is similar to '--no-undefined' except that
+     it determines the behaviour when the undefined symbols are in a
+     shared library rather than a regular object file.  It does not
+     affect how undefined symbols in regular object files are handled.
+
+     The reason that '--allow-shlib-undefined' is the default is that
+     the shared library being specified at link time may not be the same
+     as the one that is available at load time, so the symbols might
+     actually be resolvable at load time.  Plus there are some systems,
+     (eg BeOS) where undefined symbols in shared libraries is normal.
+     (The kernel patches them at load time to select which function is
+     most appropriate for the current architecture.  This is used for
+     example to dynamically select an appropriate memset function).
+     Apparently it is also normal for HPPA shared libraries to have
+     undefined symbols.
+
+'--no-undefined-version'
+     Normally when a symbol has an undefined version, the linker will
+     ignore it.  This option disallows symbols with undefined version
+     and a fatal error will be issued instead.
+
+'--default-symver'
+     Create and use a default symbol version (the soname) for
+     unversioned exported symbols.
+
+'--default-imported-symver'
+     Create and use a default symbol version (the soname) for
+     unversioned imported symbols.
+
+'--no-warn-mismatch'
+     Normally 'ld' will give an error if you try to link together input
+     files that are mismatched for some reason, perhaps because they
+     have been compiled for different processors or for different
+     endiannesses.  This option tells 'ld' that it should silently
+     permit such possible errors.  This option should only be used with
+     care, in cases when you have taken some special action that ensures
+     that the linker errors are inappropriate.
+
+'--no-warn-search-mismatch'
+     Normally 'ld' will give a warning if it finds an incompatible
+     library during a library search.  This option silences the warning.
+
+'--no-whole-archive'
+     Turn off the effect of the '--whole-archive' option for subsequent
+     archive files.
+
+'--noinhibit-exec'
+     Retain the executable output file whenever it is still usable.
+     Normally, the linker will not produce an output file if it
+     encounters errors during the link process; it exits without writing
+     an output file when it issues any error whatsoever.
+
+'-nostdlib'
+     Only search library directories explicitly specified on the command
+     line.  Library directories specified in linker scripts (including
+     linker scripts specified on the command line) are ignored.
+
+'--oformat OUTPUT-FORMAT'
+     'ld' may be configured to support more than one kind of object
+     file.  If your 'ld' is configured this way, you can use the
+     '--oformat' option to specify the binary format for the output
+     object file.  Even when 'ld' is configured to support alternative
+     object formats, you don't usually need to specify this, as 'ld'
+     should be configured to produce as a default output format the most
+     usual format on each machine.  OUTPUT-FORMAT is a text string, the
+     name of a particular format supported by the BFD libraries.  (You
+     can list the available binary formats with 'objdump -i'.)  The
+     script command 'OUTPUT_FORMAT' can also specify the output format,
+     but this option overrides it.  *Note BFD::.
+
+'-pie'
+'--pic-executable'
+     Create a position independent executable.  This is currently only
+     supported on ELF platforms.  Position independent executables are
+     similar to shared libraries in that they are relocated by the
+     dynamic linker to the virtual address the OS chooses for them
+     (which can vary between invocations).  Like normal dynamically
+     linked executables they can be executed and symbols defined in the
+     executable cannot be overridden by shared libraries.
+
+'-qmagic'
+     This option is ignored for Linux compatibility.
+
+'-Qy'
+     This option is ignored for SVR4 compatibility.
+
+'--relax'
+     An option with machine dependent effects.  This option is only
+     supported on a few targets.  *Note 'ld' and the H8/300: H8/300.
+     *Note 'ld' and the Intel 960 family: i960.  *Note 'ld' and Xtensa
+     Processors: Xtensa.  *Note 'ld' and the 68HC11 and 68HC12:
+     M68HC11/68HC12.  *Note 'ld' and PowerPC 32-bit ELF Support: PowerPC
+     ELF32.
+
+     On some platforms, the '--relax' option performs global
+     optimizations that become possible when the linker resolves
+     addressing in the program, such as relaxing address modes and
+     synthesizing new instructions in the output object file.
+
+     On some platforms these link time global optimizations may make
+     symbolic debugging of the resulting executable impossible.  This is
+     known to be the case for the Matsushita MN10200 and MN10300 family
+     of processors.
+
+     On platforms where this is not supported, '--relax' is accepted,
+     but ignored.
+
+'--retain-symbols-file FILENAME'
+     Retain _only_ the symbols listed in the file FILENAME, discarding
+     all others.  FILENAME is simply a flat file, with one symbol name
+     per line.  This option is especially useful in environments (such
+     as VxWorks) where a large global symbol table is accumulated
+     gradually, to conserve run-time memory.
+
+     '--retain-symbols-file' does _not_ discard undefined symbols, or
+     symbols needed for relocations.
+
+     You may only specify '--retain-symbols-file' once in the command
+     line.  It overrides '-s' and '-S'.
+
+'-rpath DIR'
+     Add a directory to the runtime library search path.  This is used
+     when linking an ELF executable with shared objects.  All '-rpath'
+     arguments are concatenated and passed to the runtime linker, which
+     uses them to locate shared objects at runtime.  The '-rpath' option
+     is also used when locating shared objects which are needed by
+     shared objects explicitly included in the link; see the description
+     of the '-rpath-link' option.  If '-rpath' is not used when linking
+     an ELF executable, the contents of the environment variable
+     'LD_RUN_PATH' will be used if it is defined.
+
+     The '-rpath' option may also be used on SunOS. By default, on
+     SunOS, the linker will form a runtime search patch out of all the
+     '-L' options it is given.  If a '-rpath' option is used, the
+     runtime search path will be formed exclusively using the '-rpath'
+     options, ignoring the '-L' options.  This can be useful when using
+     gcc, which adds many '-L' options which may be on NFS mounted file
+     systems.
+
+     For compatibility with other ELF linkers, if the '-R' option is
+     followed by a directory name, rather than a file name, it is
+     treated as the '-rpath' option.
+
+'-rpath-link DIR'
+     When using ELF or SunOS, one shared library may require another.
+     This happens when an 'ld -shared' link includes a shared library as
+     one of the input files.
+
+     When the linker encounters such a dependency when doing a
+     non-shared, non-relocatable link, it will automatically try to
+     locate the required shared library and include it in the link, if
+     it is not included explicitly.  In such a case, the '-rpath-link'
+     option specifies the first set of directories to search.  The
+     '-rpath-link' option may specify a sequence of directory names
+     either by specifying a list of names separated by colons, or by
+     appearing multiple times.
+
+     This option should be used with caution as it overrides the search
+     path that may have been hard compiled into a shared library.  In
+     such a case it is possible to use unintentionally a different
+     search path than the runtime linker would do.
+
+     The linker uses the following search paths to locate required
+     shared libraries:
+       1. Any directories specified by '-rpath-link' options.
+       2. Any directories specified by '-rpath' options.  The difference
+          between '-rpath' and '-rpath-link' is that directories
+          specified by '-rpath' options are included in the executable
+          and used at runtime, whereas the '-rpath-link' option is only
+          effective at link time.  Searching '-rpath' in this way is
+          only supported by native linkers and cross linkers which have
+          been configured with the '--with-sysroot' option.
+       3. On an ELF system, if the '-rpath' and 'rpath-link' options
+          were not used, search the contents of the environment variable
+          'LD_RUN_PATH'.  It is for the native linker only.
+       4. On SunOS, if the '-rpath' option was not used, search any
+          directories specified using '-L' options.
+       5. For a native linker, the contents of the environment variable
+          'LD_LIBRARY_PATH'.
+       6. For a native ELF linker, the directories in 'DT_RUNPATH' or
+          'DT_RPATH' of a shared library are searched for shared
+          libraries needed by it.  The 'DT_RPATH' entries are ignored if
+          'DT_RUNPATH' entries exist.
+       7. The default directories, normally '/lib' and '/usr/lib'.
+       8. For a native linker on an ELF system, if the file
+          '/etc/ld.so.conf' exists, the list of directories found in
+          that file.
+
+     If the required shared library is not found, the linker will issue
+     a warning and continue with the link.
+
+'-shared'
+'-Bshareable'
+     Create a shared library.  This is currently only supported on ELF,
+     XCOFF and SunOS platforms.  On SunOS, the linker will automatically
+     create a shared library if the '-e' option is not used and there
+     are undefined symbols in the link.
+
+'--sort-common'
+     This option tells 'ld' to sort the common symbols by size when it
+     places them in the appropriate output sections.  First come all the
+     one byte symbols, then all the two byte, then all the four byte,
+     and then everything else.  This is to prevent gaps between symbols
+     due to alignment constraints.
+
+'--sort-section name'
+     This option will apply 'SORT_BY_NAME' to all wildcard section
+     patterns in the linker script.
+
+'--sort-section alignment'
+     This option will apply 'SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT' to all wildcard section
+     patterns in the linker script.
+
+'--split-by-file [SIZE]'
+     Similar to '--split-by-reloc' but creates a new output section for
+     each input file when SIZE is reached.  SIZE defaults to a size of 1
+     if not given.
+
+'--split-by-reloc [COUNT]'
+     Tries to creates extra sections in the output file so that no
+     single output section in the file contains more than COUNT
+     relocations.  This is useful when generating huge relocatable files
+     for downloading into certain real time kernels with the COFF object
+     file format; since COFF cannot represent more than 65535
+     relocations in a single section.  Note that this will fail to work
+     with object file formats which do not support arbitrary sections.
+     The linker will not split up individual input sections for
+     redistribution, so if a single input section contains more than
+     COUNT relocations one output section will contain that many
+     relocations.  COUNT defaults to a value of 32768.
+
+'--stats'
+     Compute and display statistics about the operation of the linker,
+     such as execution time and memory usage.
+
+'--sysroot=DIRECTORY'
+     Use DIRECTORY as the location of the sysroot, overriding the
+     configure-time default.  This option is only supported by linkers
+     that were configured using '--with-sysroot'.
+
+'--traditional-format'
+     For some targets, the output of 'ld' is different in some ways from
+     the output of some existing linker.  This switch requests 'ld' to
+     use the traditional format instead.
+
+     For example, on SunOS, 'ld' combines duplicate entries in the
+     symbol string table.  This can reduce the size of an output file
+     with full debugging information by over 30 percent.  Unfortunately,
+     the SunOS 'dbx' program can not read the resulting program ('gdb'
+     has no trouble).  The '--traditional-format' switch tells 'ld' to
+     not combine duplicate entries.
+
+'--section-start SECTIONNAME=ORG'
+     Locate a section in the output file at the absolute address given
+     by ORG.  You may use this option as many times as necessary to
+     locate multiple sections in the command line.  ORG must be a single
+     hexadecimal integer; for compatibility with other linkers, you may
+     omit the leading '0x' usually associated with hexadecimal values.
+     _Note:_ there should be no white space between SECTIONNAME, the
+     equals sign ("<=>"), and ORG.
+
+'-Tbss ORG'
+'-Tdata ORG'
+'-Ttext ORG'
+     Same as -section-start, with '.bss', '.data' or '.text' as the
+     SECTIONNAME.
+
+'--unresolved-symbols=METHOD'
+     Determine how to handle unresolved symbols.  There are four
+     possible values for 'method':
+
+     'ignore-all'
+          Do not report any unresolved symbols.
+
+     'report-all'
+          Report all unresolved symbols.  This is the default.
+
+     'ignore-in-object-files'
+          Report unresolved symbols that are contained in shared
+          libraries, but ignore them if they come from regular object
+          files.
+
+     'ignore-in-shared-libs'
+          Report unresolved symbols that come from regular object files,
+          but ignore them if they come from shared libraries.  This can
+          be useful when creating a dynamic binary and it is known that
+          all the shared libraries that it should be referencing are
+          included on the linker's command line.
+
+     The behaviour for shared libraries on their own can also be
+     controlled by the '--[no-]allow-shlib-undefined' option.
+
+     Normally the linker will generate an error message for each
+     reported unresolved symbol but the option
+     '--warn-unresolved-symbols' can change this to a warning.
+
+'--dll-verbose'
+'--verbose'
+     Display the version number for 'ld' and list the linker emulations
+     supported.  Display which input files can and cannot be opened.
+     Display the linker script being used by the linker.
+
+'--version-script=VERSION-SCRIPTFILE'
+     Specify the name of a version script to the linker.  This is
+     typically used when creating shared libraries to specify additional
+     information about the version hierarchy for the library being
+     created.  This option is only meaningful on ELF platforms which
+     support shared libraries.  *Note VERSION::.
+
+'--warn-common'
+     Warn when a common symbol is combined with another common symbol or
+     with a symbol definition.  Unix linkers allow this somewhat sloppy
+     practise, but linkers on some other operating systems do not.  This
+     option allows you to find potential problems from combining global
+     symbols.  Unfortunately, some C libraries use this practise, so you
+     may get some warnings about symbols in the libraries as well as in
+     your programs.
+
+     There are three kinds of global symbols, illustrated here by C
+     examples:
+
+     'int i = 1;'
+          A definition, which goes in the initialized data section of
+          the output file.
+
+     'extern int i;'
+          An undefined reference, which does not allocate space.  There
+          must be either a definition or a common symbol for the
+          variable somewhere.
+
+     'int i;'
+          A common symbol.  If there are only (one or more) common
+          symbols for a variable, it goes in the uninitialized data area
+          of the output file.  The linker merges multiple common symbols
+          for the same variable into a single symbol.  If they are of
+          different sizes, it picks the largest size.  The linker turns
+          a common symbol into a declaration, if there is a definition
+          of the same variable.
+
+     The '--warn-common' option can produce five kinds of warnings.
+     Each warning consists of a pair of lines: the first describes the
+     symbol just encountered, and the second describes the previous
+     symbol encountered with the same name.  One or both of the two
+     symbols will be a common symbol.
+
+       1. Turning a common symbol into a reference, because there is
+          already a definition for the symbol.
+               FILE(SECTION): warning: common of `SYMBOL'
+                  overridden by definition
+               FILE(SECTION): warning: defined here
+
+       2. Turning a common symbol into a reference, because a later
+          definition for the symbol is encountered.  This is the same as
+          the previous case, except that the symbols are encountered in
+          a different order.
+               FILE(SECTION): warning: definition of `SYMBOL'
+                  overriding common
+               FILE(SECTION): warning: common is here
+
+       3. Merging a common symbol with a previous same-sized common
+          symbol.
+               FILE(SECTION): warning: multiple common
+                  of `SYMBOL'
+               FILE(SECTION): warning: previous common is here
+
+       4. Merging a common symbol with a previous larger common symbol.
+               FILE(SECTION): warning: common of `SYMBOL'
+                  overridden by larger common
+               FILE(SECTION): warning: larger common is here
+
+       5. Merging a common symbol with a previous smaller common symbol.
+          This is the same as the previous case, except that the symbols
+          are encountered in a different order.
+               FILE(SECTION): warning: common of `SYMBOL'
+                  overriding smaller common
+               FILE(SECTION): warning: smaller common is here
+
+'--warn-constructors'
+     Warn if any global constructors are used.  This is only useful for
+     a few object file formats.  For formats like COFF or ELF, the
+     linker can not detect the use of global constructors.
+
+'--warn-multiple-gp'
+     Warn if multiple global pointer values are required in the output
+     file.  This is only meaningful for certain processors, such as the
+     Alpha.  Specifically, some processors put large-valued constants in
+     a special section.  A special register (the global pointer) points
+     into the middle of this section, so that constants can be loaded
+     efficiently via a base-register relative addressing mode.  Since
+     the offset in base-register relative mode is fixed and relatively
+     small (e.g., 16 bits), this limits the maximum size of the constant
+     pool.  Thus, in large programs, it is often necessary to use
+     multiple global pointer values in order to be able to address all
+     possible constants.  This option causes a warning to be issued
+     whenever this case occurs.
+
+'--warn-once'
+     Only warn once for each undefined symbol, rather than once per
+     module which refers to it.
+
+'--warn-section-align'
+     Warn if the address of an output section is changed because of
+     alignment.  Typically, the alignment will be set by an input
+     section.  The address will only be changed if it not explicitly
+     specified; that is, if the 'SECTIONS' command does not specify a
+     start address for the section (*note SECTIONS::).
+
+'--warn-shared-textrel'
+     Warn if the linker adds a DT_TEXTREL to a shared object.
+
+'--warn-unresolved-symbols'
+     If the linker is going to report an unresolved symbol (see the
+     option '--unresolved-symbols') it will normally generate an error.
+     This option makes it generate a warning instead.
+
+'--error-unresolved-symbols'
+     This restores the linker's default behaviour of generating errors
+     when it is reporting unresolved symbols.
+
+'--whole-archive'
+     For each archive mentioned on the command line after the
+     '--whole-archive' option, include every object file in the archive
+     in the link, rather than searching the archive for the required
+     object files.  This is normally used to turn an archive file into a
+     shared library, forcing every object to be included in the
+     resulting shared library.  This option may be used more than once.
+
+     Two notes when using this option from gcc: First, gcc doesn't know
+     about this option, so you have to use '-Wl,-whole-archive'.
+     Second, don't forget to use '-Wl,-no-whole-archive' after your list
+     of archives, because gcc will add its own list of archives to your
+     link and you may not want this flag to affect those as well.
+
+'--wrap SYMBOL'
+     Use a wrapper function for SYMBOL.  Any undefined reference to
+     SYMBOL will be resolved to '__wrap_SYMBOL'.  Any undefined
+     reference to '__real_SYMBOL' will be resolved to SYMBOL.
+
+     This can be used to provide a wrapper for a system function.  The
+     wrapper function should be called '__wrap_SYMBOL'.  If it wishes to
+     call the system function, it should call '__real_SYMBOL'.
+
+     Here is a trivial example:
+
+          void *
+          __wrap_malloc (size_t c)
+          {
+            printf ("malloc called with %zu\n", c);
+            return __real_malloc (c);
+          }
+
+     If you link other code with this file using '--wrap malloc', then
+     all calls to 'malloc' will call the function '__wrap_malloc'
+     instead.  The call to '__real_malloc' in '__wrap_malloc' will call
+     the real 'malloc' function.
+
+     You may wish to provide a '__real_malloc' function as well, so that
+     links without the '--wrap' option will succeed.  If you do this,
+     you should not put the definition of '__real_malloc' in the same
+     file as '__wrap_malloc'; if you do, the assembler may resolve the
+     call before the linker has a chance to wrap it to 'malloc'.
+
+'--eh-frame-hdr'
+     Request creation of '.eh_frame_hdr' section and ELF
+     'PT_GNU_EH_FRAME' segment header.
+
+'--enable-new-dtags'
+'--disable-new-dtags'
+     This linker can create the new dynamic tags in ELF. But the older
+     ELF systems may not understand them.  If you specify
+     '--enable-new-dtags', the dynamic tags will be created as needed.
+     If you specify '--disable-new-dtags', no new dynamic tags will be
+     created.  By default, the new dynamic tags are not created.  Note
+     that those options are only available for ELF systems.
+
+'--hash-size=NUMBER'
+     Set the default size of the linker's hash tables to a prime number
+     close to NUMBER.  Increasing this value can reduce the length of
+     time it takes the linker to perform its tasks, at the expense of
+     increasing the linker's memory requirements.  Similarly reducing
+     this value can reduce the memory requirements at the expense of
+     speed.
+
+'--hash-style=STYLE'
+     Set the type of linker's hash table(s).  STYLE can be either 'sysv'
+     for classic ELF '.hash' section, 'gnu' for new style GNU
+     '.gnu.hash' section or 'both' for both the classic ELF '.hash' and
+     new style GNU '.gnu.hash' hash tables.  The default is 'sysv'.
+
+'--reduce-memory-overheads'
+     This option reduces memory requirements at ld runtime, at the
+     expense of linking speed.  This was introduced to select the old
+     O(n^2) algorithm for link map file generation, rather than the new
+     O(n) algorithm which uses about 40% more memory for symbol storage.
+
+     Another effect of the switch is to set the default hash table size
+     to 1021, which again saves memory at the cost of lengthening the
+     linker's run time.  This is not done however if the '--hash-size'
+     switch has been used.
+
+     The '--reduce-memory-overheads' switch may be also be used to
+     enable other tradeoffs in future versions of the linker.
+
+2.1.1 Options Specific to i386 PE Targets
+-----------------------------------------
+
+The i386 PE linker supports the '-shared' option, which causes the
+output to be a dynamically linked library (DLL) instead of a normal
+executable.  You should name the output '*.dll' when you use this
+option.  In addition, the linker fully supports the standard '*.def'
+files, which may be specified on the linker command line like an object
+file (in fact, it should precede archives it exports symbols from, to
+ensure that they get linked in, just like a normal object file).
+
+   In addition to the options common to all targets, the i386 PE linker
+support additional command line options that are specific to the i386 PE
+target.  Options that take values may be separated from their values by
+either a space or an equals sign.
+
+'--add-stdcall-alias'
+     If given, symbols with a stdcall suffix (@NN) will be exported
+     as-is and also with the suffix stripped.  [This option is specific
+     to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
+
+'--base-file FILE'
+     Use FILE as the name of a file in which to save the base addresses
+     of all the relocations needed for generating DLLs with 'dlltool'.
+     [This is an i386 PE specific option]
+
+'--dll'
+     Create a DLL instead of a regular executable.  You may also use
+     '-shared' or specify a 'LIBRARY' in a given '.def' file.  [This
+     option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
+
+'--enable-stdcall-fixup'
+'--disable-stdcall-fixup'
+     If the link finds a symbol that it cannot resolve, it will attempt
+     to do "fuzzy linking" by looking for another defined symbol that
+     differs only in the format of the symbol name (cdecl vs stdcall)
+     and will resolve that symbol by linking to the match.  For example,
+     the undefined symbol '_foo' might be linked to the function
+     '_foo@12', or the undefined symbol '_bar@16' might be linked to the
+     function '_bar'.  When the linker does this, it prints a warning,
+     since it normally should have failed to link, but sometimes import
+     libraries generated from third-party dlls may need this feature to
+     be usable.  If you specify '--enable-stdcall-fixup', this feature
+     is fully enabled and warnings are not printed.  If you specify
+     '--disable-stdcall-fixup', this feature is disabled and such
+     mismatches are considered to be errors.  [This option is specific
+     to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
+
+'--export-all-symbols'
+     If given, all global symbols in the objects used to build a DLL
+     will be exported by the DLL. Note that this is the default if there
+     otherwise wouldn't be any exported symbols.  When symbols are
+     explicitly exported via DEF files or implicitly exported via
+     function attributes, the default is to not export anything else
+     unless this option is given.  Note that the symbols 'DllMain@12',
+     'DllEntryPoint@0', 'DllMainCRTStartup@12', and 'impure_ptr' will
+     not be automatically exported.  Also, symbols imported from other
+     DLLs will not be re-exported, nor will symbols specifying the DLL's
+     internal layout such as those beginning with '_head_' or ending
+     with '_iname'.  In addition, no symbols from 'libgcc', 'libstd++',
+     'libmingw32', or 'crtX.o' will be exported.  Symbols whose names
+     begin with '__rtti_' or '__builtin_' will not be exported, to help
+     with C++ DLLs.  Finally, there is an extensive list of
+     cygwin-private symbols that are not exported (obviously, this
+     applies on when building DLLs for cygwin targets).  These
+     cygwin-excludes are: '_cygwin_dll_entry@12',
+     '_cygwin_crt0_common@8', '_cygwin_noncygwin_dll_entry@12',
+     '_fmode', '_impure_ptr', 'cygwin_attach_dll', 'cygwin_premain0',
+     'cygwin_premain1', 'cygwin_premain2', 'cygwin_premain3', and
+     'environ'.  [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port
+     of the linker]
+
+'--exclude-symbols SYMBOL,SYMBOL,...'
+     Specifies a list of symbols which should not be automatically
+     exported.  The symbol names may be delimited by commas or colons.
+     [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the
+     linker]
+
+'--file-alignment'
+     Specify the file alignment.  Sections in the file will always begin
+     at file offsets which are multiples of this number.  This defaults
+     to 512.  [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of
+     the linker]
+
+'--heap RESERVE'
+'--heap RESERVE,COMMIT'
+     Specify the amount of memory to reserve (and optionally commit) to
+     be used as heap for this program.  The default is 1Mb reserved, 4K
+     committed.  [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port
+     of the linker]
+
+'--image-base VALUE'
+     Use VALUE as the base address of your program or dll.  This is the
+     lowest memory location that will be used when your program or dll
+     is loaded.  To reduce the need to relocate and improve performance
+     of your dlls, each should have a unique base address and not
+     overlap any other dlls.  The default is 0x400000 for executables,
+     and 0x10000000 for dlls.  [This option is specific to the i386 PE
+     targeted port of the linker]
+
+'--kill-at'
+     If given, the stdcall suffixes (@NN) will be stripped from symbols
+     before they are exported.  [This option is specific to the i386 PE
+     targeted port of the linker]
+
+'--large-address-aware'
+     If given, the appropriate bit in the "Characteristics" field of the
+     COFF header is set to indicate that this executable supports
+     virtual addresses greater than 2 gigabytes.  This should be used in
+     conjunction with the /3GB or /USERVA=VALUE megabytes switch in the
+     "[operating systems]" section of the BOOT.INI. Otherwise, this bit
+     has no effect.  [This option is specific to PE targeted ports of
+     the linker]
+
+'--major-image-version VALUE'
+     Sets the major number of the "image version".  Defaults to 1.
+     [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the
+     linker]
+
+'--major-os-version VALUE'
+     Sets the major number of the "os version".  Defaults to 4.  [This
+     option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
+
+'--major-subsystem-version VALUE'
+     Sets the major number of the "subsystem version".  Defaults to 4.
+     [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the
+     linker]
+
+'--minor-image-version VALUE'
+     Sets the minor number of the "image version".  Defaults to 0.
+     [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the
+     linker]
+
+'--minor-os-version VALUE'
+     Sets the minor number of the "os version".  Defaults to 0.  [This
+     option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
+
+'--minor-subsystem-version VALUE'
+     Sets the minor number of the "subsystem version".  Defaults to 0.
+     [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the
+     linker]
+
+'--output-def FILE'
+     The linker will create the file FILE which will contain a DEF file
+     corresponding to the DLL the linker is generating.  This DEF file
+     (which should be called '*.def') may be used to create an import
+     library with 'dlltool' or may be used as a reference to
+     automatically or implicitly exported symbols.  [This option is
+     specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
+
+'--out-implib FILE'
+     The linker will create the file FILE which will contain an import
+     lib corresponding to the DLL the linker is generating.  This import
+     lib (which should be called '*.dll.a' or '*.a' may be used to link
+     clients against the generated DLL; this behaviour makes it possible
+     to skip a separate 'dlltool' import library creation step.  [This
+     option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
+
+'--enable-auto-image-base'
+     Automatically choose the image base for DLLs, unless one is
+     specified using the '--image-base' argument.  By using a hash
+     generated from the dllname to create unique image bases for each
+     DLL, in-memory collisions and relocations which can delay program
+     execution are avoided.  [This option is specific to the i386 PE
+     targeted port of the linker]
+
+'--disable-auto-image-base'
+     Do not automatically generate a unique image base.  If there is no
+     user-specified image base ('--image-base') then use the platform
+     default.  [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of
+     the linker]
+
+'--dll-search-prefix STRING'
+     When linking dynamically to a dll without an import library, search
+     for '<string><basename>.dll' in preference to 'lib<basename>.dll'.
+     This behaviour allows easy distinction between DLLs built for the
+     various "subplatforms": native, cygwin, uwin, pw, etc.  For
+     instance, cygwin DLLs typically use '--dll-search-prefix=cyg'.
+     [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the
+     linker]
+
+'--enable-auto-import'
+     Do sophisticated linking of '_symbol' to '__imp__symbol' for DATA
+     imports from DLLs, and create the necessary thunking symbols when
+     building the import libraries with those DATA exports.  Note: Use
+     of the 'auto-import' extension will cause the text section of the
+     image file to be made writable.  This does not conform to the
+     PE-COFF format specification published by Microsoft.
+
+     Using 'auto-import' generally will 'just work' - but sometimes you
+     may see this message:
+
+     "variable '<var>' can't be auto-imported.  Please read the
+     documentation for ld's '--enable-auto-import' for details."
+
+     This message occurs when some (sub)expression accesses an address
+     ultimately given by the sum of two constants (Win32 import tables
+     only allow one).  Instances where this may occur include accesses
+     to member fields of struct variables imported from a DLL, as well
+     as using a constant index into an array variable imported from a
+     DLL. Any multiword variable (arrays, structs, long long, etc) may
+     trigger this error condition.  However, regardless of the exact
+     data type of the offending exported variable, ld will always detect
+     it, issue the warning, and exit.
+
+     There are several ways to address this difficulty, regardless of
+     the data type of the exported variable:
+
+     One way is to use -enable-runtime-pseudo-reloc switch.  This leaves
+     the task of adjusting references in your client code for runtime
+     environment, so this method works only when runtime environment
+     supports this feature.
+
+     A second solution is to force one of the 'constants' to be a
+     variable - that is, unknown and un-optimizable at compile time.
+     For arrays, there are two possibilities: a) make the indexee (the
+     array's address) a variable, or b) make the 'constant' index a
+     variable.  Thus:
+
+          extern type extern_array[];
+          extern_array[1] -->
+             { volatile type *t=extern_array; t[1] }
+
+     or
+
+          extern type extern_array[];
+          extern_array[1] -->
+             { volatile int t=1; extern_array[t] }
+
+     For structs (and most other multiword data types) the only option
+     is to make the struct itself (or the long long, or the ...)
+     variable:
+
+          extern struct s extern_struct;
+          extern_struct.field -->
+             { volatile struct s *t=&extern_struct; t->field }
+
+     or
+
+          extern long long extern_ll;
+          extern_ll -->
+            { volatile long long * local_ll=&extern_ll; *local_ll }
+
+     A third method of dealing with this difficulty is to abandon
+     'auto-import' for the offending symbol and mark it with
+     '__declspec(dllimport)'.  However, in practise that requires using
+     compile-time #defines to indicate whether you are building a DLL,
+     building client code that will link to the DLL, or merely
+     building/linking to a static library.  In making the choice between
+     the various methods of resolving the 'direct address with constant
+     offset' problem, you should consider typical real-world usage:
+
+     Original:
+          --foo.h
+          extern int arr[];
+          --foo.c
+          #include "foo.h"
+          void main(int argc, char **argv){
+            printf("%d\n",arr[1]);
+          }
+
+     Solution 1:
+          --foo.h
+          extern int arr[];
+          --foo.c
+          #include "foo.h"
+          void main(int argc, char **argv){
+            /* This workaround is for win32 and cygwin; do not "optimize" */
+            volatile int *parr = arr;
+            printf("%d\n",parr[1]);
+          }
+
+     Solution 2:
+          --foo.h
+          /* Note: auto-export is assumed (no __declspec(dllexport)) */
+          #if (defined(_WIN32) || defined(__CYGWIN__)) && \
+            !(defined(FOO_BUILD_DLL) || defined(FOO_STATIC))
+          #define FOO_IMPORT __declspec(dllimport)
+          #else
+          #define FOO_IMPORT
+          #endif
+          extern FOO_IMPORT int arr[];
+          --foo.c
+          #include "foo.h"
+          void main(int argc, char **argv){
+            printf("%d\n",arr[1]);
+          }
+
+     A fourth way to avoid this problem is to re-code your library to
+     use a functional interface rather than a data interface for the
+     offending variables (e.g.  set_foo() and get_foo() accessor
+     functions).  [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port
+     of the linker]
+
+'--disable-auto-import'
+     Do not attempt to do sophisticated linking of '_symbol' to
+     '__imp__symbol' for DATA imports from DLLs.  [This option is
+     specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
+
+'--enable-runtime-pseudo-reloc'
+     If your code contains expressions described in -enable-auto-import
+     section, that is, DATA imports from DLL with non-zero offset, this
+     switch will create a vector of 'runtime pseudo relocations' which
+     can be used by runtime environment to adjust references to such
+     data in your client code.  [This option is specific to the i386 PE
+     targeted port of the linker]
+
+'--disable-runtime-pseudo-reloc'
+     Do not create pseudo relocations for non-zero offset DATA imports
+     from DLLs.  This is the default.  [This option is specific to the
+     i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
+
+'--enable-extra-pe-debug'
+     Show additional debug info related to auto-import symbol thunking.
+     [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the
+     linker]
+
+'--section-alignment'
+     Sets the section alignment.  Sections in memory will always begin
+     at addresses which are a multiple of this number.  Defaults to
+     0x1000.  [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of
+     the linker]
+
+'--stack RESERVE'
+'--stack RESERVE,COMMIT'
+     Specify the amount of memory to reserve (and optionally commit) to
+     be used as stack for this program.  The default is 2Mb reserved, 4K
+     committed.  [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port
+     of the linker]
+
+'--subsystem WHICH'
+'--subsystem WHICH:MAJOR'
+'--subsystem WHICH:MAJOR.MINOR'
+     Specifies the subsystem under which your program will execute.  The
+     legal values for WHICH are 'native', 'windows', 'console', 'posix',
+     and 'xbox'.  You may optionally set the subsystem version also.
+     Numeric values are also accepted for WHICH.  [This option is
+     specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
+
+2.1.2 Options specific to Motorola 68HC11 and 68HC12 targets
+------------------------------------------------------------
+
+The 68HC11 and 68HC12 linkers support specific options to control the
+memory bank switching mapping and trampoline code generation.
+
+'--no-trampoline'
+     This option disables the generation of trampoline.  By default a
+     trampoline is generated for each far function which is called using
+     a 'jsr' instruction (this happens when a pointer to a far function
+     is taken).
+
+'--bank-window NAME'
+     This option indicates to the linker the name of the memory region
+     in the 'MEMORY' specification that describes the memory bank
+     window.  The definition of such region is then used by the linker
+     to compute paging and addresses within the memory window.
+
+2.2 Environment Variables
+=========================
+
+You can change the behaviour of 'ld' with the environment variables
+'GNUTARGET', 'LDEMULATION' and 'COLLECT_NO_DEMANGLE'.
+
+   'GNUTARGET' determines the input-file object format if you don't use
+'-b' (or its synonym '--format').  Its value should be one of the BFD
+names for an input format (*note BFD::).  If there is no 'GNUTARGET' in
+the environment, 'ld' uses the natural format of the target.  If
+'GNUTARGET' is set to 'default' then BFD attempts to discover the input
+format by examining binary input files; this method often succeeds, but
+there are potential ambiguities, since there is no method of ensuring
+that the magic number used to specify object-file formats is unique.
+However, the configuration procedure for BFD on each system places the
+conventional format for that system first in the search-list, so
+ambiguities are resolved in favor of convention.
+
+   'LDEMULATION' determines the default emulation if you don't use the
+'-m' option.  The emulation can affect various aspects of linker
+behaviour, particularly the default linker script.  You can list the
+available emulations with the '--verbose' or '-V' options.  If the '-m'
+option is not used, and the 'LDEMULATION' environment variable is not
+defined, the default emulation depends upon how the linker was
+configured.
+
+   Normally, the linker will default to demangling symbols.  However, if
+'COLLECT_NO_DEMANGLE' is set in the environment, then it will default to
+not demangling symbols.  This environment variable is used in a similar
+fashion by the 'gcc' linker wrapper program.  The default may be
+overridden by the '--demangle' and '--no-demangle' options.
+
+3 Linker Scripts
+****************
+
+Every link is controlled by a "linker script".  This script is written
+in the linker command language.
+
+   The main purpose of the linker script is to describe how the sections
+in the input files should be mapped into the output file, and to control
+the memory layout of the output file.  Most linker scripts do nothing
+more than this.  However, when necessary, the linker script can also
+direct the linker to perform many other operations, using the commands
+described below.
+
+   The linker always uses a linker script.  If you do not supply one
+yourself, the linker will use a default script that is compiled into the
+linker executable.  You can use the '--verbose' command line option to
+display the default linker script.  Certain command line options, such
+as '-r' or '-N', will affect the default linker script.
+
+   You may supply your own linker script by using the '-T' command line
+option.  When you do this, your linker script will replace the default
+linker script.
+
+   You may also use linker scripts implicitly by naming them as input
+files to the linker, as though they were files to be linked.  *Note
+Implicit Linker Scripts::.
+
+3.1 Basic Linker Script Concepts
+================================
+
+We need to define some basic concepts and vocabulary in order to
+describe the linker script language.
+
+   The linker combines input files into a single output file.  The
+output file and each input file are in a special data format known as an
+"object file format".  Each file is called an "object file".  The output
+file is often called an "executable", but for our purposes we will also
+call it an object file.  Each object file has, among other things, a
+list of "sections".  We sometimes refer to a section in an input file as
+an "input section"; similarly, a section in the output file is an
+"output section".
+
+   Each section in an object file has a name and a size.  Most sections
+also have an associated block of data, known as the "section contents".
+A section may be marked as "loadable", which mean that the contents
+should be loaded into memory when the output file is run.  A section
+with no contents may be "allocatable", which means that an area in
+memory should be set aside, but nothing in particular should be loaded
+there (in some cases this memory must be zeroed out).  A section which
+is neither loadable nor allocatable typically contains some sort of
+debugging information.
+
+   Every loadable or allocatable output section has two addresses.  The
+first is the "VMA", or virtual memory address.  This is the address the
+section will have when the output file is run.  The second is the "LMA",
+or load memory address.  This is the address at which the section will
+be loaded.  In most cases the two addresses will be the same.  An
+example of when they might be different is when a data section is loaded
+into ROM, and then copied into RAM when the program starts up (this
+technique is often used to initialize global variables in a ROM based
+system).  In this case the ROM address would be the LMA, and the RAM
+address would be the VMA.
+
+   You can see the sections in an object file by using the 'objdump'
+program with the '-h' option.
+
+   Every object file also has a list of "symbols", known as the "symbol
+table".  A symbol may be defined or undefined.  Each symbol has a name,
+and each defined symbol has an address, among other information.  If you
+compile a C or C++ program into an object file, you will get a defined
+symbol for every defined function and global or static variable.  Every
+undefined function or global variable which is referenced in the input
+file will become an undefined symbol.
+
+   You can see the symbols in an object file by using the 'nm' program,
+or by using the 'objdump' program with the '-t' option.
+
+3.2 Linker Script Format
+========================
+
+Linker scripts are text files.
+
+   You write a linker script as a series of commands.  Each command is
+either a keyword, possibly followed by arguments, or an assignment to a
+symbol.  You may separate commands using semicolons.  Whitespace is
+generally ignored.
+
+   Strings such as file or format names can normally be entered
+directly.  If the file name contains a character such as a comma which
+would otherwise serve to separate file names, you may put the file name
+in double quotes.  There is no way to use a double quote character in a
+file name.
+
+   You may include comments in linker scripts just as in C, delimited by
+'/*' and '*/'.  As in C, comments are syntactically equivalent to
+whitespace.
+
+3.3 Simple Linker Script Example
+================================
+
+Many linker scripts are fairly simple.
+
+   The simplest possible linker script has just one command: 'SECTIONS'.
+You use the 'SECTIONS' command to describe the memory layout of the
+output file.
+
+   The 'SECTIONS' command is a powerful command.  Here we will describe
+a simple use of it.  Let's assume your program consists only of code,
+initialized data, and uninitialized data.  These will be in the '.text',
+'.data', and '.bss' sections, respectively.  Let's assume further that
+these are the only sections which appear in your input files.
+
+   For this example, let's say that the code should be loaded at address
+0x10000, and that the data should start at address 0x8000000.  Here is a
+linker script which will do that:
+     SECTIONS
+     {
+       . = 0x10000;
+       .text : { *(.text) }
+       . = 0x8000000;
+       .data : { *(.data) }
+       .bss : { *(.bss) }
+     }
+
+   You write the 'SECTIONS' command as the keyword 'SECTIONS', followed
+by a series of symbol assignments and output section descriptions
+enclosed in curly braces.
+
+   The first line inside the 'SECTIONS' command of the above example
+sets the value of the special symbol '.', which is the location counter.
+If you do not specify the address of an output section in some other way
+(other ways are described later), the address is set from the current
+value of the location counter.  The location counter is then incremented
+by the size of the output section.  At the start of the 'SECTIONS'
+command, the location counter has the value '0'.
+
+   The second line defines an output section, '.text'.  The colon is
+required syntax which may be ignored for now.  Within the curly braces
+after the output section name, you list the names of the input sections
+which should be placed into this output section.  The '*' is a wildcard
+which matches any file name.  The expression '*(.text)' means all
+'.text' input sections in all input files.
+
+   Since the location counter is '0x10000' when the output section
+'.text' is defined, the linker will set the address of the '.text'
+section in the output file to be '0x10000'.
+
+   The remaining lines define the '.data' and '.bss' sections in the
+output file.  The linker will place the '.data' output section at
+address '0x8000000'.  After the linker places the '.data' output
+section, the value of the location counter will be '0x8000000' plus the
+size of the '.data' output section.  The effect is that the linker will
+place the '.bss' output section immediately after the '.data' output
+section in memory.
+
+   The linker will ensure that each output section has the required
+alignment, by increasing the location counter if necessary.  In this
+example, the specified addresses for the '.text' and '.data' sections
+will probably satisfy any alignment constraints, but the linker may have
+to create a small gap between the '.data' and '.bss' sections.
+
+   That's it!  That's a simple and complete linker script.
+
+3.4 Simple Linker Script Commands
+=================================
+
+In this section we describe the simple linker script commands.
+
+3.4.1 Setting the Entry Point
+-----------------------------
+
+The first instruction to execute in a program is called the "entry
+point".  You can use the 'ENTRY' linker script command to set the entry
+point.  The argument is a symbol name:
+     ENTRY(SYMBOL)
+
+   There are several ways to set the entry point.  The linker will set
+the entry point by trying each of the following methods in order, and
+stopping when one of them succeeds:
+   * the '-e' ENTRY command-line option;
+   * the 'ENTRY(SYMBOL)' command in a linker script;
+   * the value of the symbol 'start', if defined;
+   * the address of the first byte of the '.text' section, if present;
+   * The address '0'.
+
+3.4.2 Commands Dealing with Files
+---------------------------------
+
+Several linker script commands deal with files.
+
+'INCLUDE FILENAME'
+     Include the linker script FILENAME at this point.  The file will be
+     searched for in the current directory, and in any directory
+     specified with the '-L' option.  You can nest calls to 'INCLUDE' up
+     to 10 levels deep.
+
+'INPUT(FILE, FILE, ...)'
+'INPUT(FILE FILE ...)'
+     The 'INPUT' command directs the linker to include the named files
+     in the link, as though they were named on the command line.
+
+     For example, if you always want to include 'subr.o' any time you do
+     a link, but you can't be bothered to put it on every link command
+     line, then you can put 'INPUT (subr.o)' in your linker script.
+
+     In fact, if you like, you can list all of your input files in the
+     linker script, and then invoke the linker with nothing but a '-T'
+     option.
+
+     In case a "sysroot prefix" is configured, and the filename starts
+     with the '/' character, and the script being processed was located
+     inside the "sysroot prefix", the filename will be looked for in the
+     "sysroot prefix".  Otherwise, the linker will try to open the file
+     in the current directory.  If it is not found, the linker will
+     search through the archive library search path.  See the
+     description of '-L' in *note Command Line Options: Options.
+
+     If you use 'INPUT (-lFILE)', 'ld' will transform the name to
+     'libFILE.a', as with the command line argument '-l'.
+
+     When you use the 'INPUT' command in an implicit linker script, the
+     files will be included in the link at the point at which the linker
+     script file is included.  This can affect archive searching.
+
+'GROUP(FILE, FILE, ...)'
+'GROUP(FILE FILE ...)'
+     The 'GROUP' command is like 'INPUT', except that the named files
+     should all be archives, and they are searched repeatedly until no
+     new undefined references are created.  See the description of '-('
+     in *note Command Line Options: Options.
+
+'AS_NEEDED(FILE, FILE, ...)'
+'AS_NEEDED(FILE FILE ...)'
+     This construct can appear only inside of the 'INPUT' or 'GROUP'
+     commands, among other filenames.  The files listed will be handled
+     as if they appear directly in the 'INPUT' or 'GROUP' commands, with
+     the exception of ELF shared libraries, that will be added only when
+     they are actually needed.  This construct essentially enables
+     '--as-needed' option for all the files listed inside of it and
+     restores previous '--as-needed' resp.  '--no-as-needed' setting
+     afterwards.
+
+'OUTPUT(FILENAME)'
+     The 'OUTPUT' command names the output file.  Using
+     'OUTPUT(FILENAME)' in the linker script is exactly like using '-o
+     FILENAME' on the command line (*note Command Line Options:
+     Options.).  If both are used, the command line option takes
+     precedence.
+
+     You can use the 'OUTPUT' command to define a default name for the
+     output file other than the usual default of 'a.out'.
+
+'SEARCH_DIR(PATH)'
+     The 'SEARCH_DIR' command adds PATH to the list of paths where 'ld'
+     looks for archive libraries.  Using 'SEARCH_DIR(PATH)' is exactly
+     like using '-L PATH' on the command line (*note Command Line
+     Options: Options.).  If both are used, then the linker will search
+     both paths.  Paths specified using the command line option are
+     searched first.
+
+'STARTUP(FILENAME)'
+     The 'STARTUP' command is just like the 'INPUT' command, except that
+     FILENAME will become the first input file to be linked, as though
+     it were specified first on the command line.  This may be useful
+     when using a system in which the entry point is always the start of
+     the first file.
+
+3.4.3 Commands Dealing with Object File Formats
+-----------------------------------------------
+
+A couple of linker script commands deal with object file formats.
+
+'OUTPUT_FORMAT(BFDNAME)'
+'OUTPUT_FORMAT(DEFAULT, BIG, LITTLE)'
+     The 'OUTPUT_FORMAT' command names the BFD format to use for the
+     output file (*note BFD::).  Using 'OUTPUT_FORMAT(BFDNAME)' is
+     exactly like using '--oformat BFDNAME' on the command line (*note
+     Command Line Options: Options.).  If both are used, the command
+     line option takes precedence.
+
+     You can use 'OUTPUT_FORMAT' with three arguments to use different
+     formats based on the '-EB' and '-EL' command line options.  This
+     permits the linker script to set the output format based on the
+     desired endianness.
+
+     If neither '-EB' nor '-EL' are used, then the output format will be
+     the first argument, DEFAULT.  If '-EB' is used, the output format
+     will be the second argument, BIG.  If '-EL' is used, the output
+     format will be the third argument, LITTLE.
+
+     For example, the default linker script for the MIPS ELF target uses
+     this command:
+          OUTPUT_FORMAT(elf32-bigmips, elf32-bigmips, elf32-littlemips)
+     This says that the default format for the output file is
+     'elf32-bigmips', but if the user uses the '-EL' command line
+     option, the output file will be created in the 'elf32-littlemips'
+     format.
+
+'TARGET(BFDNAME)'
+     The 'TARGET' command names the BFD format to use when reading input
+     files.  It affects subsequent 'INPUT' and 'GROUP' commands.  This
+     command is like using '-b BFDNAME' on the command line (*note
+     Command Line Options: Options.).  If the 'TARGET' command is used
+     but 'OUTPUT_FORMAT' is not, then the last 'TARGET' command is also
+     used to set the format for the output file.  *Note BFD::.
+
+3.4.4 Other Linker Script Commands
+----------------------------------
+
+There are a few other linker scripts commands.
+
+'ASSERT(EXP, MESSAGE)'
+     Ensure that EXP is non-zero.  If it is zero, then exit the linker
+     with an error code, and print MESSAGE.
+
+'EXTERN(SYMBOL SYMBOL ...)'
+     Force SYMBOL to be entered in the output file as an undefined
+     symbol.  Doing this may, for example, trigger linking of additional
+     modules from standard libraries.  You may list several SYMBOLs for
+     each 'EXTERN', and you may use 'EXTERN' multiple times.  This
+     command has the same effect as the '-u' command-line option.
+
+'FORCE_COMMON_ALLOCATION'
+     This command has the same effect as the '-d' command-line option:
+     to make 'ld' assign space to common symbols even if a relocatable
+     output file is specified ('-r').
+
+'INHIBIT_COMMON_ALLOCATION'
+     This command has the same effect as the '--no-define-common'
+     command-line option: to make 'ld' omit the assignment of addresses
+     to common symbols even for a non-relocatable output file.
+
+'NOCROSSREFS(SECTION SECTION ...)'
+     This command may be used to tell 'ld' to issue an error about any
+     references among certain output sections.
+
+     In certain types of programs, particularly on embedded systems when
+     using overlays, when one section is loaded into memory, another
+     section will not be.  Any direct references between the two
+     sections would be errors.  For example, it would be an error if
+     code in one section called a function defined in the other section.
+
+     The 'NOCROSSREFS' command takes a list of output section names.  If
+     'ld' detects any cross references between the sections, it reports
+     an error and returns a non-zero exit status.  Note that the
+     'NOCROSSREFS' command uses output section names, not input section
+     names.
+
+'OUTPUT_ARCH(BFDARCH)'
+     Specify a particular output machine architecture.  The argument is
+     one of the names used by the BFD library (*note BFD::).  You can
+     see the architecture of an object file by using the 'objdump'
+     program with the '-f' option.
+
+3.5 Assigning Values to Symbols
+===============================
+
+You may assign a value to a symbol in a linker script.  This will define
+the symbol and place it into the symbol table with a global scope.
+
+3.5.1 Simple Assignments
+------------------------
+
+You may assign to a symbol using any of the C assignment operators:
+
+'SYMBOL = EXPRESSION ;'
+'SYMBOL += EXPRESSION ;'
+'SYMBOL -= EXPRESSION ;'
+'SYMBOL *= EXPRESSION ;'
+'SYMBOL /= EXPRESSION ;'
+'SYMBOL <<= EXPRESSION ;'
+'SYMBOL >>= EXPRESSION ;'
+'SYMBOL &= EXPRESSION ;'
+'SYMBOL |= EXPRESSION ;'
+
+   The first case will define SYMBOL to the value of EXPRESSION.  In the
+other cases, SYMBOL must already be defined, and the value will be
+adjusted accordingly.
+
+   The special symbol name '.' indicates the location counter.  You may
+only use this within a 'SECTIONS' command.  *Note Location Counter::.
+
+   The semicolon after EXPRESSION is required.
+
+   Expressions are defined below; see *note Expressions::.
+
+   You may write symbol assignments as commands in their own right, or
+as statements within a 'SECTIONS' command, or as part of an output
+section description in a 'SECTIONS' command.
+
+   The section of the symbol will be set from the section of the
+expression; for more information, see *note Expression Section::.
+
+   Here is an example showing the three different places that symbol
+assignments may be used:
+
+     floating_point = 0;
+     SECTIONS
+     {
+       .text :
+         {
+           *(.text)
+           _etext = .;
+         }
+       _bdata = (. + 3) & ~ 3;
+       .data : { *(.data) }
+     }
+In this example, the symbol 'floating_point' will be defined as zero.
+The symbol '_etext' will be defined as the address following the last
+'.text' input section.  The symbol '_bdata' will be defined as the
+address following the '.text' output section aligned upward to a 4 byte
+boundary.
+
+3.5.2 PROVIDE
+-------------
+
+In some cases, it is desirable for a linker script to define a symbol
+only if it is referenced and is not defined by any object included in
+the link.  For example, traditional linkers defined the symbol 'etext'.
+However, ANSI C requires that the user be able to use 'etext' as a
+function name without encountering an error.  The 'PROVIDE' keyword may
+be used to define a symbol, such as 'etext', only if it is referenced
+but not defined.  The syntax is 'PROVIDE(SYMBOL = EXPRESSION)'.
+
+   Here is an example of using 'PROVIDE' to define 'etext':
+     SECTIONS
+     {
+       .text :
+         {
+           *(.text)
+           _etext = .;
+           PROVIDE(etext = .);
+         }
+     }
+
+   In this example, if the program defines '_etext' (with a leading
+underscore), the linker will give a multiple definition error.  If, on
+the other hand, the program defines 'etext' (with no leading
+underscore), the linker will silently use the definition in the program.
+If the program references 'etext' but does not define it, the linker
+will use the definition in the linker script.
+
+3.5.3 PROVIDE_HIDDEN
+--------------------
+
+Similar to 'PROVIDE'.  For ELF targeted ports, the symbol will be hidden
+and won't be exported.
+
+3.5.4 Source Code Reference
+---------------------------
+
+Accessing a linker script defined variable from source code is not
+intuitive.  In particular a linker script symbol is not equivalent to a
+variable declaration in a high level language, it is instead a symbol
+that does not have a value.
+
+   Before going further, it is important to note that compilers often
+transform names in the source code into different names when they are
+stored in the symbol table.  For example, Fortran compilers commonly
+prepend or append an underscore, and C++ performs extensive 'name
+mangling'.  Therefore there might be a discrepancy between the name of a
+variable as it is used in source code and the name of the same variable
+as it is defined in a linker script.  For example in C a linker script
+variable might be referred to as:
+
+       extern int foo;
+
+   But in the linker script it might be defined as:
+
+       _foo = 1000;
+
+   In the remaining examples however it is assumed that no name
+transformation has taken place.
+
+   When a symbol is declared in a high level language such as C, two
+things happen.  The first is that the compiler reserves enough space in
+the program's memory to hold the _value_ of the symbol.  The second is
+that the compiler creates an entry in the program's symbol table which
+holds the symbol's _address_.  ie the symbol table contains the address
+of the block of memory holding the symbol's value.  So for example the
+following C declaration, at file scope:
+
+       int foo = 1000;
+
+   creates a entry called 'foo' in the symbol table.  This entry holds
+the address of an 'int' sized block of memory where the number 1000 is
+initially stored.
+
+   When a program references a symbol the compiler generates code that
+first accesses the symbol table to find the address of the symbol's
+memory block and then code to read the value from that memory block.
+So:
+
+       foo = 1;
+
+   looks up the symbol 'foo' in the symbol table, gets the address
+associated with this symbol and then writes the value 1 into that
+address.  Whereas:
+
+       int * a = & foo;
+
+   looks up the symbol 'foo' in the symbol table, gets it address and
+then copies this address into the block of memory associated with the
+variable 'a'.
+
+   Linker scripts symbol declarations, by contrast, create an entry in
+the symbol table but do not assign any memory to them.  Thus they are an
+address without a value.  So for example the linker script definition:
+
+       foo = 1000;
+
+   creates an entry in the symbol table called 'foo' which holds the
+address of memory location 1000, but nothing special is stored at
+address 1000.  This means that you cannot access the _value_ of a linker
+script defined symbol - it has no value - all you can do is access the
+_address_ of a linker script defined symbol.
+
+   Hence when you are using a linker script defined symbol in source
+code you should always take the address of the symbol, and never attempt
+to use its value.  For example suppose you want to copy the contents of
+a section of memory called .ROM into a section called .FLASH and the
+linker script contains these declarations:
+
+       start_of_ROM   = .ROM;
+       end_of_ROM     = .ROM + sizeof (.ROM) - 1;
+       start_of_FLASH = .FLASH;
+
+   Then the C source code to perform the copy would be:
+
+       extern char start_of_ROM, end_of_ROM, start_of_FLASH;
+
+       memcpy (& start_of_FLASH, & start_of_ROM, & end_of_ROM - & start_of_ROM);
+
+   Note the use of the '&' operators.  These are correct.
+
+3.6 SECTIONS Command
+====================
+
+The 'SECTIONS' command tells the linker how to map input sections into
+output sections, and how to place the output sections in memory.
+
+   The format of the 'SECTIONS' command is:
+     SECTIONS
+     {
+       SECTIONS-COMMAND
+       SECTIONS-COMMAND
+       ...
+     }
+
+   Each SECTIONS-COMMAND may of be one of the following:
+
+   * an 'ENTRY' command (*note Entry command: Entry Point.)
+   * a symbol assignment (*note Assignments::)
+   * an output section description
+   * an overlay description
+
+   The 'ENTRY' command and symbol assignments are permitted inside the
+'SECTIONS' command for convenience in using the location counter in
+those commands.  This can also make the linker script easier to
+understand because you can use those commands at meaningful points in
+the layout of the output file.
+
+   Output section descriptions and overlay descriptions are described
+below.
+
+   If you do not use a 'SECTIONS' command in your linker script, the
+linker will place each input section into an identically named output
+section in the order that the sections are first encountered in the
+input files.  If all input sections are present in the first file, for
+example, the order of sections in the output file will match the order
+in the first input file.  The first section will be at address zero.
+
+3.6.1 Output Section Description
+--------------------------------
+
+The full description of an output section looks like this:
+     SECTION [ADDRESS] [(TYPE)] :
+       [AT(LMA)] [ALIGN(SECTION_ALIGN)] [SUBALIGN(SUBSECTION_ALIGN)]
+       {
+         OUTPUT-SECTION-COMMAND
+         OUTPUT-SECTION-COMMAND
+         ...
+       } [>REGION] [AT>LMA_REGION] [:PHDR :PHDR ...] [=FILLEXP]
+
+   Most output sections do not use most of the optional section
+attributes.
+
+   The whitespace around SECTION is required, so that the section name
+is unambiguous.  The colon and the curly braces are also required.  The
+line breaks and other white space are optional.
+
+   Each OUTPUT-SECTION-COMMAND may be one of the following:
+
+   * a symbol assignment (*note Assignments::)
+   * an input section description (*note Input Section::)
+   * data values to include directly (*note Output Section Data::)
+   * a special output section keyword (*note Output Section Keywords::)
+
+3.6.2 Output Section Name
+-------------------------
+
+The name of the output section is SECTION.  SECTION must meet the
+constraints of your output format.  In formats which only support a
+limited number of sections, such as 'a.out', the name must be one of the
+names supported by the format ('a.out', for example, allows only
+'.text', '.data' or '.bss').  If the output format supports any number
+of sections, but with numbers and not names (as is the case for Oasys),
+the name should be supplied as a quoted numeric string.  A section name
+may consist of any sequence of characters, but a name which contains any
+unusual characters such as commas must be quoted.
+
+   The output section name '/DISCARD/' is special; *note Output Section
+Discarding::.
+
+3.6.3 Output Section Address
+----------------------------
+
+The ADDRESS is an expression for the VMA (the virtual memory address) of
+the output section.  If you do not provide ADDRESS, the linker will set
+it based on REGION if present, or otherwise based on the current value
+of the location counter.
+
+   If you provide ADDRESS, the address of the output section will be set
+to precisely that.  If you provide neither ADDRESS nor REGION, then the
+address of the output section will be set to the current value of the
+location counter aligned to the alignment requirements of the output
+section.  The alignment requirement of the output section is the
+strictest alignment of any input section contained within the output
+section.
+
+   For example,
+     .text . : { *(.text) }
+and
+     .text : { *(.text) }
+are subtly different.  The first will set the address of the '.text'
+output section to the current value of the location counter.  The second
+will set it to the current value of the location counter aligned to the
+strictest alignment of a '.text' input section.
+
+   The ADDRESS may be an arbitrary expression; *note Expressions::.  For
+example, if you want to align the section on a 0x10 byte boundary, so
+that the lowest four bits of the section address are zero, you could do
+something like this:
+     .text ALIGN(0x10) : { *(.text) }
+This works because 'ALIGN' returns the current location counter aligned
+upward to the specified value.
+
+   Specifying ADDRESS for a section will change the value of the
+location counter.
+
+3.6.4 Input Section Description
+-------------------------------
+
+The most common output section command is an input section description.
+
+   The input section description is the most basic linker script
+operation.  You use output sections to tell the linker how to lay out
+your program in memory.  You use input section descriptions to tell the
+linker how to map the input files into your memory layout.
+
+3.6.4.1 Input Section Basics
+............................
+
+An input section description consists of a file name optionally followed
+by a list of section names in parentheses.
+
+   The file name and the section name may be wildcard patterns, which we
+describe further below (*note Input Section Wildcards::).
+
+   The most common input section description is to include all input
+sections with a particular name in the output section.  For example, to
+include all input '.text' sections, you would write:
+     *(.text)
+Here the '*' is a wildcard which matches any file name.  To exclude a
+list of files from matching the file name wildcard, EXCLUDE_FILE may be
+used to match all files except the ones specified in the EXCLUDE_FILE
+list.  For example:
+     (*(EXCLUDE_FILE (*crtend.o *otherfile.o) .ctors))
+   will cause all .ctors sections from all files except 'crtend.o' and
+'otherfile.o' to be included.
+
+   There are two ways to include more than one section:
+     *(.text .rdata)
+     *(.text) *(.rdata)
+The difference between these is the order in which the '.text' and
+'.rdata' input sections will appear in the output section.  In the first
+example, they will be intermingled, appearing in the same order as they
+are found in the linker input.  In the second example, all '.text' input
+sections will appear first, followed by all '.rdata' input sections.
+
+   You can specify a file name to include sections from a particular
+file.  You would do this if one or more of your files contain special
+data that needs to be at a particular location in memory.  For example:
+     data.o(.data)
+
+   If you use a file name without a list of sections, then all sections
+in the input file will be included in the output section.  This is not
+commonly done, but it may by useful on occasion.  For example:
+     data.o
+
+   When you use a file name which does not contain any wild card
+characters, the linker will first see if you also specified the file
+name on the linker command line or in an 'INPUT' command.  If you did
+not, the linker will attempt to open the file as an input file, as
+though it appeared on the command line.  Note that this differs from an
+'INPUT' command, because the linker will not search for the file in the
+archive search path.
+
+3.6.4.2 Input Section Wildcard Patterns
+.......................................
+
+In an input section description, either the file name or the section
+name or both may be wildcard patterns.
+
+   The file name of '*' seen in many examples is a simple wildcard
+pattern for the file name.
+
+   The wildcard patterns are like those used by the Unix shell.
+
+'*'
+     matches any number of characters
+'?'
+     matches any single character
+'[CHARS]'
+     matches a single instance of any of the CHARS; the '-' character
+     may be used to specify a range of characters, as in '[a-z]' to
+     match any lower case letter
+'\'
+     quotes the following character
+
+   When a file name is matched with a wildcard, the wildcard characters
+will not match a '/' character (used to separate directory names on
+Unix).  A pattern consisting of a single '*' character is an exception;
+it will always match any file name, whether it contains a '/' or not.
+In a section name, the wildcard characters will match a '/' character.
+
+   File name wildcard patterns only match files which are explicitly
+specified on the command line or in an 'INPUT' command.  The linker does
+not search directories to expand wildcards.
+
+   If a file name matches more than one wildcard pattern, or if a file
+name appears explicitly and is also matched by a wildcard pattern, the
+linker will use the first match in the linker script.  For example, this
+sequence of input section descriptions is probably in error, because the
+'data.o' rule will not be used:
+     .data : { *(.data) }
+     .data1 : { data.o(.data) }
+
+   Normally, the linker will place files and sections matched by
+wildcards in the order in which they are seen during the link.  You can
+change this by using the 'SORT_BY_NAME' keyword, which appears before a
+wildcard pattern in parentheses (e.g., 'SORT_BY_NAME(.text*)').  When
+the 'SORT_BY_NAME' keyword is used, the linker will sort the files or
+sections into ascending order by name before placing them in the output
+file.
+
+   'SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT' is very similar to 'SORT_BY_NAME'.  The
+difference is 'SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT' will sort sections into ascending
+order by alignment before placing them in the output file.
+
+   'SORT' is an alias for 'SORT_BY_NAME'.
+
+   When there are nested section sorting commands in linker script,
+there can be at most 1 level of nesting for section sorting commands.
+
+  1. 'SORT_BY_NAME' ('SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT' (wildcard section pattern)).
+     It will sort the input sections by name first, then by alignment if
+     2 sections have the same name.
+  2. 'SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT' ('SORT_BY_NAME' (wildcard section pattern)).
+     It will sort the input sections by alignment first, then by name if
+     2 sections have the same alignment.
+  3. 'SORT_BY_NAME' ('SORT_BY_NAME' (wildcard section pattern)) is
+     treated the same as 'SORT_BY_NAME' (wildcard section pattern).
+  4. 'SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT' ('SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT' (wildcard section
+     pattern)) is treated the same as 'SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT' (wildcard
+     section pattern).
+  5. All other nested section sorting commands are invalid.
+
+   When both command line section sorting option and linker script
+section sorting command are used, section sorting command always takes
+precedence over the command line option.
+
+   If the section sorting command in linker script isn't nested, the
+command line option will make the section sorting command to be treated
+as nested sorting command.
+
+  1. 'SORT_BY_NAME' (wildcard section pattern ) with '--sort-sections
+     alignment' is equivalent to 'SORT_BY_NAME' ('SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT'
+     (wildcard section pattern)).
+  2. 'SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT' (wildcard section pattern) with '--sort-section
+     name' is equivalent to 'SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT' ('SORT_BY_NAME'
+     (wildcard section pattern)).
+
+   If the section sorting command in linker script is nested, the
+command line option will be ignored.
+
+   If you ever get confused about where input sections are going, use
+the '-M' linker option to generate a map file.  The map file shows
+precisely how input sections are mapped to output sections.
+
+   This example shows how wildcard patterns might be used to partition
+files.  This linker script directs the linker to place all '.text'
+sections in '.text' and all '.bss' sections in '.bss'.  The linker will
+place the '.data' section from all files beginning with an upper case
+character in '.DATA'; for all other files, the linker will place the
+'.data' section in '.data'.
+     SECTIONS {
+       .text : { *(.text) }
+       .DATA : { [A-Z]*(.data) }
+       .data : { *(.data) }
+       .bss : { *(.bss) }
+     }
+
+3.6.4.3 Input Section for Common Symbols
+........................................
+
+A special notation is needed for common symbols, because in many object
+file formats common symbols do not have a particular input section.  The
+linker treats common symbols as though they are in an input section
+named 'COMMON'.
+
+   You may use file names with the 'COMMON' section just as with any
+other input sections.  You can use this to place common symbols from a
+particular input file in one section while common symbols from other
+input files are placed in another section.
+
+   In most cases, common symbols in input files will be placed in the
+'.bss' section in the output file.  For example:
+     .bss { *(.bss) *(COMMON) }
+
+   Some object file formats have more than one type of common symbol.
+For example, the MIPS ELF object file format distinguishes standard
+common symbols and small common symbols.  In this case, the linker will
+use a different special section name for other types of common symbols.
+In the case of MIPS ELF, the linker uses 'COMMON' for standard common
+symbols and '.scommon' for small common symbols.  This permits you to
+map the different types of common symbols into memory at different
+locations.
+
+   You will sometimes see '[COMMON]' in old linker scripts.  This
+notation is now considered obsolete.  It is equivalent to '*(COMMON)'.
+
+3.6.4.4 Input Section and Garbage Collection
+............................................
+
+When link-time garbage collection is in use ('--gc-sections'), it is
+often useful to mark sections that should not be eliminated.  This is
+accomplished by surrounding an input section's wildcard entry with
+'KEEP()', as in 'KEEP(*(.init))' or 'KEEP(SORT_BY_NAME(*)(.ctors))'.
+
+3.6.4.5 Input Section Example
+.............................
+
+The following example is a complete linker script.  It tells the linker
+to read all of the sections from file 'all.o' and place them at the
+start of output section 'outputa' which starts at location '0x10000'.
+All of section '.input1' from file 'foo.o' follows immediately, in the
+same output section.  All of section '.input2' from 'foo.o' goes into
+output section 'outputb', followed by section '.input1' from 'foo1.o'.
+All of the remaining '.input1' and '.input2' sections from any files are
+written to output section 'outputc'.
+
+     SECTIONS {
+       outputa 0x10000 :
+         {
+         all.o
+         foo.o (.input1)
+         }
+       outputb :
+         {
+         foo.o (.input2)
+         foo1.o (.input1)
+         }
+       outputc :
+         {
+         *(.input1)
+         *(.input2)
+         }
+     }
+
+3.6.5 Output Section Data
+-------------------------
+
+You can include explicit bytes of data in an output section by using
+'BYTE', 'SHORT', 'LONG', 'QUAD', or 'SQUAD' as an output section
+command.  Each keyword is followed by an expression in parentheses
+providing the value to store (*note Expressions::).  The value of the
+expression is stored at the current value of the location counter.
+
+   The 'BYTE', 'SHORT', 'LONG', and 'QUAD' commands store one, two,
+four, and eight bytes (respectively).  After storing the bytes, the
+location counter is incremented by the number of bytes stored.
+
+   For example, this will store the byte 1 followed by the four byte
+value of the symbol 'addr':
+     BYTE(1)
+     LONG(addr)
+
+   When using a 64 bit host or target, 'QUAD' and 'SQUAD' are the same;
+they both store an 8 byte, or 64 bit, value.  When both host and target
+are 32 bits, an expression is computed as 32 bits.  In this case 'QUAD'
+stores a 32 bit value zero extended to 64 bits, and 'SQUAD' stores a 32
+bit value sign extended to 64 bits.
+
+   If the object file format of the output file has an explicit
+endianness, which is the normal case, the value will be stored in that
+endianness.  When the object file format does not have an explicit
+endianness, as is true of, for example, S-records, the value will be
+stored in the endianness of the first input object file.
+
+   Note--these commands only work inside a section description and not
+between them, so the following will produce an error from the linker:
+     SECTIONS { .text : { *(.text) } LONG(1) .data : { *(.data) } } 
+   whereas this will work:
+     SECTIONS { .text : { *(.text) ; LONG(1) } .data : { *(.data) } } 
+
+   You may use the 'FILL' command to set the fill pattern for the
+current section.  It is followed by an expression in parentheses.  Any
+otherwise unspecified regions of memory within the section (for example,
+gaps left due to the required alignment of input sections) are filled
+with the value of the expression, repeated as necessary.  A 'FILL'
+statement covers memory locations after the point at which it occurs in
+the section definition; by including more than one 'FILL' statement, you
+can have different fill patterns in different parts of an output
+section.
+
+   This example shows how to fill unspecified regions of memory with the
+value '0x90':
+     FILL(0x90909090)
+
+   The 'FILL' command is similar to the '=FILLEXP' output section
+attribute, but it only affects the part of the section following the
+'FILL' command, rather than the entire section.  If both are used, the
+'FILL' command takes precedence.  *Note Output Section Fill::, for
+details on the fill expression.
+
+3.6.6 Output Section Keywords
+-----------------------------
+
+There are a couple of keywords which can appear as output section
+commands.
+
+'CREATE_OBJECT_SYMBOLS'
+     The command tells the linker to create a symbol for each input
+     file.  The name of each symbol will be the name of the
+     corresponding input file.  The section of each symbol will be the
+     output section in which the 'CREATE_OBJECT_SYMBOLS' command
+     appears.
+
+     This is conventional for the a.out object file format.  It is not
+     normally used for any other object file format.
+
+'CONSTRUCTORS'
+     When linking using the a.out object file format, the linker uses an
+     unusual set construct to support C++ global constructors and
+     destructors.  When linking object file formats which do not support
+     arbitrary sections, such as ECOFF and XCOFF, the linker will
+     automatically recognize C++ global constructors and destructors by
+     name.  For these object file formats, the 'CONSTRUCTORS' command
+     tells the linker to place constructor information in the output
+     section where the 'CONSTRUCTORS' command appears.  The
+     'CONSTRUCTORS' command is ignored for other object file formats.
+
+     The symbol '__CTOR_LIST__' marks the start of the global
+     constructors, and the symbol '__CTOR_END__' marks the end.
+     Similarly, '__DTOR_LIST__' and '__DTOR_END__' mark the start and
+     end of the global destructors.  The first word in the list is the
+     number of entries, followed by the address of each constructor or
+     destructor, followed by a zero word.  The compiler must arrange to
+     actually run the code.  For these object file formats GNU C++
+     normally calls constructors from a subroutine '__main'; a call to
+     '__main' is automatically inserted into the startup code for
+     'main'.  GNU C++ normally runs destructors either by using
+     'atexit', or directly from the function 'exit'.
+
+     For object file formats such as 'COFF' or 'ELF' which support
+     arbitrary section names, GNU C++ will normally arrange to put the
+     addresses of global constructors and destructors into the '.ctors'
+     and '.dtors' sections.  Placing the following sequence into your
+     linker script will build the sort of table which the GNU C++
+     runtime code expects to see.
+
+                __CTOR_LIST__ = .;
+                LONG((__CTOR_END__ - __CTOR_LIST__) / 4 - 2)
+                *(.ctors)
+                LONG(0)
+                __CTOR_END__ = .;
+                __DTOR_LIST__ = .;
+                LONG((__DTOR_END__ - __DTOR_LIST__) / 4 - 2)
+                *(.dtors)
+                LONG(0)
+                __DTOR_END__ = .;
+
+     If you are using the GNU C++ support for initialization priority,
+     which provides some control over the order in which global
+     constructors are run, you must sort the constructors at link time
+     to ensure that they are executed in the correct order.  When using
+     the 'CONSTRUCTORS' command, use 'SORT_BY_NAME(CONSTRUCTORS)'
+     instead.  When using the '.ctors' and '.dtors' sections, use
+     '*(SORT_BY_NAME(.ctors))' and '*(SORT_BY_NAME(.dtors))' instead of
+     just '*(.ctors)' and '*(.dtors)'.
+
+     Normally the compiler and linker will handle these issues
+     automatically, and you will not need to concern yourself with them.
+     However, you may need to consider this if you are using C++ and
+     writing your own linker scripts.
+
+3.6.7 Output Section Discarding
+-------------------------------
+
+The linker will not create output sections with no contents.  This is
+for convenience when referring to input sections that may or may not be
+present in any of the input files.  For example:
+     .foo : { *(.foo) }
+will only create a '.foo' section in the output file if there is a
+'.foo' section in at least one input file, and if the input sections are
+not all empty.  Other link script directives that allocate space in an
+output section will also create the output section.
+
+   The linker will ignore address assignments (*note Output Section
+Address::) on discarded output sections, except when the linker script
+defines symbols in the output section.  In that case the linker will
+obey the address assignments, possibly advancing dot even though the
+section is discarded.
+
+   The special output section name '/DISCARD/' may be used to discard
+input sections.  Any input sections which are assigned to an output
+section named '/DISCARD/' are not included in the output file.
+
+3.6.8 Output Section Attributes
+-------------------------------
+
+We showed above that the full description of an output section looked
+like this:
+     SECTION [ADDRESS] [(TYPE)] :
+       [AT(LMA)] [ALIGN(SECTION_ALIGN)] [SUBALIGN(SUBSECTION_ALIGN)]
+       {
+         OUTPUT-SECTION-COMMAND
+         OUTPUT-SECTION-COMMAND
+         ...
+       } [>REGION] [AT>LMA_REGION] [:PHDR :PHDR ...] [=FILLEXP]
+   We've already described SECTION, ADDRESS, and OUTPUT-SECTION-COMMAND.
+In this section we will describe the remaining section attributes.
+
+3.6.8.1 Output Section Type
+...........................
+
+Each output section may have a type.  The type is a keyword in
+parentheses.  The following types are defined:
+
+'NOLOAD'
+     The section should be marked as not loadable, so that it will not
+     be loaded into memory when the program is run.
+'DSECT'
+'COPY'
+'INFO'
+'OVERLAY'
+     These type names are supported for backward compatibility, and are
+     rarely used.  They all have the same effect: the section should be
+     marked as not allocatable, so that no memory is allocated for the
+     section when the program is run.
+
+   The linker normally sets the attributes of an output section based on
+the input sections which map into it.  You can override this by using
+the section type.  For example, in the script sample below, the 'ROM'
+section is addressed at memory location '0' and does not need to be
+loaded when the program is run.  The contents of the 'ROM' section will
+appear in the linker output file as usual.
+     SECTIONS {
+       ROM 0 (NOLOAD) : { ... }
+       ...
+     }
+
+3.6.8.2 Output Section LMA
+..........................
+
+Every section has a virtual address (VMA) and a load address (LMA); see
+*note Basic Script Concepts::.  The address expression which may appear
+in an output section description sets the VMA (*note Output Section
+Address::).
+
+   The expression LMA that follows the 'AT' keyword specifies the load
+address of the section.
+
+   Alternatively, with 'AT>LMA_REGION' expression, you may specify a
+memory region for the section's load address.  *Note MEMORY::.  Note
+that if the section has not had a VMA assigned to it then the linker
+will use the LMA_REGION as the VMA region as well.
+
+   If neither 'AT' nor 'AT>' is specified for an allocatable section,
+the linker will set the LMA such that the difference between VMA and LMA
+for the section is the same as the preceding output section in the same
+region.  If there is no preceding output section or the section is not
+allocatable, the linker will set the LMA equal to the VMA. *Note Output
+Section Region::.
+
+   This feature is designed to make it easy to build a ROM image.  For
+example, the following linker script creates three output sections: one
+called '.text', which starts at '0x1000', one called '.mdata', which is
+loaded at the end of the '.text' section even though its VMA is
+'0x2000', and one called '.bss' to hold uninitialized data at address
+'0x3000'.  The symbol '_data' is defined with the value '0x2000', which
+shows that the location counter holds the VMA value, not the LMA value.
+
+     SECTIONS
+       {
+       .text 0x1000 : { *(.text) _etext = . ; }
+       .mdata 0x2000 :
+         AT ( ADDR (.text) + SIZEOF (.text) )
+         { _data = . ; *(.data); _edata = . ;  }
+       .bss 0x3000 :
+         { _bstart = . ;  *(.bss) *(COMMON) ; _bend = . ;}
+     }
+
+   The run-time initialization code for use with a program generated
+with this linker script would include something like the following, to
+copy the initialized data from the ROM image to its runtime address.
+Notice how this code takes advantage of the symbols defined by the
+linker script.
+
+     extern char _etext, _data, _edata, _bstart, _bend;
+     char *src = &_etext;
+     char *dst = &_data;
+
+     /* ROM has data at end of text; copy it. */
+     while (dst < &_edata) {
+       *dst++ = *src++;
+     }
+
+     /* Zero bss */
+     for (dst = &_bstart; dst< &_bend; dst++)
+       *dst = 0;
+
+3.6.8.3 Forced Output Alignment
+...............................
+
+You can increase an output section's alignment by using ALIGN.
+
+3.6.8.4 Forced Input Alignment
+..............................
+
+You can force input section alignment within an output section by using
+SUBALIGN. The value specified overrides any alignment given by input
+sections, whether larger or smaller.
+
+3.6.8.5 Output Section Region
+.............................
+
+You can assign a section to a previously defined region of memory by
+using '>REGION'.  *Note MEMORY::.
+
+   Here is a simple example:
+     MEMORY { rom : ORIGIN = 0x1000, LENGTH = 0x1000 }
+     SECTIONS { ROM : { *(.text) } >rom }
+
+3.6.8.6 Output Section Phdr
+...........................
+
+You can assign a section to a previously defined program segment by
+using ':PHDR'.  *Note PHDRS::.  If a section is assigned to one or more
+segments, then all subsequent allocated sections will be assigned to
+those segments as well, unless they use an explicitly ':PHDR' modifier.
+You can use ':NONE' to tell the linker to not put the section in any
+segment at all.
+
+   Here is a simple example:
+     PHDRS { text PT_LOAD ; }
+     SECTIONS { .text : { *(.text) } :text }
+
+3.6.8.7 Output Section Fill
+...........................
+
+You can set the fill pattern for an entire section by using '=FILLEXP'.
+FILLEXP is an expression (*note Expressions::).  Any otherwise
+unspecified regions of memory within the output section (for example,
+gaps left due to the required alignment of input sections) will be
+filled with the value, repeated as necessary.  If the fill expression is
+a simple hex number, ie.  a string of hex digit starting with '0x' and
+without a trailing 'k' or 'M', then an arbitrarily long sequence of hex
+digits can be used to specify the fill pattern; Leading zeros become
+part of the pattern too.  For all other cases, including extra
+parentheses or a unary '+', the fill pattern is the four least
+significant bytes of the value of the expression.  In all cases, the
+number is big-endian.
+
+   You can also change the fill value with a 'FILL' command in the
+output section commands; (*note Output Section Data::).
+
+   Here is a simple example:
+     SECTIONS { .text : { *(.text) } =0x90909090 }
+
+3.6.9 Overlay Description
+-------------------------
+
+An overlay description provides an easy way to describe sections which
+are to be loaded as part of a single memory image but are to be run at
+the same memory address.  At run time, some sort of overlay manager will
+copy the overlaid sections in and out of the runtime memory address as
+required, perhaps by simply manipulating addressing bits.  This approach
+can be useful, for example, when a certain region of memory is faster
+than another.
+
+   Overlays are described using the 'OVERLAY' command.  The 'OVERLAY'
+command is used within a 'SECTIONS' command, like an output section
+description.  The full syntax of the 'OVERLAY' command is as follows:
+     OVERLAY [START] : [NOCROSSREFS] [AT ( LDADDR )]
+       {
+         SECNAME1
+           {
+             OUTPUT-SECTION-COMMAND
+             OUTPUT-SECTION-COMMAND
+             ...
+           } [:PHDR...] [=FILL]
+         SECNAME2
+           {
+             OUTPUT-SECTION-COMMAND
+             OUTPUT-SECTION-COMMAND
+             ...
+           } [:PHDR...] [=FILL]
+         ...
+       } [>REGION] [:PHDR...] [=FILL]
+
+   Everything is optional except 'OVERLAY' (a keyword), and each section
+must have a name (SECNAME1 and SECNAME2 above).  The section definitions
+within the 'OVERLAY' construct are identical to those within the general
+'SECTIONS' contruct (*note SECTIONS::), except that no addresses and no
+memory regions may be defined for sections within an 'OVERLAY'.
+
+   The sections are all defined with the same starting address.  The
+load addresses of the sections are arranged such that they are
+consecutive in memory starting at the load address used for the
+'OVERLAY' as a whole (as with normal section definitions, the load
+address is optional, and defaults to the start address; the start
+address is also optional, and defaults to the current value of the
+location counter).
+
+   If the 'NOCROSSREFS' keyword is used, and there any references among
+the sections, the linker will report an error.  Since the sections all
+run at the same address, it normally does not make sense for one section
+to refer directly to another.  *Note NOCROSSREFS: Miscellaneous
+Commands.
+
+   For each section within the 'OVERLAY', the linker automatically
+provides two symbols.  The symbol '__load_start_SECNAME' is defined as
+the starting load address of the section.  The symbol
+'__load_stop_SECNAME' is defined as the final load address of the
+section.  Any characters within SECNAME which are not legal within C
+identifiers are removed.  C (or assembler) code may use these symbols to
+move the overlaid sections around as necessary.
+
+   At the end of the overlay, the value of the location counter is set
+to the start address of the overlay plus the size of the largest
+section.
+
+   Here is an example.  Remember that this would appear inside a
+'SECTIONS' construct.
+       OVERLAY 0x1000 : AT (0x4000)
+        {
+          .text0 { o1/*.o(.text) }
+          .text1 { o2/*.o(.text) }
+        }
+This will define both '.text0' and '.text1' to start at address 0x1000.
+'.text0' will be loaded at address 0x4000, and '.text1' will be loaded
+immediately after '.text0'.  The following symbols will be defined if
+referenced: '__load_start_text0', '__load_stop_text0',
+'__load_start_text1', '__load_stop_text1'.
+
+   C code to copy overlay '.text1' into the overlay area might look like
+the following.
+
+       extern char __load_start_text1, __load_stop_text1;
+       memcpy ((char *) 0x1000, &__load_start_text1,
+               &__load_stop_text1 - &__load_start_text1);
+
+   Note that the 'OVERLAY' command is just syntactic sugar, since
+everything it does can be done using the more basic commands.  The above
+example could have been written identically as follows.
+
+       .text0 0x1000 : AT (0x4000) { o1/*.o(.text) }
+       PROVIDE (__load_start_text0 = LOADADDR (.text0));
+       PROVIDE (__load_stop_text0 = LOADADDR (.text0) + SIZEOF (.text0));
+       .text1 0x1000 : AT (0x4000 + SIZEOF (.text0)) { o2/*.o(.text) }
+       PROVIDE (__load_start_text1 = LOADADDR (.text1));
+       PROVIDE (__load_stop_text1 = LOADADDR (.text1) + SIZEOF (.text1));
+       . = 0x1000 + MAX (SIZEOF (.text0), SIZEOF (.text1));
+
+3.7 MEMORY Command
+==================
+
+The linker's default configuration permits allocation of all available
+memory.  You can override this by using the 'MEMORY' command.
+
+   The 'MEMORY' command describes the location and size of blocks of
+memory in the target.  You can use it to describe which memory regions
+may be used by the linker, and which memory regions it must avoid.  You
+can then assign sections to particular memory regions.  The linker will
+set section addresses based on the memory regions, and will warn about
+regions that become too full.  The linker will not shuffle sections
+around to fit into the available regions.
+
+   A linker script may contain at most one use of the 'MEMORY' command.
+However, you can define as many blocks of memory within it as you wish.
+The syntax is:
+     MEMORY
+       {
+         NAME [(ATTR)] : ORIGIN = ORIGIN, LENGTH = LEN
+         ...
+       }
+
+   The NAME is a name used in the linker script to refer to the region.
+The region name has no meaning outside of the linker script.  Region
+names are stored in a separate name space, and will not conflict with
+symbol names, file names, or section names.  Each memory region must
+have a distinct name.
+
+   The ATTR string is an optional list of attributes that specify
+whether to use a particular memory region for an input section which is
+not explicitly mapped in the linker script.  As described in *note
+SECTIONS::, if you do not specify an output section for some input
+section, the linker will create an output section with the same name as
+the input section.  If you define region attributes, the linker will use
+them to select the memory region for the output section that it creates.
+
+   The ATTR string must consist only of the following characters:
+'R'
+     Read-only section
+'W'
+     Read/write section
+'X'
+     Executable section
+'A'
+     Allocatable section
+'I'
+     Initialized section
+'L'
+     Same as 'I'
+'!'
+     Invert the sense of any of the preceding attributes
+
+   If a unmapped section matches any of the listed attributes other than
+'!', it will be placed in the memory region.  The '!' attribute reverses
+this test, so that an unmapped section will be placed in the memory
+region only if it does not match any of the listed attributes.
+
+   The ORIGIN is an numerical expression for the start address of the
+memory region.  The expression must evaluate to a constant and it cannot
+involve any symbols.  The keyword 'ORIGIN' may be abbreviated to 'org'
+or 'o' (but not, for example, 'ORG').
+
+   The LEN is an expression for the size in bytes of the memory region.
+As with the ORIGIN expression, the expression must be numerical only and
+must evaluate to a constant.  The keyword 'LENGTH' may be abbreviated to
+'len' or 'l'.
+
+   In the following example, we specify that there are two memory
+regions available for allocation: one starting at '0' for 256 kilobytes,
+and the other starting at '0x40000000' for four megabytes.  The linker
+will place into the 'rom' memory region every section which is not
+explicitly mapped into a memory region, and is either read-only or
+executable.  The linker will place other sections which are not
+explicitly mapped into a memory region into the 'ram' memory region.
+
+     MEMORY
+       {
+         rom (rx)  : ORIGIN = 0, LENGTH = 256K
+         ram (!rx) : org = 0x40000000, l = 4M
+       }
+
+   Once you define a memory region, you can direct the linker to place
+specific output sections into that memory region by using the '>REGION'
+output section attribute.  For example, if you have a memory region
+named 'mem', you would use '>mem' in the output section definition.
+*Note Output Section Region::.  If no address was specified for the
+output section, the linker will set the address to the next available
+address within the memory region.  If the combined output sections
+directed to a memory region are too large for the region, the linker
+will issue an error message.
+
+   It is possible to access the origin and length of a memory in an
+expression via the 'ORIGIN(MEMORY)' and 'LENGTH(MEMORY)' functions:
+
+       _fstack = ORIGIN(ram) + LENGTH(ram) - 4;
+
+3.8 PHDRS Command
+=================
+
+The ELF object file format uses "program headers", also knows as
+"segments".  The program headers describe how the program should be
+loaded into memory.  You can print them out by using the 'objdump'
+program with the '-p' option.
+
+   When you run an ELF program on a native ELF system, the system loader
+reads the program headers in order to figure out how to load the
+program.  This will only work if the program headers are set correctly.
+This manual does not describe the details of how the system loader
+interprets program headers; for more information, see the ELF ABI.
+
+   The linker will create reasonable program headers by default.
+However, in some cases, you may need to specify the program headers more
+precisely.  You may use the 'PHDRS' command for this purpose.  When the
+linker sees the 'PHDRS' command in the linker script, it will not create
+any program headers other than the ones specified.
+
+   The linker only pays attention to the 'PHDRS' command when generating
+an ELF output file.  In other cases, the linker will simply ignore
+'PHDRS'.
+
+   This is the syntax of the 'PHDRS' command.  The words 'PHDRS',
+'FILEHDR', 'AT', and 'FLAGS' are keywords.
+
+     PHDRS
+     {
+       NAME TYPE [ FILEHDR ] [ PHDRS ] [ AT ( ADDRESS ) ]
+             [ FLAGS ( FLAGS ) ] ;
+     }
+
+   The NAME is used only for reference in the 'SECTIONS' command of the
+linker script.  It is not put into the output file.  Program header
+names are stored in a separate name space, and will not conflict with
+symbol names, file names, or section names.  Each program header must
+have a distinct name.
+
+   Certain program header types describe segments of memory which the
+system loader will load from the file.  In the linker script, you
+specify the contents of these segments by placing allocatable output
+sections in the segments.  You use the ':PHDR' output section attribute
+to place a section in a particular segment.  *Note Output Section
+Phdr::.
+
+   It is normal to put certain sections in more than one segment.  This
+merely implies that one segment of memory contains another.  You may
+repeat ':PHDR', using it once for each segment which should contain the
+section.
+
+   If you place a section in one or more segments using ':PHDR', then
+the linker will place all subsequent allocatable sections which do not
+specify ':PHDR' in the same segments.  This is for convenience, since
+generally a whole set of contiguous sections will be placed in a single
+segment.  You can use ':NONE' to override the default segment and tell
+the linker to not put the section in any segment at all.
+
+   You may use the 'FILEHDR' and 'PHDRS' keywords appear after the
+program header type to further describe the contents of the segment.
+The 'FILEHDR' keyword means that the segment should include the ELF file
+header.  The 'PHDRS' keyword means that the segment should include the
+ELF program headers themselves.
+
+   The TYPE may be one of the following.  The numbers indicate the value
+of the keyword.
+
+'PT_NULL' (0)
+     Indicates an unused program header.
+
+'PT_LOAD' (1)
+     Indicates that this program header describes a segment to be loaded
+     from the file.
+
+'PT_DYNAMIC' (2)
+     Indicates a segment where dynamic linking information can be found.
+
+'PT_INTERP' (3)
+     Indicates a segment where the name of the program interpreter may
+     be found.
+
+'PT_NOTE' (4)
+     Indicates a segment holding note information.
+
+'PT_SHLIB' (5)
+     A reserved program header type, defined but not specified by the
+     ELF ABI.
+
+'PT_PHDR' (6)
+     Indicates a segment where the program headers may be found.
+
+EXPRESSION
+     An expression giving the numeric type of the program header.  This
+     may be used for types not defined above.
+
+   You can specify that a segment should be loaded at a particular
+address in memory by using an 'AT' expression.  This is identical to the
+'AT' command used as an output section attribute (*note Output Section
+LMA::).  The 'AT' command for a program header overrides the output
+section attribute.
+
+   The linker will normally set the segment flags based on the sections
+which comprise the segment.  You may use the 'FLAGS' keyword to
+explicitly specify the segment flags.  The value of FLAGS must be an
+integer.  It is used to set the 'p_flags' field of the program header.
+
+   Here is an example of 'PHDRS'.  This shows a typical set of program
+headers used on a native ELF system.
+
+     PHDRS
+     {
+       headers PT_PHDR PHDRS ;
+       interp PT_INTERP ;
+       text PT_LOAD FILEHDR PHDRS ;
+       data PT_LOAD ;
+       dynamic PT_DYNAMIC ;
+     }
+
+     SECTIONS
+     {
+       . = SIZEOF_HEADERS;
+       .interp : { *(.interp) } :text :interp
+       .text : { *(.text) } :text
+       .rodata : { *(.rodata) } /* defaults to :text */
+       ...
+       . = . + 0x1000; /* move to a new page in memory */
+       .data : { *(.data) } :data
+       .dynamic : { *(.dynamic) } :data :dynamic
+       ...
+     }
+
+3.9 VERSION Command
+===================
+
+The linker supports symbol versions when using ELF. Symbol versions are
+only useful when using shared libraries.  The dynamic linker can use
+symbol versions to select a specific version of a function when it runs
+a program that may have been linked against an earlier version of the
+shared library.
+
+   You can include a version script directly in the main linker script,
+or you can supply the version script as an implicit linker script.  You
+can also use the '--version-script' linker option.
+
+   The syntax of the 'VERSION' command is simply
+     VERSION { version-script-commands }
+
+   The format of the version script commands is identical to that used
+by Sun's linker in Solaris 2.5.  The version script defines a tree of
+version nodes.  You specify the node names and interdependencies in the
+version script.  You can specify which symbols are bound to which
+version nodes, and you can reduce a specified set of symbols to local
+scope so that they are not globally visible outside of the shared
+library.
+
+   The easiest way to demonstrate the version script language is with a
+few examples.
+
+     VERS_1.1 {
+     	 global:
+     		 foo1;
+     	 local:
+     		 old*;
+     		 original*;
+     		 new*;
+     };
+
+     VERS_1.2 {
+     		 foo2;
+     } VERS_1.1;
+
+     VERS_2.0 {
+     		 bar1; bar2;
+     	 extern "C++" {
+     		 ns::*;
+     		 "int f(int, double)";
+              }
+     } VERS_1.2;
+
+   This example version script defines three version nodes.  The first
+version node defined is 'VERS_1.1'; it has no other dependencies.  The
+script binds the symbol 'foo1' to 'VERS_1.1'.  It reduces a number of
+symbols to local scope so that they are not visible outside of the
+shared library; this is done using wildcard patterns, so that any symbol
+whose name begins with 'old', 'original', or 'new' is matched.  The
+wildcard patterns available are the same as those used in the shell when
+matching filenames (also known as "globbing").  However, if you specify
+the symbol name inside double quotes, then the name is treated as
+literal, rather than as a glob pattern.
+
+   Next, the version script defines node 'VERS_1.2'.  This node depends
+upon 'VERS_1.1'.  The script binds the symbol 'foo2' to the version node
+'VERS_1.2'.
+
+   Finally, the version script defines node 'VERS_2.0'.  This node
+depends upon 'VERS_1.2'.  The scripts binds the symbols 'bar1' and
+'bar2' are bound to the version node 'VERS_2.0'.
+
+   When the linker finds a symbol defined in a library which is not
+specifically bound to a version node, it will effectively bind it to an
+unspecified base version of the library.  You can bind all otherwise
+unspecified symbols to a given version node by using 'global: *;'
+somewhere in the version script.
+
+   The names of the version nodes have no specific meaning other than
+what they might suggest to the person reading them.  The '2.0' version
+could just as well have appeared in between '1.1' and '1.2'.  However,
+this would be a confusing way to write a version script.
+
+   Node name can be omitted, provided it is the only version node in the
+version script.  Such version script doesn't assign any versions to
+symbols, only selects which symbols will be globally visible out and
+which won't.
+
+     { global: foo; bar; local: *; };
+
+   When you link an application against a shared library that has
+versioned symbols, the application itself knows which version of each
+symbol it requires, and it also knows which version nodes it needs from
+each shared library it is linked against.  Thus at runtime, the dynamic
+loader can make a quick check to make sure that the libraries you have
+linked against do in fact supply all of the version nodes that the
+application will need to resolve all of the dynamic symbols.  In this
+way it is possible for the dynamic linker to know with certainty that
+all external symbols that it needs will be resolvable without having to
+search for each symbol reference.
+
+   The symbol versioning is in effect a much more sophisticated way of
+doing minor version checking that SunOS does.  The fundamental problem
+that is being addressed here is that typically references to external
+functions are bound on an as-needed basis, and are not all bound when
+the application starts up.  If a shared library is out of date, a
+required interface may be missing; when the application tries to use
+that interface, it may suddenly and unexpectedly fail.  With symbol
+versioning, the user will get a warning when they start their program if
+the libraries being used with the application are too old.
+
+   There are several GNU extensions to Sun's versioning approach.  The
+first of these is the ability to bind a symbol to a version node in the
+source file where the symbol is defined instead of in the versioning
+script.  This was done mainly to reduce the burden on the library
+maintainer.  You can do this by putting something like:
+     __asm__(".symver original_foo,foo@VERS_1.1");
+in the C source file.  This renames the function 'original_foo' to be an
+alias for 'foo' bound to the version node 'VERS_1.1'.  The 'local:'
+directive can be used to prevent the symbol 'original_foo' from being
+exported.  A '.symver' directive takes precedence over a version script.
+
+   The second GNU extension is to allow multiple versions of the same
+function to appear in a given shared library.  In this way you can make
+an incompatible change to an interface without increasing the major
+version number of the shared library, while still allowing applications
+linked against the old interface to continue to function.
+
+   To do this, you must use multiple '.symver' directives in the source
+file.  Here is an example:
+
+     __asm__(".symver original_foo,foo@");
+     __asm__(".symver old_foo,foo@VERS_1.1");
+     __asm__(".symver old_foo1,foo@VERS_1.2");
+     __asm__(".symver new_foo,foo@@VERS_2.0");
+
+   In this example, 'foo@' represents the symbol 'foo' bound to the
+unspecified base version of the symbol.  The source file that contains
+this example would define 4 C functions: 'original_foo', 'old_foo',
+'old_foo1', and 'new_foo'.
+
+   When you have multiple definitions of a given symbol, there needs to
+be some way to specify a default version to which external references to
+this symbol will be bound.  You can do this with the 'foo@@VERS_2.0'
+type of '.symver' directive.  You can only declare one version of a
+symbol as the default in this manner; otherwise you would effectively
+have multiple definitions of the same symbol.
+
+   If you wish to bind a reference to a specific version of the symbol
+within the shared library, you can use the aliases of convenience (i.e.,
+'old_foo'), or you can use the '.symver' directive to specifically bind
+to an external version of the function in question.
+
+   You can also specify the language in the version script:
+
+     VERSION extern "lang" { version-script-commands }
+
+   The supported 'lang's are 'C', 'C++', and 'Java'.  The linker will
+iterate over the list of symbols at the link time and demangle them
+according to 'lang' before matching them to the patterns specified in
+'version-script-commands'.
+
+   Demangled names may contains spaces and other special characters.  As
+described above, you can use a glob pattern to match demangled names, or
+you can use a double-quoted string to match the string exactly.  In the
+latter case, be aware that minor differences (such as differing
+whitespace) between the version script and the demangler output will
+cause a mismatch.  As the exact string generated by the demangler might
+change in the future, even if the mangled name does not, you should
+check that all of your version directives are behaving as you expect
+when you upgrade.
+
+3.10 Expressions in Linker Scripts
+==================================
+
+The syntax for expressions in the linker script language is identical to
+that of C expressions.  All expressions are evaluated as integers.  All
+expressions are evaluated in the same size, which is 32 bits if both the
+host and target are 32 bits, and is otherwise 64 bits.
+
+   You can use and set symbol values in expressions.
+
+   The linker defines several special purpose builtin functions for use
+in expressions.
+
+3.10.1 Constants
+----------------
+
+All constants are integers.
+
+   As in C, the linker considers an integer beginning with '0' to be
+octal, and an integer beginning with '0x' or '0X' to be hexadecimal.
+The linker considers other integers to be decimal.
+
+   In addition, you can use the suffixes 'K' and 'M' to scale a constant
+by '1024' or '1024*1024' respectively.  For example, the following all
+refer to the same quantity:
+     _fourk_1 = 4K;
+     _fourk_2 = 4096;
+     _fourk_3 = 0x1000;
+
+3.10.2 Symbol Names
+-------------------
+
+Unless quoted, symbol names start with a letter, underscore, or period
+and may include letters, digits, underscores, periods, and hyphens.
+Unquoted symbol names must not conflict with any keywords.  You can
+specify a symbol which contains odd characters or has the same name as a
+keyword by surrounding the symbol name in double quotes:
+     "SECTION" = 9;
+     "with a space" = "also with a space" + 10;
+
+   Since symbols can contain many non-alphabetic characters, it is
+safest to delimit symbols with spaces.  For example, 'A-B' is one
+symbol, whereas 'A - B' is an expression involving subtraction.
+
+3.10.3 Orphan Sections
+----------------------
+
+Orphan sections are sections present in the input files which are not
+explicitly placed into the output file by the linker script.  The linker
+will still copy these sections into the output file, but it has to guess
+as to where they should be placed.  The linker uses a simple heuristic
+to do this.  It attempts to place orphan sections after non-orphan
+sections of the same attribute, such as code vs data, loadable vs
+non-loadable, etc.  If there is not enough room to do this then it
+places at the end of the file.
+
+   For ELF targets, the attribute of the section includes section type
+as well as section flag.
+
+3.10.4 The Location Counter
+---------------------------
+
+The special linker variable "dot" '.' always contains the current output
+location counter.  Since the '.' always refers to a location in an
+output section, it may only appear in an expression within a 'SECTIONS'
+command.  The '.' symbol may appear anywhere that an ordinary symbol is
+allowed in an expression.
+
+   Assigning a value to '.' will cause the location counter to be moved.
+This may be used to create holes in the output section.  The location
+counter may not be moved backwards inside an output section, and may not
+be moved backwards outside of an output section if so doing creates
+areas with overlapping LMAs.
+
+     SECTIONS
+     {
+       output :
+         {
+           file1(.text)
+           . = . + 1000;
+           file2(.text)
+           . += 1000;
+           file3(.text)
+         } = 0x12345678;
+     }
+In the previous example, the '.text' section from 'file1' is located at
+the beginning of the output section 'output'.  It is followed by a 1000
+byte gap.  Then the '.text' section from 'file2' appears, also with a
+1000 byte gap following before the '.text' section from 'file3'.  The
+notation '= 0x12345678' specifies what data to write in the gaps (*note
+Output Section Fill::).
+
+   Note: '.' actually refers to the byte offset from the start of the
+current containing object.  Normally this is the 'SECTIONS' statement,
+whose start address is 0, hence '.' can be used as an absolute address.
+If '.' is used inside a section description however, it refers to the
+byte offset from the start of that section, not an absolute address.
+Thus in a script like this:
+
+     SECTIONS
+     {
+         . = 0x100
+         .text: {
+           *(.text)
+           . = 0x200
+         }
+         . = 0x500
+         .data: {
+           *(.data)
+           . += 0x600
+         }
+     }
+
+   The '.text' section will be assigned a starting address of 0x100 and
+a size of exactly 0x200 bytes, even if there is not enough data in the
+'.text' input sections to fill this area.  (If there is too much data,
+an error will be produced because this would be an attempt to move '.'
+backwards).  The '.data' section will start at 0x500 and it will have an
+extra 0x600 bytes worth of space after the end of the values from the
+'.data' input sections and before the end of the '.data' output section
+itself.
+
+   Setting symbols to the value of the location counter outside of an
+output section statement can result in unexpected values if the linker
+needs to place orphan sections.  For example, given the following:
+
+     SECTIONS
+     {
+         start_of_text = . ;
+         .text: { *(.text) }
+         end_of_text = . ;
+
+         start_of_data = . ;
+         .data: { *(.data) }
+         end_of_data = . ;
+     }
+
+   If the linker needs to place some input section, e.g.  '.rodata', not
+mentioned in the script, it might choose to place that section between
+'.text' and '.data'.  You might think the linker should place '.rodata'
+on the blank line in the above script, but blank lines are of no
+particular significance to the linker.  As well, the linker doesn't
+associate the above symbol names with their sections.  Instead, it
+assumes that all assignments or other statements belong to the previous
+output section, except for the special case of an assignment to '.'.
+I.e., the linker will place the orphan '.rodata' section as if the
+script was written as follows:
+
+     SECTIONS
+     {
+         start_of_text = . ;
+         .text: { *(.text) }
+         end_of_text = . ;
+
+         start_of_data = . ;
+         .rodata: { *(.rodata) }
+         .data: { *(.data) }
+         end_of_data = . ;
+     }
+
+   This may or may not be the script author's intention for the value of
+'start_of_data'.  One way to influence the orphan section placement is
+to assign the location counter to itself, as the linker assumes that an
+assignment to '.' is setting the start address of a following output
+section and thus should be grouped with that section.  So you could
+write:
+
+     SECTIONS
+     {
+         start_of_text = . ;
+         .text: { *(.text) }
+         end_of_text = . ;
+
+         . = . ;
+         start_of_data = . ;
+         .data: { *(.data) }
+         end_of_data = . ;
+     }
+
+   Now, the orphan '.rodata' section will be placed between
+'end_of_text' and 'start_of_data'.
+
+3.10.5 Operators
+----------------
+
+The linker recognizes the standard C set of arithmetic operators, with
+the standard bindings and precedence levels:
+     precedence      associativity   Operators                Notes
+     (highest)
+     1               left            !  -  ~                  (1)
+     2               left            *  /  %
+     3               left            +  -
+     4               left            >>  <<
+     5               left            ==  !=  >  <  <=  >=
+     6               left            &
+     7               left            |
+     8               left            &&
+     9               left            ||
+     10              right           ? :
+     11              right           &=  +=  -=  *=  /=       (2)
+     (lowest)
+   Notes: (1) Prefix operators (2) *Note Assignments::.
+
+3.10.6 Evaluation
+-----------------
+
+The linker evaluates expressions lazily.  It only computes the value of
+an expression when absolutely necessary.
+
+   The linker needs some information, such as the value of the start
+address of the first section, and the origins and lengths of memory
+regions, in order to do any linking at all.  These values are computed
+as soon as possible when the linker reads in the linker script.
+
+   However, other values (such as symbol values) are not known or needed
+until after storage allocation.  Such values are evaluated later, when
+other information (such as the sizes of output sections) is available
+for use in the symbol assignment expression.
+
+   The sizes of sections cannot be known until after allocation, so
+assignments dependent upon these are not performed until after
+allocation.
+
+   Some expressions, such as those depending upon the location counter
+'.', must be evaluated during section allocation.
+
+   If the result of an expression is required, but the value is not
+available, then an error results.  For example, a script like the
+following
+     SECTIONS
+       {
+         .text 9+this_isnt_constant :
+           { *(.text) }
+       }
+will cause the error message 'non constant expression for initial
+address'.
+
+3.10.7 The Section of an Expression
+-----------------------------------
+
+When the linker evaluates an expression, the result is either absolute
+or relative to some section.  A relative expression is expressed as a
+fixed offset from the base of a section.
+
+   The position of the expression within the linker script determines
+whether it is absolute or relative.  An expression which appears within
+an output section definition is relative to the base of the output
+section.  An expression which appears elsewhere will be absolute.
+
+   A symbol set to a relative expression will be relocatable if you
+request relocatable output using the '-r' option.  That means that a
+further link operation may change the value of the symbol.  The symbol's
+section will be the section of the relative expression.
+
+   A symbol set to an absolute expression will retain the same value
+through any further link operation.  The symbol will be absolute, and
+will not have any particular associated section.
+
+   You can use the builtin function 'ABSOLUTE' to force an expression to
+be absolute when it would otherwise be relative.  For example, to create
+an absolute symbol set to the address of the end of the output section
+'.data':
+     SECTIONS
+       {
+         .data : { *(.data) _edata = ABSOLUTE(.); }
+       }
+If 'ABSOLUTE' were not used, '_edata' would be relative to the '.data'
+section.
+
+3.10.8 Builtin Functions
+------------------------
+
+The linker script language includes a number of builtin functions for
+use in linker script expressions.
+
+'ABSOLUTE(EXP)'
+     Return the absolute (non-relocatable, as opposed to non-negative)
+     value of the expression EXP.  Primarily useful to assign an
+     absolute value to a symbol within a section definition, where
+     symbol values are normally section relative.  *Note Expression
+     Section::.
+
+'ADDR(SECTION)'
+     Return the absolute address (the VMA) of the named SECTION.  Your
+     script must previously have defined the location of that section.
+     In the following example, 'symbol_1' and 'symbol_2' are assigned
+     identical values:
+          SECTIONS { ...
+            .output1 :
+              {
+              start_of_output_1 = ABSOLUTE(.);
+              ...
+              }
+            .output :
+              {
+              symbol_1 = ADDR(.output1);
+              symbol_2 = start_of_output_1;
+              }
+          ... }
+
+'ALIGN(ALIGN)'
+'ALIGN(EXP,ALIGN)'
+     Return the location counter ('.') or arbitrary expression aligned
+     to the next ALIGN boundary.  The single operand 'ALIGN' doesn't
+     change the value of the location counter--it just does arithmetic
+     on it.  The two operand 'ALIGN' allows an arbitrary expression to
+     be aligned upwards ('ALIGN(ALIGN)' is equivalent to 'ALIGN(.,
+     ALIGN)').
+
+     Here is an example which aligns the output '.data' section to the
+     next '0x2000' byte boundary after the preceding section and sets a
+     variable within the section to the next '0x8000' boundary after the
+     input sections:
+          SECTIONS { ...
+            .data ALIGN(0x2000): {
+              *(.data)
+              variable = ALIGN(0x8000);
+            }
+          ... }
+     The first use of 'ALIGN' in this example specifies the location of
+     a section because it is used as the optional ADDRESS attribute of a
+     section definition (*note Output Section Address::).  The second
+     use of 'ALIGN' is used to defines the value of a symbol.
+
+     The builtin function 'NEXT' is closely related to 'ALIGN'.
+
+'ALIGNOF(SECTION)'
+     Return the alignment in bytes of the named SECTION, if that section
+     has been allocated.  If the section has not been allocated when
+     this is evaluated, the linker will report an error.  In the
+     following example, the alignment of the '.output' section is stored
+     as the first value in that section.
+          SECTIONS{ ...
+            .output {
+              LONG (ALIGNOF (.output))
+              ...
+              }
+          ... }
+
+'BLOCK(EXP)'
+     This is a synonym for 'ALIGN', for compatibility with older linker
+     scripts.  It is most often seen when setting the address of an
+     output section.
+
+'DATA_SEGMENT_ALIGN(MAXPAGESIZE, COMMONPAGESIZE)'
+     This is equivalent to either
+          (ALIGN(MAXPAGESIZE) + (. & (MAXPAGESIZE - 1)))
+     or
+          (ALIGN(MAXPAGESIZE) + (. & (MAXPAGESIZE - COMMONPAGESIZE)))
+     depending on whether the latter uses fewer COMMONPAGESIZE sized
+     pages for the data segment (area between the result of this
+     expression and 'DATA_SEGMENT_END') than the former or not.  If the
+     latter form is used, it means COMMONPAGESIZE bytes of runtime
+     memory will be saved at the expense of up to COMMONPAGESIZE wasted
+     bytes in the on-disk file.
+
+     This expression can only be used directly in 'SECTIONS' commands,
+     not in any output section descriptions and only once in the linker
+     script.  COMMONPAGESIZE should be less or equal to MAXPAGESIZE and
+     should be the system page size the object wants to be optimized for
+     (while still working on system page sizes up to MAXPAGESIZE).
+
+     Example:
+            . = DATA_SEGMENT_ALIGN(0x10000, 0x2000);
+
+'DATA_SEGMENT_END(EXP)'
+     This defines the end of data segment for 'DATA_SEGMENT_ALIGN'
+     evaluation purposes.
+
+            . = DATA_SEGMENT_END(.);
+
+'DATA_SEGMENT_RELRO_END(OFFSET, EXP)'
+     This defines the end of the 'PT_GNU_RELRO' segment when '-z relro'
+     option is used.  Second argument is returned.  When '-z relro'
+     option is not present, 'DATA_SEGMENT_RELRO_END' does nothing,
+     otherwise 'DATA_SEGMENT_ALIGN' is padded so that EXP + OFFSET is
+     aligned to the most commonly used page boundary for particular
+     target.  If present in the linker script, it must always come in
+     between 'DATA_SEGMENT_ALIGN' and 'DATA_SEGMENT_END'.
+
+            . = DATA_SEGMENT_RELRO_END(24, .);
+
+'DEFINED(SYMBOL)'
+     Return 1 if SYMBOL is in the linker global symbol table and is
+     defined before the statement using DEFINED in the script, otherwise
+     return 0.  You can use this function to provide default values for
+     symbols.  For example, the following script fragment shows how to
+     set a global symbol 'begin' to the first location in the '.text'
+     section--but if a symbol called 'begin' already existed, its value
+     is preserved:
+
+          SECTIONS { ...
+            .text : {
+              begin = DEFINED(begin) ? begin : . ;
+              ...
+            }
+            ...
+          }
+
+'LENGTH(MEMORY)'
+     Return the length of the memory region named MEMORY.
+
+'LOADADDR(SECTION)'
+     Return the absolute LMA of the named SECTION.  This is normally the
+     same as 'ADDR', but it may be different if the 'AT' attribute is
+     used in the output section definition (*note Output Section LMA::).
+
+'MAX(EXP1, EXP2)'
+     Returns the maximum of EXP1 and EXP2.
+
+'MIN(EXP1, EXP2)'
+     Returns the minimum of EXP1 and EXP2.
+
+'NEXT(EXP)'
+     Return the next unallocated address that is a multiple of EXP.
+     This function is closely related to 'ALIGN(EXP)'; unless you use
+     the 'MEMORY' command to define discontinuous memory for the output
+     file, the two functions are equivalent.
+
+'ORIGIN(MEMORY)'
+     Return the origin of the memory region named MEMORY.
+
+'SEGMENT_START(SEGMENT, DEFAULT)'
+     Return the base address of the named SEGMENT.  If an explicit value
+     has been given for this segment (with a command-line '-T' option)
+     that value will be returned; otherwise the value will be DEFAULT.
+     At present, the '-T' command-line option can only be used to set
+     the base address for the "text", "data", and "bss" sections, but
+     you use 'SEGMENT_START' with any segment name.
+
+'SIZEOF(SECTION)'
+     Return the size in bytes of the named SECTION, if that section has
+     been allocated.  If the section has not been allocated when this is
+     evaluated, the linker will report an error.  In the following
+     example, 'symbol_1' and 'symbol_2' are assigned identical values:
+          SECTIONS{ ...
+            .output {
+              .start = . ;
+              ...
+              .end = . ;
+              }
+            symbol_1 = .end - .start ;
+            symbol_2 = SIZEOF(.output);
+          ... }
+
+'SIZEOF_HEADERS'
+'sizeof_headers'
+     Return the size in bytes of the output file's headers.  This is
+     information which appears at the start of the output file.  You can
+     use this number when setting the start address of the first
+     section, if you choose, to facilitate paging.
+
+     When producing an ELF output file, if the linker script uses the
+     'SIZEOF_HEADERS' builtin function, the linker must compute the
+     number of program headers before it has determined all the section
+     addresses and sizes.  If the linker later discovers that it needs
+     additional program headers, it will report an error 'not enough
+     room for program headers'.  To avoid this error, you must avoid
+     using the 'SIZEOF_HEADERS' function, or you must rework your linker
+     script to avoid forcing the linker to use additional program
+     headers, or you must define the program headers yourself using the
+     'PHDRS' command (*note PHDRS::).
+
+3.11 Implicit Linker Scripts
+============================
+
+If you specify a linker input file which the linker can not recognize as
+an object file or an archive file, it will try to read the file as a
+linker script.  If the file can not be parsed as a linker script, the
+linker will report an error.
+
+   An implicit linker script will not replace the default linker script.
+
+   Typically an implicit linker script would contain only symbol
+assignments, or the 'INPUT', 'GROUP', or 'VERSION' commands.
+
+   Any input files read because of an implicit linker script will be
+read at the position in the command line where the implicit linker
+script was read.  This can affect archive searching.
+
+4 Machine Dependent Features
+****************************
+
+'ld' has additional features on some platforms; the following sections
+describe them.  Machines where 'ld' has no additional functionality are
+not listed.
+
+4.1 'ld' and the H8/300
+=======================
+
+For the H8/300, 'ld' can perform these global optimizations when you
+specify the '--relax' command-line option.
+
+_relaxing address modes_
+     'ld' finds all 'jsr' and 'jmp' instructions whose targets are
+     within eight bits, and turns them into eight-bit program-counter
+     relative 'bsr' and 'bra' instructions, respectively.
+
+_synthesizing instructions_
+     'ld' finds all 'mov.b' instructions which use the sixteen-bit
+     absolute address form, but refer to the top page of memory, and
+     changes them to use the eight-bit address form.  (That is: the
+     linker turns 'mov.b '@'AA:16' into 'mov.b '@'AA:8' whenever the
+     address AA is in the top page of memory).
+
+_bit manipulation instructions_
+     'ld' finds all bit manipulation instructions like 'band, bclr,
+     biand, bild, bior, bist, bixor, bld, bnot, bor, bset, bst, btst,
+     bxor' which use 32 bit and 16 bit absolute address form, but refer
+     to the top page of memory, and changes them to use the 8 bit
+     address form.  (That is: the linker turns 'bset #xx:3,'@'AA:32'
+     into 'bset #xx:3,'@'AA:8' whenever the address AA is in the top
+     page of memory).
+
+_system control instructions_
+     'ld' finds all 'ldc.w, stc.w' instructions which use the 32 bit
+     absolute address form, but refer to the top page of memory, and
+     changes them to use 16 bit address form.  (That is: the linker
+     turns 'ldc.w '@'AA:32,ccr' into 'ldc.w '@'AA:16,ccr' whenever the
+     address AA is in the top page of memory).
+
+4.2 'ld' and the Intel 960 Family
+=================================
+
+You can use the '-AARCHITECTURE' command line option to specify one of
+the two-letter names identifying members of the 960 family; the option
+specifies the desired output target, and warns of any incompatible
+instructions in the input files.  It also modifies the linker's search
+strategy for archive libraries, to support the use of libraries specific
+to each particular architecture, by including in the search loop names
+suffixed with the string identifying the architecture.
+
+   For example, if your 'ld' command line included '-ACA' as well as
+'-ltry', the linker would look (in its built-in search paths, and in any
+paths you specify with '-L') for a library with the names
+
+     try
+     libtry.a
+     tryca
+     libtryca.a
+
+The first two possibilities would be considered in any event; the last
+two are due to the use of '-ACA'.
+
+   You can meaningfully use '-A' more than once on a command line, since
+the 960 architecture family allows combination of target architectures;
+each use will add another pair of name variants to search for when '-l'
+specifies a library.
+
+   'ld' supports the '--relax' option for the i960 family.  If you
+specify '--relax', 'ld' finds all 'balx' and 'calx' instructions whose
+targets are within 24 bits, and turns them into 24-bit program-counter
+relative 'bal' and 'cal' instructions, respectively.  'ld' also turns
+'cal' instructions into 'bal' instructions when it determines that the
+target subroutine is a leaf routine (that is, the target subroutine does
+not itself call any subroutines).
+
+4.3 'ld' and the Motorola 68HC11 and 68HC12 families
+====================================================
+
+4.3.1 Linker Relaxation
+-----------------------
+
+For the Motorola 68HC11, 'ld' can perform these global optimizations
+when you specify the '--relax' command-line option.
+
+_relaxing address modes_
+     'ld' finds all 'jsr' and 'jmp' instructions whose targets are
+     within eight bits, and turns them into eight-bit program-counter
+     relative 'bsr' and 'bra' instructions, respectively.
+
+     'ld' also looks at all 16-bit extended addressing modes and
+     transforms them in a direct addressing mode when the address is in
+     page 0 (between 0 and 0x0ff).
+
+_relaxing gcc instruction group_
+     When 'gcc' is called with '-mrelax', it can emit group of
+     instructions that the linker can optimize to use a 68HC11 direct
+     addressing mode.  These instructions consists of 'bclr' or 'bset'
+     instructions.
+
+4.3.2 Trampoline Generation
+---------------------------
+
+For 68HC11 and 68HC12, 'ld' can generate trampoline code to call a far
+function using a normal 'jsr' instruction.  The linker will also change
+the relocation to some far function to use the trampoline address
+instead of the function address.  This is typically the case when a
+pointer to a function is taken.  The pointer will in fact point to the
+function trampoline.
+
+   The '--pic-veneer' switch makes the linker use PIC sequences for
+ARM/Thumb interworking veneers, even if the rest of the binary is not
+PIC. This avoids problems on uClinux targets where '--emit-relocs' is
+used to generate relocatable binaries.
+
+4.4 'ld' and the ARM family
+===========================
+
+For the ARM, 'ld' will generate code stubs to allow functions calls
+between ARM and Thumb code.  These stubs only work with code that has
+been compiled and assembled with the '-mthumb-interwork' command line
+option.  If it is necessary to link with old ARM object files or
+libraries, which have not been compiled with the -mthumb-interwork
+option then the '--support-old-code' command line switch should be given
+to the linker.  This will make it generate larger stub functions which
+will work with non-interworking aware ARM code.  Note, however, the
+linker does not support generating stubs for function calls to
+non-interworking aware Thumb code.
+
+   The '--thumb-entry' switch is a duplicate of the generic '--entry'
+switch, in that it sets the program's starting address.  But it also
+sets the bottom bit of the address, so that it can be branched to using
+a BX instruction, and the program will start executing in Thumb mode
+straight away.
+
+   The '--be8' switch instructs 'ld' to generate BE8 format executables.
+This option is only valid when linking big-endian objects.  The
+resulting image will contain big-endian data and little-endian code.
+
+   The 'R_ARM_TARGET1' relocation is typically used for entries in the
+'.init_array' section.  It is interpreted as either 'R_ARM_REL32' or
+'R_ARM_ABS32', depending on the target.  The '--target1-rel' and
+'--target1-abs' switches override the default.
+
+   The '--target2=type' switch overrides the default definition of the
+'R_ARM_TARGET2' relocation.  Valid values for 'type', their meanings,
+and target defaults are as follows:
+'rel'
+     'R_ARM_REL32' (arm*-*-elf, arm*-*-eabi)
+'abs'
+     'R_ARM_ABS32' (arm*-*-symbianelf)
+'got-rel'
+     'R_ARM_GOT_PREL' (arm*-*-linux, arm*-*-*bsd)
+
+   The 'R_ARM_V4BX' relocation (defined by the ARM AAELF specification)
+enables objects compiled for the ARMv4 architecture to be
+interworking-safe when linked with other objects compiled for ARMv4t,
+but also allows pure ARMv4 binaries to be built from the same ARMv4
+objects.
+
+   In the latter case, the switch '--fix-v4bx' must be passed to the
+linker, which causes v4t 'BX rM' instructions to be rewritten as 'MOV
+PC,rM', since v4 processors do not have a 'BX' instruction.
+
+   In the former case, the switch should not be used, and 'R_ARM_V4BX'
+relocations are ignored.
+
+   The '--use-blx' switch enables the linker to use ARM/Thumb BLX
+instructions (available on ARMv5t and above) in various situations.
+Currently it is used to perform calls via the PLT from Thumb code using
+BLX rather than using BX and a mode-switching stub before each PLT
+entry.  This should lead to such calls executing slightly faster.
+
+   This option is enabled implicitly for SymbianOS, so there is no need
+to specify it if you are using that target.
+
+   The '--vfp11-denorm-fix' switch enables a link-time workaround for a
+bug in certain VFP11 coprocessor hardware, which sometimes allows
+instructions with denorm operands (which must be handled by support
+code) to have those operands overwritten by subsequent instructions
+before the support code can read the intended values.
+
+   The bug may be avoided in scalar mode if you allow at least one
+intervening instruction between a VFP11 instruction which uses a
+register and another instruction which writes to the same register, or
+at least two intervening instructions if vector mode is in use.  The bug
+only affects full-compliance floating-point mode: you do not need this
+workaround if you are using "runfast" mode.  Please contact ARM for
+further details.
+
+   If you know you are using buggy VFP11 hardware, you can enable this
+workaround by specifying the linker option '--vfp-denorm-fix=scalar' if
+you are using the VFP11 scalar mode only, or '--vfp-denorm-fix=vector'
+if you are using vector mode (the latter also works for scalar code).
+The default is '--vfp-denorm-fix=none'.
+
+   If the workaround is enabled, instructions are scanned for
+potentially-troublesome sequences, and a veneer is created for each such
+sequence which may trigger the erratum.  The veneer consists of the
+first instruction of the sequence and a branch back to the subsequent
+instruction.  The original instruction is then replaced with a branch to
+the veneer.  The extra cycles required to call and return from the
+veneer are sufficient to avoid the erratum in both the scalar and vector
+cases.
+
+   The '--no-enum-size-warning' switch prevents the linker from warning
+when linking object files that specify incompatible EABI enumeration
+size attributes.  For example, with this switch enabled, linking of an
+object file using 32-bit enumeration values with another using
+enumeration values fitted into the smallest possible space will not be
+diagnosed.
+
+4.5 'ld' and HPPA 32-bit ELF Support
+====================================
+
+When generating a shared library, 'ld' will by default generate import
+stubs suitable for use with a single sub-space application.  The
+'--multi-subspace' switch causes 'ld' to generate export stubs, and
+different (larger) import stubs suitable for use with multiple
+sub-spaces.
+
+   Long branch stubs and import/export stubs are placed by 'ld' in stub
+sections located between groups of input sections.  '--stub-group-size'
+specifies the maximum size of a group of input sections handled by one
+stub section.  Since branch offsets are signed, a stub section may serve
+two groups of input sections, one group before the stub section, and one
+group after it.  However, when using conditional branches that require
+stubs, it may be better (for branch prediction) that stub sections only
+serve one group of input sections.  A negative value for 'N' chooses
+this scheme, ensuring that branches to stubs always use a negative
+offset.  Two special values of 'N' are recognized, '1' and '-1'.  These
+both instruct 'ld' to automatically size input section groups for the
+branch types detected, with the same behaviour regarding stub placement
+as other positive or negative values of 'N' respectively.
+
+   Note that '--stub-group-size' does not split input sections.  A
+single input section larger than the group size specified will of course
+create a larger group (of one section).  If input sections are too
+large, it may not be possible for a branch to reach its stub.
+
+4.6 'ld' and MMIX
+=================
+
+For MMIX, there is a choice of generating 'ELF' object files or 'mmo'
+object files when linking.  The simulator 'mmix' understands the 'mmo'
+format.  The binutils 'objcopy' utility can translate between the two
+formats.
+
+   There is one special section, the '.MMIX.reg_contents' section.
+Contents in this section is assumed to correspond to that of global
+registers, and symbols referring to it are translated to special
+symbols, equal to registers.  In a final link, the start address of the
+'.MMIX.reg_contents' section corresponds to the first allocated global
+register multiplied by 8.  Register '$255' is not included in this
+section; it is always set to the program entry, which is at the symbol
+'Main' for 'mmo' files.
+
+   Symbols with the prefix '__.MMIX.start.', for example
+'__.MMIX.start..text' and '__.MMIX.start..data' are special; there must
+be only one each, even if they are local.  The default linker script
+uses these to set the default start address of a section.
+
+   Initial and trailing multiples of zero-valued 32-bit words in a
+section, are left out from an mmo file.
+
+4.7 'ld' and MSP430
+===================
+
+For the MSP430 it is possible to select the MPU architecture.  The flag
+'-m [mpu type]' will select an appropriate linker script for selected
+MPU type.  (To get a list of known MPUs just pass '-m help' option to
+the linker).
+
+   The linker will recognize some extra sections which are MSP430
+specific:
+
+''.vectors''
+     Defines a portion of ROM where interrupt vectors located.
+
+''.bootloader''
+     Defines the bootloader portion of the ROM (if applicable).  Any
+     code in this section will be uploaded to the MPU.
+
+''.infomem''
+     Defines an information memory section (if applicable).  Any code in
+     this section will be uploaded to the MPU.
+
+''.infomemnobits''
+     This is the same as the '.infomem' section except that any code in
+     this section will not be uploaded to the MPU.
+
+''.noinit''
+     Denotes a portion of RAM located above '.bss' section.
+
+     The last two sections are used by gcc.
+
+4.8 'ld' and PowerPC 32-bit ELF Support
+=======================================
+
+Branches on PowerPC processors are limited to a signed 26-bit
+displacement, which may result in 'ld' giving 'relocation truncated to
+fit' errors with very large programs.  '--relax' enables the generation
+of trampolines that can access the entire 32-bit address space.  These
+trampolines are inserted at section boundaries, so may not themselves be
+reachable if an input section exceeds 33M in size.
+
+'--bss-plt'
+     Current PowerPC GCC accepts a '-msecure-plt' option that generates
+     code capable of using a newer PLT and GOT layout that has the
+     security advantage of no executable section ever needing to be
+     writable and no writable section ever being executable.  PowerPC
+     'ld' will generate this layout, including stubs to access the PLT,
+     if all input files (including startup and static libraries) were
+     compiled with '-msecure-plt'.  '--bss-plt' forces the old BSS PLT
+     (and GOT layout) which can give slightly better performance.
+
+'--secure-plt'
+     'ld' will use the new PLT and GOT layout if it is linking new
+     '-fpic' or '-fPIC' code, but does not do so automatically when
+     linking non-PIC code.  This option requests the new PLT and GOT
+     layout.  A warning will be given if some object file requires the
+     old style BSS PLT.
+
+'--sdata-got'
+     The new secure PLT and GOT are placed differently relative to other
+     sections compared to older BSS PLT and GOT placement.  The location
+     of '.plt' must change because the new secure PLT is an initialized
+     section while the old PLT is uninitialized.  The reason for the
+     '.got' change is more subtle: The new placement allows '.got' to be
+     read-only in applications linked with '-z relro -z now'.  However,
+     this placement means that '.sdata' cannot always be used in shared
+     libraries, because the PowerPC ABI accesses '.sdata' in shared
+     libraries from the GOT pointer.  '--sdata-got' forces the old GOT
+     placement.  PowerPC GCC doesn't use '.sdata' in shared libraries,
+     so this option is really only useful for other compilers that may
+     do so.
+
+'--emit-stub-syms'
+     This option causes 'ld' to label linker stubs with a local symbol
+     that encodes the stub type and destination.
+
+'--no-tls-optimize'
+     PowerPC 'ld' normally performs some optimization of code sequences
+     used to access Thread-Local Storage.  Use this option to disable
+     the optimization.
+
+4.9 'ld' and PowerPC64 64-bit ELF Support
+=========================================
+
+'--stub-group-size'
+     Long branch stubs, PLT call stubs and TOC adjusting stubs are
+     placed by 'ld' in stub sections located between groups of input
+     sections.  '--stub-group-size' specifies the maximum size of a
+     group of input sections handled by one stub section.  Since branch
+     offsets are signed, a stub section may serve two groups of input
+     sections, one group before the stub section, and one group after
+     it.  However, when using conditional branches that require stubs,
+     it may be better (for branch prediction) that stub sections only
+     serve one group of input sections.  A negative value for 'N'
+     chooses this scheme, ensuring that branches to stubs always use a
+     negative offset.  Two special values of 'N' are recognized, '1' and
+     '-1'.  These both instruct 'ld' to automatically size input section
+     groups for the branch types detected, with the same behaviour
+     regarding stub placement as other positive or negative values of
+     'N' respectively.
+
+     Note that '--stub-group-size' does not split input sections.  A
+     single input section larger than the group size specified will of
+     course create a larger group (of one section).  If input sections
+     are too large, it may not be possible for a branch to reach its
+     stub.
+
+'--emit-stub-syms'
+     This option causes 'ld' to label linker stubs with a local symbol
+     that encodes the stub type and destination.
+
+'--dotsyms, --no-dotsyms'
+     These two options control how 'ld' interprets version patterns in a
+     version script.  Older PowerPC64 compilers emitted both a function
+     descriptor symbol with the same name as the function, and a code
+     entry symbol with the name prefixed by a dot ('.').  To properly
+     version a function 'foo', the version script thus needs to control
+     both 'foo' and '.foo'.  The option '--dotsyms', on by default,
+     automatically adds the required dot-prefixed patterns.  Use
+     '--no-dotsyms' to disable this feature.
+
+'--no-tls-optimize'
+     PowerPC64 'ld' normally performs some optimization of code
+     sequences used to access Thread-Local Storage.  Use this option to
+     disable the optimization.
+
+'--no-opd-optimize'
+     PowerPC64 'ld' normally removes '.opd' section entries
+     corresponding to deleted link-once functions, or functions removed
+     by the action of '--gc-sections' or linker scrip '/DISCARD/'.  Use
+     this option to disable '.opd' optimization.
+
+'--non-overlapping-opd'
+     Some PowerPC64 compilers have an option to generate compressed
+     '.opd' entries spaced 16 bytes apart, overlapping the third word,
+     the static chain pointer (unused in C) with the first word of the
+     next entry.  This option expands such entries to the full 24 bytes.
+
+'--no-toc-optimize'
+     PowerPC64 'ld' normally removes unused '.toc' section entries.
+     Such entries are detected by examining relocations that reference
+     the TOC in code sections.  A reloc in a deleted code section marks
+     a TOC word as unneeded, while a reloc in a kept code section marks
+     a TOC word as needed.  Since the TOC may reference itself, TOC
+     relocs are also examined.  TOC words marked as both needed and
+     unneeded will of course be kept.  TOC words without any referencing
+     reloc are assumed to be part of a multi-word entry, and are kept or
+     discarded as per the nearest marked preceding word.  This works
+     reliably for compiler generated code, but may be incorrect if
+     assembly code is used to insert TOC entries.  Use this option to
+     disable the optimization.
+
+'--no-multi-toc'
+     By default, PowerPC64 GCC generates code for a TOC model where TOC
+     entries are accessed with a 16-bit offset from r2.  This limits the
+     total TOC size to 64K. PowerPC64 'ld' extends this limit by
+     grouping code sections such that each group uses less than 64K for
+     its TOC entries, then inserts r2 adjusting stubs between
+     inter-group calls.  'ld' does not split apart input sections, so
+     cannot help if a single input file has a '.toc' section that
+     exceeds 64K, most likely from linking multiple files with 'ld -r'.
+     Use this option to turn off this feature.
+
+4.10 'ld' and SPU ELF Support
+=============================
+
+'--plugin'
+     This option marks an executable as a PIC plugin module.
+
+'--no-overlays'
+     Normally, 'ld' recognizes calls to functions within overlay
+     regions, and redirects such calls to an overlay manager via a stub.
+     'ld' also provides a built-in overlay manager.  This option turns
+     off all this special overlay handling.
+
+'--emit-stub-syms'
+     This option causes 'ld' to label overlay stubs with a local symbol
+     that encodes the stub type and destination.
+
+'--extra-overlay-stubs'
+     This option causes 'ld' to add overlay call stubs on all function
+     calls out of overlay regions.  Normally stubs are not added on
+     calls to non-overlay regions.
+
+'--local-store=lo:hi'
+     'ld' usually checks that a final executable for SPU fits in the
+     address range 0 to 256k.  This option may be used to change the
+     range.  Disable the check entirely with '--local-store=0:0'.
+
+'--stack-analysis'
+     SPU local store space is limited.  Over-allocation of stack space
+     unnecessarily limits space available for code and data, while
+     under-allocation results in runtime failures.  If given this
+     option, 'ld' will provide an estimate of maximum stack usage.  'ld'
+     does this by examining symbols in code sections to determine the
+     extents of functions, and looking at function prologues for stack
+     adjusting instructions.  A call-graph is created by looking for
+     relocations on branch instructions.  The graph is then searched for
+     the maximum stack usage path.  Note that this analysis does not
+     find calls made via function pointers, and does not handle
+     recursion and other cycles in the call graph.  Stack usage may be
+     under-estimated if your code makes such calls.  Also, stack usage
+     for dynamic allocation, e.g.  alloca, will not be detected.  If a
+     link map is requested, detailed information about each function's
+     stack usage and calls will be given.
+
+'--emit-stack-syms'
+     This option, if given along with '--stack-analysis' will result in
+     'ld' emitting stack sizing symbols for each function.  These take
+     the form '__stack_<function_name>' for global functions, and
+     '__stack_<number>_<function_name>' for static functions.
+     '<number>' is the section id in hex.  The value of such symbols is
+     the stack requirement for the corresponding function.  The symbol
+     size will be zero, type 'STT_NOTYPE', binding 'STB_LOCAL', and
+     section 'SHN_ABS'.
+
+4.11 'ld''s Support for Various TI COFF Versions
+================================================
+
+The '--format' switch allows selection of one of the various TI COFF
+versions.  The latest of this writing is 2; versions 0 and 1 are also
+supported.  The TI COFF versions also vary in header byte-order format;
+'ld' will read any version or byte order, but the output header format
+depends on the default specified by the specific target.
+
+4.12 'ld' and WIN32 (cygwin/mingw)
+==================================
+
+This section describes some of the win32 specific 'ld' issues.  See
+*note Command Line Options: Options. for detailed description of the
+command line options mentioned here.
+
+_import libraries_
+     The standard Windows linker creates and uses so-called import
+     libraries, which contains information for linking to dll's.  They
+     are regular static archives and are handled as any other static
+     archive.  The cygwin and mingw ports of 'ld' have specific support
+     for creating such libraries provided with the '--out-implib'
+     command line option.
+
+_exporting DLL symbols_
+     The cygwin/mingw 'ld' has several ways to export symbols for dll's.
+
+     _using auto-export functionality_
+          By default 'ld' exports symbols with the auto-export
+          functionality, which is controlled by the following command
+          line options:
+
+             * -export-all-symbols [This is the default]
+             * -exclude-symbols
+             * -exclude-libs
+
+          If, however, '--export-all-symbols' is not given explicitly on
+          the command line, then the default auto-export behavior will
+          be _disabled_ if either of the following are true:
+
+             * A DEF file is used.
+             * Any symbol in any object file was marked with the
+               __declspec(dllexport) attribute.
+
+     _using a DEF file_
+          Another way of exporting symbols is using a DEF file.  A DEF
+          file is an ASCII file containing definitions of symbols which
+          should be exported when a dll is created.  Usually it is named
+          '<dll name>.def' and is added as any other object file to the
+          linker's command line.  The file's name must end in '.def' or
+          '.DEF'.
+
+               gcc -o <output> <objectfiles> <dll name>.def
+
+          Using a DEF file turns off the normal auto-export behavior,
+          unless the '--export-all-symbols' option is also used.
+
+          Here is an example of a DEF file for a shared library called
+          'xyz.dll':
+
+               LIBRARY "xyz.dll" BASE=0x20000000
+
+               EXPORTS
+               foo
+               bar
+               _bar = bar
+               another_foo = abc.dll.afoo
+               var1 DATA
+
+          This example defines a DLL with a non-default base address and
+          five symbols in the export table.  The third exported symbol
+          '_bar' is an alias for the second.  The fourth symbol,
+          'another_foo' is resolved by "forwarding" to another module
+          and treating it as an alias for 'afoo' exported from the DLL
+          'abc.dll'.  The final symbol 'var1' is declared to be a data
+          object.
+
+          The optional 'LIBRARY <name>' command indicates the _internal_
+          name of the output DLL. If '<name>' does not include a suffix,
+          the default library suffix, '.DLL' is appended.
+
+          When the .DEF file is used to build an application, rather
+          than a library, the 'NAME <name>' command should be used
+          instead of 'LIBRARY'.  If '<name>' does not include a suffix,
+          the default executable suffix, '.EXE' is appended.
+
+          With either 'LIBRARY <name>' or 'NAME <name>' the optional
+          specification 'BASE = <number>' may be used to specify a
+          non-default base address for the image.
+
+          If neither 'LIBRARY <name>' nor 'NAME <name>' is specified, or
+          they specify an empty string, the internal name is the same as
+          the filename specified on the command line.
+
+          The complete specification of an export symbol is:
+
+               EXPORTS
+                 ( (  ( <name1> [ = <name2> ] )
+                    | ( <name1> = <module-name> . <external-name>))
+                 [ @ <integer> ] [NONAME] [DATA] [CONSTANT] [PRIVATE] ) *
+
+          Declares '<name1>' as an exported symbol from the DLL, or
+          declares '<name1>' as an exported alias for '<name2>'; or
+          declares '<name1>' as a "forward" alias for the symbol
+          '<external-name>' in the DLL '<module-name>'.  Optionally, the
+          symbol may be exported by the specified ordinal '<integer>'
+          alias.
+
+          The optional keywords that follow the declaration indicate:
+
+          'NONAME': Do not put the symbol name in the DLL's export
+          table.  It will still be exported by its ordinal alias (either
+          the value specified by the .def specification or, otherwise,
+          the value assigned by the linker).  The symbol name, however,
+          does remain visible in the import library (if any), unless
+          'PRIVATE' is also specified.
+
+          'DATA': The symbol is a variable or object, rather than a
+          function.  The import lib will export only an indirect
+          reference to 'foo' as the symbol '_imp__foo' (ie, 'foo' must
+          be resolved as '*_imp__foo').
+
+          'CONSTANT': Like 'DATA', but put the undecorated 'foo' as well
+          as '_imp__foo' into the import library.  Both refer to the
+          read-only import address table's pointer to the variable, not
+          to the variable itself.  This can be dangerous.  If the user
+          code fails to add the 'dllimport' attribute and also fails to
+          explicitly add the extra indirection that the use of the
+          attribute enforces, the application will behave unexpectedly.
+
+          'PRIVATE': Put the symbol in the DLL's export table, but do
+          not put it into the static import library used to resolve
+          imports at link time.  The symbol can still be imported using
+          the 'LoadLibrary/GetProcAddress' API at runtime or by by using
+          the GNU ld extension of linking directly to the DLL without an
+          import library.
+
+          See ld/deffilep.y in the binutils sources for the full
+          specification of other DEF file statements
+
+          While linking a shared dll, 'ld' is able to create a DEF file
+          with the '--output-def <file>' command line option.
+
+     _Using decorations_
+          Another way of marking symbols for export is to modify the
+          source code itself, so that when building the DLL each symbol
+          to be exported is declared as:
+
+               __declspec(dllexport) int a_variable
+               __declspec(dllexport) void a_function(int with_args)
+
+          All such symbols will be exported from the DLL. If, however,
+          any of the object files in the DLL contain symbols decorated
+          in this way, then the normal auto-export behavior is disabled,
+          unless the '--export-all-symbols' option is also used.
+
+          Note that object files that wish to access these symbols must
+          _not_ decorate them with dllexport.  Instead, they should use
+          dllimport, instead:
+
+               __declspec(dllimport) int a_variable
+               __declspec(dllimport) void a_function(int with_args)
+
+          This complicates the structure of library header files,
+          because when included by the library itself the header must
+          declare the variables and functions as dllexport, but when
+          included by client code the header must declare them as
+          dllimport.  There are a number of idioms that are typically
+          used to do this; often client code can omit the __declspec()
+          declaration completely.  See '--enable-auto-import' and
+          'automatic data imports' for more information.
+
+_automatic data imports_
+     The standard Windows dll format supports data imports from dlls
+     only by adding special decorations (dllimport/dllexport), which let
+     the compiler produce specific assembler instructions to deal with
+     this issue.  This increases the effort necessary to port existing
+     Un*x code to these platforms, especially for large c++ libraries
+     and applications.  The auto-import feature, which was initially
+     provided by Paul Sokolovsky, allows one to omit the decorations to
+     achieve a behavior that conforms to that on POSIX/Un*x platforms.
+     This feature is enabled with the '--enable-auto-import'
+     command-line option, although it is enabled by default on
+     cygwin/mingw.  The '--enable-auto-import' option itself now serves
+     mainly to suppress any warnings that are ordinarily emitted when
+     linked objects trigger the feature's use.
+
+     auto-import of variables does not always work flawlessly without
+     additional assistance.  Sometimes, you will see this message
+
+     "variable '<var>' can't be auto-imported.  Please read the
+     documentation for ld's '--enable-auto-import' for details."
+
+     The '--enable-auto-import' documentation explains why this error
+     occurs, and several methods that can be used to overcome this
+     difficulty.  One of these methods is the _runtime pseudo-relocs_
+     feature, described below.
+
+     For complex variables imported from DLLs (such as structs or
+     classes), object files typically contain a base address for the
+     variable and an offset (_addend_) within the variable-to specify a
+     particular field or public member, for instance.  Unfortunately,
+     the runtime loader used in win32 environments is incapable of
+     fixing these references at runtime without the additional
+     information supplied by dllimport/dllexport decorations.  The
+     standard auto-import feature described above is unable to resolve
+     these references.
+
+     The '--enable-runtime-pseudo-relocs' switch allows these references
+     to be resolved without error, while leaving the task of adjusting
+     the references themselves (with their non-zero addends) to
+     specialized code provided by the runtime environment.  Recent
+     versions of the cygwin and mingw environments and compilers provide
+     this runtime support; older versions do not.  However, the support
+     is only necessary on the developer's platform; the compiled result
+     will run without error on an older system.
+
+     '--enable-runtime-pseudo-relocs' is not the default; it must be
+     explicitly enabled as needed.
+
+_direct linking to a dll_
+     The cygwin/mingw ports of 'ld' support the direct linking,
+     including data symbols, to a dll without the usage of any import
+     libraries.  This is much faster and uses much less memory than does
+     the traditional import library method, especially when linking
+     large libraries or applications.  When 'ld' creates an import lib,
+     each function or variable exported from the dll is stored in its
+     own bfd, even though a single bfd could contain many exports.  The
+     overhead involved in storing, loading, and processing so many bfd's
+     is quite large, and explains the tremendous time, memory, and
+     storage needed to link against particularly large or complex
+     libraries when using import libs.
+
+     Linking directly to a dll uses no extra command-line switches other
+     than '-L' and '-l', because 'ld' already searches for a number of
+     names to match each library.  All that is needed from the
+     developer's perspective is an understanding of this search, in
+     order to force ld to select the dll instead of an import library.
+
+     For instance, when ld is called with the argument '-lxxx' it will
+     attempt to find, in the first directory of its search path,
+
+          libxxx.dll.a
+          xxx.dll.a
+          libxxx.a
+          xxx.lib
+          cygxxx.dll (*)
+          libxxx.dll
+          xxx.dll
+
+     before moving on to the next directory in the search path.
+
+     (*) Actually, this is not 'cygxxx.dll' but in fact is
+     '<prefix>xxx.dll', where '<prefix>' is set by the 'ld' option
+     '--dll-search-prefix=<prefix>'.  In the case of cygwin, the
+     standard gcc spec file includes '--dll-search-prefix=cyg', so in
+     effect we actually search for 'cygxxx.dll'.
+
+     Other win32-based unix environments, such as mingw or pw32, may use
+     other '<prefix>'es, although at present only cygwin makes use of
+     this feature.  It was originally intended to help avoid name
+     conflicts among dll's built for the various win32/un*x
+     environments, so that (for example) two versions of a zlib dll
+     could coexist on the same machine.
+
+     The generic cygwin/mingw path layout uses a 'bin' directory for
+     applications and dll's and a 'lib' directory for the import
+     libraries (using cygwin nomenclature):
+
+          bin/
+          	cygxxx.dll
+          lib/
+          	libxxx.dll.a   (in case of dll's)
+          	libxxx.a       (in case of static archive)
+
+     Linking directly to a dll without using the import library can be
+     done two ways:
+
+     1.  Use the dll directly by adding the 'bin' path to the link line
+          gcc -Wl,-verbose  -o a.exe -L../bin/ -lxxx
+
+     However, as the dll's often have version numbers appended to their
+     names ('cygncurses-5.dll') this will often fail, unless one
+     specifies '-L../bin -lncurses-5' to include the version.  Import
+     libs are generally not versioned, and do not have this difficulty.
+
+     2.  Create a symbolic link from the dll to a file in the 'lib'
+     directory according to the above mentioned search pattern.  This
+     should be used to avoid unwanted changes in the tools needed for
+     making the app/dll.
+
+          ln -s bin/cygxxx.dll lib/[cyg|lib|]xxx.dll[.a]
+
+     Then you can link without any make environment changes.
+
+          gcc -Wl,-verbose  -o a.exe -L../lib/ -lxxx
+
+     This technique also avoids the version number problems, because the
+     following is perfectly legal
+
+          bin/
+          	cygxxx-5.dll
+          lib/
+          	libxxx.dll.a -> ../bin/cygxxx-5.dll
+
+     Linking directly to a dll without using an import lib will work
+     even when auto-import features are exercised, and even when
+     '--enable-runtime-pseudo-relocs' is used.
+
+     Given the improvements in speed and memory usage, one might
+     justifiably wonder why import libraries are used at all.  There are
+     three reasons:
+
+     1.  Until recently, the link-directly-to-dll functionality did
+     _not_ work with auto-imported data.
+
+     2.  Sometimes it is necessary to include pure static objects within
+     the import library (which otherwise contains only bfd's for
+     indirection symbols that point to the exports of a dll).  Again,
+     the import lib for the cygwin kernel makes use of this ability, and
+     it is not possible to do this without an import lib.
+
+     3.  Symbol aliases can only be resolved using an import lib.  This
+     is critical when linking against OS-supplied dll's (eg, the win32
+     API) in which symbols are usually exported as undecorated aliases
+     of their stdcall-decorated assembly names.
+
+     So, import libs are not going away.  But the ability to replace
+     true import libs with a simple symbolic link to (or a copy of) a
+     dll, in many cases, is a useful addition to the suite of tools
+     binutils makes available to the win32 developer.  Given the massive
+     improvements in memory requirements during linking, storage
+     requirements, and linking speed, we expect that many developers
+     will soon begin to use this feature whenever possible.
+
+_symbol aliasing_
+     _adding additional names_
+          Sometimes, it is useful to export symbols with additional
+          names.  A symbol 'foo' will be exported as 'foo', but it can
+          also be exported as '_foo' by using special directives in the
+          DEF file when creating the dll.  This will affect also the
+          optional created import library.  Consider the following DEF
+          file:
+
+               LIBRARY "xyz.dll" BASE=0x61000000
+
+               EXPORTS
+               foo
+               _foo = foo
+
+          The line '_foo = foo' maps the symbol 'foo' to '_foo'.
+
+          Another method for creating a symbol alias is to create it in
+          the source code using the "weak" attribute:
+
+               void foo () { /* Do something.  */; }
+               void _foo () __attribute__ ((weak, alias ("foo")));
+
+          See the gcc manual for more information about attributes and
+          weak symbols.
+
+     _renaming symbols_
+          Sometimes it is useful to rename exports.  For instance, the
+          cygwin kernel does this regularly.  A symbol '_foo' can be
+          exported as 'foo' but not as '_foo' by using special
+          directives in the DEF file.  (This will also affect the import
+          library, if it is created).  In the following example:
+
+               LIBRARY "xyz.dll" BASE=0x61000000
+
+               EXPORTS
+               _foo = foo
+
+          The line '_foo = foo' maps the exported symbol 'foo' to
+          '_foo'.
+
+     Note: using a DEF file disables the default auto-export behavior,
+     unless the '--export-all-symbols' command line option is used.  If,
+     however, you are trying to rename symbols, then you should list
+     _all_ desired exports in the DEF file, including the symbols that
+     are not being renamed, and do _not_ use the '--export-all-symbols'
+     option.  If you list only the renamed symbols in the DEF file, and
+     use '--export-all-symbols' to handle the other symbols, then the
+     both the new names _and_ the original names for the renamed symbols
+     will be exported.  In effect, you'd be aliasing those symbols, not
+     renaming them, which is probably not what you wanted.
+
+_weak externals_
+     The Windows object format, PE, specifies a form of weak symbols
+     called weak externals.  When a weak symbol is linked and the symbol
+     is not defined, the weak symbol becomes an alias for some other
+     symbol.  There are three variants of weak externals:
+        * Definition is searched for in objects and libraries,
+          historically called lazy externals.
+        * Definition is searched for only in other objects, not in
+          libraries.  This form is not presently implemented.
+        * No search; the symbol is an alias.  This form is not presently
+          implemented.
+     As a GNU extension, weak symbols that do not specify an alternate
+     symbol are supported.  If the symbol is undefined when linking, the
+     symbol uses a default value.
+
+4.13 'ld' and Xtensa Processors
+===============================
+
+The default 'ld' behavior for Xtensa processors is to interpret
+'SECTIONS' commands so that lists of explicitly named sections in a
+specification with a wildcard file will be interleaved when necessary to
+keep literal pools within the range of PC-relative load offsets.  For
+example, with the command:
+
+     SECTIONS
+     {
+       .text : {
+         *(.literal .text)
+       }
+     }
+
+'ld' may interleave some of the '.literal' and '.text' sections from
+different object files to ensure that the literal pools are within the
+range of PC-relative load offsets.  A valid interleaving might place the
+'.literal' sections from an initial group of files followed by the
+'.text' sections of that group of files.  Then, the '.literal' sections
+from the rest of the files and the '.text' sections from the rest of the
+files would follow.
+
+   Relaxation is enabled by default for the Xtensa version of 'ld' and
+provides two important link-time optimizations.  The first optimization
+is to combine identical literal values to reduce code size.  A redundant
+literal will be removed and all the 'L32R' instructions that use it will
+be changed to reference an identical literal, as long as the location of
+the replacement literal is within the offset range of all the 'L32R'
+instructions.  The second optimization is to remove unnecessary overhead
+from assembler-generated "longcall" sequences of 'L32R'/'CALLXN' when
+the target functions are within range of direct 'CALLN' instructions.
+
+   For each of these cases where an indirect call sequence can be
+optimized to a direct call, the linker will change the 'CALLXN'
+instruction to a 'CALLN' instruction, remove the 'L32R' instruction, and
+remove the literal referenced by the 'L32R' instruction if it is not
+used for anything else.  Removing the 'L32R' instruction always reduces
+code size but can potentially hurt performance by changing the alignment
+of subsequent branch targets.  By default, the linker will always
+preserve alignments, either by switching some instructions between
+24-bit encodings and the equivalent density instructions or by inserting
+a no-op in place of the 'L32R' instruction that was removed.  If code
+size is more important than performance, the '--size-opt' option can be
+used to prevent the linker from widening density instructions or
+inserting no-ops, except in a few cases where no-ops are required for
+correctness.
+
+   The following Xtensa-specific command-line options can be used to
+control the linker:
+
+'--no-relax'
+     Since the Xtensa version of 'ld' enables the '--relax' option by
+     default, the '--no-relax' option is provided to disable relaxation.
+
+'--size-opt'
+     When optimizing indirect calls to direct calls, optimize for code
+     size more than performance.  With this option, the linker will not
+     insert no-ops or widen density instructions to preserve branch
+     target alignment.  There may still be some cases where no-ops are
+     required to preserve the correctness of the code.
+
+5 BFD
+*****
+
+The linker accesses object and archive files using the BFD libraries.
+These libraries allow the linker to use the same routines to operate on
+object files whatever the object file format.  A different object file
+format can be supported simply by creating a new BFD back end and adding
+it to the library.  To conserve runtime memory, however, the linker and
+associated tools are usually configured to support only a subset of the
+object file formats available.  You can use 'objdump -i' (*note objdump:
+(binutils.info)objdump.) to list all the formats available for your
+configuration.
+
+   As with most implementations, BFD is a compromise between several
+conflicting requirements.  The major factor influencing BFD design was
+efficiency: any time used converting between formats is time which would
+not have been spent had BFD not been involved.  This is partly offset by
+abstraction payback; since BFD simplifies applications and back ends,
+more time and care may be spent optimizing algorithms for a greater
+speed.
+
+   One minor artifact of the BFD solution which you should bear in mind
+is the potential for information loss.  There are two places where
+useful information can be lost using the BFD mechanism: during
+conversion and during output.  *Note BFD information loss::.
+
+5.1 How It Works: An Outline of BFD
+===================================
+
+When an object file is opened, BFD subroutines automatically determine
+the format of the input object file.  They then build a descriptor in
+memory with pointers to routines that will be used to access elements of
+the object file's data structures.
+
+   As different information from the object files is required, BFD reads
+from different sections of the file and processes them.  For example, a
+very common operation for the linker is processing symbol tables.  Each
+BFD back end provides a routine for converting between the object file's
+representation of symbols and an internal canonical format.  When the
+linker asks for the symbol table of an object file, it calls through a
+memory pointer to the routine from the relevant BFD back end which reads
+and converts the table into a canonical form.  The linker then operates
+upon the canonical form.  When the link is finished and the linker
+writes the output file's symbol table, another BFD back end routine is
+called to take the newly created symbol table and convert it into the
+chosen output format.
+
+5.1.1 Information Loss
+----------------------
+
+_Information can be lost during output._  The output formats supported
+by BFD do not provide identical facilities, and information which can be
+described in one form has nowhere to go in another format.  One example
+of this is alignment information in 'b.out'.  There is nowhere in an
+'a.out' format file to store alignment information on the contained
+data, so when a file is linked from 'b.out' and an 'a.out' image is
+produced, alignment information will not propagate to the output file.
+(The linker will still use the alignment information internally, so the
+link is performed correctly).
+
+   Another example is COFF section names.  COFF files may contain an
+unlimited number of sections, each one with a textual section name.  If
+the target of the link is a format which does not have many sections
+(e.g., 'a.out') or has sections without names (e.g., the Oasys format),
+the link cannot be done simply.  You can circumvent this problem by
+describing the desired input-to-output section mapping with the linker
+command language.
+
+   _Information can be lost during canonicalization._  The BFD internal
+canonical form of the external formats is not exhaustive; there are
+structures in input formats for which there is no direct representation
+internally.  This means that the BFD back ends cannot maintain all
+possible data richness through the transformation between external to
+internal and back to external formats.
+
+   This limitation is only a problem when an application reads one
+format and writes another.  Each BFD back end is responsible for
+maintaining as much data as possible, and the internal BFD canonical
+form has structures which are opaque to the BFD core, and exported only
+to the back ends.  When a file is read in one format, the canonical form
+is generated for BFD and the application.  At the same time, the back
+end saves away any information which may otherwise be lost.  If the data
+is then written back in the same format, the back end routine will be
+able to use the canonical form provided by the BFD core as well as the
+information it prepared earlier.  Since there is a great deal of
+commonality between back ends, there is no information lost when linking
+or copying big endian COFF to little endian COFF, or 'a.out' to 'b.out'.
+When a mixture of formats is linked, the information is only lost from
+the files whose format differs from the destination.
+
+5.1.2 The BFD canonical object-file format
+------------------------------------------
+
+The greatest potential for loss of information occurs when there is the
+least overlap between the information provided by the source format,
+that stored by the canonical format, and that needed by the destination
+format.  A brief description of the canonical form may help you
+understand which kinds of data you can count on preserving across
+conversions.
+
+_files_
+     Information stored on a per-file basis includes target machine
+     architecture, particular implementation format type, a demand
+     pageable bit, and a write protected bit.  Information like Unix
+     magic numbers is not stored here--only the magic numbers' meaning,
+     so a 'ZMAGIC' file would have both the demand pageable bit and the
+     write protected text bit set.  The byte order of the target is
+     stored on a per-file basis, so that big- and little-endian object
+     files may be used with one another.
+
+_sections_
+     Each section in the input file contains the name of the section,
+     the section's original address in the object file, size and
+     alignment information, various flags, and pointers into other BFD
+     data structures.
+
+_symbols_
+     Each symbol contains a pointer to the information for the object
+     file which originally defined it, its name, its value, and various
+     flag bits.  When a BFD back end reads in a symbol table, it
+     relocates all symbols to make them relative to the base of the
+     section where they were defined.  Doing this ensures that each
+     symbol points to its containing section.  Each symbol also has a
+     varying amount of hidden private data for the BFD back end.  Since
+     the symbol points to the original file, the private data format for
+     that symbol is accessible.  'ld' can operate on a collection of
+     symbols of wildly different formats without problems.
+
+     Normal global and simple local symbols are maintained on output, so
+     an output file (no matter its format) will retain symbols pointing
+     to functions and to global, static, and common variables.  Some
+     symbol information is not worth retaining; in 'a.out', type
+     information is stored in the symbol table as long symbol names.
+     This information would be useless to most COFF debuggers; the
+     linker has command line switches to allow users to throw it away.
+
+     There is one word of type information within the symbol, so if the
+     format supports symbol type information within symbols (for
+     example, COFF, IEEE, Oasys) and the type is simple enough to fit
+     within one word (nearly everything but aggregates), the information
+     will be preserved.
+
+_relocation level_
+     Each canonical BFD relocation record contains a pointer to the
+     symbol to relocate to, the offset of the data to relocate, the
+     section the data is in, and a pointer to a relocation type
+     descriptor.  Relocation is performed by passing messages through
+     the relocation type descriptor and the symbol pointer.  Therefore,
+     relocations can be performed on output data using a relocation
+     method that is only available in one of the input formats.  For
+     instance, Oasys provides a byte relocation format.  A relocation
+     record requesting this relocation type would point indirectly to a
+     routine to perform this, so the relocation may be performed on a
+     byte being written to a 68k COFF file, even though 68k COFF has no
+     such relocation type.
+
+_line numbers_
+     Object formats can contain, for debugging purposes, some form of
+     mapping between symbols, source line numbers, and addresses in the
+     output file.  These addresses have to be relocated along with the
+     symbol information.  Each symbol with an associated list of line
+     number records points to the first record of the list.  The head of
+     a line number list consists of a pointer to the symbol, which
+     allows finding out the address of the function whose line number is
+     being described.  The rest of the list is made up of pairs: offsets
+     into the section and line numbers.  Any format which can simply
+     derive this information can pass it successfully between formats
+     (COFF, IEEE and Oasys).
+
+6 Reporting Bugs
+****************
+
+Your bug reports play an essential role in making 'ld' reliable.
+
+   Reporting a bug may help you by bringing a solution to your problem,
+or it may not.  But in any case the principal function of a bug report
+is to help the entire community by making the next version of 'ld' work
+better.  Bug reports are your contribution to the maintenance of 'ld'.
+
+   In order for a bug report to serve its purpose, you must include the
+information that enables us to fix the bug.
+
+6.1 Have You Found a Bug?
+=========================
+
+If you are not sure whether you have found a bug, here are some
+guidelines:
+
+   * If the linker gets a fatal signal, for any input whatever, that is
+     a 'ld' bug.  Reliable linkers never crash.
+
+   * If 'ld' produces an error message for valid input, that is a bug.
+
+   * If 'ld' does not produce an error message for invalid input, that
+     may be a bug.  In the general case, the linker can not verify that
+     object files are correct.
+
+   * If you are an experienced user of linkers, your suggestions for
+     improvement of 'ld' are welcome in any case.
+
+6.2 How to Report Bugs
+======================
+
+A number of companies and individuals offer support for GNU products.
+If you obtained 'ld' from a support organization, we recommend you
+contact that organization first.
+
+   You can find contact information for many support companies and
+individuals in the file 'etc/SERVICE' in the GNU Emacs distribution.
+
+   The fundamental principle of reporting bugs usefully is this: *report
+all the facts*.  If you are not sure whether to state a fact or leave it
+out, state it!
+
+   Often people omit facts because they think they know what causes the
+problem and assume that some details do not matter.  Thus, you might
+assume that the name of a symbol you use in an example does not matter.
+Well, probably it does not, but one cannot be sure.  Perhaps the bug is
+a stray memory reference which happens to fetch from the location where
+that name is stored in memory; perhaps, if the name were different, the
+contents of that location would fool the linker into doing the right
+thing despite the bug.  Play it safe and give a specific, complete
+example.  That is the easiest thing for you to do, and the most helpful.
+
+   Keep in mind that the purpose of a bug report is to enable us to fix
+the bug if it is new to us.  Therefore, always write your bug reports on
+the assumption that the bug has not been reported previously.
+
+   Sometimes people give a few sketchy facts and ask, "Does this ring a
+bell?"  This cannot help us fix a bug, so it is basically useless.  We
+respond by asking for enough details to enable us to investigate.  You
+might as well expedite matters by sending them to begin with.
+
+   To enable us to fix the bug, you should include all these things:
+
+   * The version of 'ld'.  'ld' announces it if you start it with the
+     '--version' argument.
+
+     Without this, we will not know whether there is any point in
+     looking for the bug in the current version of 'ld'.
+
+   * Any patches you may have applied to the 'ld' source, including any
+     patches made to the 'BFD' library.
+
+   * The type of machine you are using, and the operating system name
+     and version number.
+
+   * What compiler (and its version) was used to compile 'ld'--e.g.
+     "'gcc-2.7'".
+
+   * The command arguments you gave the linker to link your example and
+     observe the bug.  To guarantee you will not omit something
+     important, list them all.  A copy of the Makefile (or the output
+     from make) is sufficient.
+
+     If we were to try to guess the arguments, we would probably guess
+     wrong and then we might not encounter the bug.
+
+   * A complete input file, or set of input files, that will reproduce
+     the bug.  It is generally most helpful to send the actual object
+     files provided that they are reasonably small.  Say no more than
+     10K. For bigger files you can either make them available by FTP or
+     HTTP or else state that you are willing to send the object file(s)
+     to whomever requests them.  (Note - your email will be going to a
+     mailing list, so we do not want to clog it up with large
+     attachments).  But small attachments are best.
+
+     If the source files were assembled using 'gas' or compiled using
+     'gcc', then it may be OK to send the source files rather than the
+     object files.  In this case, be sure to say exactly what version of
+     'gas' or 'gcc' was used to produce the object files.  Also say how
+     'gas' or 'gcc' were configured.
+
+   * A description of what behavior you observe that you believe is
+     incorrect.  For example, "It gets a fatal signal."
+
+     Of course, if the bug is that 'ld' gets a fatal signal, then we
+     will certainly notice it.  But if the bug is incorrect output, we
+     might not notice unless it is glaringly wrong.  You might as well
+     not give us a chance to make a mistake.
+
+     Even if the problem you experience is a fatal signal, you should
+     still say so explicitly.  Suppose something strange is going on,
+     such as, your copy of 'ld' is out of sync, or you have encountered
+     a bug in the C library on your system.  (This has happened!)  Your
+     copy might crash and ours would not.  If you told us to expect a
+     crash, then when ours fails to crash, we would know that the bug
+     was not happening for us.  If you had not told us to expect a
+     crash, then we would not be able to draw any conclusion from our
+     observations.
+
+   * If you wish to suggest changes to the 'ld' source, send us context
+     diffs, as generated by 'diff' with the '-u', '-c', or '-p' option.
+     Always send diffs from the old file to the new file.  If you even
+     discuss something in the 'ld' source, refer to it by context, not
+     by line number.
+
+     The line numbers in our development sources will not match those in
+     your sources.  Your line numbers would convey no useful information
+     to us.
+
+   Here are some things that are not necessary:
+
+   * A description of the envelope of the bug.
+
+     Often people who encounter a bug spend a lot of time investigating
+     which changes to the input file will make the bug go away and which
+     changes will not affect it.
+
+     This is often time consuming and not very useful, because the way
+     we will find the bug is by running a single example under the
+     debugger with breakpoints, not by pure deduction from a series of
+     examples.  We recommend that you save your time for something else.
+
+     Of course, if you can find a simpler example to report _instead_ of
+     the original one, that is a convenience for us.  Errors in the
+     output will be easier to spot, running under the debugger will take
+     less time, and so on.
+
+     However, simplification is not vital; if you do not want to do
+     this, report the bug anyway and send us the entire test case you
+     used.
+
+   * A patch for the bug.
+
+     A patch for the bug does help us if it is a good one.  But do not
+     omit the necessary information, such as the test case, on the
+     assumption that a patch is all we need.  We might see problems with
+     your patch and decide to fix the problem another way, or we might
+     not understand it at all.
+
+     Sometimes with a program as complicated as 'ld' it is very hard to
+     construct an example that will make the program follow a certain
+     path through the code.  If you do not send us the example, we will
+     not be able to construct one, so we will not be able to verify that
+     the bug is fixed.
+
+     And if we cannot understand what bug you are trying to fix, or why
+     your patch should be an improvement, we will not install it.  A
+     test case will help us to understand.
+
+   * A guess about what the bug is or what it depends on.
+
+     Such guesses are usually wrong.  Even we cannot guess right about
+     such things without first using the debugger to find the facts.
+
+Appendix A MRI Compatible Script Files
+**************************************
+
+To aid users making the transition to GNU 'ld' from the MRI linker, 'ld'
+can use MRI compatible linker scripts as an alternative to the more
+general-purpose linker scripting language described in *note Scripts::.
+MRI compatible linker scripts have a much simpler command set than the
+scripting language otherwise used with 'ld'.  GNU 'ld' supports the most
+commonly used MRI linker commands; these commands are described here.
+
+   In general, MRI scripts aren't of much use with the 'a.out' object
+file format, since it only has three sections and MRI scripts lack some
+features to make use of them.
+
+   You can specify a file containing an MRI-compatible script using the
+'-c' command-line option.
+
+   Each command in an MRI-compatible script occupies its own line; each
+command line starts with the keyword that identifies the command (though
+blank lines are also allowed for punctuation).  If a line of an
+MRI-compatible script begins with an unrecognized keyword, 'ld' issues a
+warning message, but continues processing the script.
+
+   Lines beginning with '*' are comments.
+
+   You can write these commands using all upper-case letters, or all
+lower case; for example, 'chip' is the same as 'CHIP'.  The following
+list shows only the upper-case form of each command.
+
+'ABSOLUTE SECNAME'
+'ABSOLUTE SECNAME, SECNAME, ... SECNAME'
+     Normally, 'ld' includes in the output file all sections from all
+     the input files.  However, in an MRI-compatible script, you can use
+     the 'ABSOLUTE' command to restrict the sections that will be
+     present in your output program.  If the 'ABSOLUTE' command is used
+     at all in a script, then only the sections named explicitly in
+     'ABSOLUTE' commands will appear in the linker output.  You can
+     still use other input sections (whatever you select on the command
+     line, or using 'LOAD') to resolve addresses in the output file.
+
+'ALIAS OUT-SECNAME, IN-SECNAME'
+     Use this command to place the data from input section IN-SECNAME in
+     a section called OUT-SECNAME in the linker output file.
+
+     IN-SECNAME may be an integer.
+
+'ALIGN SECNAME = EXPRESSION'
+     Align the section called SECNAME to EXPRESSION.  The EXPRESSION
+     should be a power of two.
+
+'BASE EXPRESSION'
+     Use the value of EXPRESSION as the lowest address (other than
+     absolute addresses) in the output file.
+
+'CHIP EXPRESSION'
+'CHIP EXPRESSION, EXPRESSION'
+     This command does nothing; it is accepted only for compatibility.
+
+'END'
+     This command does nothing whatever; it's only accepted for
+     compatibility.
+
+'FORMAT OUTPUT-FORMAT'
+     Similar to the 'OUTPUT_FORMAT' command in the more general linker
+     language, but restricted to one of these output formats:
+
+       1. S-records, if OUTPUT-FORMAT is 'S'
+
+       2. IEEE, if OUTPUT-FORMAT is 'IEEE'
+
+       3. COFF (the 'coff-m68k' variant in BFD), if OUTPUT-FORMAT is
+          'COFF'
+
+'LIST ANYTHING...'
+     Print (to the standard output file) a link map, as produced by the
+     'ld' command-line option '-M'.
+
+     The keyword 'LIST' may be followed by anything on the same line,
+     with no change in its effect.
+
+'LOAD FILENAME'
+'LOAD FILENAME, FILENAME, ... FILENAME'
+     Include one or more object file FILENAME in the link; this has the
+     same effect as specifying FILENAME directly on the 'ld' command
+     line.
+
+'NAME OUTPUT-NAME'
+     OUTPUT-NAME is the name for the program produced by 'ld'; the
+     MRI-compatible command 'NAME' is equivalent to the command-line
+     option '-o' or the general script language command 'OUTPUT'.
+
+'ORDER SECNAME, SECNAME, ... SECNAME'
+'ORDER SECNAME SECNAME SECNAME'
+     Normally, 'ld' orders the sections in its output file in the order
+     in which they first appear in the input files.  In an
+     MRI-compatible script, you can override this ordering with the
+     'ORDER' command.  The sections you list with 'ORDER' will appear
+     first in your output file, in the order specified.
+
+'PUBLIC NAME=EXPRESSION'
+'PUBLIC NAME,EXPRESSION'
+'PUBLIC NAME EXPRESSION'
+     Supply a value (EXPRESSION) for external symbol NAME used in the
+     linker input files.
+
+'SECT SECNAME, EXPRESSION'
+'SECT SECNAME=EXPRESSION'
+'SECT SECNAME EXPRESSION'
+     You can use any of these three forms of the 'SECT' command to
+     specify the start address (EXPRESSION) for section SECNAME.  If you
+     have more than one 'SECT' statement for the same SECNAME, only the
+     _first_ sets the start address.
+
+Appendix B GNU Free Documentation License
+*****************************************
+
+                        Version 1.1, March 2000
+
+     Copyright (C) 2000, 2003 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
+     51 Franklin Street, Fifth Floor, Boston, MA  02110-1301  USA
+
+     Everyone is permitted to copy and distribute verbatim copies
+     of this license document, but changing it is not allowed.
+
+  0. PREAMBLE
+
+     The purpose of this License is to make a manual, textbook, or other
+     written document "free" in the sense of freedom: to assure everyone
+     the effective freedom to copy and redistribute it, with or without
+     modifying it, either commercially or noncommercially.  Secondarily,
+     this License preserves for the author and publisher a way to get
+     credit for their work, while not being considered responsible for
+     modifications made by others.
+
+     This License is a kind of "copyleft", which means that derivative
+     works of the document must themselves be free in the same sense.
+     It complements the GNU General Public License, which is a copyleft
+     license designed for free software.
+
+     We have designed this License in order to use it for manuals for
+     free software, because free software needs free documentation: a
+     free program should come with manuals providing the same freedoms
+     that the software does.  But this License is not limited to
+     software manuals; it can be used for any textual work, regardless
+     of subject matter or whether it is published as a printed book.  We
+     recommend this License principally for works whose purpose is
+     instruction or reference.
+
+
+  1. APPLICABILITY AND DEFINITIONS
+
+     This License applies to any manual or other work that contains a
+     notice placed by the copyright holder saying it can be distributed
+     under the terms of this License.  The "Document", below, refers to
+     any such manual or work.  Any member of the public is a licensee,
+     and is addressed as "you."
+
+     A "Modified Version" of the Document means any work containing the
+     Document or a portion of it, either copied verbatim, or with
+     modifications and/or translated into another language.
+
+     A "Secondary Section" is a named appendix or a front-matter section
+     of the Document that deals exclusively with the relationship of the
+     publishers or authors of the Document to the Document's overall
+     subject (or to related matters) and contains nothing that could
+     fall directly within that overall subject.  (For example, if the
+     Document is in part a textbook of mathematics, a Secondary Section
+     may not explain any mathematics.)  The relationship could be a
+     matter of historical connection with the subject or with related
+     matters, or of legal, commercial, philosophical, ethical or
+     political position regarding them.
+
+     The "Invariant Sections" are certain Secondary Sections whose
+     titles are designated, as being those of Invariant Sections, in the
+     notice that says that the Document is released under this License.
+
+     The "Cover Texts" are certain short passages of text that are
+     listed, as Front-Cover Texts or Back-Cover Texts, in the notice
+     that says that the Document is released under this License.
+
+     A "Transparent" copy of the Document means a machine-readable copy,
+     represented in a format whose specification is available to the
+     general public, whose contents can be viewed and edited directly
+     and straightforwardly with generic text editors or (for images
+     composed of pixels) generic paint programs or (for drawings) some
+     widely available drawing editor, and that is suitable for input to
+     text formatters or for automatic translation to a variety of
+     formats suitable for input to text formatters.  A copy made in an
+     otherwise Transparent file format whose markup has been designed to
+     thwart or discourage subsequent modification by readers is not
+     Transparent.  A copy that is not "Transparent" is called "Opaque."
+
+     Examples of suitable formats for Transparent copies include plain
+     ASCII without markup, Texinfo input format, LaTeX input format,
+     SGML or XML using a publicly available DTD, and standard-conforming
+     simple HTML designed for human modification.  Opaque formats
+     include PostScript, PDF, proprietary formats that can be read and
+     edited only by proprietary word processors, SGML or XML for which
+     the DTD and/or processing tools are not generally available, and
+     the machine-generated HTML produced by some word processors for
+     output purposes only.
+
+     The "Title Page" means, for a printed book, the title page itself,
+     plus such following pages as are needed to hold, legibly, the
+     material this License requires to appear in the title page.  For
+     works in formats which do not have any title page as such, "Title
+     Page" means the text near the most prominent appearance of the
+     work's title, preceding the beginning of the body of the text.
+
+  2. VERBATIM COPYING
+
+     You may copy and distribute the Document in any medium, either
+     commercially or noncommercially, provided that this License, the
+     copyright notices, and the license notice saying this License
+     applies to the Document are reproduced in all copies, and that you
+     add no other conditions whatsoever to those of this License.  You
+     may not use technical measures to obstruct or control the reading
+     or further copying of the copies you make or distribute.  However,
+     you may accept compensation in exchange for copies.  If you
+     distribute a large enough number of copies you must also follow the
+     conditions in section 3.
+
+     You may also lend copies, under the same conditions stated above,
+     and you may publicly display copies.
+
+  3. COPYING IN QUANTITY
+
+     If you publish printed copies of the Document numbering more than
+     100, and the Document's license notice requires Cover Texts, you
+     must enclose the copies in covers that carry, clearly and legibly,
+     all these Cover Texts: Front-Cover Texts on the front cover, and
+     Back-Cover Texts on the back cover.  Both covers must also clearly
+     and legibly identify you as the publisher of these copies.  The
+     front cover must present the full title with all words of the title
+     equally prominent and visible.  You may add other material on the
+     covers in addition.  Copying with changes limited to the covers, as
+     long as they preserve the title of the Document and satisfy these
+     conditions, can be treated as verbatim copying in other respects.
+
+     If the required texts for either cover are too voluminous to fit
+     legibly, you should put the first ones listed (as many as fit
+     reasonably) on the actual cover, and continue the rest onto
+     adjacent pages.
+
+     If you publish or distribute Opaque copies of the Document
+     numbering more than 100, you must either include a machine-readable
+     Transparent copy along with each Opaque copy, or state in or with
+     each Opaque copy a publicly-accessible computer-network location
+     containing a complete Transparent copy of the Document, free of
+     added material, which the general network-using public has access
+     to download anonymously at no charge using public-standard network
+     protocols.  If you use the latter option, you must take reasonably
+     prudent steps, when you begin distribution of Opaque copies in
+     quantity, to ensure that this Transparent copy will remain thus
+     accessible at the stated location until at least one year after the
+     last time you distribute an Opaque copy (directly or through your
+     agents or retailers) of that edition to the public.
+
+     It is requested, but not required, that you contact the authors of
+     the Document well before redistributing any large number of copies,
+     to give them a chance to provide you with an updated version of the
+     Document.
+
+  4. MODIFICATIONS
+
+     You may copy and distribute a Modified Version of the Document
+     under the conditions of sections 2 and 3 above, provided that you
+     release the Modified Version under precisely this License, with the
+     Modified Version filling the role of the Document, thus licensing
+     distribution and modification of the Modified Version to whoever
+     possesses a copy of it.  In addition, you must do these things in
+     the Modified Version:
+
+     A. Use in the Title Page (and on the covers, if any) a title
+     distinct from that of the Document, and from those of previous
+     versions (which should, if there were any, be listed in the History
+     section of the Document).  You may use the same title as a previous
+     version if the original publisher of that version gives permission.
+     B. List on the Title Page, as authors, one or more persons or
+     entities responsible for authorship of the modifications in the
+     Modified Version, together with at least five of the principal
+     authors of the Document (all of its principal authors, if it has
+     less than five).
+     C. State on the Title page the name of the publisher of the
+     Modified Version, as the publisher.
+     D. Preserve all the copyright notices of the Document.
+     E. Add an appropriate copyright notice for your modifications
+     adjacent to the other copyright notices.
+     F. Include, immediately after the copyright notices, a license
+     notice giving the public permission to use the Modified Version
+     under the terms of this License, in the form shown in the Addendum
+     below.
+     G. Preserve in that license notice the full lists of Invariant
+     Sections and required Cover Texts given in the Document's license
+     notice.
+     H. Include an unaltered copy of this License.
+     I. Preserve the section entitled "History", and its title, and add
+     to it an item stating at least the title, year, new authors, and
+     publisher of the Modified Version as given on the Title Page.  If
+     there is no section entitled "History" in the Document, create one
+     stating the title, year, authors, and publisher of the Document as
+     given on its Title Page, then add an item describing the Modified
+     Version as stated in the previous sentence.
+     J. Preserve the network location, if any, given in the Document for
+     public access to a Transparent copy of the Document, and likewise
+     the network locations given in the Document for previous versions
+     it was based on.  These may be placed in the "History" section.
+     You may omit a network location for a work that was published at
+     least four years before the Document itself, or if the original
+     publisher of the version it refers to gives permission.
+     K. In any section entitled "Acknowledgements" or "Dedications",
+     preserve the section's title, and preserve in the section all the
+     substance and tone of each of the contributor acknowledgements
+     and/or dedications given therein.
+     L. Preserve all the Invariant Sections of the Document, unaltered
+     in their text and in their titles.  Section numbers or the
+     equivalent are not considered part of the section titles.
+     M. Delete any section entitled "Endorsements."  Such a section may
+     not be included in the Modified Version.
+     N. Do not retitle any existing section as "Endorsements" or to
+     conflict in title with any Invariant Section.
+
+     If the Modified Version includes new front-matter sections or
+     appendices that qualify as Secondary Sections and contain no
+     material copied from the Document, you may at your option designate
+     some or all of these sections as invariant.  To do this, add their
+     titles to the list of Invariant Sections in the Modified Version's
+     license notice.  These titles must be distinct from any other
+     section titles.
+
+     You may add a section entitled "Endorsements", provided it contains
+     nothing but endorsements of your Modified Version by various
+     parties-for example, statements of peer review or that the text has
+     been approved by an organization as the authoritative definition of
+     a standard.
+
+     You may add a passage of up to five words as a Front-Cover Text,
+     and a passage of up to 25 words as a Back-Cover Text, to the end of
+     the list of Cover Texts in the Modified Version.  Only one passage
+     of Front-Cover Text and one of Back-Cover Text may be added by (or
+     through arrangements made by) any one entity.  If the Document
+     already includes a cover text for the same cover, previously added
+     by you or by arrangement made by the same entity you are acting on
+     behalf of, you may not add another; but you may replace the old
+     one, on explicit permission from the previous publisher that added
+     the old one.
+
+     The author(s) and publisher(s) of the Document do not by this
+     License give permission to use their names for publicity for or to
+     assert or imply endorsement of any Modified Version.
+
+  5. COMBINING DOCUMENTS
+
+     You may combine the Document with other documents released under
+     this License, under the terms defined in section 4 above for
+     modified versions, provided that you include in the combination all
+     of the Invariant Sections of all of the original documents,
+     unmodified, and list them all as Invariant Sections of your
+     combined work in its license notice.
+
+     The combined work need only contain one copy of this License, and
+     multiple identical Invariant Sections may be replaced with a single
+     copy.  If there are multiple Invariant Sections with the same name
+     but different contents, make the title of each such section unique
+     by adding at the end of it, in parentheses, the name of the
+     original author or publisher of that section if known, or else a
+     unique number.  Make the same adjustment to the section titles in
+     the list of Invariant Sections in the license notice of the
+     combined work.
+
+     In the combination, you must combine any sections entitled
+     "History" in the various original documents, forming one section
+     entitled "History"; likewise combine any sections entitled
+     "Acknowledgements", and any sections entitled "Dedications."  You
+     must delete all sections entitled "Endorsements."
+
+  6. COLLECTIONS OF DOCUMENTS
+
+     You may make a collection consisting of the Document and other
+     documents released under this License, and replace the individual
+     copies of this License in the various documents with a single copy
+     that is included in the collection, provided that you follow the
+     rules of this License for verbatim copying of each of the documents
+     in all other respects.
+
+     You may extract a single document from such a collection, and
+     distribute it individually under this License, provided you insert
+     a copy of this License into the extracted document, and follow this
+     License in all other respects regarding verbatim copying of that
+     document.
+
+  7. AGGREGATION WITH INDEPENDENT WORKS
+
+     A compilation of the Document or its derivatives with other
+     separate and independent documents or works, in or on a volume of a
+     storage or distribution medium, does not as a whole count as a
+     Modified Version of the Document, provided no compilation copyright
+     is claimed for the compilation.  Such a compilation is called an
+     "aggregate", and this License does not apply to the other
+     self-contained works thus compiled with the Document, on account of
+     their being thus compiled, if they are not themselves derivative
+     works of the Document.
+
+     If the Cover Text requirement of section 3 is applicable to these
+     copies of the Document, then if the Document is less than one
+     quarter of the entire aggregate, the Document's Cover Texts may be
+     placed on covers that surround only the Document within the
+     aggregate.  Otherwise they must appear on covers around the whole
+     aggregate.
+
+  8. TRANSLATION
+
+     Translation is considered a kind of modification, so you may
+     distribute translations of the Document under the terms of section
+     4.  Replacing Invariant Sections with translations requires special
+     permission from their copyright holders, but you may include
+     translations of some or all Invariant Sections in addition to the
+     original versions of these Invariant Sections.  You may include a
+     translation of this License provided that you also include the
+     original English version of this License.  In case of a
+     disagreement between the translation and the original English
+     version of this License, the original English version will prevail.
+
+  9. TERMINATION
+
+     You may not copy, modify, sublicense, or distribute the Document
+     except as expressly provided for under this License.  Any other
+     attempt to copy, modify, sublicense or distribute the Document is
+     void, and will automatically terminate your rights under this
+     License.  However, parties who have received copies, or rights,
+     from you under this License will not have their licenses terminated
+     so long as such parties remain in full compliance.
+
+  10. FUTURE REVISIONS OF THIS LICENSE
+
+     The Free Software Foundation may publish new, revised versions of
+     the GNU Free Documentation License from time to time.  Such new
+     versions will be similar in spirit to the present version, but may
+     differ in detail to address new problems or concerns.  See
+     http://www.gnu.org/copyleft/.
+
+     Each version of the License is given a distinguishing version
+     number.  If the Document specifies that a particular numbered
+     version of this License "or any later version" applies to it, you
+     have the option of following the terms and conditions either of
+     that specified version or of any later version that has been
+     published (not as a draft) by the Free Software Foundation.  If the
+     Document does not specify a version number of this License, you may
+     choose any version ever published (not as a draft) by the Free
+     Software Foundation.
+
+ADDENDUM: How to use this License for your documents
+====================================================
+
+To use this License in a document you have written, include a copy of
+the License in the document and put the following copyright and license
+notices just after the title page:
+
+     Copyright (C)  YEAR  YOUR NAME.
+     Permission is granted to copy, distribute and/or modify this document
+     under the terms of the GNU Free Documentation License, Version 1.1
+     or any later version published by the Free Software Foundation;
+     with the Invariant Sections being LIST THEIR TITLES, with the
+     Front-Cover Texts being LIST, and with the Back-Cover Texts being LIST.
+     A copy of the license is included in the section entitled "GNU
+     Free Documentation License."
+
+   If you have no Invariant Sections, write "with no Invariant Sections"
+instead of saying which ones are invariant.  If you have no Front-Cover
+Texts, write "no Front-Cover Texts" instead of "Front-Cover Texts being
+LIST"; likewise for Back-Cover Texts.
+
+   If your document contains nontrivial examples of program code, we
+recommend releasing these examples in parallel under your choice of free
+software license, such as the GNU General Public License, to permit
+their use in free software.
+
+LD Index
+********
+
+* Menu:
+
+* ":                                     Symbols.            (line 3620)
+* -(:                                    Options.            (line  756)
+* --accept-unknown-input-arch:           Options.            (line  774)
+* --add-needed:                          Options.            (line  796)
+* --add-stdcall-alias:                   Options.            (line 1532)
+* --allow-multiple-definition:           Options.            (line 1004)
+* --allow-shlib-undefined:               Options.            (line 1010)
+* --architecture=ARCH:                   Options.            (line  227)
+* --as-needed:                           Options.            (line  784)
+* --auxiliary:                           Options.            (line  328)
+* --bank-window:                         Options.            (line 1867)
+* --base-file:                           Options.            (line 1537)
+* --be8:                                 ARM.                (line 4205)
+* --bss-plt:                             PowerPC ELF32.      (line 4376)
+* --check-sections:                      Options.            (line  877)
+* --cref:                                Options.            (line  887)
+* --default-imported-symver:             Options.            (line 1038)
+* --default-script=SCRIPT:               Options.            (line  601)
+* --default-symver:                      Options.            (line 1034)
+* --defsym SYMBOL=EXP:                   Options.            (line  915)
+* --demangle[=STYLE]:                    Options.            (line  928)
+* --disable-auto-image-base:             Options.            (line 1682)
+* --disable-auto-import:                 Options.            (line 1810)
+* --disable-new-dtags:                   Options.            (line 1479)
+* --disable-runtime-pseudo-reloc:        Options.            (line 1823)
+* --disable-stdcall-fixup:               Options.            (line 1547)
+* --discard-all:                         Options.            (line  647)
+* --discard-locals:                      Options.            (line  651)
+* --dll:                                 Options.            (line 1542)
+* --dll-search-prefix:                   Options.            (line 1688)
+* --dotsyms:                             PowerPC64 ELF64.    (line 4446)
+* --dynamic-linker FILE:                 Options.            (line  941)
+* --dynamic-list-cpp-new:                Options.            (line  869)
+* --dynamic-list-cpp-typeinfo:           Options.            (line  873)
+* --dynamic-list-data:                   Options.            (line  866)
+* --dynamic-list=DYNAMIC-LIST-FILE:      Options.            (line  853)
+* --eh-frame-hdr:                        Options.            (line 1475)
+* --emit-relocs:                         Options.            (line  537)
+* --emit-stack-syms:                     SPU ELF.            (line 4541)
+* --emit-stub-syms:                      PowerPC ELF32.      (line 4407)
+* --emit-stub-syms <1>:                  PowerPC64 ELF64.    (line 4442)
+* --emit-stub-syms <2>:                  SPU ELF.            (line 4510)
+* --enable-auto-image-base:              Options.            (line 1674)
+* --enable-auto-import:                  Options.            (line 1697)
+* --enable-extra-pe-debug:               Options.            (line 1828)
+* --enable-new-dtags:                    Options.            (line 1479)
+* --enable-runtime-pseudo-reloc:         Options.            (line 1815)
+* --enable-stdcall-fixup:                Options.            (line 1547)
+* --entry=ENTRY:                         Options.            (line  281)
+* --error-unresolved-symbols:            Options.            (line 1428)
+* --exclude-libs:                        Options.            (line  291)
+* --exclude-symbols:                     Options.            (line 1588)
+* --export-all-symbols:                  Options.            (line 1564)
+* --export-dynamic:                      Options.            (line  302)
+* --extra-overlay-stubs:                 SPU ELF.            (line 4514)
+* --fatal-warnings:                      Options.            (line  947)
+* --file-alignment:                      Options.            (line 1594)
+* --filter:                              Options.            (line  349)
+* --fix-v4bx:                            ARM.                (line 4224)
+* --force-dynamic:                       Options.            (line  546)
+* --force-exe-suffix:                    Options.            (line  950)
+* --format=FORMAT:                       Options.            (line  238)
+* --format=VERSION:                      TI COFF.            (line 4554)
+* --gc-sections:                         Options.            (line  960)
+* --gpsize:                              Options.            (line  381)
+* --hash-size=NUMBER:                    Options.            (line 1488)
+* --hash-style=STYLE:                    Options.            (line 1496)
+* --heap:                                Options.            (line 1600)
+* --help:                                Options.            (line  977)
+* --image-base:                          Options.            (line 1607)
+* --just-symbols=FILE:                   Options.            (line  568)
+* --kill-at:                             Options.            (line 1616)
+* --large-address-aware:                 Options.            (line 1621)
+* --library-path=DIR:                    Options.            (line  440)
+* --library=NAMESPEC:                    Options.            (line  407)
+* --local-store=lo:hi:                   SPU ELF.            (line 4519)
+* --major-image-version:                 Options.            (line 1630)
+* --major-os-version:                    Options.            (line 1635)
+* --major-subsystem-version:             Options.            (line 1639)
+* --minor-image-version:                 Options.            (line 1644)
+* --minor-os-version:                    Options.            (line 1649)
+* --minor-subsystem-version:             Options.            (line 1653)
+* --mri-script=MRI-CMDFILE:              Options.            (line  262)
+* --multi-subspace:                      HPPA ELF32.         (line 4285)
+* --nmagic:                              Options.            (line  506)
+* --no-accept-unknown-input-arch:        Options.            (line  774)
+* --no-add-needed:                       Options.            (line  796)
+* --no-allow-shlib-undefined:            Options.            (line 1010)
+* --no-as-needed:                        Options.            (line  784)
+* --no-check-sections:                   Options.            (line  877)
+* --no-define-common:                    Options.            (line  899)
+* --no-demangle:                         Options.            (line  928)
+* --no-dotsyms:                          PowerPC64 ELF64.    (line 4446)
+* --no-enum-size-warning:                ARM.                (line 4275)
+* --no-gc-sections:                      Options.            (line  960)
+* --no-keep-memory:                      Options.            (line  989)
+* --no-multi-toc:                        PowerPC64 ELF64.    (line 4487)
+* --no-omagic:                           Options.            (line  520)
+* --no-opd-optimize:                     PowerPC64 ELF64.    (line 4461)
+* --no-overlays:                         SPU ELF.            (line 4504)
+* --no-print-gc-sections:                Options.            (line  968)
+* --no-relax:                            Xtensa.             (line 5005)
+* --no-tls-optimize:                     PowerPC ELF32.      (line 4411)
+* --no-tls-optimize <1>:                 PowerPC64 ELF64.    (line 4456)
+* --no-toc-optimize:                     PowerPC64 ELF64.    (line 4473)
+* --no-trampoline:                       Options.            (line 1861)
+* --no-undefined:                        Options.            (line  996)
+* --no-undefined-version:                Options.            (line 1029)
+* --no-warn-mismatch:                    Options.            (line 1042)
+* --no-warn-search-mismatch:             Options.            (line 1051)
+* --no-whole-archive:                    Options.            (line 1055)
+* --noinhibit-exec:                      Options.            (line 1059)
+* --non-overlapping-opd:                 PowerPC64 ELF64.    (line 4467)
+* --oformat:                             Options.            (line 1070)
+* --omagic:                              Options.            (line  511)
+* --out-implib:                          Options.            (line 1666)
+* --output-def:                          Options.            (line 1658)
+* --output=OUTPUT:                       Options.            (line  526)
+* --pic-executable:                      Options.            (line 1083)
+* --pic-veneer:                          M68HC11/68HC12.     (line 4180)
+* --plugin:                              SPU ELF.            (line 4501)
+* --print-gc-sections:                   Options.            (line  968)
+* --print-map:                           Options.            (line  472)
+* --reduce-memory-overheads:             Options.            (line 1502)
+* --relax:                               Options.            (line 1099)
+* '--relax' on i960:                     i960.               (line 4138)
+* --relax on PowerPC:                    PowerPC ELF32.      (line 4369)
+* '--relax' on Xtensa:                   Xtensa.             (line 4977)
+* --relocatable:                         Options.            (line  550)
+* --script=SCRIPT:                       Options.            (line  592)
+* --sdata-got:                           PowerPC ELF32.      (line 4393)
+* --section-alignment:                   Options.            (line 1833)
+* --section-start SECTIONNAME=ORG:       Options.            (line 1265)
+* --secure-plt:                          PowerPC ELF32.      (line 4386)
+* --sort-common:                         Options.            (line 1212)
+* --sort-section alignment:              Options.            (line 1222)
+* --sort-section name:                   Options.            (line 1218)
+* --split-by-file:                       Options.            (line 1226)
+* --split-by-reloc:                      Options.            (line 1231)
+* --stack:                               Options.            (line 1839)
+* --stack-analysis:                      SPU ELF.            (line 4524)
+* --stats:                               Options.            (line 1244)
+* --strip-all:                           Options.            (line  579)
+* --strip-debug:                         Options.            (line  583)
+* --stub-group-size:                     PowerPC64 ELF64.    (line 4419)
+* --stub-group-size=N:                   HPPA ELF32.         (line 4291)
+* --subsystem:                           Options.            (line 1846)
+* --support-old-code:                    ARM.                (line 4188)
+* --sysroot:                             Options.            (line 1248)
+* --target-help:                         Options.            (line  981)
+* --target1-abs:                         ARM.                (line 4209)
+* --target1-rel:                         ARM.                (line 4209)
+* --target2=TYPE:                        ARM.                (line 4214)
+* --thumb-entry=ENTRY:                   ARM.                (line 4199)
+* --trace:                               Options.            (line  588)
+* --trace-symbol=SYMBOL:                 Options.            (line  657)
+* --traditional-format:                  Options.            (line 1253)
+* --undefined=SYMBOL:                    Options.            (line  614)
+* --unique[=SECTION]:                    Options.            (line  632)
+* --unresolved-symbols:                  Options.            (line 1280)
+* --use-blx:                             ARM.                (line 4237)
+* --verbose:                             Options.            (line 1309)
+* --version:                             Options.            (line  641)
+* --version-script=VERSION-SCRIPTFILE:   Options.            (line 1315)
+* --vfp11-denorm-fix:                    ARM.                (line 4246)
+* --warn-common:                         Options.            (line 1322)
+* --warn-constructors:                   Options.            (line 1390)
+* --warn-multiple-gp:                    Options.            (line 1395)
+* --warn-once:                           Options.            (line 1409)
+* --warn-section-align:                  Options.            (line 1413)
+* --warn-shared-textrel:                 Options.            (line 1420)
+* --warn-unresolved-symbols:             Options.            (line 1423)
+* --whole-archive:                       Options.            (line 1432)
+* --wrap:                                Options.            (line 1446)
+* -AARCH:                                Options.            (line  226)
+* -aKEYWORD:                             Options.            (line  219)
+* -assert KEYWORD:                       Options.            (line  806)
+* -b FORMAT:                             Options.            (line  238)
+* -Bdynamic:                             Options.            (line  809)
+* -Bgroup:                               Options.            (line  819)
+* -Bshareable:                           Options.            (line 1204)
+* -Bstatic:                              Options.            (line  826)
+* -Bsymbolic:                            Options.            (line  840)
+* -Bsymbolic-functions:                  Options.            (line  847)
+* -c MRI-CMDFILE:                        Options.            (line  262)
+* -call_shared:                          Options.            (line  809)
+* -d:                                    Options.            (line  272)
+* -dc:                                   Options.            (line  272)
+* -dn:                                   Options.            (line  826)
+* -dp:                                   Options.            (line  272)
+* -dT SCRIPT:                            Options.            (line  601)
+* -dy:                                   Options.            (line  809)
+* -E:                                    Options.            (line  302)
+* -e ENTRY:                              Options.            (line  281)
+* -EB:                                   Options.            (line  321)
+* -EL:                                   Options.            (line  324)
+* -f:                                    Options.            (line  328)
+* -F:                                    Options.            (line  349)
+* -fini:                                 Options.            (line  372)
+* -g:                                    Options.            (line  378)
+* -G:                                    Options.            (line  381)
+* -hNAME:                                Options.            (line  389)
+* -i:                                    Options.            (line  398)
+* -IFILE:                                Options.            (line  941)
+* -init:                                 Options.            (line  401)
+* -LDIR:                                 Options.            (line  440)
+* -lNAMESPEC:                            Options.            (line  407)
+* -M:                                    Options.            (line  472)
+* -m EMULATION:                          Options.            (line  462)
+* -Map:                                  Options.            (line  985)
+* -n:                                    Options.            (line  506)
+* -N:                                    Options.            (line  511)
+* -non_shared:                           Options.            (line  826)
+* -nostdlib:                             Options.            (line 1065)
+* -O LEVEL:                              Options.            (line  532)
+* -o OUTPUT:                             Options.            (line  526)
+* -pie:                                  Options.            (line 1083)
+* -q:                                    Options.            (line  537)
+* -qmagic:                               Options.            (line 1093)
+* -Qy:                                   Options.            (line 1096)
+* -r:                                    Options.            (line  550)
+* -R FILE:                               Options.            (line  568)
+* -rpath:                                Options.            (line 1134)
+* -rpath-link:                           Options.            (line 1156)
+* -s:                                    Options.            (line  579)
+* -S:                                    Options.            (line  583)
+* -shared:                               Options.            (line 1204)
+* -soname=NAME:                          Options.            (line  389)
+* -static:                               Options.            (line  826)
+* -t:                                    Options.            (line  588)
+* -T SCRIPT:                             Options.            (line  592)
+* -Tbss ORG:                             Options.            (line 1274)
+* -Tdata ORG:                            Options.            (line 1274)
+* -Ttext ORG:                            Options.            (line 1274)
+* -u SYMBOL:                             Options.            (line  614)
+* -Ur:                                   Options.            (line  622)
+* -v:                                    Options.            (line  641)
+* -V:                                    Options.            (line  641)
+* -x:                                    Options.            (line  647)
+* -X:                                    Options.            (line  651)
+* -Y PATH:                               Options.            (line  666)
+* -y SYMBOL:                             Options.            (line  657)
+* -z defs:                               Options.            (line  996)
+* -z KEYWORD:                            Options.            (line  670)
+* -z muldefs:                            Options.            (line 1004)
+* .:                                     Location Counter.   (line 3650)
+* /DISCARD/:                             Output Section Discarding.
+                                                             (line 2932)
+* :PHDR:                                 Output Section Phdr.
+                                                             (line 3065)
+* =FILLEXP:                              Output Section Fill.
+                                                             (line 3079)
+* >REGION:                               Output Section Region.
+                                                             (line 3055)
+* [COMMON]:                              Input Section Common.
+                                                             (line 2744)
+* 'ABSOLUTE' (MRI):                      MRI.                (line 5391)
+* absolute and relocatable symbols:      Expression Section. (line 3828)
+* absolute expressions:                  Expression Section. (line 3828)
+* ABSOLUTE(EXP):                         Builtin Functions.  (line 3864)
+* ADDR(SECTION):                         Builtin Functions.  (line 3871)
+* address, section:                      Output Section Address.
+                                                             (line 2522)
+* 'ALIAS' (MRI):                         MRI.                (line 5402)
+* 'ALIGN' (MRI):                         MRI.                (line 5408)
+* align expression:                      Builtin Functions.  (line 3890)
+* align location counter:                Builtin Functions.  (line 3890)
+* ALIGN(ALIGN):                          Builtin Functions.  (line 3890)
+* ALIGN(EXP,ALIGN):                      Builtin Functions.  (line 3890)
+* ALIGN(SECTION_ALIGN):                  Forced Output Alignment.
+                                                             (line 3043)
+* ALIGNOF(SECTION):                      Builtin Functions.  (line 3915)
+* allocating memory:                     MEMORY.             (line 3196)
+* architecture:                          Miscellaneous Commands.
+                                                             (line 2254)
+* architectures:                         Options.            (line  226)
+* archive files, from cmd line:          Options.            (line  407)
+* archive search path in linker script:  File Commands.      (line 2158)
+* arithmetic:                            Expressions.        (line 3591)
+* arithmetic operators:                  Operators.          (line 3773)
+* ARM interworking support:              ARM.                (line 4188)
+* ASSERT:                                Miscellaneous Commands.
+                                                             (line 2217)
+* assertion in linker script:            Miscellaneous Commands.
+                                                             (line 2217)
+* assignment in scripts:                 Assignments.        (line 2262)
+* AS_NEEDED(FILES):                      File Commands.      (line 2138)
+* AT(LMA):                               Output Section LMA. (line 2983)
+* AT>LMA_REGION:                         Output Section LMA. (line 2983)
+* automatic data imports:                WIN32.              (line 4723)
+* back end:                              BFD.                (line 5019)
+* 'BASE' (MRI):                          MRI.                (line 5412)
+* BE8:                                   ARM.                (line 4205)
+* BFD canonical format:                  Canonical format.   (line 5114)
+* BFD requirements:                      BFD.                (line 5029)
+* big-endian objects:                    Options.            (line  321)
+* binary input format:                   Options.            (line  238)
+* BLOCK(EXP):                            Builtin Functions.  (line 3928)
+* bug criteria:                          Bug Criteria.       (line 5201)
+* bug reports:                           Bug Reporting.      (line 5219)
+* bugs in 'ld':                          Reporting Bugs.     (line 5188)
+* BYTE(EXPRESSION):                      Output Section Data.
+                                                             (line 2788)
+* C++ constructors, arranging in link:   Output Section Keywords.
+                                                             (line 2857)
+* 'CHIP' (MRI):                          MRI.                (line 5416)
+* COLLECT_NO_DEMANGLE:                   Environment.        (line 1899)
+* combining symbols, warnings on:        Options.            (line 1322)
+* command files:                         Scripts.            (line 1908)
+* command line:                          Options.            (line  130)
+* common allocation:                     Options.            (line  272)
+* common allocation <1>:                 Options.            (line  899)
+* common allocation in linker script:    Miscellaneous Commands.
+                                                             (line 2228)
+* common allocation in linker script <1>: Miscellaneous Commands.
+                                                             (line 2233)
+* common symbol placement:               Input Section Common.
+                                                             (line 2721)
+* compatibility, MRI:                    Options.            (line  262)
+* constants in linker scripts:           Constants.          (line 3604)
+* constructors:                          Options.            (line  622)
+* CONSTRUCTORS:                          Output Section Keywords.
+                                                             (line 2857)
+* constructors, arranging in link:       Output Section Keywords.
+                                                             (line 2857)
+* crash of linker:                       Bug Criteria.       (line 5204)
+* CREATE_OBJECT_SYMBOLS:                 Output Section Keywords.
+                                                             (line 2847)
+* creating a DEF file:                   WIN32.              (line 4691)
+* cross reference table:                 Options.            (line  887)
+* cross references:                      Miscellaneous Commands.
+                                                             (line 2238)
+* current output location:               Location Counter.   (line 3650)
+* data:                                  Output Section Data.
+                                                             (line 2788)
+* DATA_SEGMENT_ALIGN(MAXPAGESIZE, COMMONPAGESIZE): Builtin Functions.
+                                                             (line 3933)
+* DATA_SEGMENT_END(EXP):                 Builtin Functions.  (line 3954)
+* DATA_SEGMENT_RELRO_END(OFFSET, EXP):   Builtin Functions.  (line 3960)
+* dbx:                                   Options.            (line 1258)
+* DEF files, creating:                   Options.            (line 1658)
+* default emulation:                     Environment.        (line 1891)
+* default input format:                  Environment.        (line 1879)
+* DEFINED(SYMBOL):                       Builtin Functions.  (line 3971)
+* deleting local symbols:                Options.            (line  647)
+* demangling, default:                   Environment.        (line 1899)
+* demangling, from command line:         Options.            (line  928)
+* direct linking to a dll:               WIN32.              (line 4771)
+* discarding sections:                   Output Section Discarding.
+                                                             (line 2917)
+* discontinuous memory:                  MEMORY.             (line 3196)
+* DLLs, creating:                        Options.            (line 1564)
+* DLLs, creating <1>:                    Options.            (line 1658)
+* DLLs, creating <2>:                    Options.            (line 1666)
+* DLLs, linking to:                      Options.            (line 1688)
+* dot:                                   Location Counter.   (line 3650)
+* dot inside sections:                   Location Counter.   (line 3680)
+* dot outside sections:                  Location Counter.   (line 3710)
+* dynamic linker, from command line:     Options.            (line  941)
+* dynamic symbol table:                  Options.            (line  302)
+* ELF program headers:                   PHDRS.              (line 3293)
+* emulation:                             Options.            (line  462)
+* emulation, default:                    Environment.        (line 1891)
+* 'END' (MRI):                           MRI.                (line 5420)
+* endianness:                            Options.            (line  321)
+* entry point:                           Entry Point.        (line 2076)
+* entry point, from command line:        Options.            (line  281)
+* entry point, thumb:                    ARM.                (line 4199)
+* ENTRY(SYMBOL):                         Entry Point.        (line 2076)
+* error on valid input:                  Bug Criteria.       (line 5207)
+* example of linker script:              Simple Example.     (line 2005)
+* exporting DLL symbols:                 WIN32.              (line 4576)
+* expression evaluation order:           Evaluation.         (line 3794)
+* expression sections:                   Expression Section. (line 3828)
+* expression, absolute:                  Builtin Functions.  (line 3864)
+* expressions:                           Expressions.        (line 3591)
+* EXTERN:                                Miscellaneous Commands.
+                                                             (line 2221)
+* fatal signal:                          Bug Criteria.       (line 5204)
+* file name wildcard patterns:           Input Section Wildcards.
+                                                             (line 2616)
+* FILEHDR:                               PHDRS.              (line 3348)
+* filename symbols:                      Output Section Keywords.
+                                                             (line 2847)
+* fill pattern, entire section:          Output Section Fill.
+                                                             (line 3079)
+* FILL(EXPRESSION):                      Output Section Data.
+                                                             (line 2821)
+* finalization function:                 Options.            (line  372)
+* first input file:                      File Commands.      (line 2166)
+* first instruction:                     Entry Point.        (line 2076)
+* FIX_V4BX:                              ARM.                (line 4224)
+* FORCE_COMMON_ALLOCATION:               Miscellaneous Commands.
+                                                             (line 2228)
+* forcing input section alignment:       Forced Input Alignment.
+                                                             (line 3048)
+* forcing output section alignment:      Forced Output Alignment.
+                                                             (line 3043)
+* forcing the creation of dynamic sections: Options.         (line  546)
+* 'FORMAT' (MRI):                        MRI.                (line 5424)
+* functions in expressions:              Builtin Functions.  (line 3860)
+* garbage collection:                    Options.            (line  960)
+* garbage collection <1>:                Options.            (line  968)
+* garbage collection <2>:                Input Section Keep. (line 2750)
+* generating optimized output:           Options.            (line  532)
+* GNU linker:                            Overview.           (line  100)
+* GNUTARGET:                             Environment.        (line 1879)
+* GROUP(FILES):                          File Commands.      (line 2131)
+* grouping input files:                  File Commands.      (line 2131)
+* groups of archives:                    Options.            (line  756)
+* H8/300 support:                        H8/300.             (line 4078)
+* header size:                           Builtin Functions.  (line 4035)
+* heap size:                             Options.            (line 1600)
+* help:                                  Options.            (line  977)
+* holes:                                 Location Counter.   (line 3656)
+* holes, filling:                        Output Section Data.
+                                                             (line 2821)
+* HPPA multiple sub-space stubs:         HPPA ELF32.         (line 4285)
+* HPPA stub grouping:                    HPPA ELF32.         (line 4291)
+* i960 support:                          i960.               (line 4112)
+* image base:                            Options.            (line 1607)
+* implicit linker scripts:               Implicit Linker Scripts.
+                                                             (line 4054)
+* import libraries:                      WIN32.              (line 4567)
+* INCLUDE FILENAME:                      File Commands.      (line 2096)
+* including a linker script:             File Commands.      (line 2096)
+* including an entire archive:           Options.            (line 1432)
+* incremental link:                      Options.            (line  398)
+* INHIBIT_COMMON_ALLOCATION:             Miscellaneous Commands.
+                                                             (line 2233)
+* initialization function:               Options.            (line  401)
+* initialized data in ROM:               Output Section LMA. (line 3003)
+* input file format in linker script:    Format Commands.    (line 2204)
+* input filename symbols:                Output Section Keywords.
+                                                             (line 2847)
+* input files in linker scripts:         File Commands.      (line 2103)
+* input files, displaying:               Options.            (line  588)
+* input format:                          Options.            (line  238)
+* input format <1>:                      Options.            (line  238)
+* input object files in linker scripts:  File Commands.      (line 2103)
+* input section alignment:               Forced Input Alignment.
+                                                             (line 3048)
+* input section basics:                  Input Section Basics.
+                                                             (line 2568)
+* input section wildcards:               Input Section Wildcards.
+                                                             (line 2616)
+* input sections:                        Input Section.      (line 2558)
+* INPUT(FILES):                          File Commands.      (line 2103)
+* integer notation:                      Constants.          (line 3604)
+* integer suffixes:                      Constants.          (line 3610)
+* internal object-file format:           Canonical format.   (line 5114)
+* invalid input:                         Bug Criteria.       (line 5209)
+* K and M integer suffixes:              Constants.          (line 3610)
+* KEEP:                                  Input Section Keep. (line 2750)
+* l =:                                   MEMORY.             (line 3256)
+* lazy evaluation:                       Evaluation.         (line 3794)
+* 'ld' bugs, reporting:                  Bug Reporting.      (line 5219)
+* LDEMULATION:                           Environment.        (line 1891)
+* len =:                                 MEMORY.             (line 3256)
+* LENGTH =:                              MEMORY.             (line 3256)
+* LENGTH(MEMORY):                        Builtin Functions.  (line 3988)
+* library search path in linker script:  File Commands.      (line 2158)
+* link map:                              Options.            (line  472)
+* link-time runtime library search path: Options.            (line 1156)
+* linker crash:                          Bug Criteria.       (line 5204)
+* linker script concepts:                Basic Script Concepts.
+                                                             (line 1935)
+* linker script example:                 Simple Example.     (line 2005)
+* linker script file commands:           File Commands.      (line 2093)
+* linker script format:                  Script Format.      (line 1985)
+* linker script input object files:      File Commands.      (line 2103)
+* linker script simple commands:         Simple Commands.    (line 2071)
+* linker scripts:                        Scripts.            (line 1908)
+* 'LIST' (MRI):                          MRI.                (line 5435)
+* little-endian objects:                 Options.            (line  324)
+* 'LOAD' (MRI):                          MRI.                (line 5442)
+* load address:                          Output Section LMA. (line 2983)
+* LOADADDR(SECTION):                     Builtin Functions.  (line 3991)
+* loading, preventing:                   Output Section Type.
+                                                             (line 2969)
+* local symbols, deleting:               Options.            (line  651)
+* location counter:                      Location Counter.   (line 3650)
+* LONG(EXPRESSION):                      Output Section Data.
+                                                             (line 2788)
+* M and K integer suffixes:              Constants.          (line 3610)
+* M68HC11 and 68HC12 support:            M68HC11/68HC12.     (line 4148)
+* machine architecture:                  Miscellaneous Commands.
+                                                             (line 2254)
+* machine dependencies:                  Machine Dependent.  (line 4071)
+* mapping input sections to output sections: Input Section.  (line 2558)
+* MAX:                                   Builtin Functions.  (line 3995)
+* MEMORY:                                MEMORY.             (line 3196)
+* memory region attributes:              MEMORY.             (line 3222)
+* memory regions:                        MEMORY.             (line 3196)
+* memory regions and sections:           Output Section Region.
+                                                             (line 3055)
+* memory usage:                          Options.            (line  989)
+* MIN:                                   Builtin Functions.  (line 3998)
+* MRI compatibility:                     MRI.                (line 5365)
+* MSP430 extra sections:                 MSP430.             (line 4343)
+* 'NAME' (MRI):                          MRI.                (line 5448)
+* name, section:                         Output Section Name.
+                                                             (line 2506)
+* names:                                 Symbols.            (line 3620)
+* naming the output file:                Options.            (line  526)
+* NEXT(EXP):                             Builtin Functions.  (line 4002)
+* NMAGIC:                                Options.            (line  506)
+* NOCROSSREFS(SECTIONS):                 Miscellaneous Commands.
+                                                             (line 2238)
+* NOLOAD:                                Output Section Type.
+                                                             (line 2969)
+* not enough room for program headers:   Builtin Functions.  (line 4040)
+* NO_ENUM_SIZE_WARNING:                  ARM.                (line 4275)
+* o =:                                   MEMORY.             (line 3251)
+* objdump -i:                            BFD.                (line 5019)
+* object file management:                BFD.                (line 5019)
+* object files:                          Options.            (line  153)
+* object formats available:              BFD.                (line 5019)
+* object size:                           Options.            (line  381)
+* OMAGIC:                                Options.            (line  511)
+* OMAGIC <1>:                            Options.            (line  520)
+* opening object files:                  BFD outline.        (line 5045)
+* operators for arithmetic:              Operators.          (line 3773)
+* options:                               Options.            (line  130)
+* 'ORDER' (MRI):                         MRI.                (line 5453)
+* org =:                                 MEMORY.             (line 3251)
+* ORIGIN =:                              MEMORY.             (line 3251)
+* ORIGIN(MEMORY):                        Builtin Functions.  (line 4008)
+* orphan:                                Orphan Sections.    (line 3635)
+* output file after errors:              Options.            (line 1059)
+* output file format in linker script:   Format Commands.    (line 2179)
+* output file name in linker script:     File Commands.      (line 2148)
+* output section alignment:              Forced Output Alignment.
+                                                             (line 3043)
+* output section attributes:             Output Section Attributes.
+                                                             (line 2939)
+* output section data:                   Output Section Data.
+                                                             (line 2788)
+* OUTPUT(FILENAME):                      File Commands.      (line 2148)
+* OUTPUT_ARCH(BFDARCH):                  Miscellaneous Commands.
+                                                             (line 2254)
+* OUTPUT_FORMAT(BFDNAME):                Format Commands.    (line 2179)
+* OVERLAY:                               Overlay Description.
+                                                             (line 3101)
+* overlays:                              Overlay Description.
+                                                             (line 3101)
+* partial link:                          Options.            (line  550)
+* PHDRS:                                 PHDRS.              (line 3293)
+* PHDRS <1>:                             PHDRS.              (line 3348)
+* PIC_VENEER:                            M68HC11/68HC12.     (line 4180)
+* position independent executables:      Options.            (line 1085)
+* PowerPC ELF32 options:                 PowerPC ELF32.      (line 4376)
+* PowerPC GOT:                           PowerPC ELF32.      (line 4393)
+* PowerPC long branches:                 PowerPC ELF32.      (line 4369)
+* PowerPC PLT:                           PowerPC ELF32.      (line 4376)
+* PowerPC stub symbols:                  PowerPC ELF32.      (line 4407)
+* PowerPC TLS optimization:              PowerPC ELF32.      (line 4411)
+* PowerPC64 dot symbols:                 PowerPC64 ELF64.    (line 4446)
+* PowerPC64 ELF64 options:               PowerPC64 ELF64.    (line 4419)
+* PowerPC64 multi-TOC:                   PowerPC64 ELF64.    (line 4487)
+* PowerPC64 OPD optimization:            PowerPC64 ELF64.    (line 4461)
+* PowerPC64 OPD spacing:                 PowerPC64 ELF64.    (line 4467)
+* PowerPC64 stub grouping:               PowerPC64 ELF64.    (line 4419)
+* PowerPC64 stub symbols:                PowerPC64 ELF64.    (line 4442)
+* PowerPC64 TLS optimization:            PowerPC64 ELF64.    (line 4456)
+* PowerPC64 TOC optimization:            PowerPC64 ELF64.    (line 4473)
+* precedence in expressions:             Operators.          (line 3773)
+* prevent unnecessary loading:           Output Section Type.
+                                                             (line 2969)
+* program headers:                       PHDRS.              (line 3293)
+* program headers and sections:          Output Section Phdr.
+                                                             (line 3065)
+* program headers, not enough room:      Builtin Functions.  (line 4040)
+* program segments:                      PHDRS.              (line 3293)
+* PROVIDE:                               PROVIDE.            (line 2321)
+* PROVIDE_HIDDEN:                        PROVIDE_HIDDEN.     (line 2350)
+* 'PUBLIC' (MRI):                        MRI.                (line 5461)
+* QUAD(EXPRESSION):                      Output Section Data.
+                                                             (line 2788)
+* quoted symbol names:                   Symbols.            (line 3620)
+* read-only text:                        Options.            (line  506)
+* read/write from cmd line:              Options.            (line  511)
+* regions of memory:                     MEMORY.             (line 3196)
+* relative expressions:                  Expression Section. (line 3828)
+* relaxing addressing modes:             Options.            (line 1099)
+* relaxing on H8/300:                    H8/300.             (line 4081)
+* relaxing on i960:                      i960.               (line 4138)
+* relaxing on M68HC11:                   M68HC11/68HC12.     (line 4155)
+* relaxing on Xtensa:                    Xtensa.             (line 4977)
+* relocatable and absolute symbols:      Expression Section. (line 3828)
+* relocatable output:                    Options.            (line  550)
+* removing sections:                     Output Section Discarding.
+                                                             (line 2917)
+* reporting bugs in 'ld':                Reporting Bugs.     (line 5188)
+* requirements for BFD:                  BFD.                (line 5029)
+* retain relocations in final executable: Options.           (line  537)
+* retaining specified symbols:           Options.            (line 1120)
+* ROM initialized data:                  Output Section LMA. (line 3003)
+* round up expression:                   Builtin Functions.  (line 3890)
+* round up location counter:             Builtin Functions.  (line 3890)
+* runtime library name:                  Options.            (line  389)
+* runtime library search path:           Options.            (line 1134)
+* runtime pseudo-relocation:             WIN32.              (line 4749)
+* scaled integers:                       Constants.          (line 3610)
+* scommon section:                       Input Section Common.
+                                                             (line 2735)
+* script files:                          Options.            (line  592)
+* script files <1>:                      Options.            (line  601)
+* scripts:                               Scripts.            (line 1908)
+* search directory, from cmd line:       Options.            (line  440)
+* search path in linker script:          File Commands.      (line 2158)
+* SEARCH_DIR(PATH):                      File Commands.      (line 2158)
+* 'SECT' (MRI):                          MRI.                (line 5467)
+* section address:                       Output Section Address.
+                                                             (line 2522)
+* section address in expression:         Builtin Functions.  (line 3871)
+* section alignment:                     Builtin Functions.  (line 3915)
+* section alignment, warnings on:        Options.            (line 1413)
+* section data:                          Output Section Data.
+                                                             (line 2788)
+* section fill pattern:                  Output Section Fill.
+                                                             (line 3079)
+* section load address:                  Output Section LMA. (line 2983)
+* section load address in expression:    Builtin Functions.  (line 3991)
+* section name:                          Output Section Name.
+                                                             (line 2506)
+* section name wildcard patterns:        Input Section Wildcards.
+                                                             (line 2616)
+* section size:                          Builtin Functions.  (line 4019)
+* section, assigning to memory region:   Output Section Region.
+                                                             (line 3055)
+* section, assigning to program header:  Output Section Phdr.
+                                                             (line 3065)
+* SECTIONS:                              SECTIONS.           (line 2443)
+* sections, discarding:                  Output Section Discarding.
+                                                             (line 2917)
+* segment origins, cmd line:             Options.            (line 1274)
+* segments, ELF:                         PHDRS.              (line 3293)
+* SEGMENT_START(SEGMENT, DEFAULT):       Builtin Functions.  (line 4011)
+* shared libraries:                      Options.            (line 1206)
+* SHORT(EXPRESSION):                     Output Section Data.
+                                                             (line 2788)
+* SIZEOF(SECTION):                       Builtin Functions.  (line 4019)
+* SIZEOF_HEADERS:                        Builtin Functions.  (line 4035)
+* small common symbols:                  Input Section Common.
+                                                             (line 2735)
+* SORT:                                  Input Section Wildcards.
+                                                             (line 2665)
+* SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT:                     Input Section Wildcards.
+                                                             (line 2661)
+* SORT_BY_NAME:                          Input Section Wildcards.
+                                                             (line 2653)
+* SPU:                                   SPU ELF.            (line 4524)
+* SPU <1>:                               SPU ELF.            (line 4541)
+* SPU ELF options:                       SPU ELF.            (line 4501)
+* SPU extra overlay stubs:               SPU ELF.            (line 4514)
+* SPU local store size:                  SPU ELF.            (line 4519)
+* SPU overlay stub symbols:              SPU ELF.            (line 4510)
+* SPU overlays:                          SPU ELF.            (line 4504)
+* SPU plugins:                           SPU ELF.            (line 4501)
+* SQUAD(EXPRESSION):                     Output Section Data.
+                                                             (line 2788)
+* stack size:                            Options.            (line 1839)
+* standard Unix system:                  Options.            (line  131)
+* start of execution:                    Entry Point.        (line 2076)
+* STARTUP(FILENAME):                     File Commands.      (line 2166)
+* strip all symbols:                     Options.            (line  579)
+* strip debugger symbols:                Options.            (line  583)
+* stripping all but some symbols:        Options.            (line 1120)
+* SUBALIGN(SUBSECTION_ALIGN):            Forced Input Alignment.
+                                                             (line 3048)
+* suffixes for integers:                 Constants.          (line 3610)
+* symbol defaults:                       Builtin Functions.  (line 3971)
+* symbol definition, scripts:            Assignments.        (line 2262)
+* symbol names:                          Symbols.            (line 3620)
+* symbol tracing:                        Options.            (line  657)
+* symbol versions:                       VERSION.            (line 3424)
+* symbol-only input:                     Options.            (line  568)
+* symbols, from command line:            Options.            (line  915)
+* symbols, relocatable and absolute:     Expression Section. (line 3828)
+* symbols, retaining selectively:        Options.            (line 1120)
+* synthesizing linker:                   Options.            (line 1099)
+* synthesizing on H8/300:                H8/300.             (line 4086)
+* TARGET(BFDNAME):                       Format Commands.    (line 2204)
+* TARGET1:                               ARM.                (line 4209)
+* TARGET2:                               ARM.                (line 4214)
+* thumb entry point:                     ARM.                (line 4199)
+* TI COFF versions:                      TI COFF.            (line 4554)
+* traditional format:                    Options.            (line 1253)
+* trampoline generation on M68HC11:      M68HC11/68HC12.     (line 4173)
+* trampoline generation on M68HC12:      M68HC11/68HC12.     (line 4173)
+* unallocated address, next:             Builtin Functions.  (line 4002)
+* undefined symbol:                      Options.            (line  614)
+* undefined symbol in linker script:     Miscellaneous Commands.
+                                                             (line 2221)
+* undefined symbols, warnings on:        Options.            (line 1409)
+* uninitialized data placement:          Input Section Common.
+                                                             (line 2721)
+* unspecified memory:                    Output Section Data.
+                                                             (line 2821)
+* usage:                                 Options.            (line  977)
+* USE_BLX:                               ARM.                (line 4237)
+* using a DEF file:                      WIN32.              (line 4596)
+* using auto-export functionality:       WIN32.              (line 4579)
+* Using decorations:                     WIN32.              (line 4695)
+* variables, defining:                   Assignments.        (line 2262)
+* verbose:                               Options.            (line 1309)
+* version:                               Options.            (line  641)
+* version script:                        VERSION.            (line 3424)
+* version script, symbol versions:       Options.            (line 1315)
+* VERSION {script text}:                 VERSION.            (line 3424)
+* versions of symbols:                   VERSION.            (line 3424)
+* VFP11_DENORM_FIX:                      ARM.                (line 4246)
+* warnings, on combining symbols:        Options.            (line 1322)
+* warnings, on section alignment:        Options.            (line 1413)
+* warnings, on undefined symbols:        Options.            (line 1409)
+* weak externals:                        WIN32.              (line 4938)
+* what is this?:                         Overview.           (line  100)
+* wildcard file name patterns:           Input Section Wildcards.
+                                                             (line 2616)
+* Xtensa options:                        Xtensa.             (line 5005)
+* Xtensa processors:                     Xtensa.             (line 4956)
+